CONTENTS.

On the Formation of a Collection of ee in Ceylon.—

By Enpear L. Layarp, Esq. viel

On Buddhism : Patta Kamma, or the present result of Virtuous

Conduct.—By the Rev. D. J. GoGERLY ...

The Rural Economy of the Sinhalese (more particularly with

reference to the District of Sabaragamuwa), with some

account of their Superstitions.—By R. E. Lewis, Esq...

Sketches in the Natural ey of Ceylon.—By Epaar L.

LayarD, Esq. Sas 500

A Catalogue of Books in the Tamil Language, with the Names

of the Authors, the Subjects, and Dates—By Simon

CasiE CHETTY, Esq. 5 AOC

‘Sketches in the Natural see of Ceylon—By Epacar L.

LAYARD, Esq.

On Ceylonite found near ee Lieut. HENDER-

SON, C.R.R.

APPENDI X.

Hints to Amateur Se —By HvuGcu Cvumine,

Ksq., F.R.S.

Proceedings of Anniversary Meeting—March 31, 1849

Books presented to and purchased by the Society

List of Members ...

Months ended July 31, 1848, with Remarks.—By A. O.

Bropvik, Esq. a ane a

Abstract of a Meteorological Rogie kept at Batticotta oe

1847 and 1848 are :

Rules of the Society

PAGE

100

107

116

117

118

121

123

ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY.

CEYLON BRANCH.

ON THE FORMATION OF A COLLECTION OF

LEPIDOPTERA IN CEYLON.

By Epvear L. Layarp, Esa.

(Read 3rd June, 1848.)

THE small progress which has hitherto been made towards a

knowledge of the Natural History of the Island, and the total

absence of all public and private collections, contrasted with

the rich and extensive field which the country affords to the

Naturalist, induce me to offer to the Society a few hints on the

formation of a collection of Lepidoptera.

The caterpillars, or larvee, of butterflies and moths, (or more

scientifically speaking, of Diurnal and Nocturnal Lepidoptera, )

may be sought for on almost every plant and shrub met in

our daily walks. Morning and evening, in a tropical country,

are their feeding times, and they may then be found making

good use of their powerful jaws, clinging to the underside or

edges of the leaves. During the heat of the day they conceal

themselves in the thickest and shadiest parts of the plant, and

remain perfectly motionless, till hunger and the cool breezes of

evening again summon them to their pleasing labours. Some

species, such as many of the grass-feeding Noctua, feed only at

night, and must then be carefully sought with a lantern ;

i A

6 JOURNAL R. A. S. (CEYLON). [ Von. Tl., Pant 1.

though some may occasionally be found by pulling up tufts of

grass, and examining the roots among which they lie concealed.

Some of the internal feeders upon the wood and pith of trees,

&c., are also active during the night, lengthening their covered

galleries, which are formed from the digested particles of their

food. The best means of capturing these is to watch the

covered way (which may sometimes be seen of several inches

in length hanging down the trunk of a tree), and, on ascertain-

ing which is the end attached to the hole in the wood, suddenly

to press the finger over it, thus stopping the return of the

inmate, who is capable of a swift retrogade movement and can

progress either way with astonishing speed. On lifting the web,

if the larvee is not visible, rest assured he is inside the stem far

out of reach. These internal feeders are most difficult to rear,

the surest method being to fasten a piece of strong gauze in

in the shape of a bag over the aperture, and watch the natural

egress of the moth. The watcher’s patience, however, may

perhaps be tried, as several of these species are three or four

years in the larvee and pupa (chrysalis) state. Nevertheless,

as itis most probable that the discovery of the larvee is owing

to the large size of its web, it will be nearly full-grown.

Some species, again, are gregarious feeders. Some of these

envelope themselves in a large mass of leaves and silk, and as

they consume the foliage around them keep adding fresh ma-

terials to their domicile. Others march out in order in a

wedge shape, stripping the leafy covering of the trees most

completely, leaving them almost, if not entirely, bare. These

larvee are termed “ processionary caterpillars,” Most of the

gregarious feeders are very common, and are easily found.

Some of them shed their hair when handled, which, entering

the uncovered skin of the face and hands, causes extreme and

long irritation.

Others, again, such as some of the Limacodes, actually sting,

their spines being sharp and furnished with a very pungent acid.

No. 4.—1848.] ON COLLECTING LEPIDOPTERA. 7

These larve are shaped somewhat like the common “ wood-

louse”’ (Oniscus) with the head and feet hidden. They spin

themselves little round or oblong hard cocoons, in which they

undergo their transformations; and the perfect fly on emerging

pushes open a, little trap door, hitherto fastened by means of a

natural gum, which is now melted by a strong acid secreted by

the moth. Ail insects which spin cocoons are furnished with

the abovenamed fluid, with the exception perhaps of some of

the Saturnia tribe, which do not close the ends of the cocoon,

but spin thick hairs over them in the shape of an “ eel pot.”

As my object in writing is the advancement of science and

to assist those who desire to collect for the purpose of investi-

gating the habits and peculiarities of insects, I would direct

the reader’s attention to the advantage, in the rearing of larve,

of ascertaining the moth or butterfly to which each belongs.

To effect this, several gauze cages should be made for the

purpose of separating the larve. The reason of this is obvious.

The larvee of many Noctua descend into the earth to effect their

final change, and the pupe being of one uniform shape and

colour, it is impossible to distinguish between them; and if all

be put in the same case, they, by coming out together, make

“confusion worse confounded.” Let each caterpillar have, if

possible, its own cage ; let it be numbered and sketched ; write

down the name of the plant on which it feeds, with the dates

of its entering into and emerging from the pupa state. These

notes will not occupy much time, and,if not valuable to the

observer, may, if properly and carefully kept, be of great

service to a scientific man.

Butterflies and the larger moths and Sphingide require a

large roomy box to expand their wings in on first emerging ;

they also require to creep with facility up the sides of the cage,

that their bodies and wings, by hanging down, may stretch and

harden. The very act of creeping upwards forces the fluids

from the body (which may be seen alternately contracting and

8 JOURNAL RB. 18. 8: (CEYLON): -(Vousi: Parr i:

expanding’) into the nervures of the wings. The common large

Saturnia, feeding on cinnamon, requires six. or eight hours to

harden it for flight.

The bottom of the breeding cage should be furnished with a

zine tray about three inches deep—zine, as it does not corrode,

is preferable to iron or tin; fine earth and rotten wood, well

mixed together, should be laid in the tray, and over this a layer

of damp moss. Into the moist earth a branch of the larva’s food

should be stuck to keep fresh ; the oftener the leaf is changed

the better ; once a day at least is absolutely necessary to obtain

fine full-grown specimens. Light and air also are required.

The cages are best swung from the ceiling by a pulley, to

facilitate the drawing up and down ; they are thus secure from

ants and rats and children’s fingers ; native servants also are too

fond of meddling. Larve may be collected from shrubs and

trees by placing a sheet or table cloth under the branches, and

beating them with a long stick, An umbrella with a hooked

handle makes a good portable substitute, and is otherwise useful.

This plan however of beating for caterpillars is attended with

much inconvenience in this country from the showers of ants

which fall from each blow. Some larve form themselves move-

able domiciles, which they never quit, except in the winged state.

These tribes consist of Ovkticus, Cryptothelea, Psyche, and the

numerous Tine; these latter are more familiarly known by

the name of “ clothes’ moths.’ The first fabricate their dwell-

ings of pieces of stick laid lengthways, and as they increase

in size they open one side of their habitaculum between two

bits of stick, and let in another of proper size and length,

which by means of their strong jaws they detach from the

plant on which they are feeding. ‘The second tribe are smaller

and more delicate, using in the fabrication of their dwellings

small pieces of leaves ana the cast skin of their own heads.

The third, more delicate still, simply weave their own silk.

These three species are the most remarkable in their natural

No. 4.—1848.] ON COLLECTING LEPIDOPTERA. 9

economy. The female is perfectly wingless (apterous), never

quitting the case in which she has passed her two previous

stages of existence. The larve of both sexes, when about to

undergo their final change, fix themselves by the apex to a

twig or leaf, and when the male emerges from his living tomh

the female has changed to a pulpy maggot, wholly differing

from the swiftly fying male. Impregnation takes place within

the case, and the female dies, becoming a mass of fine downy

silk, and eggs. The young larve are excluded from the eggs,

and immediately form their cases from the substance of their

dead mother; then dropping by hundreds from the empty case

they each eagerly seek a tender leaf, and commence their great

work of existence — eating, changing, and reproducing. Twelve

species of these have been found in Ceylon, The Zine are

unluckily too well known, and dreaded, to need any particular

mention, except that the insect collector, if not attending

strictly to the directions hereafter laid down for preserving his

specimens, will find he has made a fine collection of these

species to the loss of ail his others.

Care must be taken never to disturb a caterpillar that is

stationary—in fact, larve should never be handled if possible ;

they may always be captured by gathering the leaf on which they

are found. A stationary. larve is most likely undergoing his

“ moult’ or change of skin. This change occurs several times

in his life, and a slight squeeze would at such a period probably

prove fatal. If injured at the last change to a chrysalis, a

deformed fly will bethe result. The caterpillar ofa fine unique

moth (Ptoatoria) that I transmitted to Colombo by post from

Chilaw, received a bruise, and one of its inferior wings is per-

fectly white and clear with no scales upon it.

In this country I have observed the final change is not so

visible in its approach as in England. There, the larvee often

neglects his foodfor several days, is restless, and sickly ; here,

he eats till the last moment, and the only sign (and that not

10 JOURNAL R. A, S. (CEYLON). [ Vou. IL.) Parr L

always apparent) is the digested particles of food, instead of

being as usual disposed in beautiful and regular forms, are

humid and flaccid.

Of the pupa, little can be said as to collecting them; they

may be found in all situations. The most likely places are

behind the loose bark, and in crevices of trees, about their roots,

in holes in old walks, and among dead leaves, &. The pupe

of butterflies are usually attached to, or suspended from, or

near, the plant on which they feed. It may not perhaps be

out of place to mention here that European collectors have a

method of capturing the perfect fly which is termed ‘‘sembling.”

This consists in exposing a virgin female of some of the large

moths in a small cage in the open air; the males of the same

species will surround her prison house, and are so intent upon

their amorous chase that they may easily be captured by the

hand. By this means some of the rarest moths are taken.

Exposing an old sugar cask or basket smeared with honey, is

also a good plan; and I have taken a fine yellow underwing

(Triphena) in the toddy vessels and only there. A bright light

at night near an open window attracts many insects not

otherwise found.

Rearing Lepidoptera from the larvee and pup is doubtless

the best way to obtain fine and perfect insects, and consequently

a more valuable collection; but all insects cannot be found in

these states, from the inaccessible nature of their haunts, which

are deep jungles, lofty trees, thick bushes, and the interior of

water plants, where the larvee, by a kind and wise Providence,

have been taught to conceal themselves. Some also inhabiting

more open situations, escape the attacks of even their natural

enemies—-birds—by their exact resemblance to the branches and

leaves of trees. Many of the Geometride—“ surveyors” as they

are termed—are capable of standing erect and motionless for

hours together, like a dead twig. To the touch even they are

hard and round, owing to the amazing force of their muscles.

No. 4.—1848.| ON COLLECTING LEPIDOPTERA. 1

I will now proceed to describe the best method of capturing

the perfect fly. Nets of various forms are used by collectors at

home and abroad. Of all, I prefer the common ring or bag

net. This is made of a thin piece of rattan, bent circular, and

fastened to a handle about three and a-half or four feet long,

according to the strength of the user. The best handle is a

ground rattan, about three-quarters of an inch in diameter; this

is light, flexible, and will not break in a rough fall. The ring

should be one foot and a-half in diameter—more, if practicable

and manageable, —and a permanent fixture to the handle.

The net itself should be of some soft transparent material,

(silk gauze is best, as it least injures the down on the insect’s

wings), shaped like a bag and about the depth of the user’s arm,

to enable him to reach to the bottom and secure his capture.

The net should be fastened to the ring by a band of calico three

or four inches broad; this is a great protection to the net when

striking at an insect resting ona leaf. A good-sized collecting

box is required to secure the captured insect, and should be

made with rounded corners to prevent an awkward bruise to the

owner in case of a fall. It should open easily when held in one

hand—by a spring is preferable—leaving the other at liberty to

handle the specimen. It should also be lined at the top and

bottom with cork, or kirrilla-mulla_-a substance more fully

described hereafter —to receive the pins. For this, and other

- tropical climates, let the boxes be twice the size of those used

at home.

Thus equipped, let the collector (who should be dressed in

darkish clothes) repair to any open space in the jungle between

the hours of 7 and 10 a.m.; after that time it becomes too hot,

and the insects keep in the deep shade. Let him select an

overhanging tree, affording him shelter from the sun, and a

screen from the insects, and from thence watch his insect game

come gliding past, or hovering over some favourite flower, and

use his best efforts tocaptureit. Practice will teach this better

12 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON), [Vou. II., Part f.

than I can, except that it may not be amiss to mention that

when the insect is fairly within the net, a sudden turn of the

wrist will, by doubling the gauze over the handle, prevent its

escape. I have always observed that butterflies fear a stationary

object much less than a moving one, and will often fly within

reach of your net when standing still, although they will not

suffer you to approach them; they are quickly alarmed on being

followed, and generally fly high overhead. Butterflies delight

in alternate shade and sunshine, and will keep about the same

spot for days together, particularly in the neighbourhood of

water, by which they will settle and drink copiously, and many

insects seldom captured on the wing may be taken whilst

drinking. Jpias Glaucippe, for instance, a most rapid and wary

insect, I have seen on the flooded roads by thirty or forty at

a time, and have actually ridden over them before they rose,

when they would immediately settle again. The Polyomm ati,

and Thecla tribes should be sought for about the broad-leaved

plants upon which they fix their thrones and combat any rival

which may appear, to the great detriment of their beauty,

causing them to lose their slender tails and brilliant glossy

tints. In fact, every insect has its own localities, which can

only be learned by practice and attention to its habits. About

10 o’clock the collector may return home till 3 or 4 P.m., when

the butterfly tribes again venture forth, though he now will not

capture such fine fresh specimens as in the morning —the

butterflies always escaping from the pupa early in the morning,

the moths in the evening. However, he may make good

captures, particularly among the Hesperia or “skippers,” and

the Theclas ; and as the evening closes in, and the short Hastern

twilight comes on, he will be amply rewarded by Hesperide

and Sphingide: the former flying heavily along, the latter

darting swiftly from flower to flower, never alighting, but

dipping their spiral tongues into the dewy flower cups, and

extracting their hidden sweets. I have observed in this part

No. 4.—1848.] oN COLLECTING LEPIDOPTERA. 13

of the country (Colombo), that true Noctua are not commonly

met with onthe wing. It may be from the prevalence of the

cinnamon plant, on which few feed.

But we must now return to the collector, and instruct him

how to preserve his captured insects. For this purpose he must

have a pair of spring forceps, a setting-needle, (which is a fine

pin or needle, bent at the point, and fixed in a handle,) pins of

all thicknesses and lengths from four inches to half an inch, and

a setting-box, which should be lined with cork and be of

sufficient size to contain 80 or 100 specimens ; it should be just

deep enough to hold the insect pins, and the cork should be

half as thick again as in the store-boxes, so that when the pin

is driven home in the latter the insects’ wings may be just a

little above the surface. The box must be air-tight, and well

supplied with camphor in neat bags, for the double purpose of

killing the insects and preserving them from mites, &c.

Let him now take the specimen to be set, having previously

given it a slight squeeze under the thorax or chest, and run a

proper-sized pin through the middle of the thorax, inclining it

slightly towards the body, taking care that it is at perfect right-

angles with the wings. Having stuck it down uprightly through

the cork, let him take two pins of proper length, and stick them

in with the forceps, at’ a little distance from the base of the

inferior wings, pressing them down towards the surface of the

cork, inclining outward towards the outer angle of the superior

wings. Then, introducing the point of the setting-needle under

the wings, gently push them into the position of a butterfly

expanded upon a flower. If the long pins press the wings

sufficiently down on the cork, the roughness will keep them in

their proper place ; if not, fasten down the long pins by common

thick ones bent in two right-angles. A good substitute for the

long pius may be found in the thorns of the prickly pear, or the

inside rib of the cocoanut. leaf termed by the natives “ ilkkils.”

In this state leave them till dry, or se¢, the length of time

i4 JOURNAL BR. A. 8. (CEYLON). | Voregle, Parr #.

depending on a moist or dry season. They are then fit toremove

into the store-boxes, which like the setting-box must be made

quite air-tight, and constantly supphed with camphor ; without.

this precaution the labour of months will quickly become the

prey of mites, 7im@, and a host of other enemies. “ Kirilla-

mula”’ is, as the Sinhalese word expresses it, the root of the

Kirilla tree (Sonneratia Acida, L.) and is found about the

banks of fresh water rivers and tanks. Kalutara produces the

finest. Itis very hght, and easily receives the pin. It should

be sawn into slabs, about a-quarter or three-eighths of an inch

thick, well smoothed with sand paper and glued into the boxes,

then neatly pasted over with the thinnest and softest white

paper. The generic name of each family shonld be placed at

the commencement of the group, the specific name under each

insect. A number should also be appended, as a reference, and

a catalogue made of the name, place of capture, description

or drawing of caterpillar, and food, if known, in separate columns.

Where space is no object, several of each species should be kept,

say, for instance, two males and two females and an underside of

each; asin many cases the male and female are so dissimilar as

to be mistaken for separate species. Insects being very local,

duplicates should always be kept, to exchange with other

collectors in various parts of the country.

Nore. —Dried specimens received from correspondents may

always be re-set to the collector’s fancy by previously relaxing

them, which is effected by placing them in a covered vessel half

full of damp sand covered with a sheet of blotting paper. Some

recommend hot water instead of sand. The smaller insects will

be fit for stretching in a few hours: the larger often require from

two to three days.

When the specimens are perfectly dry, they should be touched

with a solution of corrosive sublimate and spirits of wine, not

too strong lest a white sediment be deposited.

No. 4.—1848.| ON COLLECTING LEPIDOPTERA.

Tistof Indigenous Diurnal Lepidoptera, with their Localities.

1.— Papilio.

Hahphronvar }

Polymnestor |

Pamon

PCCIOT .....0-<¢

Mutius

Polytes

Polydorus ....

Crino

Agamemnon.. |

Sarpedon......

EKpius

Dissimilis..... J

Tclenus .:.... >)

Generally

distributed.

eegcreeounend

Hurypilus .... } Interior only.

Two unnamed |

2.—Nanais.

Piexippus::... }

Chrysippus... > Ubique.

amintace .....: J

WMihissay cc .0... Kandy district.

Ag lees

3—Huplea.

ORS Feces 36 Ubique.

Prouhoe*’..5..< Southern coast

Two unnamed. Interior.

4,.—Diadema.

BoM x... 0.1 }

Lasinassa ..... } Ubique.

Auge Sal

).— ldea.

Lynceus......... Interior,

6.—Iphtas.

Ubique.

Glaucippe.......

7 7.—Preris.

150) or ae Western coast.

ARTIC! 22.5000

Severina ......

Kucharis ...... Ubique.

PTR, sc 000s «

Mamlonmay es .sc: Interior,

Four other species, one

supposed to be a fine variety

Name Give ce scent (Doubleday.)

8.— Pontia.

Nias ss sce ct. us Ubique.

9.— Callidryas.

Alemeone ...... 3)

BliMomiay i.e. S Ubique.

EV TAUGNe see tc. j

Two others unnamed.

10.— Anthocharis.

Bi wCharisy i. ce: Aripo, W.

Dansdexse2 ein. coast, plains

11.— Idmais.

One unnamed ) Chilaw,

species plains.

12.—Colias.

Three unnamed } W. coast,

species plains.

13.— Thestias.

@eovee@

_ Mariamne...... W. coast,

PITeHe’ <0 eee onse jungle.

One unnamed species.

14.— Terias.

Hecabe ..... ..... Ubique.

One unnamed... Interior, hills

15.--Hipparchia.

Wed eee uecas Ubigue.

Seven unnamed.

16.—Satyrus.

Ghents: sacks Tnterior.

One unnamed.

16 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON).

V7 == A doetas:

Tphita’....:-... ... Ubique

Me Generally

Lubentina eos distributed.

Three unnamed.

18.— Vanessa.

eaomedia....:. i)

Cardi. vec > Ubique.

ASTEFIG® ..cc0e0s J

PAW INOMG 22s csics

Orig } Jaffna,

Lemonias...... Ubique.

V uleania 3. Tete

Charonia ...... ;

One unnamed. Chilaw.

19.— Limenitis.

Aceris eeoorce

Ubique.

ane Ae ! Interior

FOCTIS csgee ss :

| generally.

Heliodora ...... Interior.

One unnamed... Ubique.

20.— Cynthia.

Southern coast

ATSINOe .224.< : :

and interior.

21. Argynuis.

Phalanta <...

Erymanthus Dong:

INI Oetey SEA Bs ee che Interior.

Two unnamed.

22.— Achea.,

NViolopprrang i si oc: Ubique

23.— Cethosia.

One unnamed... Ubique.

24,.— Hirgolis,

Womytarssvese ;

Ariaane ...... Ubique.

One unnamed.

Vorb) Parr: i

25.—Melanitis.

: here cocoa-

Undularis Where cocoa

nut trees grow.

26.—Libythia.

One unnamed...Iinterior,

27.— Hmesis.

Two unnamed.

28.— Amathusia.

One unnamed... Ubique.

29.— Charaxes.

Bernhardus ... Ubique.

Three unnamed.

30.— Minetra.

Gambrisius ... Interior

31.—FHrycina.

One unnamed... Interior.

32.—Myrina.

‘Four unnamed... Ubique.

33.— Polyommatus.

) These tribes

ce Beep ) are very

y EUS ccoesoeee generally

By Enon swe - distributed

Sixteen un- | over the

Le ead

34.— Thecela.

Hercules ...... }

INeurardiaiee sence |

Nila eoeccccresoes \ do.

RIS) eacsencicet

Epijarbas ...... |

Vulcanus...... }

Twenty-four unnamed.

30,— Loxrura.

A GYAN G ya ese Ubique

36.— Hesperia. - .

Thirty-six

unnamed

No. 4.—1848. | BUDDHISM.—PATTA KAMMA. 17

ON BUDDHISM.—PATTA KAMMA.

Or, THe Present Resutt oF Virtuous ConbDucT.

By tHe Rev. D. J. Gocerty.

(Read 4th November, 1848.)

While Bhagawa resided in Jétawana, a park belonging to

Anathapindako near Sewet, the Gahapati Anathapindako went

there, and, having worshipped Buddha, sat down at a respectful

distance. When he was seated Bhagawé said :

“ Gahapati, there are four objects difficult of attainment, yet

desirable, gratifying and productive of pleasure, The first of

these is the attainment of wealth in conjunction with piety.

The second is, havmg obtained wealth in conjunction with

piety, to be applauded by relatives and judicious friends. The

third is, having obtained wealth in conjunction with piety,

and being applauded by judicious friends, to live long in

the enjoyment of health. The fourth is, having obtained

wealth in conjunction with piety, having been applauded by

relatives and judicious friends, and having lived long in the

enjoyment of health, to obtain, upon the dissolution of the frame

by death, a heavenly state, where all is enjoyment. These,

Gahapati, are the four objects, difficult of attainment, yet

desirable, gratifying and productive of pleasure.

“ For the attainment of these objects four things are necessary.

The being endued with faith, with virtue, with liberality, and

with wisdom.

. What is the being endued with Faith? A disciple of Buddha

has acorrect creed: he believes that Bhagawa is immaculate,

that he is the supreme Buddha, perfect in wisdom and excellent

in conduct ; that he is acquainted with the state of all worlds ;

is the subjector of men and their infallible guide ; the preceptor

18 JOURNAL R. A. S. (CEYLON). [ Vou. IL, Parr I.

of Gods and men, the wise, the blessed one. This belief

constitutes the being endued with faith. |

‘What is the being endued with Virtue? A disciple of

Buddha akstains from destroying life, from stealing, from illicit

intercourse with females, from lying, and from inebriating

liquors, which cause irreligion. These coustitute the being

endued with virtue.

‘* What is the being endued with Liberality ? The disciple of

Buddha delights in almsgiving, gives with clean hands and with ©

a benevolent mind, seeks opportunities for liberality, and lives

free from the defiling influence of avarice. ‘This constitutes

the being endued with liberality.

‘‘ What is the being endued with Wisdom? He who is avari-

cious, covetous, and subject, to hardness of heart, does that which

is wrong, and neglects that which is right, and thus forfeits both

his reputation and happiness. He whois malicious, or is sloth-

fuland indolent, or of a haughty and irritable character, or whose

mind is perplexed with religious doubts, does that which is

wrong and neglects that which is right, and thus forfeits both

his reputation and happiness. The disciple of Buddha, knowing

that these dispositions pollute the soul, banishes from his mind

avarice, maliciousness, sloth, indolence, irritability, and religious

doubts : this disciple of Buddha is wise, prudent and intelligent.

This constitutes the being endued with wisdom.

‘¢ These are the things necessary for obtaining the four objects

difficult of attainment, yet desirable, gratifying, and productive

of pleasure. |

“Such a disciple of Buddha, through the wealth he has

honestly and justly acquired by manly vigor, by strength of arm

and by laborious efforts, secures four advantages. The comfort

and happiness of himself, of his family, of his domestics, and of

his friends and connections,is provided for. This is the first

advantage he derives from his well-employed wealth. If there

be any losses from fire, from inundations, from oppressive rulers,

No. 4.—1848.] BUDDHISM.—PaATYA KAMMA. 19

from thieves, from untoward events, or from family circumstances,

the disciple of Buddha, through the wealth he has thus honestly

and justly acquired, secures himself, under these circumstances of

loss, from danger, and is preserved from suffering. This is the

second advantage he derives from his wisely-employed wealth.

Furthermore, the disciple of Buddha, by the wealth he has thus

honestly and justly acquired, is enabled to present the necessary

gifts to relatives, to sages and Brahmins, in honor of deceased

ancestors, to princes and to the gods. ‘This is the third advan-

tage he derives from his wisely-employed wealth. Again, the

disciple of Buddha, by the wealth he has justly and honestly

acquired, ministers to those holy men, Priests and Brahmins, who,

abstaining from concupiscence, live peaceably and virtuously,

and by the exercise of self control subdue and extinguish their

passions. By their means he provides for himself future

happiness, a residence in one of the heavens, continued pleasure

and celestial enjoyments. ‘This is the fourth advantage he

derives from his wisely-employed weaith.

“‘ Ifa person expend his wealth so as to produce these advan-

tages, his property has not been thrown away, but has produced

its appropriate results, and has been enjoyed judiciously. He

will be able to reflect: I have supported those whom it was my

duty to maintain; I have been freed from disasters, have

presented the five principal donations, and bestowed gifts which

will produce advantages in a future state. I have ministered

to the necessities of placid, holy and virtuous men, and have

accomplished all the objects a wise and judicious layman could

wish to effect through the possession of wealth, ven in this

world I am applauded by wise men, who are established in

virtue, and who investigate my conduct, and in a future state

I shall have the enjoyment of celestial pleasure. ”

Upon hearing this, the Gahapati Anathapindako being much

delighted and edified with the discourse of Bhagawa, rose from

his seat, and, having worshipped him, departed.

20 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON). [| Vou. IT., Parr I.

A Discourse To some INHABITANTS OF WERANJA.

Thus I heard. On one occasion Bhagawa resided near Sewet

ina monastery founded by Andthapindiko at Jétawana. Some

Brahmins and cultivators of Wéranja having arrived at Sewet

on business, heard respecting Bhagawa that the Samana Gdtamo

of the Sdkya race had left his Sdakya connections, and retired

from secular life, and that he was then residing near Sewet in

the monastery founded by Anathapindiko at Jétawana. They

also heard that the voice of his fame had ascended, proclaiming

that this illustrious person is perfectly holy, all-wise, skilled in

all science, unimpeachable in conduct, acquainted with all

existing objects. the supreme director and controller of men,

the preceptor of all beings human and divine, the Buddha, the

Illustrious One. He, by his own inherent wisdom, has fully

ascertained and developed the nature of the universe, including

the gods, Mérayas, Brahmas, Sages,and Brahmins, and the

assemblage of princes and people. He makes known his

doctrines, excellent in their principles, excellent in their develop-

ment, and excellent in their final results, replete with instruction

and eloquence, and enforces a completely perfect and immaculate

course of virtuous conduct. Itis highly desirable to have an

interview with so eminently holy a person.

The Brahmins and cultivators of Wéranja accordingly went

to the residence of Bhagawé. Some of them worshipped him

and sat down; others entered previously into pleasing conver-

sation with him; some, placing their joined hands to their

foreheads, bowed revereutly; some announced their names and

family connections, and others sat down silently. When they

were seated they said : “ What is the reason, Gotamo, and what

is the cause, why some beings upon the dissolution of the

system by death are reproduced in hell, the abode of wretched-

ness, misery, and continued anguish; and why others are

reproduced in the heavenly world the abode of happiness ?”’

ee eS ee ee

ee ee

No. 4.—1848.] BUuDDHISM.—PATTA KAMMA. 21

They replied: “Excellent Gotama, we do not distinctly

understand the meaning of what has been thus succinctly and

generally declared. Will the excellent Gotamo explain that

which has been thus declared, so that we may clearly under-

stand it?”

“Twillexplainit. Cultivators, listen and carefully consider.”

_ The Brahmins and cultivators of Weranja replied: “ Do

so, Gotama.”’

Bhagawa accordingly said: ‘There are three kinds of vice

and profligacy in action, four kinds in speech, and three in the

dispositions of the mind.

“What, cultivators, are the three kinds of vice and proflicacy

in action? A man is a destroyer of animal life, cruel, bloody-

handed, constantly tormenting and destroying, and unkind to all

around him. Or he isa thief, taking the property of others,

whether it be deposited in an inhabited or uninhabited place,

appropriating to himself, with a dishonest intent, property which

is not given to him. Or he is dissolute in his conduct with

females, having illicit intercoarse with such as are under the

guardianship of a mother, of a father, of a brother, of a sister, or —

of relatives, or who may have a husband or be a ward of the

Crown, or contracted to a man by having only a flower garland

thrown over her person. Such, cultivators, are the three kinds

of vice and profligacy connected with the body.

“ What are the four kinds of vice and profligacy in speech ?

A man, cultivators, is a har. He is summoned to give evidence

in a court of justice, or in the presence of his attendants and

relatives, or before a general assembly, or in the king’s palace;

and when it is said to him—‘O man! speak that which you

know, he says ‘I know,’ concerning that of which he is ignorant ;

‘I do not know,’ concerning that with which he is acquainted ;

“I saw,’ concerning that which he did not see; and ‘I saw not,’

concerning that which he did see; and thus, whether to benefit

himself or others, or in consequence of being bribed, he

; C

22 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON). [Vou II, Parti. ©

becomes a wilful liar. Or a man is a calumniator, mentioning

in one place what he has heard in another, in order that he

may cause dissension; he introduces divisions among those

who were peaceable, and prevents the reconciliation of opposing

parties ; he is quarrelsome, delights in contests and disputa-

tions, and by his words stirs up animosity. Or a man is

intemperate in speech, using contumacious, harsh, irritating

and contemptuous language, producing disquietude and anger.

Or he is frivolous in discourse: he speaks unseasonably, affirms

things which are incorrect and contrary to virtue and propriety ;

his words are unworthy of regard, ill-timed, injudicious,

unguarded and unedifying. These, cultivators, are the four

kinds of vicious and profligate discourse.

“What are the kinds of mental vice and profligacy? A man,

cultivators, is exceeding covetous, desiring that which belongs

to others, thinking —‘ Oh that I could obtain possession of that

man’s property!’ Or he is a malicious and ill-disposed man,

wishing —‘ May that person be tormented, may he be killed or

die, or come to ruin, or be reduced to abject poverty!’ Or heis .

heretical and heterodox: he affirms that there is no advantage

from alms-giving, offerings, and sacrifices; that there are no

future good or evil results of men’s actions, no causes of present

or future birth, or for having a specific father and mother ; that

there are no beings who have mature existence without the

intervention of birth and childhood. That there are no sages

and holy men, who by their own wisdom have ascertained and

teach the nature of this and of other worlds. These, cultivators, —

are the three kinds of mental vice and profligacy. In conse-—

quence of such a vicious and profligate life, some beings upon

the dissolution of the system by death are reproduced in hell,

the abode of wretchedness, misery, and continued anguish. |

“ There are, also, cultivators, three kinds of holyand virtuous —

‘conduct, four kinds of holy and virtuous speech, and three kinds

of holy and virtuous thoughts. What are the three kinds of

No. 4.—1848,] BUDDHISM.—PATTA KAMMA. 23

_holy and virtuous conduct? A man, cultivators, abstains from

taking away animal life, lays aside the cudgel and the sword,

and is gentle, ashamed of cruelty, and compassionate to all

beings. He also abstains from taking that which does not

belong to him, and does not with a dishonest intent appropriate

to his own use the property of others, whether it be deposited

in an inhabited or uninhabited place. He is chaste in his

conduct, and abstains from illicit intercourse with females who

are under the guardianship of a mother, a father, a brother, a

sister, or of relatives, or who has a husband, or isa ward of the

Crown, or contracted to a man by even throwing a garland over

her person. These, cultivators, are the three kinds of virtuous

conduct.

“ What are the four kinds of holy and virtuous speech? A

man, cultivators, abstains from lying and speaks the truth.

When brought to give his testimony in a court, or among his

attendants and relatives, or beforea general assembly, or in the

king’s palace, and it is said ‘O man! speak what you know,’

he says concerning that of which he is ignorant, ‘I do not know;’

concerning that with which he is acquainted, he says ‘I know ;’

relative to that which he has seen, he states ‘I saw it ;’ and con-

cerning that which he has not seen, he replies ‘I have not seen

it; and thus he does not speak a wilful lie to benefit either

himself or others or on account of any bribe. He also abstains

from calumny and lives without slandering others. He does.

not, in order to promote divisions, detail in one place that which —

he has heard in another, but is a reconciler of differences and a

strengthener of friendships: he lives in peace, delights in kind

feelings, rejoices in union, and his conversation tends to promote

harmony. Healso abstains from irritating language and con-

tumacious expressions; his words are free from asperity, pleasing

to the ear, affectionate, soothing, gentle, and affording general

satisfaction aud pleasure. He also abstains from frivolous ©

discourse; his language is suitable to the occasion, true,

(4 JOURNAL R. A, 8. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL, Part I.

instructive, inculcating virtue and true knowledge, and being

reasonable, judicious, perspicuous, and edifying, is worthy of

being treasured in the mind. ‘These, Culbivaiees, are the: four

kinds of holy and virtuous speech.

“What are the three kinds of mental holiness and virtue?

A man, cultivators, is not covetous, and does not desire the

_ property of others, thinking ‘O that it were mine!’ He is not

_ malignant, but with a sincere mind desires that others may be

_free from angry passions, that they may be free from suffering

and distress, and be able to maintain themselves in comfort.

He is orthodox, having correct religious views. He acknow- ©

ledges that there are meritorious gifts, offerings and sacrifices ;

that there will be future good and evil results of men’s

conduct; that there are causes for existence in this and in

other worlds for having a specific father and mother ; that there

are beings mature in form without the intervention of birth or

childhood ; that there are sages and holy men placid and estab-

lished in virtue, who by their own wisdom have ascertained

and declared the nature of the present world and of other states

of being. These are the three kinds of mental virtue and holi-

ness. In consequence, cultivators, of this holy and virtuous

life some beings, upon the dissolution of the system by death,

are reproduced in the happy and heavenly worlds.

“Tf, cultivators, a holy and virtuous man experiences a desire

in his mind, ‘Oh that upon the termination of my present

existence by death I may be born of an opulent Khattiya —

family!’ and the event takes place that after the termination of —

the present life he is born of a rich family of the Khattiya tribe, _

the reason is that he was for that purpose sufficiently holy and

virtuous. [The same is literally repeated respecting the

Brahminical and cultivating classes: the heavenly worlds; and

the Rupa and Artpa worlds.| If, cultivators, a holy and

_yirtuous man experience a desire in his mind, ‘Oh that bythe —

passions becoming extinct, I may know and fully ascertain for ©

No. 4.—1848.] BUDDHISM.—-PATTA KAMA. 25

myself, in the present state of being, the nature of the freedom —

of wisdom, consisting in a deliverance of the mind from the

influence of desire!’ the event takes place; and if by the passions ©

becoming extinct, he, in the present state of existence, knows,

and fully ascertains for himself, the nature of the Freedom of

Wisdom, consisting in a deliverance of the mind from the

influence of desire, the reason is that he was for that purpose

sufficiently holy and virtuous.”

When he had thus spoken, the Brahmins and cultivators

of Weranja replied: ‘‘ Excellent, O Gotama, most excellent. <As

though that which was overturned were placed erect ; as though

the covering were removed from a concealed object ; as though

a wanderer were directed to the right path, or as though a

brightly shining lamp were brought into adark place rendering

all things visible ; so has Gotama, in various modes, made known

his doctrine. We take refuge in Gotama, in his doctrines and

in his priests. Receive us, Gotama, as disciples. From this

day to the end of our lives we take refuge in Gotama.”’

MAHA DHAMMA SAMADANA SUTTAN.

THe LARGER DiscoURSE GN THE RESULTS OF ConDuUcT.

When Bhagawaé was residing near Sewet, in the monastery

founded by Anathapindika at Jétawana, he called his priests,

saying “ Opriests.” The priests replied, “Sire;”’ when Bhagaw4

said: “There are many persons, priests, whose desires, wishes,

and thoughts are, ‘Happy would it be if the things which are

undesirable, disagreeable, and unpleasant were removed, and

objects desirable, agreeable, and pleasant were abundantly

increased.’ The persons, priests, who have this wish and desire,

and who k hold pis opinion, experience an increase of undesirable

26 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON). [Vox. IL, Parr I.

and unpleasant circumstances and a loss of the things which are

desirable, agreeable, and pleasant. Do you, priests, understand

the reason of this?” :

“Bhagawa, Sire, is our teacher, our guide, our director.

Bhagawa, declare the doctrine, and the priests, hearing the

words of Bhagawa, will receive the instruction.

“Tf so, priests, hearand attentively consider; I will declare it.”

The priests replied: ‘‘ Do so, Sire.”

Upon which Bhagawé said :—‘‘ The unlearned and sensual

man, being adisregarderof Rahats, ignorant of their doctrines,

and disobeying their precepts; being adisregarder of holy men,

ignorant of their doctrines, and disobeying their precepts,

knows neither what he ought to do nor what he ought to

leave undone; what to regard nor’ what to disregard; and

accordingly engages in that which he ought to avoid, and

neglects that in which he ought to be engaged ; regards that

which he ought to disregard, and disregards that which he

ought to regard, and by acting in this way brings increasingly

upon himself that which is undesirable, disagreeable, and un-

pleasant ; and fails to obtain the things which are desirable,

agreeable, and pleasant. The cause of this is his being unwise.

‘‘But, priests, the learned and eminent disciple of Buddha,

being a regarder of Rahats, acquainted with their doctrines —

and obedient to their precepts; being a regarder of good men,

acquainted with their doctrines, and obedient to their precepts,

understands what he ought to do, and what he ought to leave

undone; what he ought to regard and what to disregard ; and

accordingly does what he ought to do, and leaves taat undone

which he ought not to do; and by acting thus he avoids the

things which are undesirable, disagreeable, and unpleasant, and

obtains abundantly those which are desirable, agreeable, and

pleasant. The cause of this is his being wise.

‘There are, priests, four classes of conduct causative of

events: namely, that which produces present sufferings and

No. 4.—1848.| BUDDHISM.—PATTA KAMMA. 27

future painful results ; that which produces present enjoyment

and painful results; that which produces present sorrow and

future happy results; and that which puoeicas present enjoy-

ment and future happiness.

“The unwise and ignorant do not distinctly understand the

line of conduct: which produces present pain and future sorrow ;

in consequence of which ignorance, instead of forsaking that line

of conduct they follow it, and by so doing they bring increasingly

upon themself things undesirable, disagreeable, and unpleasant,

and fail to obtain those which are desirable, agreeable, and

pleasant. The reason of which is that these are the results

of ignorance.

©The unwise and ignorant do not fleeiienly know what is the

line of conduct which, producing present enjoyment, leads to

painful results, in consequence of which ignorance they do not

forsake that line of conduct, but pursue it, and thus bring

increasingly upon themselves things which are undesirable, |

disagreeable, and unpleasant, and fail to obtain those which are ©

desirable, agreeable, and pleasant. The reason of which is

that these are the results of ignorance.

‘The wise and learned distinctly understand the line of

conduct, which, though painful at present, produces happy

results ; and in consequence of that knowledge and learning

pursue that line of conduct, and do not forsake it, and thus avoid

those things whichare undesirable, disagreeable, and unpleasant,

and increasingly obtain those which are agreeable, pleasant, and

desirable. The reason of which is that these are the results of

wisdom.

“‘ What, priests, 1s tat line of conduct which produces present.

pain and future sorrow? There are some persons who, enduring

sorrow and distress, are destroyers of animal life, or who are

thieves, or lewd, or liars, or slanderers, or revilers, or foolish

babblers, or covetous, or malignant, or heterodox, and who in

consequence ef this conduct have in the present world to endure

28 JOURNAL RB. A. S. (ceyton). [Vou. IL, Part I.

pain and anguish ; and who, upon the dissolution of the system,

are after death reproduced in hell, the abode of wretchedness,

misery, and continued anguish. This, priests, is the line of

conduct which produces present pain and future sorrow.

“What is that line of conduct, priests, which affords present

gratification but produces future misery? Wome persons in

the enjoyment of pleasure and delight are destroyers of animal

life, thieves, lewd, liars, slanderers, revilers, foolish babbiers,

covetous, malignant, heterodox, and who from these practices

experience pleasure and gratification ; but upon the dissolution

of the system they are, after death, reproduced in hell, the abode

of wretchedness, misery, and continued anguish. This, priests,

is the line of conduct, which affords present gratification, but

produces future misery.

“What, priests, is that line of conduct which, although at

present painful, produces happy results? Some persons, priests,

although enduring pain and disquietude, abstain from destroying

animal life, from dishonesty, from lewdness, from lies, from

slander, from reviling, from vain babbling, from covetousness,

from malignancy and from heterodoxy, and who in consequence

of abstaining from these have to endure pain and disquietude ;

but upon the dissolution of the system they will, after death,

be reproduced ina happy heavenly world. This, priests, is the

line of conduct which produces present pain, but leads to future

happy results.

“What, priests, is that line of conduct which gives present

pleasure and leads to future happiness? Some persons, priests,

being happy and contented, abstain from destroying animal life,

from dishonesty, from lewdness, from lies, from slanders, from

reviling, from foolish babbling, from covetousness, from malig-

nancy and from heterodoxy ; and who, in consequence of abstain-

ing from these things, are happy and contented in the present

world, and upon the dissolution of the system they will, after —

death, be reproducedin a happy heavenly world. ‘This, priests,

No. 4.—1848.] | BUDDHISM.—PATTA KAMMA, 29

) is that line of conduct which gives present pleasure and leads

to future happiness.

“ These, priests, are the four classes of conduct causative of

events, and may be thus exemplified:—If a bitter gourd be

poisoned, and a man come who loves life and would avoid death,

who wishes for pleasure and is averse to pain, and it be said to

him: ‘O man! this bitter gourd is poisoned; if you desire it,

you may eat it, but it is unpleasant in colour, in odour, and in

_taste, and will either cause death or mortal anguish.’ If he,

disregarding this, instead of rejecting it, should eat of it, he will

have no gratification from its colour, its taste, or its smell, but

will either die or suffer excruciating pain. To this, priests,

| I compare the line of conduct which produces sien pan and

| future suffering.

“ Or, priests, if there be a golden goblet, filled with spark-

ling, fragrant, and exquisitely flavored wine, yet mingled with

| “poison, and a man come desirous of life and unwilling to die,

attached to pleasure and averse to pain, and it is said to him,

-©0 man! the wine in this chalice is of a beautiful colour, fra-

grant, and of exquisite flavor, but poison is mingled with it.

Drink of it if you will ; but although you will be gratified with its

colour, its fragrance, and its flavor, you will lose your life or

endure mortal anguish.’ If he, disregarding this, should not

reject the cup, but drink its contents, although gratified with

its colour, its fragrance, and its flavor, he will either lose his

life or endure mortal anguish. To this, priests, I compare

the line of conduct which yields present pleasure, but produces

future misery.

“Tf, priests, there be cow’s urine, impregnated with various

medicaments, and a man with jaundice come, and it be said to

him, ‘O man! this cow’s urine is impregnated with powerful

medicinal properties; drink it if you will. It is diseusting to

the eye, to the taste, and to the smell, but it will produce good

effects.’ He, considering this, does not reject the remedy, but

30 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr I.

drinks, and although it disgusts his sight, his smell, and his

taste, he becomes cured. To this, priests, I compare the line

of conduct which gives present pain but produces future happi-

ness. : :

“Tf, priests, there be a mixture of curds, honey, clarified

butter, and sugar, and a man with dysentery come, and it is

said to him, ‘ O man! this is a mixture of curds, honey, clarified

butter and sugar ; take it if you will. It is pleasing to the

sight, to the taste and to the smell, and after taking it you will

be better.’ He, considering this, does not reject the medicament,

but takes it, his sight, taste, and smell are gratified, and upon

using it he is benefited. To this, priests, 1 compare that line

of conduct which produces present pleasure and future enjoy-

- ment.

‘¢ As, priests, during the sultry weather in the last month of

the year, when the atmosphere is free from clouds, the sun, rising

above the horizon, dispels the deep shades of night and shines,

irradiating all around with its splendor; even so, priests, the

doctrine of the line of conduct producing present pleasure and

future happiness sheds its lustre, its refulgence, and its splen-

dor around, dispelling the controversial darkness of multitudes

of Samanas and Brahmins.”

When Bhagawaé had thus spoken, the priests were much

edified by the discourse.

No. 4.—1848.] sINHALESE RURAL ECONOMY. 31

THE RURAL ECONOMY OF THE SINHALESE,

(MORE PARTICULARLY WITH REFERENCE TO THE

DISTRICT OF SABARAGAMUWA), WITH SOME

ACCOUNT OF THEIR SUPERSTITIONS. —

By R. E. Lewis, Esq.

(Read 4th November, 1848.)

THE prosperity of a country without manufacturing pre-

eminence, and wanting in commercial advantages, will natur-

ally be tested by its adaptation for agricultural pursuits, and

the industry and skill displayed by its inhabitants in cultivat-

ing the earth.

Ceylon, as the country of the Sinhalese, is not a commercial

country even at its principal port, Colombo: The number of

natives engaged in trade is comparatively few,—the Chetties

(merchants of India) and Moormen carrying on the far greater

part of the intermediate trade between the European importer

and the consumer, these classes aiso being the chief importers

of grain and cloth from India,

The chief pursuit of the Sinhalese is undoubtedly agricul-

ture, though it would appear from the large importation of

grain, equal in value to £460,000 annually, that their skill and

industry is upon the most limited scale. Making every allow-

ance for the influx of a large immigrant population of Malabars

from India, to cultivate the coffee estates which have been

planted by Europeans within the last eight years, it is yet well

known and proved by the importations previous to that date,

that the rice required for their own consumption has been

partially supplied from other countries. The population is also

very thinly scattered, many fine tracts of country being wholly

uninhabited, and amounts to about one million and a half of

32 JOURNAL R. A. S. (CEYLON). [Vot. I., Parr I.

people, or about 59 persons to the square mile. From these

facts we draw the conclusion, that either the soil is so

exceedingly barren as only to yield a precarious crop under the

greatest care and pains bestowed on its cultivation: that the

quantity of land available for cultivation is exceedingly limited

compared with the population : or that the cultivation is carried

on in an unskilful and slothful manner. Without doubt all

these causes exist, more or less, and operate to restrict the

agriculture of this people, varying in degree in different parts

of the country.

In the absence of communication by roads, and the nature

of their cultivations chiefly restricting them to inhabit secluded

valleys, it is not surprising that their agriculture should be

carried on in the same rude and primitive manner as it was in

past ages, apparently unimproved either in the manner of work-

ing the ground or in the implements used for the purpose.

Their few wants being so easily supplied, there has been an

absence of every inducement to increased and improved tillage;

whilst their superstitious observances respecting times and

seasons, handed down to them from a remote period, have had

their effect in tying them down to the customs of their fore-

fathers.

In considering the circumstances which have combined to

keep the agriculture of the Sinhalese in its original primitive

form, the taxation of paddy lands must not be left out of view,

as unquestionably operating to prevent increased production.

The amount of the tax is uncertain, and assessed yearly by

persons appointed to that duty, and afterwards collected by a

renter or middleman, whose powers under the present law are

most vexatious at all times, and may at will be made highly

oppressive to the cultivator. It is a feeling implanted in the

human breast to resist extortion. The husbandman, seeing

that an increase of crops leads also to an increase of his own

burdens, and enables the tax-farmer to add to his annoyances,

No. 4.—1848.] SINHALESH RURAL ECONOMY. 33

feels deterred from increasing his cultivation, his fear of op-

pression preponderating over his desire to possess. My purpose

being to treat of the agriculture of the country, and not of the

system of its taxation, it is not for me to pursue this part of

the subject further. It may be said, however, that the mode in

which the taxes on grain are collected in the rural districts of

the country, as affecting the morals and retarding the civiliza-

tion of the inhabitants, is a subject worthy of the study of the

philanthropist and statesman. Until the present system is

abolished, and the taxes are collected directly from the payer

by the authorized and responsible servants of Government,

there is little room to expect any improvement whatever in

the moral and social condition of the people. The labourer is

worthy of his hire, says the proverb, and those means which

will ensure it to him, which will give to the agriculturist the

the fullest advantage of his industry, must precede any attempt

to ameliorate the modes of tillage at present practised.

The natives of the interior for the most part subsist upon

vegetable and farinaceous diet. Dried fish and dried deer flesh

are used as a condiment in the seasoning of their dishes. Of

animal food, with the exception of the flesh of a few wild

animals, they consume but little. Rice is their staff of life. .

Kurakkan, a seed which is ground into flour, they also use

in addition to coconuts, yams, sweet potatoes, and the fruit

of the jack-tree. These with a few green vegetables and chillies

for their curries, comprise the whole to which they give any

attention in the way of caltivation, unless we except the coffee

tree and the arekanut tree, which grow without any care

whatever bestowed upon them about their dwellings.

_ The staple production of the Sinhalese is paddy, of which

11 different kinds are known. The Ratkunda, Ballanwani,

Marlanwarige, Kallu Kombilh and Tattuwal, requiring about

four months to: bring them to maturity, are sown generally

in March. The Hinnati, Sudu hinnati, Mudu-kiriel, and

34 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON). [Vo. IL, Parr I.

Kuru-vi are three months upon the ground, and are sown, if

the season is favorable, in May orJune. The kind called Balla —

Md-vi requires the long period of five months before reaping,

and is generally put in the ground in November. Dassanel,

a, kind grown in the low-country, is of very rapid growth, two

months being sufficient to bring it to maturity; it is chiefly

sown in June.

The periods of sowing paddy differ with the district and

description to be sown. The growth so entirely depending

upon the irrigation, the seasons for sowing must always be

chosen when the streams are full, and at the time of year when

a continuance of rain, either in the locality itself or in the

higher ranges in which the streams take their rise, will insure

an adequate supply throughout the period of growth. Inthese

respects, locality with reference to the entire mountain district,

or proximity to or distance from high ranges of hills, make the

alternation of seasons and prevalence of wet or dry weather to

differ over the whole face of the country, and consequently the

periods of agricultural operations.

The cultivation of paddy is of two kinds : sowing upon cleared

land upon the hill-side, and sowing in swamps where the

land has been prepared by irrigation. The latter is the kind

of cultivation more generally employed, and the lands used for

the purpose can be sown from season to season and year to

year, whereas the hill-paddy, as it is called, will only grow upon

a soil which has been many years undisturbed, and upon which

the exuberant vegetation must be allowed to spring up and

grow for a lengthened period before it can be again used for

this cultivation. 7

The paddy swamps of the low-country and the mountains

are very different. ;

In the low-country, with very little variety of level, they are

generally formed’ out of natural swamps, and the irrigation is —

performed with much labour by baling the water with large

No. 4.—1848.| SINHALESE RURAL ECONOMY. 35

scoops suspended to a triangle from one division ofa the fieid to

another. In the lower levels, owing to the want of a general

system of drainage, the crops suffer greatly in very wet

seasons, the plant being frequently carried away, or injured,

from too long immersion in the water. Seasons of drought are

no less fatal to it. On the mountains the formation of paddy

fields is entirely artificial, and the whole system bears witness

to considerable skill and ingenuity on the part of the culti-

vators. Passing through some of the rocky ravines of this

picturesque country, one is surprised at the beautiful appear-

ance of cultivation, which has obviously been produced under

the greatest natural difficulties. When spots of this kind have

been selected, a very superior description of rice is frequently

produced, owing probably to the good natural soil so frequently

found amongst rocks, and also from the great distance

travelled over by the irrigating stream, more fertilizing

particles are brought down by it than by streams, which take

their rise in swampy ground and run but a short distance. The

Huropean inhabitant of Colombo who should perchance visit

these romantic solitudes will find a relish and a nourishment

in the dish of new rice set before him, which he little expected

from that grain; something which will remind him of those

exquisite compositions of wheaten flour, for which our country

house-wives at home are so famous. I have said that the

formation of paddy fields in the mountains is a work of much

ingenuity and skill; it is also one which is always progressing

step by step. Terrace above terrace is added to the field every

season, until that which commenced in one little shelf, from

above which the rocky streams dashed below, now covers the

whole mountain gorge, with a bright harvest waving to the

breeze. , : :

The operations for preparing the ground for sowing the seed

cover much time, not in the steady occupations of industry,

but by the long intervals which occur between the several

36 JOURNAL, R. A. S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr I.

processes to which the ground is subjected. The land having

been grazed over by cattle since the last crop was taken, water

is allowed to run over its baked surface for several weeks.

When by this means it has become somewhat softened, it is

hoed over in a manner which breaks the surface into clods, the

sod coverings of which are turned over, and, water being once

more suffered to run over it, the grasses are rotted and the

whole field is now soft to a considerable depth. In this

state buffalo ploughs, implements of the most primitive

construction, consisting of a short sharp point of wood

pressed against the soil, are used for breaking up the lumps of

earth which remain, There can be no doubt, however, that the

tramping of the huge animals which are tethered to the plough

effects far more than the instrument itself in reducing the sur-

face of the field to the consistency of mud. Besides the plough,

in the low-country a square board, on which the driver con-

tinually jumps, is dragged by buffaloes over the fields for this

purpose, and men in the glory of a Sinhalese—mud up to the

middle—work it about with scrapers and mamoties to produce

an even consistence to the mud, and an even surface to receive

the seed. This is sown broadcast, and the green spire gene-

rally makes its appearance the second day after. For three

days after throwing in the seed no water is turned into the

fields, and then for one day only just to keep the ground moist.

- Whilst the plant is gaining a hold upon the ground, a little

water is allowed to flow into the fields, and a gentle supply of

water kept on every alternate day during daylight until the

paddy has three leaves. After this stage of its growth the

water is allowed to flow two days ata time, alternately with two

days when no new water is allowed to pass. This process is

continued about a month, after which the water is turned on

for about ten days at a time, and then stopped for a day or two

until it is ripe. The system described applies more par-

ticularly to- deep swamps; but where the fields are of a dry

No. 4,—1848. | SINHALESE RURAL ECONOMY. 37

nature, immediately the plant has taken well hold of the

ground, the supply of water is kept up through the whole period

of growth until the harvest is fit for the sickle.

To improve the fertility of their fields by manuring, the

natives of Ceylon have but small ideas. Amongst the hills,

cattle are pastured upon the stubble, and the straw after thresh-

ing is burnt upon the field; but pasturage of cattle, though

good for the land, is only done for the purpose of feeding them,

and the burning of straw is only done to get rid of what is left

after re-thatching their buildings.

In the vicinity of the Kandy road the straw is sold to feed

the draught bullocks, of which so many work on that line of

communication with the interior. Some of the lands near the

Kelani-ganga, which can be reached by boats from Colombo,

are manured with the bones collected in the gravets, but this

practice is of very small extent, and has only been adopted

within a few years. The system of cultivation by transplanting

is sometimes adopted in the low-country. To do this only a

few of the ridges which composed the field are sown with more

than a double quantity of seed; when the plant is from ten

inches to a foot in height, itis taken up and planted in rows in

other parts of the field. This labour is generally performed by

women, and it is said that the production from a given quantity

of land so cultivated is considerably increased in quantity and

quality. Wet weather is good for paddy crops, but dry weather

is seldom injurious, if the supply of water for irrigation con-

tinues good. On the Eastern and Southern sides of Ceylon,

where the rains only prevail for a limited period, and are

succeeded by dry weather which continues unbroken until the

‘reburn of the wet season, the crops are rendered somewhat

precarious; and the remains of tanks which have been con-

structed in past ages, shew that a sufficiency of moisture from

natural sources to bring their crops to maturity could never be

depended upon in that part of the Island. Even on the

38 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON). | Vou. IL, Part I.

secondary ranges at the elevation of 1,700 feet ina South-

Easterly direction from the Peak zone, the crops are frequently

lost by the streams falling short before the North-Hast mon-

soon sets in.

The yield of paddy is various, depending*upon soil, climate,

and the nature of the soil through which the water for irrigation

passes: 48-fold has been produced in many parts of the

Meda Koralé, whilst in the Kaduwiti Kéralé, from two to six-

fold only is taken from the land.

There are many superstitions which are observed by the

Sinhalese in carrying on their cultivations, by inattention to

which they would despair of reaping a crop, or fear some

misfortune would overtake them. These superstitions mostly

have reference to times and seasons for beginning and ending

their various occupations, with the view of averting calamity

which they believe they might draw upon themselves by not

attending to these precautions. They hold it as unfortunate to

commence the work of cultivation on the Ist or 2nd day of

their month, and after the work is commenced it must be

desisted from at certain intervals. Thus, supposing that the

work was commenced on the 3rd of the month, it must not

continue over the 7th, to be resumed on the 10th, progressing

until the 13th, when an interval occurs until the 15th ; the cul-

tivation then goes on for seven days, to be discontinued one day

and carried on five days, which completes their month, The

foregoiny describes the order of the observances, but the

commencement is always determined by a “ lucky day,” and

consultations with wise men, whose business it is to ascertain

the auspicious moments, are never omitted. Priests, though

frequently resorted to, are not the only persons in whom the

people place confidence as being able to discover the important

period. Learned men, so called, who have studied for the

purpose, are applied to in such cases, these are chiefly the priests

(Unnansela), doctors ( Wedaralla), and devil-dancers ( Kattadi.)

No. 4.—1848.] | SINHALESE RURAL ECONOMY. 39

Books on lucky days are supposed to have been written

before the time of a traditional king named Mahd& Sammata

Rajjuruwo, whose queen, having become sick from a fright from

tigers, was the first person cured by devil-dancing. To this

period the origin of many other superstitions is referred.

Almost every part of the business of life is undertaken by

these simple people upon appointed days; they seem to have a

singular dread lest misfortune should follow the neglect of

these observances. Lucky days are sought for, for turning and

hoeing the fields, sowing, tying fences, reaping and tramping

out the grain, also for building the small houses for the people

who watch the fields at night, and for tying up white tatties to

scare away animals; again, for pounding the paddy and storing

in their houses.

When grain is to be tramped or threshed from the straw by

the feet of men or buffaloes, a place is selected and a curious

ceremony follows. A hole being dug on the spot, a shell filled

with the leaves of the B6 tree, the Nika and the Niyagald-

wela, and some Hillock (a long grass) is placed in it, besides

a reaping hook, with precious stones, gold and silver, or sub-

stitutes for them. These being covered over with earth, a —

stone is placed above, and three rings are made round them

with ashes, after which it is left until the stars appear at night,

when it is supposed good luck has now come to the place, and

the work must be commenced forthwith, the articles deposited

in the ground being in the first place removed. Offerings of

grain are sometimes but not invariably made to the priests; in

the case of reaping the first fruits of anew field it is never

omitted. The custom is to take sufficient rice boiled for a meal

and a number of different kinds of cakes made from the flour ;

of these the holy man must partake before any one would dare

to make use of the remainder of the crop.

The fields are seldom cultivated by the owners, most fre-

quently they are given in charge to some one who undertakes

40 7 JOURNAL R. A. S. (CEYLON). | Vou. II., Parr I.

the whole of the labour and expense of the crop. In sucha

case the owner and the cultivator share equally, the former

appointing somebody to be present at the tramping, to see that

he is not cheated of his proper share.

The rent or tax payable to the king was one-tenth of the

crop; except in the case of Gamarala (an obsolete title),

who, being obliged to furnish the king’s messengers with food

when on journeys, were exempted.

Animals committing depredations in the fields are frequently

caught in traps or killed by the watchers at night ; but it is

considered unclean to kill any animal for food in a paddy field.

Thus we find every circumstance of life connected with some

superstition.

Hill-Paddy.

Hill-paddy, of which there are many kinds, is sown in June.

Six months suffice to bring to maturity the following kinds:

Rat-elwi, Batu-kiri-elvi, Gonabaru-elui, Muduhiri-eli, Laina-

elvi and Vaikolla-elvi ; whilst Pallai-elvi grows so rapidly that

it ripens in three months. Hill-paddy is never sown more

frequently than oncea year. It is planted upon land which

has been under forest or very full-grown chena for many years,

it is so exhausting a crop, or the land is naturally so poor in

the ingredients for cereal production, that every crop taken

requires newly-cleared land. Artificial manure is never

applied; the ashes of the wood fires alone assist the fertility

of the soil. Chenas are largely cultivated in the Kuruwiti,

Navadun, Kukulu, and Atakalan Kérales in the Sabaragamuwa

District. The crop of hill-paddy suffers more from drought

than the grain cultivated in swamps ; indeed any deficiency in

the seasonable moisture is sure to result in a total failure of

the crops. When the land is moderately good and the season

propitious, the return from this cultivation is generally ten-

fold. The work is generally conducted by the inhabitants of the

No. 4.—1848. | SINHALESE RURAL ECONOMY. 4]

village together, who share equally in the produce; the women

do their share of the work in weeding and harvesting, also in

carrying the brush off the land to be used for firewood. It is

computed that the labour of two men in this cultivation will

produce sufficient for the subsistence of three persons. Swamp

paddy is more prolific and the labor of cultivation easier, the

labour of one man being supposed to be sufficient to raise the

food of three and often more. The same superstitious ceremo-

nies are observed with reference to the operations as described

above.

Kurakkan.

Kurakkan, or Natcherin, is extensively cultivated on chena

lands in this District; it is a small seed like brown mustard,

which when ground into flour is usedin making cakes. The

same land will often bear two crops, but most frequently after

the first, instead of a second crop of grain, chillies are sown.

The cultivation of hurakkan is carried on most extensively in

Bintenna ; there it is said to yield frequently 50-fold. The

natives, after the clearing and sowing is completed by the men,

consider it degrading for any but the weaker sex to perform

the remaining part of the labour, the weeding. The cropping

and the threshing, therefore, is performed by cutting the heads

from the plant and drying them on mats. When dry and of a

bright brown colour, the heads are crushed in a basket or

between mats, which soon disengages the small seed, and

winnowing in kulu, (hand baskets) completes the process.

The seed after winnowing and before storing is exposed to the

sun in shallow trays, which hardens it. Before threshing or

grinding they do not observe any form of divination to discover

a happy time to commence the work,—a remarkable exception

to the general rule. The cultivation of kurakkan 18 not gene-

rally profitable ; the return compared with the labour expended

will not yield a subsistence. It is only cultivated as an

42 JOURNAL R. A. S. (CHYLON), [VoL II, Parr E

addition to other productions, and it will grow upon land which

is not good enough for hill-paddy. Many different seeds are

sown with kurakkan and are cropped afterwards ; a few of these

are Mun-eta, Kollu, Ulundu, and Bumé, all vetches. Panna

a kind of corn, Ada (mustard), Miris (chillies), Asaméodagan

(a curry stuff), Zringu (Indian corn), Amu (small grain), J7/é-

karal (a kind of bean), Wambatu (brinjal), with Kekiri,

Tiyambara, Alu-puhul, Rata-puhul, Diya-labu, and Vetakolu,—

all different kinds of gourds and cucumbers.

Tobacco.

So very little tobacco is cultivated by the natives of Ceylon

generally, and in the District of Sabaragamuwa less than in

many other parts of the Island, that a very short notice will

suffice to describethe simple operations connected with its

culture. When it is intended to plant tobacco, cattle are penned

upon the ground to manure it, after which the surface is broken

up with the mamoty or hoe. After this, at distances of three

feet apart every way, holes are dug about eighteen inches wide |

and as much as two feet deep, which are filled with cow-dung

and soil.

In the meantime a nursery of young plants has been

prepared, on newly-cleared ground under shade, well manured

by the ashes of the burnt chena. When the seedlings have

attained the size of three leaves, they are considered best to

transplant into the holes; after which the utmost care is taken

of them by shading and watching until the roots have taken

firm hold of the ground. From this period until they arrive at

maturity, the plants are continually inspected, to remove decay-

ing leaves and insects to which they are very liable. Having

attained the height of 24 feet, the top of the plant is cut

off, and it is well earthed up round the roots; this prevents

the plant running rapidly to seed and promotes the growth of

the leaves. About three months is sufficient to bring the plant

No. 4.—1848. | SINHALESE RURAL ECONOMY. 43

to its full growth; the leaves are then cut and cured by the

simple process of drying them on lines in the house. The

quality of tobacco grown in this country is very inferior ; it is

mostly used for chewing with betel by the natives. One would

readily suppose, that every native in the rural districts would

produce in the neighbourhood of his dwelling sufficient tobacco

for his own consumption, but such is not the case. On the

contrary, it is one of those articles which the more enterprising

inhabitants.of the low-country carry up to the interior to barter

for coffee, arekanuts and other produce; this is grown in

Jaffna, Chilaw, and a few other places.

Until within the last few years a quantity of tobacco was

grown in the elevated districts of Uvain the fine soil of virgin

forests. This cultivation has now almost entirely disappeared

since the natives have been prevented from encroaching upon

the Crown lands. The quality of the Uva tobacco is finer

than any other native kinds produced in the country; it is very

rich and full-flavored, and from such that cigars and cheroots,

equal to the most celebrated sorts, could be made from it. Large

quantities were formerly brought down by the tavalams to

Ratnapura, and bartered for salt, fish, and cocoanuts; but the

trade in this article has almost entirely ceased. Dumbara is

also celebrated for the quality of its tobacco, a circumstance

doubtless attributable to the limestone formation on which

rests a large portion of the soil of that fertile valley.

Tobacco being a lime plant and therefore a crop of the most

exhausting nature to the soil, it is not surprising that its culti-

vation is not persevered with, in a country where the resusci-

tation of the soil by artificial means is so little understood.

The quality of the article produced not only suffers by neglect

in this respect, but by the total ignorance of the cultivators

how to prepare the green leaf so as to improve and retain its

narcotic qualities and those properties for which the article

cultivated in the Spanish settlements is so justly celebrated.

44 JOURNAL R. A. 8S. (CEYLON). (Von; Eee earn 7:

In this place, it may be interesting to mention, that an enter-

prising foreigner has lately established a tobacco plantation

at Tangalla, where he has introduced the kinds most in repute —

in the EHuropean markets, and employs a professional man—a

Spaniard, I believe—to prepare the leaves and manufacture

them into cigars. Those made from tobacco grown from

Havannah seed are highly esteemed, and command a ready sale

at good prices.

Cocoanuts, gC.

Experience has proved that only in the neighbourhood of

the sea, the cocoanut tree grows to perfection ; yet it will bear ~ |

much fruit at any elevation below 2,000 feet. It is therefore

extraordinary that the inhabitants generally of the Sabara-

gamuwa District do not grow sufficient for their own use.

Cocoanuts are still brought in large quantities from the low-

country and exchanged for local produce ; the tree being seldom

met with except surrounding the houses of headmen, and about

wihares. About the station of Ratnapura, on the banks of

the Kaluganga, the trees are very numerous, and, interspersed

with the elegant bambu, add great beauty to the landscape.

Whenever natives intend to plant cocoanuts, they always

procure the seednuts from the low-country. The custom

appears based upon experience that the tree thus raised bears

better than one raised from seed grown on the spot. The

young cocoanut plant is not, as in the plantations, sprouted by

putting the nut upon the ground and partially burying it in

soil, but two nuts being tied together by strips of the husk,

are suspended over the branch of a tree until the green shoots

break forth, when they are planted in holes. They allege as

a reason for adopting this system, that they are safe from the

depredations of pigs and also from white ants.

On occasions when jack and cocoanut trees are more par-

ticularly cared for, which is when the fruit is upon them, the

No. 4.—1848.] SINHALESE RURAL ECONOMY. 45

natives practise certain ceremonies by which they hope to —

preserve them from depredation. Having procured a

number of young leaves of the cocoanut tree, they proceed

to charm them, by laying them on the ground and burning

dummala(rosin) round them. ‘These leaves they then tie to

each of the trees, and they believe that any one who eats of

the fruit afterwards without claim to it will die.

If the ceremony is effectual, these leaves must be a very |

economical police, and might be introduced to protect more ,

valuable property. |

Arecanuts.

The trade in arecanuts is so extensive that any notice

of the products of Sabaragamuwa would be incomplete without

such description as the subject will admit of. The beauti-

ful palm which produces the nuts grows to great perfection |

in this District; it delights in shady and moist places.

Except around my own bungalow I never saw it cultivated,

but wherever there are a few trees and the locality is favour-

able, they increase largely by the droppings, and thus

have been formed the beautiful groups of this tree, which

break the sameness of the scenery. They are collected in

large quantities by Moormen, who send them in boatloads

to Colombo, whence they are shipped to the coast and to

the Maldives.

Betel.

These leaves, the produce of a kind of pepper vine, are

not grown in quantities as in the low country to supply the

markets, but in all the gardens; the plant is trained upon

the jack trees, and supplies the wants of those belonging

to the family. In the neighbourhood of towns, betel is

_ trained upon sticks, and patches of ground to the extent of

an acre are cultivated entirely with it. The women collect

the leaves, packing them carefully in baskets, and take them

to market.

ABS JOURNAL, R.A.S. (cEYLON). [Vou. IT, Partl., 4 |

All offerings of money to temples must be presented in a

betel leaf. On the fence of a betel garden, achatty painted

black with white spots is frequently exposed, to scare away

evil spirits. This superstition is not confined to betel

plantations.

Cardamoms.

Cardamoms are not cultivated, but they are found in small

quantities in most situations inthe jungles. They are most,

plentiful about Gilimalé at the base of the mountains on

the road to Adam’s Peak from Ratnapura. They are fre-

quently used green to chew instead of betel leaf.

Talpot palm.

These wonderful trees grow in great numbers about the

villages in Sabaragamuwa, and like the other trees which

from the beautiful groups about the houses, owe little to the

care of man. When jungleis cut for sowing fine grain they

are always left. Every native carries a strip of the leaf to

shelter him from the sun and rain. When dried and sewed.

together, four pieces of leaves which may be carried by one

man make an excellent portable tent, when placed on sticks

cut from the neighbouring jungle. They are much used by

the drivers of bullock tavalams, when they stop for the

night; the pack saddles are built into a square heap and

protected from the weather by talipots placed at the top.

Temple headmen and Ratémahatmayas when they travel are

always followed by talipot bearers; the leaves for this

purpose are generally sewn at the edges and inlaid with tale

and colours. All kinds of temporary buildings are thatched

with talipots; they are also used as a waterproof covering

for loads carried in baskets. It would be almost impossible

to describe the many uses to which they are applied by the

natives. |

No. 4.—1848.] sINHALESE RURAL ECONOMY. 47

Jack tree.

This valuable tree is seldom planted, but springs up from

seed which have been scattered by accident around the dwell-

ings of the natives. The seeds, and pulp in which they are

contained within the fruit, are much used as food. The timber

is perhaps the most useful grown on the Island, being

adopted for every purpose : if cut young itis apt to be quickly

worm-eaten. Beneath its shade the coffee tree grows

luxuriantly, manured by offal from the houses, and not pruned

down into heavy bearing.

Coffee tree.

The coffee bush in the upper part of this District attains |

to an extraordinary size; in the Adigar’s garden at Balan-

goda there are several specimens of the thickness of a man’s

thigh. Inseveral parts of the District plantations have been

formed after the manner of cultivation practised by

Huropeans, and the small patches of coffee invariably found

about the houses have been increased by planting. The

produce is picked and very imperfectly prepared by the

women and children, and is sold to the Moormen, who collect

it principally in exchange for salt. The low price now

obtained for it has almost annihilated the large trade in the

article which was formerly carried on in Sabaragamuwa ; the

cost of cultivation and transport are not covered by the Colombo

price. The coffee is still picked and stored, literally costing

nothing, and vast quantities will be poured in whenever the

price rises high enough to remunerate the industrious

Moormen and Chetties who collect it. The quantity produced

annually in this District is stated in the official returns for

1844 at 32,410 bushels, or about 15,000 cwt. I believe this

is underrated.

Jaggery palm.

Besides the Areca and Talipot palm, the Kitul or Jag-

gery palm is almost invariably found about the villages.

48 ‘JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL, Parr Il.

I have reason to believe it is never planted, but is sown by

~ seeds being scattered by animals. This tree is seldom found

in forests at an elevation exceeding 3,000 feet, and grows in

steep places. It is much cut down by the natives, and when

the inner pith is removed it is used for spouts to conduct

the waters for irrigation, and from the roofs of their houses.

The wood, which is particularly hard, appears as if it were

composed of large dark fibers twisted together; it is much

used to peg together the beams used in building; also as a

substitute for iron as bars to windows, and for paddy poun-

ders. But the chief use of the Kitul tree is to draw the

toddy from it. The manner in which this is done is curious :

as soon as the bud or spike appears, itis cut off within three

inches of the stalk, and an incision made in which a mixture

of limes, salt, black pepper, and garlick is put and tied up

very tight. This is left for three days, after which it is

_ removed and the bud again cut ; the toddy will now flow into

‘a, chatty placed to receive it: the liquor may be taken from

a tree in this way for several months at a time. It is

remarkable that a tree which has been continually tapped

for many years produces the hardest wood, the wood of the

wild tree growing in the jungle being comparatively soft and

spongy. Toddy when freshly drawn from the tree is sweet

to the taste, and possesses all the properties of cane juice ;

_ after being boiled and the watery particles evaporated from

it several times, it crystallises into a coarse sugar, capable

of being refined into a superior article. After standing

twenty-four hcurs toddy begins to ferment, and acquires an

intoxicating quality ; in this state it is called 7a, and much

of it is clandestinely consumed. I use this term because the

- arrack renter of the District has the power of levying a fine

upon those who use it—a power too frequently and vexa-

tiously exercised.

The Goraka, or Gamboge tree, produces a pulpy fruit

No. 4.—1848.] SINHALESE RURAL ECONOMY. » 49

which the natives dry in the sun after cutting it in pieces,

and use it to impart a powerful acid flavour to their curries.

The Kekuna and several other trees produce seeds from

which they express oil for anointing their bodies and lighting ©

their dwellings. The primitive mode of obtaining the oil is

by compressing the seeds previously put into a mat bag

between two parallel bars of wood, and catching the oil as

it flows into a chatty placed beneath.

. Cattle.

Besides buffaloes, which are used in the cultivation of

their paddy fields, a great many other horned cattle are bred

in this District. The bullocks are chiefly hired by the

Moormen tavalam keepers, who at certain periods of the year

carry to the low country various articles of produce, which

they have collected, and bring up salt, cocoanuts, fish, &c.,

for their bartering trade ; others are purchased for the bandy

traffic of Colombo, and the Galle and Kandy roads. The

numbers of cattle do not increase rapidly ; little attention is

paid to them, their food is only what the uncultivated hills

supply, with the occasional improvement of what may be _

found in the stubble fields. JI have no doubt that were the ©

natives more energetic, the number of cattle might soon be

doubled. They are extremely afraid of misfortunes occurring

to their cattle through the agency of evil spirits. To prevent

this, once a year they procure a quantity of ripe plantains,

which must be grown by the owner of the cattle, and place

them with adish of boiled rice on a small platform made

for the purpose in the maduwa (grain store) attached to their |

houses. A devil dancer (Kattddiy4), who has been previously

engaged, then approaches and summons all the devils to

appear to him; he then falls to and eats as much as he

pleases of the rice and plantains, and informs his employers

that no harm will happen to their cattle during the ensuing

year. The ceremony is concluded with the beating of

~~ 60 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). (Vou. IL, Parr I.

tom-toms and dancing. When bullocks are to be castrated,

branded with the owner’s name, or trained to carry loads,

the wise men are invariably consulted to name a lucky day—

otherwise they apprehend the animals would die under the

operation ; and they frequently do so from the effects, never-

theless.

Houses.

The comfort of a dwelling must be estimated by the sup-

posed wants of the inhabitants. Judging by this standard,

the people of Ceylon—and of Sabaragamuwa in particular—

appear to be, as the saying is, pretty well-to-do in the world.

Their wants are few, and in describing the manner in which

their cultivations are conducted, 1 have shown that they are

easily supplied. In Sabaragamuwa the mode of building

rooms to form the four sides of a small quadrangle, as in

the Kandyancovntry, is not generally adopted; but the houses

generally consist of three rooms side by side under one roof,

with the maduwa or grainstore, generally a shed open on

one side, piaced at right anglesat one end. In the Kandyan

country paddy is frequently stored, ina round place elevated

by single stones from the ground, in the manner ricks are

preserved from vermin at home, and for the same purpose.

This is built of wattled sticks and plastered with clay and

cowdung inside and out, and thatched ; it is seldom larger

than a full sized water-butt.

It may not be generally known that there are owners of —

paddy lands in this country called paddy-misers. These

unhappy persons, like the hoarders of coin, live penuriously

in the midst of plenty ; they store up the produce of season

after season, they cannot consume it, they will not sell it,

or part with it to any one, it therefore perishes. Who shall

‘say the miser is not a monomaniac ?

The superstitions of the natives respecting their dwellings

‘are various. For putting in the posts, thatching, and light-

No. 4.—1848.] SINHALESE RURAL ECONOMY. 51

ing the first fire, lucky days must be consulted for. They

consider it unlucky to build their houses from north to

south, or wee versd, as these points are called gini kona

which means “fire end.”” They have the idea, that persons

living in houses so placed will be continually fighting with

each other, and subject to all kinds of sickness, and the

house itself will be sure to be burnt down. Sometimes a

man and his family will desert a house they have inhabited

all their lives, from the fear of devils. In this way

they practise greatly upon the credulity of each other,

frequently hiding near the house and pelting the roof with

pebbles after dark, which, under the belief in the agency of

evil spirits, causes the inmates to abandon their habitation.

A death in the family not unfrequently causes them to

abandon a dwelling in which the family have resided many

years.

Frequently in taking up their lodging in one of the

temporary buildings erected on clearings for kurakkan, they

will strip the bark from the nearest trees of the standing

forest in order to arrest the progress of the demons from

whom they fear molestation.

Many of the peaked mountains of this district have given

rise to legendary fictions, which still exercise an influence

upon the natives. The story mentioned in Major Forbes’s

account of a journey from the Wilson plains to Balangoda

is still believed. The breaks in the Pettigala range of

mountains which form an important feature in the view in

descending from the zone to the romantic village of Gala-

gama, are ascribed to the arrows of Rama. The mountain

itself,—at least the upper part of it, is called “God’s

garden,” and they believe misfortune will overtake any who

presumes to fell the forest for cultivation. This superstition

gave rise to much inconvenience to the Europeans who

commenced clearing the land for coffee cultivation, every

Bo JOURNAL, B.A.8. (ceyLON). [Vou. IL, Pare I.

cut finger, every blow from the branch of a tree, was looked ©

upon as evidence of the Deity’s displeasure. To the effect

of this superstition I am inclined to ascribe the circumstance

that the upper part of Pettigala, though surrounded by

well populated valleys, was one of the few hills in the District

which was covered with an original growth of forest, until

purchased by Europeans for coffee cultivation. The super-

stitions respecting this mountain have doubtless been kept —

in remembrance by the eremite priests who live in the caves

at its base.

Perhaps there is no District in which the priesthood is

more numerous, or where their influence is more felt than in

Sabaragamuwa. Itis not my intention to diverge into a con-

sideration of their religious observances; but the various

superstitions which I have briefly glanced at, show that their

sentiments partake more of fear than of hope. Instead of

looking for the protection of a supreme and beneficent Being,

they seek to avert by propitiation the misfortunes which

they believe the spirits of evil have power to inflict.

This Paper has far exceeded in length the few remarks I

intended to offer, the subject affording much greater scope

for description and remark than I supposed at the com-

mencement. Extended as these Notes appear to be, I feel

that they are greatly curtailed of the amplification the

subject would admit of ; and those who take a pleasure in

observing the manners and customs of a primitive people,

will look for many more particulars than I have given.

No. 4.—1848.] SKETCHES IN NATURAL HISTORY. oie

SKETCHES IN THE NATURAL HISTORY

OF CEYLON,

By Enaar L, Layarp, Esq., 0.M.E.S.

(Read 4th November, 1848.)

In offering to the Society the accompanying Sketch on

the Genus Papilio inhabiting Ceylon, I beg to make such

few observations as will explain the plan which I propose

to pursue, should my essay be deemed worthy of a place in

the Society’s Journal.

Little or nothing exists on the spot to show the progress

that has been made in the investigation of the Fauna of the

Island. I therefore propose to enumerate, from time to

time, the various indigenous species of Insects, Birds, &c.,

giving a description of such as are new, briefly stating their

locality, season of appearance, food, and any other pecu-

liarities which may be interesting. In my text I shall

follow, as closely as may be, the example of men of note

who have pursued the same course, such as Hodgson, Sykes,

Blyth, and many others, whom, though I cannot equal, I

may at least follow. For the correctness of facts stated, I

will vouch; for the correctness of the identification of

species I cannot ; although, to guard against mistakes to

the utmost of my power, | will submit my specimens to the

scrutiny of those who have the power of referring to the

vast collections in England and India, and also to books,

of which no Library in the Island possesses a single volume

on Oriental Entomology or (with the exception of the

Bengal Asiatic Society’s Journal) Ornithology.

_ Thad the honour some time since of reading before this

Society a Paper on “ Collecting and Rearing Lepidoptera

54 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [ Vou. I., Parr I.

with a list of our indigenous Butterflies,’ and I purpose

that the Entomological portion of these sketches shall in a

manner constitute a continuation of that Paper.

Ordo. LEPIDOPTERA.

Sectio. DIURNA.

Genus, Papilio.

This genus contains most of our largest diurnal Lepidop-

tera, two or three species measuring upwards of six inches in

expanse. Itis distributed over the whole of the Island, one

species or another being found everywhere. Of all at

- present known, but one has the hind or inferior wings,

terminating in long slender sharp pointed tails ; eight have

moderately lengthened tails, broad and spatulate; three

have the tail still less produced and spatulate, gradually

approaching the remaining three, in which the tail is

altogether obsolete.

The Aurelia are attached to a branch by the tail, and a

band round the middle ; the head but little inclined, except

in a few instances, which shall be noticed under the species

in which they occur.

The larvee are naked, and furnished with a fleshy, furcate

tentacle, on the shoulder as it were, which they have the

power of protruding and retracting. It is moistened witha

strong scented fluid, and is, I believe, a means of defence

against its parasitic enemies, the Ichneumon flies, which

deposit their eggs in the living caterpillar ; if the larve is

touched the tentacle is rapidly thrust out, and struck on

the irritating object. I observe that all the Papilionide

whose metamorphoses I have followed feed on aromatic

plants, such asthe Citron. May not the juices of these

plants supply the scented fluid alluded to?

The eggs present under the microscope a variety of

singular forms, and the succession of changes from them to

No, 4.—1848.] SKETCHES IN NATURAL HISTORY. 39)

the perfect fly is generally effected in from fifteen to

thirty days. :

P. Haliphron, var. This isa distinct species from the

true Haliphron which is found in Celebes. The larva feeds

on the Aristolochia Indica (Linn.), sassanda ofthe natives.

The perfect insect is common and widely distributed, except

in the peninsula of Jaffna, where, according to the Reverend

F. Taylor, it is not found. I do not remember seeing it

myself during either of the two visits I have made there at

different seasons of the year,

P. Polymnestor. A common and widely distributed insect,

though rare in Jaffna. The larvee feed on different kinds of

Citrus, the perfect fly appearing plentifully in May.

P, Epius. Agreeing in all respects with the last, except

that the dingy variety is rather scarce.

P. Helenus. Not uncommon in the interior, at an eleva-

tion of about 3,540 feet. Larva unknown.

P. Polydorus. Very common and widely spread ; larva

feeds on Aristolochia Indica (Linn.). Fly abundantin May

and June. )

P. Pammon. As the last, with the exception of the larva,

which feeds on Citrus.

P. Hector. Common in July and widely distributed,

larva closely resembles that of Polydorus, and often found

feeding in company with it.

P, Mutius. Not common; larva feeds on Citrus. The

perfect fly appears in September.

P. Polytes. Uncommon; I have only captured about a

dozen specimens, and those in themonth of June. It does

not appear to extend to the hills. The larva is unknown

to me. ;

P.Crino (Fabricius). This splendid insect is very periodical

in its appearance, May being the season in which it is found

in any abundance. It is then common, flying swiftly, and »

56 JOURNAL, ReA.S. (CEYLON). [Vou IL, Part I.

generally in one direction, according to the wind. I never

could detect a perfect fly alighting or hovering over flowers

and shrubs, either for the purpose of feeding or depositing

its ova; the larva is also unknown to me. The specimens

taken in the neighbourhood of Colombo have the green

band unbroken throughout their whole extent; those taken

on the Western Coast have the band passing into the

discoidal cell ; while those from the interior have the band

outside the cell, but very broken and interrupted. Can

these be distinct varieties ?

P, Sarpedon. A very common insect. Time of appear-

ance, May and June. Larvee feed on Cinnamon.

P. Eurypilus. Nearly allied to the preceding, but con-

fined to the hills, and not common. I never met with the

larva. :

_P. Agamemnon. Belonging to the same group as the

two former ; larva feeds on the Soursop. The perfect insect

met with frequently in June and July. The pupe of this,

| Sarpedon, and I presume of Eurypilus, are attached to the

- underside of leaves, almost horizontally, thus differing from

_ the foregoing species.

P. Dissimilis. This approaches closely to the genus

Danais or Euplea,in the appearance of the perfect fly ; the

- Larva is also furnished with spines. It feeds on the Cinna-

‘mon, and is common in April, the mature insects being

developed in May. The pupa wants the knobs found on

those of the other Papilionids, and resembles a piece of

burnt stick; the foundation and suspending silk is black,

being the only instance of that colour I have yet seen among

- the various silks spun by insects. |

Papilio Birch (Layard). This splendid, and hitherto

rare, insect has been lately captured in some abundance by

the Rev. W. Symons in the Kotmalé range. The first two

specimens, from which the accompanying description was

No. 4.—1848.] SKETCHES IN NATURAL HISTORY. Basie

taken, were presented to me by Woodford Birch, Esq., and

taken by him at Kitulgalain the Ambagamuwa, range.

Hxpanse of wing, about five inches; depth, two and a-half ;

superior wing, velvet black, with a whitish uneven triangle

extending over three parts of the surface towards the ex-

terior margin, broken and crossed by the nerves which are

black: inferior wings also velvety black, with a white

centre as in Polydorus, but extending higher into the dis-

coidal cell ; round the exterior margin are five narrow reddish

Iunules ; tails long andspatulate. Larve unknown. The

perfect fly is on the wing inthe months of Marchand April,

frequenting shady roads and open spaces in the jungle. It

is very wary, and flies with great rapidity on being alarmed.

P. Marianna (Layard). This lovely and graceful insect

was first observed by me at Kitulgala, between Amba-

gamuwa and Yatiyantota. It is the only instance we have

in this country of that group of Papilionide termed by

collectors “ small tails ;’’ as a specimen also it is unique,

and I am indebted to the liberality of Woodford Birch, Esq.,

for its possession.

Wings, from threeinches to three and a-quarter in expanse;

from shoulder to end of tail two inches two lines ; length of

tailninelines. Ground colour, greenish white: superior wings

with seven black bands varying from about one to oneand a

half lines apart ; the first, about one and half lines from the

shoulder extending from the anterior to the interior margin ;

the second rather beyond the anal nerve; the third, fourth

and fifth, across the discoidal cell; the sixth into the anal

area; and the seventh occupying the whole border of the

exterior margin, from the apicial to theanal angle. Inferior

wings with a series of black marginal lunules, the second

and third extended down the tail, which is slender and

pointed : a black patch crosses the discoidal cell near the

seutellar angle, and the marginal lunules are surmounted

58 JOURNAL, R.A.8. (CEYLON)... [Vou. IL, Parti. 4

by similarly coloured wavey marks. The underside of the

superior wing is the same as the upper, but that of the :

lower wing is marked with several dots and long stripes, |

which appear faintly through on the upper surface. A black

line runs down the centre of the body from the base of the

antennee to the end of the abdomen; two lateral lines,

springing from the base of the wings, terminate in a similar

way.

The perfect insects frequent moist glades in the jungle,

alighting on the edges of the streams and drinking, in

which act this specimen was captured. Larve unknown.

No. 4.—1848.] CATALOGUE OF TAMIL BOOKS. 59

A CATALOGUE OF BOOKS IN THE TAMIL

LANGUAGE, WITH THE NAMES OF THE AUTHORS,

THE SUBJECTS, AND THE DATES, AS FAR AS

THEY CAN BE ASCERTAINED.

By Simon Caste Cuerty, HsqQ., ¢.M.R.A.8.

(Read June 3, 1848, and February 24, 1849.)

SECTION 1.—PuariLo.oey.

1. <Akattiyam.

A Grammar, so called from Akaticyan or Agastiya, the

reputed inventor of the Tamil Language. Who the author of

this work was is not certain ; some regard it as the genuine

composition of Agastya himself, whilst others maintain that

it was written by another person under his name, long after

his time. It is, however, not the less esteemed among the

literati of the south of India, and is geuerally consulted by

them as a standard work.

2. Tolkappiyam.

_ Another grammar, the oldest now in existence. It is

divided into three parts, comprising 1,276 sutras, or

aphorisms, in verse; but it is written in so abstruse and

difficult a style that few can understand it. The author is

called from the title of his work Tolkdppiyan, but his real

name was Tiranatumdakkini, and he is said to have lived at

Tolkappiyakkudi, a village situated to the south of Madura.

A tradition states that he was a disciple of Agastya, and

_ having quarrelled with him composed the present work, with

a view of supplanting the one written by his master.

60 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL, Parr I.

3. Nannul.

Another Grammar, written by a Jazna ascetic, named

Pavananti, and inscribed to the king Chéyakankan, who is

conjectured to have reigned at Madura about 800 years ago.

The author had proposed to treat of his subject under five

different heads, viz., Letters, Words, Composition, Versifi-

cation, and Embellishment ; but having died before he had

completed his design, the work comprises only the first

two heads.

4. Virasdhyam.

_ Another Grammar, so called from Virasdliyan, by wher

it was written. It chiefly treats of Orthography and

Etymology, as also of the rules of Versification, and is

ees of the same date as the preceding work.

a Nominee

A treatise on Orthography and Etymology : by Kunavira

Panditan.

| 6. Kéarikai.

A treatise on Versification, by a Jaina ascetic, named Amzr-

tasakaran, or “‘ the sea of Nectar,” who flourished some time

after Pavananti. This work is, however, considered very

obscure, in a great measure to the studied brevity of the

style employed : hence the proverb “ Better live by beating

the Pérrka: (kettle drum) than by writing verses by study-

ing the Karikat.”

«. TLandiyalankaram.

8. Maranalankéram.

Two different treatises on Rhetoric: one by Tandi

A'siryan and the other by Maran.

9. Lrayandr Akapporul.

A treatise on the choice of subjects for amatory poems,

consisting of a series of rules and examples, written by —

No. 4.—1848.] CATALOGUE OF TAMIL BOOKS. 61

Traiyandr, the head professor of the ancient Tamil Univer-

sity at Madura. The title Zraz, or Iraiyanar, being also

applicable to Siva, his» votaries believe it to have been

revealed by him directly to the University.

10. Nampi Akapporul.

A treatise on the Composition of Amatory Poems: by

Narkaviracha Nampi.

. 11. Purapporul.

A treatise on the Composition of War-chants or Moral

Verses.

12. Kuvalayanantam.

A treatise on Grammar and Rhetoric.

13. Yapparunkalam.

14. Chankayappu.

Two different treatises on Prosody and Versification : by

two different authors.

| 15. Aniyiyal.

A treatise on Rhetorical Figures.

16. Cheyyulhyal.

17. Kavichakaram.

18 Pirapanta-tipam.

19. Ariyaviti.

20. Pirayoka-vivekam.

Different treatises by different authors, containing rules

for the construction of various kinds of poems.

21. Paiichalakkana Pirayokappayan. .

A treatise on Grammar in all its parts, consisting of a

series of 1,000 verses, written by Kallaren.

22. Chitampara Paddiyal.

23. Champanta Paddiyal.

62 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr I.

24. Navanita Paddiyal.

Three different treatises by three different authors, each

consisting of a centum of stanzas on the powers of the first

letter with which a poem commences, and the right selection

of the same.

20. Poruttaviyal.

A treatise on the subject of Invocation, &c., at the

beginning of a poem.

: 26. ILlakkana Vilakkam.

An exposition of the true rules of Grammar, with strictures

on the Nannil: by Vaitiyandta Pandéram.

27. Llakkana Vilakka Churdvah.

A counter-blast to the preceding work, and scholium for

the elucidation of obscure passages in the Nannwl: by

Chiwatana Tampiran.

28. ILlakkana Kottu.

A collection of rules on the declensions of Nouns and con-

jugations of Verbs : by Chuvaminata Tampiran.

29. Llakkana Tiraddu.

A compendium of the grammatical aphorisms of Pava-

nant.

30. Nannul Chuttira Virutte.

An exposition of the rules of Grammar according to the

Nannil: by Chiwatana Tampiran.

31. Nannil Viruttr Urar.

An explanation of the text of the Nannul, written by 4

Chankara Namachchivayar, a poet of Tirunelvéli, at the

request of Marutappa Tévan, Poligar of U ttumalai, about

1770 A.D.

32. Nannil Kandikar Ura.

Anotner expianation of the text of the Nannul: by Vicha-

happerumal Aryar, of Tiruttanikar, near Madras.

‘4

No, 4.—1848.] CATALOGUE OF TAMIL BOOKS. 63

33. Tolkappiya Chittira Viruttt.

An exposition of the rules of Grammar according to the

Tolkhappiyam.

| 34. Aniyiyal Vilakkam.

Illustrations of the rules of Poetry and Rhetoric: by

Charavanapperumal Aiyar, of Madras.

: 30. ILyattaml Churukkam.

A compendium of the rules of Grammar with regard to

compositions in prose Tamil : by the same author as the last.

36. ILlakkana Vinavidai.

An explanation of Grammar by means of questions and

answers in prose: by Tandavaraya Mutaliyar, Madras, 1828.

37. Llakkanachchurukka Vindvidar.

Another explanation, like the preceding: by Vichakap-

perumdl Aiyar, of Madras, 1828.

| 38. Uraiyar Nannil.

An exposition of the Nagnu/, written in the A’chiriya

metre: by A'nd: Pulavar, of Uttankal.

39. Urichchol.

A vocabulary ascribed to a Chaiva ascetic, named Kadnke-

yan, the date of whose existence is, however, involved in

obscurity. Like all other ancient Tamil compositions this

work is written in verse, and the author has divided it into

ten chapters, the first of which treats of the deities ; the

second of man ; the third of beasts and birds; the fourth

of plants; the fifth, sixth, and seventh of metals and

minerals and of various other objects; the eighth and ninth —

of words expressing qualities and actions ; and the tenth

of words of different significations. It is chiefly designed

for the use of schools, and as such is held in general

esteem.

64 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [ Vou. II., Parr I.

40. Tivakaram.

Another vocabulary, similar in character to the pre-

ceding, but much more copious, and consisting of 2,386

couplets. The author, Chéentan, was a native of Ampal, a

village situated on the banks of the Kavéri. Some place

him in the thirteenth century, but we have no authentic

data to determine it.

41. Pinkalantar.

Another vocabulary, so called from its author Pinkalan,

a distinguished Chaiva ascetic. Its arrangementis the same

as the Tivékaram, and it servesin a great measure to supply

the deficiencies of that work.

42. Hkhapata Nikandu.

43. Kayakara Nikandu.

44. Irévanachittar Chittiram.

Different vocabularies by different authors, but none of

them in general use. . :

45. Auvar Nikandu.

Synonyma of Plants : by Auvaiyar, the celebrated Tamil

poetess, who flourished in the ninth century.

46. Potiya Nikandu.

Another, like the preceding, but by a different author.

47. Chidamanr Nikandu.

A vocabulary, arranged under twelve heads, and con-

sisting of more than 1,200 stanzas. The author, Vira Man-

dalavan, was a Chama king ; but neither the name of his

kingdom nor the chronology of his reign is known. His

work, however, is posterior to the Tivakaram and the Pinka-

lantat, since he notices them both in his introductory

stanzas.

48. A'chiriya Nikandu.

Another vocabulary, so called from the verses being

composed throughout in the A’chiriya metre. It follows

No. 4.—1848.] CATALOGUE OF TAMIL BOOKS. 65

very closely the former, both in the matter and in the

arrangement, and is said to have been written by A'ndip-

pulavar, of Uttankal.

For the following, the Tamils are indebted to European

writers :—

1. Tonnul Vilakkam.

An exposition of the rules of Grammar, including Poetry,

written by the Rev. Father C. J. Beschi, otherwise called

Viramamuni, or “The Great Champion Devotee.” It is

divided into five chapters, comprising 829 chattirams, each

of which has a series of examples from classical authorities

appended to it. The assembly of Tamil poets, to whose

criticism it was submitted by the author, duly appreciating

its merits, is said to have conferred on it the title of Terut-

kuru, or “ The Intellectual Monitor,” and it is doubtless the

best work on Grammar now extant in the Tamil language.

2, Grammatica Damulica : a Tamil Grammar, in Latin :

by the Rev. B. Zeigenbalg, Halle, 1716.

3. A Grammar of the Common Dialect. of the Tamil

Language, termed Kodun Tamil, in Latin: by the Rev.

Father C. J. Beschi, 1729.

4. A Grammar of the High Dialect of the Tamil

Language, termed Chen Tamil, in Latin : by the Rev. Father

C.J. Beschi, 1730.

5, A Grammar of the Tamil Language: Vepery, 1789.

6. A translation of Beschi’s Kodun Tamil Grammar

into English: by the Rev. G. H. Horst, Vepery, 1806.

7. <A translation of Beschi’s Chen Tamil Grammar into

English: by B. G. Babington, Esq., Madras, 1822.

8. A Tamil Grammar in English : by the Rev. R. Ander-

son, London, 1821.

9. Another, similar: by the Rev. C. T. HE. Rhenius,

Madras, 1836.

10. An abridgment of the same: Madras, 1845.

66 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Voxu. IL, Parr 1.

10. Anabridgment of the Latin Grammar in Tamil :

Pondicherry, 1845.

11. An abridgment of the French Grammar in Tamil :

Pondicherry, 1845.

12. An abridgment of Murray’s English Can in

Tamil : Madras, 1828.

14. Chatur Akardati.

A Tamil Dictionary, compiled by the Rev. Father C.J.

Beschi, in 1732, and so called from its consisting of four

(chatur ) distinct parts, the first of which exhibits all the

words of different significations ; the second, the words of

the same significations ; the third, all the collective nouns

or generic words ; and the fourth, the different words which

rhyme together. 7

15. <A Dictionary, Tamil and Latin: by the same author.

16. A Dictionary, Tamil and Portuguese: by the same

author.

17. A Dictionary of the Malabar (Tamil) Language : bs

the Rev. B. Ziegenbale, Halle, 1716.

18. A Dictionary, Tamil and French: by the Rev. Father

Du Bourges, formerly of Madras.

19. A Dictionary, Latin and Tamil : by the Rev. Father

D. Magny.

20. A Dictionary, French and Tamil, and Tamil and

French: by Lieutenant A. Blain, of the 4th Regt. Infantry,

Pondicherry, Paris, 1831.

21. A Dictionary, English and Tamil: by the Rev. T.

Fabricius.

22. ££ Dictionary, Tamil and English: by the same

author.

23. A Dictionary, Tamil and English: by the Rev. J.

P. Kottler, Madras, 1834-41.

24. A Manual Dictionary of the Tamil Language:

Jafina, 1842. This work contains about 58,500 words, being

No. 4.—1848.] CATALOGUE OF TAMIL BOOKS. 67

nearly four times as many as are found in the whole of the

Chatur Akarati.

25. Manual Lexicon, English and Tamil, giving in Tamil

allimportant English words, and the use of many in phrases :

by the Rev. J. Knight and the Rev. R. Spaulding, Madras,

1844.

26. A Dictionary, Latin, French, and Tamil: Pondi-

cherry, 1846.

SECTION Il.—Myrnonoey, History, anp Biograpuy.

1, Lraméayanam.

A poem in seven books, which are again divided into 128

cantos, comprising 12,016 stanzas. It narrates the adven-

tures of Lama, the conqueror of Ceylon, as told originally ©

by the sage Valmiki in Sanskrit,but with far greater poetical

embellishments. The author, Kampan, has left nothing on

record respecting his personal history, except that he was a

native of Tiruvaluntur in the Tanjore country, and undertook

and finished his voluminous composition under the patronage

of Chadaiyan, a wealthy farmer of Venneynellar, in the year

of Chaka 808 (886 a.v.). A tradition, however, is current

that he enjoyed high favour at the court of Kuldttunka Chola,

and was honoured by that king with the title of Kavich-

chakkaravarttz, or “ Prince of Poets,” but that proving

himself inconsolable at the death of his son Ampihkapatt,

who was impaled alive for an attempt to seduce the king’s

daughter, he incurred the royal displeasure, and eventually

perished by the hand of the executioner. |

2. Kanta Puradnam.

This poem, like the preceding, consists of seven books,

but is divided into 141 cantos, and contains 10,306 stanzas.

It has for its subject principally the conflict between the

demons and the gods, and the final overthrow of the former

68 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr I.

by the latter, under the conduct of Skanta, who sprang from

the frontal eye of Siwa; but treats of every legend con-

nected with Hinduism, and likewise has a canto called

Andakécha Padalam, exclusively devoted to a description

of the different systems of world, and of their relative

magnitudes and distances, and the causes of eclipses of the

sun and moon, as revealed by Chukhiran, the preceptor of

the demons to their king Charan. Its author, Kachchiyap-

par, was a Brahman of Kafichipuram (Conjeveram), in the

Carnatic; and Mr. Roberts, in his “ Oriental Illustrations of

the Sacred Scriptures,” p. 3, supposes that it may have been

written 1,500 years ago; but this supposition is evidently

a mistake, as some of the personages whose names occur in

the introductory stanzas appeared to have lived not earlier

than the tenth or eleventh century.

3. Paratam.

A poem in 50 cantos, comprising 4,288 stanzas. Treats of

the ancestry of the Pandavar and Kauravar princes, and of

the great battle which was fought between them near Delhi,

in consequence of the latter having dispossessed the former

of their kingdom by a device. The author, Vedliputiur

Alvar, was a chief of the Vaishnavas at Chaniyur, in the

Carnatic, and it is believed that he wrote his work by desire

of the king Karzkala Cholan, whose installation is dated

465 A.D.

4. Iraku Vankisham.

A poem in 26 cantos, comprising 2,444 stanzas. Treats of

the history of Rama’s ancestors from Jraku and of that of

Rama himself. It is an imitation from Kalitdcha’s Sanskrit

work under the same title: by Arachakéchari, brother of

Pararacha Chékaran, king of Jaffna. |

5. Naidatam.

A poem in 28 cantos, comprising 1,171 stanzas. Treats of

No. 4.—1848.| CATALOGUE OF TAMIL BOOKS. 69

the adventures of Nalan, king of Nishata, and Tamayantn,

his consort. This work was composed by no less a perso-

nage than the king Atiwira Rama Pandiyan, who reigned

at Madura about the middle of the eleventh century, and

Mr. Hillis in noticing it in his commentary on the Kural,

p. 163, observes that “its high and courteous tone, notwith-

standing the frequent occurrence of those gaudy images and

far-sought allusions which European taste will denominate

conceits, is worthy of the princely author.”

6. Nala Venpa.

A poem in 3 cantos, comprising 418 stanzas of the

species called venpa. Treats of the same subject as the last,

but with a studied brevity. The author, Pukalénti, was a

contemporary of Kampan, and, like him, attached to the

court of the king Kulotunka Cholan.

7. Chintamani.

A poem in 10 cantos, comprising 3,315 stanzas. “The

queen Vichaiyai, the mother of Chivakan, the hero of the

poem, was forced to fly, while far gone with child of him,

from the field of battle in which the king her husband

Chachchantan was slain by his rebellious minister, and was

overtaken by the pains of labour in a burning ground.

Here she was compelled to abandon her new-born infant,

who was found and brought up by a man of the Vaisya

caste. The mother took refuge with a society of holy

virgins in the wilderness, where she was discovered at length

by her son, after he had arrived at a mature age, and had

acquired great renown by many glorious achievements.”

Ellis’ Kural, p. 260. The author’s name is not mentioned,

but he describes himself as a Chaina sage.

8. Chilappatikaram.

This poem treats of the adventures of a Chedd?, named

Kovalan, who was put to death at Madura on a false charge

70 JOURNAL, R-A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr I. -

of having stolen a Chilampu, or foot-ring, belonging to the

king. Itis written in a very high style in illustration of the

rules of Tamil prosody, but the author and the date are

both unknown. |

9. Periya Puranam.

A poem in 56 cantos, comprising 4,000 stanzas. Recounts

the devotion and marvellous actions of the sixty-three

Tondars, or special votaries of Szva, including the king

Manu Nitti Cholan, who is said to have put his only son to

death for driving over and killing a calf accidentally in the

street of Tiruvaluntaér. By Chékhilar.

10. Tiruvilaiyadal Puranam.

A poem in 72 cantos, comprising 3,362 stanzas. Gives an

account of the sixty-four sports of S:va in his character as

Chuntaréswarar at Madura, as also of the Pdéndiya kings in

whose reigns they occurred. ‘Though replete with absurdi-

ties, it contains some fragments of real history, especially in

relation to the contest between the Chaivas and Buddhists,

and the extirpation of the Jatter by the former under the

government of Kuna Pdndiyan. The author, Parafchot

Tampiran, was a Chaiva ascetic, who flourished in the middle

of the eleventh century.

An analysis of this poem has been published by the Rev.

W. Taylor, in his ‘‘ Oriental Historical Manuscripts,”’ Vol. I.

ll. Tiruvatavur Puranam.

A poem in 7 cantos, comprising 545 stanzas. Treats of the

history of Tiruvdtaviirar, otherwise called Manikkavdchakar,

who was prime minister to the king Arimarttana Pandiyan at

Maturai, and afterwards, adopting the life of an ascetic,

retired to Chitamparam, and there distinguished himself by

defeating the Buddhists of Ceylon in controversy, and con-

verting them to the Chaiva religion.

The sixth canto of this poem has been translated by me

No. 4.—1848.] CATALOGUE OF TAMIL BOOKS. 71

into English, and published with Notes in the Society’s

Journal for 1846.

12. Arichchantira Purénam.

A poem in 10 cantos, comprising 1,212 stanzas. Describes

the adventures of the king Arichchantiran, or Harischandra,

who was subjected to many trials and afflictions, and lost

his kingdom as well as his wife and son, and became him-

self sold asa slave to a Paraiyan; but was finally restored

to his former prosperity. The author, Virakavirdyan,

represents himself as a poet of Madllir, and to have recited

his work before the assembly of the learned criticsat Maturai,

in the year of Chaka 1446, or 1524 a.p. .

13. Valaiwichu Purdnam.

This poem treats of the legend of Parvati as the dauente:

of Liriyampakan, king of the Parawas, and Varuna Valh, his

consort, under the name of Tiraichér Madantai.

An abstract of this poem has been given by me in my

remarks on the origin and history of the Parawas. Vide

Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, vol. IV.

14. Kachi Kéandam. 2

A poem in 101 cantos, comprising 2,529 stanzas. Treats

of the holy city of Kachi or Benares, as-also of the prescribed

observances of men and women in different conditions of

life, and of the atonements appointed for various sins. The

author is the same as that of No. 5. 2

15. Ilnka Puranam.

A poem treating of the origin of the different clinkas of

Siva, and of the merits of the worship offered to them,

illustrated by sundry legends.

~Chevvant, Puranam.

A poem in 12cantos. Treats of the submersion of Uraiyir,

the capital of the king Parantaka Chola, by a shower of

72 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr I.

earth, as a punishment for his having forcibly taken from

the sage Chadaimunz some chevvant: flowers, which the latter

had reared for offering at the shrine of Siva at Trichinopoly.

17. Vichuoa Puranam.

Legends of Vichuva Karma, the Hindi Vulcan.

18. Chittira Puranam.

Legends of Chitragupta, the Register of Yama, the god

of death.

19. Valhyamman Puranam.

A poem treating of the loves and marriage of Shanda

with Val, who was brought up by the Védas in the wood.

20. Virachinkatana Purdnam, —

A poem treating of the legend of Charanka Tévar, of

Kumpakénam : by Velaiya Chuvam.

The following poems, from No. 21 to ee are styled

Sthalla Purdnas, as they have for their subjects chiefly

the origin and sanctity of the different stalams, or places of

Hindu worship in India. Mr. Ellis, in his tract on Mirasi

Rights, speaking of these poems, observes that “after

passing the fables of mythological periods, with which they

usually commence, and gaining the bounds of rational

chronology, they contain much of what may be considered

as the real history of the country, though stiil obscured

occasionally by allegory and distorted by extravagance.”

21. Arunachala Puranam.

A poem in 12 cantos, comprising 586 stanzas. ‘Treats of

the shrine of Szva at Arunachalam, or Tiruvannamalai, in

the Carnatic, where, when Brahma and Vishnu contended for

superiority, he is said to have sprung up before them in the

form of a fiery pillar, entirely passing through all worlds,

and told them that whoever succeeded in finding his summit

or base should be the greatest, which neither of them was

No. 4.—1848.] CATALOGUE OF TAMIL BOOKS. 73

able to do, notwithstanding the one assuming the shape of a

swan ascended to the region of immensity, and the other,

transforming himself into a boar, dug through the earth with

his tusks, and descendedinto the abyss. The author’s name

is Ellappa, but the date is unknown. :

22. Viruttachala Puranam.

This poem is also termed Tirumadukkunra Puranam. It

consists of 434 stanzas, distributed into 18 cantos, and treats

of the shrine of Siva at Viruttachalam, a hill-town to the

south of Madras. The author and the date are both un-

known.

| 23. Liruchchentar Purdanam.

A poem in 18 cantos, comprising 900 stanzas, treats of the

shrine of Skanda at Tiruchchentur, Tirunelvéli, The author

and the date both unknown.

24. Chéetu Puranam.

A poem in 50 cantos, comprising 3,437 stanzas. Treats of

the shrine of Siva at Lraméchuram, as also of the merits of

bathing in certain spots of the sea in that neighbourhood,

especially on the side of the rocks supposed to be the remains

of the chetu or bridge erected by Adama for passing over with

hisarmyto Ceylon. The author is called Alakia Teéchikar,

but the date is unknown.

25. Koyit Puranam.

A poem in 5 cantos, comprising 410 stanzas. Treats of the

shrine of Siva at Chitamparam, where once upon a time he

is said to have manifested his presence visibly among his

worshippers, and danced the Tandavam before them. The

author is called Umapat: Chivachariyar, but the date is

unknown. | 7

26. Tirukkalukkunra Purdnam.

This poem describes the shrine of Svva at Kalukkunram,

or “‘the Hagle Mountain,” so called from the sons of the sage

74 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. IT., Parr I.

Viruttachiva, who were born as eagles, having obtained their

human forms by doing penance on itssummit. The author

is said to have been a blind poet, named Kawi Vira Rakava

Mutaliyar.

27. Védapurr Purdnam.

A poem treating of the shrines of Siva at Védapuri, or

Tiruvedkalaru, near Chitambaram, supposed to have been

the joint production of the celebrated Chaiva devotees Appar

Chuntarar and Manikkavachakar.

28. Katich Purdnam.

UA poem treating of the shrines of Siwa and Parvati at

Kanchipuram : by the same author as that of No. 1.

29. Palani Purdnam.

A poem treating of the shrine of Skanda at Palani, in the

south of Coimbatore.

30. Trruppuvana Puranam.

A poem treating of the shrine of Siva at Tiruppuvanam,

near Chitambaram.

1. Tiruppachur Puranam.

A poem treating of the shrine of Swva at Tiruppachur, in

the Carnatic.

32. Champukéswmara Purénam.

A poem treating of the shrine of Siva at Champukésware a,

or Tiruvdnaikka, near Trichinopoly.

33. Tiruvaiyatiu Puranam.

A poem treating of the shrines of Siva at Tiruvaiyaru,

near Tanjore.

34. Kalatts Puranam.

A poem treating of the shrine of Siva at Kalatii, or Ké-

lastiri,a mountain and town in the Carnatic, where a black

elephant, as the name implies, is said to have worshipped

him. This work was undertaken by Karunatppirakacha

No. 4.—1848.] cATALOGUE OF TAMIL BOOKS. ris)

Chuvami, but was finished by his brothers Chivapprakacha

Chuvami and Vélaiya Chuvami, all of whom were Chaiva

priests, and flourished in the seventeenth century.

: 39. Nallur Purdnam.

A poem treating of the shrine of Siva at Nallur: by

Vélaiya Chuvami.

36. TLirukiva Puranam.

A poem treating of the shrine of Siva at Tirukivam: by

Chivapprakacha Chuvami.

One a7. Chirkali Purdnam.

A poem treating of the shrine of Siva at Chirkéli, or

“ Seegally,” near Chitambaram : by Arunachala Kavirayar,

who lived between 1705 and 1772 a.p.

38. Kulattur Purdnam.

A poem treating of the shrine of Shanda at Kulattir, near

Madras : by Charavanapperumal Aiyar.

39. Tanikar Puranam.

A poem treating of the shrine of Skanda at Tanihat, near

Madras : by Kantappa Aiyar.

40. Kayilacha Purdnam.

A poem treating of the Kayilacha, or Paradise of Srva, as

also of his shrine at Trincomalee.

41. Tiruvarur Puranam.

A poem treating of the shrine of Siva at Tiruvarur.

42. Maka Purdnam.

A poem in 32 cantos, comprising 1,492 stanzas, treats of

the origin and merits of the ablutions performed by the

Chawas in the month of d/aka (February-March).

43. Chivarattiri Purdnam.

A poem in 9 cantos, comprismg 652 stanzas, relates to the

Vigil and Fast observed by the Chawwas during the night

preceding the new moon in the month of Maka.

76 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL, Parr I.

44. Vikkinéswara Puranam.

A poem treating of the legends of Vikkinéswara, the

elephant-faced god.

45. Kayilacha Malai.

An account of the first settlement of the Tamils in Jaffna,

together with the legends of the Cidéla princess, who was

relieved from the deformity of a horse’s head with which she

had the misfortune to be born, by bathing at the well at

Kirt Malar.

47. Kalveddu.

An account of the king Kulakkoddu Maharaja founding

and endowing a temple in honour of Svva, or Konéswara, at

Trincomalee. An abstract of this poem in English has

been published by me in the Supplement to the Ceylon

Gazette of November 26, 1831.

The following are written in prose :-—

48. Nalan Kataz.

The adventures of the king Nala, and Tamayanti, his

consort. This work has been translated into English by

Mr. Kindersley, and published in his “ Specimens of Hindu

Literature.”’

49. Llramar Katat.

The adventures of Rama.

00. Virakumaran Katac.

The adventures of Virakumdran. An abstract of this

work is given in Mr. Robert’s “ Illustrations of the Sacred

Seriptures,”’ pp. 199-203.

D1. Chiruttondan Katar.

An account of Chiruttondan, a Chaiva devotee, who lived

at Tiruchchenkaédu.

No. 4.—1848.| CATALOGUE OF TAMIL BOOKS. - 77

D2. -Aswamétayaha Katat.

An account of the sacrifice of a horse by the Pandavas

after their victory over Turiyotanan.

53. Kafchan Kata.

_ An account of Kafichan, the tyrant of Maturai, as also of

Krishna, by whom he was destroyed.

The following works on History and Biography belong to

the Tamil Christians and the Moors :—

1. Tempavane.

A poem in 386 cantos, comprising 3,613 stanzas, written

by the Rev. Father C. J. Beschi, in 1726. Its principal

subject is the history of the Holy Family, but it inciden-

tally treats of all the remarkable events recorded in the Old

and New Testaments, as wellas of the lives of the Saints in

the early ages of the Church.

2. Trruchcheluar Kaviyam.

A poem in 24 cantos, comprising 1,948 stanzas, treats of

the history of Ziruchchelwar, an Indian prince, who was

converted to Christianity by the anchorite Barlam. -

3. Chikamani Matai.

A poem treating of the history of Tévachakayan, otherwise

called Nilakandan, who was Champridi, or minister, of Vai-

chamarttandan, king of Travancore, but having adopted the

Catholic faith was degraded from his office, put to torture,

and finally shot on a hill near Arampall by order of his

royal master.

4, Atichacya Kandam.

A poem recounting the miracles wrought by God at the

intercession of the Blessed Virgin.

rie JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr I.

De Joseph Puranam.

A poem treating of the history of Joseph and his brethren,

written by the poet Kilankai Tampirdn, and inscribed to

the Rev. Philip De Melho, of Jaffna.

6. Chira.

A poem treating of the birth and exploits of Muhammad:

by Umaru Pulavan, of Kayilipaddanam.

7. Kankapisheka Malai.

A poem treating of the history of Muhammad and that of

his four immediate successors: by Kana Kavirdyan.

8. Misrasi Male.

A poem treating of Muhammad's Night Journey to -

Heaven: by Ali Pulavan. -

9. Shidad Purdnam.

A poem treating of the history of Shidad, the first king

of the tribe of Ad, who attempted to create a paradise on

earth, proposing thereby to render himself equal to God,

whose honours he claimed.

10. Misa Napr Puranam.

A poem treating of the history of Moses.

ll. Yusuphu Napi Kaviyam.

A poem treating of the history of Joseph.

12. Jbne Andan Pataweddu.

A poem treating of the victory of Al over [bnt Andan

and two other kings: by Auyar Kaviradyan.

13. Subyil Pataweddu.

A poem treating of the victory of Ad over the king Sudy ;

by Varise: Meiyan.

14. Zakkun Pataweddu.

A poem treating of the victory of Al over the king

Lakkun: by Varisec Meryan.

No. 4.—1848.] caraLoGUE oF TAMIL BOOKS. as)

15. Kasim Pataweddu.

A poem treating of the victory of Kasim over some infidel

chieftains.

16. Samaun Pataweddu.

A poem treating of a boy, named Samaun, killing an

infidel chieftain in a single combat.

17. Muhaiuddin Purénam.

A poem treating of the history of Muhaiuddin, Kaliph of

Bagdad, who his considered by the Moors as a great saint :

by Muhavuddin Pulavar.

18. Muhaiuddin Malar.

A poem treating of the same subject as the last, but

with a studied brevity and ina different style: by Maula

Pulavan, of Chattankudi.

19. Abusahamma Charitar.

A poem treating of the history of Adusahamma, who was

put to death by the Kaliph Umaru, his own'father, for adul-

tery and drinking.

| 20. Damimansa Charitar.

A poem treating of the adventures of Damiman in the

Great Desert : by Ségu Lebbe Pulavan.

21. Ansarun Pataweddu.

A poem treating of the victory of Ali over the king

Ansarun.

22. kabsukul Pataweddu.

A poem treating of the victorv of Al over the king

Rabsukul.

The following works are written in prose :—

23. Periya Puranam.

The History of the Bible: by the Rev. Father Jacome

Goncalves.

1s a

80 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. IL., Parr I.

24. Chinna Purdnam.

A compendium of the preceding work: by the same

author.

25. Tévappirachayin Tirukkatar.

The History of the People of God: by the Rev. Father

Gabriel Pacheco.

26. Chukirta Tarppanam.

The Lives of the Saints : by the Rev. Jacome Goncalves.

27, The Historia Ecclesiastica.

By the Rev. C. T. Walther, Tranquebar, 1731.

28. The Life of the Venerable Joseph Vas.

By the Rev. Father Gabriel Pacheco.

29. The Life of St. Francis Xavier.

By the same author as the last.

30. <A Summary story of Hindustan, from

‘the Muhammadan Invasion.

By P. Nénappirakacha, Mutaliyar, Vepery, 1830.

(To be continued.)

No. 4.—1848.] SKETCHES IN NATURAL HISTORY. 81

SKETCHES

IN THE NATURAL HISTORY OF CEYLON:

ORNITHOLOGY.

By HE. L. Layvarp, Esq., ¢.M.z.s.

(Read February 24, 1849.)

On THE Genus Bucco. \

THE design of the following sketches is to illustrate the

Fauna of this Island. They are intended to form part of a

series of Papers commencing with the Indigenous Mammalia,

proceeding downwards in the scale of creation to the

zoophites which inhabit our seashores and lakes.

They are in a manner out of place here; but as this and

the succeeding group have lately occupied much of my

attention during leisure hours, I have been induced to

embody my notes while the interest attached to them was

yet fresh in my mind.

“There is one of these provinces’’—says Mr. Kirby, speak-

ing of the pursuits of the Zoological Club, in his address

at the foundation of the Zoological Club (November 29,

1823)—“ that 1 think ought to stand high in the esteem of

every patriot zoologist,— I mean the study of the animals

that are natives or periodical visitants of his own country.

An Indigenous Fauna is the first desideratum in our

science ; and could a work of this kind be accomplished in

every country, regard being had to natural boundaries, we

might hope to become acquainted with all the principal

eroups of animals, and get a much more correct idea than

_ with our present imperfect knowledge we can attain to, of

82 JOURNAL, B.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IT., Parr I.

the genuine Systema animalkum, with all its infinities and -

analogies as concatenated and contrasted by ibs Great

Author.”

Agreeing entirely with the view here taken by the learned

writer, I have, since my residence in the Island, sought to

gain an intimate acquaintance with its animal productions.

And that the small amount of knowledge thus acquired

should not be quite useless, but haply serve as a stepping-

stone for others, I prefer giving it at once to the public,

rather than await perfection, which, in a study of this nature,

is never attained ; each succeeding day disclosing a new

and varied page in the inexhaustible Book of Nature.

The family selected for the subject of the present Paper

derives its name from the conspicuous tufts of bristles

projecting forward along the bill,—in some species surpas-

sing it in length; the bill itself is very robust and conical,

and generally as long, if not longer than the head. From

the width of the gape the various species, all eminently

baccivorous, are able to swallowa good-sized fruit.* The

nostrils are round and exposed. Feet zygodactyle, resem-

bling the Pcide, like whom, it is said, they climb, and

even “tap.’’ On this latter point I am very sceptical,

considering that the Picide do it to obtain their insect prey,

while the Buccomde are fruit-eaters. As to their climbing

even, I doubt if it extends beyond crawling up to their nests

in the holes of old trees, which the natives tell me they do,

always alighting a little below and climbing upwards. My.

informants alluded particularly to B. rubricapillus and

Havifrons. Wellauthenticated information on these points

would clear up much uncertainty.f

* f once shot &. caniceps with a fruit in its throat, ‘the stone of

which measured three-fourths of an inch in diameter.

+ In confirmation of what L before observed as regards the daily

acquirement of knowledge in natural history, I extract the folluwing.

pee ET

No. 4.—1848.] skETCHES IN NATURAL HISTORY. 83

Group: Zygodactyli.

Family : Bucconide (Barbets ).

Genus : Bucco (Linn.).

B. caniceps (Franklin).—This is the largest Barbet we

have. It measures about 94 in. in length—of wing 4} in.,

tail ,% in., tip of bill to forehead 7% in.; colour of bill is

reddish ; a patch of bare skin of a dull orange colour sur-

rounds the eye, and extends some distance backward ; colour

above, green ; head and neck brownish freckled with white,

each feather being brown, with the shaft whitish ; vent,

bright green; legs, orange.*

Common in Ceylon, frequenting trees, on the fruit and

berries of which they feed. The note is a shrill “ Poo poo

poop,” often repeated. Native name, Mal hottorumd.

B. flavifrons (Cuv.).—This handsome species is next in

size to B. caniceps, measuring about 74 in. in length --

bill to forehead 1 in., of wing 4 in., tail 21 in.; above,

dark green; the edges of the feathers paled; forehead,

golden yellow, the colour extending over the head along the

shafts of the feathers ; there is also a spot of yellow at the

base of the bill. The chin is blue; a similar coloured patch

_ surrounds the eye, extending backwards ; lower mandible of

beak yellowish brown, upper mandible deep brown; vent,

yellowish green ; breast the same, but the feathers being

each edged with a darker green give it ascaled appearance ;

inside of wing blue and buff; underside of tail and legs

verditor. This species is confined to the hilly country, where

it replaces B. caniceps, and is very common: they are

from my note book :—‘ Saturday, March 17.‘ B. rubricapillus’: Shot

this species climbing up the limb of a tree, and chipping off bark in quest

of insects.” My attention was drawn to the bird by the tapping

it made, and I shot it thinking it was a new woodpecker,

* B. Zeylanicus so closely resembles this in all respects except size,

that I am inclined to think it a mere variety. When the examination

of numerous specimens shall have cetermined this it shall be noticed.

84 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Von. IL, Parr I.

generally found in pairs, and the moment one begins its

shrill call the other answers it. This call resembles some-

what that of 6. Indicus, the next species, but is louder

and more shrill, and may be heard to a great distance.

This species has been hitherto considered very rare, and

rests principally on the authority of Levaillant. It is

peculiar to the Island, as many other varieties of birds and

animals are, which have remained unknown for years, but

will soon, I trust, grace the cabinets of our Museum, and

take their place among the described species of the Indian

Fauna.

B, Indicus (Linn.).—Length, 63 in., 1 wing about 3 in.,

tail 14 in., bill to forehead 2 in.; above, green with a

ruddyish tinge, the feathers slightly marginated with

yellow; below, yellowish-white, each feather centred with

green ; forehead and gorget brilliant crimson, immediately

behind which is a black band fading off into dark lead colour ;

below the gorget is a narrow band of golden yellow ; chin

and throat sulphur colour ;a similar coloured spot surrounds

the eye; base of bill black, as is also the bill itself ; feet

reddish, with black claws.

They are fond of sitting on a dead twig, or tree-top, utter-

ing their dull, monotonous call, generally beginning with a

loud “‘tur-r-r-r-r,” ascending the gamut and ending with

“ko-turr, ko-turr.”” Hence the native name of the whole

genus, Kotléruwo. The species is very common in Jaftna

and Colombo, but not so much so in the hills, where B.

rubricapillus replaces it. They are very partial to the

young fruit of the cotton and tamarind, which abound in

the Jaffna district.

B. rubricapil/lus (Gemlin).—Much resembles the pre-

ceding in size and colour, but the forehead with a smaller

aud less brilliant red patch ; the gorget is almost obsolete (in

- some specimens quite so), and the throat, chin, and eye-spot

No. 4.—1848.| skETCHES IN NATURAL HISTORY. 85

deep dull orange; the upper parts are of a more unvaried

green, and the lower lighter and streakless.

Found in Colombo and Jaffna, occasionally in company

with the preceding, but its great haunt seems to be about

Kandy, where it may be found in smal! parties of six or eight.

When one flies from a tree the rest all follow, and though

the Indian species are said to be solitary, this one is certainly

not so. They also roost in these small parties, as in the

evening I have seen them seeking their roosting-place

together. Native name, Kottérumd.

Nothing is known of the birds, &., of the Batticaloa

district. Contributions from thence will prove most accep-

table to the Society’s Museum. JB. caniceps and Indicus I

have seen from thence, but some even of the Indian species

may yet be found there. In a small collection presented

to our president, I found two specimens of Halcyon capensis,

which is stated to be common there, though unknown in

this part of the Island. Also ina small lot of skins brought

thence by a friend, I detected five species not found here—-

one of them a water-rail (fallus). The district is rich in

water-birds, and worthy the attention of any of our r members

who may be visiting it.

On tHE Genus Mirundo.

In commenting on the Fissirostral tribe, Swainson has

well and shortly described them in the following passage :—

“The Fissirostral birds, as a whole, are peculiarly distin-

guished by having the powers of flight developed in the

highest degree: all the energies of their nature seem con-

centrated in this one perfection ; for their feet are always

very short, weak, and generally so imperfect as to be of no

further use than to rest the body after flight. Their

food is exclusively insects, captured upon the wing. To

accomplish this, nature has given to their mouths enormous

86 "| JOURNAL, B.A.8. (CHYLON). “[Vou. IL, Parr E.

width, by which, superadded to their amazing flight and

rapidity of movement, they are almost sure to capture their

prey.” Here, then, are well summed up all the general

qualities of the swallow race ; a few individual peculiari-

_ ties of course remain, which will be noticed under the

respective species. The family is divided into two sub-—

families, Hirundo and Cypselus, the latter again sub-divided

into the following :— Cypselus, ee es Collocahia, and

Macropteryx.

Hirundo (Linn.).— Bill flattened Jhnometort - upper

mandible slightly hooked; rictus devoid of vibrisse ;

feet insessorial ; lateral toes equal; hind and middle toes

equal, and as long as, if not longer than, the tarsus ;

plumage lustrous ; tail more or less forked.

Only two of this genus have as yet been recognised in

Ceylon; but one of them is an undescribed species, and, so

far as I can ascertain, is not migratory, but confined to our

Island.

fH. gutturalis(Scopoli); H. pna yana(Lath.); AH. Javanica

(Sparr.); £4. Javanica (Sykes).—Common in India and the

Malay countries generally. They arrive in Colombo about

the end of September. I saw them in Jaffna in abundance

during the months of January and February. I have never

yet seen the nests of these birds, nor can I conceive where

they build so as to escape notice. I have observed them

sitting much on the stony edge of the moat, both here and

in Jaffna, fond of hunting over grassy fields and meadows.

Plumage glossy, blue on the back ; wings and tail inclining

to brown ; forehead and throat rufous; colour below the

throat steel blue; underneath flesh-coloured; tail barred

with white; outer tail feathers very long, having been

known to exceed the next by 22 in.

A. hyperythra (Layard).—This handsome swallow is con-

fined to the hilly region of Ceylon, and is an undescribed

No. 4.—1848.| SKETCHES IN NATURAL HISTORY. 87

species new to the Indian Fauna. My first acquaintance

with the species was in November, 1847, when on a journey

to Kandy. Their glossy blue wings and back contrasting

with their red underside and tail coverts, struck my atten-

tion, nor could I remember having ever seen any other

swallow with the same fine tints. During our breakfast at

Ambépussa they were continually skimming over the open

space in front of the bungalow and along the river in search

of their insect prey. Not having a gun I was obliged to

content myself with making a note of them in my Journal

of Natural History. In February of last year Mr. Brodie,

of Puttalam, showed me a very fresh specimen of a new

swallow, which he said he had found in a chena towards

Kurunégala. This I instantly recognised as the Ambépussa

bird, and this is the first instance of its being procured.

Subsequently I observed them at Ambagamuwa in March,

and at Kandy in November. ‘They frequent the hills free

from high trees, and are fond of perching in flocks on the

coffee and other low bushes, sallying off occasionally in

quest of insects.* 7

Plumage of the back as far as the tail coverts glossy

steel blue. Tail coverts, vent, and breast deep rufous;

throat inclining to yellow; just over, and in front of the

eye, is a still darker rufous line. The shafts of the breast

and throat feathers are black, the colour extending in some

* The late Dr. Gardner told me that a pair of these birds built their

nest ona ring in the ceiling of his house in the Botanical Gardens at

Péradeniya. The ring supported a chain and henging lamps in the

centre of the sitting-room. This shows their fearless nature, resembling

in this respect the common martin of England, and also in the struc-

ture of their nest, which Dr. Gardner described as “ made of clay and

like that of the Kinglish swallow.” Eggs unknown at present: but I

trust this notice may attract the attention of some one residing in the

interior, and lead to specimens being sent to us for our local Museum.

The young birds frequented the nest fora month after being full aoe

returning to it every night to roost.

88 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL, Parr I.

instances to the feather; under tail coverts rufous, with

steel blue tips; the tail and wing primaries glossy rifle

green. In size these birds exceed /. gutturalis, both in

length and plumpness. The wings are pointed, and the tail

forked, though not to the extent of the preceding. The

exterior feathers I have never observed of equal length.

Bill distinctly hooked and notched; feet and legs more

robust than among the generality of swallows; lateral toes

equal; hind toe longer than middle, and as long as

tarsus.

Macropteryx (Swainson).—An intermediate genus of

Swainson’s, between Mirundo and Cypselus. Tarsus very

short and bare ; anterior toes of nearly equal length; halux

shortest ; hind toe very weak and short; plumage silky;

head crested ; tail very long and much forked ; outer tail

feathers projecting upwards of 2 in. beyond the next.

Wings in some very long.

We have but one of the present genus in the islved

M. coronatus (or longipenius), which appears to be

generally distributed, though not very common. I have

traced it along the western coast to Jaffna, in the interior

to Kandy, and along the Ambagamuwa range. In Colombo

it is met with in small parties, frequenting the cinnamon

gardens in the neighbourhood of high jungle. They havea

long sailing flight, during which they utter a peculiar note

distinct from any of the swallow tribes, and not unlike the

words “ chiffle-chafile, chiffle-chaffe,” ending with “ klecho-

klecho,” often repeated,—-the cry they likewise utter when

perched on the leafless branches of trees on the look-out for

insects. The crest on the head is on such occasions rapidly

elevated and depressed. Our Ceylon specimens agree well

with the description given by Dr. Blyth of the Indian birds.

“Outer tail, &c.” Ihave never been able to ascertain the

breeding-place of these birds, although they seem to remain

No. 4.—1848.] SKETCHES IN NATURAL HISTORY. 89

most of the year with us, appearing in March and continu-

ing till December. It is said that they build in hollow trees.*

Acanthylis (Boie.) ; Chetura (St.).—From Macropteryx

we pass to the present genus, containing the largest of our

Mrundinde. Of this also only one species has been dis-

covered in the Island, namely, A. caudacuta, Hdo. caudacuta

(Latham); Cyp. giganteus (Temp.). This gigantic swift

seems confined to Nuwara Eliya, where, according to Lieut.

Sillery, c.z.z. (to whom I am indebted for the only speci-

men I possess), it flies with amazing velocity. The natives

say they build in hollow rhododendron trees which abound

on the plain.

This bird may be easily known by collectors from its

large size (being about 9 in. in length) and its spiny

tail. Swainson’s characters of the genus are as follow :—

“Feet as in Macropteryx, but the tarsus longer than the

middle toe ; tail short, and even the shafts prolonged into

acute points ; the outer tail coverts are white; the chin

also is whitish.”

From this gensu we pass to Cypselus (illiger), having the

tarsus thickly clothed, toes short, and all directed forwards. ft

This is the common Indian Uban swift, but with us it is

rare, it having only twice fallen under my notice, and both

times in Colombo in the neighbourhood of Slave Island. [

do not know that it breeds with us, though it builds in

great numbers at Madura.

* Capt. Tickell.

{ These characters do not apply to the sub-genus Collocalia, in which

the feet and legs are naked, and the halux well opposed. (Swainson

seems to have omitted this family altogether.) ‘'ail in most instances

forked, orindented. The whole tribe are of very uniform colours,—sooty

black or brown with glossy tints, sometimes relieved with white on the

throat, belly, or tail coverts. Our ascertained species consist of C.

affins (Gray), easily known by its white rump and throat and blacker

plumage than any of our other swifts ; length about 53 in.; expanse of

_wing 12 in.

90 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vow IL., Parr I.

C. balasiensis, (Gray ).—The smallest and commonest of

our Cypselide, frequenting palmyra trees in all parts of

the country. Its colour is one unvaried ashy brown, with

a tinge of green in its gloss. Total length 4% in. Tail

very forked. On the wing it may be easily distinguished

from the preceding by its slimmer shape and deeper forked

tail, which it is continually unclosing and folding. It may

be found on the wing all through the day, but in the

evening it is most brisk, hawking after its food and chasing

its fellows with shrill screams round some solitary pal--

myra tree, in the dead and hanging fronds of which several

pairs build their nests, which are composed of the dry cotton

of the Bombax pentandron and other light flossy substances,

collected by them on the wing, and cemented together in a

semi-circular shaped cup, attached by the flat side to the

leaf. The eggs are of a pure white. I have never found

more than three in a nest. They breed in the months of

May and June, perhaps oftener, as contrary to my former

supposition I found they are only partially migratory.

Genus Collocalha (Gray).—This genus has been estab-

lished for the reception of the fabricators of the celebrated

edible nests of the Chinese gourmands. Instructure the birds

prove to be true Cypseli, but of a feeble race; they also

differ in the feet and naked tarsi, the hind toe being well

opposed, though capable of rotating forward. Three species

only are well known: it is probable there are many more, but

from the conflicting accounts of travellers much uncertainty

still exists concerning them.* Of those three, one only has

* Kxeract of a private letter to the author from Dr. KH. Blyth, Curator

Hon. HK. I. Co.’s Museum, Calcutta, dated August 7, 1849 :—‘ I shall,

therefore, be glad of uny additional information you might be able to

supply me with relation to distribution of species, their nidification,

&c., and at present I should be glad to know if any edible birds’ nests

are gathered on the Ceylon coast; and, if so, whatever you can learn

about them, with specimens of the birds, probably of more then-one

species, which construct them, and the nest of each species ....... Since

No. 4.—1848.] SKETCHES IN NATURAL HISTORY. 91

hitherto been observed in Ceylon, and as the nidification of

the whole group requires investigation, I am induced to give

at length the observations which I have made upon this

species. My first acquaintance with it was on October 17,

1848, when I killed a specimen from a flock flying

over low paddy fields at Kétté. The bird was full fledged

andin good condition ; small flies, &c., were found in its mouth

and throat. Not having any means of identification 1 knew

not how to class it, as it did not strictly accord with any of

Swainson’s characteristic marks of Cypselus or Hirundo. —

During circuit at Kandy in November I obtained several

adult specimens. They appeared very numerous, flying at

a vast height over the hills surrounding the town.*

' I had previously heard that near Kalutara, somewherein

the Pasdun Kéralé, the Chinese collected the nests of the

Edible Swallow; but it never struck me that this was the

fabricator of the far-famed nests. In December, the late

Dr. Gardner, then Superintendent of the Government

Botanical Garden, proposed that I should accompany him

into the Pasdun Koralé (whither he was going in search

of arare fern) to inspect the cave where these swallows

were said to build. We accordingly left Kalutara on

December 18, and walked to Hevessa, a distance of

35 or 40 miles. We reached our destination in the evening

of the 20th, when we immediately ascended to the cave,

writing the foregoing 1 have been studying the collocalia, or E. I. B.,

and have come to some notable conclusions respecting them. First, the

Hiro. esculenta (L.), founded on one of Poivers’ drawings, has, I am

satisfied, no prototype in nature, or, if anything, it must be a true

-Hiruudo, with white tail markings, erroneously supposed to be the

fabricators of the celebrated nests. Secondly, the 4. nidijica of Latham

or H. esculenta (Apud Shaw, Hors, &c.), is not the builder of them,

but the so-called H. Fuciphaga of Thunheyt, the various descriptions

of whose nidification, and tnat ot Nidifica, requires to be transposed... ”

* With them appeared a huge swift, which I am inclined to think must

be Cypselus melba, from the whitish throat and belly. From the attitude

kept by these fine swifts I could not even get a shot at a single specimen,

92 JOURNAL, R.A.S- (CEYLON). [VoL. II., Parr I.

which is situated near the summit of a hill, called by the

natives Diyagalaguldwa, or Hunumulnakota, about 500

feet above the level of the plain below. The cave consists

of a huge mass of limestone, which has separated from the

face of the rock, and slipped down upon some loose boulders

below, forming a hollow triangle about fifty or sixty feet long,

by twenty-five broad and twenty high. There are three en-

trances—one at each endand one (a very small one) in the

centre. Therocks which compose the fioor are covered to the

depth of one or two inches with the droppings of theinmates,

old and young, mingled with strands of grass, &c., dropped

from the nest or by the parent birds. The light which strug-

gled into the cave was dim and uncertain, but enough to

enable me to discern many hundred nests glued to the rock,

glistening like flakes of ice. One side of the cave (the hill

side) was entirely unoccupied, I presume on account of the

water, which evidently streamed down it in wet weather,

and perhaps in the dewy morning, collected from off the

trees with which the mountain is densely clad. Within

reach of my hand was a small jedge of rock, from which I -

took five or six nests, and in two of them captured two

single young nestlings, fledged enough to escape, which one

effected. The nests procured were evidently of the most

inferior description, and had been left on that account by

the Chinese for the young brood. They were composed of

dried grasses, mosses, hair of cattle, &c., agglutinated

together, and cemented to the rock by what is presumed to

be the saliva of the parent birds.*

These substances appear to be laid on most irregularly,

in unequal masses. In one nest in my possession the

foundation is in thick patches, clear and semi-diaphanous ;

* Specimens of nests and birds in spirits, for the purpose of being dis-

sected and examined by scientific men, have been forwarded to Calcutta.

The result of this examination will be communicated in a future paper.

No. 4.—1848.] SKETCHES IN NATURAL HISTORY. 93

the interior is lined with thin threads of it, crossing and

recrossing each other in every direction. The ends of the

materials added to it are all drawn together to the upper

corners of the nest, and diverge in the middle, thus

forming a semi-circular shallow cup about 12 in. deep, 23 in.

long, by 2 in. broad. The formation seems grandular, and

effected in layers, which can be split apart with little force.

I cannot detect any appearance of dlood, as remarked by the

Rev. J. Barbe, in the Journal of the Asiatic Society, chapter

Xv., page 363. A new nest in the possession of our Presi- -

dent, Sir J. H. Tennent, is composed entirely of the clean

white gummy matter, without any admixture of grasses or

any foreign body.

The Rev. J. Barbe, speaking of the nests of C. fucifaga,

collected at Mergui, the Nicobars, &c., says: “They are of _

three qualities. The first, of a fine whitish colour, is

obtained before the swift has laid hereggs. This quality is

sold at Penang from 40 to 50 dollars the cattee.*

The second quality, of a brownish colour, is obtained by

taking the nest when the bird has laid her eggs. This

quality is sold at Penang from 20 to 30 dollars the cattee.

The third quality is of a dark colour, mixed with d/ood and

feathers, being obtained by taking the nests when the young

birds have flown.”’ Also: ‘‘ The Chinese say that when the

nest is taken before it is completed the bird makes another,

but of an inferior quality ; and it appears that it exhausts

itself in building the second, the nest being spotted mith

blood.” This would appear to be much the case with C.

nidifica, and accords well with the accounts given to me by

an old Chinaman. Hetold me that they had four harvests

in the year, one of which was early in October. ‘This would

bring the time down to about the age of the nestlings I

* According to the ‘* Batavian Transactions,” for nearly its weight

in silver !

94 JOURNAL, R,A.S. (CEYLON). [ Vou, IL., Parr I,

took, allowing about two months for the building of the

nest, as stated by Heer Hooyman in “ Batavian Transac-

tions,” Dr. Blythstates in his pamphlet that a friend of his,

a, Captain Lewis, saw much of these birds in the Nicobars,

and especially, he has often remarked, that they retire early

in the afternoon to their caverns (7.¢e., about 4 p.m.). But

he states that the edible nests, as we see them, are only the

lining, which comes out entire, though independently affixed

to the rock, being underlaid by a network of some vege-

table fibrous substance placed on the ledges, which the

gatherers are careful never to remove. In both particulars

the Ceylon birds differ from this. Though it was a dull

afternoon, nay, even rained a little, the birds were on the

wing tli dark ;* and in the dirty soiled nests composed of

the vegetable and fibrous substances, and which certainly

had never had a lining, bit evidently formed in one solid

fabric, I captured the young birds ; neither were the ledges,

where such things were, sufficient to sustain a deposit of

material, and in most places the nests were glued to the

smooth surface of the rock, which, as before stated, overhung.

I was told that in the neighbourhood of Hevessa there were

one or two other caves in which the swifts were known to

breed, but had not time to visit them. I should think,

however, judging from the numerous flocks of birds I saw

soaring round the detached summits of the hills in that

district, and also-from the fact of finding them in Kandy

during November and December, that very many caves

- exist, which remain to be discovered, and to add to our

Colonial revenue. The apathy of the natives willin a great

measure defeat this: they leave it entirely in the hands of

—

* December, 1848 :—Walking late in the evening by moonlight in the

Cinnamon Gardens, my attention was attracted by the twittering of C.

nidifica, and looking up I descried thousands hawking for flies; they

ecemed, however, to keep progressing in a N.E. direction.

No. 4.—1848.| SKETCHES IN NATURAL HISTORY. 99

the Chinese, never attempting to speculate in it themselves,

and when, as is the custom, the “rent’’ is put up toauction

by the Government, the Chinese are the only bidders.

Other species of nest-builders may perhaps be found in the

Island. C. fucifaga, for instance, being probably an exclu-

sively sea-coast species, may breed among the rocks and clefts

of the Trincomalee coast. They are known to breed along

the Bay of Bengal ; their nests are of a superior quality to

those of C. nidifica, and might be worthy the attention of any

person residing on the eastern side of our Island.

For the purpose of enabling our readers to identify the

species, | give the description of C. ndifica from a specimen

before me, that of C. fucifaga from Dr. Blyth’s pamphlet :—

C. nidifies. *—Length from 44 in. to 42 in.; of middle tail

feather 2 in., outer 3 in. longer, thus forming, when spread,

an indented tail ; length of wing about 44 in. The general

colour is a glossy fuscous brown, rather light on the

body, and below very pale ; bill very short ; nostrils broad

and prominent ; eyes large and sunken.

C. fucifaga; fH. fucifaga (Thim.).—About 34 in. in

length by 9 in. in expanse; the tail 14 in., and even;

wing 32 in.; colour above blackish green, and purple

glossed ; below, fuscous brown, passing to white on the

middle of the belly, with whitish edges to the lower

tail-coverts. A single large feather with a distinct supple-

mentary plumelet grows on the hind toe, being nearly as

long as the toe with its claw: this is always normally

present, but is often lost in dry specimens.

Before quitting this subject I must glance at a para-

graph which has been brought to my notice in a work

entitled “ Illustrations of Instinct,” by J. Couch, Esq., F.L.s.,

* C. nidifica; H, nidifica (Lath.); H. esculenta, assud. Horsfield ; ZH.

Jucifaga, assud. Shaw; H. brevirostris (McClelland) ; H. unicolor

(Jordon), and Cypselus concolor, of the same author.

96 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). (Vou. IL, Parr I.

&c., page 127, It is as follows, and I quote it at

length that the subject may be freely canvassed :—‘ It ig

believed that all the species comprised in the Linnean

genus [Hirundo, scattered as they are in almost every corner

of the earth, are impressed with a migratory character, and

that their nests are generally formed in some cooler tempe-

rature than that which receives them at the opposite season

of the year. And though it is known that in the Island of

Madeira, in Ceylon, Surinam, Egypt, and probably in-

some other parts of Africa, swallows are found throughout

the year, yet it seems that in all these the numbers vary ~

with the season, which implies a migration of part of them ;

and it does not appear that any of those which remain

produce a brood.” Now, assuredly this means that the

Mirundines build their nests in a cooler climate than that

in which they generally reside ; and that, though in Ceylon

and elsewhere swallows are found throughout the year, yet

that the bulk migrate to cooler latitudes, and the moiety

which reinain do not produce nests. This 1 have shown to

be incorrect in this paper, which was written before I saw

the passage referred to. As to &. hyperythra, B., it is

confined to the Island as far as we know, never having been

received from any other part of the world ; and from what £

have seen, I suspect it is limited to the Kandy orhill country.*

I notice this to show how little is known of the Fauna of

Ceylon. Surely there are some of our Members who. could

find time to notice a few of the common traits of nature,

which are occurring under their eyes almost every day of

their lives ; and I do hope this Society will be the means of _

diffusing, through its Journal, a spirit of inquiry and research

among the native population, of whom many may be found

having abundant time and opportunity. :

* Mr. Brodie’s specimen was procured near Kurunéegala.

No. 4.—1848.] CRYLONITE. , or

ON CHYLONITE FOUND NEAR TRINCOMALEE,

By Lizutenant Henpersoy, C.R.R.

(Read February 24, 1849.)

CEYLONITE, so called from having been first discovered in

Ceylon, is, in its primitive and usual form, a regular octo-

hedron. It, however, also occurs asa cuneiform octohedron,

and has been found, though more rarely, in rolled grains. _

In size it reaches from eight to ten carats. The planes

of its crystals are smooth, shining, and possessing a vitreous

lustre. Its structure is lamellar, and its fracture what may

be termed flat conchoidal. Occasionally it has been found

to be imperfectly foliated.

its specific gravity ranges from 3°6 to 3:7. The lighter

coloured varieties (which I have not seen) are said to be

transparent. The darker specimens can scarcely be called

semi-transparent. On the edges of the crystals they are

translucent. It issingly refractive ; in hardness superior to

quartz, but inferior to Oriental ruby or spinelle.

Subjected to the blow-pipe it is found to be infusible,

without addition. ;

Its component paris are :—

Alumine oe wok GS

Magnesia one w- 12

Silex ae ee D

Oxide of Iron ... Bho AL

| 98 (loss 2).

Ceylonite, otherwise called Pleonaste, has, since its dis-

covery in Ceylon, been met with also in Norway. It is of

the same family as the ruby, but more closely allied to that

‘variety termed spinelle. ‘This latter, indeed, which with

98 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr I.

different lines assumes the various names of Balais ruby,

- Vermeil, and Rubicelle, by mixture with blue, passes

through divers colours, till it finally arrives at indigo blue,

which is frequently so deep as to be barely distinguishable

from black.

This then is the Ceylonite, which more resembles a piece

of jet than any other mineral. Asa gem it can hardly be

said to hold any rock. It seldom or never comes under the

hands of the jeweller, but I can conceive that it might be

very well adapted to be formed into mourning ornaments.

Ceylonite belongs to formations of the primative class, as

will be seen from the position in which I found it. It is

said to have been found imbedded in calcareous spar, and

in adulasia, accompanied by magnetic pyrites and crystals

of mica; but of the correctness of this I am not aware.

The crystals I met with were found in the low bank, both

in the small water-courses formed by the rain and (by

digging) apparently im sé within eight or ten inches of

the surface. Its matrix appears to be a compact gravel.

The whole of the neighbouring rock belongs to the pri-

mary formation. On one side, at the distance of a couple

of hundred yards or so, a cut in the road exposes a mass of

gneiss (the predominant rock of the country), affording an

excellent view of its conformable strata, dipping con-

siderably towards the east. On the opposite, or western

side, at no great distance, is discovered a vein of graphic

granite, the characters of which are very beautifully and

distinctly marked. On each side, andin contact with it, are

veins of quartz and felspar, more or less commingled, as

also a vein of mica. These, as shown by the section which

has exposed them, stand nearly in a perpendicular position.

One is struck by the arrangement which seems to mark

the gradual weakening, on each side of the graphic granite,

of that agency or power of peculiar crystallisation, which

No. 4.—1848. | CEYLONITE. oe:

disseminated the quartz through the felspar. In front of

the granite lie large blocks of unmixed quartz, as if

forcibly ejected from the mass while in the act of passing

from a state of fusion into its present consolidation.

At the distance of half a mile to the westward of this

point, a vein of trap is seen cropping out from the beach,

midway between high and low water mark ; and this is the

only other rock discoverable within miles of the spot.

100 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL, Parr I.

APPENDIX.

HINTS TO AMATEUR CONCHOLOGISTS,

BEING SUGGESTIONS FOR THE COLLECTION AND PREPARATION

OF SPECIMENS.

By Hugh Cuming, Esq., FR.S.

Lanp SHELLS.

LAND SHELLS are found in many places, such as under stones, in

clefts of rocks, on the sides of hills and mountains, under decayed

wood and trees, or the trunks or leaves of trees, at the root of

trees and bushes, in decayed vegetable matter, dried leaves and

moss, on small plants—in fact, almost every situation gives them,

: except open and exposed places. Look for them diligently when

you are out collecting ; where you find dead specimens you will

soon find living ones. When collected, bring them home and put

them in a pail, bucket, or some large vessel, and pour a quantity of

cold water upon them, and cover up the vessel for two or three hours,

which will cause the animals to come out a little. It is necessary

to cover them up, or else they will crawl away. When they are a

little out, run off the cold water, and pour a quantity of boiling

hot water on them, so as to cover them well ; let them remain a

few minutes to cool a little, then take out the animal with a large

pin or needle, as you would a periwinkle ; when they are all done,

take one of your soft brushes and wash off gently all the dirt and

filth in clean water, then place them in another vessel of fresh

_ water until all are done, then shake out well the water that is in

them, and place them out to dry with their mouths downwards,

but oot in the sun ; in a short time they will bedry. If they are

small you can pack them away in small boxes, writing the locality

and the situation in which you found them on the cover, for

localities must be paid much attention to; but should the

shells be rather large, then wrap up each shell in a paper by

No. 4.—1848.] APPENDIX. 101

itself,—in fine Chinese paper,—then pack them away in a large

box, with their locality and with care, but never put by a box that

is not quite full, withsut putting some cotton or other soft substance

to fill up the box, for such tender subjects should not have a play

during the transit home from where you collected them.

In the rivers, canals, lakes, ponds, and small streams, you

will fiad many species of shells, which, although not handsome

are very interesting, and many of them will prove valuable here

in England ; therefore, do not leave a single one of them behind,

as it may be a cause of regret hereafter. Some of the shells

which you will find in the above-mentioned places are of the same

form as the land shells, others are like our fresh-water mussel, or

cockle: they are mostly found in the mud, sometimes in deep

water. You will be sure to find dead ones on the banks of the

lakes and rivers, and if you cannot procure them yourself, show

the natives the dead specimens, aud offer them money to bring

you a quantity of them ; and the same with every other subject of

natural history—don’t think of a few dollars when you will make

pounds of them ; but be not too lavish of your money with them—

it will alarm their cupidity, and they will seek for more. I am

certain that when the natives see that you are collecting these

things, they will soon bring them to you, as they love money and

do not value the articles you are seeking.

The rivers and pieces of water abound with shells: be diligent

in seeking them, and your labours will be most amply repaid.

When you have collected the fresh-water shells, place them in

a vessel and pour a large quantity of boiling water on them ; they

do not require to be put into cold water before the hot water, as

the land shells. As soon as the water is a little cool, pour it off,

and take out the animal as before mentioned. Wash them, &c.,

butas the bivalve or fresh-water mussel will open wide as soon as

the animal is out, you must tie them close with care before you

put them out to dry: if you do not the hinge will break, and make

the shell in part valueless. Some of the fresh-water shells, that

are like the snails, have a mouth-piece, which you must take great

eare of, and keep these mouth-pieces by themselves,—that is, each

102 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [ Vou. IL., Parr I.

species of shell and their mouth-pieces must be packed together,

for this mouth-piece, or operculum, is of great service in deter-

mining the species. Some of the land-shells have also a mouth-

piece : those also must be placed with the shells to which they

belong. Be most careful in attending to this piece cf

information.

When your bivalve shells are tied up and dry, wrap them up

each in a piece of soft Chinese paper, and pack one of the small

boxes so as they shall not break, for they are generally brittle,

and must have care taken of them, and if your box is not full you

ean put in some other light small pill boxes of shells on them.

Do not forget their localities, habitats, &c.

MaRiInE SHELLS.

These are found in various situations except the deep sea,

where they can only be procured by dredging, which can only be

done at great expense of time and cash ; therefore, 1 shall confine

my observations to the littoral shells.

The best time to collect marine shells on the sea shore is at the

new and full moon, for then the tides make greatest ebb ; therefore

you should be on the spot two hours before low water, with an

assistant to help you im turning over the large stones, should there

be any, under which you will find many species of cowries,

buccinums, tritons, mitras, cones, and several species of bivalve

shells : also many kinds adhering to the stones, which must be taken

off with a knife in a very careful manner. Several species bore

into the stone itself, which you must break with hammers to get

out the shell ; or if the stone be soft, cut it carefully with a hatchet,

in doing which you will see many species. Take care when you

separate the stone to avoid breaking the shell, and those that may

be near it. Be always provided with a light basket with a small

box in it, to put the shells into which you collect, for the

fine delicate ones must not be placed with the heavy and strong..

The stones which you turn over must be well inspected, as you

will find many shells covered with marine matter, which makes

them appear like the stone itself. Collect everything you see,

No. 4.—1848. ] APPENDIX. 103

however small and unmeaning in appearance, for amongst them

may be new genera and very rare sheils, not seen before from such

an interesting country as Ceylon.

Amongst other shells which you will find under stones are

chitons, which must be taken off in the same manner as the

limpet and other adhering univalves. When you have got the

chitons home, separate them from the other shells, and put them

into a pail of fresh water, and let them remain there from 12 to 24

hours; by that time they will all be straight and fair, and also the

salt of the fleshy substance that surrounds them will be well

soaked out ; then cut out the animals, and wash them well inside

and out from all filth, and throw them into another vessel of

fresh-water ; there let them remain until you have cleaned the

whole, then place them on narrow slips of boards and bind them

down tightly, and put them in a shady place to dry, but never in

the sun ; in three or four days they will be fit to pack, but never

do so until you are satisfied they are quite dry. Do not let them

be exposed to the rats and mice at night, as they will eat off their

edges and destroy them. Should any of the chitons have hairs

or spines, 1t would be well to wrap each specimen in a separate

piece of paper to prevent the hairs or spines from being injured.

Pray observe when you begin to clean them if the animals con-

tract themselves in a different form: they are still alive, and you

should defer cleaning them a few hours longer. These shells are

valuable and highly esteemed.

Many stones at the very lowest ebb will have most shells on

them, therefore you must not care about getting wet to turn them

over, and never leave the place until the tide compels you. In

some spots you may find shells of great value in one tide and |

under the stones. Amongst the rocks, on the sea shore, in the

crevices and on them, you will find many species of catellas,

chitons, murices, and several others. Make a careful survey of

every rock and stone: they will amply repay your trouble. All

sheltered coves or little bays are the best places in which to find

shells. ‘Take those places in preference. But when they are

examined, then lock to those in more exposed situations. The

104 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL, Parr l. -

first thing you ought to observe when you get into a new locality

is to go along the sands at high water mark: you will then find

many good shells thrown up by the sea, particularly light bivalve

shells; you can take any time of the tide to do it. Never miss

going after a gale of wind, you may then get many rare and valu-

able deep water shells which can never be procured otherwise.

In sheltered bays and places, just at the very lowest water mark,

you will find in the mud and sand many species of bivalve shells

just beneath the surface, and generally in great abundance. Do

not neglect to collect alland every species, and that in abundance,

How To uSsE A DREDGE.

Dredging is performed in two ways. First, ina large sailing

boat, under easy sail. Make fast your dredge to a rope of 100

fathoms long and three inches thick, and let the other end be made

fast to the mainmast or any other secure place for fear of accident.

Having arrived at the spot where you intend to dredge, bring the

boat or vessel up on the wind, then throw your dredge overboard,

and in the space of a minute or two the dredge will be at the

~ bottom; then pay away the rope and make easy sail; let it always

be thrown out astern of the boat or vessel. After being under

weigh a quarter of an hour, haul in the dredge, and examine the

contents. You must carry with you when you go dredging a

fine sieve, a hand bucket, and a large cocoanut shell, Having

got the dredge on board, take out the contents: if mud and sand

with the cocoanut shell, and fill the sieve a third full with it, then let

one of your people take it in his hand and hold it over the side of

the vessel, then let another man pour water from the bucket upon

the sieve gently, the man holding the seive gently shaking it, by

which means you will get rid of all the fine sand and mud,

leaving nothing but the shells and the larger debris of the sea.

Examine well broken shells and stones that you find in the dredge,

for on them you will find many genera of shells, such as chitons,

ealyptrea, crepidula areas, and various others ; and so continue,— »

all the contents of the dredge is emptied in the same manner.

Go always well provided with things to put the shells in that

. No. 4,—1848. | APPENDIX. ; 105

you collect, always separating the light fragile shells from the

coarser ones, as the natives have no interest in the matter, and

would be sure to break them. When they are cleaning the sand

and mud in the sieve, always watch it to see what shells might

appear when the first bucket of water is thrown over them, for

should there be any heavy with some that are fragile, by the

shaking of the sieve the more fragile ones will be broken, and

those that are most valuable seldom come on the beach in a

sound state.

The other mode of dredging I prefer, which is thus. Get a

comfortable large boat with an awning, with a good anchor and

60 or 80 fathoms of cable, with a fisherman’s canoe, and both pro-

ceed to where you intend to dredge ; then come to an anchor, put

the dredge in the canoe, having fastened the other end of the

dredge rope in a secure manner, then order two men in the canoe

to pull away, and when they have proceeled as far as the dredge

rope will allow them, order them to heave it overboard, and when it

has been down five orsix minutes, haul it on board as [ have stated

before, and examine the contents. If the boat has bottom boards

or convenient platforms you can empty the contents of the dredge

on it carefully ; the men can take off the dredge again whilst

you are inspecting the contents of the last dredging.

Should the sand and gravel contain many small shells after it

has been washed, and it would occupy toc much time on board

the boat to pick them out, put it aside carefully in some vessel,

take it home and dry it, and pick them out at your leisure, for

the small shells you get by dredging are extremely rare, and

therefore more highly esteemed.

The most fruitful places for shells are in sandbanks in deep

water, near to reefs and rocks. Ialways found them abound with

shells, but oftentimes I had the misfortune to get the dredge foul

of a piece of rock or coral, which you will soon find out by not

being able to pull the dredge on board. When you find this,

cause the men in the canoe to get hold of the dredge rope and

slack it from inboard, and then to overhaul it until they come to

where the dredge is fastened, and by a little exertion, being right

106 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). -[ Vou. I1., Parr f..

over where the dredge is fixed, they can unfasten it, which I have

done scores of times. When the men in the canoe have got it

clear of the rock, let the men on board the boat where you are

haul ia the slack of the dredge rope, by which they will pull the

dredge and canoe clear of the rock, the people in the latter still

holding on to the dredge. A little experience will bring you

into the mode of dredging.

The bivalve shells you collect in every situation put into a

vessel and throw a quantity of boiling water upon them; they

will then open, and by such means you can take out the animal

easily. Then wash them and tie them up close with some small

thread, put them to dry in the shade, after which you can pack

them away.

Marine univalve shells you can place in a vessel in some secure

place, where the stench will not offend, and let them remain there

for a month or so; the animals will be completely decomposed ;

then you can put them into fresh water fur a day, and by rinsing

them in the water you will make all perfectly clean. Never allow

any shells to be exposed to the sun, or thrown from one vessel to

another, or in any way be roughly treated. If you do, their fine

edges and spines will be broken, which will render them of

considerably less value. .

Due attention should be paid to the rivers and streams in the

mountains, and all dense woods, and also to heaps of decayed

vegetable matter in shady places, for there abundance of shells

are frequently to be found.

No. 4.—1848.] APPENDIX. 107

PROCEEDINGS.

ANNIVERSARY Mpetina.—Marca 31, 1849.

Present :

The Rev. D. J. Gogerly in the Chair,

G. Muttukistna, Esq. KF. Muttukistna, Esq.

J. Dickson, Esq. Dr. Willisford.

Major Lushington. Dr. Misso.

R. E. Lewis, Esq. The Hon. Treasurer.

C. J. E. Middleton, Esq. The Hon. Secretary.

1. Read and confirmed Minutes of last Meeting.

2. The following gentlemen were then balloted for and

elected Members of the Society :—

Dr. Rudolph Gygax, proposed by R. E, Lewis, bay ., seconded

by J. Capper, Esq. ; B. Dodsworth, Esq., proposed by J. Capper,

Esq., seconded by J. E. Middleton, Esq.; James Alwis, Esq.,

proposed by Dr. Misso, seconded by BE. L. Layard, Esq.

3. The Papers read at the ee Meeting were laid on the

table in the usual course.

Kesolved,—That they be printed in the Society’s Journal.

Toe Museum.

Geology.

4. Dr. Gygax submitted, through the Librarian, the plan of a

case for the reception of the Society’s Minerals, &c.

Resolved,—That a sum not exceeding £9 be appropriated for

the purchase of a case of the description given by Dr. Gygax.

5. The following donations to the Museum were then laid on

the table :—

Natural History.

Specimens of Sea Shells, Cypreide-Solarium-F erspectivum,

&c., from J. Mendies Muhandiram. Not in good preservation.

Specimens of the Silk and Cocoons of the Bombyx mori.

108 _ JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). (Von. IL., Parr I,

Phalena paphia (Cram.). Ph. mylitta (Drury). Bombyx

mylitta (Fab.).

Phalena cinthia (Cram.).

Clay Nest of an Odynerus

of a Passion Flower, by Edgar L. Layard, Esq.

The Larvee Cases of two specimens of Cicada plebeia, from a

—? supported upon the tendrils

friend in Kandy.

Four varieties of Land and Fleuviatile Shells, by E. Layard, Esq.

Skin of the Mavis pentadactyla, from the Rev. Greenwood.

Damaged, head wanting.

Various specimens of Snakes in spirits, by Dr. Gygax and

J. KE. Middleton, Esq. .

Four specimens of the Pearl Oyster, by James Steuart, Esq.,

Master Attendant.

Mr. Edgar L. Layard deposited the whole of his collection of

Birds in the Society’s premises, until specimens be received to

replace them. :

Industrial.

Seven Models of Native Boats used in the Trade and Fisheries

of the Island, by the Treasurer.

Library.

Persian and Arabic Grammar, by J. E. Middleton, Esq.

Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, No. 24.

6. The Secretary then read the following Report of the

Committee of Management for 1848 :—

REPORT.

‘In laying before you this Report of the Society’s operations

for the year 1848, your Committee have much pleasure in record-

ing the great progress made by the Society, aud in adverting: to

the stability and prosperity of this body which now witnesses the

Fourth Anniversary of its existence.

Members.

‘‘During the past session the Society has been deprived of

nine Members by death and departure from the Island, yet the

insertion of twenty-seven new names on the books is an earnest of

No. 4.—1848. ] APPENDIX. s 109

the extending utility of the body, and a sure sign that the public

are not indifferent to its efforts.

Papers.

“It would not have been too much to have anticipated serious

obstacles to the Society’s advancement, from the recent untoward

events which have thrown a gloom over the prospect of all

Colonial undertakings ; nor has the Society altogether escaped

the ill-effects of the depression of the times, as the much smaller

number of original communications read this year will prove ;

yet even here your Committee can state with pleasure that these

communications have mostly been received from new sources, and

it is confidently hoped that renewed prosperity will restore

sufficient leisure to the Society’s old contributors to enable them

to enjoy the pursuit of literature and again appear in the pages

of the Journal.

Museum.

“ Another source of congratulation is the formation of a Museum

for the reception of objects illustrative of the Natural History,

the Antiquities, and the Industrial Progress of the Colony. The

Government has liberally given the Minerals and Geological

Specimens collected by Dr. Rudolph Gygax in the Sabaragamuwa

_ district (about 1,200 specimens), which form the most complete

collection which has been made in Ceylon. Other contributions

from private individuals have been made in the several departments

of Conchology, Entomology, Ornothology, Antiquities, &c.,

and many promises of support have been given. ‘The accession

to your list of Members of many gentlemen resident at outstations

will offer peculiar facilities for promoting the objects of the

_ Museum, and to those Members your Committee would beg to

| suggest that no opportunity be lost of forwarding subjects adapted

_to such a collection, however trivial they may appear to be.

_ Printed instructions for the preservation of objects of Natural

_ History have been already freely distributed, in several instances

with success, and it is hoped that they will enable many others to

_ forward specimens who otherwise,.though willing, might have been

_ unable to do so.

110 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou IL, Parr I.

“To ensure the proper preservation of the Birds, Animals, &c.,

transmitted, a taxidermist has been engaged, and is expected from

Calcutta, where he was attached to the Museum of the H. E. I.

Company, and a suitable case for the objects provided: these

expenses are to be borne by a subscription called the ‘‘ Museum

Fund,” which has been opened for the express purpose, and is

supported by donations or small monthly subscriptions,

“The number of donors to this fund is at present 11, of

subscribers 29; the amount of donations and yearly subscriptions

is, received and promised, about £40. Many of the subscribers

are in no way connected with the Society. Although your

Committee ure sanguine as to the success of the Museum, they

have deeply to regret the want of proper accommodation for it,

which results from sharing the room occupied by the Loan Board,

and presents an almost fatal obstacle to its advancement, Asa

means of aiding the Secretary, who cannot be expected to be

technically acquainted with the many and various objects likely to

flow into the Museum, several gentlemen, well fitted to the task,

have kindly consented to arrange and supervise the materials in

the several departments, thereby lightening the labours of that

officer and ensuring correctness.

Evening Meetings.

“Your Committee advert with entire satisfaction to the Evening

Meetings held monthly for the free discussion of subjects connected

with the labours of this Society. At these, several highly

instructive topics have been discussed, and much knowledge gained

in the Native Practice of Medicine, the Native Pottery Works,

and of the Sinhalese Hemp: inquiries have also by the same

means been directed to the introduction of the Mulberry and Silk-

worm (Bombyx mori), the Cultivation of the Indigenous Silk-

spinning Larve and wild Bees, and to the Mineral Resources of

the Island, &c.

Quarterly Meetings.

“ The following Papers have been read at the several Quarterly

Meetings of the Society, showing the various fields to which the

Jabours of their contributors have been directed :—

No. 4.—1848.] APPENDIX. 111

. A Catalogue of Tamil Books, by S. Casie Chetty, Esq.

Notices of various Rock Inscriptions in the N.-W.

Province, by A. O. Brodie, Esq.

3. Hints for forming a Collection of Lepidopterous Insects,

with a list of Indigenous Diurnal Lepidoptera, by

Edgar L. Layard, Esq.

4. On Buddhism, by the Rev. D. J. Gogerly.

5. Sketches in the Natural History of Ceylon.—Ento-

mology: on the Genus Papilio, by BE. L. Layard, Esq.

6. On the Agriculture of the Sinhalese, §c., by R. E.

Lewis, Esq.

7. On Ceylonite, by Lieutenant Henderson, C.R.R.

8. Sketches in the Natural History of Ceylon.—Orni-

thology : on the Genera Hirundo and Bucco, by Edgar

L, Layard, Esq.

‘‘ Karly in the year a most interesting answer was received toa

letter on Buddhism addressed to the China Branch of the Royal

Asiatic Society, and your Committee trust that the subject will

not be suffered to drop after the courteous tone of the letter from

Mr. Gutzlaff.

bo ke

Antiquities.

“Tn the knowledge of the antiquities of our Island, some advances

have been made through the exertions of one of our Members and

a friend at Kandy, and your Committee had hoped that transla-

tions would have been received from Calcutta in time for the

present Meeting ; these have only been delayed accidently, not

from want of ability to decipher them, and now that a clue is

obtained to these fast fading records of past ages, it is hoped that

increased exertion on the part of those of our Members who may

have it in their power to procure copies of the many inscriptions

buried in the jungles, will open a fresh field for the investigation

of the learned and curious.

Books.

“ The Librarian will read to you the List of Books purchased by

and presented to the Society during the past year, amounting to

26 volumes and 32 numbers of periodicals.

K 2

112 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr I.

Money.

‘Tn alluding to the Treasurer’s accounts, which show a balance

in his hand of £16. 0s. 6d., your Committee beg to inform you that

in future the Society will have to bear the expense of printing

its Journal, as Government can no longer undertake the work

which it has hitherto so liberally done.

Meteorology and Statistics.

“Your Committee observe with regret that the Meteorological

and Statistical Committees have failed to furnish any reports for

the past year, the Secretary of these bodies having been left un-

aided by the Members ; and having been himself prevented from

completing any of his labours by causes over which he had no

control, has deemed silence the better course to adopt.

“He has, however, handed to your Committee abstracts of the

Meteorological Diaries kept at Batticotta and Trincomalee, during

the years 1847 and 1848, which are now laid on the table, together

with a Register of Temperature, &c., kept at Puttalam by A. O.

Brodie, Esq., and these your Committee advise should be printed

amongst the Society’s Proceedings.

Dr. Gardner ; Sir J. E. Tennent.

“ Before concluding, your Committee would revert with feelings

of the deepest regret to the sudden death of one of the Members

of this Society, one whose name will always be intimately

connected with the Svientific Literature of the Island, whose early

premature death has left immatured a vast accumulation of

botanical gleanings, the fruit of several years of unremitting toil.

“ Although the unvaried zeal with which Dr. Gardner pursued

his botanical researches, and his absence from the neighbourhood

of the Society left him no time or opportunity to appear personally

amongst us, still his constant expressions of sympathy and support

render evident the interest he took in the efforts of the Society

for the promotion of the public good, and the few pamphlets he

- presented to our Library some short time since were accompanied

with a promise that in future a copy of all his publications should

be kept for its use. é

No. 4.—1848. | APPENDIX. 113

“Tf the materials collected by our departed fellow Member and

friend be at some future time given to the world, your Committee

beg to record their opinion that this Society should procure two

copies of the work.

‘¢ Another source of regret is to be found in the approaching

departure from the Island of our respected President, Sir J. bh.

Tennent, Ever anxious to promote the interests of the Society,

and of science generally, his loss will be felt by all who desire to

forward the social and intellectual progress of the Colony.

se Conclusion.

“In conclusion, your Committee, while thus completing their

duties, would express the hope that each succeeding Anniversary

may witness that continued and perfect unanimity of purpose

amongst the Members of this Society, which alone can lead to

real usefulness and permanent prosperity. The work has been buat

commenced : much has yet to be done ; but looking at the present

position of the Society, your Committee are fain to believe that

success will attend a continuation of the efforts which have

hitherto been made.”

The report was unanimously adopted.

7. The Treasurer laid on the table his Accounts for the past

year, which were received and passed.

8. The Librarian laid on the table a List of the Books presented

to and purchased by the Society during the last year.

9. After some discussion relative to the correspondence with -

the Hongkong Society, the Rev. D. J. Gogerly was requested to

communicate with Mr. Gutzlaff in the name of the Society.

10, The following motion was made by Edgar L. Layard, Ksq.,

and seconded by Major Lushington :—

“That the Society do record its sense of the loss which this

Society, as well as the public, has sustained by the premature

death of George Gardner, Superintendent of the Botanical Gardens

at Péradeniya, and a Member of the Ceylon Branch of the Royal

Asiatic Society.” —Unanimously agreed to.

114 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr 1.

Resolved,—That the above resolution be communicated by the

Secretary to Dr. Gardner’s family.

I1l.. Moved by R. E. Lewis, Esq., seconded by J. E. Middle-

ton, Esq. :—

“‘ That the thanks of the Society be given to the Officers of

the Society for the past year.”—Agreed to unanimously.

Resolved,—That the following gentlemen be the Officers of

the Society for the ensuing year :—

Patron.

The Right Honourable Lord Viscount Torrington.

Vice-Patrons.

The Honourable Sir A. Oliphant, Chief Justice.

The Right Rev. James Chapman, p.p., Bishop of Colombo.

The Hon. Mr. Justice Stark.

President.

The Honourable C. J. McCarthy, Esq.

Vice- President. ;

Rev. D. J. Gogerly.

General Committee.

F. Willisford, Esq., M.p. J. O'Halloran, Esq.

Dr. J. B. Misso. James Steuart, Esq.

J. E. Middleton, Esq. Rev. G. Muttukistna.

C. Caldwell, Esq.

with power to add to their number.

Treasurer and Librarian.

J. Capper, Esq.

Secretary.

I. L. Layard, Esq.

Museum.

The following gentlemen to act as Curators in the several

departments :—

Geology and Mineralgy, Mr. Rudolph Gygax.

Conchology, Land and Fluviatile Shells, F. Layard, Esq.

Do. Sea Shells, Corals, &c., J. KE. Middleton, Esq.

Natural History generally, E. L. Layard, Esq. |

Numismatics, Mr. Justice Stark.

Arts, Manufactures, sc., J. Capper, Esq.

115

APPENDIX.

*LOLNSDAA J, ==

‘adadvj NHOG 9 91 95

(ER GE : 9 11L I ce S00,7 OSUB.IZUTT JO

: = : 0 ¢ oF 8 gE]

coe 6P8L 8% AdvnAqay Oquojo/y Joy suondiuosqng jo savatty—'q'N

Ol 4 Z9¥ °° [890], Zor L ZOF ° [eIOT,

290 Ol “* 90uv[Vq

Vee Li OY.

Oc 0Re sh pooise sv ‘pun wnosnyy oy} 03“

9 G@ > uokog pus uopuoTyT ut peseyoind syoog a0¥ “

FOO eG: Ge uopuo7) pues ‘seapeyy, ‘BaIgD

‘gaodesurg ‘eq4no[89 wWOIy pus oyseseysog “

OC [se [BUINOP IO} suTIBISeIG, SUIANO][OH soy

§ OL ¢ ‘" sydvasoyzIryT tox svaipepy 07 couvz}1mIe1 =“

0 0 cl ft eae "029 ‘300g

JO qyunoooe uo BqQno[VeQ 07 eduRIQIMEL

SOL Ss a puvyieao <q

pus ‘eravjeg ‘eqQno[eQ wor “ow ‘sTooleg

Ono aap es oN yeuanor s,h40100g ‘syoog Arpuns jO ostl4aeg pue yyore1g doy “

ones oy} jo sordog cp Jo a]¥G spoa001g. ee 0. One F =5 ae ‘SOOIJON ‘saBjNodIQ suuitg Joy **

0 9 9 PeAlVoo1 Soo OoUAZUG JO yUNOWYW * 0. <9. ab 3c ob AIQUOIYVIG Joy

Ons hleCes aa: pealeoer suodisosqng jo yunomy “ OV 8KaGia sae Sulpuiqyoog sof“

Ol 919172 a porepues Os 9% 40.38 Sey pue yudy soy ysoTQ

qUNO0DIe 4SBT aod se puesy uo souveqg Ag) 0 OL I “° syjuom oag 10} WOOd JO asavyo UI UOeg preg

ip B92 "SPST Tyo | tp 8 OF rel

116 JOURNAL, RB.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL, Parr I.

LIST OF BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, &c.,

Presented to and Bought by the Society during 1548.

Davis’s Chinese Novels oh oe Vols. 1

Maurice’s Ancient History of Hindostan 2

Kindersley’s Hindu Literature 1

Lasson’s Bactrian Coins I

Kelly’s Oriental Meteorology 1

Bentley’s View of Hindu Astronomy 1

Handbook to Egypt and India : ]

Moon’s Botany I

Milburn’s Oriental Commerce 1

Parke’s Travels in Africa sas 1

Sir W. Malcolm’s History of Persia... 2

Hoffmaister’s Travels in Ceylon and India 1

Campbell’s Field Sports of Ceylon ... 2

A Treatise on Diamonds ce ue i

The Pearl Fishery of Ceylon __... ABE 1

A Treaties on Pantheism (Dutch) 1

Reports on the Financial Condition of Ceylon 1

Blue Book of Ceylon 1

Calcutta Review... S06 a“ Nos. 4

Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal ab 12

Journal of the Hastern Archipelago... 600 12

Journal of the Geological Society of London a 4

Journal of the Statistical Society of London Sos 4

A Geological Map of England.

No. 4.—1848.] APPENDIX. 117

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Alvis, J. De Mooyaart, J. N.

Armitage, John Murdoch, John

Bessell, H. Muttukistna, Rev. EB.

Bishop of Colombo, the Right Rev- | Nelson, J. B.

Boake, Rev. B. O’ Halloran, J. C.

Bowker, John Oliphant, Sir A.

Braybrooke, F. G. Ondaatjie, J. M.

Brodie, A. O. Palm, Rev. J. D.

Caldwell, E. C.— Percival, Rey. P.

Capper, John Perera, HI.

Chetty, John C. Pole, H.

Chetty, Simon C. Selby, Hon. H. C.

Davies, Rev. J. Sillery, H., C.R.R.

Dawson, Rev. C. C. Smith, D.

Dawson, Robert Smith, James

Dickson, Rev. W. Soysa, L. De

Dodsworth, B. Staples, H. J.

Gogerly, Rev. D. J. Stark, Hon.

Grace, A. Steuart, Dr.

Gygax, Dr. R. Steuart, George

Kessen, Rev. Dr. Steuart, James

Layard, KE. L. Taylor, W. 8.

Layard, F. Tennent, Sir J. E.

Lewis, R. EF. Torrington, His Excellency

Lister, S. Viscount

Livera, F. De Twynaw, W.

Lushington, Major Whitehouse, E. L.

MacCarthy, Hon. CU. J. Williams, R. E., R.A.

Me Vicar, Rev. Dr. Willisford, F., m.p

Middleton, J. E. Worms, G.

Misso, Dr. J. B. Worms, M.

PE] &¢ |ELSOd 8.1

JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IT., Parr I.

“SHAVE

qe Surujysry

10 Jopungy,

"UIR[BIOg

118

L1-8

“sXkep ropunyy, | eV G0

“sep

UIvY Jo

G-O1] 907-18

{6:7

¢-6 | 669-68).

60-€8

0-811666-98

GL-01) 962-28

¢-01] £60-18

0-01} 210-62

09-01] 62-82

0-1

8.2

0-11

CL-6L

99-18

68-78

0-92; 0-98] 981-8

GG-18| 9-98} 169-€8

G-92| 0-98} EGI-E8

0-62) 0-06) ¢36-98

G-08) Gc-16} 6-28

0-92) &-98) 99-18

0-€L) O-€8]9E2-18

GG-PL| GL-F8] 6G-LL

0-2L} 0-8} ¢9-08

L-9L) ¢-b8] 0-68

0-€L| 0-78] GES-G8

19-28} ¢Z-62| GL-8} 60-8

"vey

GEL-Z8

G81) ¢-98} TL-é8

0-68) G-G8}¢G22-€8

0-82) 0-98] LE-€8

0-GL| 0-O61€ZP-98

G-€8| 9¢-T6l 6-98

C-L1) ¢-981 89.Z8

GL-8L) O-E81918-62

0-92) SL-P8I TI L-62

0-82; 0-G8] PP-08

G:8L| &-P8l F9-Z8

G-LL|} G-€8]982-68

¢-08) ¢-¢8} 20-€8

"ULJN | “XVI | “UvoTT

"M'd

“NOON

“S1L-62 = uolefnoyes fq pautezqo se ‘posed oaoge 04} Sulinp wie[eyqng jo oanyesodwoy, odeoay uvoyy

A ee seers ee

€&-6) 96-16] 1¢8-18] 0Z-L | 9Z-16] 929-68

ae eae Saray) ae | oe

0-84} 0-98]826-64} 0-92! ¢.ggi° Aine

C-Z8) GL-F8|SZ1-Z8| $3.18] ¢-eg|" eune

G-9L| 0-98] 660-18) G2-22| ¢.Pgl' Lop

0-28] ¢.68192z-88| 0-84) ¢-9gi" [lady

0-€8| 0.681886-28] §-08| 0-98/qore TT

G-LL| §-9818&6-82] 0-92) ¢.18|°°"Q9q

GZ-LL| G.Z8]. G-GL] 0-EL| 0-6L\°" “URL

“SPSl

C-G2| $-G8]189-22| G%-FL| 0-18)*°°09q

0:08] ¢-P8} 8-88} 2-92) 0-68)°°°°99O

0-64] 0-F8]} 898-08] 0-82) 0-8\" “ydeg

G-08| 92-S8] 88-18] 62-62) GL.E8) "ony

“LEST

eos oe | es Gee

"UL | “XBW | UvOyT | UT | “xeyy

"WW 6

‘SPST ‘TE ATOL GHANA SHINOJ[ FATHAY, AHL YOd WVIVLENG LV Lda GFUOLVUTINAL 40 VALSIOTY

No. 4.~—1848.] APPENDIX. 119

REMARKS.

August, 1847.—Temperature equable, weather pleasant, sky

clear, with detached cirrus and cirro cumulus; in the evenings

clouds collect to the N. and N.E., in which direction thunder was

heard on two nights. S.W. wind prevalent, generally gentle, and

interrupted by calms at night and in the morning ; tanks dry.

September.— Weather very pleasant, sky clear, two strata of

clouds constantly observed, the lower drifting along with the

monsoon, the upper stationary. Rain (with one exception) in the

form of scarcely perceptible showers. ‘Thunder heard on three

occasions, far to the east. S.W. blowing contixuously from 2nd

to 11th, wind very high, at night and in the mornings calms

frequently observed ; tanks dry.

- October.—Very rainy month, thunder observed on fourteen days,

but only on two occasions did the storm pass over Puttalam. S.W.

still prevalent, but interrupted by those from the N. and N.E.

and also by calms, which occur almost every morning and during

the night. Between the rainy days atmosphere astonishingly clear,

distant objects appearing very sharply defined, false sunsets, and

halos observed on several occasions ; appearance of the sky in the

evening very beautiful.

November.—Rain almost every day, frequentiy heavy ; light-

ning observed very frequently in the evening, generally towards

the south, sometimes all round; only five storms approached

Puttalam ; wind variable, with frequent calms at evening, morning,

and during night.

December.—A rainy month; lightning far to the south fre-

quently observed during the evening ; three storms passed near

Puttalam ; first ten days dull and cloudy, after that generally

clear ; wind variable, generally from the N. The §.W. has quite |

ceased ; weather delightful in the intervals between the rainy

days.

120. JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr I.

January, 1848.—N.E. blowing continuously, at times strongly ;

sky very clear; heavy dews at night, mornings chill, lightning

oceasionally observed far to the south in the evening ; little rain.

February. ~Wind blowing nearly continuously from the N.E.,

and gently, especially in the mornings, veering to the E. at night.

Rain fell on ten days, but only in slight showers, although the

appearance of the sky about sunset was frequently very lowering ;

in the evening distant lightning to the south and all round

observed on ten days.

- March.—Wind generally blowing from the N., shifting con-

stantly a little to the E. or W.; frequent calms in the morning,

sky generally clear ; only one storm passed over Puttalam, although

distant lightning was observed on sixteen evenings, generally

towards the N. and N.E., latterly also towards the S. and S.E.

April.—The S.W. again the prevailing wind, blowing gently

in the earlier part of the month, more violently afterwards ;

evenings frequently threatening, and lightning observed on twenty

occasions to the §.5.E., and all round; four storms approached

Puttalam.

May.—S.W. monsoon blowing steadily and rather strong, sky

cloudy throughout the latter part of the month, distant lightning

seldom observed ; three storms accompanied by violent wind visited

the station.

June.—S.W. blowing continuously and strong, sky cloudy ;

four scarcely perceptible showers ; calms,

July.—S.W. still blowing, generally rather strong, sky cloudy,

calms in the morning at commencement and end of month ; in the

middle of the month four boisterous days with heavy rain.

A. OSWALD Bropiz.

Puttalam, August 12, 1849. =

— ~ *

121 : JOURNAL, R.A.8. (CEYLON).—APPENDIX.

122

ABSTRACT OF A MBTEOROLOGICAL REGISTER kxupr ar Barricorra, NEAR JAFFNA, DURING 1847 anD 1848.

Wer Buvs THEer- Barometer CoR-

TERS OMEIE: MOMETER. RECTED.

AmouNr STRENGTH

| OF Course or WIND. OF Cioups, &c. GENERAL REMARKS.

A.M. AM. P.M. ; Rain. Winp.

MonrTH. Mean.| Max. | h.m.| h. |h. m.}| Max. Min.

9 30| 12 |3 80

1847.

January ...| 780 | 80:1 5:3 5:8 5 | 30°082 | 29-936 1:57 N.B. & B.N.E. 2:4 Flying clouds and cloudy Heavy dew daily. Three rainy days.

February ...| 81:2 | 85°3 4:7 71 3 30:051 | 29:897 1-70 Van lc eon S.B. 23 Fiying clouds Fair, with heavy dew.

to N.W.

March | 82:1 | 85:2] 53 | 63 | 67 | 29:966 | 29°859 | 1]-42 | E.N.E. to N.E 13 Flying clouds and cloudy Dew lighter. Four showery days and thunder.

April «-| 84:6 | 87°4 54 6-4 6-6 | 29-910 | 29°807 2-06 £. & S.W. 3°5 Flying clouds Fair, six days thunder, five days rain. Little dew.

May eee) 8d50) |) Sic) )|) Gal 67 671 | 29°879 | 29°750 | 0:24 S.W. & W.S.W. 34:6 | Cloudy Mostly hazy, with one or two thunder showers.

June SAGES G2 38} 77 7:0 | 29:786 | 29°671 1:80 S.W. & W. 2:4°5 | Cloudy and flying clouds Hazy, with three rainy days.

July ..| 83°7 | 86°7 5:2 6-2 6:6 | 29°790 | 29:698 0:96 S.S.W. & S.W 23°4 do. do. Six days rain and thunder. Generally hazy.

August .-| 83°38 | 873 | 46 | 5:3 6°8 | 29:807 | 29°709 | 1-00 do 2:3°4 do. do. Two days rain, three thunder. Mostly hazy.

September ...| 82-4 | 864] 44 | 7:5 | 6:2 | 29834 | 29693 | 0:09 |S. & S.W. 45:6 | Cloudy Generally hazy, with thunder.

October. ...| 82°6 | 83°6 | 3:8 3:0 4-4 | 29-77 | 29°768 | 18:38 S.S.W.&S.E. 1:3 Light flying clouds Twelve days thunder, rain, and lightning. Dew

November ...| 80:2 | 82:3 | 19 | 2:6 | 3:3 | 29:908 | 29°829 | 11-62 | S.E.N. & N.E. 2-4 Flying clouds Five days thunder. lea

December ...| 78°6 | 796 | 2:9 | 3:3 3°2 | 29:905 | 29°804 | 13:26 | N.E.& N.W. 8:46 do. Eleven days rainy.

1848.

January ...| 78:2 | 814 | 44 | 54 | 61 | 29:965 | 29°9903 | 1:35 | N.N.W.& N.E 2:3 Cloudy generally Two days light showers. Mostly fine, with dew.

February ...| 79°9 | 82:3 5:9 5:9 6:5 | 30:033 | 29:842 0-75 N.E. & E.N.E. 23:4 | Flying clouds Five days light rain, fine, with dew.

March ...| 82°38 | 86:4 | 5:8 | 7:2 | 86 | 29919 | 29804 | 0:95 | Variable 1:3 Clear, with some flying clouds Fair, with haze and dew a.m.

April ...| 85:4 | 884 | 54 | 5:2 | 62 | 29°883 | 29:725 | 10:96 do. 3:4°5 | Cloudy Thunder showers. Hail fell once.

May ...| 85°1 | 867 | 49 | 5:9 | G61 | 29800 | 29°711 | 2:80 | S.W.& S.S.W, 35 Flying clouds during all the month | Hazy, with one or two squalls of rain.

June .--| 84:5 | 87°2 | 5:2 6:6 68 | 29°786 | 29°702 | 0-08 W.S.W. & SW 3°4°5 | Clear, with occasional clouds Hazy, but fair. One thunder squall.

July ...| 82°9 | 85.6 | 4:1 5:3 | 57 | 29°786 | 29700 | 1-76 S.W. & W. 45:6 | Cloudy Hazy, with thunder and rain occasionally.

August ...| 62-4 | 85-7 36 | 53 5-7 | 29°791 | 29°705 2°35 S.S.W. & S.W. 2°3°4 do. do. do.

September ...) 82°77 | 861 | 4:1 5-7 | 59 | 29855 | 290385 | 5:14 | W.S.W.& W 2°3:4 | Cloudy and flying clouds Thunder seven days, rain seven days. Hazy.

October ...| 814 | 83°7 3°3 3-9 4:5 | 29888 | 29-793 2:24 S.W. & W. 34-4 | Flying clouds Rain nine days, with some thunder. Hazy.

November ...| 79:1 | 81:2 2-7 3°5 4:0 | 29-926 | 29°159 | 18-72 Variable 3°4°5 do. Rain fourteen days. Little dew.

December ...| 78°4 | 80°7 4°2 5-6 5:9 | 29737 | 29:887 | 4:40 N, & N.E 4:5 Cloudy Rain fourteen days.

meee meme

PRINTED AT

THE GOVERNMENT PRINTING WORKS,

COLOMBO, CEYLON.

JIB B REPRE R ETRE EEE AREER ERR BERSEREHSEBBSeest

= ee LCD

So ES

JOURNAL

CEYLON BRANCH

; ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY, }

= 1849-50.

VOLUME II.

No. 5.

— zt ,

4 i

Set @ }

\ ne)

rf I9 Hr. eL a e d

aaw 304 Ge? ar"

it ANIMALL A

rN eae /

~ COLOMBO:

H.C. COTTLE, ACTING GOVERNMENT PRINTER, CEYLON.

1890.

'iB@B@ne@ eB

ge ee se eel (PRAY

MER EUEEOUOCOOEEREREUEEOCEUOEEOERE EEE co

EE eS ES RRR aE TS RSI RL RL tas SS SE Ts SR YA Se RES A rl DA aa Rf

PRINTED AT

THE GOVERNMENT PRINTING. WORKS,

COLOMBO, CEYLON.

OOOO

JOURNAL

OF THE

CHYLON BRANCH

OF THE

ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY,

1849-50,

VOLUME II.

No. 5.

“The design of the Society is to institute and promote inquiries into the History,

Religion, Literature, Arts, and Social Condition of the present and former

Inhabitants of the Island, with its Geology, Mineralogy, its Climate and

an Meteorology. its Botany and Zoology.”

SHR RRO RARER Ree eee

Se wl : : CURE EEREOCEE eerie

COLOMBO;

H. C. COTTLE, ACTING GOVERNMENT PRINTER, CEYLON.

PORK

1890. f | See lan

SiBAaRRARRARRAR ek eee Be

raga

se Maly Ayan shat

SRNL Vkid gb

ah Wen

Gini

pet

saa AN

{ ss

iss

ie AG 7

Peay

Yala,

JOURNAL

OF THE

CEYLON BRANCH

OF THE

ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY,

1849-50.

VOLUME ITI.

No. 5.

“‘The design of the Society is to institute and promote inquiries into the History,

Religion, Literature, Arts, and Social Condition of the present and former

-_ Inhabitants of the Island, with its Geology, Mineralogy, its Climate and

Meteorology, its Botany and Zoology.”

COLOMBO:

H. C. COTTLE, ACTING GOVERNMENT PRINTER, CEYLON.

1890.

CONTENTS.

Remarks on some Analyses of the Coffee of Ceylon, with

suggestions for the eep ee auon of Manures.—By Dr.

RUDOLPH GyGax Sbs

A Descriptive Catalogue of the Woods of Ceylon, —By JouNn

CAPPER, Esq.

A Catalogue of Ceylon hein iy JOHN CAPPER, Esq.

Sketches in the Natural History of Ceylon : Description of

two Minute new Freshwater Molusks of the Genus Planor-

bis and Bithinia—By EpGar L. Layarp, Esq.

An Outline of the Tamil System of Natural History. =

SIMON CasiE CHiTTy, Esq.

Prison Discipline in Ceylon.—By A. G. GREEN, Esq.

A Catalogue of Books in the Tamil Language, with the

names of the Authors, the Subjects, and the Dates, as far

as they can be ascertained.—By Simon Casie Curry, Esq.

Sketches in the Natural History ef Ceylon: Part I., Mam-

mala.—By Ene@ar L. Layarp, Esq. : :

Sketches in the Natural History of Ceylon: Part II., Orni-

thology.—By Epear L. Layarp, Esq.

Notes on the Geology of Ceylon: Laterite Formation—Fluvia-

tile Deposit of Nuwara Eliya.—By E. F. KELAART, M.D....

On the Manufacture of Sugar from the Juice of the Cocoa-

nut Tree.—By J. G. Tayior, Esq. a¢

On the Sap of the Cocoanut Tree, and its Manufacture into

Sugar.—By W.S. Tay or, Esq. Sei

On the Elu Language, its ae and its Poets.—By JAMES

DE ALWIs, Esq.

List of Mammalia of eres Observed or Collected.—By E. F.

KELAART, M.D.

Description of New Species and Varieties of Mammals found

in Ceylon.—By E. F. KeELaart, M.D.

PAGE

1V CONTENTS. |

APPENDIX.

Proceedings of the Meetings of the Ceylon Branch of the

Royal Asiatic Society held on June 9, 1849

Do. December 1, 1849

Do. February 23, 1850

Do. March 23, 1850

Do. June 22, 1850

Do. August 13, 1850

Abstract of a Hbeoleaigy Register ae at Batticotta in

1849 oe

List of Members of the Societe

List of Officers of the Society

List of Books presented to, and purchased the Socicty

BKRRATUM.

t= In head-lines to Journal, Volume II., Nos. 4 and 5, omit “ Part I.”

and ‘ Part IT.”

BOYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY,

CEYLON BRANCH.

REMARKS ON SOME ANALYSES OF THE

COFFEE OF CEYLON, WITH SUGGESTIONS FOR

THE APPLICATION OF MANURES.

By Dr. RupoLteH GyYGax.

(Read June 9, 1849.)

Havine had my attention drawn to an account of

some analyses of the Jamaica coffee berry, made by Mr.

Herepath, the Liverpoo! chemist, I have paid some little

attention to the subject of the coffee plant of this Island,

forming as it does so very important a feature in the

resources of this Colony. The desire that I thus felt for

obtaining some information regarding the constituent parts

— of the Ceylon tree and its fruit was heightened by a know-

_ ledge of the fact that not a few of those coffee estates

which once gave good promise of success are now in a very

precarious state of production.

T mnch regret that the means at my disposal have not

NOTICE.

———

QF In head-lines to J ournal, Volume II., Nos, 4

and 5, omit “Part I.” and “Part a ie

lv CONTENTS.

APPENDIX.

Proceedings of the Meetings of the Ceylon Branch of the

Royal Asiatic Society held on June 9, 1849

Do. December 1, 1849

Do. February 23, 1850

Do. March 23, 1850

Do. June 22, 1850

Do. August 13, 1850

Abstract of a Heteoronesial Register ng at Batticotta in

1849 ss

List of Members of the cee

List of Officers of the Society ie

List of Books presented to, and purchased ie the Society ..

ERRATUM.

t= In head-lines to Journal, Volume II., Nos. 4 and 5, omit “ Part I.”

and ‘ Part IT.”

ia ener

ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY,

CEYLON BRANCH.

REMARKS ON SOME ANALYSES OF THE

COFFEE OF CEYLON, WITH SUGGESTIONS FOR

THE APPLICATION OF MANURES.

By Dr. RupoLteH GyYGax.

(Read June 9, 1849.)

Having had my attention drawn to an account of

some analyses of the Jamaica coffee berry, made by Mr.

Herepath, the Liverpool! chemist, I have paid some little

attention to the subject of the coffee plant of this Island,

forming as it does so very important a feature in the

resources of this Colony. The desire that I thus felt for

obtaining some information regarding the constituent parts

of the Ceylon tree and its fruit was heightened by a know-

ledge of the fact that not a few of those coffee estates

which once gave good promise of success are now in a very

precarious state of production.

I much regret that the means at my disposal have not

allowed me to carry out any quantitive analysis, but the

results of my labours are sufficiently accurate for present

purposes. I have analysed the wood and fruit of trees from

two different localities, as well as the ashes of some plants —

sent me from the Rajawella estate, near Kandy, and they

all tend to bear out the result of Mr. Herepath’s inquiries.

Placing the substances traced in the coffee plant in the order

o/—87 B

132 JOURNAL, R.A.S, (CEYLON). [Vou. JI., Parr II.

in which they occur in the greatest quantity, they will

stand thus :—

Lime. Magnesia.

Potash. Phosphoric acid.

Other acids.

Of these, limeis by far the most prominent, forming about

sixty per cent. of the whole.

I cannot help, therefore, arriving at the conclusion that to

cultivate coffee with any degree of success the first-named

substance must be present in the soil, or, if not present, must

be supplied to it by some process.

Now, itis a singular fact that the rocks and soils of Ceylon

are greatly deficient in alkaline matter, and taking this

view of the case, one no longer wonders that many estates

cease to produce coffee. ‘hat all, or nearly all, the planta-

tions did in their first year or two of bearing produce liberally

in fruit may readily be accounted for by the fact that the

alkaline poverty of the soil was enriched by the burning of

the vast quantities of timber which lay felled on all sides.

Whilst this temporary supply lasted, all was well with the

planter. Heavy rains and frequent scrapings of the steep

land by the mamoty soon dissipated this scanty supply, and

short crops are now the consequence.

But nature, ever bountiful, ever ready to compensate for

all deficiencies, has provided to our hands a ready means of

remedying this evil of the soil by scattering throughout

most parts of the interior supplies of dolomitic limestone.

The dolomite of Ceylon is not pure,—far from it,—being —

mixed freely with apatite or phosphate of lime. ven in

this very accidental circumstance the coffee planter is aided ;

for the phosphoric acid thus combined with the limestone

is the very substance required in addition. Some of the

finest properties in the Island are situated on a limestone

bottom, and these no doubt will continue to yield abundant

crops for a very long period.

iste

No. 5.—1849. | COFFEE OF CEYLON. 133

It has been urged against this opinion, that in some dis-

tricts where coffee planting has proved a complete failure,

dolomite is found most abundantly; but I have very little

doubt that the dolomite here alluded to is only magnesian

limestone, of which a great deal exists in the Central

Province, and which is most inimical to the coffee bush.

I am aware that already several manures have been tried

on coffee with varying degrees of success. Guano has, I

believe, quite failed, and is, besides, very costly. Cattle

manure is said to be effective, and no doubt it is; but it isa

costly and troublesome affair. Bones, ground fine, are now

being tried, though they cannot but prove most expensive,

especially when imported.

A ton of bone dust consists of :—

Animal matter .. ¢46 Tb.

Phosphates of lime, &c. ... 1,245 fb.

Carbonates of lime, &c. ... 249 ib.

The virtue of bones lays in the phosphates far more than in

the animal matter, and thus their action on soils is felt for

many years after their application. The Sinhalese cultiva-

tors of paddy about Colombo and Galle appear to have been

long aware of the fertilising effects of this kind of manure,

and import the article in dhonies from many parts of the

coast. They bruise them coarsely before applying them.

The partially decomposed husks of the coffee berry have

been tried for some years, and successfully; but they are

difficult of collection and bulky to remove from one part of

the estate to the other.

In Europe it would appear that little is yet known as to

the causes of the fertilising effects of oil-cake: some suppose

them to arise mainly from the oil left by the crushing process,

but this is not at all clear. Ido not, however, see that we

must look for much assistance from poonac as a manure

for coffee; for the cocoanut tree it is doubtless most

134 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II, Parr IT.

valuable. But we have yet to learn that beyond supplying

so much more vegetable matter, it helps the action of the

soil on the roots of the coffee bush, which, after all, is what

is really required. :

For the proper application of the dolomite to land as

manure, it should be freely burnt in a kiln with a good

quantity of wood, the ashes of which should be afterwards

mixed with the burnt lime, and the whole exposed for

several days to the action of the air, sheltered of course

from the weather. The mixture should be applied just

before the setting in of the monsoon rains ; if the land be

tolerably level the lime may be scattered broadcast on the

surface, though not quite near the plants. When the

estate to be manured is steep, then the substance to be

applied should be placed in ridges cut crossways to the

descent of the slopes. |

About one hundredweight to the acre would be ample

for most lands; some may, however, require more. The

contents of the husk-pits might advantageously be mixed

up with the burnt lime when a sufficiency of it has been

saved.

No. 5.—-1849. | “WOODS OF CEYLON. 135

A DESCRIPTIVE CATALOGUE OF THE

WOODS OF CEYLON.

By JoHN CAPPER.

(Read August 25, 1849.)

THICKLY covered as the greater portion of this Island

is with dense forests or jungle, it cannot be matter of

surprise that its woods should be found in the greatest

variety. This fact seems to have been noticed in almost

every published account of the Island. All the works which

treat of Ceylon make allusion to its many useful and

ornamental woods, though very few of these have entered

upon any detail. Indeed, we can glean but scanty infor-

mation even from the best of these writers.

Knox, in his account of Ceylon, tells us but little on this

subject, and the same may be said of Perceval; whilst

Cordiner gives merely a list of some dozen kinds of woods.

Bertolacci tells more than any other writer of the state and

value of the timber trade of the Colony, though he does

not seem to have been acquainted with many varieties of

woods. He considered that by the acquisition of the Kandyan

‘territory the British had opened the way to great resources

as regards timber, and beyond a doubt the vast tract of

country stretching from the Kandyan mountain range

through Bintenna, northwards and eastwards, comprises

forests full of most valuable timber. This source of wealth

is, however, at present nearly closed against us from the

utter inability of the natives to transport any produce of

weight to the sea coast, on account of the impassable state

of the Mahaveli-canga, a noble river which, according

136 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr IT.

to Mr. Brooke’s report, might easily be rendered navigable

for one hundred and thirty miles from Trincomalee, and

which runs during a great part of its course through a dense

forest of ebony, satinwood, and halmililla.

A later writer on Ceylon—Mr. Bennett—enumerates

ninety varieties of woods by their native names, but enters

into no detail whatever as to their particular uses or

localities, though he calls them ‘ Kandyan woods.”

A list of about two hundred varieties was taken home by

the late Sir A. Johnstone, and by him presented to the

parent Society, which afterwards, on the appointment of

Mr. Stewart Mackenzie to this Government, requested him

to collect and send the Society specimens of, and information

regarding the woods. This was not done, and I believe

nothing more has been attempted, save a few small

collections by various individuals ; amongst these may be

mentioned the specimens and catalogue presented to this

Society by Mendis Muhandiram.

In offering a few remarks accompanying the catalogue

which I have prepared of the woods of this Island, I con-

sider that the subject is no more than barely touched upon.

The few facts, however, now thrown together may be the

means of inducing some of our many outstation members

to contribute to our stock of information.

The first step towards an account of Ceylon timber is

undoubtedly to form a catalogue. The list with this I have

compiled by the aid of others. It comprises not less than

four hundred and sixteen varieties, which, it is believed, are

nearly all those which have been observed, though it is

possible that in the dense forests of Bintenna there may be

yet many new varieties.

But a small portion of these are known by English names,

and I have as yet been able to find the botanical names of

very few. A column is added to show the comparative

hee i

No. 5.—1849. ] -WOODS OF CEYLON. 137

value of these woods for useful purposes, in which they are

numbered 1 to4,

Those. numbered 1 are the most valuable, either for

ornamental work or for building purposes, and able to stand

long exposure to weather.

The woods marked 2 are those which, though good, are not

so strong nor so well able to bear exposure out of doors.

No. 3 are such as are only used for inferior purposes, and

seldom, if ever, employed for house-building, except perbaps

by the natives. They are used chiefly for packing-cases,

dry casks, ceilings, stands for goods, common door or

window frames, partitions in rooms, or similar purposes.

No. 4 comprises all those woods which are unfit for

carpenters’ work, and are either quite useless, or only

employed for constructing mud and stick houses or other

rough and temporary jungle work.

Of the four hundred and sixteen varieties, there are :—

83 of No. 1. 162 of No. 3.

82 of No. 2. 139 of No. 4.

Of those included in the first class, the most prominent are

the calamander, the kadumbériya, the ebony, and satin-

wood, the two latter being best kuown, as they are found in

sufficient quantities to enable them to be used for building

or other purposes, as well as for ornamental works.

Ebony is too well known to require description. It grows

chiefly in the Northern and Hastern Provinces, but it is

also met with in the Kandyan district: a large forest of it

existed at one time in the vale of Dumbara, which has since

given place to coffee bushes. Itis not used for any purposes

in Ceylon beyond furniture and articles of ornament, but it

is exported largely to Europe at times: It is far more

difficult to work up than satinwood, and also more brittle.

The kadumbériya, or bastard ebony, is of a fine black

colour, deeply and richly veined with red, and admirably

adapted for furniture; it is excessively hard, but not so

138 JOURNAL, .R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parz I.

plentiful as ebony. It is found in the same districts as the

preceding.

Calamander is valuable, not only on account of its beauty,

but also by reason of its increasing scarceness ; it is only to

be met with in the forests near Ratnapura and in the

Pasdun kéralé, and even there it is found to be very

small. The tree is of very slow growth, the natives believing

that one of an ordinary size is at least three hundred years

old ; it is pretty certain that in a very few years there will

not be sufficient calamander in Ceylon to make a single pair

of couches.

The satinwood is more plentiful in certain localities than

either of the preceding: it is found chiefly in the Northern,

North-Western, and Hastern Provinces, growing generally

to the height of one hundred feet. The variegated or flowered

satin is the most valuable for furniture, but it is found in

comparatively small quantities —probably not more than

three per cent. of the trees on the east coast yield this quality ;

but in the country about Puttalam it is said to prevail to the |

extent of fifteen or twenty percent. Satinwood is admirably

adapted to all purposes requiring great strength and

resistance to weather. It is much used for piles of bridges,

and is almost, if not quite, the only wood which will stand

as teeth in cog-wheels of machinery,—ebony, though harder,

being too brittle. In the Eastern Province this wood is

most abundant, and nearly all the houses are built of it,

even down to the flooring.

There are some other woods which would appear to be

well adapted for ornamental furniture work, though, with the

exception of the nedun wood, not yet employed for such

purposes: these are the nedun, the tamarind, and the del

woods, all of which, save the last, are hard, of a close grain,

admitting of a fine polish, and tolerably abundant in the

Western and Southern Provinces.

No. 5,— 1849. | WOODS OF CEYLON, | 139

After the four first-enumerated woods may be placed

others equally useful, though less valuable, because more

abundant, such as the teak, jak, hina, milila, suriya,

hal-milila, né, &e. Of these, the only one employed for

furniture is the jak, which, when well selected and polished,

very frequently equals good mahogany. The want of grain

in the others named alone prevents them from being used

for similar purposes, as they are equally compact in texture

and smooth under the tool.

It is doubtful if teak is indigenous to Ceylon, but however

this may be, the chief supply is derived from Moulmein

and Cochin, though a good deal is to be met with in various

parts of the Western and Southern Provinces, having been

planted by the Dutch Government to a considerable extent.

The quality of this cultivated timber is superior to that of

the imported, though it does not often arrive at the same

size. or quality the Ceylon teak stands first, the Cochin

second, and the Moulmein timber last.

It will not be easy to find a tree more generally useful

than the jak, if we except the cocoanut tree. Scarcely a

native garden of any size is to be found without at least one

spreading its ample shade over the space before the dwel-

ling, and yielding its abundant harvest of fruit, Jakwood,

besides being most valuable for furniture, is admirably

adapted for all purposes of house or boat-building. It

stands the action of the weather and attack of worms, it

lasts longer under water, when used in boats, than does teak,

and it is far superior to that wood for upper planking of

boats,where it is liable to come in frequent collision with other

bodies. For this quality of resistance jak is only inferior

tosatinwood. Doméa, being cheaper, is usually employed to

form the stems and stern posts of large cargo boats. The jak

tree hollowed out makes an excellent canoe ;. indeed, there

are very few purposes for which this wood is not adapted.

140 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (cHYLOoN). [Vo.. II., Parr IT.

Milila is superior to jak for some purposes, being of a

rather closer texture. Itis much preferred for frames of

doors and windows, as it is nob liable to warp or shrink ; it

Is, however, rather more scarce than jak, and in the

Western and Southern Provinces it is comparatively rare.

Hal-milila is most useful wood for casks, especially

as packages for oil or arrack; indeed, there is no other

wood in sufficient quantity adapted for the same purpose.

It is close grained, free from resin, and very pliable in the

cooper’s hands. It is, moreover, a very clean timber, and

does not impart colour or taint to any liquid. Teak has been

sometimes used for oil casks on the coast, but it is not

liked here, as from its brittleness it is more liable to fracture.

Hal-milila grows to a great height, and usually very

straight; it is used frequently for beams of a large span,

hough not preferred for this purpose. It is also in great

request amonest carriage-builders for spokes of wheels and

several parts of the carriage body. The principal supply

to the Colombo market comes from Trincomalee and

Batticaloa, where, especially between the latter place and

the Bintenna country, immense forests of it are found

adjoining rivers, without the aid of which the cost would be

greatly enhanced in conveying it to the sea coast. The

timber contractors employ in the felling of this and other

woods the village Veddds of Bintenna, and by their aid

supply the owners of small vessels and dhonies, who are

mostly Moormen, and these bring it round to Colombo, the

profit on the transaction giving them a very fair freight

for their vessels.

The kina is another lasting and useful wood, and

from its great length and straightness is generally |

employed for masts and yards of vessels. Itis to be met

with in all the maritime provinces of the Island.

The principal use of the swriya, or Persian wood, is for

No. 5.—1849. ] WOODS OF CEYLON. 141

the shafts and other bent parts of carriages. The tree is

too well known as the tulip tree to require any description.

Not the least important of these woods classed as second

in value are the palmyra and f7tul: both palms are

valuable for building purposes, for which they are very

lasting, as well as for yeilding a good quality of jaggery ;

from this in some places a fine white sugaris made. ‘The

former of these trees grows chiefly in the Northern Province,

whence a large trade is carried on to Colombo and the opposite

coasts of India. The chief use of the palmyra is for rafters,

that of the Atul for reepers. These latter are known

commonly as nipera reepers, and are dearer than any other

kind; they last in many instances for fifty or sixty years.

The kitul is used, in addition to the above purposes, for

handling tools, and for spears for hunting wild hogs and

porcupines. It grows in various parts of the Island, though

not abundantly.

The gal-mendora is very good timber for beams, wall-

plating joists, planking, or similar purposes, end is. much

used as a cheap substitute for more durable wood. It is

abundant in most parts of the Island, and grows to a

large size.

In addition to the above enumerated, there are some

others of this class equally valuable, but by far too rare to

be cited as useful woods.

In the third class there are a far greater number than of

the previous descriptions. Foremost amongst them in value

are the muruta, godapara, kiri-hembiliya, hora, gona,

ubbériya, hal,and diyapara. These are all good for secondary

house-building use under cover, and the three former well

adapted for dry coopering purposes. The diyapara and

muruta for casks may be ranked just before hora, hal, and

ubbériya. They are all light in texture, and easily worked ;

the most abundant of them is the fal and hora wood.

142 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CHYLON). [ Vou. EL, Vane IE.

These are the woods almost universally employed for coffee

casks, their cheapness greatly recommending them for the

purpose. The former abounds in all the forests of the

maritime and Central Provinces. I am of opinion, however,

that more unsuitable wood could hardly be found than this

and the hora ; indeed, unless they be remarkably well

seasoned or deprived of their resinous and gummy matters

by boiling, they are about the worst timber that could be used

for coffee. I have seen floating on the surface of water in

which these woods had been boiled a scum, an inch thick, of

dark gummy matter, the liquor emitting an offensive odour.

In addition to this the porous nature of the wood is an

objection not to be overlooked. These are disadvantages

which do not occur in other kinds of wood to nearly so great

an extent. :

Although being placed in the third class for reasons

already assigned, the cocoanut is by far the most valuable of

the trees of Ceylon to the natives, and regarded in a

commercial point of view, it must be so considered by

Europeans. Its use generally as a building wood is confined

to the natives, who require no other with which to construct

their humble dwellings. For rafters it is also used genera!ly.

The harder part of the tree is capable of being worked up

for furniture and ornamental purposes, admitting of a very

good polish; it will not, however, stand any long exposure to

weather, and the green wood will decay in ten days or a

fortnight if left exposed. There would appear to be no

portion of this truly valuable tree lost to the Sinhalese :

every part from the root to the dried flower and the stalks

of the leaves is placed to its own proper use.

In the fourth class are found all those woods which are

either quite useless, save for firewood, or are only employed

for the most inferior works, such as fencing gardens and

for the walls of temporary mud and stick huts. They are

No. 5.—1849.] WOODS OF CEYLON. : 143

mostly of very rapid growth and equally rapid in decay, some

of them falling to pieces within a few days of being felled.

I know of no peculiarity attaching to any of this-class of

woods, save to the riti-gaha, the wood of which is perfectly ©

useless, but its bark is turned to good account by the

natives of Badulla and Uva,in the forests of which dis-

tricts the tree chiefly grows. The bark is very pliant and

durable, and the villagers avail themselves of these qualities

by stripping it from the tree in large pieces and sewing it up

into bags, in which they convey coffee or paddy to market on

their bullocks’ backs, The hirilla, or corkwood, is useful on

account of its softness for lining insect cases.

CATALOGUE OF CEYLON WOODS."

; | Se

Sinhalese a

Name. English Name. Botanical Name. & <1

Aaridde a — ae —

Agalandere. ... Malabar Nut sc a

Ahu ... Broad-leaved Morinda... Morinda sp.

Akmelle we — si ae

Alebeiriye... — ae —

os 9

Aleheriliye ... _ a8 —

Alerin ... Caneru ee — Be

Alpedde 500 — 566 = Bee

Aluboa 568 — ,.. Calyptranthes jambo-

lana sa

Alukettiya ... = 6c — os

Aludel ... Dell ... Artocarpus pubescens

BROAN Om Ww & dance.

eo © 6 G OG

cosoiee)

Ambe -.. Mango ... Magnifera indica

Angene ee — 500 —

Ankende 59 — ae --

Anoana ... (Netted) Custard Apple Anona squamosa

Arreloo »»- Gallnut on ... Terminallia chebula ...

Pm rw f PO P WH PS CO

QQ Elks Eere

Arreliye ... Oleander : ie —

* Reprinted exactly from the original edition of 1849,—Hon, Sec.

144 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON).

Sinhalese

Name. Knglish Name.

Arremene et —

Attikka ed ie

Atoketiye ... =

Autton cule —

Badoella mee es

Bairiye oe =

Bakmie Ge —

Bale sie —

Baludan “ —_

Bambere AM —

Bappede 459 —

Batdambe ae —

Battedombe ... Clove Tree

Battekeena ... Wild Keena

Battekirille ... Shining-leaved Kryth-

oxylon

Bely ... Bengal Quince

Beligobot __... Talia-leaved Hybiscus...

Beriliye see ~

Bilin .-- Bilimbi Tree

Boagaha ... Buddha

Boakiri wae —

Boamboo te =

Boamea Oo =

Bookende .-. Malacca Tree

Borre 5 oe

Booloo wee oe

Burutte .. Hatinwood

Cabalmara_.... ie

Cadol ... Leafy Mangrove

Cadoemberiye... Bastard Ebony

Cadoroo ... Spear-leaved Cerbera ...

Cahamilille ... —

Cahate ... Astringent Tree

Cahadawata ... a

Cadju ne Cashew ree Gains: Anacardium occidentale

Botanical Name.

.. Ficus sp.

... Calophyllum acumena-

tum oes

... Augle marmelos

.. Averrhoa bilimbi

--- Ficus religiosa

... Terminalia bellerica ...

-.- Chloroxylon Swietenia

eee

56d Rhizophora Cadel

--- Diospyros ebenaster ...

... Eleocarpus serratus .

eo 68 oo WD F PB OC HL bh

moaagmaact aac Q dance.

[ Vou. If., Parr II.

er)

LaSt@ues rs Go tn seLG@ tb G.w so el © GG Ga 2

No. 5.—1849.]

Sinhalese

Name.

Calemadowa ... ane

... Cork-barked Quatteria... —

Caletive

Calooberiye

Caluhaberele ...

Calukeale

Calumediriye ...

Caluverei

Carawoo

Carepinche

Carewele

Carre

Carreboo

Catepete

Catoandere

Catoburute

Catoembool

Catokende

Catoekeale

Caotkittool

Catoveiriye

Caumorangau..

Cauperiburute

Coan

Coapy

Cobbae

Coboamelle

Cocatiye

Coembook

Cohombe

Cohukirille

Colon

Coodeludehy

. Ebony

... small-flowered Canthum

. Horny Alengeiena

.. Knotty Thorn

.. Thorny Nipéra 506 =

Catokurundu ...

WOODS OF CEYLON.

English Name. Botanical Name.

—=— ——

—— =

o-e

— —*

Calamander . Diospyros hirsuta

.. Diospyros ebenus

— ... Bergera Konigii

.. Thorny Satinwood ... os

.. Five-leaved Silk Cottcn —

Thorny Scolopia

Carambela

Caffre Satinwood cae od

... Ceylon Oak te ==

.. Coffee .»- Coffea arabica

.. Saw-leaved Ornitrophe Ornitrophe ccbbe

—s

... Caffre Lemon ee —

Cukurumaan ...

Cooretiye

Corecaha

Cos

Cosdambe

.. Jak

... Randia dumetorum

... Averrhoa carambola...

.. Pentapere paniculate...

... Artocarpus integrifolia

re)

Quality.

Abun

Pm FF PB HH —~ YH OD Bp oo & Z

Owes ans @=]Cc eo Se SS © @ @ dance:

146 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). (Vor. Oe. Ee Ue

Sinhalese

Name.

Cottepol

Cottambe

Cukule

Cummelle

Curutiyedambe

Curundu

Daanga

Dadamary

Dalook

Dambe

Daminne

Damonne

Dampere

Dan

Daweta

Dawalkurunda

Debere

Dedicaha

Dehy

Deloon

nao (ened

Demete

Dimbool

Devicadaroo ...

Diyebeiriye

Diyehaberde ...

Diyeheliya

Diyenan

Diyapara

Diyeratembela

Diyetanliye

Dyietorene

Dodanpana

Dombe

Dombekeena ... Wild Keena

... Rosin Tree

Dommele

English Name.

Cotekimbula ... Double-leaved Fig

... Country Almond

——

... Cinnamon

... Triangular Spurge

... Pomegranate

... Wood Apple

... Wild Jack

Botanical Name.

... lerminalia catappa ...

... Cinnamomum zeylani-

cum

... Long-flowered Spathodea —

... Huphorbia antiquorum

. Limonia sp.

.. Punica granatum

.. Fercnia elephantum ...

. Dillenia sp.

.. Calophyllum

inophyllum

Quality.

Abun-

dance.

luck {eo} eer loc) {ech Pe =, leo) loc} el les) lech TS pe look. led) foo) @ > Se) eS SY ©}

oe)

No. 5.— 1849. | WOODS OF CEYLON. 147

Hteheriliye ... — 309 aa

Ettekerean ... —_ ae —

Sinhalese ee 2

Name. English Name. Botanical Name. eas

Doon = —- 503 —_ 1B

Donemadelan... — S00 — 3 C

Hapette ... Lage-leaved Alungria — 2

Kariye see — ee — 4

Eheale .\. Purging Cassia ... Cassia fistula 2

Eheate ie — 500 — 4

Elekeheriye ... — tae _ }

Elewaran ae —_— | a a eee

Rlemediriye ... ~— i _ 2

Embereille ... — re — 3

Embille ... Small-leaved Bramble... — 3

Embooldeloon .. Sour Pomegranate __... ~ 3

Embooldodan,.. Sour Orange 5 os 3

Hmboolbakmee — 506 — “A

Erebadoo 500 _ we = 4

Hsbedde Ose = Se = 3

Etdemete ... — see — 4

WDmePagawmaoanesS av rrPwemratractarFacw rere

Kitembe ... Wild Mango ... Mangifera indica

Etone — ie — ate =

Kitteiriye .. Ash-leaved Munuya ... —

Kttoare mee — ati =

Galandere... —_ a, — 2

Galis ty _ ie _— 2

Galkerew es — ue —_ 2

Galkulu eae _ ee, = 2

Galmendora ... Mendora oa —_ 2

Galmora aot — ee — 2

Gasiyembela ... -- Hee — 2

Galvereloo ... —_ ie _ 3

Gammanlo ... — es — 2

-Gammee .. Oleandu Cassia ms — 2

Gandepane ... _ a =o sshd

Gedeboo ies — nie a Tee leet

Geriette ee — A — 3

o7—87 ro)

148

Sinhalese

Name.

Getenitol

Gerikuloo

Goanebaroo

Godacadooroo

Godapara

Goketo or Kana

Goraka

Gonele

Goolmore

Gonkea

Gonne

Goreka

Gotokeena

Gurukeena

Gereike

Goorinde

Halpenne

Hakurusiyem-

bel

Hal

Halmendora ...

Halmilille

Hompalenden...

Hampinne

Handoonwenne

Hedewoke

Heenkebbel’e...

Heennauren ..

Helenbe

Hick ee

Hingool

Hiricadol

Hoamdiriye

Hondepera

Hora

JOURNAL, R.A

. Gorka Tree

English Name.

Poison Nut

..Gamboge Tree

.. Jaggery Tamarind

. Hal

-» Halmilille

Ceylon Sandalwood

- Small Orange

.. Large flowered

Dilenia

»- Thief Tree

&. (CEYLON).

.. Strychnos

Botanical Name.

—

nux vomica

.. Dillenia dentata

. Hebradendron

gambogioides

.. Garcinia sp. 600

... Large Keena or Calaba Calophyllum calaba ...

eee Small Keena

.-. Vateria indica

. Berria ammonilla

—=

.. Dillenia sp.

Quality.

wo oP

— bd oo 08 O OF © WD CO P CO eS CO CO a Pm oe cw OO P SP CF B CO OD

Be Sonwnmmeor hor won r @- a. a

[ Vou. 1L., Parr IT.

> bo by @ @ dance,

wmarwnwanwna

No. 5.— 1849.]. = woops OF CEYLON.

Sinhalese.

Name.

Hulanhik

English Name.

Hulanmauraee _—

Hunukirille

Hury

Idde

Imbool

Indy |

Itte

llookberiye

Jamboele

Jamboo

Jawenauren

Jayepaule

Krabu

Kok

Keale

Kebelle

Kedepotta

Kekuna

Kende

Keppettiya

Katekanle

Ketembelle

Kekelimesse ...

Keneheriya

Kedemesse

Kintoloo

Keribeiriya

Kericoan

Kerihimideye...

Kerille

Kiripolloo

Kiripelle

Kiriwalla

Kittool

Kabari

—

Botanical Name.

... stained Silk Cotton-wood Bombax malabaricum

... small Date Palm

... Pumplemos or Shaddock Citrus decumana

... dambo or Malay Apple Eugenia sp.

... King’s Orange

... Purging Croton

..» Clove

... Crane Tree

... Oblique A gineia

..e Molucca Nut .

... Aromatic Croton

—-

a Rose-leaved Bramble ..

... Lobe-leaved Cestus

o—

—

——

—

... Corkwood

... Indian Fig or Banyan...

... Nepera

..» Blotched Wood

... Croton tiglium

... Aleurites moluccanum

—

... Sonneretia acida

Ficus indica

... Caryota urens

... Caryophyllus aromaticus

—

awe

ee)

Quality.

Abun

dance.

—

to &

Ow Pp Pp OW A LO

me Pm Lo

Bow

fe) sehie) el Gl (el Pe ee) oe) (wel os) oP ol, oul @

rm PB WM ow wo & & W oO Ot

150

Sinhalese.

Name.

Keylya

Lamloe

Lawaloo

Liyan

Liyangoo

Looloo

Loonumidelle

Lowy

Luhankende

Lunubinde

LLunu wanene

Mabily

Margosa

JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IIL, Part Ul.

English Name.

..» Screw Pine

... smooth-leaved Cordia... ous

... Common-ieaved Tree ...

... Lovey-lovey

... Three-leaved Fagara ...

... sacred Grateena

Maapatkebelie =

Madetiye

Madgool

Madool Caren

Mahsdan

Malabede

Makalu

Mabburute

Malepete

Malkeare

Marada

Marende

Masan

Malavere

Mauran

Mauoessan

Madye

Mediye

Mee or IIlipia

M eande!

Meiltavere

Meanmeille

... Bog Tree

de Feast Tree

... var Plum Tree

... Flowered Satinwood

... Blunt-leaved Tree

... Honey Tree

... DVelwood or Wild

Breadfruit

Botanical Name.

... Melia azedarachta

... Dalbergia sp.

Calyptranthes jambo-

lana

.- Bassia longifolia

. Artocarpus pubescens...

Co em bo

No, 5.—1849.] “WOODS OF CEYLON. 151

Sinhalese ef: zs

Name. English Name. Botanical Name. S173

Meepook 505 — 605 — 9b6 8}

Meeriye 506 — oh = 3

Melli bee a a — 3

Milille ae — ... Vitex trifolia 1

Midelle a — See _ 4

Mille — “06 — As = 1

Moalbedde ... - — ore a 2

Molebeya _... — cee — 3

Moodilla oe _ sats — 4

Moonemal _... — ... Minusops elengi same

More ... Kyeball -.. Nephelium pulpilla-

tum Bee Se

Motemole ... ae 650 = 3

Moodomuranga —_ ee — &

Myle ve — His — 2

Mugume uae _ aes — 3

Muruie S00 _ ... Lagerstreemia regina 2

Malu ... Bag Tree 585 -- a 8)

Naa ... Lron Wood ... Mesua ferrea 1

Nan-nam _ ... Stem-flowered Tree ... oo 4

Nangewally ... — wk — 4

Nanhingool ... — ves -- BS

Nauwa as = ice — 4

Nawehandy ... oT os —

Neke a == =: — 4

Nelly ae — ae — ey

Nendoon i — ... Dalbergia lanceolaria 2

Nereloo ae — a. — 3

Neten ae — es == 4

Nuge ... Banyan a ae 4

Nomede aes _ By — ao

Ooruhonde ... — aoe = » 3

Oouankende ... — ae == son

Oatoroo 560 — ae — mane

Ookberriye ... . — a — aed

Oamby the _ a — Sansa &

Oala ae — “56 a 3

152

Sinhalese

Name.

Odidehy

Ooguresse

Ookoonu

Oorukanu

Oorukeena

Ote

Oul

Paloo

Palol

Pamburu

Pando

Pandere

Pamedambe

Panukeren

Patan

Patechamere ...

Patengey

Patkeale

Pattadel

Pauberoo

Pauwatte

Payeroo

Pehimbiye

Petan

Peire

Peiretombele ...

Pelim

Penele

Penibaru

-Penidodan

Pol

Polyabere

Poroadediya ...

Puwak

Poroabedde

Poroamaureu ...

Poojate

JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [VoL. II., Parr II.

English Name.

eee Common Lemon

... Wild Keena

... Sweet-fruited Tree

bee

... Sappan

. Common Dell

. Guava

.. Cocoanut

. Areka

—

. Sacrifice Tree

Botanical Name.

eee

... Ceegalpinia sappan

.. Citrus aurantum

.. Cocos nucifera

. Areca catechu

Or —

Quality.

Abun-

GC ££ OF PB & RP CO

nor WON DWE WwW Pw WwW Bw PHP WO

weornowww ip ™ op PB wh DD WY

dance.

No. 5.—1849.]

Sinhalese

Name.

Panawelle

Penile

Rambutam

Rameneidele

Ranewere

Ratbereliye

Ratedel

Ratekakeena ...

Ratkeale

Rategoreka

Ratecombo

Ratejambo

Ratesappoo

Ratelowoloo

Ratenelle

Ruek

Ruekattene

Ritigaha

Sal

Samedera

Sapoo

Sapumiliile

Seirie

English Name.

... Rambutam

aoe

.. hed Keena

... Kvergreen

... Roseapple

.. Pole Tree

os. Sean

— WOODS

OF CEYLON.

Botanical Name.

»» Nephlium lappaceum ..

ero

—-

Sevelemediye... = Ss —

.. Lamarind . Lamarindus indicus ...

... smooth-leaved Chocolate —

... Persian Wood or Tulip

Tree ... Thespesia populnea ...

Siyembela

Soketel

Sooriye

Sooriyemaura... —

Sudoeanu bes os

Sudoliyan ... ae

Sudokerew ... —

Suvende ane a

Samanele oa =

Talgaha . Palmyra

Tale ... Basin Tree

Talandere ... a

... Mimosa

ce B orassus flabelliformis

154 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [ Vout. II., Parr Il.

dance.

Sinhalese Ee

Name. English Name. Botanical Name. e

Tarrene ee — alee — 3

Teakke se Leak ... Lectona grandis 4

Telembo ac — ... Bombax neplaphillum 1

Telekehiriye ... — 580 _— 3

Tembiliya ... — 560 — ets

‘Tibiry -». Slime Apple ... Diospyros embryop-

teris Pr)

Timbool pd — S80 _— 4.

Totile ee om Abc = oes,

Veere ae —_ eee — 1

Vereloo ... Ceylon Olive ... Kleocarpus serratus 4

Velenge ves = ode .— 2

Velandere ... — G0 -- dom ail

Wade esi — see -— 3

Walboambo ... a 56 — 4

Waldombe _... — sé — She

Walgonne... — 500 — wee

Waljambo ... a se — 4

Walla ale — 500 — 4

Walsappoo ... — oe = |

Walakeena ... — eee _ 3

Waneidelle _... — wes — 2

Wanemee_... — eb _ eid

Wanepoloo ... — oBe = 3

Wanepatoo... — ws a 3

Wanesapoo... = 50d = see ee

Waran ey _ ae _ 4

Wantemadit-

chiye Se — ae a sea 4

Weawarene ... —_ nab — SS ee

Wellenge ea = ... Pterospernum suberi-

folium say.

Welcaha Shc — sho — ee

Welidamboo ... = o0 —_ 3

Wielipenne . ... — S66 — aomt tts

Welipiyanna ... — noe — ace hon

Werelle ee = a —

No. 5.-—1849. | WOODS OF CEYLON. 155

Pag

Sinhalese eas

Name. English Name. Botanical Name. Gis

W ilendewenne — Se — 2

_Yekebaluwa ... — ae — Fagen

Yakimbool ... — ee — ee

Yakedde coe ara eos SS ecany aoe 3

Yakbedde ooo rae (ry) raarat 4

Yakberiya ... — see _ aise

1562 JOURNAL, B.4.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr IT.

SKETCHES IN NATURAL HISTORY:

DESCRIPTION OF TWO MINUTE NEW

FRESHWATER MOLUSKS OF THE GENUS

PLANORBIS AND BITAHINIA.

By Epvaar L. Layarp, Hsq., c.M.5.s.

THE minute shells here described were first detected by

myself accidently: a mass of floating weed taken off the

surface of a small tank or pond, about a mile and a half

from Hambantota, had been placed in a basin to be

examined, to obtain specimens of the next species, and in

stirring the floating particles with the hand, a dead specimen

of a new Planorbis was found adhering to it. Hvery atom

of the weed now underwent a close scrutiny, and the search

produced seven or eight other dead examples, but none living.

Recourse was again had to the pond, but though a large

quantity of weed was collected, and many dead shells found,

the habitat of the living creature remained still unknown

to me. Later in the year (in the month of June) I was

sent to this station, Point Pedro, and during my rambles

through the many lanes of this populous village I

examined one of the walled tanks which are so common

throughout the district ; here, to my delight, plentifully

scattered along the edge of the water, were the bleached

shells of the Planordis and the Bithinia of the Hambantota

tank. )

Fortunately the drought of several months had reduced.

the water so considerably as to enable me to examine the

decaying vegetable matter at the bottom, and attached to

the underside of leaves and sticks were found the Planorbis,

while in similar situations, but principally on stones, the

No. 5.—1849.] FRESHWATER MOLUSKS 157

Bithinia were detected. Many specimens were procured

and taken home, and other descriptions now given of their

habits and form are taken from examples which are living,

and have been under my close observation for several weeks.

Planorbis Tennentiz.

The largest example found measures two-eighths of an

inch across the widest place. Whorles three, transparent

and colourless, showing the animal within ; when examined

through the microscope the substance of the shell may be

perceived to be laid on in successive layers. When the

molusk is alive it gives a spotted appearance to the shell;

mouth inferior.

Habitat, dead leaves upon tanks and pieces of wood, on

which they feed. —

The molusk is endowed with the power of swimming

along the surface of the water in the manner of the Lymma;

occasionally they reach the surface simply by detaching

themselves from the bottom, when they rise by the air they

have carried down with them on some previous occasion ;

but when the air is all exhausted by a long continuance

below the surface, they crawl up some aquatic plant till the

air is reached ; the foot is then thrown out on a plane with

the water, the long tentacles which are situated far back upon

the body are moved rapidly about as if seeking for some

support, the hold of the plant is gradually loosed and

brought to bear on the surface, and with two or three

sudden jerks the little voyager is fairly afloat; its method

of progression is by suction ; the whole foot is on a level

_ with the surface of the water, which offers sufficient resis-

tance for it to propel itself along by alternate contraction

and expansion, the edges of the foot being frequently raised

above the surface.

Unlike the common Planorbis Indicus, which carries its

shell erect, Planorbis Tennentit crawls with its shell almost

158 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL, Parr I.

flat, and its mouth is so situated that in this position it can

be drawn down close to the object along which the inmate

is crawling. Six minute eggs, strung together and fastened

to the inner edge of the whorle near the entrance, have been

detected by tke aid of a powerful glass.

In company with the preceding was discovered the

following, which I have named Bithinia minima, from its

diminutive size :—-

Bithinia Minima.

The largest specimen found measures three-eighths of an

inch in length, one-eighth in breadth ; whorles three, mouth

oval, plain, close with an operculum ; colour horny, trans-

parent, the animal when alive imparting to the shell a

reticulated green appearance.

Habitat, in company with the preceding, but giving

preference to stones and rocks.

These minute shells are aiso endowed with the power of

crawling along the surface of water; they start in a similar

manner, and progress by alternate expansion and contraction.

So great is the hold they retain of the surface, that I have

seen one with the whole of the foot even and level with the

surface, apparently immovable, and yet the heavy portion

of the molusk twisting and twirling round with great

velocity to dislodge a fellow swimmer who had made use

of it asa resting place. The mouth of the molusk is a

small slit on the underside, through which is continually

passing and repassing a small stream of water, much aiding

it in its movements whilst’ swimming, which are brisk

enough.

These minute molusks appear to be infested by a singular.

parasitic enemy, in the shape of a small active blood-red

worm, which passes up into the shell and devours the

inmate; in a similar manner the glow-worm feasts on the

Cyclostoma of the Kandyan country.

No. 5.—1849.] NATURAL HISTORY (TAMIL). 159

AN OUTLINE OF THE TAMIL SYSTEM OF

NATURAL HISTORY.

By Simon Casie Cuirry, Esq., ¢.M.R.A.s.

(Read December 1, 1849.)

Lone before Natural History as a science had engaged

attention in Hurope, and Aristotle had written his Mstoria

Animalium, the Tamils appear to have cultivated it to a

certain extent and reduced it to a system, by naming and ~

classing all objects in the animal, vegetable, and mineral

kingdoms, as far as they were known, into different genera

or families, according to the mutual affinities which are

indicated by their external characters. There are, however,

no works now extant amongst the Tamils which professedly

treat of Natural History, but we are assured by traditions

that Akattiyar, who has not undeservedly been called the

Hippocrates of India, had composed numerous treaties upon

it, which by the lapse of ages have perished or been

forgotten. My materials for the present outline of their

system of Natural History have therefore been principally

drawn from the different Nrkandu or dictionaries, as also

from the incidental notices which occur in other works.

The Tamil system of Natural History embraces a two-fold

classification of animated nature,—one mythological and

the other natural.

- According to the mythological classification, the “Gods”

form a part of the zoological circle. All organised bodies

being distinguished under the two heads of movable

(charam) and fixed (acharam) are again distributed into

seven different genera, the names of which, and the number

160 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [ Vou. IL, Parr II.

of species comprised by each, are stated in the twelfth

chapter of the Sulamani Nikandu.

According to the natural classification, which it is

curious to observe approximates in some points to that of

Linneeus, all things that have life (s‘vardchi) are divided

into four classes (totiam), and these are again sub-divided

into as many genera (sdtv) and species (pétam) as they

are known to comprehend.

The first class, called Sarayucham, includes such as are

viviparous, as man, quadrupeds, the bat, the whale, the

porpoise, the dolphin, the shark, the ray, ec.

The second class, called Andacham, comprehends such as

are oviparous, as birds, fishes, the snake, the frog, the

tortoise, the crocodile, the iguana, the lizard, the chame-

lion, &c. 3

The third class, called Suvétacham, embraces such as are

engendered by heat and damp, as worms, maggots, gnats,

fleas, &c.

The fourth class, called Utpicham, comprises such as are

germiniparous, as trees and herbs.

It is a common saying among the Tamils that “ from the

ant to the elephant there are 84,000,000 species of living

creatures,’ but this is altogether fanciful, and deserves no

attention. The Mikandu which I have consulted scarcely

exhibit the names of more than 100 species in the animal

and 500 in the vegetable kingdom. It should, however, be

observed that these works do not mention all the animals

and vegetables known to the Tamils; and for the greater

part confine themselves only to such as are noticed by the

ancient poets.

The quadrupeds are distinguished as follows :—

l. Kurtichinila-vilanku, or those that live in the hilly

country, such as the lion, the tiger, the elephant, the

bear, &e.

No 5.—1849.] NATURAL HISTORY (TAMIL). 161

2. Mullainila-vilanku, or those that live in woodland

country, such as the deer, the hare, cc.

3. Marutanila-vilanku, or those that live in corn-flelds,

such as the buffalo, the water-dog, &c.

4, Pédlainiia-vilanku, or those that live in sandy deserts,

such as the wild dog.

5. Kodilvdl-vilanku, or those that live upon the branches

of trees, such as the monkey, the squirrel, &c.

The birds are distinguished as follows :—

1. Kuriachinilap paravai, or those belonging to the

hilly country, such as the parrot, the peacock, &c.

2. Mullainilap paravaa, or those found in the woodland

country, such as the wild fowl.

3. Marutanilap paravai, or those that frequent corn-

fields, such as the heron, the andil, the pelican, the swan,

the water-fow], the duck, &c.

4, Pédlainilap paravai, or those peculiar to sandy deserts,

such as the dove, the kite, the eagle, &c.

5. Neytalnilap paravat, or those that are located near

the sea, such as the sea-eagle.

The fishes are simply divided into Kadal-min, or the

sea-fish, and A’ttu-min, or the river-fish.

With regard to the vegetable kingdom, the grasses, the

esculent greens, the creepers, the edible roots, and the mosses

being respectively arranged under the the heads of Pui,

Kirai, Kodi, Kilanku, and Pasi; the trees are distinguished

into A’n-maram, or the male, Pen-maram, or the female,

and Ali-maram or the hermaphrodite; these distinctions

are not, however, as in the Linnean system, founded upon

the differences in the structure of the flowers, but upon the

differences in the texture of the stems: thus, trees the inside

of which is harder than the outside, as the ebony, fall under

the class of male trees ; those the outside of which is harder

than the inside, as the palmirah, fall under the class of

162 JOURNAL, R.A.S, (CEYLON). [ Vou. II., Parr II.

females ; and trees which are spongy and havea milky sap,

asthe Erythrina Indica, fall under the class of hermaph-

rodites.

Independent of the foregoing distinctions, plants in

- general are sub-divided into four. kinds, viz :—

1. O'dati, or those which bear fruit once and then die.

2. Avakési, or those bearing no fruit.

3. Vanapati, or those bearing fruit (apparently) without

blossoms.

4. Vanapdtavam, or those bearing truits from blossoms.

The following isa list of the animals in the Sardyucham

class, as known to the Tamils, and arranged according to

their genera. Should it meet with the approval of the

Society, I shall in my next communication follow it up with

lists of the objects in the other classes.

LIST OF ANIMALS IN THE SARAYUJA CLASS.

I.—Genus, Puli.

Vayappulr or Sinkam, the lion.

Vénkaippuli, the royal lion.

Karumpuli, the black tiger.

Sempul, the red tiger.

Kalutaippul, hyena.

Sirutteippuli, the leopord.

Kodippul, the tiger cat.

OOP OND

I].—Genus, Pinar.

Puna, the domestic cat.

Kadduppunat, the wild cat.

3. Pulukuppinai, the civet cat.

QS =

IlI.— Genus, Yah.

1. Yah or Yanaiyalh.

The name of this animal occurs in the different Nikandus,

and is described as a lion with the proboscis of an elephant,

No. 5.—1849.] NATURAL HISTORY (TAMIL). | 163

_ but it is supposed to have been either fabulous or one of the

extinct species. Some think it was possibly the mammoth.

we =

eee

QQ ae

ON AMA WY

IV.—Genus, Nay.

Nay, the common dog.

Chunankunay, the long-eared dog.

Kodinay, the greyhound.

Chadainay, the woolly dog.

O’/nday, the wolf.

_Chenndy, the wild dog.

Maranay, the polecat.

Nirndy, the otter.

V.—Genus, Nart.

- Nari, the jackal. ee

Kulinart, the fox.

ViI.—Genus, Karado.

. Karadi, the bear.

VIl.— Genus, Yanaz.

Yanai, the elephant.

VIII.—Genus, Kandamirukam.

. Kadndamirukam, the rhinoceros.

IX.—Genus, Panrt.

U'rppanri, the domestic hog.

Kadduppanri, the wild hog.

Mudpanyri, the porcupine.

Kadatpanri, the porpoise.

X.—Gennus, Kutirai.

Kutirai, the horse.

Vanakkutiraz, the wild horse.

XI.—Genus, Kalutai.

Kalutaz, the ass.

Koévérukalutai, the mule.

57 —87 D

164

cn 99 PO

oh 99

JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr II.

XII.—Genus, Oddakam.

Oddakam, the camel.

XILI,—Genus, A' or Madu.

A’ or Pasumadu, the cow.

Kara or Erumaimadu, the buffalo.

XIV.—Genus, A’du.

Veladu, the long-legged goat. |

Pallaiddu, the dwarf goat.

Chemmariadu, the sheep.

Kurumpdadu, the fleecy sheep.

Varaiadu, the mountain sheep.

XV.—Genus, Man.

Pulliman, the spotted deer.

Veliman, the antelope.

Puluddaiman, the hog deer.

Kasturiman, the musk deer.

Maraiman or Marat, the elk.

ay. the deer of whose tail the chouri is made.

XVI.—Genus, Muyal.

Varimuyal, the hare.

Kulimuyal, the rabbit.

Charukumuyal or Ukkulan, the miminna.

XVII.—Genus, Kuranku.

Chenkuranku, the red monkey.

Karunkuranku, the black monkey.

XVIil.—Genus, Téyvanku.

Namatéyvanku, the brown lemur.

Karuntéyvanku, the black lemur.

XIX.—Genus, Alunku.

Alunku, the armadillo.

XX.— Genus, Kirt.

Kiri, the common ichneumon.

Chenkiri, the red-faced ichneumon.

No. 5.—1849.] NATURAL HISTORY (TAMIL). 165

ete oe

XXIJI.—Genus, Anil.

Varianii, the common squirrel.

Maravanil, the dandulena.

XXII.—Genus, Vauval.

Muitiravauval, the common bat.

Kanivauval, the large bat.

XXIII.—Genus, Eli.

. Ll, the common rat.

Trappeli, the house rat.

Kéddeli, the wild rat.

Karel, the black rat.

Velleli, the white rat.

Sundeli, the mouse.

Mulleli, the hedge rat.

Akalan, the mole.

Peruchchali, the bandicoot.

Muiichuru, the musk rat.

XXIV.—Genus, Chura.

O'nkitchura. 5. Maddichchura.

Kurankanchura. 6. Valuvanchura.

Kompanchura. 7. Vélachchura.

Pédtchura.

Different kinds of sharks.

XXV.—Genus, Tirukkaz.

A'dat tirukkat. 6. Chentirukhai.

- Oddait tirukkai. 7. Pafichadit tirukkat.

Karun tirukkai. 8. Pullit tirukkac.

| Kuruvit tirukkai. 9, Manat tirukkai

Kéddat tirukkai.

Different kinds of rays.

166 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II, Part Il.

PRISON DISCIPLINE IN CEYLON. |

By A. G. Green, Esa.

(Read December 1, 1849.)

ALTHOUGH this paper only relates to one prison,—the

Welikada Jail,—yet inasmuch as it treats of the sole

place where any systematic mode of punishment and train-

ing has been carried out, it may truly be said to combine

the whole Prison Discipline of the Island.

Previous to the erection of this prison, the want of a

regular and systematic mode of treating criminals had been

long felt and confessed on all sides—the imprisonment

and labour in those days were of a most unsatisfactory

nature ; nothing like security of the prisoners, or real labour

at their hands was ever attained. They appear to have

preferred an imprisonment which offered them better lodg-

ing, food, and clothing than they could attain in their usual

mode of life, with quite as little labour, and from which they

could escape, whenever it suited them so to do.

This state of things had not escaped the attention

of Government, and accordingly proper representations

having been made to the home authorities by the then

Governor, Mr. Stewart Mackenzie, it was determined to

erect a suitable prison which should be placed under new

and efficient management.

In 1841, Sir Colin Campbell being then Governor, the

present building was commenced by the Civil Engineer,

with the artificers of his department, assisted by a number

of the prisoners from the old jail. In 1843, a sufficient

extent of accommodation was completed to enable the

authorities to place eighty prisoners within its walls, and who

No. 5.—1849.] PRISON DISCIPLINE. 167

continued to assist in carrying on the remainder of the work.

Within a year from this time the convicts had become

such good artificers, that the Civil Engineer was enabled to

dispense with hired labour, and rely upon them for the

completion of the buildings.

This proved not only a great saving, but it also prevented

hurtful communications from being kept up between the

_ prisoners and their friends outside, by means of the usual

hired labourers.

Not long after thisit was determined to bring from Kandy

about forty of the most troublesome prisoners there, in order

that they might be turned to better account and reap the

advantage of the new system. Amongst these convicts

was the noted Puran Appu, since shot at Kandy during the

late rebellion.

To keep the prisoners at continuous labour is a difficult

task ; on the one hand, the natural repugnance to toil in-

herent in the native of the tropics has to be contended

with ; on the other, the physical powers of overseers and

othersin charge of working parties are liable to be weakened,

and their interest to flag in the same proportion as those

of the workmen, in long continued monotonous tasks ; hence

will naturally follow among men deficient in energy and

activity, a desire to get through the day as easily as possible,

and their ideas of usefulness in their vocation are bounded

by the simple effort to avoid censure or dismissal; from

these and similar causes arises the necessity for strict and

unceasing vigilance on the part of the prison government.

A great obstacle to the profitable employment of prisoners

consists in their unwillingness to afford by their labour

any benefit to Government, whom they consider as their

enemy, in depriving them of their liberty. To such an

extent was this feeling carried among them, that on the

introduction of the system of trades instruction into the

prison, only a few were found willing to avail themselves of

168 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr II.

this advantage ; and the benefits which have subsequently

accrued to the establishment from this course would

never have been realised had not Government, on the urgent

representation of the Civil Engineer, sanctioned the pay-

ment of a small allowance to each prisoner who should

attain a certain degree of proficiency in his trade. This

allowance was fixed at three farthings per diem to those

actively and diligently employed learning a trade, and six

farthings per diem to the expert, or first class workman ; any

act of misconduct or breach of jailrules to entail the forfei-

ture of the whole. This allowance, however, only applies to

labour performed under estimates sanctioned by Government.

It is a curious fact connected with the history of Prison

Discipline in Ceylon that the admission of a tradesman to

the jail is of very rare occurrence; out of a hundred pri-

soners committed, there will not be more than one who has

been brought up to any trade. It would seem therefore

that when the natives are able to earn the ordinary wages

of a mechanic they rarely resort to dishonesty.

It will be obvious that in proportion as the savings of

the tradesman accumulate, so will his endeavours to prevent

their forfeiture increase, hence the prison government

possesses a powerful incentive to good behaviour on the part

of the workmen, and cases of misconduct amongst them are

of very rare occurrence.

The mode of selecting prisoners for instruction in trades

is as follows:—On his admission the prisoner is first sent

to work at cooly labour in the road gangs or at the cabook

quarries, and there kept under a course of probation for some

time, when, if his overseer is able to make a favourable

report of his conduct and diligence at work, he is placed as

an apprentice in one of the workshops; a choice of trades

is generally accorded to him if practicable, and the usual

results of promotion to second class work, and after a time

from second to first class, in most cases follow.

No. 5.—1849.] PRISON DISCIPLINE. 169

The tradesmen prisoners are generally well behaved.

The few cases of misconduct which occur are generally

punished with removal for a day or two to the outdoor

gangs, which seldom fails of the desired effect. Serious or

oft repeated offences are visited with final dismissal from

the trades department, nod consequent forfeiture of all

earnings.

The duty of providing employment for the prisoners is

entrusted chiefly to that department with the twofold object

of completing the erection of the prison and providing for

the employment of the prisoners.

Masons are chiefly employed in the erection of prison

buildings, workshops, and on Government buildings within

a reasonable distance of the prison.

Carpenters are similarly employed, and also in the

execution of work for the Civil Engineer’s department

when available.

Smiths are also employed on the iron work required for

the prison, and on making chains and fetters for cnuminals,

iron work for bridges, and other public works.

Sawyers perform all works required for the public in

and about Columbo, and for the cooperage in the department

of the Commissariat,

Stone-cutters, besides dressing all the granite used in the

erection of the prison, are constantly employed in cutting

stone for bridges and other public works.

A shoemakers’ shop has been opened under the superin-

tendence of an European overseer: it has been in operation

about six months, and although all those now working at —

it were previously ignorant of the use of a single tool, the

manufacture is so far satisfactory that the prison work is

beginning to be much sought after ; upwards of five hundred

pairs of shoes of all sizes have been made and disposed of.

A cooperage is just being established which promises to be

useful hereafter.

170 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr II.

The construction of wire suspension bridges is also being

attempted, which, if successful, will prove a profitable and

useful branch of employment.

All painters’ and glaziers’ work required in the prison is

performed by the prisoners themselves.

Coir-matting of excellent quality useful for doors, .

verandahs, and barbacues is manufactured in the prison.

All cabook stones required for prison buildings are

quarried and carted by the prisoners.

All cooking, washing, and attendance on the sick is

done by the prisoners.

When practicable, the trades instructors are selected

from among the prisoners themselves ; this is now the case

with the carpenters, stone-cutters, and sawyers: the two

latter learned the business in the prison. 2

The following statement shows the number employed at

different trades, and the value of labour performed by each

class. :

Carpen- | Stone- | Shoe-

Masons.| ters. | Smiths. Sawyers. | cutters. | makers.

eS il By hele 5 5 Baas

Silanes ros Ey KS) yeas Salseucs Se ees

mi Sta) Met pie | Se] Sie) eee

s. a. S a: Sap Si. S20. Sid.

ist: Class.2%.- 6121 04-2) 0 | bel Oot A OM Si 0 30 Seat

2nd Class....| 91 0 9 {11; 0 73) 410 6112) O 9 110i 0 91] 5/0 61 51

Apprentices] 8} 0 73/ 6,0 431 4/0 43] 2/0 6| 9/0 6 {12)0 33) 41

Total ...|23 19 13 26 2 20 123

The hours of labour are the same as those in the public

departments, viz.:—From 6 to 11 a.m.; half an hour for

breakfast ; from 11.30 a.m. to 3.80 P.M.

No. 5.—i3849.] PRISON DISCIPLINE. et

Instruction, Religious and Scholastic.

Yable of religious persuasion of the inmates of the Prison.

Protestants Ae AES ee ae 30

Roman Catholics ... ie bad a 40

Muhammadans aa se ane ae 33

Buddhists she ae. wis Bee 158

Gentoos ae ao ae aa 39

Total ... 300

The different religious services conducted in the prison.

are: for the Tamil prisoners instruction by a duly qualified

native Catechist, followed by Scripture reading, the church

prayers, and a short address.

On the dismissal of the Tamil congregation, numbering

usually from forty to fifty, the Sinhalese service commences,

conducted by a clergyman of the Church of England; the

same course of instruction is pursued as with the Tamils,

and in the catechetical part a knowledge of Scriptural

history is sometimes shown to an extent which would

surprise many Huropeans. The practice of asking ques-

tions on any part of the minister’s lessons is permitted

and encouraged. The Sinhalese congregation numbers

upwards of one hundred. ‘The prisoners are visited

generally once during the week days, and addressed on

religious subjects ; those in hospital also receive attention.

Schools have been in operation in the establishment since

its opening, but very few prisoners were found willing to

take advantage of them; their ideas are, that Government

must reap some benefit or advantage by their being in-

structed, or they would not incur such expense for masters,

books, &c.; out of one hundred and seventy prisoners only

seventeen for a long time attended school, and the system

was about to be abandoned as hopeless. But on the

suggestion of the Commission, the following regulation

was sanctioned by the Governor, viz., “That every hour

“attentively passed in schooland Divine services should

““be deducted from the sentences of all prisoners under

172 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL, Part II.

“confinement for more than three months.” ‘The effects

of this regulation were speedily apparent ; the number of

scholars rose from seventeen to one hundred and fifty;

instead of one teacher being sufficient for the wants of the

schools three were found requisite, and in addition to this

number it became necessary to appoint some of the more

advanced pupils to be monitors over the junior classes.

The schools have continued in this satisfactory state for

upwards of four years. The scholars may be thus arranged:—

‘Ist Class. | 2nd Class. | 3rd Class. | 4th Class. | Total.

Toul School, one

—_

Master He 13 Oetaice: 35 0 57

Sinhalese School,

two Masters ... 48 20 18 17 103

Total ... 61 29 53 1 160

The instruction given in the schools is chiefly confined

to reading, and writing on slates; a few learn a little

cyphering, some few have attempted to learn the English

language ; in this, however, very little progress is made, nor

are the prisoners encouraged in the attempt ; only one man

has beenable hitherto to make proficiency in English, and he

is “Chandrefoly,”’ the leader of the revolutionary movement

in 1842, whose sentence of death for high treason was

commuted to fourteen years’ hard labour in chains, and

who since his imprisonment has evinced intelligence and

capacity far beyond the generality of his countrymen ; he has

learned to read and speak English since he came to prison,

has read the New Testament through, has learned the trade

of carpenter, and by his general good conduct has won the.

goodwill of all with whom he is concerned.

Suitable books are provided for all who can read ; a small

library containing some useful works in English is provided

for Huropean and Burgher prisoners.

No. 5.—1849. | PRISON DISCIPLINE. 173

The numbers which have passed through the school and

been taught to read well, and in about half the cases to write

a little, are 95 Sinhalese and 46 Tamils.

Tables having reference to the state of education generally

are here subjoined.

Table No. 1 shows the number who could read, or read

and write, on their admission to prison, of the present

inmates of the jail :—

Could read ae Ae Ba 16

Could read and write... ar 63

Neither sis Dis a 221

Totales. 300

Table No. 2 shows the number who could read and write in

every hundred prisoners committed during the last six

years :—

Out of every 100

Prisoners committed Could Read Could Read

ee md Write | a, and Write,

1844 ee 26 1847 one 26

1845 soo ol 1848 mee 28

1846 coe 22 1849 oo ot

Table No. 3 shows the state of education in different

districts :—

(Prisoners admitted from the several outstations and Colombo.)

Place. Number. ue ee

Jafina SH 84 awe 40

Galle me 62 hs 19

Colombo ss 100 ws 30

Chilaw ae, 58 oo 14

Kandy is 100 ae PM

The hours for meals are 6 a.M., 10 A.M. and5 p.m. The

former consists only of bread, biscuits, or hoppers, and

coffee ; the two latter each of one-third quart of rice and a

curry of either dried fish or vegetables. The food is cooked

by a portion of the prisoners. ‘Twice a week fresh fish is

174 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr Il.

substituted for salted. This scale relates only to the native

prisoners ; for Burghers and Huropeans beef and bread are

substituted fora part of the curry. The cost per diem in

the former case is 33d., for the latter 64d. :

For the hospital, of course, there are various scales

employed, according to the orders of the medical attendant.

The clothing for the native prisoners is of the simplest

kind, consisting only of two slips of blue and white cloth, the

cost of which is 9d., and they are expected to last fully three

‘months. Huropean and Burgher prisoners are allowed a

straw hat, a jacket and trousers of blue calico, ashirt, and a

pair of shoes, the whole costing 12s., or £2. 8s. per annum.

The bedding for natives is simple —a common straw mat

and cumblie; and for Huropeans and Burghers a mattrass,

blanket, and pillow.

The prison hospital is under the immediate care of a

medical sub-assistant, who is allowed two prisoners to act as

orderlies under him. He visits the whole of the prisoners

weekly, aad the inmates of the hospital daily. This officer

has great need of the utmost vigilance and discretion in

reference to the many reported cases of sickness amongst

the inmates, who, quite aware as they are of the exceptions

from labour of all the hospital patients, constantly resort to

every description of feigned illness to gain admission to the

sick wards. The obstinacy and endurance of actual suffering

on the part of some natives who prefer anything to labour,

are almost past. belief. :

In the same manner, prisoners sometimes feign insanity

to a most remarkable degree—refusing food and playing

the most fantastic tricks to give probability to their case.

Instances are on record in which prisoners have starved

themselves to death, or brought on fatal maladies from their

obstinate determination not to give way.

The punishments resorted to for offences committed

within the prison are flogging, solitary confinement, and

No. 5.—1849. | PRISON DISCIPLINE. 175

diminished allowance of food. The former is much dreaded

by the prisoners, and the remembrance of it seems never to

leave them. Solitary confinement is rarely resorted to for

longer than three or four days, as it has a prejudicial effect —

on their health.

The practice of cutting off the hair of convicts, though so

very general in other countries, has not been adopted here,

which is to be regretted, as it is believed that the fear of

losing their most cherished ornament would operate. very

powerfully upon them.

The following table shows the terms for which the three

hundred present inmates of the prison have been sentenced :—

Transportation.

Life. Ten years. Seven years. Five years.

1 fae 10 aie 6 ale 2

Imprisonment with hard labour.

Years,

nti

Mitemit WO. 7. /+. 8: 4, 3 Dene Aa to eso

eo oe ... 44... 24 2. 11d: 30: ...8.... 1G 81

* Months and under.

_ Hscapes have been numerous, bat not more so than mivit

be expected when the exposed situation of the jail, the

density of the surrounding jungle, and the extent of grounds

over which the outdoor gangs have been employed are taken

into consideration.

The number of escapes during the last six years have

been as follows:—

Year. Escaped. Re-taken.

1844 s\sis 9 Boe 9

1845 3 Sag 2

1846 Be 2 me 0

1847 Sus 5) oa 5)

1848 cle 10 8

1849 (9 months) ... 3 0

Total ::. 32 24

176 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [| Von. IT., Parr IL.

Escapes have been chiefly made from the parties at work

at a distance from the prison, and are generally effected by

men who were not liable to be suspected of such an intention,

although there can be no rule given for placing confidence

on any prisoner as regards his not escaping ; for men have

escaped from the prison whose periods of imprisonment re-

maining were found to have been only fourteen days, thirty-

six days, three months, and forty-five days respectively.

Of the general character of the prisoners the following

Table of Offences will give an idea :—

Convicted of No. Convicted of No.

Murder --- 93/| Rape cere

Manslaughter ... 12 | Poisoning ead liae

High treason ea) 2) | Morgeny, 3

Violent assault ... 15) Uttering jolene in-

Assault . 13) . strument ; 7

Assault and robbery. 31 | Arson Poel

Burglary 15} Pejury 3

Burglary and ihe 26 | Maliciously lalla

Highway robbery ... 20/ cattle 2

Cattle stealing ... .85]} Breach of local On

Robbery 22 dinances dope 8

Having stolen property 19 eed

Theft a, Total ... 3800

It will be seen from the following table that the prisoners

are chiefly young men, and the prison books show that the

weighty offences are committed by men advanced in years,

to a certain extent :—

Of 50 years of age and upwards ate 11

45 do. do. vee 13

40 do. do. se 11

35 do. do. ee 24

30 do. do. st 60

2501 do. do. pe 111

20 do. do. obec 63

18 do. do. Ae 7

Total ... 300

No. 5.—1849. | PRISON DISCIPLINE. 177

In calculating the progress of crime in the Island it

should be borne in mind the great advances the population

has made in civilisation during the last five years. It is

an admitted fact, that as new tastes are acquired and fresh

comforts and appliances are ushered into society by the

advances of civilisation, so will a certain class of offences

against the laws increase: new wants are created, new

desires spring up. Better clothing, larger houses, and

increased conveniences are all aimed at as the inhabitants

become acquainted with the habits and usages of their more

civilised neighbours. What at first were deemed iuxuries |

gradually assume the form of necessaries, and the demands

for the gratification of these new cravings become impervious

and irresistible, and either form effectual spurs to industry

and enterprise, or where these qualities are not called into

action, lead to acts of dishonesty, over-reaching, swindling,

and the like, and in this way we may account for an increase

in “ offences against property.”

The tables furnished below will show that this class of

offences (against property) greatly predominates, and even

in the few “ offences against the person’’ enumerated, there

has been in the majority of cases a remote bearing on the

subject of “ property’; as, for instance, in cases of murder

and manslaughter, it will generally be found that the victim

has in some way stood between the offender and the

possession of property in the shape of land, money, jewels,

&c., which the latter was bent on obtaining.

One of the tables exhibits a remarkable difference between

the five principal districts of the Island as regards the pre-

valence of offences against the person. Thus it would seem

that the offences of prisoners in the Colombo district have

been principally against property alone, only fourteen per

cent. having been convicted of offences against the person.

This may in a greater measure be attributable to the greater

degree of temptation thrown in the way of domestic

178 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). | [Vor. IT., Part IT.

servants and others employed in the houses, stores, and

shops of the merchants, traders, and others about Colombo,

while in the Jaffna and Chilaw districts, where the

inhabitants are scattered over a greater extent of country,

and where Huropean tastes and habits have not obtained

such a hold upon the minds of the people, property is more

secure ; but quarrels, assaults, and even murder, are but

too common.

Crimes | Crimes Cc Hee a f

Years. against | against pees Od: Total.

PEG bined. rdi-

perty.| Person. nance:

1844 500 ane 92 40 12 34 182

1845 bare was 99 388 7 28 163

1846 a 546 129 40 11 66 246

1847 aoe ee 199 104 54 94 45i

1848 Boe B00 151 71 29 « 83 334

To September 30,1849 150 23 25 21 AS)

Grand Total Bese SS 320 138 326 1,529

Table of crime as prevailing in different districts :—

Convicted of

One hundred Prisoners from CHESIGES meeu ase fos Total.

Property.| Person.

Kanay ee 560 see i Ore 22 14 100

Colombo ... ae oN 74 14 12 106

Chilaw and Jaffna... spol Bs) 27 35 100

To those who watch the progress of the native mind,

and the effects of contact with Huropean usages, the

foregoing details will, 1 trust, be found interesting, as the

narrative of the introduction of prison discipline into this

Colony. That much yet remains to be done there is no

doubt: the jail as a Government institution may be said

to be only in its infancy, and who can say what will yet be

effected ?

In future years, as opportunities offer, it would be well to

watch the after-career of those released prisoners who have

No. 5.—1849.] PRISON DISCIPLINE. 179

been taught trades within the walls of Welikada; but at

present this is not possible, and we can only hope and believe

that the knowledge they have thus acquired is turned to

good and profitable account, rendering them at once honest

and useful members of society.

57—87 E

180 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot, II., Parr II.

CATALOGUE OF BOOKS IN THE TAMIL

LANGUAGE, WITH NAMES OF THE AUTHORS,

THE SUBJECTS, AND DATES, AS FAR AS

THEY CAN BE ASCERTAINED.

By Simon Casiz Cuirry, Hsq., 0.M.R.A.S.

(Read December 1, 1849.)

SECTION III.

THEOLOGY AND MerapHysicaL PHiLosopHy.

Tue following fourteen treatises are collectively called

Saivachittanta Nul, and are considered to be the most

authorised expositions of the theological position of the

Vedas. They appear to have been written by different

authors, and at different times, but none of them date

earlier than the era of Manikkavasakar, the great cham-

pion of the religion :—

1. Tiruvuntiyar : by Manikkavasakar.

2. Tirukkahittuppadiyar.

3. Siwananapotam.

4. Sivaianachithiyar.

5. Irupavirupahtu.

6. Unmaivilakkam. |

7. Swappipirakdsam: by Sivappipirakasa Suwdémi.

8. Tiruvarudpayan: by Umapati Sivachariyar.

9. Vindvenpa.

10. Potiippahrodar.

11. Kodikkavi.

12. Nefchuvidutiutu.

13. Unmainerwilakkam.

14. Sankatpanirakaranam. a

No. 5.—1849.] CATALOGUE OF TAMIL BOOKS. 181

The following treatises illustrate the doctrines peculiar to

the worshippers of Vishnu :-—

15.

16.

iz.

18.

19.

20.

21,

Arisamaya-tipam.

Tiruvaymol: by the A’lwars.

Tirumol: by the Alwars.

Pakavathitat, translated from the Sanskrit.

Pafcharattiram, translated from the Sanskrit.

Vaikanasan, translated from the Sanskrit.

Irusamaya-vilakkam.

The following treatises explain the doctrines of the six

different philosophical schools of the Hindus, which were

respectively founded by the Sages Kapilam, Pataichali,

Kanatar, Viyasar, Jaimini, and Paddachari :—

22.

23,

24.

25.

26.

27,

28.

29,

30.

al,

32.

33.

34,

35.

36.

27.

38.

39.

40.

41.

42.

Avirotavuntiyar : by Santalinka Suwémi.

Olivilodukkam.

Vayirakkiyatipam: by Santalinka Suwémi.

Vayirakkiyachatakam: by Santalinka Suwami.

Tévikalottaram.

Sivatarumottaram.

Kawalliyanavanitam.

Sachchitanantavilakkam: by Vélaiyaénanta Suwaémi.

Sittantachikamant.

Sittantatipikat.

Sivapokacharam.

Sasivarnapotam.

Sioananatipam.

Sivanuputivilakkam.

Natdntavilakkam: by Sankara Sivaéchariyar.

Natantacharam: by Sankara Sivachariyar.

A'nantattiraddu.

A'nantakkalippu.

Vetdntachudamani.

Arwuvilakkam.

Meyitnanavilakkam.

E 2

182 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CRYLON). [Vot. II., Parr If.

43. Peruntiraddu.

44, Kuruntiraddu.

45. Tirumulamantiram.

46. Stvanerippirakasam.

47. Afiiavatapparanr.

48. Mokavataipparant.

49. Vidduneriyunmat.

50. Adukkunilaippotam.

D1. Arivanantachittiyar.

02. Chorupanantachittiyar.

93. Szvanantamalar.

04. Tirunavukkarazyar.

50. Mayapiralapam.

56. Pirapulinkalilat, translated from the Sanskrit by

Sivappirakésa Suwaémi, 1652 a.p.

57. Tattuvarattinakaram.

28. Tattuvamirtam.

59. Nanmanimala: by Tattuvarayar.

60. Samayacharam.

61. Szttantakaranam.

62. Arudpirakasam.

63. Kalimaddal.

64. Meymmoli.

66. Tuttuvacharitar.

67. Virakamam.

68. A’nantapotam.

69 Anupavacharam,

70. Sorupacharam.

71. Sauntarryalakari.

72. Pirapotachantirotayam, translated from the

Sanskrit.

73. Satpdtackantirotayam, translated from the

Sanskrit. -

74. Upanidatam, translated from the Sanskrit.

75. Amirtachadram.

I SS Si

No. 5.—1849.] CATALOGUE OF TAMIL BOOKS. 183

76. Avirotapotam.

77. Tirumantiram.

78. Nénavashiddam.

79. Ndnasitti.

80. Paripuranasittn.

81. Tirukkadaipattu.

82. Paramartatarisanam.

83. Saivasamayanert.

84. Anuputinilaiyam.

85. Unmainilaiyam.

86. Nanasiriyan.

87. Ndanakural: by Auvatiyar, the celebrated female

philosopher, who flourished in the ninth century of the

Christian era. 3

88. Nana-veddiyan: by Tiruvalluvar, the brother of

Auvaiyar and the author of the “ Kural,’ which obtained

for him a seat on the bench of the Tamil poets in the

University of Madura.

89. Nanakkummi.

90. Nanamatiyullan .

The following works treat of the illusory nature of all

mundane existency, defend ascetic devoting, and inveigh

against the dogmas of the A’kamas Puranas :—

91. Siwa-vakkiyam: by Vakkiyar.

92. Paraparakkannt: by 'Téyumana Suwaémi.

93. Nénaniru: by Akastiyar.

94. Nanamuppatu: by Akastiyar.

95. Konkanar Nénam: by Konkanar.

96. Kapilar Akaval: by Kapilar. A confutation of

the claims of the Brahmins to superiority from caste. The

author was the brother of Tiruvalluvar, and is said to

have composed the present work in consequence of the

Brahmins of Tiruvéltr, against whom he was brought up,

having refused to invest him with the triple cord on his

mother being a pariah woman.

184 JOURNAL, B.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr II.

97. Akappaichchittar Padal.

90. Alukunichchittar Pddal.

99. Ida:kkadduchehittar Pdadal.

100. Pattirakiriyar Pulampal.

101. Paddanattuppillaiyar Padal.

A collection of verses of different metres, atiributed to

Paddanattuppillai,a wealthy merchant of Kavérippimpadda-

nam, whois said to have ejaculated them extempore as he

wandered up and down the country after he had parted with

all his worldly possessions a8. assumed the life of an

ascetic.

The following works belong to the Tamil Catholics :—

1. Nénépatésam.—A course of lectures on theology:

by the Rev. Father Robert De Nobiles.

2. A’tma Nirnayam.—A treatise on the origin and

nature of the soul of man, in opposition to the various

conflicting opinions held by the Hindu philosophers about

them: by the same author.

3. Mantira Malai.—A choice collection of prayers for

the use of the laity: by the same author.

4. Vétiyar Olukkam.—Exhortations on the nature

and duties of the office of catechists, in twenty chapters :

by the Rev. Father J. C. Beschi, 1727.

5. Ninakkannédi.—Meditations for catechists: by

the same author.

6. Nanamuyatchi.—Exhortations on the practice of

piety : by the same author.

7. Véta Vilakkam.—Exposition and defence of the —

doctrines of the Catholic Church, in eighteen chapters :

by the same author.

8. Pétakamuruttal.—A confutation of schism: by

the same author.

9. Lutarinattiyalpu.—The apocalyptic vision of the

fall of a star from heaven applied to the fall of Luther from

the Catholic Church : by the same author.

No. 5.—1849.] CATALOGUE OF TAMIL BOOKS. 185

10. Néna Vunartal.—Spiritual reflections: by the

same author.

11. Suviseshaka Virutte Urai.—The Gospel for all

the Sundays and festivals of the year, with practical reflec-

tions: by the same author.

12. Reppremata Tarkkam.— Reasons for not attending

the Dutch Church, written in the form of a dialogue

between a Government schoolmaster and a Catholic boy :

by the same author.

13. Pusaittiyénam.—Explanatory prayers at Mass : by

the same author.

14. Viydékulap Pirasankam.—Sermons on the Passion

of our Lord: by the same author.

15. Kristiyant A'layam.

16. A’ima Vttiyanam.

17. Nana Appam.—Pious instruction: by the Rev.

Father Gabriel Pacheco.

18, Alukaik Kuravai.—Meditations on the griefs of the

Blessed Virgin : by the same author.

19. Sattiyajeyattan Sankéram.—An Answer to the Rev.

Mr. Meloh’s “ Triumph of the Truth”: by the same author.

20. A’ru Llakkanam.—The Six Attributes of God: by

the same author.

21. Nana Putaiyal.—The Spiritual Treasure: by

Rev. Father Sebastian Pereira.

22. Kristu Anuchéram.—tThe following of Christ, from

the Latin of Thomas & Kempis: by the same author.

23. Safchioi.—A vindication of the Catholic Church

and its dogmas against the attacks of Heresy, in three

books, comprising thirty-seven chapters: by the Rev.

Father L. Du. Pui, Pondicherry, 1841.

24. Sattiyavéta Partkshai.—A work of the same

author, tending as the last.

25. Teyva Partkshai,—A review and refutation of the

‘Hindi religion.

186 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr II.

The following works belong to the Tamil Protestants :—

1. A translation of the New Testament: by the Rev.

B. Zeigenbalg, Tranquebar, 1715.

2. Another translation of the same: by the Rev. T. A.

Bronsveldt and the Rev. J. J. Fybrandts, Colombo, 1759.

3. Another translation of the same : by the Rev. T.

Farricius, Tranquebar, 1772.

4. Another translation of the same: by the Rev.

C. T. E. Rhenius, Madras, 1823.

5. A translation of the Old Tastament: by the Rev.

B. Zeigenbalg and the Rev. B. Schulze, Tranquebar,

1723-1728.

6. A translation of the Apocrypha: by the Rev. B.

Schulze, Tranquebar, 1726.

7. A translation of the Pentateuch into high Tamil :

by the Rev. Phillippus De Melho, Colombo, 1790.

8. Arendt’s True Christianity, translated from the

German: by the Rev. B. Schulze, Halle, 1751.

9, The Popes’ Mirror, showing the errors of Popery.

10. The Liturgy of the Reformed Church : by the Rev.

Phillippus De Melho, Colombo, 1760,

11. Triumph of the Truth, a refutation of the principal

errors of the Church of Rome: by the same author,

Colombo, 1753.

12. The Heidelburg Catechism : translated by the Rev.

-§. A. Bronsveldt, Colombo,:1754.

13. Bern’s Compendium of the Christian religion:

Colombo, 1778.

14. Borstin’s short questions on religion.

15. Da Mullin and Drellincourt’s Meditations and

Prayers: translated by the Rev. J. Franciscus, Colombo,

1778.

16. Catechism for children: by the Rev. S. A.

Bronsveldt, Colombo, 1753.

17. History of the Old Testament: Colombo, 1758.

No. 5.—1849.] CATALOGUE OF TAMIL BOOKS. 187

18. History of the New Testament: Colombo, 1753.

19. An abridged History of Christianity : Colombo,

1781.

20. Spencer’s Dogmatic Theology.

21. A Dialogue between a Heathen and a Christian:

Madras, 1776, 12mo.

22. A Dialogue between an Idolator and a Christian:

Tranquebar, 1790, 12mo.

23. Dialogues inter Moslimum et Christianem de via

ad salutem: Tranquebar, 1803, 8vo.

24. The Book of Common Prayer: translated by the

Rev. Christian David, Serampore, 1818.

25. Bunyan’s Pilgrim’s Progress, English and Tamil:

Madras, 1826, 4to.

26. The Book of Common Prayer: translated by the

Rev. Dr. Rotler, Madras, 1828.

27. A Protestant Catechism, showing the principal

errors of the Church of Rome: Vepery, 1830, 12mo.

28. The Evidence of Christianity : by the Rev. T. C.

Rhenius, Madras, 1835.

188 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr II.

SKETCHES IN THE NATURAL HISTORY

OF CEYLON.

By Epa@ar L. Layarp, Hso@., 0.M.£.8.

(Read June 9, 1849.)

PART 1.—MAMMALIA.

Order QUADRUMANA.

Family Simta.

Genus Macacwus.

1.—M. Srnicus (L.), Desmarest.

Syn.—il. Pilatus, Lesson; Vandura, Sin.

The common black monkey of the maritime provinces ;

very common also in the Kandyan districts ; about Trinco-

malee it is replaced by Presbytes thersites, and in the Jaftna

peninsula by P. Priamus.

Genus PRESBYTES.

2.— P. THersites, Hliot et Blyth (Journal R. A §&.,

XVI., 1271).

This and the preceding species would seem to be peculiar

to the Island, the present race being confined to the

neighbourhood of Trincomalee.

3.—P. Priamus, Elliot et Blyth (Journal R. A. &.,

OS 470s Rd 732).

Syn.—Kuranku, Mal.; Buje, Port.

Confined to the Jaffna peninsula on this Island, but

inhabiting also the Malabar and Coromandel coasts. They

are particularly abundant about Point Pedro, feeding on

the palmirah, margosa, and other fruits. The young are

produced in February or March.

No. 5.—1849.] NATURAL HISTORY. 189

4,—Pr. CEPHALOPPEUS, Zimmerman.

Syn.—Simia dentata, Shaw; S. porphyrops, Link ;

S. pithicus, Nestor Bennet; Rilava, Sin.

Peculiar to Ceylon, and distributed all over the Island,

with the exception of the extreme north.

Family Lemurip2.

Genus STENOPS.

5.—S. GRACILIS.

Syn.—Loris gracilis, Geoff. ; Lemin loris, Zimmerman ;

L. Ceylonicus, Fisch ; Unahapuluva, Sin. ;

Teyvanku, Mal.

Very common, and generally distributed; feeding on

birds, eggs, and fruits. From its nocturnal habits it is not

much noticed by Europeans, but by the natives it is much

prized, being used in charms and love potions.

Family CHEIRCPTERA, Cuwo. ;

VESPERTILIONIDZ, Gray.

Genus PTEROPUS.

6.—P. Eputis PERON.

Syn.—P. Edwardu, Geoff. ; Vavuld,Sin.; Vauval, Mal. ;

Mursagu, Port.

This destructive animal is generally scattered over the

whole Island, infesting fruit trees by night, and during the

day hanging in clusters from some huge tree in the depths

_of the jungle, from whence it sallies forth on the approach

of evening. ‘The natives use them for food.

Genus CYNOPTERUS.

7.—C. Marainatus, Birch, Hamilton.

The small flying fox of Europeans; abundant in the

southern and midland provinces, but I have not met with

it in the Jaffna peninsula.

190 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IJ., Parr II.

Genus NyocrtickEsus.

8.--N. Heatran, Horsf.

Abundant, and widely distributed ; rises easily from the

ground.

9.—N. Temmincku, Horsf.

Sys.— Vespertilio noctulinus et V. belangert, Geoff.

Common about Kalutara, inhabiting the old fort.

Genus KERIWULA.

10.—K. Prora, Gray.

Syn.—- Vespertilio kerwoula, Bodd.

I have only met with this species about Colombo in any

abundance, and I obtained one solitary specimen at Amba-

vamuwa.

Genus PIPISTRELLUS.

11.—P. Irroritus, Cautor.

This small bat is abundant in the southern provinces; to

the north it is replaced by the next species.

Genus HyPpposIDERcs.

12.—H. Sproris, Sch.

Syn.— H. apicelatus (female), Gray; A. penicellatus

(male), Gray.

Remarkably abundant here (at Point Pedro), dwelling

in caverns, of which there are several in the stony country

about the villages of Alv4y and Tondamdnaru. It also

clings under the roofs of houses in company with the next.

13.—H. Murinus, Elliot.

This is equally abundant.

Genus MErGADERMA.

14.—M. Lyra, Geoff.

Syn.—M. Carnatica, Elliot. .

Very abundant, and generally distributed ; it rises easily

from the ground when accidentally knocked down, and

I am nearly sure I have seen it rise from a voluntary

alighting.

No. 5.—1849. | NATURAL HISTORY. 191

Order CARNIVORA.

Family Canipa@.

Genus Canis, L.

15.—C. AUREUS (? ).

Syn.—Sacalius Indicus; Nariyd, Sin.; Nari, Mal.

I have never been able to obtain a specimen of our

common jackal for identification ; nevertheless, I believe

the species to be identical with the Indian races.

———

Family FELIp@.

Genus IF EzIs.

16.—F. Parpvus, var. LEoparDUus.

Syn.—Puli (neqjuvatus), Mal.; Tigir, Port.; Kotiya, Sin.

The leopard (or tiger of Europeans here) is too well

kn own to need any notice, save that the common appella-

tion of tiger wrongly bestowed on it leads people in

England to suppose that F. tagris exists here, which it

really does not.

A black variety of F. pardus is not unfrequently met

with ; it is nearly accidental.

17.— FELIS VIVERRINUS.

Common about Jaffna. I am in possession of a beautiful

half-breed between this species and the domestic variety.

Family VIVERRINZ.

Genus PARADOXURUS.

18.— P. Zeytonicus, Schreber.

Peculiar to the Island, and seems to be plentiful near

Puttalam. I have not seen it from other parts.

Genus VIVERRA.

19.—V. Zisetna, Lin.

Syn.--V. Medulata, Gray; Navi, Mal.

Abundant about Jaffna. The natives keep them in

confinement for the sake of the musk, which they secrete

192 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr II.

largely. The method of collecting the secretion is by

placing the animal in a small cage, against the sides of

which it is obliged to rub itself, thereby depositing the musk

on the woodwork, whence it is carefully scraped.

Genus GENETTA.

20.—G. Inpica.

Syn.-—Maranari, Mal. (literally “‘Tree-dog’’).

We have one, if not more, species of this genus, but Ihave

not been able to identify them, never having procured a

full grown specimen; they infest the houses in Colombo, but

would seem to be quite unknown in the Jaffna peninsula.

Genus Mangusta.

21.—M. VirricoLLis.

Syn.— Herpestes vitlicollis, Bennet.

Not uncommon in the interior of the Island, about

Ambagamuwa and Pussellawa, from which places I have

received it.

22.—M. GRISEUS.

Syn.— Herpestes griseus, Sykes; Kiri, Mal. ;

Bungoose, Port.; Mukatiya, Sin.

Very common in the Jaffna peninsula. It appears identical

with the Indian race, except that the nose and paws are

much darker. There is another variety at Trincomalee

which accords exactly with the Indian animal.

Genus Lurra.

23.—-L. Narr, Cuv.

Syn.—Diyaballa, Sin, (literally “ Water-dog’’).

Not uncommon in the Bentota river. I kept one alive

for several weeksin a bath. It fed on fish and the heads and

entrails of fowls; it was unfortunately neglected by the

pative servants, and died during my temporary absence from

home. It uttered a low growl and a plaintive whine in

showing anger or fear. When feeding it was very savage,

and would snap furicusly at anything held to it.

ee aS =

eae

No. 5.—1849.] NATURAL HISTORY. 193

Family Ursipz.

Genus URsvs.

24.—U. (Procuitus) tasiatus, Blainville.

Syn.— JU. longirostris, Seid.; Valahd, Sin.; Karadi, Mal.;

Usu, Port.

The common bear of Europeans ; wbique.

Order INsEcTIVORA.

Family SoripzZ.

Genus Sorex.

25.

Syn.—S. Indicus et S. Capensis, Geoff.; Mya, Sin.;

Miuichiru, Mal. (literally “ Smelling-rat”).

The common shrew or musk rat ; abundant everywhere.

There are probably several species yet to be determined,

Order RODENTIA.

Family Muripz.

Genus Mus.

26.—M. Banpicota, Bichs.

Syn.—WMU. Giganteus, Hardwick; Miyd, Sin.; Akalan,

Mal.; Ratu, Port. name for all.

Common in the paddy fields round K6tté, doing great

damage to the crops and embankments. The natives

consider them very good eating.

27.—M. Invica, Geof.

Syn.—U. kok, Gray; Velleli, Mal. (literally

“White-belly rat’).

Not uncommon about Jaffna. The natives esteem them

great delicacies, and they are much sought after.

28.—M. Setirer, Horsf.

Founded on a young specimen, the only one procured.

I shot it in a paddy field near Galle, and also saw another

near Matara.

194 _ JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vo1. II., Parr 1h

29.—M. DEcAMENUS.

Syn.— Velleh, Mal.

The common European brown rat; introduced.

30.—M. Rarrvus.

The common European black rat; introduced.

Genus GERBILLUS.

31.—G. Inpicus, Waterhouse.

Common throughout the low country. It does not appear

to extend to the hills. It constructs its burrow just under

_ the surface of grass land, to the great danger of horses and

other animals, who frequently injure their feet or legs by

stepping into them. ;

Family Sciurip2@.

Genus SCIURIES.

32.-8. Tennentu, Layard.

Syn.—Dandu-léna, Sin.

The large squirrel of the interior to which I have given

the foregoing name, is found somewhat abundantly about

Ambagamuwaand Pussellawa. It differs considerably from

S. bicolor. For full description of this and all our squirrels

see Mr. Blyth’s paper on the “ Sciuri inhabiting Ceylon,”

which is compiled from specimens sent him by myself, and

which are consequently not now in my possession to refer to.

It is peculiar to the Island.

33.—S. Maorourus, Forster. (Journal R. A. S.,

XVI., 1869.)

Syn.—Maranil, Mal. (literally “Tree-squirrel”).

Common large squirrel of our western coast. It never

intrudes on the haunts of the preceding, nor is it intermingled

with it in its own locality.

No. 5.—1849.] NATURAL HISTORY. 195

34.—S. Tristriatus, Waterhouse. (Journal R. A.S.,

XVI., 1001.)

Syn.—Lénd, Sin.; Anil, Mal.; Surkachi, Port.

for all the tribe.

The common low-country palm squirrel; identical with

the Indian race.

39.—8. Bropizi, Blyth and Layard.

Peculiar to the Island ; common on the west coast from

Point Pedro to Puttalam, replacing S. ¢tr¢striatus, from

which it is easily distinguishable by its pale colour and long

pencil tuft at the extremity of the tail. This, however, is

often wanting in stuffed specimens, and indeed even

in live ones, the hair being but lightly attached to the

skin.

36.--S. Layarpi, Blyth.

This lovely little squirrel I procured in the jungles near

Ambagamuwa. It is peculiar to the interior or hilly

districts, and of a new species.

37.—S. Kevaarti, Layard.

I procured a Sciurus about Tangalla, which I fancy will

_ prove a new species ; and shall therefore name it after one of

our members who is now taking up the study of the fauna

| of his native country, thus offering a bright example to his

| apathetic countrymen. Our Society may look forward with

_strong hopes to many new species being added to our

‘indigenous fauna by his researches.

S. Kelaarti may be described as very like 8S. Palmarum

of India, the head much redder, thealves of the back and

| belly more blended, and the animal altogether smaller. It

entirely replaces all the small Sceurz from Tangalla and

| Hambantota, and I should fancy extends far on towards

| Trincomalee.

57-—87 #y

196 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Part f1.

Genus PrERoMyYs.

38.—P. ——?

I have seen a mutilated skin of a species killed in the

neighbourhood of Ramboda. It requires identification,

and there are probably other species.

Family Histricip”.

Genus Hysrrrx.

39.—H. CRISTATA.

Syn. —Hyp-panrt and Mud-panri, Mal. ; Porco di spino,

Port. ; Katu-ura, Sin. (literally “ Thorn-pig.’’)

‘The common porcupine is unluckily very abundant, and

generally distributed, doing great damage to the young

cocoanut trees ; the flesh is very white, and good eating.

owen

Family Lrporip&.

Genus LeEpus.

40.—L. Niericouuis, &. Cuv.

Syn.—L. Meloncha, Tem.; Musal, Mal.; Leor?, Port. ;

Hava, Sin.

Common throughout the Island, and very abundant in the

plains of the western coast.

Order PacHYDERMATA.

Genus HLEPHAS.

41.—K. Inpicus, L.

Syn.— Yanai, Tam.; Aliya, Sin.; Alphanti, Port

The elephant.

Genus Sus.

42.—S. Scrora, var. Inpicus.

Syn.—Panr?, Mal.; Porco, Port.; Ura, Sin.

The common wild hog.

No. 5.—1849. | NATURAL HISTORY. 17

Genus Haticore.

43.—H. Dueone, Cup.

Syn.— Hf. Indieus, Owen; Kadat-panri, Mal. (literally

“ Sea-pig’’); Porco de mara, Port.; Mudu-urd, Sin.

Common in the Bay of Kalpitiya, feeding on the marine

algze; they are much prized by the natives for food.

Of the Cetacea that frequent our seas | have not had any

opportunity of judging further than that occasionally we

have an unpleasant visit from a carcass stranded on the

Galle Buck, which would seem to be that of the common

eachalot or spermaceti whale.

44,.—PuyseteR MacrocEPHALus.

Order RUMINANTIA,

Family Cervip”.

Genus CERVUS.

45.—C. HippuLAPnus, Cuv.

Syn.—Maraz, Mal.; Merong, Port.; Gona Sin.

The common elk.

46.—C. Axis, LD.

Syn.— Man, Mal.; Viado, Port.; Munda, Sin.

The common spotted axis.

: 47.—C. Muntsack, Zimmerman.

Syn. — Vel-munwa, Sin. (literally ‘“ Field-deer ”’).

The paddy-field deer. I have been assured by many

sportsmen that there exists of this deer sed non vidi.

Genus MeEminna.

48.—M. Inpica, Gray.

Syn. -Moschus Meminna, Erxl.; Uhkulén panri, Mal.

(literally “Cleft pig”); Miminnd, Sin.

The mouse deer of Europeans. !

F 2

198 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [ Vou. IL, Parr IL

Genus Bos.

49 ,——B. GAURUS.

Knox gives this noble animal as existing in his time.

They are undoubtedly now extinct, which is much to be

regretted.

50.—B. BoBauus.

Syn.—Kulu Madu, Mal.; Mi-haraka, Sin.

The wild buffalo.

Order EDENTATA.

Genus Manis.

51.—M. Bracnyura? Ere.

Syn.—Alunku, Mal.; Kaballéya, Sin.

I think our Island species is identical with the Indian

race. It is not uncommon, but requires identification. I

have also seen another species, which I have little doubt

will prove to be the long-tailed Manis of authors.

The above list of mammalia has been the result of about

three years’ collection, principally in the Southern and

Northern divisions of the Island. It is still very imperfect,

and many more species and genera may be looked for from

the interior. |

I have trustworthy information of a true fox, and doubt not

that a search would amply repay the time and trouble

expended.

Such as this list is, I present it to the soa in full hopes

that it may induce some one to come forward and contribute

towards rendering it perfect.

No. 5.—1849.] NATURAL HISTORY. 199

PART II.

—Sa

SKETCHES IN THE NATURAL HISTORY OF

CEYLON: ORNITHOLOGY.

By Epear L, Layarp, Esq., o.M.z.s.

(Read August 25, 1849.)

Cirass—A VES.

Order ScansorzEs.

Family Psirracips.

Genus PALORNIS.

1.—P. ALExanpDRI ( Hdw., pl. 292; Nat. Lid.

Psitiacida, pl. 2).

Syn.—Psitiacus Alexandr, L.; P. Eupatria, L., the

female ; Pszttaca Ginginiana, Bris., the female ; P. Guin-

neensis, Scop. (nec. Gem.) ; P. Sonneratit, Gem. ; Pal.

Nepalensis, Hodg. (Journal As. Res., X1X., 177). Panni-

girawa,* Sin.; Patchavarnak-kili, Mal. (literally pancha

““five,” varna “coloured’’); Pappugarha, Port. (the name

for all parrots) ; Jongichy, Dutch.

This parrot is found in large flocks about Colombo and

in the jungles of the lower hills. It extends to Chilaw, where

it is mingled with the smaller P. torguatus, and is

also abundant at Galle, Matara, and Batticaloa, the last

place in particular. Its favourite food consists of the young

blossoms of the cocoanut, and, where they are not procur-

able, of various wild nuts. The natives, who catch them in

* The Sinhalese and Tamil names should be pronounced as if written

with Italian vowels.

200 JOURNAL, RB.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. IL, Parr II.

great numbers when young, report them to breed in hollow

trees. They roost in large flocks in the cocoanut. topes.

2.—P. Torquatus (Daubenton’s Pl. Enl., 551).

Syn.—Psittaca Torguata, Bris.; Psittacus Alexandra,

var. B. Latham; P. Cudbicularis, Hassel; P. Docilis,

Viel.; Girand, Sin.; Marutan-kili, Tennan-kili, Mal.

(Marutu literally, the name of a tree in which they

breed).

Particularly common in the Jaffna peninsula, and extend-

ing to Chilaw. In the harvest time they feed in vast flocks

on the stubble or standing grain, leaving sentinels on watch

for danger. When the grain fails them they devour the

fruit of the tamarind, margosa, &c.

The eggs are pure white, and with little distinction

between the two ends: they are generally three or four in

number, and are laid in holes in trees with but scarcely

any nest. Weight, 2 drachms and 16 grains. Incubation

begins in March.

They are brought to Colombo to be tamed, and when pro-

perly taught speak well, and are much sought after by the

native bird-fanciers.

3.—P. Catruropa, Layard.

Of this lovely bird I procured but one pair, and those in the

month of November, 1848, at Kandy. The male was killed

on the wing, the female in the act of feeding on the ground

on some decayed fruits. As these specimens are in Calcutta

with Mr. Blyth, the Curator of the Bengal Asiatic Society’s

Museum, I cannot describe them from themselves, and must

therefore subjoin the description which he has published ;

and here I would beg to acknowledge the great obligations

Tam under to that gentieman for the names and identification

of all the species here enumerated. Had it not been for the

aid thus kindly afforded, the rough notes of the birds

collected would never have seen the light.

No. 5.—1849.] = NATURAL HISTORY. | 201

Mr. Blyth says: “A beautiful species, the representative

in the mountainous parts of Ceylon of P. Columboides of the

Nilgherries,* to which species it manifests the nearest

affinity. Crown and back plumbeous-gray, passing to bluish

on the rump, and rich dark indigo-blue on the middle tail-

feathers and outer webs of the rest ; tail yellow beneath and

at the tips, sullied along the inner web of the rectrices

above; forehead and cheeks (passing beyond the eye) broad,

nuchal ring and entire under parts brilliant green; wings

deeper green, paler and yellowish towards the scapularies ;

throat intense black and contrasting, with a tendency to

form a ring round the neck. Upper mandible bright coral,

with a white tip, the lower reddish. Wing 54 in.; tail

probably of the usual length, but its medial feathers in the

specimen described appear but half grown.t A female or

young male is wholly green, more yellowish below, except

the rump, which is brighter blue than in the adult male, and

the tail is mingled green and indigo-blue; the more vivid

green ring of the neck but obscurely indicated. Both

mandibles dull coral, with white tips, and the wing measures

54 1m., the tail but 44in.”’

To the above may be added that in a fresh specimen the

feet are bluish-grey, as it were powdered, and the eye of a

pale chrome.

Our late President, Sir J. Emerson Tennent, had a singular

living variety of this species, wholly of a bright chrome colour,

the broad green nuchal ring being slightly darker in some

lights. When I saw it, it had moulted several times, but

had always assumed the same garb. It was caught in the

neighbourhood of Adam’s Peak.

* This species may yet be found here.—E.U.L.

t While going to press I have received a letter from Mr. Blyth

enumerating some new birds received from Dr. Kelaart at Nuwara Eliya.

He writes: “‘ Among these is P. Calthrope adult, with full-grown tail ne

longer than your specimen.”

202 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. I]., Parr Il. |

4.—P. Cyanocepuatus ( Hdw., pl. 233).

Syn.— Psittacus Cyanocephalus, H.; P. Flavitorquis,

Shaw; Pal@ornis Flavicollaris, Frank; Psittaca Ben-

galensis, Bris. ; Psittacus Erythrocephalus, Gume ; Batu-

girawad, Sin. (literally “ Brinjal colour”); Payattan-hili

Mal. (Payarw is literally the name of a bean).

This elegant parrot seems generally distributed (with

the exception of the Jaffna peninsula) throughout the

Island. It chiefly prevails in the low wooded hills between

Colombo and Kandy, feeding in small flocks of one or two

families on the nut of the dombagaha (Sinhalese).

The adult birds are much prized among the natives; the

young birds have the head of a greyish-purple, with a yellow

ring round the throat. On assuming the plum colour of the

adult bird, the feathers do not fall off, but change colour.

From the numerous specimens procured, I am inclined to

think this change takes place before the end of the first year.

Sub-Family Lorina.

Genus Loricutus, Blyth.

).—L. ASIATICUS.

Syn.—P. Asiaticus, Latham ; P. Indicus, Geme. ;

Mal-girawa, Sin. (literally “ Flower parrot’’).

Very abundant in the plain extending along the whole

sea coast from Puttalam (where said by Mr. Brodie to be

common) to Tangalla. Plentiful also about Kandy and

Ambaganuwa.

They are exceedingly fond of drinking from the toddy

vessels ; and in such situations are entrapped in horse-hair

nooses by the native boys, who tame them. The young bird

resembles its Indian representative L. vernalis. Not having

the red heads, like as in the preceding species, the feathers

themselves assume the bright red colour by age.

No. 5.—1! 849.] = NATURAL HISTORY. 203

RAPTORES.

Tribe DriuRnt.

Family FaLconipz.

Genus Fatco.

6.—F. Prrrerinus, L.

Syv.—f. Barlarus, L.; F. Communis, Bris.; Rdjaliya,

Sin. (the name of the whole tribe of Raptores); Paruntu, Mal.

(general name also) ; Knykdief, Dutch (literally “Chicken

thief’) ; Motu, Port. (general name also).

Very rare in Ceylon ; one specimen only procured ; this I

shot in January, 1850, on the open plain near Vallai Bridge,

Jaffna district, feeding on the waders which frequent the

borders of the salt pans. In its maw were the remains of

Hi, Leschenaulti.

Sub-Genus Tinnuncuus, Veezdlot.

7.—T. ALAUDARIUS.

Syvn.— Falco Alaudarius, Brie.; F. Tinnunculus, Lin. ;

F, Interstinctus, McLelands.

This daring hawk is common throughout the Island on

open ground dotted with low bushes. They are generally

found hunting in couples, skimming low over the bushes and

along the ground, and darting suddenly on their prey, which

consists almost exclusively of small birds, such as larks

a e e 2 ° °

~ and amadavats, which abound in such situations.

Sub-Family Pernina,

Genus Baza, Hodgson.

8.—B. Loruorss, (Pl. Col., 10).

Syn.— Faico Lophotes, Tem. ; F. Syama, Hodg.

Uncommon, but found occasionally in the Jaffna district

in the cold season, from October to February. It is said to

feed on caterpillars, but a specimen which I procured in

Jafina contained a lizard (Calotes) in its throat half

devoured.

204 JOURNAL, B.A.S. (CEYLON). [ VoL. II., ParrlIl.

Sub-Family Crrcarin a.

Genus Hamarornis, Vigors.

9.—H. Brvo.

Syn.—aleco Bido, Hors.; F. Bacha (?), Daudin;

F, Cheela, var.

Not uncommon in various parts of the Island, having been

received from Mr. Brodie at Puttalam, procured by Dr.

Templeton near Colombo, and another was shot by myself

in the Pasdun ko6ralé near the hill Diyagallagolava, the

habitat of the Edible-nest-building Collocalie, while sleep-

ing on a low tree: a fortunate discharge of dust shot

brought it to the ground, and on removing the skin a large

mould shot was found embedded in the bone of the right

wing: from its appearance it had evidently existed there for

a long period.* The specimens procured in this country

are uniformly smaller than the Indian race.

Sub-Family Circinz.

Genus Circus, Lacepede.

10.—C. Swarnsonu, A. Smith (Gould’s B. E., pl. 34.)

Syn.—C. Pallidus, Sykes; C. Albescens, Leson.

Not uncommon on the open plains about Puttalam and

the neighbourhood of the salt lake at Vallai, Jaffna district.

It preys on frogs, lizards, and reptiles of all kinds.

* For the benefit of any person collecting in this region, into whose

hands these ‘“ Sketches”’ may fall, the following description of a col-

lecting gun, which I have in cons‘ant use, is given :—

Length of barrel, 3 ft. 7 in.; calibre rather less than 3-8ths of an

in., carrying a ball 120 to the pound; thickness of metal 1-8th of an

in., making a total of 5-8ths of an in. in the diameter of the barrel

at the muzzle. At the breech the metal is much thicker, to counter-

balance the length. The stock is fitted with a trap box holding wad-_

ding, balls, caps, a knife, needles and thread, &c. ‘The charge for this

gun is about a quarter the usual quantity, which will be found very

economical in a country where all the collector’s ammunition has to be

carried by coolies. It kills at a long distance, and throws ball or three

buck shot admirably, if re quired for deer, pea-fow], or wild ducks. It

was with this gun I killed H. Bido.

No. 5.—1849.] NATURAL HISTORY. 205

11.—C, Cinerascens (Gould’s B. E., pl. 35).

Syn.—F. Cinerascens, Montague ; C. Montagui, Vieillot.

Abundant in the same localities as the preceding, and

often mistaken for it in its adult plumage. When young

it is rufous brown, with a light chocolate nuchal ring and a

conspicuous whitish mark on the rump, by which it may be

identified during its flight ata great distance. Its principal

food consists of snakes, upon which it pounces in its low

skimming flight. The prey is always seized with the foot

near the neck, and instantly bitten across the head. I have

seen it strike its quarry as often in the water as on land.

12.—C. MELANOLEUCUS.

Syn.—Falco Melanoleucus, Pennant.

One specimen only of this bird has fallen-under my notice.

I shot it near Martéddam, west, coast.

Sub-Family AccIpiTRInzé.

Genus Micronisus, G. Rh. Gray.

_ 13.—M. Banpius (£1. Col., 308, 336).

Syn.— Falco Badius, Gmelin; F. Brownii, Shaw.

This is the common sparrow-hawk of the European resi-

dents, and is most universally distributed, and very

common. It preys on small reptiles and birds.

Genus Astur, Bechstein.

14..—A. Triviraatus (Pl. Col,, 303).

Syn.— falco Trivirgatus, Rein. ; -Astur Indicus,

Hodg. ;. A. eristatus, G. R. Gray.

Apparently confined to the mountainous districts, where,

to the loss and annoyance of the planting community, it is

very common, doing great damage in the hen roosts. It is

very sly, and rarely falls by the planter’s gun, although

always killed when opportunity offers. The late Mr. Dewar

206 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [ Vou. LI., Parr II.

of Carolina estate, Ambagamuwa, told me many pairs built

in the clefts of a perpendicular cliff overlooking the falls of

the Kelani-ganga.

Sub-Family THRASmTIN &.

Genus SpizaEtus, Vieillot.

15.—S. Limnarrus (Pl. Col., 127, 134).

Syn.— Falco Caligatus, Raffles; F. Niveus, Tem.; Kélik-

kallan, Mal. (literally ‘ Fowl] thief ’’).

The crested variety of this noble hawk is rather abundant

_ and generally distributed. Ihave shot it at Matara about

the banks of the river, and at Point Pedro, the northernmost

point of the Island.

Sub-Family Hatiarin az.

Genus Biaerus, Blyth.

16.—B. LEvcOGASTER.

Syn.— Ff. Dimidiatus, Raffles; Icthyetus Cultrunguis,

Blyth. (Journal A. 8., XI.) Kadal-A’la, Mal.

(literally ‘‘ Sea eagle”). |

Not uncommon, but local, one pair frequenting the same

place for several years and breeding on the same tree, gene-

rally an aged 66-tree, whose sanctity protects the nest from

the depredations of the boys. I found the nest of one pair

lately (January, 1850) in such a situation ; and although I

offered a good reward to some lads on the spot, not one would

mount to rob it, saying that the demon of the tree would

injure them. |

This is the largest bird of prey now existing in the

Tsland.*

* Bennet, in his work on Ceylon, includes Gyps Indicus among the

birds of the Island. Traditional reports are also current among the

natives in the extreme south, of the existence of a large bird of prey

once existing in that locality.

No. 5.—1849.| ~= NATURAL HISTORY. 20

Genus Hatiasrur, Selby.

17.—H. Inpus.

Syn.—Falco Indus, Boddaert; F. Pondicerianus, Gme.;

Milvus Rotundicaudatus, Hodg. (young); Chem Paruntu

Mal. (literally ‘Red hawk’); Brimalgu Moitu, Port.

(literally ‘‘ Red hawk ’’).

The common red-fish hawk of Europeans is found abun-

dantly all round the sea coast, and particularly at the mouths

of rivers, where it preys upon all kinds of carrion brought

down by the stream, fighting with the crows for the prize.

They will sit for hours on the fish-kraals in the rivers and

catch the small fish which rise to the surface in their endea-

vours to escape. I have known them seize a fowl, but this

is of rare occurrence ; one was cut down with a table knife

by a gentleman while in the act of killinga large hen. They

build in trees in the neighbourhood of water, making many

false nests before they finally fix on a place which pleases

them. While thefemale is incubating the male occupies one

of these nests. The nest, like that of Blagrus Leucogaster, is

composed of sticks and twigs without any lining ; eggs about

2 in. in length by 14 in. in diameter. Colour, dull dirty

white, dotted at the thick end with bloody coloured unequal

and uncertain small blotches and spots; in some instances

these spots are nearly black, resembling dry blood. The

young, of which there are generally two, are excluded about the

first week in February, incubation lasting about three weeks.

Before the appearance of their feathers they are covered with

a grayish down, and are apparently fed with soft reptiles.

Genus Mitvus, Cuvier.

18.—M. ATER.

Syn.—/f. Ater, Hmen.; M. Govinda, Sykes; Karum

Paruntu, Mal. (literally “ Black hawk ’’).

Common all along the sea coast, and easily distinguished

by its deeply forked tail. It feeds in company with the

last on the same substances.

208 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr II.

NOCTURNI.

Family Strrigipaz.

Genus Scors, Savingy.

19—S. Lempreai (Pl. Col., 99).

Svn.—Stric Lempigi, Hors.; Scops Javanicus, Less. ;

Punchy bassa, Sin. (literally ‘‘ Small owl,” the name dassa .

being common to all the owls, and even including the

Caprimuljide) ; Nattu, Mal.; Kooroot, Port.

The Ceylon variety of this bird (the S. Lempigi,

Jerdon) is common throughout the maritime districts,

though periodical in its appearance. During moonlight

nights they hunt in pairs for Coleoptera and Phalene about

umbrageous trees, uttering their monotonous and melan-

choly “wagh wagh” when at rest, and a quick tremulous

cry when flying. The natives say they build in hollowtrees, -

never in buildings.

Genus Kerrura, Less.

20.—K. CEYLONENSIS.

Syn.—S. Leschenaulti, Tem. ; Loku Bassa and Bakamuna,

Sin.; U’mattan-kukai, Mal.; Bacamuna, Port.

These large owls are common and apparently widely dis-

tributed, being found in Colombo, Puttalam, and Jaffna.

The natives tell me they feed much on fish, which they catch

by moonlight. A pair I kept alive for some time fed on fish

with avidity. When alarmed they uttered a hissing note,

ending in a deep growl, bulging out the throat. The natives

report that they build in hollow trees and clefts of rocks,

laying two large white eggs.

Sub-Family ATHENINA.

Genus Ninox, Hodgson.

21.—N. Scutunatrus (Pl. Col., 289).

Syn.—Strix Scutulata, Raffles; S. Hirsuta, Tem.; J.

Nialensis, Hodgson.

Found but rarely in the interior of the Island. I know

nothing of its habits, never having seen it alive.

No. 5.—-1849.] - NATURAL HISTORY. 209

Genus ATHENE, Bove.

22.—A. Castanotus, Blyth.

Syn.—A. Castanoptera, Blyth (Journal A.S, XV., 280).

Peculiar to the Island, and discovered by Dr. Templeton

in 1846. Itis pretty generally distributed about the interior,

and not uncommon.

Its description is fully given loc. si¢., and may be briefly

summed up thus: Length, 7 to 8 in.; head and breast dark

brown, barred with dusky buff; back and wings dark brown,

barred like the head with a dark brown; tail similarly barred,

but with wider stripes ; vent and stomach whitish, and much

mottled with brown; beak much hidden by the wbrisse ; feet

small, and clothed with stiff hairs.

Sub-Family SyRnimnz.

Genus Syrnium, Savigny.

23.—S. Iyprani (Gray’s Il. Gen. Birds).

Syn.—Strix Indrani, Sykes, T. A.; Ulama, Sin.

Found occasionally in the densest and most lonely jungles.

This is the dreaded “ Devil bird” of the Sinhalese, and its

note is considered as a pure prestige of evil.

Sub-Family Srriginz.

Genus Strix, L.

24.—S. Firamuna, L.

Syn.—S. Javanica, Sykes.

The white or barn owl of Europe is probably identical with

the species which we have in this Island. The only place

whence I have procured it is the old Fort of Jaffna, where

‘the dilapidated ruins and the vast old banian tree on the

bastion overlooking the esplanade afford it a congenial home;

here it may be nightly heard uttering its mournful cry while

seated on a gable of the old Dutch church.

210 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). | Vou. Te Banari

NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY OF CEYLON.

LATERITE FORMATION.—FLUVIATILE DEPOSIT

OF NUWARA ELIYA.

By E. F. Kevaart, M.D., F.L.S., F.G.S.

Assistant Surgeon to the Forces.

“ Even those who run may read in the Book of Nature, and if they read

there is no reason why they should not note for the benefit of those who have

not the opportunity of studying from the same pages.” —NEWBOLD.

THoued the geological formations of Ceylon are of a simple

nature, and described as such by writers, that attention has

not been paid to the laterite formation of the Island which

it deserves: some have called it decayed clay ironstone ;

others have described it to be granitic rocks weathered in situ.

It has not, however, been so slightly regarded by Indian

geologists. ‘Their more recent researches have discovered

new features in this peculiar formation, which have thrown

great doubts as to its being the mere result of disintegrated

or decomposed hypogene or trapean rocks i situ. Captain

Newbold of the Madras Engineers has even gone so far as

to suspect it to be of tertiary origin. It is with a view of

drawing the attention of observers in this Island, for a more

complete elucidation of this subject, that this communication

is submitted to the Ceylon Asiatic Society.

The term laterite (derived from /ater, a brick) is applied

to those masses of reddish clay, more or less indurated, and

containing pebbles or crystals of quartz. Itis called by the ©

Sinhalese cadook, and is used extensively for building pur-_

poses. There are several varieties of laterite, and which

admit of classification :—(1) Laterite, properly so called, of a

hard compact, almost jaspedeous rock, formed of indurated

No. 5.—1849.] GEOLOGY OF CEYLON. 211

clay, tabular or sinuous, in which are impacted quartz

crystals of various sizes and colours, generally of a reddish

or brick colour. To this kind the term quartzose may be

applied, as it contains a larger proportion of undecomposed

quartz. The cavities and sinuosities are lined, or sometimes

filled with a whitish, yellowish, or reddish clay.

(2) A second variety of laterite, and that most frequently

met with in Ceylon, is of a softer consistence, and can be cut

easily with a knife, but hardens on exposure tothe atmosphere.

The term Uithomargic laterite has been applied to this kind.

(3) There is another form which my friend Staff Surgeon

Dr. Clark calls detrital. This is found in nullahs or

ravines. It is evidently formed of pebbles of quartz loosely

imbedded in clay, both being washed down to these nullahs

by the heavy rains. The detritus of laterite is seen about

Colombo forming a breccia with marine shells. A laterite

gravel is also seen in various parts of the Island covering

the laterite hills, and it is also found at their base. This

gravel is nothing more than the quartz crystals of the

laterite rocks separated by therains from their clayey matrix:

some of the pebbles are denuded entirely of the clayey

covering, others retain still a thin coating of it. Lithomarge

is a sectile clayey substance of variegated colours. It is

chiefly formed of a decomposed felspar and hornblende,—

whitish when the former prevails, and yellow or reddish

when hornblende predominates in the rock from which it is

derived, owing to the larger proportion of vxide of iron

which the latter mineral contains. There are extensive hills

of lithomarge in Ceylon, and frequently it lies under the ©

hard laterite, and is often interposed between its layers.

With the exception of Voysey and his few supporters

(who regard the laterite to be of igneous or volcanic

origin), geologists consider laterite to be the product of the |

disintegration and decomposition of granitic rocks. The

57—87 G

212 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr II.

difference of opinion rests upon the question whether the

disintegration or decomposition took place in situ, or

whether the disintegrated masses were deposited or brought

from a distance and’ laid over the rocks on which laterite

now lies; or, in other words, is it a formation in itself

derived from rocks which formerly existed ?

To the former view (weathering in situ) there are many

more supporters than to the latter; and among them our late

much lamented Dr. Gardner, who from observations both in

this Island and on the Continent of India, attributed the

formation of laterite to the simple decay of gneiss or

granitic rocks. I cannot but agree with him that in many

cuts or sections of the rock nature is detected in the act of

disintegration, some of the original stratification (often

seen running almost vertically) of the gneiss being pre-

served; in other places it is difficult to trace where the

gneiss terminates and the laterite commences, one as it

were running into the other. But I must observe that

I could never trace this continuity in the hills of the harder

variety of laterite. Here, certainly, the appearances are

favourable to the opinion that laterite is a distinct forma-

tion of itself. And yet this hard laterite rests on gneissic

rocks, as is seen at the bottom of wells sunk in the lateritic

hills at Mutwal and in the Fort of Colombo. Laterite may

also be seen, says Captain Newbold, capping hypogene or

trap rocks of great elevations, while the adjacent hills, com-

posed of an exactly similar rock and forming a continuation

of the same bed equally exposed to the action of the weather,

are quite bare of the laterite. He also observed laterite

resting on limestone without a trace of lime in the

laterite. If my information is correct, laterite is also seen

over some of the limestones of Jaffna in the north of the

Island. General Cullen found on the western coast of

India, 15 miles south of Quilon, a layer of lignite in the

No. 5.—1849.] GEOLOGY OF CEYLON. 213

laterite, imbedded in a stratum of dark shale and clays.

Lignite has also been seen in the laterite of Travancore,

and graphite has also been observed there. These are the

observations which have made Captain Newbold and others

view the laterite of Southern India as a distinct formation,

more recent than any of the hypogene rocks. Till similar

features are observed in some of the laterites of Ceylon,

we are obliged to regard them to be the weathering of

hypogene rocks zn s¢tu.

To comprehend how a hard compact rock like granite or

gneiss could moulder away into laterite and lithomarge,

it is necessary to know the composition of the minerals

which enter into the formation of these hypogene rocks.

The following are the mineral constituents of the most

common forms of :—

‘ _ Felspar. Mica, Hornblende.

Silica . 66°75 ... 48°00 ... 42°00

Alumina be 17250) 6.5) 84°25: 2 12°00

Lime aoe LOOl) este)! we gd 00

Potash -. 12°00 ... 875 ... a trace.

Magnesia Seater Oey Wiese.) Meet eebi (None

Oxide of [ron bes EON eds 50. 25

Oxide of Manganese... — ... S50}? | cee 25

Water sesh ue Nite w Seeley Gh vea'e °75

98°25 96:00 98°25

Quartz consists of nearly pure silica, with atrace, however,

of aluminaand sometimesof iron.—F rom Jameison’s Journal.

It is easily seen that the chief source of the alumina

necessary for the formation of clay is derived from the

felspar and mica which enter into the composition of granitic

rocks, and that hornblende supplies the largest quantity of

iron, the hyperoxidation of which, assisted probably by

electric influences, precedes the disintegration of these rocks.

In rocks in which felspar and hornblende predominate,

the clay formed is much variegated. Pure felspar forms

the porcelain clay or kaolin so abundant on the plains of

214 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr II.

Nuwara Eliya. Quartz, if deeply impregnated with oxide

of iron, will also moulder away, but not quite so soon as the

other mineral constituents of hypogene rocks.

Before I had observed the immense lithomargic hills of

Uva and Nuwara Eliya, it was difficult for me to believe

that large mountain masses of hard rock could disintegrate

so completely into lithomarge. When there are, however,

such unequivocal proofs of rocks, several hundred feet high,

mouldering away into kaolin or white procelain clay in some

parts, and in others into lithomargic earths and clays of

various colours and consistence, it is not difficult to account

even for the formation of the harder forms of laterite. In

sections made in Nuwara Eliya for the construction of roads,

successive layers of sienitic gneiss are seen in various stages

of decomposition, and these layers retain in some parts,

where the decay is not far advanced, the original lines of

stratification. Some of these layers are of pure kaolin,

others of a reddish or yellowish clay; some mixed of all three,

giving a beautiful variegated surface to these exposed parts

of the hills. In half-decomposed portions of some of the

hills on the plains of Nuwara Eliya may be seen dark red-

dish spots, which are formed of decomposed garnets, and in

other hills are seen scaly graphite. Adularia and ceylonite

are sometimes found in the beds of clay. If such then be

the striking illustration of the decomposition of one form

of gneiss in which hornblende and felspar prevail, it is easy

to conceive other forms of granitic or gneissic rocks weather-

ing into laterite in other circumstances and other situations.

Laterite in any shape is not found in Nuwara Eliya. The

stones used here for building are half-decomposed gneiss

obtained from lithomargic hills, and it is yet to be

ascertained how long these will last. I fear that the

_ decomposed stone is too felspathic to last many years.

The presence of lignite in some of the laterites of Southern

No. 5.—1849.] GEOLOGY OF CEYLON. 215

India, and sometimes laterite being found over limestone,

would lead us to suppose that laterites are of two periods :

the one, and only one perhaps, existing in Ceylon being of

the weathering of rocks 7m sétu, and therefore still being

formed, and the other a deposit of disintegrated lateritic

matter (over more recent formations) derived from previously

existing lateritic rocks. The subject, however, requires

further investigation ; itis involved in greater mystery than

many other geological phenomena. Ceylon affords many

opportunities for carrying on observations necessary for its

complete solution. The features of the laterite of Southern

India, which induced Captain Newbold to suppose laterite to

be a distinct formation, may also exist in Ceylon ; therefore

Members of the Asiatic Society will do well to note the

nature of the rocks on which the Ceylon laterite lies, and to

examine whether any of it contains lignite or is in the

slightest degree fossilliferous. The discovery of fossils

alone will not prove that laterite is not decomposed gneiss

nm situ, for Sir Charles Lyell and others have suggested the

possibility of finding fossils even in gneiss of later origin.

Granting that this is the case, nothing could then be easier

than to account for the presence of fossils in decomposed

masses of the same kind of rocks. This subject is now

engaging the attention of the Geological Society of London,

their notice being attracted to it by the so-called /vot-

prints on the gneissic rock at Kurunégala, which I have

not yet had an opportunity of examining.*

Though the geological features of Ceylon resemble those

of Southern India, yet from the paucity of observations

perhaps, there appears to be considerable difference in many

respects, especially in the nature of more recent deposits.

Kunker, a limestone gravel, has not been noticed in Ceylon,

* Since this Paper was written I bave examined the rock and found

it to be laminated granite, and the marks merely the effects of weathering.

216 JOURNAL, B.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vow. IL, Parr IL.

nor has clay-slate been seen in this Island, though its as-

sociate rocks are foundin great abundance. Both are found

in extensive beds in Southern India, Regur, the black

cotton soil which covers nearly two-thirds of Southern India,

has not been noticed in Ceylon, and yet it is most probable

that all these three formations exist in some parts of the

Island, most likely in the northern districts.

The only alluvial, or rather fluviatile, deposit in Ceylon

resembling in external characters the regur of India, is the

black soil of Nuwara Eliya and its neighbourhood; with

this difference, however,—regur lies over a limestone gravel

and the blackish loam of Nuwara Eliya over a quartz gravel

with a substratum of clayey earths, formed of the litho-

margic hills and valleys over which the loam and gravel were

deposited. A deposit of gravel and loam has also been

observed on the Nilgiris, 6,000 ft. above sea-level. These

deposits of loam and gravel on the patanas and plains

of Nuwara Eliya are considered by casual observers to be

the decayed particles of the rocks in the immediate vicinity,

brought down by the rains. If this is their real nature, the

_ decomposed particles of the gneiss and quartzite, which

chiefly compose these existing rocks above the plains, could

not by any means have taken their present position of the

loam and gravel. The colour, too, of the decomposed parti-

cles would not be dark brown or black, but whitish or

yellowish. The loam and gravel lie so conformably on the

lithomargic surface of the hills and valleys that it is un-

reasonable to suppose that they were deposited from any

other source than from a large sheet of water.* The heavier

* May not this account for the want of luxuriant vegetation on these

patanas, the water having washed and carried away to the lower

parts of the Island the alkalies and phosphates so necessary to plants?

The black soil of Nuwara Eliya, however rich in appearances, requires

much manuring ; the best potatoes are the product of well-manured

grounds ; guano is as much required here as anywhere else.

No. 5.—1849.] a@zoLoay oF crvLon. 2a

particles in the form of gravel sinking first, and then the

lighter particles held in suspension in the water, were de-

posited over the bed of gravel, or, as in some places seen, on

layers of various-sized pieces of quartzite and gneiss. The

loam is not mixed with gravel ; it is composed of fine sand,

Just such as the mud of rivers or lakes is composed of. In

the lower layers this ioam is of a brown colour, but becom-

ing darker as it approaches the surface, and after being

mixed with the decomposed matter of the grasses which

grow on it, the loam becomes nearly of a peaty nature and

of a blackish colour.

In sections along the different roads which traverse the

plains, a continuous layer of gravel, from 1 in. to2 ft. or

3 ft. in thickness, is seen lying over the lithomargic

hills, and on this gravelly surface the brown or blackish loam

is seen of varied thickness, genera!ly from 1 ft. to 3 ft. ; in

some places even 5 ft. or 6 ft. of loam is found. In a sec-

tion near the Governor’s Cottage an interruption appears

to have taken place, after about a foot of mud was deposited ;

then came over the pure mud masses of gneiss and

pebbles, now lying several feet thick, mixed with loam of a

brownish colour. Over this mixed deposit is again seen a

thin layer of loam such as is found in other parts of the

plain,—the whole forming a curious variegated structure.

The above observations lead me to conclude that the

plains of Nuwara Eliya, and perhaps those of higher parts,

have once been the channel ofa slow winding river or bed of

an extensive lake. And it is probable that lower hills, which

look like inverted tea cups, were elevated by subsequent

upheavals after the waters had deposited the gravel and

loam. It is perhaps in this manner only that the almost

uniform thickness of the gravel and loam in the valleys and

on the tops of the hills can be accounted for. Had the

present elevated surface existed while the waters were

218 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. I]., Parr IT.

depositing the heavier particles held in suspension, we should

expect to find thicker layers of gravel on the valleys than on

the sides of hills. Such is not, however, the case: thick

beds of gravel are even found on the tops of the hills

several hundred feet above the present drainage of the

plains. Geologists have decided that the mountains of

Southern India were elevated to their present heights by

Successive upheavals, and therefore it is not objectionable

to consider the higher lands of Ceylon to have also been

elevated by more than one upheaval. There is abundant

evidence too, besides the one just alluded to, to conclude

that Ceylon has been subjected to successive internal forces,

which will explain also the present configuration of the

mountain masses of Nuwara Eliya and the characters of

Nuwara Eliya and Horton plains.

Hitherto no evidences of deluvial or glacial currents

have been found in Ceylon. The rounded blocks of granite

and gneiss seen on various parts of the Island are the

effects of a spontaneous concentric exfoliation which small

and large masses of these rocks are susceptible of. Major

Lushington has instanced this peculiar exfoliation in a

gigantic scale on the rock of Dambulla. Alluvial and

fluviatile deposits are seen in various parts of the Island,

but none perhaps so extensive as the fluviatile deposits of

Nuwara Eliya, which appear to extend from Horton Plains,

passing over Nuwara Eliya and progressing towards the

valleys of Maturata on one side and to Dimbula on the

other. Although these deposits are not of a diluvial nature,

still there is an importance attached to them, as they show

that at a former epoch the interior of Ceylon was traversed

by broader and more expansive sheets of water than any of

the rivers of the present day. It is doubtful, however,

whether this large lake or river which has deposited

its mud on the plains of Nuwara Eliya is dwindled down

No. 5.—1849.] " GEOLOGY OF CEYLON. 249

into the narrow streams which now exist on these plains as

tributaries to the great Mahawel-ganga.

While geology fails to tell us how a world was made, this

science teaches us how after it was made it was disturbed and

altered for the habitation of successive generations of orga-

nised beings. Though the ground we walk upon and the

hills which surround us are inanimate objects, we ought to

remember that they too received and obeyed, and continue

to receive and to obey, the laws of the same Creator,

who made the grass to grow and animated the world with

living beings. When we observe hard adamantine rocks

mouldering away into soft clays and earths by the same

forces which give life and energy to animal and vegetable

natures, we also find that it is one and the same power

which reduces both organic and inorganic matters, at later

periods, to their primitive elements. To man is given the

faculty of observing and recording the operations of this

power, though from him is hidden the mysterious nature of

that power which was from the beginning, still is, and will

at last dissolve the great globe itself. Before the tender

herb and scented flowers burst into life and beauty the

inorganic world received the care of the Omnipotent God ;

and surely what required and received His first attention is

deserving of much more than our least. Therefore it is to

be hoped that Members of the Asiatic Society of Ceylon, and

their friends in different parts of this Island, will make such

observation as will contribute to a more perfect knowledge

of the Physical History of Ceylon.

- 920 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [VoL. II., Parr II.

ON THE MANUFACTURE OF SUGAR FROM

THE JUICE OF THE COCOANUT TREE.

By J. G. Tay tor, Esa.

(Read February 23, 1850.)

In 1847, during my residence in the Southern Province,

near the main road from Point de Galle to Matara, this idea

was first made known to me by a very ingenious person,

now a resident in Gaile ; but I was too incessantly engaged

in the duties of my situation to allow of my making any

experiments. Nor had I then the requisite experience in the

ways of the Island; besides, unfortunately, the native

population had conceived so many prejudices against us and

our sugar-making operations, that I think it would have been

out of the question.

In the beginning of the month of September my attention

was again aroused by the experiments of a friend, well

versed in chemistry, on the products of the cocoanut tree,

and, having procured a small quantity of sweet toddy, I had

the satisfaction of perceiving that a very fair quality of

sugar could be made therefrom. After this, my brother

consented to tap two young trees near his residence, on

small quantities of juice collected from which I made a

great number of experiments, the results of which I now

propose to lay before you; and I am even sanguine enough

to hope that some of them (as well as the inferences

deducible from other remarks) may be of some service also to

the manufacturer of sugarfrom the juiceofthecane. In fact,

we find that very often more light has been thrown on certain

investigations from observations on analogous inquiries

than from direct experiment on the very subject itself.

No. 5.—1850.] SUGAR MANUFACTURE. 221

Two methods are, as described by my brother, employed

by the natives to preserve the juice from fermentation by

separating the feculencies. As to the nature of these

feculencies, we are still, unfortunately, very much in the

dark. We have, even did we possess time and ability, no

apparatus or materials for the investigation of the subject,

and it is for that reason I earnestly entreat the Society,

should they agree with me in considering the subject to

merit sufficient importance, to cause all possible efforts to be

made to have these particulars thoroughly and scientifically

elucidated. But I will communicate what I know on the

point, as that will be some guide perhaps as to what

direction the attention of the investigator should be

addressed.

From the end of the spadix, a slimy matter is observable,

oozing out with air bubbles along with the juice, and whether

with bark or lime, but more especially with lime, an

abundant bulky mass of this substance, called in Tamil

mundi, is generally found on straining the juice; but

curious to say, when the spadix is reduced to a mere stump,

and the running of the toddy draws near an end, very

little indeed, if any of this mundz is seen. I imagine

from this that the mundi goes, in the economy of the

plant, to form the flowers, &c., but may not be needed by it

when the fruit is established ; but this is a mere suggestion.

It is not the substance which is all precipitated by the

defecating agents employed, for they are equally necessary

when we see none of it, and it also exists in the drinking

toddy, which has had nothing put into it. This mundz,

then, is a white, opaque, pasty substance, quite tasteless

and devoid of smell, and when washed and dried contracts,

and becomes first elastic and india-rubber-like, and next

hard, and of somewhat the appearance of gum, but when

again put into cold water swells, and becomes as at

222 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr II,

first. It possesses one very curious property, however,

which may possibly give a clue to a discovery of one

at least of its constituent parts. When added to starch

paste, heated till the pellicles burst, it will liquify the same,

and, in one instance only, saccharified it. The latter only

happened with one parcel of mundi, which I suppose had

been kept just long enough to allow of the particular

principle which effects this being evolved in proper pro-

portion. But the liquifaction took place in more than four

trials ; one on the scale of three gallons of water, kept three

hours on a water-bath at 150°, with about two ounces of

mundi stirred in. Probably this may suggest that a

portion of that strange substance, diastase, is present in

the mundz, as the nature of the scum or pellicle which rose

to the surface from time to time seemed to look like

caseine. The dried mundi thrown on a red-hot iron

gives out the smell of toasted bread. This may indicate

dextrine, and as starch itself exists, it is said, in the sap of

all plants, that may be also present. A small quantity of

mund: which I had put aside and forgotten for a time

became quite saccharine by itself. Diastase is extracted

from malt, which is formed by the germination of a grain ;

then why not in the bursting of a flower bud? It is the

diastase, acting on the starch in the grain, which saccharifies

malt. I trust some able chemist may take up the investi-

gation, a most interesting one, even as regards the solution

of some of the mystery of the physiology of {plants, and of

the elaboration of their proteine compounds, as they are

justly named.

Whatever they are—and it is all-important for us that they

should be known exactly—they seem to exercise under favour-

able circumstances no evil influence that we can see, on

the liquor which reaches the hands of the manufacturer,—a

clear white limpid fluid hardly distinguishable from water.

No. 5.—1850.] SUGAR MANUFACTURE. 223

[ am puzzled to know, indeed, what substances they may be

which are separated by the defecating agents. So long as

mund: was present I concluded that it was that; but I

have lately manipulated liquor in which I could actually

detect nothing but what had been put in, and yet we have

proved that without anything sugar can be made (thouhg the

litmus paper be unreddened at all), and that not even with

the after addition of lime. A thick scum forms on the top

after boiling, and the syrup assumes a viscous character.

From the hopelessly black colour of the native jaggery

made from limed liquor (pez), I thought good sugar

could not be made fromit. However, I procured a quantity

for trial. ‘The enormous quantity of lime that had been

put into the chatties was soon apparent, and it was partly

diffused through the liquor like a very fine impalpable

sediment. Fine English towels would not stop it from

running through them. I earnestly beg for assistance also

to enable a plan to be established for the extraction of this

floating lime. It is true that most settles to the bot-

tom, as I have since found, and might be left behind by

drawing off the supernatant liquor; but still some is lost,

which I am anxious to avoid. Now herein seems tobe a

great difference between cane juice and penz. Whatever

quantity of lime one puts to the former seems taken up by

it, and to exert its baneful influence at once; but in the

toddy, as 1 say, we find the most of it at the bottom, while

the supernatant liquid remains quite limpid, and not to have

taken up more lime than so much water would have done.

Although by the first experiment with the limed liquor I

did not succeed in getting out the half of the lime, which I

estimated correctly at over an ounce to a gallon, the sugar

did not turn out nearly so black as I thought it would have

done, and is the sample marked No.3. These trials, I may

add, were all made with open chatties.

224 JOURNAL, B.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL, Part II.

As regards filters, having remembered seeing, when the

coolies poured out the chatty of water round the cocoanut

plants, that all the vegetable impurities seemed to remain

on the surface of the sandy soil, the idea of a sand filter

occurred tome. Ina box filter of fine wire cloth I spread

three inches of sharp sand from the bottom of a well,

and poured on gently the liquor to be filtered. The sand

stopped even the most minute particles, and the liquid

came through quite limpid. These sand filters acted in

the most perfect manner possible so long as mundi

was present,—it preventing, in some curious way, the fine

particles of lime from choking the sand ; but having lately

tried them with the liquor which contained none, they failed

of their effect. They still stop every impurity, but soon get

choked, and are thus too slow for practical purposes. But

cane juice which has been defecated passes through well, and

therefore I recommend a trial of these sand filters to sugar-

makers. I noticed in this trial that the lime which

remained in the liquor was taken up and dissolved by the

sugar when the density of the syrup was about 20° Beaume.

In the next trial, the floating lime was taken out with

the white of an egg totwo gallons. HEggsare not generally

admitted as legitimate materials for defecation, as not always

procurable, but ina country where this would only add

one-sixteenth of a penny to the value of a pound of sugar I am

not so sure that they might not be occasionally employed.

In this case they took every atom of lime out, and the result

was an excellent sugar, the grain of which I purposely

‘“‘broke”’ for claying,* and it is the clayed sample No. 4.

Thus I came to the conclusion that lime, merely in solution,

does not make the sugar dark, and only injures the result by

forming an undue quantity of molasses. And yet all the

* An operation the use of which is now quite exploded, or ought

to be.

No. 5.—1850. | SUGAR MANUFACTURE. 225

drained syrups granulated well on being boiled a second and

third time ; but if not for the lime, a very small portion of

syrup or molasses would drain from it on the very first

boiling, as I have since proved. Our toddy-drawer boiled a

lot from which the lime had been extracted by egg, and to

his great surprise the result was a jaggery actually whiter

than that made from bark toddy.

I need not tellany sugar maker that it is a popular error

to think that eggs make sugar or syrup white. The

albumen has no decolorising power at all, but only removes

those impurities which would have made the sugar dark.

If therefore we extract these by any other means it will do

equally well. If it be true, what the natives tell us,

that bark will not prevent the juice from fermenting some-

what in rainy weather (though that I doubt), if we are

compelled to use lime, it is just as well that we know how

to get it out. A nutissold in the bazaars called in Tamil

kaddukat, and used by the tanners, but it is not the true

galinut. On the addition of an infusion of the powdered

nuts to the strongly limed but clear liquor, a very abundant

precipitate took place. The liquor, being filtered, was as

brilliantly transparent as rock crystal, and all the sub-

sequent processes perfectly satisfactory. I now find that

the soiution or infusion of kaddukai should be added to the

liquor at the temperature of 140° to 160°, and that filtered

a minute after reaching the boiling point. The precipitate

was a reddish brown colour. The result of this experiment,

which I have repeated since, using another material, gave

the sugar No.2. The kaddukaz infusion gives a dark blue

or nearly black colour with the muriate of iron, and forms

a precipitate with the solution of gelatine. The following

day, to give this experiment its collateral test, I ground

twenty-five canes, which produced me two and ahalf gallons

of juice, at 9°, to which I added two drams of lime. On the

226 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. IL, Parr TI.

addition of the infusion of kaddukai just as perfect a —

precipitation occurred as with penz; after filtration it

threw up no scum whatever, and was nearly colourless.

Gallnuts are mentioned by Dr. Evans as one of the best

defecating agents. I confidently recommend a trial of this

to sugar planters, as I believe it to be of the last importance

to extract the lime, and for the above idea I am indebted

to the suggestion of a friend.

Before this I had ascertained a curious fact. Strange to

say, though so large an amount of lime is present turmeric

paper is not reddened unless the cream of lime is stirred up.

But on adding a very great excess, the penz will redden a

solution of turmeric. This was done till the liquor assumed

a light red colour. To this common alum was added

at 140°, until a bulky precipitate took place, and all colour

whatsoever disappeared. The liquor being filtered was

remarkably clear and pure, and notwithstanding we know

that the sulphate of potash is still present* and will

exercise a baneful effect on the liquor, it did not seem to do

so, but granulated freely. Perhaps the sulphate of potash

may pass into the molasses. I tried this plan with a solution

of very black cane sugar, and with the same effect, the

precipitation discharging nearly all the colour.

The idea of the last trial which I shall detail is taken from

a pamphlet by Mr. Gay. His words are: “ The addition of

tannate of lime and alum as the liquor came from the mill

would effectually prevent all fermentation, and gelatine

could be added during the succeeding process of clarification.”

I must here remark that I have frequently boiled liquor

defecated by bark, and though it made good sugar found it

possessed a certain thickness which I did not like, and an

unwillingness to part with its molasses. However, this idea

* Evans, p. 103.

No. 5.—1850.] © SUGAR MANUFACTURE. 2d

of gelatine, on being pointed out to me in Mr. Gay’s

pamphlet, seemed very applicable to our liquor. Being

already saturated with the peculiar principle of the bark, on

the addition of the gelatine a decided and very abundant

precipitate at once took place, which was all stopped by a

flannel filter, leaving a pure limpid fluid, which we all agree

in thinking cannot contain much besides sugar and the salts

(supposed to be of potash) peculiar to the cocoanut juice.

Though boiled in a quantity of only three pints, in a wretched

little earthen pot, which burned the liquor in all directions,

as they all do, the sugar No. 1 was the result, and the

molasses merely nominal,* while it was easy to see the

syrup would have mostly all grained on a second boiling.

This process I consider as the one in every respect the best,

aud I also recommend this to the cane planter. The

pounded fal potu, in sufficient quantity, I would leave

in the clarifier all the time the juice is running in from the

mill ; or if that were insufficient, a decoction or infusion

could be added. The gelatine must be mixed and the

liquor filtered, I think, below the boiling point, or even cold,

but that must be ascertained by experiment. The vessels

for clarifying must be of copper. I fully intend to prove

this point as soon as our present wet weather shall clear up.

Having written the above, I was favoured with the opinion

of a scientific friend on the subject, on which I have detailed

the experiment just described. He says he has been

studying the action of the bark, and does not think it

contains any tannin, for in the first place it shows no action

with iron, and moreover the precipitate which it forms with

gelatine is soluble in lime water. (This is true, for 1 have

proved it also.) Hesays further :—“ Iam inclined to think

that it contains a peculiar principle capable of throwing

* None of the samples of sugar I send have been drained for more

than two days.

O71 —87 H

228 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr IL..

down gelatine, but differing from tannin. I find that other

substances throw down gelatine; for instance, hematine,

the peculiar principle of brazil wood, does so, but the

precipitate is soluble in hot water. The kadukkdy doubtless.

contains tannin, and its precipitate is tannate of lime. I

tried, as you requested me, the gelatine ; the result was the

best sugar I have made, and the quantity also was more

satisfactory. A careful quantitative experiment is necessary

to determine the relative value of the bark and the chunam

toddy. ‘The lime certainly does favour the catalytic change

of the sugar into glucose, but probably it would not if

thrown down by the tannin before the application of heat.

Tanoin throws down almost every vegetable proximate

principle, and gelatine throws down albumen, so that I —

think with this we get rid of everything out of the toddy

except the sugar, the dextrine, and the salts. There is an

innocuous substance which precipitates gum, and probably

would dextrine also, but which from want of proper

apparatus I am unable to prepare ; it is silicate of potash.

The preparation of this compound is very easy and cheap,

and if it acts as I think it would, it would leave us just the

sugar and the salts.”

I have since tried some juice, substituting the rind of the

fruit of the pomegranate for the kadukkay. It had the same

effect exactly, and the result is excellent. The bark of the

ironwood tree I believe will also do, and perhaps many

other barks and nuts.

The addition of a true decolorising agent, such as animal

charcoal, to the liquor while boiling, effects a wonderful

improvement in the colour of the sugar, even in an open pan..

But as that would involve a second and far more tedious

filtration, in whichever way it is performed, it may be

doubtful whether we shall ever adopt it. However, we can

inanufacture the animal charcoal here as advantageously as.

—

No. 5.—1850.] SUGAR MANUFACTURE. = 5 229

in any place in Ceylon. I have fancied that even a small

flannel bag-full placed in the pan improved the grain of the

sugar in one or two trials, and I found the liquor passed

through and through the bag as it boiled.

The gravity of all the pani we have experimented on is

very nearly the same, being about 9°5° Beaume. Sometimes

the mouths of the mutties not having been well

protected a little rain water has got in, as we judge from a

suddenly increased quantity and lower gravity. On one or

two occasions the juice reached 8:9° Beaume. There is no

doubt therefore that in practice over a pound of Muscovado

sugar would be extracted from every gallon, and I myself

think more nearly a pound and a half, by the processes,

either of bark or lime, detailed above, and I think it not

unlikely that could the trees be kept constantly running

(which indeed they could) the extraordinary quantity of

180 to 200 pounds of sugar may be obtained annually from

every cocoanut tree. How much more ought to be obtained

the new publications on sugar making take great pains to

inform us, but none of them detail any method by which,

except in the laboratory of the chemist, they can really

state the true result to have been procured in practice.

Many speculations of different kinds of planting having

been undertaken in this Island, perhaps without due con-

sideration of itsadaptation to them, it is truly satisfactory

to have every day increasing evidence of the fact that this

country is at all events eminently fitted for the perfection

of the growth of the cocoanut tree. Here we cannot go

wrong, and therefore I consider the subject in this particular

rests on the solid foundation. Objections against all new

ideas are always raised, and. sometimes where we expected

to find encouragement we are met with a doubt. I have

heard it observed against the probability of the establish-

ment of a manufacture of sugar: “ Such great numbers of

H 2

230 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr II.

men would have to be employed that it would be a serious

objection.” Itis true that very numerous gangs will have

to be looked for, and probably brought from India. And

yet look at the Galle district. Only let a beginning be

made and a demand for labour created, the supply will soon

come, especially in a fertile, cheap, and abundant country

as ours is. And to the objection as to numbers, all I can

say is, that any scheme which shows that a great force of

Jabour, and perhaps also necessity for the employment of

European talent, is required, and can be profitably exerted

in the carrying out of any object, that object must surely be

deemed of some importance.

No. 5.—1850.] - sUGAR MANUFACTURE. 231

ON THE SAP OF THE COCOANUT

TREE, AND ITS MANUFACTURE INTO SUGAR.

By W. 8. Taytor, Esa.

(Read February 9, 1850.)

Av atime when there are complaints made of decreased

production of sugar in our West Indian Colonies, of the

failure of cane planting in the Madras Presidency, and of

the ill success which has attended some speculations of a

like nature in this colony,—when the futility of the means

adopted by the Hnglish for the abolition of slavery has been

gravely announced, whereby the sugar growers of Cuba and

Brazil are likely to acquire too great a predominance in the

market, and well nigh a monopoly of the article,—it will

prove encouraging to many who are interested in the general

welfare and prosperity of Ceylon to hear that its far famed

cocoanut palms are calculated to yield a large amount of

excellent sugar, the manufacture of which it is to be hoped

we shall ere long see established. When, too, it is con-

sidered what thousands of tons of sugar must be destroyed

by the distillation of the sweet sap of this palm into alcohol,

and the moral pestilence which this baneful liquor occasions,

it must be ardently desired by every philanthropic mind

that the sap, if taken at all, should be converted intoa

blessing in the form of sugar, instead of being perverted

into a curse in the shape of arrack. By this means we

should be entering the list against vice, and not only the

vice of intemperance and its concomitant evils of crime and —

suffering, but we should also be active rivals of the

232 JOURNAL, B.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. IL, Parr II.

pampered slave-owners, and directing a thoroughly practical

crusade against Negro slavery. Every consideration there-

fore both of profit and humanity stimulates us to carry out

this idea. Yet it seems singular that it should never have

been attempted before, as the sap, or “toddy” as it is

generally called, has been, Ipresume, from time immemorial

made into the form of jaggery, which is however a far

inferior mode of rendering it useful for purposes of domestic

economy, it being with difficulty prevented from deli-

quescing, while sugar, from its being in separate crystals

of considerable hardness, offers more resisiance to the

humidity of the atmosphere.

Having seen small samples of sugar made from the toddy,

{ determined about three months ago to try two young

trees, six years old and coming into bearing, to see what

quantity of sap they would yield, and whether the product

could be readily manufactured into a useful and marketable

article, and as far as the experiments have been carried

(only as yet on a small scale) the result is very satisfactory.

The natives have long been in the habit of making a very

superior kind of white jaggery, and therefore it was only

natural to suppose that if they could succeed in making it

either white or black (at least, some they make with lime

is dark brown) at their pleasure, any one accustomed to

sugar making could produce a superior article at once from

the tree, it being also quite easy, as has been proved here,

to make a good grained sugar from the jaggery, and even

from the common impure article manufactured at Point

Pedro from the palmyra toddy, used for binding fine

chunam work. :

There are several ways of taking the sap here, which it

may perhaps be useful to detail before proceeding to the

manufacture of the sugar: that is to say, the mode of

cutting the flower-stalk is the same inal]. cases, but 1 mean

No. 5.—1850.] | SUGAR MANUFACTURE. 233

as to what is put into the pots to precipitate the feculencies

and prevent fermentation. For drinking purposes alone it

is taken without anything being put into the pots, the main

point being then of course to get it to ferment as soon as

possible, when, if taken for instance at six o’clock in the

it is sourish early in the afternoon, in which

state it is drunk in considerable quantities, and is very

morning,

intoxicating. For this purpose it is taken from the tree

twice a day, the morning’s toddy being drunk in the

afternoon, and the evening’s at night. Limed toddy can

however be kept till three or four o’clock p.m. without

change. The fermented toddy is sold regularly in licensed

taverns,—taverns which I need hardly say are perfect foct

of idleness and vice, gambling, &c. No one can tap his

own tree to get the pure sweet toddy, were he inclined to

drink it, without paying one pound a year to the ‘“ toddy

renter.” There is no tax however on taking it for making

jaggery or sugar, under certain restrictions, 2. ¢., with an

infusion of bark or lime, which of course are supposed to

render it undrinkable. This is as it should be, and with

such a law we can work with tolerable freedom. Perhaps,

however, the sugar manufacturer might be allowed by special

license to take it without bark or lime, if he found he could

make a purer article without them.

For jaggery the best method is to put some pounded

bark into the pots (mutt:). This bark is called

tumpdlam paddai in Tamil, and fal-potu in Sinhalese.

It is highly astringent, and the effects of its tannin is to

coagulate and precipitate a white pasty sediment, and

thereby prevent fermentation. This sediment is thrown

away as worthless, but there is also some sediment found in

the fermented toddy pots, which is used as a yeast for

raising wheaten bread. Lime also is a powerful agent, as

better not to use it, since it acts too strongly on the sugar

234 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou II., Parr II.

contained in the sap; the proportion of it, however, can be

nevertheless so adjusted as not to have a very destructive

effect ; still, it generally causes the liquor to get more or less

dark-coloured in the boiling, unless it be extracted by

employing tannin or albumen, as will be elsewhere explained

in my brother’s paper on the manufacture of sugar, &c.

The toddy is called in Tamil fa/lé when it is used for

drinking, and panz when it 1s intended to make jaggery or

sugar. To obtain it the same method is practised here as in

other parts of the Island. Sometimes trees which are not

good bearers of nuts are selected for this purpose, which is

merely done I presumein order that they may not be so

unprofitable as if they only bore a few nuts—though a good

bearing tree, one with large well-developed pdlarkal or

flower stalks, is decidedly the best, and will of course yield

more sap than an inferior tree. Whatever tree may be

selected then, it is necessary that the pd/az should be well

matured and nearly ready to burst into blossom, at which

time only it is certain to have a good flow of saccharine sap.

The toddy drawer, called Na/avan, a peculiar caste, watches

for this juncture, and at the proper time he ascends

the tree—in the case of mine a mere step off the ground on

to the lowest branch; but if the tree be lofty it is more

difficult. In this case he makes a small circlet or fillet of

palmyra leaf, leather, or coir rope, in which he inserts his

feet to prevent their slipping apart ; then, with the soles of

his feet firmly pressed against the trunk and his arms

closely embracing it, he alternately bends and straightens

his back and thus climbs up the tall, snake-like stem. In

the southern and western parts of the Island they do not

require to ascend every tree separately, as there are ropes

stretched from one to the other, along which the men pass

safely and quickly at a great height from the ground, and

this enabies them to attend to about fifty trees a day each

No. 5.—1850.] | SUGAR MANUFACTURE. 7 235: —

man,* whereas here, twenty to twenty-five trees are con-

sidered aboutthe mark. At Galle especially, wherea great,

many trees are rented for arrack in the same plantation,

this is easily managed, but at Batticaloa very few trees

comparatively speaking are devoted to toddy, there being

such a steady demand for the nuts, and no arrack distilled

here, that people prefer to let their trees bear. The

Nalavan is provided with a cylindrical-shaped mallet, called

tadda-pudde, made of a hard dark wood called niéka, neatly

turned, and a sharp, broad bladed crooked knife called

palaik-katti. Arrived at the top of the tree he seats him-

self quite leisurely on one of the broad branches, resting the

mutti, before tying it on to the palaz,in the hollow of

another, which seems just adapted to the purpose. At first

be merely beats the palai well, once a day, in the morning,

and after the first time, and again after each beating, he

binds the palai firmly round with fillets of cocoanut and

palmyra leaves, to prevent its bursting into flowers. On

the third morning he slices off the horny tip of the spatha,

or sheath of the flower-stalk, exposing to view the young

flowers and perhaps one or two young nuts, which it is

hardly necessary to observe are formed by a kind of

cryptogamous generation in the mysterious recesses of the

pala. The flowers therefore which are seen on the

numerous small side stalks which branch out of the main

flower-stem are, I believe, the male flowers, which have to

fecundate the embryo nuts. However this may be, all this

process is interrupted by the first cut of the trenchant

blade. The same evening the man slices a little more, and

after that regularly twice a day, but he does not always

beat it, only every three days, once in the morning. I

* T am told a man will actually take the toddy from two hundred trees,.

but probably with assistance.

236 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vow. IL., Parr II.

suppose this is done to bruise the young flowers and nuts,

and prevent their forming and exhausting the sap, which

has to flow through the main and side stalks for our

purposes perhaps somewhat different from what nature

intended. Still it is quite as allowable to take the produce

of the tree in this form as to let it mature its nuts with all

their complicated structure of coir, shell, and oily kernel,—

which one would suppose would task the tree quite as much

as parting so readily with its sap can do,—which may in one

sense be said to save the tree a great deal of trouble. By

pursuing the above-mentioned treatment regularly, in from

twelve to fifteen days, or less, the sap begins to exude from

the sliced surface. At first, and for two or three days, itis

too small in quantity to be worth collecting, and it is

eagerly consumed by bees, wasps, and ants. In fact, I

observed mine oozing out sufficiently to attract the insects

on the seventh day, but the natives generally allow till the

twelfth or fifteenth day before tying on the mutt:, by

which they may lose some, which perhaps we could not

afford to do on a large scale. Lobserved the palazkal began

to drip pretty freely on the ninth day, on the evening of

which the mutti were tied on, and on the following

morning they were taken down, and after being strained

the liquor measured a pint and three quarters from the two

trees, two pdlaikal on each tree being cut. After this the

mutt. were taken down and fresh ones tied on twice a day,

no more tapping or beating being required, only regularly

taking off a thin slice twice a day, to form a fresh surface

for the sap to exude from, otherwise it would soon become

clogged up and would not run at all; and this is continued

till the pala: is sliced away to a mere stump; and this

obviously depends on the length and size of the pdlai—if

a short one, as on a very young tree, it may be exhausted in

from twenty to thirty days, but if a good sized pajai on an

No. 5.—1850.] = SUGAR MANUFACTURE. 237

older tree, it may last as much as forty days, or perhaps a day

or two more or less. Bark toddy (paddaz-pdéni) is taken

from the tree twice a day, the mutte being emptied,

washed, and burnt out with a little dry grass or straw and

kept for the next time, and clean mutt? immediately put

on. When lime is used, however, it preserves the sap much

longer from fermentation than the bark, for which limed

mutti are not taken down till twenty-four hours have

elapsed ; butit is requisite for the man to ascend the tree in

the evening and take off the mutt: for a moment when he

slices the palackal to make a fresh surface, and then replace

them, only taking them down for boiling the sap into

jaggery on the following morning.

I found that the trees soon began to yield an increased

quantity of sap, which was boiled down to sugar or syrup in

different methods, as explained by my brother. For thirty

days I gave the two trees a fair trial, only ten palaikal being

cnt on each, and the sap increased from 34 in a day or two

to 7, 8, and even 9 pints a day from the two trees, when

towards the thirteenth day it fell off to 5 or 6 pints. The

average for the thirty days was 63 pints, or 33; pint from

each tree perday. In the meantime two other palazkal had

been cut on one of the trees and one on the other, which

gradually came into yielding, and I gave the two trees

another trial ; this time for thirty-one days, during which

period the yield increased from 5 or 6 pints to 9, 10, and

113 pints a day ; and the average from the two trees for the

thirty-one days was 83 pints, or 4, pints per tree per day.

Since the end of the thirty-one days—/. eé., about the middle

and latter end of November, when there was only one palai

running on the smaller tree—it has frequently given 3

pints, which seems an immense quantity, as, if three or four

had been running together at that rate, the tree would have

given from 9 pints toa gallon anda half aday! At all

238 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. I]., Parr II.

events, | am inclined to think that a gallon a day is but a

reasonable yield to expect from each tree when arrived at

a proper size and maturity and accustomed to yield its sap.

The quantity of sap yielded by the two young trees in sixteen

days from seven palaikal was 4393 pints, or 547 gallons, or

7% gallons from each palaz. Add one eighth more pdlai,

which was matured but not cut, but might have been made

to yield within the time, we have about 185 gallons in a

year from each tree. These two trees give, say, 55 gallons in

two months ; one tree 272 gallons in the same time, or 165

gallons ina year. Add one eighth for a pdlai not cut, we

have 1853 gallons per tree perannum. Perhaps 200 gallons

from a good large tree might not be too much to expect.

A greater quantity would probably have been obtained had

we gone on cutting the palachkal as fast as they were ready,

but I wished to stop to prove an assertion I heard, that after

tapping a young tree fora short time it would bear nuts

more abundantly than one which was not tapped. And I

must say that, so far from the operation having tended to

exhaust them, as some might imagine, the newly-developed

palackal are larger and longer than any previous ones, and

promise abundance of fruit, while it is not less probable that

they would have yielded more toddy than any other had

they been tapped in their regular turn. From the rains

having set in, and other circumstances, I am waiting some

time before recommencing toddy-drawing operations.

It israther difficult to come to a decided conclusion of

how much a tree will giveinayear. The quantity of toddy

must of course be proportioned to the number of palatka/ that

come out ona tree. Ask any native and he will say the

trees get one pdlai and one new shoot, or branch, every

month, but there would seem to be no fixed rule for this, as

more come out on some trees within a given time,and more

on one treethan on another. I think two a month, or three

No. 5.—1850. | SUGAR MANUFACTURE. 239

in two months, is much more likely to bethe rate, but then

some trees grow much faster than others. One of my trees

matured and would have burst six palaikal between August

28 and November 20 ; the other tree only four in that time.

The sap, or pen?, with bark infused, gives a much

whiter jaggery than that which is limed, the latter, as made

by the native method, being nearly black and full of

impurities. Very few of the natives, however, take bark

toddy, as they consider it more troublesome and expensive,

though the jaggery makes amends for that by fetching a

higher price.

The difference between the preparation of jaggery and

sugar is merely this. For jaggery the liquor is boiled

till it is extremely thick, and it is kept boiling and well

agitated with the ladle to prevent its burning till it is

quite inspissated, so as to be merely kept in a semi-fluid

state by the heat : it is then turned into moulds (generally

cocoanut shells), when it immediately cools into a hard

concreted mass without any distinguishable grain ; whereas

sugar (after being properly clarified) requires only to be

boiled very carefully, yet quickly, till it attains a certain

degree of tenacity, which is known to the experienced boiler

as the “point.” It is then taken off, “skipped” into

another vessel called the cooler, in which it ought to part

with its heat gradually : so they are generally made of wood,

and this ensures its forming a good strong grain. It does

not, however, become quite dry till it is transferred into a

second vessel, constructed so as to drain off the superfluous

syrup which will not grain ; and this is termed the molasses.

This will sometimes grain on being boiled again, and it isa

curious fact that the molasses from cocoanut, or coco sugar,

even when the liquor has been very highly, perhaps

excessively, limed, grains much more freely than that from

cane sugar ; and this process may even be repeated several

240 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr II.

times with a clear gain of sugar each time, till at length

the remaining molasses is so trifling in quantity as would

hardly require a still to work it off into rum (or arrack,

whichever it might be termed), which is so necessary

an adjunct to a cane-sugar making establishment. Never-

theless, it is probable a small still may be maintained with

advantage to entirely prevent waste by the accidental sour-

ing of the liquor, working off whatever molasses there might.

be, &c.; but as to skimmings, the liquor can be so easily

clarified, being much more manageable than cane-juice—

there is hardly anything to skim off from the first boiling

of the “ skip.”

I have, since writing the above, heard so many statements

that the continual drawing of toddy would injure the trees,

that perhaps it may oblige us to intermit our operations for

three months, during the season in which the hot land ene

blows—say, June, July, and August.

No. 5.—1850. | “THE ELU LANGUAGE. 3 241

ON THE ELU LANGUAGE, ITS POETRY AND

1S EOHTS:

By James Dz Atwis, Esa.

(Read February 23, 1850.)

CoNTENTS.

Te apparent inattention to the study of the Sinhalese—The present

low state of learning in the towns—The lu defined—The derivation

of the terms EHlu and Sinhala—The apparent difference between the

old and the new styles in prose accounted for and exemplified—The

general destruction of the Sighalese literary records—That Kiu and

Sinhalese are synonymous terms proved—Authorities cited—That the

Klu and the Sanskrit had one common origin—The Sinhalese alphabet

analysed—The formation of the letters pointed out—The Sanskrit and

Pali characters embodied in the Sinhalese alphabet—The sound of f

found in the Sanskrit—Prose writings in the Sinhalese classified—

Examples—The Sinhalese poetry defended against slights with which

it is treated by Europeans—Similarity of thought between English and

Sinhalese poetry instanced—Translation of English and Sinhalese

poetry—The translated Holy Scriptures—The different kinds of poetry

—Hxamples and rules of versification—Three diagrams—The 60

poem with a translation—Yuvala verses—An attempt to ascertain the

date of ‘ Sidat Sangar4va’’—Several species of puns in poetry, withexam-

ples—Acrostics—The twenty-six Sinhalese epithets for Buddha in

general critically translated and explained—Sinhalese dialogues ex-

plained and illustrated—A few rules of Sinhalese prosody—The eight

rythmical feet in poetry—Native prejudices against some—Hxamples—

‘The evil characters, &c,—The diagram called ¢QaCE explained—The

four Yavahan—Hxamples—Brief notices of the poets and their works,

with an attempt to ascertain their dates—“ Kavyasékara ”—“ Selalihinie

sandésa ” — “ Parawisandésa’’ — ‘“‘Moggallayana Patipanchika” — the

“ Pera Kumba Sirita ”—“ Kowulsandésa,” (Zo be continued.)

242 JOURNAL, B.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr II.

INTRODUCTORY REMARKS.

Iv is not easy to explain the reason why so little attention

is paid to the study of Hlu by the Sinhalese. Many are

the conjectures on this subject. Whilst some, it is said,

have not the necessary time at their disposal, others com-

plain of a want of teachers and books. Numbers having

the means and time necessary for its study deprecate it as

little less than useless, Others, though possessed of all the

desirable advantages, devote their time to the study exclu-

sively of the dead languages, ill-acquainted with, if not

ignorant of, their own.

It is matter for regret to the writer that the Sinhalese

should so far neglect their own language ; that though they

use it in their everyday intercourse, and thereby shut them-

selves out from the possibility of acquiring a correct

idiomatic knowledge of a foreign tongue, they, or at least

the greater portion of the rising generation, should yet be

incapable of carrying on an intercourse for any length of

time without introducing Portuguese, Dutch, or Hnglish

terms—a practice which, I regret, is gaining ground in the

towns of this Island. I am however free to admit that with

the introduction of European institutions, manufactures,

&c., European words and names before unknown to the

Sinhalese must necessarily obtain amongst them: as for

instance, MS@@saD, Portuguese, ‘a watch’ ; Ye@C, boedel

in Dutch, ‘estate; wsNDw@mSBs, Hnglish, ‘ custom-

house,’ &c. But how can anyone therefore justify the admix-

ture of pure English words with the Sinhalese—e. g¢.,

G1 02 trick banat play DOS for G1 Ges GOaIaat dG,

‘He has played a nice trick.’ The writer has with

regret observed the ridicule and contempt with which Euro-

peans have frequently treated language such as the above,

and that to his readers will furnish a satisfactory apology for

the introduction of the subject in these pages, besides an

No. 5.—1850. | THE ELU LANGUAGE. 243

anxiety on his part to bring the subject prominently before

his native readers, with a view to the discouragement of

a practice which exists to a lamentable extent--a practice,

too, from which no good results, since they who use a

mixture of English terms neither think in English, and

thereby exercise an easy mode of acquiring the idiom

of that language, nor habituate themselves to a correct and

fluent expression of their native tongue.

From such a state of things—I had almost said the de-

generacy in literature—one would be led to believe that the

Sinhalese language is defective. Butthisis notso.* Such

a belief would be inconsistent with the existence of books

treating fully on a variety of subjects. It is said, however,

that the books are written in Elu and not in the Sinhalese.

This, again, isa mistake. Thee is, in fact, no difference

between the Sinhalese and Elu. Owing to a plurality of

vulgar terms which the natives use in their everyday inter-

course, and also to a belief that “the dialect in which the

Singhalese works are written is called Elu,”+ Huropeans

have been led to this supposition.{ But they are both

appellations for one and the same language, although it is

true that from time to time the Hlu, like the English, has

* “The Eloo has undoubtedly given birth to the vernacular language

of this country. It appears to claim great antiquity, and being derived

from the Sanskril, a great proportion of the words may be traced to

that source. This language is copious, and must, in former periods,

have been cultivated to a high degree of perfection ; it is regular in its

grammatical construction, and possesses most of the elegancies of

style ; and, from the numerous works which are still extant, it is evident

that it is capable of being used in every species of composition.” —

Clough’s “ Singhalese-English Dictionary,” preface.

t Vide CG. A. 8. Journal, 1846-47, No. 2, p. 103.

it The Rev. B. Clough, in his “Singhalese-English Dictionary,”

p. 799, gives the following definition:—“‘@a0, the Elu or ancient

language of Ceylon.”

o1—87 I

(244 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Part II.

undergone a slight change.* Again, it is incorrect to say

* DAVES O86 Sodas

EQ2D EOI edodssoaF

EDDEOHSA Gotass

asda 6o198%8Ha.—Swabhasalankare.

‘Although such tricks (of composition) previously existed, it is

improper to attempt them now; for, unlike the language of the gods

(Sanskrit), the Sinhalese is not without a change from time to time.”

The change here alluded to consists in the present disuse of certain

words now obsolete, the introduction of many particles which were

anciently omitted in composition, and in the abundance of certain

decorations of style which were formerly avoided. The following, which

I have elsewhere translated, will explain the difference :—

EXAMPLE 1.—8H MBASAIB ADH AOSGY HOD BSond som

8386 ACCHIE@>, when rendered into the modern, is read as follows :—

SH AEB OoNMndg~—godS a KBodsieng ANdagna HEdzEn0s3

OD omaSs ¢5ED eDamdeSasd Disionss.

EXAMPLE 2.86 M NHS D6Ea, OnODCOCMS FO8H : SGD ASS

DEVOS, QDABSE QooaaOac%, in modern prose reads as follows :—

HENIOH ONOOOGS OMOs70OB3 onodG QD PAdDMMdst

92) OSESHS O86 DED FOO Msn Qaddycudsdosiad

DESAI OAD OEA.

In the first example, sd is the Sinhalese for the Sanskrit word

@ ©, which is now used. Ihave, however, given m:8o6s%an2), whichis

more frequently used. A396 is of less frequent use than yE6, andAeE,

the substantive form of the adjective @@, is obsolete, because, perhaps,

the same is used for cats. O@, as a term of comparison, is now obsolete.

In the second example, a6, “‘ feet” (a word which occurs in the first

as the verb for “ walking’’), is obsolete except in poetry. Y6@s, in

common parlance, either an ironical or sarcastic expression, is frequently

used in poetry. 1223, a term of comparison, was anciently, and is still,

omitted in poetry, as in @mgQsvaqgo for ADI 21923 sod; in

prose, ‘the ocean of youth.” ‘The decorations of style to which I have

alluded, and which are particles and honorifics, are the following :—a@&,

OP8, 2. D198, 8B, a, SBS, 2, VG, FRA TIVHsION’, 6, Ke.

From the above examples it will be perceived that the modern prose

is much more redundant in its style than the ancient, of which a few

passages occur in the “ Sidatsangarawa” and “Lakunumina.” My own

suspicions are that this arose from the decline of the Sinhalese as a

language after the general destruction of literary records in the reigns of

several kings, and also from a frequent reference to, and a close imitation

of, the paraphrases and commentaries, being the great bulk of prose,

remnants of an ancient date which ex-necessitate adopt the redundant

style—a style ill-adapted to other species of composition.

No. 5.— 1850. | “THE ELU LANGUAGE, 245

that the ancient books were written in Elu and not in

Sinhalese. The “Sidatsangardwa,’ an Elu work (assum-

ing that the ancientness of its date is the criterion which

should decide the question)—a work indeed written in the most

concise ancient style—designates the language of which

it treats DHCD GHBADE, “the colloquial Sinhalese’ ; and

“ Namawaliya’’ (which is a vocabulary of terms contained

in all confessedly Elu works) calls the language of which

it is a dictionary “the Sinhalese.”’

SE ADzE BSD SnOBOs BwHMe.

‘“T sing in rhyme Namawali Sinhalese.”

Now, those who maintain that an ancient obsolete dialect

was the 80 different from the &@, will not deny that

the two books above quoted are in that so-called dialect.*

How then will they who give the two words different mean-

ings, reconcile their opinion with the positive assertion of

the learned writers themselves as above cited, both of

whom designate the language of which they wrote “the

Sinhalese”? ?

Some writers have also defined the word &©@ to be that

dialect in which the poetical works of the Sinhalese are

written,{ doubtless intending to draw a distinction between

the poets of old and those of a comparatively recent date.

This is incorrect also. Anyone who will be at the trouble

* ¢ Bemanad or &Sammsogenc—A Grammar of the Eilw or

Ancient Language of Ceylon.”

«¢ At a much later stage of my proceedings another native production

came into my possession, the «)0@ Oa, a vocabulary of Liu nouns.”

—Clough’s “ Dictionary,” preface, vol. II., p. xix., p. 733.

+ “Their scientific writings are generally to be found in Sanskrit ;

their religious writings in Pali; whilst their poetry is in a dialect of its

own, the Elu.”—C. A.S8. Journal, vol. L., p. 36.

“2S game had been composed to facilitate the study of the

purest Llu authors, especially the poets.” — Clough, J. c., vol. II., p. xix.

246 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou IL, Parr ET.

to compare together all the poetical works of the Sinhalese

will find that they are all (with the exception of 4 few in

blank verse) written in the same poetical style now used

amongst the literary Sinhalese, and that there is no real

difference approaching to anything like a dialect between

any twoof them. Indeed, I fail to perceive any difference of

dialect between Totagamuma, the father of poetry after “the

destruction”’ to which allusion has already been made, and-

the celebrated Miripenne of the present day. It is how-

ever possible that several words which occur in the old

poetical works are no longer in use. This, I apprehend, is

not a sufficient reason to justify the conclusion that the so-

called old dialect was not the Sinhalese ; for, otherwise, we

may with equal reason say that Milton and Shakespeare

were not English poets.

But I trust the question may be satisfactorily disposed of

by an inquiry into what the poets themselves called the

language or dialect which they wrote. For if (as it is

supposed) there be a difference between Elu and Sinhalese,

and, moreover, if the first is an obsolete dialect succeeded by

the second, the old writers alone could have designated that

which they wrote the Elu. Far from this being the case,

some of the old writers have called the language in which

they sang the Sinhalese ; and some of the modern have

designated it the Elu. And very often the same writer has

given both the appellations. A reference to books will

clearly show that—of which, however, I have no doubt—‘the

Sinhalese and Elu are synonymous terms, and have always

been used as such, notwithstanding any slight changes that

may have taken place from time to time in the construction

of sentences, or in the formation of words, or the elision of

letters in the language of the Sinhalese.

Having but few books to which I can at once have

No. 5.—1850. | THE ELU LANGUAGE. 247

recourse, I shall quote but few passages in addition to the

two extracts already given :—

1. o© B€odEsy SOc osy.— Lakunusara.

“ Thus is the Hu to be known.” (Before 1415 a.p.)

BawaesB Oa ocoVod.—lb.

‘They thus occur in the Sinhalese.”

2. Mao YPOOdSY Veat schie.— Kaviyaséhare.

“T dosing a littlein the Hu language.”’ (1415 a.D.)

3. LAist PO@dsy SOS eared.—Loévedasangrahava.

“That I have sung in Elw.”’ (1472 a.v.)

4. €8SOS OMNESTS BHEDRS DEAOS 38 OO

ES - Kusajataka.

“ With a view to Niwana devoid of death and

decrepitude, I have composed ‘Kusada’ in the

Sinhalese language.”’ (1610 a.D.)

5). BARRBS soMd5sy BaP sehre.— Subasite.

“In Sinhalese rhyme do I sing.” (1612 a.p.)

6. OMddes DGsy HB &OOse EQ.

“ Hlu stanzas by the name of Makaraddaja.”’

(1768 A.D.)

7. 028 Dao Caad.— Kavminikondola.

“The Llu language sweetly rhymed.” (1771 a.p.)

6-8. AHOzHES DHADAG OHORESY OS.—aQMadsIn

Ot.

‘‘T have rhymed in pure Hu ‘the offering in the

river.’”? (Kiramba, 1807 a.p.)

9, G©8808sT MADOG Os SSMqs.—Sryabas-

maldama.

“T have rhymed in several tunes in S¢nhalese.

(Kiramba, 1821 a.p.)

10. &aa&s3 ad20.—Nikinihata.

‘ Rhymed in Stnhalese.” (1882 a.p.)

248 JOURNAL, R.A.S, CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr II.

11. DaSsy &0X80.—Kavmini pahana.

“ Rhymed in flu.” (1840.*)

An inquiry into the derivation of the words &© and

&o«@ will also furnish us with further proof in support of

the position advanced by me.f

The term &0 (Liu) is derived from &o@M@ (Sinhala), which

mutated into 2HE, &@, oe©, and ome, produce Ho.

But scholars are by no means agreed upon this definition.

According to some it may be from & and GES (es), t

* Since the above extracts are nearly every one of them from the

Sinhalese poets, and lest the reader may therefore be inclined to the

supposition that H/u is the designation for a so-called “ poetical dialect,”

the following prose selection from the introduction to the Pansiya-panas

Jdtaka may not be out of place :—

EQdsndo 3 haa B01 an1dd6d) AdOISI GaQ sam

MOID BNYOSO OBA Enssy SKBot As ons Kat OE giBiaqgs.

“It is proper that good people, having given their ears and bent their

minds, should hear the E/u version of ‘The History of Lives,’ composed

without departing from the method of the writer of the Afuwawas.”

7 The following passage is from the Pradipikdva: See oe

HDS BsemsNe MO6ass ?

“At the place where mention is made of the ‘Sihala language,’

what can Sinhala language mean ?”’

The writer, after explaining why the Sinhalese were called Sinhala and

this Island was called Sinhaladwipa, proceeds to answer the inquiry thus :—

aG<od OOKO]A Yononl OlaerReonsy Rasciodde, Doadst

O® BOE OCwxneg Ynow! Boe wagonsd Ras) Eads; OD

Sad ms Bae HisHN® a2.

‘As people who are natives (of a place) speak in (their) native

tongue, so likewise the people of this Sinhala country use the Sinhala

speech. Their language is calied the Sinhala language.”

The above furnishes us with almost conclusive proof against the

position that the Elu, but not the Simhalese, was the ancient language

of the Ceylonese. For, if according to Gurujugémi, the writer of the

“ Pradipikawa,” both Wijayo’s followers and their language were called

Sinhala from the period of their landing in Ceylon, it is impossible to

maintain that E/u considered as a dialect different from Sinhala was

“the ancient language of the Sinhalese.”

t OmMBsy BOOMOES MB OMCEDAKA.—Kavyamuktahare.

“ Have I in Heladiv (Lanka’s) language with pleasure finished my

song P”

No. 5.—1850. | THE ELU LANGUAGH. | 249

“ Lanka,” the last word contracted and added to the

particle © producing 8@S or &O. It is however to be.

remarked that the first of these definitions has not only the

support of grammar, but the authority of the best scholars

of the day; is apparently more correct than the second ;

and that both support the view that Hlu and Sinhala are

terms for one and the same language without distinction of

dialects, in that there is no difference between the two

roots, since the one has reference to the nation (ome *)

and the other to the Island (@sv&) which that nation

inhabits. But a question has been very frequently proposed,

which has been, I believe, never satisfactorily answered :

“ Whatis the Elu language? Is it a dialect of the Sanskrit ?”’

We have already seen that the Hu was no other than

the Sinhalese language: but the question still remains,

“Ts it a dialect of the Sanskrit?”

Though at the risk of incurring the censure of some who

maintain the affirmative, I shall venture upon laying down

my own humble views on the subject, counter, I regret to

say, to those of many whom I respect.

Let us first inquire “ What is a dialect?” It is defined

by several lexicographers thus: “ Drauuct, dialectique F.,

dialectica L., dialetike G., is a manner of speech peculiar

to some part of the country, and differing from the manner

used in other parts, yet all using the same radical language

as to the substance of it.”” Now, those who maintain that

the Sinhalese is a dialect of the Sanskrit, do so upon the

ground that many words are derived into the former from

that rich and invaluable source the Sanskrit. But this is

no more correct than that the Portuguese which abounds

with Latin terms and the English with French are

«The name given in Ceylon subsequent to the landing of Wijayo,

from &o@eé9, lion, and the root ©, to destroy.”—Turnour.

250 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [VouL. II., Parr II,

respectively dialects of the languages from whence such terms

are derived. If also the premise for the conclusion under

consideration be correct, we may reasonably affirm that the

Sinhalese is also a dialect of the Magahadi or Pali, for

words derived from the Pali into the Sinhalese are as

generally abundant as those from the Sanskrit. Indeed, the

author of the “ Sidatsangardwa’”’ says :—

‘“‘ Words may be divided into three classes: (i.) Basd, purely

native Elu words ; (ii.) @&@, words common to Elu, Pali, and

Sanskrit ; and (iii.) &@®, words derived from the Pali and Sanskrit,

but slightly different from the original by their adoption into

the Elu.”

Upon the above process of reasoning we may well conclude

that the Sinhalese is a dialect of the Sanskrit and PaAli.

But this is absurd, if on no other ground, upon a view of

the definition with which we have set out. For, since the

EKlu has words of its own, and words, too, which, though

bearing some affinity to, are not derived from, the Sanskrit,

they cannot be pronounced to be the same radical language

as to “the substance of it.’* :

Again, a language and the dialect of that language are not

diverse, but one and “the same radical language’’: e. g.,

the Aftic, the Zonic, the Doric, and the Aolic, are dialects

of the same radical language, the Greek, and agree with

each other in the general principles of declensions, con-

jugations, &c., but, I believe, differ from one another in

spelling or pronunciation, or both—variations which, in the

words of our definition, affect merely the “manner of

speech” and “‘the manner used.” The Sinhalese is however

different from the Sanskrit in more than one substantial

point. A great portion of the language is not derived from

the Sanskrit: the Sinhalese has but two genders, whereas the

Sanskrit has three: in the former, the verbs are not conju-

gated as in the latter; norare the roots the same in both,

The changes which words undergo in the Sinhalese aré

No. 5.—1850.] THE ELU LANGUAGE. 251

altogether upon a process different from, and less certain

than, that in the Sanskrit. The declensions are also differ-

ent in the Sinhalese from the Sanskrit, the dual being

unknown to the former, &c. If further it can be shown

that the Sinhalese is capable of being written without an

admixture of Pali and Sanskrit terms,* I apprehend there

will be no difficulty in establishing my position, which is

this : that the Sinhalese bears an affinity to the Sanskrit,

and that they are both cognate languages, deriwed from one

and the same source, which is perhaps now irrecoverably

lost.

If, as I have once heard, it be maintained, because cer-

tain words in one language bear affinity to others of like

signification in another language, that therefore the former

must be and is a dialect of the latter, I fear we shall be

driven to the absurdity of pronouncing the Sinhalese to be

a dialect of the English,f and the Sanskrit a dialect of the

Latin. For “the Sanskrit language,” to quote from Sir

William Jones (vide his works, vol. I, p. 26), “whatever be

its antiquity, is of wonderful structure: more perfect than

the Greek, more copious than the Latin, and more exqui-

sitely refined than either, yet bearing to both of them a

stronger affinity, both in the roots of verbsand in the forms

of grammar, than could possibly have been produced by

accident —so strong, indeed, that no phzlologer could examine

them all three mithout believing them to have sprung from one

common source, which perhaps no longer exists.”

* The writer’s acquaintance with the Sanskrit and P4li is indeed

inadequate to illustrate this part of the subject with an example; but

upon the authority of the “Sidatsangarawa,” it is to be presumed thata

language of which two-thirds are nzpan and tasama, is capable of being

expressed without a mixture of the Sanskrit, &c.

+ £. g., lop, O@ ; door, O66; mud, OB; water, DBO; hour,

ODIa ; serpent, 8; new, HD; way, GD; name, H®; &e.

252 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. IT, Parr II.

Just so with the Sinhalese. The affinity which it bears

to the Sanskrit is great, so that the conclusion is not that

the former is a dialect of the latter, but that they had one

common origin. This view seems to be confirmed by the

opinion of Dr. Stephenson, who, in a paper read before the

Royal Asiatic Society ‘On the Maharatta Language, on its

connection with the other spoken dialects of India, and on

its derivation from the Sanskrit, Persian, and other sources,”’

says: “It was thought at one time that ail the spoken

dialects of India were merely corruptions of the Sanskrit ;

and although many words were found in those dialects

which could not be referred to that source, it was supposed

that those words had merely crept in by reason of the

barbarism and carelessness of the speakers, who introduced

them from ignorance of the correct terms. This opinion,

however, lost ground as our acquaintance with the native

languages increased : and it is now pretty generally admit-

ted that those of the south of the peninsula at Jeast are of

origin quite distinct from the Sanskrit, and that they have

admitted words of that language, not from a want of native

terms, but from the influence of religion, all their orthodox

writings being composed in Sanskrit.”

Now, the Sinhalese is unquestionably an Indian dialect ;

and Dr. Stephenson conceives that the case is the same,

though in a less degree, with the other languages of India ;

that in all of them the Sanskrit is grafted on an aboriginal

language ; and that, proceeding from the north, it diminishes

in quantity as we go southwards, becoming scarcely any-

thing in the vernacular Tamil: in the same way as in

Hurope the influence of the Latin, which is predominant in.

the south, decreases as one approaches Britain and Germany.

To the Elulanguage, then, which is the Ceylonese or Sinha-

lese, are known ten vowelsand twenty consonants. Thevowels

are subdivided into Og or @@® “short,” and @doz “long.”

No. 5.—1850.] THE ELU LANGUAGE. 7 253

In fact, the short vowels, ¢, 9, 6, &, and ®, are rendered

long thus: ~, & (or &), Gu, 28, and ©. Hach of the twenty

consonants, 2, H, %, O, ®, £6,* MH, 6, WD, 8, B, ©, 8, 5, E,

®, 6, &, 6, except o (some of which are otherwise written

to produce corresponding aspirate sounds, but which are

not here reckoned), may be so expressed as to produce all

the sounds of the vowels, both long and short. Thus, take,

é. g., the first consonant 2). It contains the sound of «.

Render it 28, it produces the sound @; render it a, it

produces @; render it @s, it produces &; render it @%&bo,

it produces ®. So likewise are the five long vowel sounds

produced by rendering 23 into @, 23, a, oat, oad. The

other consonants may in like manner be varied, except the

last °, which, being immutable, and having no vowel sound

associated with it, cannot be uttered without the help of a

vowel sound, and it is usualiy expressed in the alphabet with

the first vowel, thus, ¢. The nineteen consonants thus

produce ten times nineteen, or one hundred and ninety

sounds. Add to this number the unchangeable consonant o

and the ten vowels, and we then have two hundred and one,

the total number of sounds which compose the Sinhalese _

alphabet. These, according to the author of the “Sidat-

sangarawa,’ are all the symbols which are necessary for a

correct expression of the Hlu; yet we find two letters or

sounds exclusively Elu which are not included by the

grammarian in the above number. They are ¢z and &;,

and are the vowels by whose assistance the changeable

nineteen consonants are rendered 2z and 4%; Gz &:, Ke.

Thus, by adding ¢z and ¢z and twice nineteen consonant

-* The general use of this gutteral sound must here be explained,

since there is another dental, 20, having the same sound. <9 is used

after 6 or @, thus: adam “feet”; RS@<— “Buddha.” But where

the 6 or @ is not in the same syllable with <s, the dental should be

used, as in 6206 “gods and men,” and e@ae@ “last name.” |

254 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr II.

sounds which are formed by their assistance to the two

hundred and one sounds to which I have already called the

reader’s attention, we obtain the two hundred and forty-

one sounds in the Sinhalese language.

Beside the above, it must be remembered that some of the

consonants have different forms producing corresponding

aspirate sounds. They are not used in the EHlu, except in

expressing words of a foreign origin, and are therefore

omitted in the “Sidatsangarawa.” But since they are

essential to a correct expression of the Péli and Sanskrit

(languages which the Sinhalese anciently used in common

with the Elu), and also of tabava words (words derived into

Elu from either the Pali or Sanskrit), these aspirate letters

with several others which I shall hereafter enumerate are

found in the Sinhalese alphabet.

The aspirate letters or sounds are the ten following :—®,

&, ©, Ge), &, ©, ©, @, ©, and @. :

The Sinhalese alphabet also contains six Sanskrit vowels,

€32, 6322, @2, 04, O&, Mu, and the unchangeable s expressed

with the first vowel, thus, ¢s. It is by their assistance that

the Sinhalese or Elu consonants, which are common to both

P4éli and Sanskrit, are changed into ana Aaa, 24 £9, OOD

@Wq, 28, Ke.

I must not here omit to mention, that besides the above

there are several Sanskrit and P4li consonants which are

inserted in the Sinhalese alphabet. They are @ and &,

Sanskrit exclusively, and ®, ®, and @<, Pali and Sanskrit.

To these may be added several compound or mixed letters

which are formed by a union of two consonants: @, ©, ©,

cf, 2, @, €, ®, ®, O, and @. |

@ is common to all the three languages. In Hlu it is

sounded differently from P4li and Sanskrit. Thus, go, a%ga

(Elu), “horn,” is pronounced more softly than Me», ganga

(Pali and Sanskrit), “river.’’ This letter is formed in Elu by

No. 5.—1850. ] THE ELU LANGUAGE. 255

a union of o and @, and in Pali and Sanskrit by incorporating

@ with . Itis however, though mistakenly, supposed that

its formation in the Eluis the same as in Péliand Sanskrit.”

@ (Pali and Sanskrit) is compounded of 4¢ and ®, as in

QO, vahcha (Pali and Sanskrit), ‘“ deceit.”

©. This form, also common to both Sanskrit and Pali,

although less frequently used in the former, is compounded

of <e and &, as in ¢@, aja, “ anoint.”

ee is exclusively Sanskrit, and is a compound of & and

#2, as in Soe, prajna, “ pandit ” or “ scholar.”

é) is common to both P4li and Sanskrit, andis formed by

a union of © and 2, as in ¢@, attha (Pali), “ eight.”

@ is used in all the three languages, and is a contraction

of § and ®, as @), harda (Llu), “ sound”; ©@, garda (Pali

and Sanskrit), “fruit.” Asis the case in all the compound

letters used in Hlu, this is pronounced more softly in Hlu

than in Pali and Sanskrit.

€ is exclusively an Elu character, oninoanded of =

and €, and is pronounced softly as in me, hawda, “ moon.”

@, common to Pali and Sanskrit, is produced by a union

of ¢ and O), as is Qa, buddha (Pali and Sanskrit), ‘‘ Buddha.”

@), used in all the three languages, is composed of © and ®).

In the Hlu it has the soft sound, as in ¢®, amba, “ mango”’;

in Sanskrit and Pali hard, as in ¢@, abu, “ water.”

©, common to Pali and Sanskrit alone, is formed by a

union of 4 and ®, as in ©cs, dwaya (Pali and Sanskrit), “two.”

@ is peculiar to the Sanskrit, and is a compound of o and

@, t as in €@, asa, “side.” I may add to the above O,

common to Hlu and Pali, and formed of G and 6, as 20,

kalu, “ black.”

All the characters which are comprehended in the 241

already enumerated are used in the Pali and Sanskrit, with

* Vide )O&Szeeu, Elu Prosody, p. 1.

t In Elu as in PAli o “corresponds with the French z in mon.”

256 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr II.

the exception of ¢z and ¢, which are peculiar to the Elu ;

©, which is used only in Elu and Pali; and ® and @,

which, though used in Péli and Sanskrit, are therein

pronounced long, as & and &.

It is not a little curious to find that the sound of f, utterly

unknown to the Sinhalese, and so difficult to be pronounced

by the natives, is to be found in the Sanskrit. See Saras-

vativyakarane.

A brief elucidation of the so-called Sinhalese alphabet .

leads me to a consideration of the prose writings of the

Sinhalese, which I confess are not so many and varied as

their poetical works. Nor indeed are they so recent as the

last-mentioned.

In prose, as in poetry, nothing is more to be desired than

clearness and elegance of expression. What that clearness

and elegance are can be decided by none but those

intimately acquainted with the language ; for that which is

elegance in the English is the very opposite in the Sinhalese.

To enter into a detail of the rules of composition is indeed

to translate the “Sidatsangarawa”’ into English. But since

the object of the writer is to give the English reader a

sketch of the distinguishing features of the Sinhalese

literature, I may as well call his attention to the sine qud

non in Sinhalese composition, the necessity of introducing

one’s entire thoughts and ideas on a subject into one

unbroken sentence. In this respect the Sinhalese is as

different from, and as much opposed to, the English, whose

“ soul” is ‘ brevity,” as any two things can possibly be. If

the reader will take the trouble to examine some of the

prose writers, he will find a great similarity between their

writings and the superabundantly exact style of an English

conveyancer, or the tedious legal phraseology of an Act of

Parliament.

No. 5.—1850. ] THE ELU LANGUAGE. 257

From my limited reading I have been able to divide the

prose compositions into but three classes : (1) the simple or

common, (2) the elegant, and (3) the refined.

(1) The first, which I shall call the “ common,” is that

without ornament, the elegant style of an English scholar.

Of this species the following from the Sidatsangarawa is

an example :—

BAD MVNSTIB QOM QOSGO MVW®D GSoaed som

BOSOAIEEOE>.

_ Aswarm of bees, which in the morning hover over (in) the

lotuses, are like the offspring of darkness walking in quest of their

parent of darkness.*

(2) Of the second, which is the Sinhalese decorated with

all the glittering ornaments of compound words, compari-

sons, &c., and which in English may be denominated “the

verbose,” the following is a specimen from the introduction

to the Bauddha Satakaya :—

BOM CASSOHR BOE 5q,HbMQ oanuwocwoctss

8 @SS50nO 878 MAOWMOM M@DsDOAHE

BOB MAQon8 BY moDnsnomMsooun 8 GO

Deseo Hs DS RpSO QM SMMAODIDSWOD OMOMsy Gears

OB G SSHAhMSESOOSHGBsR GEO OoPGOAD 09%

8 AQEWSSmeHnTOnTSod oMmodsl HBOmVDeI06

ES QOQOM GercmBigums Sam ESO SOVSGA

GWBRS HAMBOAS HSIAND NOD QROotMD GM

aes Moston “eso She BONSDDSAQSSdd ”

BBNE ORMDHS SODHWOGS.

Translation.

Sri Ramachandrabhfrati, an illustrious Brahmin, born of

the family of (KA4tya), learned in all the rich sciences of logic,

* This sentence conveys the idea that bees are inactive at night,

and that their activity upon the absence of darkness is such, that

it may be almost supposed that these children of darkness are in

search of the night—their lost mother.

258 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou IL, Parr II.

grammar, poetry, music, &c., having arrived in the beautiful

Island of Lanka (Ceylon) from the treasury (seat) of all

science (language) Gauda in the prosperous Jambuddwipa,*

and having inquired and learnt the Tripitaka doctrines from

the Reverend and Venerable Sri Rahula Sthavirayo—Supreme

Master of the Tripitaka doctrines and Principal of the temple

Sri Sangabodhi Sri Wijayabahu—and being (also) greatly pleased

in mind (delighted) with the religion (or those doctrines), hath

with supremely sincere and greatly devout faith paraphrased

Ndnan Vasya Samasta Wastu Wishayan + and other stanzas

of the book composed by himself in praise of Buddha, and called

Bhaktisatakaya, “ A Centum of Faith.”

(3) Thethird is what Huropeans call “the bombastic” :

and so great isthe difference of taste between Europeans and

the Sinhalese on the subject of composition, that I had almost

said the rules of English composition may be used with the

rule of contraries to attain a good native style. The Sin-

halese regard the bombastic as the best ; and the following

from the Dévaduta sutra sanné will serve as an example :—

8257 SEND O45 GOO Haw onig0 SOS oa

Sag DAE SGOHG GHG GOS OH ooF&NES Goe

ESLEDES OMQSBS OOG OovOG OqwHe|E oHe

DEG GES VIA MWNVDO BNET BSOEB cows

QQE GGOCEED & OHH QO HID O56 FAS AG

AG SOG ®@COME VEUTECSD qo SQOmoOaNDGsy

3OBS5 3BS SOO MODISE E€RMEO Gadi SdwdID

QUE SOWVIGO ODNS @CdOD ObOHS OHO

Asay SBst OH<aqsy MrEb) OO@d OES HEE.

“ Gauda stands for Calcutta, and Jambuddwipa for one of the four

quarters ot the globe, being the terra cognita of the Buddhists, -

a part of Asia. The Yripijaka doctrines embrace nearly the whole of

Buddha’s sermons,

t This isa part of the first stanza of the work called “ Bauddha

Satakaya,” one of the school books of the Sighalese.

No. 5.—1850. | THE ELU LANGUAGE. 259

At the temple called Jétawana, in the city of Sewet [like unto

the city of Alaka, the seat of the powerful king Kuwera],*

full of prosperity, teeming with the wealthy and possessed of

armies composed of soldiers (foot), horsemen, elephant-men

(cavalry), and cars containing men (artillery); numbers of brave

and intrepid troops able to withstand the demi-gods ; beautiful

fleet horses; splendid elephants with huge double teeth, and

which with their spreading ears remove swarms of bees that hover

over them, invited by the tempting odour of the matter which

greatly oozes from their (elephants’) cheeks; splendid rows of

beautiful white spacious squares of sizes (small and large); hills

as large asthe Himalayas ; and gates, entrances, porticos, towers,

batteries, and fortresses (at the aforesaid temple of the afore-

said city )}—did Buddha, presiding, speak as follows to the summoned

priesthood.

Besides the above division of prose compositions into the

“simple” or “common,” the “elegant,” and the “ refined,”

they are susceptible of another classification into the “ pure ”

and the “mixed.” The first comprehends the pure native

Sinhalese, and the second a style compounded of Sanskrit

and P4li words derived into the Sinhalese. Of the first

species the first and the third sentences above extracted are

examples; of the second, the second from the Bauddha

Satakaya is a specimen.

Turn we next to the poetry of the Sinhalese, a de-

partment of literature cultivated to great perfection, if

prefection could indeed be attained in any human perfor-

mance. That the Sinhalese poets have over-excelled the

great and celebrated Indian authors is perhaps not true ;

but that there are a few Sinhalese works which equal in merit

* Kuwera,in the Indian Mythology, stands for the Grecian Plutus.

He is the lord of wealth and master of nine inestimable treasures.

His city, called Alaka, is situated on Mount Kailasa, and inhabited by

Yakkho, demi-gods.

or K

260 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr II.

some at least of the Sanskrit works, I shall venture to assert.

The Selalihini-sandésé of Sri Rahula Sthavira, mentioned

above, may indeed be cited as one which is by no means

inferior in point of imagery to the celebrated “Meghadtta’’

of Kalidasa, translated into English by Mr. Wilson in

1813.* But I must not omit to mention that, unlike

the Sanskrit, which can be procured from India, the

* MNSSnO BHS eH SAOSLANA AG1aB

OOdsaHNO0ORGnnd MoagasicmBOn 983s

OHI SHNODI DECHAHNDAD OXRLIZN DQIAMD DIMv0

WIMNDASNIELIBOSGOS Bas GOogsy 6)3H)s.

The above is from the “ Meghadtta,”’ p. 88, and the following, from

Mr. Wilson’s beautiful translation, with his notes, will give the

English reader a faint idea of the writings referred to in the text :—

‘““a beauteous creature stands,

The first best work of the Creator's hands ;

Whose slender limbs inadequately bear

A full-orbed bosom and a weight of care ;

Whose teeth like pearls, whose lips like bembas show,

And fawn-like eyes, still tremble as they glow,” &c.

Nore.— The first best work of the Creator’s hands,” literally the

first creation of Brahma, and “jirst’’ may refer to time or to degree ;

it most probably here means “best.” So Milton speaking of Hve—

“Oh ! fairest of creation, last and best

Of all God’s works.” —FParadise Lost.

“We now enter upon perhaps the most pleasing part of this

elegant little poem—the description of the Yaksha’s wife. I may

perhaps come under the denomination of those who, according to

the illiberal and arrogant criticism of such a writer as a Mr. Pinkerton,

prove ‘that the climate of India, while it inflames the imagination

impairs the judgment,’ when, standing in very little awe of such a

poetical censor, I advance an opinion, that we have few specimens

either in classical or modern poetry of more genuine tenderness or

delicate feeling.” — Wilson.

No. 5.—1850. ] “THE ELU LANGUAGE. 261

Sinhalese or Hlu works are few in number; and this

arises from the grievous loss which they have sustained

from the invasions of this Island by the Malabars, and from

the general destruction of literary records during several

reigns. At least, it is difficult to account for the share of

civilisation possessed by the Sinhalese prior to the age

of Vidagama and Totagamuwa, much less for the great

talent and learned research displayed by those d¢erati, without

supposing that many valuable manuscripts which once

existed are now lost. But, however few their works, the

Sinhalese have sufficient to prove that they do not deserve

to be disparagingly spoken of by Huropeans—the majority

of whom, whatever may be said of their superior powers

of intellect, can never appreciate those beauties of native

style which one thoroughly acquainted with the native

idiom, the genius of the language, and the religion of the

Sinhalese, finds in the Elu works. The Sinhalese scholar

finds, indeed, in the writings of his country’s poets the

unmatched sublimity of a Milton, the flowing gracefulness

of a Pope, and the sparkling wit of a Goldsmith. Of course

the English reader must understand the comparison here

instituted with reference to the idiom of expression and

the genius of the language, the habits of nationality, and the

peculiarities of the religion of each class of writers.

Perhaps it is difficult for an European, accustomed from

his infancy to the peculiar expressions of his language,

the numbers of his poetry, and the national and religious

feelings which they convey (ali which dispose his ear and

bias his judgment to give preference to his own language),

to understand what is here attempted to be shown—the

existence in the Sinhalese of works which may be compared

to those of England, from the sameness of the effect which

they severally produce upon the minds of the two classes of

readers. Perhaps also, for the same reason, a native is

K 2

262 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr II.

incompetent to form a correct opinion on this subject.”

Be this as it may, it cannot but be admitted that in the

mind’s eye of one who can enter into the spirit of both the

languages, the Elu is not a language which should dis-

paragingly be spoken of.

Apart from the mere beauties of composition (which can

only be appreciated by an intimate acquaintance with a

language), I have occasionally found in the Sinhalese books,

as in all Oriental literature, a vein of thought exactly

similar to that of the Western writers. Who, for ins-

tance, could read the following from Sudbhdasité of Alagiya-

wanna Mohottéla and would not be struck with the

sameness of idea, if not the exactness of their symbols?

* The writer once explained Goldsmith’s beautiful lines ‘“‘ On

the death of a mad dog” to several of the most intelligent Sinhalese

scholars of the present day, and instead of hearing from them what

Mrs. Barbauld thought of “this specimen of Goldsmith’s poetical

powers,” that it ‘‘ was wonderfully pathetic, and that it was sweet as

music and polished like a gem,” the writer was told by the Pundits

that they could not perceive the wit of being informed by a poet

“that his song could not hold them long, if they found it wondrous

short.”

In like manner, the Wnglish reader will indeed fail to perceive

the gay and smiling imagery, and the smooth and flowing numbers

of the two following stanzas, the last composed under the circum-

stances which I shall here briefly detail. A native poet, who was

rather deficient in personal beauty, conceived an attachment to a lady

of great attractions. A marriage was proposed, but was not concluded

for some time. About this time one of his friends, wishing to rouse

the dormant powers of the enamoured bard, sent him an extract of

the following lines from the ‘“‘ Kusajataké,” wherein the beautiful princess

Pabbaweti, indignant at the deformity of her husband, King Kusa,

is said to have exclaimed at the eve of her separation from her royal

consort : —

aoWat SOD @ S

SyNN® BAB E S

ZQHO GA O99 ¢

DWasy Qood’ OHO Vae €

No. 5.—1850. | THE ELU LANGUAGE. 263

On Criticism.

“One Science only will one genius fit.”

“@@BsY DoDsay OMOEMDO OOS BOD.”

I need not remind the reader, however, that to render the

English literally into the Sinhalese is difficult, if not impos-

sible. And the absence of the same pithy expressions in

both the languages, and the difference of idiom between

the two, must necessarily render a literal translation little

less than ridiculous. But if the well-conceived and under-

stood idea of an English sentence be conveyed in the

Sinhalese suited to the peculiarities to which I[ have already

alluded, the translation thus made will serve the purposes

of a literal one. Of this the following from Goldsmith

“If one were deformed, and yet longed for a beautiful woman,

when did any good result to him, but inordinate ill!”

To the above the poet’s answer was not only pert, but what was

more (to use the words of Mrs. Barbauld), “it was wonderfully pathetic

—sweet as music, and polished like a gem.” He knew that this was a

biting sarcasm upon himself, and therefore was sarcastic in return

without being offensive. He appealed to the sequel of the very ‘‘ Kusa-

jatake” to prove the illiberality of a sentiment expressed in the heat of

anger; and referring to Pabaweti, who afterwards ex necessitate and

voluntarily adored her previously-loathsome husband, and also to the

alleged circumstance that their reunion resulted in the loss of the

king’s deformity by the power of a miracle, the poet answered :-—

OB VS OA6z 5 6

OSS gems Ke S) 65)

a eo1.Ost -)

As, ENED OD Cana 5

“ That dictum was incorrect ; for the lover consummated his wish

and attained prosperity, and Dambadiwa did on that day present the

appearance of a festive house.”

264 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr II.

(one of the exercises of the writer) will serve as an

example :—

On Woman.

When lovely woman stoops to folly,

And finds too late that men betray ;

What charms can soothe her melancholy

What arts can wash her guilt away?

61807 BS ad BOGEST SOHD0 gE We

DDD) DE al Ones EHNOM Qsey B HO

eS de at MONO DSEST Q HO

DOD Ed A MO BO) MODE ag®

The only art her guilt to cover,

To hide her shame from every eye,

To give repentance to her lover,

And wring his bosom—is to die.

QS E BWA GOH CIM O:BO ©)

DD € 5BESCS9O HGao Q

ON | OOD ONEMsy Baz VOD O

GOOD E& GB M715 GEHOd Fz 2)

Whilst on the subject of translations, it is perhaps not.

amiss to introduce into these pages one or two remarks upon

the subject of the translated Holy Scriptures. It indeed

behoves everyone who feels assured that the religion of the

Bible will, in process of time, become the universal faith of

the Ceylonese, to have the Scriptures translated into correct

idiomatic Sinhalese, so that this Book of Books may prove

to the Sinhalese scholar what the English version is to the

English,—in the words of Dr. Lowth, “the best standard of

the English language.” That any of the Sinhalese versions

now extant are as correct as they can or ought to be, I am

not prepared to say. Nor, if called upon to pronounce an

opinion with reference to the style adopted, can I much

hesitate to decide in favour of the old version in preference

No. 5.—1850. ] THE ELU LANGUAGE. 265

to the so-called ‘‘ Kotté version.”’” I shall not, however,

here pause to consider the disputed question regarding

the pronouns @mF (46) and @VOHsaI@e (obawahansé) ;

nor indeed do I blame the pious and learned gentlemen

who introduced the innovation, believing as I do that

they were actuated with the best of intentions. But that

the simplicity so much studied by the new translators

after “an elegant English style” is opposed to the

genius of the Sinhalese language, I trust I have already

shown by exhibiting the difference between English and

Sinhalese compositions. I admit that long parenthetical

clauses and laboured periods should, if possible, be avoided

in the translation of the Scriptures, and that clearness

of expression should be the first endeavour of any writer

or translator. But I do indeed object to one or more

concurrent ideas which can be well and elegantly expressed

in one continuous sentence being broken into two or three

periods, either in writing in, or translating into, the

Sinhalese.

I shall here extract a few paragraphs from a paper

written by me some time ago :—

It will be perceived that in the English version the first three

verses of our Lord’s Sermon on the Mount (St. Matt. v. 1-4)

comprise one period :

1, And seeing the multitudes, he went up into a mountain: and

when he was sat, his disciples came unto him :

2. And he opened his mouth, and taught them, saying,

3. Blessed are the poor in spirit, for theirs’ is the kingdom of heaven.

The Kotté translators have divided the above into four com-

plete sentences ; and that, too, in a language whose very elegance

consists in the introduction of as much matter as one can into one

continuous sentence.

SHR39 MQ SBQVOS EA) DAEDO DiG OB qEeQmMmra

QDHODS OHIGOAT MQ EHO Pa.

266 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr II.

2. BIE OH w1VQOd DG O®8o@d QQ TIAIs6, JOO :—

3. BBs ECEDVO DEAS BAH Mot PRE

ENonIa,

Such a style, especially in the Bible, is calculated speedily to

impoverish the Sinhalese as a language, and is unfit for any com-

position above juvenile books or little tales for children.

* * “ ae *

Without omitting any of the words above given, the following

would be preferable :—

1, BQYHNS €2 @sH Waved 318 58 ecowsaiSsy on MWHad OnE

Oat QWsq CWO MME 2. HVE Dao @sqy OOo QaisIsQO0.

BAG :—3. EES DEGU28 BH Gea OOD MBHEecawaw jo

Nor, as far as we can be guided by the English version, does

the above appear to us to be a correct translation. Sg has no

equivalent in English. eQ@o is singular, and not “ multitudes.”

€8@)co Ez in the old version is preferable to the above, though

rendering the English literally it should be sQaasd cay. “ When

he sat” conveys “ after he was sat”: and the Evangelist evidently

wishes us to understand the period of time when the disciples

came—“ when he was sat, the disciples came unto him.” The

K6tté version, however, does not give one an idea as to when the

disciples came. According to the distinctly separate periods into

which the above passage is rendered in Sinhalese, itis perhaps not

unreasonable to suppose that the disciples came unto Our Lord

before he was sat. @@O is “near”; but “unto” required @Da.

A person may come unto one, and yet not come near him. Mae

for the third person plural is ungrammatical : it should be p@dsa.

Here we find a changeof expression by the translators, who, in

the controversy regarding ¢dé and obawahanseé, object to Dosvoss,

upon the plausible ground of a violation of the prohibition solemnly

given in Revelations xxii. “ Opened his mouth” is rendered &,@

@¢ DW@®>, which means “ tuned” or “ sounded.” ‘To such an ex-

pression we do not positively object ; but 8,@@d mo is incorrect :

it should be j@¢ a@o. But wherefore change the English

expression, which is in the Oriental idiom, and foreign to the

No. 5.—1850.] THE ELU LANGUAGE. 267

Occidental? QoeOsy ©2947 is a common but idiomatic Sinhalese

expression, and means “‘ without abusing by (word of) mouth.”

Why then not render “opened his mouth” literally as in the old

version, 9Ac gO? Or, why not shorten the expression by still

keeping to the original words and the idiom QHoaacsy (Sanskrit)

or 9@2s) (Sinhalese)? Buddha is said to have “ opened his lotus

mouth” (QODSq2 @aaco), and to have “inquired” from the

priests ‘in what conversation they had been engaged.”

DOHA Sdn B 3

ane GanesS Sanog g 3—Guitilé.

22d@ is not the Sinhalese for the first ‘‘ and” in the second verse ;

nor was there any necessity arising out of any supposed difference of

idiom to omit in the Sinhalese the pronoun “‘ them” after ‘“ taught.”

QQs3 w&<¢ Exioasa is, strictly speaking, ungrammatical.

According to the “ Sidat Sangarawa” it should be @&, the nomi-

native case. &Roy E@esyo, though not wrong, is better

expressed 888 eat gi aaewo.

Being poor in heart (or spirit);

BIB eslost od@00.— Wiripenne.

But lest it should be supposed that I have carefully selected the

above passage, I shall turn to the very commencement of the new

version, where at least for divers reasons one expects greater

accuracy than in the “ parenthetical clauses of St. Paul” :—

Kotté Version.

In the beginning God created the heaven and the earth.—i. Gen. i.

OGd5ad SKS SODHIDOOE DEwss osE@ds} O1QdIw.

In the first place, the above passage is inelegant in construction.

In the Sinhalese, as in several languages of Europe, the governing

words generally follow the governed, and the former precede the

verb. This is a rule which is not to be acquired by consulting

grammars, but from a competent knowledge of a language, by

reading and observation. Take, for instance, an example from

“Sidat Sangarawa,” “a book of thehighest possible authority,” and

which I shall have to cite hereafter to test the grammatical

268 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vor. II., Parr II.

accuracy of the sentence before me—eéaod, DOEOS GHSRA

oce8&H—“ The doctrines were preached by Buddha.” But not,

as the Sinhalese of the first verse in Genesis above given, W6¢EO

8 SHES EHO GHD.

The words @¢Sasy SBss O80, “created by God,” are

ungrammatical, and therefore incorrect. If the translators were

conversant with the Sinhalese language, they would not only have

shortened the sentence by the omission of the preposition 3&s¥,

but would also have rendered the English sentence literally, and

word for word into idiomatic and grammatical Sinhalese. The

word S&s) requires a passive termination in the verb Q,D8, as

in the example already quoted from the “ Sidat Sangarawa”—

EOD DSEOU SH SHD o¢hS. #

That is to say, the expression ‘“ God created the heaven and

the earth” is at present translated ‘‘ By God the heaven and the

earth created,” instead of “By God the heaven and the earth

were created.”

To return, however, to the subject from which we have

digressed. The Sinhalese books abound in pastorals and

descriptive poetry, which are divided into many (nearly thirty-

five) heads, all which comprise the several species of poetry

known to the English. Besides the legitimate Sinhalese

poetry there isa species called the HOoaeom (Llu sloka),

of comparatively modern introduction.

The last-named follows the rules of Sanskrit Prosody,

and is written in a variety of measures with which that

beautiful language abounds: it will suffice to give two

examples :—

No. 1.—On Night.

BEMZDS BSED CM OO AE LHEare Bso¥oauakKsy

OMDSED So MBOTD NOS GBOVQI DY OCHS How Ononsesy

BDASSHGEH CONDE OMNDIW aoNSaTedsa ez &

AQNOrded SVE Oot QBRSSE Havdsy EQ Ges end.

No. 5.—1850. } “THE ELU LANGUAGE. 269

When the nocturnal spirit, seeing the goddess of the evening

sip the honey of the moonbeams, fastly and _ indignantly

approached (the latter) exposing with her mirth her flowery

teeth, and waving the iron staff of night; the evening fled

indeed with her scarlet jewel of a sun, and the crimson mantle

of a scarlet cloud: the remnants which she left behind—a silver

salver and the honey-drops which it scattered—illumined into

the moon and the spangled stars.

The above selection from the Gangarohané is composed in

the Mattébhavikridita tune,* and comprises :—

~Yy —~ ~~ — ~~ ~Y~ ~~ —~ ~a ~~

wwe wy we ww wwew ww ww

A ~~ — ~~ Y~wH —~ ~ ~~

anapoest, a dactyl, cretic, tribrach, molossus, bacchic, short and long.

No. 2.

The following, one of the concluding stanzas of a beauti-

ful little poem, ‘A Critique,’? upon the work from which the

last has been selected, is from the pen of a celebrated

living author named Miripenné :—t

* The rule, which is the following :—

BHOSOWCHHHOMESSS: ®WoamnndSHBMo

SPSS SY BU SS BSS FY BS BM

exemplifies itself; ‘an anapest, a dactyl, a cretic, a tribrach, a.

molossus, and a bacchic, ending with two letters, of which the last either

long or ad, and with a pause at the end of the 13th syllable, compose

the species called Mattébhavikriditam.”

+ This talented and venerable priest is a resident of the Galle district.

As a Sinhalese poet he is unrivalled at the present day. Some of his

earlier productions, quite of a piece with Cowper’s “ John Gilpin,” were

burnt by the writer, as they were a source of great annoyance to an

individual who was the hero of the tale. There are many persons,

however, who had committed the whole poem to memory ; and I believe

it is by no means impossible still to reclaim it from the Destroying Angel

of time. His miscellaneous writings comprise two volumes, and are

a valuable addition to the Sinhalese classics.

270 JOURNAL, R.A.8. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL., Pang II.

OBIS OMS HSOBDWDIOS Mae S676

Q@ € O6dOd0EaS systQ o¢aal est gmBsyeS

BD € DE DOH 6S SES nnvsaws cei os)

DY E& OMONHBWVA) GSOSOMNDOSY ©5197 EOE).

I do indeed esteem him as a clever writer : but what is there

free from fault? For do not you see even in the lotus

(nelumbium speciosum), whose glowing flower is so sweet, that

its stalk is full of thorns ?

The metre and construction of the last are founded upon

the rule called Malini.* In this species of poetry, as in

the above stanza, every line must not only contain the

same number of short and long or a/ sounds, but those

several sounds must uniformly correspond in all the four

lines. Thus each of the lines in the above selection

contains fifteen sounds, of which seven are either long or

al and eight short ; and they are uniform.

wwe w~H Vw“ wa oe ee SE SS —

wwe HS SY wa — —_ —

i SeSoes WSs

wwewvr wevrw YY

pa 9 Re ech

yY~wyewvrwYwrm ww

ptribrach tribrach molossus bacchic bacchic

It must however be borne in mind that in this species

of poetry the last sound or syllable must always be long

or al. This distinguishes the Hlu sloka from the real

Sinhalese poetry, which may end with either a short or

long sound, and need only have, except in one or two

* The rule of Malini versification is the following :—

DADIWS SGOSG0 OCRamBGaecaaws

“Two na-gana tribrachs, one ma-gana molossus, and two sa-gana

bacchic, with a pause before and after the eighth letter, comprise the

malina versification.” The very rule will serve as an example.

SZ YY’ YY” HY WH VS ZZ

AHAHOssqGasslosoll OCBaan agooaaws

{ In Sinhalese prosody a long letter is equal in quantity to an

al consonant, together with the vowel by whose assistance that ¢@

letter is sounded ; vide infra.

No. 5.—1850.] = THE ELU LANGUAGE. 271

species, an equal number vf sounds; regarding a long

sound or the syllable of an ¢@ sound as being equal to

two short; as in

eOo & WHe 5535 bs SOsT EC é

OEE®D B SHOGIIST CI7g Sr KK e

ESOD es S1RO DDODMWAS MSE €

85D & MOMS B5CHD OSROSE

Buduguna Alankaré.

Upon the completion of 2015 years from the era of the death

of the Omniscient Supreme Intelligent (Buddha) ; and three years

since the installation into regal office, in prosperous Lanka, of

King Buwaneka Bahu of worldly renown :—

14 short and 2 long.

12 COs 13) nido:

IG “Clos Wh Gloy

14k ley, | do.

= SS ee ee ie ie es =—_ —_

— Nee Nee ae ees — —

Il tll

a 20 <2) 18

: 12 + (3 x 2) = 18

We must get iG! (1 G2) 18

14+ (2 x 2) = 18

It will be perceived from the above that a return of the

same music in all the lines is not essential to Sinhalese

poetry, although it would greatly add to the solemnity of

compositions. The writer had been successful in this in

the following elegy ‘‘To the memory of a friend” who

lately met a watery grave :—

au equal number of sounds.*

& DB) QB O8HA OD YH ACH BID

(DY OOD) ODNDOONA ED 613 EH G SID

ED JO MH OG €HE@E O12 Sz SID

DD Oz ESO ODNEMDY ¢OS Boyd

Whilst watching the return of the friend of my heart (and)

inquiring from people after his health, the Angel of Death hath at

Welipenna snatched him away by stealth, unmindful of our

grief !

* To the Sinhalese is known poetry of different numbers but uniform

in all the four lines. IL almost think of this species the numbers of

sounds or feet vary from two to twenty-eight.

272 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL, Parr I].

I have said that, except in one or two species of poetry,

a stanza had an equal number of sounds in all the four lines.

Of the exceptions the short common metre is one; but I

cannot find any rule for its construction. From observation,

I have however clearly ascertained that the first line consists

of nine sounds, the second eleven, the third nine, and the

fourth fourteen.

Haample.

ADQIB Oo E

FEZ OB DOMOE

GBVEOS BEOE

SOS eEos® ¢e2 NE2E.—Kavminikondala.

The peacocks with their mates in the mountainous forest

hearing the din of tumultuous torrents, and glistening (with

beauty), freely play about from hill to hill.

qr AVA 4

Although out of place, I must not here omit to remark

that the above stanza is so composed as to be used in the

diagram without the repetition of eight of the letters

found in all the lines.

ty Meir,

No. 5.—1850.] ‘THE ELU LANGUAGE. 273

Besides the above and the blank verse (of which I shall

treat hereafter) there are three or four others, as far as I can

remember, which have an inequality in the number of sounds

or feet in the four lines of a stanza; and they are of a

modern introduction—at least I suppose so, having only

met with a few in two of the modern poets. Dunuvila

Gajandyaka Nilamé, and Kirambé Terunndnsé have both

adopted them in their works. ‘They are very pleasing to

the ear, besides being in one respect similar to the Latin,

in that it is permitted in the latter to place the two syllables

of a word in two lines—a license neither permitted in the

English* nor so ‘ludicrous’ in the Sinhalese as it would

seem if introduced into the former language. From

Kirambé :--

OADIOE BSEA8O ae CaS

BGA CVMESSE DIDS OBIE €0

BOD EB ADWSEe SE $30. ED

GD @ dBCoOss EC SEBS 9

* “Can anything give us a more ludicrous idea than the practice of the

ancients in sometimes splitting a word at the end of the line and com-

mencing the next line with the latter part of the word? This must

_have been nearly as ridiculous as the following English verses in imita-

tion of this absurd practice:—

Pyrrhus, you tempt a danger high

When you would steal from angry l-

oness her cubs, and soon shall fly

inglorious;

For know the Romans, you shall find

By virtue more and generous kind-

ness than by force or fortune blind,

victorious.” — Walker.

Also : Gallicum Rhenum, horribilesque ultim-

osque Britannos.— Catullus, Od. 11, 12.

Labitur ripa, Jove non probante, uz-

orius amnis.—Horace, Od. 1, 2, 19.

274 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vo1. II., Parr II.

The row of long beautiful toes like superb gold shells ornament

the feet ; and the two feet greatly pleasing to King Cupid, are

like the full-blown soft lotus.

NN NIN alos poe =—14

FL AO IY I IN = 16

The following has one word split into two, whereas in the

preceding the noun is only removed from its adjective.

Oo © O7@ SSO, C O2® G...88

S € PBoMGo~Ma2dAG BEBO E

g @ 8ad ga ca G...028

D E QMEDO OGOHH OOsT Ba E

The fair princess, like the soft and delicate nymphe lotus

coveted as the full-blown lotus by the bee-like king ; and who

surpasses the beautiful Sirikata (Goddess of beauty)—has illu-

mined the heads of all women like a garland of flowers.

To the last may be added, from Dunuvila, one other

species, which has a sort of “ catch-word ” at the end of the

first and third lines, which thereby are rendered unequal in

number to the second and fourth.

Example.

849 O) BD) enue JO: Dos

ED Do HEGBSIE OBNMDz WaS...OCO®

GH €5 3898 BSQ Woss

Having believed that thou would’st come, I was brimful of

joy : (now that thou hast disappointed me) the very core (field)

of my heart continually burns with fire; and on thy account shall

my life cease.

= 6

—_ ~~ we OS i aS” SS”

No. 5.—1850.] = THE ELU LANGUAGE. 270

Another species, also of modern introduction into the

Sinhalese (probably from the Tamil), is to be found in

several works of the elegant poet from whom I have already

quoted, Kirambe Terunnansé. This has eleven feet in the first,

second, and fourth lines, and twelve in the third, in which, as

well as in the other line, the ccesural pause falling at the

end of the sixth foot, or syllabic instant, renders the stanza

very sweet and elegant. It is also remarkable that in this

species the third line does not rhyme with the rest. The

following is from the beautiful poem called Kanchanade-

vikatawa :—

HERES Dis : we oGod

OG BBD : SEX

EBACE ¢@ : GOD) DE&

Pw saws : &O oad!

The female without blemish, like a moon without the hare’s-

shadow, having thus reached the place to hear Buddha's

doctrines :-—

NT NN WV iw — = |]

CY SOR SII RH GO —-— 11

SI SR 14,

Y~— GF BBY SIE — — |]

The following is also from the same writer :—

OOD g®@ ES : wes DOG

aM HMDS : O65 50

gv shay : DOM DIO

MVED QS : 89954

I do bow unto Buddha, like unto a lotus pond, full of the

water of benevolence and the renown of lotuses, frequented

| (attended) by swans, like unto the purely virtuous priests, and

_ having waves of six-coloured rays :—

en Ney, Nee (ci Se a Sd NA) = ll

ee ey, CY) OY Ve yewin — == 11

— i: ww: —_ BO I 8S NY

276 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vo1. II., Parr II.

‘“‘ Blank verse,”’ which is called 8 g/, though known to the

Sinhalese,—as indeed it was the species of musical composi-

tion with which many nations commenced poetry in the early

ages,—is not, however, in use now. Nor are there any correct

books to ascertain the rules of its construction. The EHlu

Chandasa,* the only work of its kind, is found so incorrect,

owing, probably, to the errors of ignorant copyists, that

with the assistance of four copies procured from different

parts of the Island, and with the living aid of two Sinhalese

scholars, | have been unable to obtain the information I

desire. But I may venture to state, that of gi there are

nearly fifteen species, differing in quantity from each other.

The number of sounds do not, however, altogether exceed

44., The following are examples :—

BOM DAO DOES — i)

GESOOCVEDSO ES03a) =e

Ss) O80 MGVOSI = 10

AMEBSE OTN OOOSG = 10 = 41

King Kusa forgot the indignities which had been previously

offered to him by the princess upon her prayers at his lotus-like feet,

covered (leaved) with her seved { like flowing hair.—Kusa Jataka.

One DEBE sv =5 1

BDOS OHO) EDVHO = ill

EQDS EMD BEM ==

DOOLHD BEWAOD a= li =.42

*« Since writing the above I have met with another work on versifica-

tion, called Swbhdsa Alankdraya, from which it will be perceived that I

have already presented the reader with a specimen in a previous note.

It is supposed to be a translation into the Sighalese of a Sanskrit work

called Dandiya Alankaraya.

+ We cught not to omit another species of poetry called sar sehelt,

and compounded of “ blank verse” and “rhymes,” and which, perhaps,

to avoid repetition, we may well consider hereafter (wide infra).

t The Sinhalese poets have frequently compared the flowing hair

of a female to the floating masses in the water called @38@2@ ( Vallisnaria

octandra), the Flu form of ©@@23@ in Sanskrit.

No. 5.—1850. ] THE ELU LANGUAGE. 207

Having made my heart the residence for him who knew the

end of all things, I compose the ‘‘ Sidat Sangarava,” in order that

the ignorant may be instructed.—Sidat Sangarava.

S160 Dons = 9

DVOSIS5y» ONsI HE ==) it

Sdqgnq oo osama == el

ES EDMAQVO1 ) OMOEGSY = 13 = 44

Even the great beings who came from the Brahama world

have, enticed by the allurements of love, lost all the prosperity

of kingdoms : how much more then (can we say of) other people

like unto little tender plants >—EHlu Chandasa.

Although I have given the above in four lines, each verse

is properly written in two. Thus :—

ADEODssocs See Ba&e Ost Oasmnw ||

BAOA) OHSESH DH) GHEOES OVS—

Ezce O77 BO MOE DAS Sadlamasy |

BD)2 HOMA MDWSOOD Bsn QQES SM—

E265 ONEGD GO COSY SYMDzsI OGD ||

SOmMAaD 6G AG GIE W119 GG HE—

(They said) Indra alone could (with his thousand eyes)

behold, and Ananteya (with his thousand mouths) alone could

expatiate upon even a portion of Pabawatu’s deportment. If we

attempt to describe it, we should say the lotuses of her lovely

feet, by means of their charms, the nails, constantly laugh at the

lotus of her hair, whilst her lovely slender calves emulate the

proud (light) of the two lamps lit for the Cupid who entered

the habitation of her body.— Kawsilumina.

There’is also a species of poetical composition (similar to

the English “ ballads’’ of a former day) called 56g viridu,

which is sung at festivals and other places of rejoicing,

without preparation or previous reflection, and upon a

subject selected, often suggested, at the spur of the moment.

Of this the following, from Munkotuwérala, one of the atten-

dants of the late Kandyan Minister Pilimé Talawa, and the

278 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [ Vou. IL, Parr Il,

author of a beautiful work called Sazga Raja guna alankare,

may serve as an example :—

(1) 3e@ 9 BS SQN O09 BB &E G2® SO

(2,66 ®@ 8 GiQS OOOO ODT) SBE COMS Ge SIO

(3) ©nGQOD OGD» PED QS eGSE @HBO ee sO

(4) 8S ®@ DEDEA BQOVMOTD G2OQS AGAE) QsvO

(1) To several chiefs have I sung to obtain clothes ; (2) if for my

inward coat I have received coarse cloth, (8) and although leaves

can be worn by being woven together, coarse cloth can I not wear

outermost ; (4) Chief Pilimé Talawa will, however, give me

(something fine*) as a token of remembrance.

There are also different kinds of “ puns ’”’ by poets, soaring

high in the immense regions of fancy ; and to give even a

sketch of these beauties of native literature is to exceed the

bounds of this Paper. I may however mention a few.

Under the head of pun I may include that which is known

as the English “acrostic.”” However, the Sinhalese lan-

guage, which has certain sounds with which one cannot

commence a line (e.g., @ 2), is ill-adapted to this species

of composition, which on that account is rare in the

Sinhalese. In the absence of a suitable specimen from a

book, I shall here present the reader with a letter forwarded

by the writer a few months ago to a friend :—

BE,2.

BOG BEDMLODID EO SAG GHB

BES ACPDHO srSHigsa aGeée

EWES OOAD SE YE BIMOS

QE DIS OKMAI YD O1WD MIOSH

& & & &

Rev. Bulatgama, of universally esteemed fame, like the moon in

* The words within parantheses in the translation are introduced

here, as elsewhere, to explain what the idiom of the language conveys

to the reader.

No. 5.—1850.] THE ELU LANGUAGE. | 279

autumn: pray kindly send me a correct book answering to the

first four letters of this stanza.

The following from the Kadviyasékaré is a specimen of a

stanza containing the same word repeated several times,

but conveying at each repetition a different meaning :—

(1) PGBS Ome GAD 3g GAD

(2) 5B AQHDD GOMOD SOD

(3) ABBECHH FOS) OD Go d)

(4) Cg Or GOD BE © a os

(1) The paroquet which extracts honey from the sweets of

flowers ;

(2) The bees which enter the widespread lofty mz forest ;

(3) The wild buffalo which destroys the ground and the forest

by its horns ;

(4) The rats daubed with glittering chalk (plumbago) which

enter the holes of trees.

Carrying the last plan a little further, the author of the

Kavminikondala has given us one line, which when repeated

four times conveys four several meanings :—

(1) DNMEE OGOCHSC

(2) DNMDES OGOGDSS

(3) DMNADES SEOCAECG

(4) DMNADES OGOC DEES

(1) The jungle trees became bright with the tender foliage ;

(2) The forest became bright by reason of the assemblage of

plantain trees ;

(3) The eloped wife glistened with (her) streaming tears ;

(4) The jungle was bent with (the weight of) the dew upon

the tender leaves.

The same elegant writer has given us several puns of

this kind, of which the reader will observe the following

stanza, consisting of ten letters in each line, when divided

into two may be read without the second halt, by supplying

280 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II. Parr IT.

its place with the first half read from the last letter; or

from the end to the beginning and from the beginning to

the end, as in the English word Glenelg.

BOBS : 883 Opes

BOORBE : €E0 Os

soeQ@s : SC¢ Ces

BOEGS : see Cl

(1) The lotus (Nelumbrium speciosum) reared in the water of

the river was opened ;

(2) The kéndatta (Cuculus melano-leucas)* obtained its great

delight, the water ;

(3) The noise of the birds that received the water echoed ;

(4) The moon that emitted rays on all sides lost her brilliancy.

From the same writer, abounding in puns of different

kinds, the following is selected as a specimen of a stanza

* A species of cuckoo, with a peculiarly plaintive cry. It is

supposed by the Sinhalese that this bird is “begging for water from

the clouds, since it cannot satisfy its thirst otherwise than by swallowing

drops of water in the air.” Some suppose that it has a hole or defect

in its beak or tongue which prevents it from sipping water. Mr. Wilson

has the following note with reference to this bird at page 14 of the

“ Mécha Duta ”:—

‘The Chataca is a bird supposed to drink no water but rain-water ;

of course he always makes a prominent figure in the description of wet

and cloudy weather. Thus, in the rainy season of our author’s

‘Ratu-Sagharé,’ or assemblage of seasons :—

DASIADOOCGUAMD SIS Hio MOOS,

630505 ano oxoepr 3a GICOTDans.

CEN ARO seo HVDIS G)sF<H0s

DEIN4002 OGIA WO HdeH 4002.

The thirsty Chataka impatient eyes

The promised waters of the labouring skies,

Where heavy clouds, with low but pleasing song,

In slow procession murmuring move along.”

In the translated “‘ Amarakésha” it appears that the Chataka is a

bird not yet well known, but that it is possibly the same as the Pzphia,

a kind of cuckoo ( Cuculus radzatus ).

No. 5.—1850.] THE ELU LANGUAGE. 281

composed of two letters in the alphabet, and in which are

incorporated all the vowel sounds :—

@DOD SOD) sy)

DA HM OD FH ®» a

Oa) O5nNH35 Qa a a

MMMM HaAQ@sy OD a

Birds of divers colours entered the forest; the nd (Mesua

Ferrea) and bakmi (Nauclia orientalis) became fresh (with

foliage) ; the unwise eloped wives have received no consolation ;

(and) the forests became rivers to the bathing elephants.

Illustrative of the decorations of style which the Sin-

halese poets make their study, 1 may also mention the

existence in their compositions of what may be termed

rhymes in the middle of astanza. This is very common

except in short metre. Of this species the following will

serve as an example :—

QOD D OF & OGD ES) SOHO & D) O

OED ED DB tH EHNASCWOMAIS HS

SHO@OD Ee th mnHD OBES & DS

BEE DA & 89D OS aes H ) Si

O Chief (Mudaliyar) Disaénayaka! unbounded in wealth by

reason of your valuable charities ! just as the increase of learning

in proportion to its impartation to others; on my bended knees

do I constantly pray that you will visit us.

The two following verses may be read in one diagram of

uniform construction by the omission of sixteen letters :—

“ () 64 CG 42°C & se

(2) 5am ax BES SG

(3) BOBArCE GdnCE 6 Ce

(4) ©OQOOCS ESGODAOS ¢ CG

* The numbers have reference to the lines in the diagram on page 282.

282 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. IL, Parr IT.

(1) The forest has received bright tender foliage.

(2) The heavens (vacuum) became bright with blue rainy clouds.

(3) The ponds have received their brightening (elements the) water.

(4) The world (itself) thus greatly brightened.

(5) @©E9 se &5e

(6) €E2y avd CMD

(7) e083 Ge BCS

(8) C8&SeCa e383

6s ©

“oe

The young peacocks delighted with the storm, and having

ascended the nearest but large mountains, commenced to play

about in divers (two) ways, by spreading their wings adorned

(wet) with blue. |

SDS BSICR.

y to ele els al v " de clo alo alo al

eg PATE] 2 Aa aR See ae ae ae

ee, ee. 3 cle. cle. le.

“op A oe “op i “e

NY A | ' 0

st K sy se st ae =< ED

@ 0 J, 0

oS [se ee DY lar 35 oP ag ae

ot'e, Ate, sie. cle. ole, a'e_ cle, ste, ce, 20. tien Sho 088 2818s 810s

ore) BES oot oe mM ae ae (mee "e8° 98" “aS

es ee NF SAN SS

pals alo gla al ale, alo, ele alo, alo

alo, >.

$3 SON eh Hath 6 “ap aC} CK iat eS

Coe

ied

«| @|m|aloa|s|oelo|a|s ja

“oy

Oe"

Ne,

y < J

lo, ate, al al

Ge op “e, 26

" ale, ale

°"e ° ‘ A oe

6. c\ \) J

oe se SK se |——— | is “t5-| ——— |-Sie- Se so

ale oo, le, ale ele

é oe" 9 2) a a 6 ae

" No al 'o, se clo clo alo Hoh 0

ese Bs Ae, FRO, SO Oe, wale. alo, ale a's, alo,

pa, 3 TT (Yee Ys tp Ge “eye “oe “ew

tes) G]@ [°2| 2 loo| ¢

5 6 7

I cannot resist the temptation of presenting the reader

with another diagram. It is the one in the annexed Plate

[Vor. IL, Part IL, No. 5, 1850.

JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON).

283*

ASHNQO OAH.

C3 ive) ~~

Al ~~ => oe) SN

——$<—$—

ofofojela(+|e|s|s|sie|#ieisielelelel

ste” TARE Re leaisid de cieial oe

ef @,o|s|olel[slololslalsialsa|+|s|s

\) \)

Vial 0

ale, clo, .c'e .a'o alo a'o

0 “08 C0 00 Ov eo H

eas | ae te

le, a"

“op “eo

le, ale.

ark)

1 oad)

t )

t's. -s'2. cle, ste, sie,

le. cle, ale, als a!

Oo “Ge o0° 20 “e,

‘\ op oe oO

ise

efetae ae ete alate aes

2 i

) \} , \y

e | | 8 | 8 | 8 = Se ae ae

a's ala_ alo ale alo ate

Rt A ae ate

soe)

eae

2 | os | 2 [s teaedhaede: : 815 | v| c + Tete sets t

Ig 0/5 al alele

ejo|@e|s}s| stele|= |e] @[e[elel+|=lels

5|8|¢

e|e|e|a|si|els|s|s|slelojolelslejele

@lojrlolalo|s

)

ct Ge) ay eae Ne Gp) aM. o =

ee ee ee ees, ee oes

Lome ON as

No. 5.—1850. ] THE ELU LANGUAGE. 283

(see page 283*) by Koratota Terunndnsé, who received a

handsome reward from his sovereign, Raj4dhi Réjasinha,*

for the cleverness and ability with which he introduced

into one diagram twelve well-meant elegant stanzas.

1. BEBKEHOC BBB ASS CCR OG

2. BOSEESD OsdbQBmne -qawm e

3. BEQDODBID SOHDHTID SOMES eC

4, BBaD BOM DOES DAD IDO CE

(4) I bow to the great Strzgana (Buddha),f who abstained

from idle praise (exaggeration) ; (3) who was firm, renowned,

* The writer has given his name and the date of his composition, &c.,

in the following stanzas. The Saka era (from the date of the reign of

aking of that name) is much in use among Sinhalese scholars. It

commences 78 years after the Christian era.

aa Monsicnd ans ok Ron)

CM 8568 68 BHOBSEO 8s Oe -9)

BM SEQ ODIE E€VSD 0B Gj aH

56 MD DAOC OONS MOGiS DO Yo) DH

Rev. Dhamméarama, the disciple of the Preceptor of three Sovereigns,

hath composed this novel diagram embodying twelve stanzas, in the sixth

year of the reign of Rajadhi Rajasinha, and in the year of Saka 1708 :—

GOBS EG GOBM HNO BsaRBe a

ON5S6 g¢ RSE DCS OHOE V99 Sosy @

ODD Ss CS sdaGade 2G or)

OOS3 ¢ a0 SE TK SIGH d) oi)

This king, having with delight seen with his eyes this diagram, like

unto a noose on the necks of his (the writer’s) rival poets, has made an

offering to this Chief Priest of an estate called Pallébedda, as

long as the earth shall endure (in perpetuity).

+ There are no less than twenty-six epithets for Buddha. They are

embodied in the following six lines from the ‘“ Namavaliya”’ :—

284 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vo1. II., Parr II.

and, like a precious gem, who extinguished the fire of metempsy-

chosis; (2) who was the chief of the world, blessed with

prosperity, who when king Kusa heard the lion’s roar, who (by

self-denial) extinguished in himself the allurements of sin and

vice,—who was gentle (cold) as the moon, benevolent, the saviour

of men, the ocean of river-like wisdom, and who destroyed the

weakness of the heart by means thereof.

1. MUSEMDSBSSMEOBODS

Fa)

Il 2. NOIDNMONHVHEODONsse 25)

') 3. MMNsBEEMNNEEBSZIneB Fam)

ra)

4, DHDDBNGGSONDSADVES mM

BOD ANS D6diy OMA2E67 FS e

eae saz Gadd ende E23 é

BONSAES, B5OD OG190 Hos ra

N6EDH5 Sd ED6E wosd & S

BOCIQSO: o@de BE wd BOO os

Eas HBoeian SD NOS e194 os

(1) #6225, derived from eee (Sanskrit), means “allwise ’’'; (2) sed.

from @2ea)a (Sanskrit), means ‘‘ master” or “teacher”; (3) ©667¢5 means

“the enemy of Mara,” a god inimical to Buddha ; (4) @®:a¢ 67, from

@Oozsf and ¢7E6z, means “ the teacher of Niwan’’—the summum bonum

of the Buddhist—the doctrine of the extinction or annihilation of the

human soul ; (5) @8¢, compounded of 943 and gg, means “ supreme

intelligence ” ; (6) #@zye is the Elu expression of the Sanskrit sOa0ey

22g, ‘eyes on all sides” —omniscient ; (7) 68763, “ five eyes,” having

reference to the five powers of sight which his followers attribute to

Buddha—they are, first, ®ezes, which means @edgz0, “bodily eye,”

the power whereof was so great that it is said he could see the distance

of sixteen miles just as we can see at the distance of sixteen inches,

and that it was composed of five colours; z.e., the eye-lids were

blue, their sockets glossy yellow, their corners red, the whites of the

eyes snowy white, and their black jet black ; secondly, GBDgie5 or EHEre,

‘ godly eye,”’ which had the power of seeing that which the @esze3 could

not penetrate ; thirdly, szadz6 or 67801470, “eye of wisdom,” which

means in English “the mind’s eye,” capable of an insight into

superlative wisdom; fourthly, 2)e¢70, “ Buddha's eye,” a sight which

none possessed but those who became Buddha by predestination ; and

fifthly, s@2eo76 (vide supra), “ omniscience ’—(8) Gee, from & and

No. 5.—1850. | THE ELU LANGUAGE. 289

(4) Bow ye to the peerless (Buddha) of golden rays, without

pride and the evil propensities of humanity ; (3) whose face was

like the moon, who had beauty which pleased all, and a voice like

that of the Indian cuckoo ; (2) who was not covetous, was without

a thirst for evil desires, unavaricious, five-eyed, and the emanci-

pator of hell; (1) who was blameless, precious as a gem, not led

away by the allurements of royalty, and preserved the mind from

vacillation.

1. MADGESBOBNES GHAQMEVHEOD

2. DO,~BHOEDDSOBD DOOMDMNO

3. DDMNEDAEDSEABHNSO MMS

4, DNNANAHOASAGHDICCES

III.

oy oy

Qs, “father of the world”; (9) eae or EsQ CS means “ of ten-fold

power,” having reference to the ten powers of the body and the ten powers

of the mind which his followers attribute to Buddha; (10) @%¢, from

Gs) “to conquer” and 9¢ “supreme ”’—the supreme conqueror—which

means the conqueror of death @6 (the powers of the soul—s.deDaD,

vide Clough’s Dictionary ; lust, anger, ignorance, self-confidence, and

pride—@anees ; merit and demerit—eeReoex2m6 ; and Od, god of that

name before explained); (11) saOsvAEoz or SODAHESz, from sOsx

a6 (Sanskrit), ‘‘ good in every way’ ; (12) 8S3@< (the word in the

text), from @e< (Sanskrit) “full of prosperity ” ; (13) ©@29@, from

@GAa® (Pali), means “chief of the world” ; (14) sme has different

meanings, one of which, according to its plain derivation, means “ the

chief who is gone to good (Nirvana)” from gg “good,” @a¥ “received,”

and 9¢ “chief” ; (15) 26¢9a75, “men-converting driver,” having

reference to the facility with which he converted mankind to his

doctrines, just as easily as a coachman leads his horse ; (16) So, a term

as also used to one of the heathen gods Ganadeviyd, and means, when

applied to Buddha, “the peerless,” who has not his like—himself

supreme; (17) @@de6, “king, by reason of his righteousness” ;

(18) s@st vide ~@se, without the adjunct o¢; (19) ag cit will

exceed the bounds of this Paper to enter into a definition of this term,

suffice it, however, to state that it means) ‘“‘a pandit,” “ blossoming,” or

“‘ awaking from sleep ” ; (20) BoC@IQGz, “‘ teacher of the three worlds ”’ ;

(21) o@5e, “chief of the world” ; (22) Sgede, “all wisdom acquired

by himself” ; (23) 88@s/, “ altogether a beautiful person ” ; (24)Gaa09

‘‘ chief of the world” ; (25) SHac~@sress, “chief of the three worlds” ; and

(26) @29, “ conqueror.”

286 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [ Vou. IL, Parr II.

(4) Bow ye to the supreme Buddha, who was without lust,

decrepitude and its concomitant ills, the donor of donors, the

admiration of the good, who arrived at the goal of metem-

psychosis ; (8) who pleased the priesthood, was houseless, a

stranger to distress ; (2) who was humble and agreeable, gave

consolation to men, and procured Nvana ; (1) who was easily

satiated, quick of perception, self-denying, renowned in the world,

and (who moreover) granted Brahma’s prayer.

1. CE BCEEE DDADADDIOWMEES 6

2. BABSMNEOCOSBESVEOMDVS G

3. RBMDOBEOS MBEMBOMOMS E

4. BQOIDBESOSDSSDOHEDD ¢

lV.

(4) Bow ye to the feet of Buddha, who was a treasure of

compassion, successful in profound meditation (that which brings

its object fully and undisturbedly before the mind), and pleased all

men ; (3) who was like the new brilliant moon, did not secretly sin,

and gave Nivana ; (2) who loved not sinful men, and practically

carried out his profound doctrines ; (1) who could dive with his

into other’s minds, and who cared “nota straw ” (24 gr.) for the

impure human body which the ignorant regard as a banner.

1. BQHGQGWNMODwAEesBonMSB cas)

y 2. BOMESE GSE BOE DBagQescs 6

é 3. BSQHWINK SHYEMDOEOHSOS a)

4. BOSCNDBIEBODSONODSEND 83

(4) Bow ye to him who had no impediment against seeing, was

unintoxicated with vain-glory, the chief of Mivana, resident in

forests, and who enjoyed the food of meditation ; (3) who was not

enticed away by desires, was deserving of offerings, worthy of

adoration, and had no lusts ; (2) who was the (victorious) banner

of the world, who obtained the fruitful Mivana, enjoyed laudable

prosperity, subjugated evil concupiscence and all improper desires,

ceased to wander (in the regions of metempyschosis), was able to

convert men, and was self-denying and omniscient.

(9)

(oe)

No. 5.—1850. | THE ELU LANGUAGE,

(1. BEDNOMDMEDESMSHEgye Ca)

2. BHAHDDAMDOVABDOEDGED a)

8. BSESESCHODI MAMEOMI7D a)

4. BEBBDEMNDNDMNMESEQDOO ®

VI.

(4) Bow ye to him who, at the foot of the Bd tree, by the

subjugation of evil passions and lusts, attained pre-eminence,

who sent many to Mvana, dried the springs of sin, and was in

speech bold as a lion ; (3) who was of young and tender body, and

of superior mental and bodily accomplishments, who continued in

moral merit, and destroyed the morbid appetites ; (2) who was

pre-eminent in merit and happiness, unattracted by the female

sex, and peculiarly fit for Mivana ; (1) who was steady and

uniform in the observance of religious and moral obligations, and

wishful of pleasing the priesthood ; who acted up to the letter of

his doctrines, and was a treasury of penance.

1. €EECSBNDSABBHABRBIONMNAAND ca)

2. ESSBDMNICHESBDEADEND @®

3. ELNDHODNASITNDVEOOHESt @®

4, EMOEDBOEMDOEHOMAGESD @®

Vil.

(4) Bow ye with pleasure to him who gave Mvana and conso-

lation to people, had the speech of wisdom, and was the chief

of the world ; (8) who was very full of telesadhutdtga,* who

revealed to men the hidden treasures of morality, and did not

annoy or distress any being ; (2) who was the chief of men—

humble, and dazzling with the resulting prosperity of hundreds

of meritorious acts, and sinned not ; (1) who was sinless, firm

as Mahaméra, possessed of chatussatya} ; and for whom love

was begotten in the minds of wise Brahmins.

* Telesadhuténga are thirteen religious ordinances to be observed by

the priesthood, and which, with their minute subdivisions, are too

numerous for detail here.

{ Chatussatya are tour articles of belief in Buddhism, and are the

following :—A belief, 1st,in that certainty of sorrow ; 2nd, that it proceeds

from sensual desires ; 3rd, that the subjugation of both is by Nivana;

and 4th, in the means of obtaining that happy state,

288 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr II.

1. MAMSEOMHODCEEnNABADoD BW

VII 2. MEBEDSO CEBASMONOGGSED DW

" 13. MBBSBHOMDVGHOIDOMDMNVMSG zB

4, DMOMPMAOEMDSESBSOMEOO ray)

(4) Bow ye to Buddha, who was pure, and wishful of subju-

gating the passions and evil desires ; (8) who died to die no more,

was without desires, fond of the forest, benevolent, and unqua-

lified for the laity ; (2) who was robed, handsome, firm, and

unintoxicated with vanity, and had tenfold-wisdom; (1) who

possessed six species of intelligence superior to that of all men,

was infinite in wisdom, and obtained offerings from gods and men.

1. BODDRDEMDGEOWDHNSCHBMOS &

2. BEDO SHGHOHAHHISHDOGWMVE &

IX. 13 amaimensgdodmatges 8

4. BE BCSOHBHBHHHAEaneBBB =B

(1) I bow unto him who had no affliction or sorrow, was

wishful of redeeming others, was like unto a ship (which wafted

men over the ocean of metempsychosis), and free from desire to sin ;

(2) who was of glowing splendour, chief of the priesthood—had no

delight in witnessing the fights of beasts and birds, and shunned

the allurements of hell ; (3) who was the chief of science and of

the fine arts, was least desirous of asking (so as to subject

himself to ignominy) ; (4) who with his heart gauged the world—

was a master mind, a store-house of wise designs (whereby and

by reason of his ordinances men obtained Nivana)—the chief of

the wise, and the holiest of the holy.

1. HHAGHESE MNHDHMHEDBESS &

2. ADOTMOEDONSVBSOKSES &

3. ANSSVEVAABVINYBMDOVO &

4, DEHEDHSMABENGEDBDONOE &

(3) Bow ye (to Buddha) who will be born no more, the father

of the priesthood ; (1) the chiefest of the chief—chief by reason of

his moral and religious lectures—who extinguishes sorrow—

attracted many to himself, whose smile played amidst the rays of

No. 5.—1850. | THE ELU LANGUAGE. 289

his white brilliant teeth ; (4) whose word was the theme of the

wise, who was nof idle, and the chief of men ; (2) whose word

had a deep signification, whose voice was sweet, and whose

prowess was great.

1. BNMESODD CMODKBEORBMOD FH

2. BECNHVDEVDNEHSEHSCOME ra)

3. BCOBDAMNE OHSBSEESERDD vam)

4. BBNMBIE BROMMOCGOH

(2) Bow ye to him who was of a fully developed body—

Xl.

avoided Anangeya’s flowery charms, and was engaged in deep

meditation regarding Mivana ; (1) who pleased all, resided in the

country, was of six colours, peaceful, and actuated with righteous

principles ; (4) was worthy of praise, had a fascinating speech—

and gave to beggars without question ; (4) who was the chief of

the Sdkiya race, great and happy, well clad, worthy of adoration ;

and who subjugated the passions.

1, ENDED AS SHSOaEHDOM CE

2. ESMOAMDVES MESMOSEHODAS CE

3. EBOMOE DBHSACOSEMEAD e

4. GGEEDOS) ramaBeSeee C

XIL.

(1) Bow ye to him who was the delight of men, and devoid of

vicious inclinations, was born of an illustrious race, who enjoyed

in meditation the fruits of vana; (2) which men procured as

soon as his words reacked their ears ; (3) (bow ye him) who was

moderate in speech, who swept away all fear, and frightened the

three daughters of Mara ; (4) who was like unto a banner, who

raised the banner of victory in all his actions, who had an insight

into things in the earth, the air, and the water; who was

resplendent, and was (moreover) pure at heart.*

* The above, although a free translation, made with the assistance of

several commentaries, is nevertheless—being confined to each line, and

therefore without any attempt at arrangement—less elegant than it

should otherwise prove. The governing words of each sentence ‘ Bow

ye” or “I bow” will be found placed at the beginning of each line

with which the writer has commenced the translation.

290 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. IT., Parr II.

There is also another species of pun called 90@ suvala, or

“double-meaning verse,” much esteemed by the Sinhalese.

It is to be found, though sparingly, in several of the best

authors. Inthe Kdvyasékaré we find the following :—

DBOSE OR OM

WSSEEBO Bat Ky)

GOES DCB Qa

DOSE HDMOHS SBECDEH OD)

Free from many faults—

I. @@Ie2S).... 4.5. DION ete: Slots}

possessed of previous (ly obtained or done) merit (and)

intelligence,

Be DS), ssc veuwe ZAOCIC CO On eee nc esto)

imbued with faith.

Bet EOE Cesc sees OEgROs

Woman, by reason of those qualities, is like ‘ grammar.’’*

4, OSE... .0 DEHOCWSY. 0.00000. Dooce see BEC DEH

This comparison is explained by the same stanza con-

veying different ideas, as follows :—

It is by reason of (the following) properties that

2 ro a ee DAOC ...ceeeee

she is like the symbols of sound:

DES So 0000000. 8G OADGH

that is to say—

1. ‘* Nat” and “ varada”’ are produced by elision.t

2. The verb is the seventh section.{

* The word here rendered “ grammar” isin the Sighalese a compound

term, which means the “‘ symbols of sound” (sadalakunu).

f As oot and Ode are produced by the elision or lopping of gaat

and 426é, so woman, according to the first translation, was shown to be

blameless, lopped of all her faults.

t The verb which is the subject of the seventh section of the grammar

conveys an act, as in the agency which is indicated by previously done

or obtained merit.

No. 5.—1850.] THE ELU LANGUAGE. 291

BIO Co ewe -\-is< D015 Mace CV tls sores CESS

3. The word “hedahili ” is produced by substitution.*

AHZE BROD...000-..EOGS

The above conveys both a rule of grammar and an

eulogium upon the female sex. In either sense it is

grammatically correct, in both senses it is elegant, and in

neither is it defective in imagery.

These lines afford us an opportunity to ascertain the date

of the “ Sidatsangarava.” For although many a Sinhalese

scholar believes that the grammarian who professes to

write his work upon the precepts of “ unerring custom ”’

after the established usage of eminent writers, has borrowed

most of his illustrations—such as 2e¥ or exoy—from the

Kaviyaséharé, yet I think, apart from the modernism of the

style of the last-mentioned work,—a fact which sufficiently

refutes the above opinion,—there is almost conclusive evi-

dence to support the more generally prevailing belief that

“ the last-mentioned work was in point of date subsequent to

that of the grammar.” I say there is nearly conclusive

evidence, because the poet, in reference to the verb in the

stanza under consideration, places it in the seventh section

or chapter. of grammar—a division which, as far as my

inquiries have extended, is to be found in no other work on

erammar except the “Sidatsangarava.” Taking then, the

date of the grammar to have been before the Kaviyaschare,

we are by no means at a loss to say that it was written

after the Kavsilumana, from which the grammarian has

quoted the following passage :—

MO BED PODSY OOPMNE 7357007.

She came slowly, according to the king’s wish, and hid

herself aside, &c.

* As by ades (a term of grammar for giving possession to one sovnd

a different one) eS becomes H:68G, so the naturally unbelieving

sinful woman was imbued with faith.

bio t M

292 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON), [Vot. I1., Parr II.

Kawsilimina was written by Kalikéla Sahitya

Sarawajayna, or King Pandita Pardkrama Bahu III,

who flourished a.p. 1266, and the Kaviyasékaré was

composed by Totagamuwé in the 34th year of the

reign of Parakrama Bahu VI., who ascended the throne

A.D. 1410.

Between these two dates, therefore, was the “ Sidatsanga-

rava’’ composed. But we are still unable to state at what

precise period of time (during an interval which covers a

space of 178 years) it was published.

Extending, however, our investigations a little farther, it

may not prove to be an idle theory, nor one inconsistent with

that which we have just propounded, to identify Patirda,

to whom allusion is made at the conclusion of the “ Sidat-

sangarava,’ with the Wirasinha Patirdja mentioned

in the introduction to the “ Pansiyapanas Jatakaya.” The

grammarian, in a sort of dedicatory address with which he

concludes, says :-—

‘““May Patiraja, like unto a banner on the summit of the

mansion-like village Radula, and who by the arm of his exten-

sive ramparts governs the whole of the southern (division of)

Layka, be long prosperous! I have composed the ‘Sidatsay-

garava’ at his kind request, and with a view to disseminate

(the knowledge of) the rudiments of cases, &c., in the native

(Sinhalese) language. The wise man, who shall have learnt its

rules both primary and secondary, and shall have made grammar

his study—having with facility removed the pretensions of the

learned, who are elated with pride—will constantly hoist up the

flag of victory in (this land of) Lanka, like the boundless

ocean with the renown of its waves widespread in all

directions,”

Patiraja was not a king, but a chieftain in the south of

Ceylon, “ who by the arm of his extensive ramparts governed

Southern Lanka,” and “at whose request this grammar was

composed.” Nor is it consistent with the known history of

No. 5.—1850. | THE ELU LANGUAGE. 293

this Island to regard him as a king of Ceylon; nor indeed

is he named by the grammarian with a dignified expression

‘such as to justify a like supposition. And that he was a

minister of the ruling sovereign, and clothed with the

authority of a petty governor, we may without difficulty

believe, since we have numerous instances of the kind in

the ** Mahavansa,”

Having thus far arrived in the chain of our investigations,

the question presents itself, When did Patiraja flourish? We

can only obtain an answer to this in case his identity with

Wirasinha Patiraja, ‘“‘the supreme minister” named in

the following extract, be established :—

“ It is well that good people, having given their ears and bent

their minds, should hear the Elu version of the History of the

Lives, composed without departing from the method of the writer

of Atuwa, and with the assistance of the Supreme Minister

Wirasinha Patiraja, and at the request of the good Minister

Parakrama, who commended the translation into the Elu of the

lectures called ‘The Five Hundred and Fifty Lives,” &.—

Introduction.

The like laudable exertions in either case bestowed by the

minister in the promotion of native literature, besides the

similarity of name given to the chieftain mentioned in each

of the above selections, prove the identity of the patron under

whose auspices the “ Pansiyapanas Jatakaya” was trans-

lated into Elu, with the provincial chieftain who directed

the publication of the EluGrammar. Taking their identity

to be thus established, we are enabled—with the assistance

ef a tradition current in this Island, and supported by

evidence as to its truth, that the “ Pansiyapanas Jatakaya ”’

was translated during the reign of a king of the name of

Pardkrama Bahu, who had Hastisalapura (Kurunégala)

for the seat of government — to ascertain as nearly as

possible the date of the “Sidatsangarava,” by fixing

upon Pandita Pardkrama Bahu IV. (4.p. 1300—1847),

M 2

294 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. U1, Parr II.

the only king of that name who had his court at

Kurunégala.*

There are many other Yewoala verses in several books ; but

it will suffice to make one more selection from the Yoga-

ratnakaré—a book no less celebrated for its doctrines on

medicine than esteemed for the elegance of its versification:-—

S83 Qe Bde ©)

DE slaew &5o So

SRE OX DDH oS

DED BOOMHYOMDS HVO ro)

First translation, taking the subject of the stanza as-

Buddha :— | ,

Always do I bow to the Mahamera-like Buddha, who

BOOS EO? oss, oorinn COCO OS} arses BSQLH

surrounded by all castes and races—

emitting lovely rays—

HBE...DDHS... bed

possessed unchangeable fruitful virtues.

BBB apdeoeeceenss On eC red

Second translation, taking the subject of the stanza as the

Mahémera :—

Always do I bow to the Buddha-like Mahamera, whot

CN OD Os-o sore Oeen eine cienons BEDHN...GODS

encircled by all hills and rocks—

BOSSA Ge... CSE) e 5 sta si QE

* The following remarks from the learned translator of the “ Maha-

vansa” support the above theory:—“ Pandita Parakrama Bahu IV.

(Kurunégala, a.p. 1319-1347).—Relationship not stated ; devoted his-

time exclusively to religious observances, and to the building and

establishing sacred edifices at Kurunégala. Many religious and

historical works, among them the ‘ Mahavansa,’ were compiled under

his auspices.” — Turnour.

+ This is used in the masculine gender; and it is not a little

remarkable that the Elu has not the neuter, although it is known to

most of the Oriental languages.

No. 9.—1850. | THE ELU LANGUAGE, 299

resplendent with pleasing lustre—

ES weunse sos. DIIO)...Cve>

has firm substantial qualities.

S250). O)..:. GOD

I should not omit to add to the above one other species of

composition called Dedas, or “dialogues.” They are generally

‘the language of imagination, wound up at the conclusion

with some reality or praise (as the case may be) which the

writer wishes to convey. The following from the Perakumda-

sirita is a good illustration :—

@WSHE BO QHE BD siMOOD Oe D

OOO OY AS EBs GOAMOOS EQ OY

@c8 BSEsy @H OEM WS GD rey)

Des AMC omdIqMHgsy sQcrwz, Do

_ The above, when rendered into a dialogue, is read as

follows :—

The Ocean :—oseae. O Moon!

The Moon:—&® QHe. What, O Ocean ?

The Ocean :—B9 2,OG2A DEH. Why does thou

hide thyself behind the skirts of the shore ?

The Moon:—@O2® OS Bo ESsy GSMVSS EQH

@¢s Sé&eoi. (Because) the enlightened King

Parakrama gives away his (elephants) to those who

are in quest of elephants and horses.”

The Ocean :—Q DENS WSO EDD DED Di ESD owd

QeMNgss SAor ga. (Nay) the offering of that

silver brilliancy (gentleness) of rays, which thou

hast emitted is (alone) sufficient to please him

(towards thee, and deter him from such an act).f

* This answer conveys toa person well read in the mythology of

the East greater information than the words themselves impart. “I do

‘so, lest the enlightened King Parakrama, who gives away elephants to

those who are in quest of elephants and horses, should also part with

amy own elephant, which is my habitation.”

{+ The ocean is here represented to have spoken thus: “ Nay, the

offering of that silver-brilliancy (gentleness) of rays which thou hast

emitted is alone sufficient to please him towards thee, and to prevent

him from giving away thy habitation.”

296 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [ VoL. II., Parr IT.

Having thus given a brief, and doubtless an imperfect,.

account of Sinhalese poetry, I shall now proceed to show

a few rules of Versification or Prosody.

Quantity, feet, and pauses are necessarily constituent parts.

of all verses ; and one great advantage which the Sinhalese

possess over the Western nations. is the existence in the

language of the former of symbols for long and short sounds,

indubitably expressed, and without reference to usage (very

often an uncertain arbiter) for the ascertainment of their

quantity. It is for this reason that I have throughout used

the word sound instead of letter. I must, however, not omit

to mention that there is a poetical license which permits.

the use of a long letter for a short or a short for a long

letter; but this is very rare indeed in gocd compositions.

The word &€ pil, “short,” in the following line, is used for

the long &S pili, “ clothes ”’ :—

OANES® OEMs gemMaY B75 «GSE OMEO EoD

Even if leaves can be worn by being woven together,

Coarse cloth can I not wear outermost ?

The melody of the Sinhalese verse depends chiefly upon

the sounds or letters being short or long,—not to mention

what is common to all poetry, the choice of words, the seat

of the accent, the pause, and the cadence. As in English,

the ccesural pause” is not without effect in the Sinhalese.

Of this, the following beautiful lines from the celebrated

Guttila Jataka is a good illustration :-—

BN oa Ea reels OT nib. g

SzLodgE moQodd sq 6: : O@REPHERGS A

2 fe Oa ig ee 2 2 oem 2

SONTSOBOMOMNOES OS : OOD) 2 > BEAMS @)9:

* This pause sometimes falls before the middle of a line, but it does:

not thereby render the poetry less sweet.

No. 5.—1850.] THE ELU LANGUAGE. 297

Pletal No ON dee) 2 8

MBMSOBOEMALOOCOE O48 | > DPDSODMNBsIS Ds

to to 8 SP 1s ee

QDVOMDOsdsdado ox 3:80 3: QHoeeWeNomy

How can I describe the dances of the goddesses—whose hands

move like lightning, and as if intent upon portraying a mass of

pictures—whose feet move after the music with the same ease

with which gold adheres to mercury—and who look at the com-

pany from the corners of their eyes with the sharpness of Cupid’s

darts ?*

The short sounds or letters are called duhu or lahu, marked

in the Sinhalese thus, —; and the long sounds, or a/+ sounds,

together with their respective vowels, with whose assistance

they are pronounced, are called guru, marked thus, —.

Three of these sounds compose a foot, and by a diversity

of arrangement these tri-syllables produce e:ght kinds of

“ The chief accomplishments of the goddesses are hereby portrayed.

Mr. Wilson says at p. 76 of the Megha Duta :—

“Tt is to the Commentators also that 1 am indebted for the sole

occupation of the goddesses being pleasure and dress. That fact—

alee Seistosis to sing, to dance,

To dress, and troll the tongue, and roll the eye—

constitutes a very well-educated female according to the custom of

Hindustan.” ;

Amongst the Sinhalese, however, it is different. Except amongst

inferior classes, all the above so-called ‘ ornaments of nature,”’ save

elegance in dress, are looked upon by the Sinhalese as unbefitting the

female sex.

7 An @¢@ al letter is a consonant which cannot be sounded without

the help of, and being preceded by, a vowel sound, and which has its

inherent vowel sound suppressed by a symbol on the top of the letter ;

e.g.. GZ cannot be sounded without a vowel; this, together with its

vowel, produces one compound sound : and they are therefore reckoned

as two short letters or sounds, or as equal to one long sound. Thus,

@QD mama = 8 m = Osy man.

298 JOURNAL, k.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL, Parr II.

feet ;* and without attending to any particular classifica-

tion, I shall here enumerate them with their corresponding

classical terms :— )

Quantity. Greek. Sinhalese. Meaning. Sanskrit.

2 Selick Oddo godly madd

2—~ ~ — Anapoest DIGaDawy windy anosd

3 ~~ —— Bacchic Senos water G@o@ss

4 —w~ Amphibrach 8d,a@ad sun SAO

5 ——— Molossus YSQoR earth @Onoa9

6——w~ Antibachic Mmaeonos air Dao

7—wvYwW~ Dactyl Daas moon ®@oss

§—~— Cretic BRoost fire SHos

As in all matters emanating from Buddhists, poetry is

with them attended with its good and bad effects upon the

poets. But, unlike the Sanskrit, Sinhalese poetry need

be free from bad feet only at the beginning of a stanza.

The Sinhalese poets have, however, little attended to such

a slavish fear, and it seems have freely given vent to their

muse wherever they could elegantly express themselves.

1. Three short sounds, as in déminis, compose the Déva-

gané, and it is esteemed a good foot.

“ The diagram, by means whereof the quantity of poetry is ascertained,

is indeed a clever expedient or device, called ged dsad<m2s, “ spread-

ing the rythmical feet.” It is borrowed from the Sanskrit and adapted

to the exigencies of the Sinhalese. I shall merely content myself at

present with the following, which is the correct mode in which the

eight rythmical feet are placeii, and which is just sufficient to ascertain

the quantity of any piece of poetry composed of three letters :—

Sinhalese. Greek.

I NS Ne (—--—

2 = a a Say ue ee

42 | Lis PAD iy

Filer as oie Slag

6 —A— RO ey Ste

8 — — —]J lL-y-vrw~

To enter into a detail of this subject will necessarily occupy several

pages, which [ can hardly afford at present.

‘=

No. 5.—1850. | THE ELU LANGUAGE. Zu)

Example.

Tibrach.

—~

OODES EBA oy

HDD DUN oewdBst ot

Boas oT awe ay

@OCOMDBWSE SHMOANGOdc sI—Kadviyaschare.

The second institute of religion is said to be compounded of

five ingredients ; the taking—the deceit—the intent to steal—

another’s property—and the knowledge thereof.*

2. When a long or a/ sound is preceded by two short

sounds, as in speciés, the rythmical foot is called Wayagane,

one of the bad feet. The Sinhalese have a belief that the

author of Guttila Jataka suffered transportation—a misfor-

tune, the result of his beautiful work having this foot at its

very commencement. That his first stanzais an anapoest is

true enough ;f but whether he at all suffered banishment

is not correctly known except from tradition.

* This definition of the crime of theft, furtum, seems to be more

comprehensive than the one in the Institutes— Purtum est contractatio

Sraudulosa lucri faciendi gratia, vel ipsius ret, vel etiam usus ejus, posses-

stonsive. 1. 4t. 1§. ‘The text, when freely rendered into English, runs :

‘“'The second institute of religion is said to be (the abstaining from) theft,

which comprehends the fraudulent taking away of another’s property

with intent to steal (/uc7i causd), knowing that it is of another.”

{ The stanza referred to is the following :—

BeBSBSN8 Sz

OEBSSCDOMANSBAS Oz

ODOCHDI ODOC STE Ox

QED VACA Boeig Sz

I bow to (his) intelligent Highness (Buddha)—the preceptor of the

three worlds (who), having subjugated all the evil propensities of his

nature—embellished with thirty (corporeal) beauties, thrived in the

(resulting) prosperity of hundreds of meritorious acts.— Gutiila.

Notr.—‘‘ The subjugation of the evil propensities of human nature ”’

is a doctrine of Buddhism, according to which none but a Buddha can

enter into that holy state without fault or sin—a doctrine, too, similar to

one of the three doctrinal maxims inculcated in the Elusinian Mysteries,

“ the attainment of mental peace by a course of penetential purification.”

300 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL, Parr IT.

Example.

Anapoest.

———-

aseag@edcge aD

DMRswaMm BHeacs cam)

mosaCES Dd

OEasvané, SAQADEGE a— Kaviyasékareé.

The king of the Nagas who (lost in admiration) listened to the

sweet songs complimentary to himself oft repeated by the Naga

woman, was only interrupted by tears of joy.

Versified.

The king of serpents bent his ear

To th’ oft-repeated lays ;

And did, with breathless silence, hear,

The music of his praise.

‘The minstrel fair he views and hears,

Deep lost in reverie,

Until a flood of joyful tears

His captive soul sets free.

3. When one short sound is followed by two or long al

sounds, as in /dnéstas, the foot is called Jalagané, and it

is esteemed good.

Example.

Bacchie.

—_—~— SS.

SFY

F Qo @2 SY 5S HD ¢

RIMDSOLS woods ¢

@OQBS) EOD G

820 EOS OOHESIA) e—i0.

As the divine doctor by means of his heavenly antidote re-

moves the malignant poison (the Bodisat), with an intention to

remove the inordinate heaviness of his (the Brahmin’s) heart,.

said :—

No. 5,—1850. | THE ELU LANGUAGE. 301

4. A lovg or a/ sound preceded and followed by a short

sound, as in dmicis, is the HMirugané, a bad foot productive

of sickness.

Example.

Amphibrach.

—_—.

Ee sd 85 E st of 35)

BEET BHD CEDTOD &

WCGOd € OO OD OH BA

HOCIOSOSCSHOOIB@ta) 25—Kusa Jataka.

Ancient, righteous monarchs disregarded the faults of fools (the

ignorant), of poets, of children, and of wives.

). Three long or a/ sounds, as in déctérés, compose the

Bumigané, which is a good foot.

Example.

Molossus.

RR ———

ads TONAH ra)

Oge€HVEeEBHSEECD Dd)

S0OHD06 €5O can)

GQOORLSE DOD SOHDIH BD)

The (ten) meritorious gifts (charities) are rice, water, garments,

beds, flowers, scents, ointments, oil for the lamp, habitation

(lodging), and conveyance.

6. When two long or a/ sounds are followed by a short

sound the foot is called A’kasagané, a bad one,

Antibachic.

————

6064 SOC58& a

HXDoes Tone oad Bd

ODDONAOSOMIOSASOWAOcds

Some persons die from (diseases of) da, the constitutional parts

of the body ; or dos, the functions of life ; or mala, the excretions.

of the body ;—others die from folly, (excessive) lust, or evil

302 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL., Parr II.

passions ;—others from unrighteous acts ;—and others again from

causes (immediately} proceeding from kings, thieves, and

enemies.*

7. When two short sounds are preceded by a long or al

sound, as in cdrmind, the foot is termed Chandragané, a

good one.

Keample.

Dactyl.

—

et DEd5edHd1enOss dod

AGONIQLEDd acd dod

NE eDOaTDWsASEoBead

OMEDONIOMEW ESdod

The far-famed monarch having descended from his stout ele-

phant, walked with alacrity, inspecting the park, amidst flower

trees echoing the buzz of the bees, and enjoying the cool air

impregnated with (the sweets of) jasmine (Jasminum grandifto-

rum) and tdda (oleander) flowers.

8. The last and the most objectionable foot is the Gini-

gané, consisting of a short sound preceded and nelle by

a long or a/ sound, as in Castitas.

Cretic. Example.

Pe neg Nem

O20 ee GEEDOS O88 EDOCCECSER HS @o

SSIS O88 BHDMOG OF GOVADSHNgEQHHOVD Qo

WHOS OF GEMASOCOCOS OES VOVMODNGBses Bs

®Q@omos sdVsETON O8 DIOHdSOEEENOHH sj

* 6 dd, ©6,8 dos, and OB mala, according to the doctrines of the Sigha-

lese books on medicine, are the three constituent parts of the human

frame, and whence all distempers result. Dd comprehends: 1 taste, 2

blood, 3 flesh, 4 fat, 5 bone, 6 marrow, and 7 semen; dos comprehends

bile, phlegm, and wind ; and malaare the seven excretions of the seven ¢;

d.e., 1 phlegm, 2 choler, 3 ear-wax, serum, &c., 4 sweat, 5 nails and

hair, 6 excrement ; and 7 rheum, sediment.

+ Vide translation, supra.

No. 5.—1850. | THE ELU LANGUAGE. : 303

Besides the avoidance of evil feet, a serious clog in the

way of elegant versification, one other difficulty is chiefly

attributable to the necessity of avoiding the use of certain

letters which are deemed objectionable by writers of

great authority. The author of “Sidatsangardva’’ has

laid down the following rule:—

OMDSOSSE DMS EHH ID o)

GOVOMDMS DNIANS6od5e9 a)

BHOMSOSSO Ses HOOP EDD S

DENIGVIBSS MSM ENS ro)

The above, when freely rendered into Hnglish, means :—

Of the alphabet,* 5, a, @, ©, 6, J, ¢, D, 8, @, and ° are evil

characters; 6, 6, ®, ©, and © are human characters; and the

rest, @, @, O, 2, O, ¢, B, &, G, are divine characters ; any one of

which last must be preferred to the human characters, both in

the beginning of a stanza as well as before and after the name of

any person mentioned therein. The evil letters, as being

destructive of all prosperity, are to be avoided at those places.

GQONCFOOO MESSE EOOE™ Bo

OIE, MADE GGWOOM OW NHeNg3 Ha

MOOV BOISOMSVED OMOO By9

OBSSHORAIDE MDVOSIMOOHIA) Dd

By dividing the alphabett into four, so as to produce the

letters ¢, @, 5), and ©@ respectively in the beginning of

each division, the following diagram consisting of eight

classes is produced :—

* T. e., five vowels and twenty consonants, without reference to the

long vowels, since they are produced from the short.

The Sidatsangardva confines the Elu alphabet to ten vowels and

twenty consonants ; vide supra.

304 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr II.

Buffalo.

Serpent

Raven.

p os) }

The first class letters, called Nakul, “ weesel,”’ are inimical

or opposed to the fifth, called Saputa, “ serpent’; the second,

Miya, “ buffalo,” to the fifth, Turanga, “horse”; the third,

Mahavat, “ owl,” to the seventh, Biliputu, “raven”; and the

fourth, Vaga, “tiger,” to the eighth, Suwrangan, “ deer.”

All the characters opposed to the first letter of a person’s

name must be avoided both before and after that person’s

name.

It is also laid down as a rule of versification in several

books of authority, that it is objectionable to rhyme a

stanza with any of the following sounds: @&, dD, ®, and sv,

unless the penultimate letter, 7. ¢., the letter immediately

preceding any one of the above characters, be the same in

all the four lines ; * ¢. g.:—

cS.

EGS) WH OD asJe¥)

7® E290 AE Oe} reoles)

BED) WH Oa 33

DOBODHNVN2SOEE Soe wa

Kacminkondala.

“ T must not omit to remark that this is a rule strictly attended to by

all who have the slightest claim to scholarship. Indeed I have not

found a departure from it by any of the standard writers amongst the

Sinhalese.

No. 5.—1850.] THE ELU LANGUAGE. 305

The association with the wicked is the primary cause of every

species of ill; but the company of the righteous will, on the cou-

trary, result in prosperity.

—

EEMDBDOOBES 678)

BEDBDODQOS BO ox a2)

QMS QA) O72)

EORVDHE5SOMDBAD 672-Kusa Jataka.

Away from the wicked—attached to the righteous—possessed

of deep wisdom and gentle virtues; may I flourish (like a lamp)

in the household of my race.

SOSEWOMNAG Ba

oe Cay aay &e

— 82918 80 Ba

DOGIBM BSAS BO

Full (unempty) of kingly virtues “—replete with the rays of his

worldly renown, and of great prowess, was the lion of men,

Kriti Sri Raja Sinha.

ZMe

@EAHW OED Vay

SYMDEED One Oss

EOD EQDAR OD oy

ODO CGDOZBS1 CODIEE Ost

Kaviyasekare.

Her two brows were like the _ rainbow, her narrow

forehead like the moon in her crescent, and her two long

* The ten moral virtues of kings are here meant, and which are 1,

charity or almsgiving ; 2, observance of xeligious precepts ; 3, liberal

in presents ; 4, uprightness and justice ; 5, tenderness ; 6, addicted to

religious austerities ; 7, mildness of temper ; 8, compassion and mercy ;

9, patience; 10, peacefulness.

306 JOURNAL, B.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL, Parr IL.

pendant ears like the golden swing of beauty’s goddess,

Lakshmi.*

*, The numerousness of the Sinhalese poetical works,

the paucity of information regarding their writers, the

difficulty experienced in the collection of even the little

known of them, and the absence of a library to which

reference may be conveniently had,—added to my other

pursuits (which leave me but little leisure) oe not, [ regret,

permit me to bring to a close the last division of my paper

—the Sinhalese Poets. I have, however, drawn out a few

remarks, though even these will, I fear, exceed the bounds

which I originally intended for this Paper. I must therefore

content myself at present with the following, with a hope of

continuing the subject hereafter :— .

K dviyastharé.

“‘ A garland of flowers on the crown of poetry.”

Perhaps no poetical work in the Sinhalese surpasses

this in point of originality and depth of thought, and of

“Her narrow forehead like the crescent moon,” it would seem,

savours much of Uriental imagery. Enelish poets have always con-

sidered ‘‘an ample forehead” or “a spacious forehead” as beautiful ;

here the very reverse is the admiration of the Sinhalese poet! But, it

must be remarked, that however ‘‘ample”’ or ‘“spacious’”’ the forehead,

it does not bear any resemblance to the full orb, but the moon in ber-

vane. Hence, although the poet has evinced but little taste by his allusion

to “her narrow forehead,’ he yet, in my opinion, is far more correct

than many who have compared the forehead to the full moon. Mr.

Wilson, in a note to the Megha Duta, at page 106, says: ‘Comparing a

beautiful face to the moon has been supposed peculiar to Oriental poets ;.

instances, however, may be found in English verse: Perhaps that

passage. in Pope, here, spenking of : an amiable female and the 1 moon, he

says —_—"

‘Serene in-virgin dest she: shines,’

may not be exactly in: point,: although _ the geieral idea .is similar.

Spencer, however, is sufficiently precise— ,°

‘ Her spacious forehead, like the clear est moon,

Whose full-grown orb Bostng now to be spent, —

Largely Aheainpat 3 in native silver shone,

Giving wide room to Beauty’s regiment.’ ”

7.0 I, eas ee en

No. 5.—1850.] THE ELU LANGUAGE. 307

gance and correctness of expression. Its diction is simple,

and its imagery sterling and rich. It was written by a

Buddhist priest of the name of Totagamuwé (after his

native village in the south of Ceylon), properly called

Srt Rahila Sthavirayo, who was the teacher of the cele-

brated Chandrabharati, the author of Bauddha-satake

(@Q~H@MezD) and two other valuable works—one of

which is a commentary on Sanscrit Prosody and the other

the well-known Virttimdalakhydva, (®28%D®.@0a)xD.)

Totagamuwa converted his Hindi pupil to Buddhism,

and thereby received the thanks of his countrymen,

including his sovereign, Sri Pardkrama Bahu VI.,

1410. a.p. The poet was a favourite of the king, and

continued to benefit by his patronage to the same extent

that he had, before taking holy orders, been fostered in the

king’s household. The priest was not ungrateful to his

benefactor. He gave him the most invaluable token of his

regard,—the use of his pen; and, besides dedicating the

work under consideration to the Princess Royal, Ulkuda

Dévi, at whose request it was composed, he addressed to the

king several stanzas of great beauty. He possessed a

correct knowledge of several Oriental languages besides

the Hlu.* Hence the self-importance which he seems to

* The foreign languages of which this scholar was a proficient are

enumerated in the paraphrase to the Selalihini Sandésé. They were

‘six In number: Sanskrit, Maghadi (or Pali), Apabbranse, Patsachi,

Sureseynt, and Tamil.

Most of our readers are probabiy acquainted with what is meant by

Sureseynt ; but it may not be amiss to state that it is the Zend. ‘I'he

Edinburgh Review tor April, 1810, at pp. 396-97, in reference to a paper

writteu by Dr. Leyden, on the language and literature of the Indo-

‘Chinese nations, says : “ Dr. Leyden imagines that the Pali may be identi-

fied with the Magahdi, and the Zend with the Sureseyni of Sanscrit

authors ; but without stating the grounds for the conjecture. We con-

ceive that the emigration of the Sureseynt under Crisna, from the banks

of the Yamuna to the shores of the ocean on the west of Guzerat,

would afford much countenance to the conjecture, if supported by other

proofs.”

57—87 N

308 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou IL, Parr I..

have assumed in the Kéviyasékaré, a weakness though

common to many, if not all, poets, yet in this instance

without, I believe, its parallel in the history of the world.

He speaks of himself in the following strain :—

BID ODES 378 on

QDS O€0OLH 65S ox

B8&s 8EF S83 | oS

Bae OF SHHsIO BOS 5

Like a Brahaspati* on earth renown’d,

The limits of each science fully found,

Radiant with heavenly-derived religion’s beams,

On learning’s head a living gem he streams.

Literal translation.

Arrived at the end of all sciences,

Like a Brahaspati who entered the earth, ;

And possessed of an assemblage of pure observances of religious-

duties,

A gem (am I) worn on the head of all eminent talents in the:

world.

This is a work which cost the writer years of great labour,.

although, judging from its easy and unlaboured style, one is

led almost to disbelieve the writer’s own account of it, that

it was commenced 1958 a.B., or 1415 a.p., and was concluded

in the 34th year of the reign of Sri Parakrama Bahu VL,

who ascended the throne 1953 a.B., or 1410 a.p. For, if the

writer brought this work to a termination in the 34th year

of the reign of the said king, he must have spent twenty-

nine years in the composition of 885 stanzas, unless indeed

the dates given in the Mahdwanso cannot be relied upon..

He next wrote the celebrated—

* Brahaspati :—The teacher of the Hindt gods is often desig-

nated by a term supposed to be its equivalent—Jupiter. But this I

believe is incorrect, since the one has nothing in common with the

other. The Grecian Zeus and the Roman Jupiter is more like Brahma

in One sense and lise Indrain another. “He is the site of gods and

men ; also ¢éhe ‘Thunderer.”

No. 5.—1850.] THE ELU LANGUAGE, 309

Selahhini Sandésé (Si GC BSS e2doO2os ).

‘““An epistle per Gracula religiosa.”

Well indeed may this work be compared to the Megha Duta

of Kalidasa. The writer’s thoughts, brilliant and original,

sparkle as we go along his elegant and flowing rhymes.

Both the ear and the mind are at once satisfied. His lan-

guage is free, and has a fascination which words cannot

describe. His illustrations are truly original and lively.

We shall present the reader with the following specimen :—

1.— 7190 HEDENCz THOOOYHOES SCE Mo

SHIDO SCOS OGAa BaH8 wo GCBM ae.

2.—BEVEODSSz OOD SHODSH ONAG SOMGHA

BIIFALO DMA DVO MW6OBSH szMz05

Hese@Gocoe@ds svodss 8S Esoaw

WVEDAG 6795 Has MVODN MII

3.-—BeE CEBEDQODs EQDI CSD

BeEDO BHOSE EC DOSS}

4.-—DDOCHL OAT OSHDOGE BOM EAS

BODIOOD Eos OonSe svaes} DE

OSBODOES VDiEDOUD) ODNHSAH MEQ

OOD 6783 ZOO ONS EM HOSO

Versified.t

Hail wond’rous bird! whose wisdom’s pow’r is known

To equal theirs before the royal throne—

Bird of the sweet and richly varied lay,

Long may’st thou flourish ’midst thy fellows gay !

QAO

RRRRaR

* The above, which is the opening address of the poem, is what is

called exenG@, Sehelz, consisting of, first, a blank verse ; second, a verse

whose four lines are of different feet, except the second and third,

which not only rhyme but are equal in their number of feet; third,

half a stanza followed by, fourth, a complete stanza. Of this genus

there are divers species.

7 For this, as well as the last translation into English verse, I am in-

debted to Mr. J. R. Blake, and for the following to Mr. A. M. Ferguson,

N 2

310 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. IL, Part IL.

How does thy feet a golden hue disclose,

So like the pollen of a full-blown rose ?

How does thy ruddy bill enchanting glow ?

Not fairer blossoms can the champac show !

And what can match thy wing’s superior hue,

Which wave, wide-spreading, like the lotus blue ¢

When, beauteous as a vegetable gem,

Which winds have sever’d from its parent stem,

Thou soar’st, exultant, through the balmy air ?

Have not young goddesses made thee their care,

And fix’d thee, fluttering, in their jetty hair ?

And have not bees, who take their nightly rest

Within the water lily’s fragrant breast,

Deceiv’d, crowd round thee in their mid career

In search of honey, through the fields of air ?

And have not Dryads, bright in charms divine,

Taught thee as pendents in their ears to shine ?

Friend of my soul! say, hast thou e’er been prest

With pangs so fierce as those that wound my breast ¢

No, happier in thy love, thy life is peace,

And rolling years but bring thy bliss increase ;

Such bliss, as searching the wide world around,

Save in thy presence, friend, is nowhere found.

Literal translation.

O Gracula religiosa ! in wisdom equal to that of ministers of

princes, and of speech sweet, and composed of excellent notes!

mayest thou in the company of thy spacies live long ! When thou, —

whose (two) feet are of golden hue, like unto the pollen of a full-

‘blown blossom—whose beak partially red and glistening, like unto

a cluster of champaka flowers—and whose wings, black and

delightfully wide-spread, like unto the leaves of the blue lotus ;

(when thou) takest thy airy flight like a flowery figure : have not

youthful goddesses dressed thee in their Jong jet-black (blue)

hair ? Have not swarms of bees, which make the lotuses their

habitation, approached and encircled thee? Have not the

goddesses of the forest made thee their ear ornaments? Has no

No. 5.—1850.] THE ELU LANGUAGE. 311

(such) ill befallen thee in thy journey ? Happy friend! who

possessest inviolate, and with increasing vigour, an attachment

which thou mayest form: what is bliss save that which is known

in thy presence ?

Totagamuwa undertook this work with grateful affection

for the king and his country. He felt interested in the

welfare of the young family of Pardkrama Bahu VI., and

indeed sympathised with the Princess Ulkuda, who

mournfully longed for a child. The argument of the poem

is well conceived. It is an epistle addressed to Vibushana,

the presiding deity of the Kelani temple, invoking the

blessing of a grandson to the king (or rather a son to the

princess), and as if intended to be conveyed by means of a

bird of the name of Selalhini from Kétté, the seat of the

then Government. No precise date is given in this work,

although we learn from other data that it was written a

year after the last. It contains one hundred stanzas.

The poet next gave to the world his

Paravr. Sandésé (SCOS8@@2eo¢5).

‘“‘An epistle per a pigeon.”

A poem of great merit, and generally of a piece with the

last in style, although perhaps in many parts inferior to it

in imagery. It was an epistle addressed to Krishna, invok-

ing blessings upon the army—the king’s brother of the

name of Pardkrama, who had the government of Jaffna,

or Mayaduna—-and upon Chandrawati, the granddaughter

of the King Parékrama Bahu VI. The poet’s attachment

to the family of his sovereign seems to have been indeed

great. Even in this there are tender allusions to the royal

family. That Chandrawati might soon enter the bonds of

matrimony, and that, allied to a noble prince, she might

soon be the mother of a virtuous son, are amongst the

orisons of the writer and the topics of his song. No dateis

given to this work ; nor is it easy to ascertain it. But from

the slight difference of style to which allusion has been

312 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vox. IL, Part II.

made, I am led to suppose that this was written shortly

after the last. I select the following as a specimen of its

style :—

S10 G BOSCTDEHE SADT HOWRS Say |

SOG MSQHESY am sVeEsseansosd—

BQO1D97i BOND) OOH, MOVHD) Gor —

DVBODNES|E DE DEVE GOHNOE ‘

OOBIE MIE QDiq*i OINOAE ERBsIG Se

HOHDBNOEG ODODE SE EWE ODOVNHSD—

HEACBOLONDD OOWSED OC® Hes e

BCACAsSoWz7S OOnMEGIE | S

BGEMNST MEMABIONNVOEA BOW ow

BOECBS @@WSI DOES) OEE @ @®

HBEBsas ¢5E BBWwe ¢<M0Wosa O®

QBBIS CSO s7SMO eHS'OOSBD — ye)

Versified.

Hail ! beauteous dove, the subject of my lay ;

Long may’st thou live, through heaven’s blue vault to stray !

When on thy sacred mission thou had’st sped,

With plumage white and feet of roseate red :

Like one of those pearl-gleaming shells that rest

On coral stems in milky ocean’s breast ;

Like the star-spangled, clear, autumnal sky ;

When borne on gentlest breeze thou passed’st by,

Did not the gazers hail a lily given,

Full-blown and bright—a blossom dropt from heaven ?

Did’st thou not seem, with thy soft pinion’s quiver,

A lotus-bud from the celestial river ?

Did they not off’rings make, and homage pay,

As unto Buddha’s brightest, purest ray ?

Did not e’en goddesses, delighted kiss,

What seemed a flower from Indra’s bowers of bliss ?

Hast thou unscath’d pursued thy airy flight ?

Hail noble friend, dear to our longing sight !

No. 5.—1850.] HE ELU LANGUAGE. 313

Literal translation.

Mayest thou, O noble pigeon, live long! My friend! by

reason of thy yellow-white hue and deeply red feet, like unto a

-chank with coral plants produced from the milky ocean—like unto

the clear autumnal (sky) bespangled with the sun and the stars !

when thou wast slowly moving in the sky, and in a delightfully

gentle breeze, were not (people) deceived in thee for a beautifully

full-blown white lily dropt from (heaven) ? Did they not

approach thee under a belief that thou wast a lotus-bud fallen off

from the celestial river ? Did they not make offerings to thee

under the impression that thou wast a white ray emitted from

Buddha’s pure court? Did not goddesses kiss thee with delight

under the mistaken idea that thou wast a flower from Nandene, the

heavenly park? Hast thou arrived without accident in thy

-aerial journey ? Noble friend! To us thy sight is bliss !

Although many were the writings of this eminent scholar,

‘the only other work handed down to us with the sanction

of his own name is Moggalléyana Patipanchaké (ODao-

CEH) 683602), a commentary on the Pali grammar

written by a pandit of the name of Moggallayana.

Perakumba Sirité

(SrCapmo&Soay ).

“The character of Parékrama Bahu.”

Although the poet has not given us his name, we yet

‘have internal evidence sufficient to justify the conclusion,

‘consistent with a tradition on the subject that the above was

written by the author of the last. Itis true that, unlike

the rest of the great writer’s works, this contains a great

admixture of the Sanskrit ; but, nevertheless, wherever the

language is purely Elu, it has indubitable evidence of the

great scholar’s style, his masterly and peculiarly fine turns

of expression, and his originality and depth of thought.

From this and the Selalihint Sandésé and Paravi Sandésé

we may select three verses written of the reigning

‘sovereign, in the same measure, with the same rhymes, and

314 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou II, Part II.

the same peculiarity of expression, but with an originality

of thought in each which is surprising, and certainly un-

common. Many a sentiment of the writer in praise of

Pardkrama Bahu, whose character and virtues the poet

has delineated in this work, is indicative of the kind feelings

which he entertained towards his patron and sovereign,

and the knowledge he possessed generally of his country’s

history. This poem may indeed be ranked amongst, and

is by no means inferior to, the rest of the supposed writer’s.

works, but for the admixture of foreign words, which, it

appears to me, the writer intentionally introduced with a

view to adorn his Sinhalese with the glittering ornaments

to the celebrated “language of the gods’ —the Sanskrit.

The following will serve as a specimen :—

BxH(CWS Waa LE OHS Ad

QDBSS Ba» oh BED Gad

SUBS NS Ca DD OMA Wad

CD SOB O82) BS OMSz Gad

Prosper thou Lord Parékrama Bahu! who hast a gentle arm:

like Krishna’s—an arm which is the abode of the lovely Laksmi—

who art beautiful as the consort of the goddess Ramba, and

powerful as an euraged elephant in the battlefield-like

plantain estate.

Kovul Sandésé (@zMDETRNIOEOE).

“An epistle per an Indian cuckoo.”

This is a poem which sustains a like character as the last,

and written by Totagamuwa’s contemporary, Irugalkulé

Pariwenddhipati, the presiding priest of Mulgiri-gala. The

writer in this poem seeks a blessing from Krishna, the

deity presiding over the temple at Devundara (Dondra

Head), upon Prince Sengapperumal, or Sapumal, the son of

Paradkrama Bahu VI.; and also prays that the war in which

the prince was then engaged at Jaffoa (probably in support.

No. 5.—1850.] THE ELU LANGUAGE. 315:

of his uncleagainst A’riya Chakkravartti, the king of Karwati)

might prove victorious. Again, no date is to be found

inthis work. Mention, however, is made of the prince ; and

the war is spoken of in terms which clearly indicate that

his success was uncertain at the time the poet wrote. But

Selahhini Sandésé, which we have above considered,

alludes to the same war, and the poet joins in the general

shout of joy amidst which the prince was then returning to

his father at K6tté after a successful encounter with his

country’s foes. We are thus led to conclude that the work

under consideration was written at most a few months, if

not weeks, before Selalihini Sandésé. The following is

a specimen from the work under consideration :—

OMA GSAT SVB AS SUZECID ®

ODO GO E 34S SSSHOMSESAD S)

SVEQOOMOOoOOHSeRDTIOSHHOG &

HAVES DDAE ED SEODJES cs)

HoOyocansgo@g DOCiqQea eS

BLRISOSDA ES DSTOHNMHOSISD és

O bird! enter thou into (the presence) of the chief of the

temple, Wijaya Bahu, supreme master of the Tripitaka

doctrines, adorned (in his neck) with the golden garland of Pita-

kattiya, and amidst his poetical labours in the six languages

exhibiting to the world the same beautiful but natural form that

Kanda Kumara presented ; and say that thou carriest an epistle

in the native language expressive of the prosperity of the Indra-

like Prince Sapumal.

( To be continued.)

316

JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL, Parr II.

LIST OF MAMMALIA

OBSERVED OR COLLECTED IN CEYLON.

By E. F. Ke.aart, M.D.

Order PRIMATES.

Family Simrap2.

. Presbytes cephalopterus, The Nestor, Kale Wan-

Zimm. dura.

Var. 6. monticola, nobis. The Kandyan variety.

. Presbytes Thersites, H/- The Jaffna Monkey, El

liot. Wandura.

. Presbytes Priam, Eliot. The Crested Monkey, Kondé

Wandura.

- Macacus Sinicus, Zinn. The Bonnetted Maccaque,

Rilawa.

Family Lemuripé.

. Loris gracilis, Geof. The Loris, or Sloth, Una

Hapuluna.

Family VESPERTILIONIDZ.

Pteropus Edwardsii, Geof. The Roussette, or Flying

Fox, Maha Vawuld.

Pteropus seminudus, 2. The smaller variety.

sp-, nobis.

Cynopterus marginatus, The Margin-eared Bat, Kota-

Gray. kan Vanula.

Megaderma lyra, Geoff, The Megaderm.

. Hipposideros Temple- The Horse-shoe Bat.

tonil, 2obzs.

. Hipposideros atratus, 7.6. Species of same.

. Hipposideros Lankadiva, Large Horse-shoe Bat.

Nn. Sp., nobis.

. Rhinolphus rubidus, ». Red Horse-shoe Bat.

sp., nobis.

No. 5.—1850.] MAMMALS OF CEYLON. | 317

14.

15.

16,

17.

18.

19.

28.

. Herpestes flavidens, x.

Rhinolphus, 2. sp. ? Kadugann4wa species.

Nyctecejus | Heathii, The Barbastelle.

Horsf.

Nyctecejus Isabellinus, New species of same.

Blyth.

Kirivoulha picta, Gray. The Painted Bat, Kehe

Wawnula.

Taphozous Longimanus, The Long-armed Tarphien.

Hard. |

Order FERAL.

Family Frevipz.

A.—FELINA.

Leopardus varius (Felis The Leopard, or Chetah, Kot-

Leopardus). 2ya.

Var. melas. Black variety of same.

. Felis viverrinus, Hodg- The Tiger Cat, Handun

son. Divya.

. Felis Chaus ? The Lynx-like Cat, Kula

Divya,

B.— VIVERRINA.

. Viverricula (Viverra) The Indian Genette, Urudévd.

malaccensis, Horsf.

. Herpestes vitticollis, The Streaked Mungoose.

Eiltiot.

- Herpestes griseus, Sykes The Common Mungoose,

Mugatiya., :

These may turn out to ke

ne AS ! eae

sp.? nobis two new species recently dis-

- Herpestes rubiginosus, ( ¢oyered by Mr. Waller Elliot.

27.

n. sp., nobis.

Paradoxurus Zeylanicus, The Golden Paradoxure.

Schreb.

Var. 6. fuscus. Black-brown variety of same.

Paradoxurus typus, #. The Palm Cat, Uguduwa.

Cuv.

C.—MUSTETIN&.

Lutra nair? Sykes. The Otter, Diya Balla.

318 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr II.

D.—CaNINA.

30 Canis aureus, Linn. The Jackall, Nariyd.

Family Ursipa.

31. Ursus labiatus, Blazny. The Indian Bear.

Family TaLripz.

32. Sorex murinus, Linn. The Musk Shrew, Kunu

Miya.

33. Sorex montanus, 2. sp., The Black Mountain Shrew.

nobis.

34. Sorex feroculus, 2. sp., The Long-clawed Shrew.

nobis.

35. Sorex ferrugineus, 7. sp., The Dimbula Shrew.

nobis.

Two specimens of Hedgehogs are in the Army Medical

Officers’ Museum at Colombo, but it is doubtful whether

they are natives of Ceylon.

Order CET 4.

36. Halicore dugong, FF. The Dugong, Mudi Ura.

Cuv.

Species of Dolphins, Porpoises, and Whales are also.

occasionally found in the neighbouring seas.

Order GLIRES.

Family Murip2,

37. Mus bandicotta, Bechst. The Bandicoot, or Pig Rat.

38. Mus decumanus, Linn. The Common Brown House-

Rat.

39. Mus Kandianus, ». sp., The White-bellied Rat of the

nobis. Kandyan Province.

40, Mus Asiaticus, Gray. Paddy-field Rat.

41. Musarboreus, B.H.M.S. The Large Tree Rat.

42. Mus Ceylonus, x. sp., Small Outhouse Rat of Co-

nobis. lombo.

43. Mus musculus, Linn. The Mouse.

44, Mus nuwara, n. sp., nobis. The Nuwara Hliya Soil Rat.

No. 5.—1850.] MAMMALS OF CEYLON. 319

45. Mus coffceus, 2. sp., nobis. The Coffee Plantation Rat.

46. Mus tetragonurus, 7. sp., The Four-sided Tail Rat of

nobis. Colombo.

47. Mus dubius, x. sp., nobzs. The Short-tailed Godown

Rat of Kandy.

48. Gerbillus indicus, Cuv. The Indian Yerboa,

: Family Hystricpz.

49. Hystrix leucurus, Sykes. The Indian Porcupine,

Itéva.

Family Lerorip”.

50. Lepus nigricollis The Indian Hare, Hava.

The Rabbit and Guinea Pig have been introduced in the

Island.

Family JERBOIDA.

51. Sciurus macrurus, For- The Rukiah, Datidu Léna.

ster.

Var.6. moutanus, S. Ten- The mountain species.

nant.

52. Sciurus tristriatus, Wa- The Palm Squirrel, Lénd.

terh.

53. Sciurus sublineatus (trili- The Olive-coloured Squirrel

neatus), Water. of Nuwara Eliya.

I have not yet seen the 8S. Layardii, Blyth, S. Brodei,

Blyth, nor the 8. Kelaartii of Layard.

54. Pteromys oral, Blyth and The Flying Squirrel, Egalie

Tickell (P. petaurista Lénda.

of former list)

55. Sciuropterus Layardii, x. The Flat-tailed Flying

sp., nobis. Squirrel of Dimbulla.

Order UNGULATA.

Family Bovip#.

A.—BOVINA.

56. Bos taurus, va7. Indicus. The Indian Ox, Harakd.

57. Bubalus buffelus, Gray. Tame and Wild Buffalo.

Varieties of Sheep and Goats are also domesticated.

320 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Part II.

B.—MoscHINa.

58. Memmina indica, Gray. The Memmina, or Indian

Mouse Deer, Wal Muvd.

C.—-CERVINA.

59. Muntjacus vaginalis, Gray. The Muntjac, or Ceylon

Red Deer, Velr Muvd.

60. Axis maculata, Gray. The Spotted Deer, Tk

Murda.

61. Cervus (species not identi- The Paddy Field Deer.

fied).

62. Cervus hippelaphus, Cuv. The Rasse, or Sambur

Deer, Gond.

The Horse and Ass are also introduced in the Island.

Mules are rarely seen.

Family ELEPHANTIDA.

A.—ELEPHANTINA.

63. Hlephas indicus, Cuv. The Indian Hlephant,

Aliya.

B.—SUINA.

64. Sus indicus, Gray. The Indian Wild Boar,

Wal Ura.

The domesticated Hog (S. scrofa, var. Sinensis) is plenti-

ful in the Island.

Family DasyPipZ@.

65. Manis pentadactyla, The Pangolin, or Scaly Ant-

Linn. eater, commonly but erro-

neously known in the

Island as the Armadillo,

Kebelléva.

The words in italics after the English are the Sinhalese

names.

No. 5,—1850.] MAMMALS OF CEYLON. 321

DESCRIPTION OF NEW SPECIES AND VARIETIES.

OF MAMMALS FOUND IN CEYLON.

By EK. F., Kevaart, m.p.

PRESBYTES CEPHALOPTERUS, var. 6. Monticoua, nobis.

THE variety of the Nestor, found in great abundance in

the higher parts of the Kandy an Provinces, differs from the

low country animal chiefly in the absence of the white on

the croup and inside of the thighs. It also attains a larger

size, is stouter limbed, and is generally of a darker colour,

with a rufous tinge on the neck, and the hair longer and

more wavy.

Mr. Blyth, to whom I sent a specimen from Nuwara Eliya,

is inclined to consider this a distinct species; at all events,

he thinks that it bears the same affinity to the P. cephalop-

terus of the jungles of the lowcountry as Sciurus Tennantu

of Layard does to S. macrurus. This is the large monkey

noticed in Colonel Forbes’ work on Ceylon as inhabiting

Nuwara Eliya. A female specimen killed at Nuwara Eliya

measured as follows :—

ft. in,

Length from vertex of head to root of tail 1 53

ss of tail 2 2

”» from ear to chin Oo 3k

oA of forearm a3 Lukes OWT.

” of palm O 22

» from knee to heel 0 74

rP) of foot bela si Ome ®

of sole ae ye TO

This is but a medium-sized specimen. The one sent to

Mr. Blyth was larger. They are usually seen in large

O20 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou II., Parr II.

numbers jumping on the trees, and when disturbed make a

peculiar short howling noise. One was known to have

attacked a cooly on a coffee estate carrying a rice bag.

The Malabars eat the flesh of this monkey, and consider it

very delicious food ; and some Europeans who have tasted

it are of the same opinion.

“ HIpposipERos ‘TemLEronn, nobis.

Rhinolphus Voutha,* Temp.

Above dusky brown, this colour being confined to the tips

of the hairs, the rest being grayish. Beneath, lighter

coloured. In males, above and behind the complicated

nasal appendage there is the cup-like depression containing

a waxy matter, apparently secreted by a glandular body

placed under the skin, so often seen in other species of

Fiipposideros. Tail excerted for about one-eighth inch.

Length of head and body ... --. 3 Inches.

Tail sup ane oss pPReeE aS

Expanse ... cot lilies

Dr. Templeton has fully d described this species and the

next, which he was inclined to believe was only a variety,

in his unfinished Catalogue of Ceylon Mammals.

Hirposippros Arratus, nobis.

Rhinolphus ater, Temp.

Smaller than the last ; tips of hair sooty blackish brown,

the rest silvery grey ; membrane, also darker coloured,

beneath fuscus.

Both these species are common in old buildings in

Colombo. I have also seen them in Kandy.

RHINOLPHUS RUBIDUS, 2. sp., nobis.

Head and body of a deep orange red colour ; membrane

pale brown; interfemoral membrane, enclosing the whole

* Vavuldis a very vague term for a species of bat, for Vavuld, the

Sinhalese word, applied to all bats.

‘No. 5.—1850.] MAMMALS OF CEYLON. 323

‘tail, and the free edge running almost in a straight line and

rounded off near the tail.

Length of head and body eo. I$ inch,

Length of tail oes wot HOR 53

Expanse 5 “isp (Ou ts

I am unable to give a deseription of the complicated

masal processes, as all the specimens received were dried

and imperfectly preserved. This beautiful bat is seen at

Kadugannawa (2,000 feet) only for a few days in the month

of August.

RAINOLPHUS, 2. sp. ?

Rufescent brown ; face slightly fulvous ; round the ear

and on the sides of the posterior half of the body bright

fulvous ; tail enclosed in the interfemoral membrane.

Head and body .- 24 inches.

Tail eee sega d 9

Expanse “° Oe anes

Only one dried specimen procured iy my brother from

Kadugann4wa. None seen since.

HERPESTES FLAVIDENS, 2”. sp., nobzs.

Yellowish brown; hair annulated with brown and

yellow rings; tips yellow; tip of tail of a reddish colour ;

muzzle blackish: chin flesh-coloured; face brown and

slightly ferruginous; ears fulvous, thickly clothed with

hair ; feet blackish ; soles, ? bald. A full-grown specimen

obtained at Kandy measured as follows : —

in.

Length of head and body | ae 44

‘Tail eee 0;

Planta 3

- Palma

Small intestines

Large intestines

Ccecum (pointed) see

SGcOOnD OF FS

—

Afes

Stomach and pylorus ae

J1—87 0

324 JOURNAL, B.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr II..

‘This species was supposed hitherto to be only a variety

of A. griseus, but there are strong characteristic differences.

between the two—the golden yellow rings and tips of hair

are very marked. Generally found in the higher parts of

the Island. I obtained one of a very deep brown and

yellow colour from Nuwara Eliya.

Herpestes Rusiainosus, 2. sp., nobis. Dito, Sin.

Reddish and ferruginous brown—more of the red on.

head and outer sides of legs. Hair annulated black and

white,and terminating in long reddish points; muzzle flesh-

coloured ; sides of nose and circle round the eyes of a light

rusty colour; feet black ; tip of tail black.

Nearly as large as the AZ. wittzcollis. I am indebted to

my friend Mr. Casie Chitty, District Judge of Chilaw, for a

live specimen of this animal, among several others which

he very kindly placed at my disposal.

PaRADOXURUS ZEYLANICUS, var. Fuscus.

Beetle brown throughout ; no streaks on the back percep-

tible; fur very glossy; a bright golden yellow subterminal

ring to the tail.

Size of the other variety. At first I supposed this to be

another species. It was killed at Nuwara Eliya. In every

respect, except the colour, it corresponded with the ordinary

coloured P. zeylanicus.

SorEX Monranvus, n. sp., nobis.

Fur, above soft sooty black, beneath lighter coloured ;

whiskers, silvery gray, and long ; lower part of legs and feet

grayish, clothed with dressed hair; toes, five; six tuber-

cles on soles, in pairs; claws short, whitish ; ears large,

round, naked, outer margin lying on a level with the fur of

the head and neck, the ears being thus concealed when

seen from behind; tail tetragonal, tapering, shorter than

the head and body, covered with short dark brown hair,.

No. 5.—1850.] MAMMALS OF CEYLON. 32D

and among these are scattered longer silky hairs, of which

a few are also seen in the posterior and inferior parts of the

body.

A specimen found at Pidurutalagala (8,000 feet) mea-

sured as follows :—

Length of head and body --. o¢ inches.

Length of tail S00 Sie Oa as

Length of hind feet... BO betesa) 04

I am indebted to Mr. Montenach, H. M. 15th Regiment,

for this and many other interesting animals of Nuwara

Kliya. This black shrew is also found in other parts of the

Kandyan Provinces.

Sorex FERocULUuS, 7. sp., nobis.

- Fur soft, above bluish black, beneath hghter coloured ;

tail black, rounded, tapering; tip naked, flesh-coloured ;

claws white, those of the fore feet elongated, compressed,

acute. It is somewhat larger and fuller in the face, but in

many other respects this animal resembles the last described-

It is a spirited lively animal even in confinement.

Sorex FeRRUGINEUS, 7. sp., nobis.

Fur soft, ferruginous brown, washed with blue, smaller

than the S. montanus; feet and legs naked. Large secret-

ing glands on the pubis; odour very disagreeable. No

cetze or glands could be traced on the two other species,

nor had they any of the smell.

I am indebted to Mr. Alexander Gordon, of Dimbula, for

a specimen of this small shrew, which he found on a coffee

estate.

There are two other larger black shrews than any of those

now described, one in the possession of Mr. Thwaites, of

Péradeniya, and the other—with a very powerful musky

odour, stronger even than in the S. murinus—occasionally

seen in the godowns at Kandy, of which further notice

hereafter.

Oo 2

Cote ¥

326 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou II. Parr II.

Mus Kanpiyanus, ” sp., nobis; Mus Albiwenter, MS.

Fur very soft and silky; above yellow brown, beneath

and inside of limbs milky white; hair of back and upper

parts lead colour, with yellow and black tips, the latter

fewer; whiskers black, very long, a few shorter grayer

ones; ears large, ovate, slightly villous; feet grayish-

flesh-coloured ; claws, white those of the fore feet short ;

rudimentary thumb clawless; claws of the three middle

subequal ; hind toes acute and longer, overlapped with gray

hairs; soles bald, flesh-coloured; five tubercles to fore

and six to hind soles; internal and hinder tubercle of the

latter elongated; tail, longer than the head and body, scaly,

and covered with short dressed black hair, which are longer

towards the extremity; cutting teeth smooth, yellow.

Length of head and body 568 63 inches.

Length of tail aie 74 .

Palma 500 Soc 5 5-12 ,,

Planta a boo 1 12-12 ,,

This is one of the common house rats of the Kandyan

Provinces. The specimens from Nuwara Eliya are larger,

and the fur softer and of a deeper lead colour than those

from Kandy, Badulla, or Kurunégala. As there is more

than one white-bellied species of rat in the Island, the term

Kandiyanus has been substituted for albiventer.

Mus CEYLONUS, n. sp., nobis.

Fur soft, lead colour, that of upper parts tipped with

fawn colour; ears large, naked; whiskers black, moder-

ately long; tail brown, scaly, and covered with short.

adpressed brown hair; feet brown ; soles purplish.

Head and body wes 43 inches,

Tail oi 360 bo) A,

This small rat is found in outhouses in the Cinnamon

Gardens, Colombo.

No. 5.—1850.] MAMMALS OF CEYLON. B27

Mus Nuwarza, %. sp., nobis.

Fur very soft, above of a deep yellow olive brown alone

beneath yellowish gray; hair of the upper part. of the

head and body of lead colour, with some longer silky black

ones, both tipped golden yellow; hair of lower part of a

lighter lead colour; tail shorter than the body, tapering,

scaly, and covered with adpressed hairs; superior surface

brown, and inferior light yellow; feet yellow brown;

soles nearly bald, blackish ; claws purplish ; rudimentary

thumb clawless; four tubercles to the soles of the fore feet

and four tubercles to the hind soles ; incisors yellow, upper

ones grooved in the middle.

Length of head and body __... 3+ inches.

Length of tail eee 21 ss

This small rat is found in pairs in the black soil of

Nuwara Eliya, especially in the potato fields.

Mus Corraus, n. sp., nobis.

Fur thick, stiff above yellow, mixed with brown;

beneath, yellow gray or tawny; face rough; whiskers

short, thin, black, a few gray; hairs of upper parts

flattened, ashy gray, and tipped yellow ; some thinner and

longer ones also tipped yellow, with subterminal black

band; under fur soft, and of a light lead colour; ears

moderate, subovate, villious, yellow ferruginous; tail

round and tapering; upper surface dark brown, lower

yellow-gray ; cutting teeth yellow ; upper incisors grooved,

as in the last.

Length of head and body __... 44 inches.

Tail a ae 4 RS

The above description is from dried specimens. This is _

the rat which is so troublesome to coffee estates in some

seasons of the year, when probably from scarcity of their

ordinary food they cut and eat the coffee berries and buds.

Both this and the Mus nuwara, I am inclined to think, are

328 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [VoL. II., Parr IT.

allied species to Mus hirsutus of India, but I have neither

specimen nor description of that rat, except the small

notice of it in Mr. Walter Elliot’s Catalogue, which he has

kindly sent me. However, as Mr. Elliot has now a speci-

men of the coffee rat from me, he will be able to

determine the relation.

Sciuroprerus Layarpil, 2. sp., nobis; S. Fuscocapillus ?

Jerdon.

Fur soft, moderately long ; upper surface of rufous

chestnut colour, beneath gray; hairs of upper surface of

body blackish to near the tips, which are of a rufous dark

brown colour; under parts of neck and cheek slightly

ferruginous ; face and head blackish, mixed with gray ;

whiskers long and black; legs deep brown ; feet grayish ;

membrane brown above and gray beneath, and upper part

of the former of a velvety black, with a soft delicate white

fringe on the border. Tail flat and broad, lighter chestnut

than the body, washed with black.

ft. in.

Length of head and body ... wash oo Lehaee

Tail Ae ues ee O14

I am indebted to Messrs. Palliser, of Dimbula, for this

and many other interesting specimens. This is the first

time that a second species of flying squirrel has been noticed

in Ceylon. Mr. Blyth, who has examined this specimen, is

inclined to think than this is a full-grown specimen of the

S. fuscocapillus of Jerdon (Jas. B., 1847, page 867), but he

could not well decide, as he had no specimen of the latter

to compare it with. The description certainly does not in’

all respects correspond with the characters of the Ceylon

a:imal,

‘No. 5.—1850.] MAMMALS OF CEYLON. 329

DESCRIPTION OF ADDITIONAL MAMMALS.

By EH. F. Keuaart, M.D.

Preropus SEMINUDUS, nobis.

New species of Frugivorous Bat.

Body slightly covered with light brown fur ; membranous

-expansion of a darker brown colour; interfemoral mem-

brane deeply emarginated; head and body 52 inches;

‘head alone 14 inch ; tail 2 inch; expanse 1 foot 8 inches.

Iam indebted to the Rev. Dr. Macvicar for a specimen of

‘this hitherto undescribed bat, found at Mount Lavinia.

HiprosiperRos LAanKADIva, nobis, n. sp.

Ceylon Gigantic Horse-shoe Bat.

Ears large, accuminate, and emarginated externally near

“apex; transverse striz on inner surface naked, with the

-exception of the inner edge ; muzzle short, but face rather

prolongated ; body long, covered with soft, dusky, rufous

‘brown fur, which is grayish at the basal termination ; head,

neck, and beneath of a lighter brown colour ; pubis hairy ;

-interfemoral membrane accuminated to tip of tail, which is

not exserted ; no frontal sac, but two tubercular points

‘from which grow stiffish hairs.

A full-grown male measured as follows :—

Length of head and body ..» 44 inches.

» of tail scene 7.

is of forearm Se Wicaeey i.

» Of tibia ea thee

» Of carpus CPN ORES

rs of tarsus stl OM

Ears, ~ in. broad, and nearly as long. Space between ears,

-Z inch. Weight, 2. oz. 34 drs.

330 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Part II.

This bat is found in great abundance in and about:

Kandy. I have several fine specimens from the Kurunégala

tunnel, which swarms with them. This is the largest of

all horse-shoe bats hitherto seen in Ceylon. I have ven--

tured to consider it new, as it is not to be found: in Mr.

Blythe’s Monograph of Indian Bats.

Mus TEetTRAGONURUS, nobis, 7. sp.

Four-sided Tail Rat.

Fur above fulvous brown, mixed with longer black-tipped

lead-coloured hairs, beneath grayish ; whiskers long, black ;

ears moderate, naked; feet brown, hairy; tail longer

than the head and body, four-sided, scaly, covered with.

very short thin adpressed hairs. |

Head and body eee 62 inches.

Tail se ane 74

I have only seen one specimen of this rat from Hendala,

near Colombo, procured by Mr. Gill, to whom I am indebted.

for some rare animals.

Mus Dupius, new species, or a marked variety of

Mus Kox of Eliot.

- Far soft, mixed with black and rufous brown ; under fur’

lead colour, beneath grayish, washed with rufous on the

sides ; whiskers few, moderately long, black, some with

gray tips; tail shorter than the head and body, scaly, and

covered with short, soft, black hair; feet grayish brown,

and middle toes subequal, and rudimentary thumb with a

short, broad claw; ears moderate, villose; head and body,

74 inches ; head 1? inch ; tail 55 inches ; length of small

intestines 3 ft, 4in.; large 11 in.; coecum 2 in.; stomach 3 in.

This is the common outhouse rat of Kandy. It appears:

to replace the well-known brown rat (M. decumanus).

The common house rat is the white-bellied variety, Mus:

kandiaus mihi.

No. 5.—1850.] = PROCEEDINGS, 1849. 331

APPENDIX.

PROCEEDINGS OF MEETINGS.

GENERAL MEETING.

June 9, 1849.

Major Lushington in the chair.

Read and confirmed Minutes of last Meeting.

The following gentlemen were then proposed, ballotted for, and

admitted Members of the Society :—

J. C. Chitty, Esq., proposed by J. Capper, Esq., seconded by

Dr. Willisford.

L. de Soyza Mohandiram, proposed by E. C. Caldwell, Esq..

(proxy), seconded by J. Capper, Esq.

_D. Smith, Esq., proposed by R. E. Lewis, Esq., seconded by

J. Steuart, Esq.

Museum.

The following donations were then presented to the Society’s.

Museum :—

A case containing 96 specimens of the timbers of Ceylon,

with a catalogue of their names, specific gravity, uses, and

durability, &c., by A. Mendis, W. S. Mohandiram of Moratuwa.

Master Carpenter, Royal Engineers’ Department, ten specimens.

Additions to the same by J. Capper, Esq.

Seeds of the tea plant grown at Pussellawa, by Messrs. Worms.

Barley grown at Nuwara Eliya: specimens in the ear.

Balls of Scarabeus Socu (Sacred Beetle of Egypt), E. L. Layard,

Esq.”

Specimen of black coral, A. Mendis Mohandiram (this splenuid

specimen is a smooth slender shaft upwards of six feet long,

atixed to a stone; unfortunately the extreme end has been

broken off).

Five specimens of the genus Heliodorus (Swain), J. E..

. Middleton, Esq.

Specimen of iron found at Galle in digging a well, by

G. Gunewardena, Esq.

A Dutch silver coin, De Perera Mudaliyar.

Read a letter from Mr. Justice Stark expressive of his regret at

not being able to attend the Meeting, and forwarding for the

inspection of the Members the following coins and a Buddha :—

Two Dutch coins, gold, 1763, silver, 1765 ; one Batavian copper

coin, 1644; 1 Portuguese silver coin, 1640 ; one Hindu copper

332 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. I!., Parr II.

coin ; 3 specimens of the Ridimassa; one Scotch doit of King

Charles’ time.

Mr. Layard also exhibited an alabaster Buddha from Siam.

Fifteen copper coins dug up ata temple at Kotté, presented

‘by L. de Soyza, Mohandiram.

Library.

Twelve volumes of the Transactions of the Batavian Society

-of Arts and Sciences, in Dutch, presented by the Society, with a

translated Index of Contents by Rev. J. D. Palm.

Calcutta Review for March, 1849.

Journal of the Bengal Asiatic Society.

The Society’s Journal of the Eastern Archipelago.

Journal of the Statistical Society of London.

Journal of the Geological Society of London.

Travels of the Chinese Traveller Fa Hi Han, by the Editor

and Translator, Mr. Laidly.

Moved by Edgar L. Layard, Esq., seconded by J. Capper, Esq.,

“That with a view to facilitate the selection of Papers for pub-

lication, a Council should be appointed, and that the matter be

referred to the General Committee for their report.” —Agreed to.

The following Papers were read :—

On the Monetary System of Ceylon, by James Steuart, Esq.

Analysis of the Coffee Plant, with the Manures best adapted to

‘the same, by Dr. Rudolph Gygax.

Sketch of the Natural History of Ceylon: Part I., Mammalia,

by Edgar L. Layard, Esq.

Mr. Caldwell (by proxy) begged to withdraw his Paper.—

Allowed.

GENERAL MEETING.

December J, 1849.

Rev. D. J. Gogerly in the chair.

The Minutes of the preceding Meeting were read and confirmed. —

Three recommendations from the Committee were then read,

-and in pursuance of those recommendations it was resolved :—

1. That the Proceedings of each General Meeting be pub-

lished as soon as possible after such Meeting, and circulated

-among the Members.

2. That the Journal be published whenever and as often as

sufficient matter be collected.

A letter was then read from E. L. Layard, Esq., laying before

the Society some propositions from the Jaffna Members. The

No. 5.—1850.] PROCEEDINGS, 1849. 333

‘Secretary was requested to communicate with Mr. Layard on the

Subject, asking for further particulars as to the objects they had

in view.

A letter from Mr. Mooyaart was read, offering to co-operate

with the Society in the introduction of the cochineal insect into

the Island, on condition of the Society’s bearing the expenses

‘thereby incurred. It was resolved, that the objects proposed by

-Mr. Mooyaart did not come within the scope of the Society.

The correspondence with the Bombay Geographical Society

was then read.

In reference to one of the Papers subsequently read, on the Tamil

System of Natural History, the Secretary was requested to inquire

whether the classification of animals given in the Paper is that of

the Niganda.

The following gentlemen were ballotted for and elected

Members of the Society :—

EK. H. Burrows, Esq., proposed by Sir J. E. Tennent ees

seconded by J. O”’ Halloran, Esq.

Robert Davidson, Esq., proposed by E. L. Layard, Esq. (proxy),

seconded by J. Capper, Esq.

Dr. Kelaart, proposed by Major Lushington (proxy), seconded

by EC. Caldwell, Esq.

Museum.

The eifeving donations to the Museum were laid on the table

-and the thanks of the Society voted to the donors :—

A collection of corals, from J. N. Mooyaart, Esq., Trincomalee.

A collection of corals, from J, E. Middleton, Esq.

A case of shells, from J. Swan, Esq.

A case of birds, from A. O. Brodie, Esq., Puttalam.

Copy of ancient rock inscription, from A. O. Brodie, Esq.

-Puttalam.

A petrified seed vessel, from W. S. Taylor, Esq., Batticaloa.

Specimen of the wood of the Ritigaha, and a bag made of the

‘bark, as used by the Veddas, from E. R. Power, Esq.

Fifty-two specimens of Kandy woods, from E. de Saram, Esq.

Some iron pyrites, from C. Whitehouse, Esq., Jaffna.

An antique stile, from G. Goonewardana, Esq.

Papers.

The lowing Papers were read :-—

1. QOnthe Tamil System of Natural History, by Simon Casie

‘Chetty, Esq.

2. Catalogue of Books in the Tamil Language, with notes of

‘their contents, by Simon Casie Chitty, Esq.

3. Prison Discipline in Ceylon, by A. G. Green, Esq.

4. Qn some supposed Footprints in a Rock near Kurunégala,

‘by A. O. Brodie, Esq.

334 JOURNAL, k.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. II, Parr IT..

: Library.

The following additions to the Library were laid on the table,.

and the thanks of the Society voted to the donors of such as were.

gifts :—

A Meteorological Diary from Batticotta, July to September,

1849.

A Meteorological Diary from Trincomalee.

Four numbers of the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal,

from the Society.

Six volumes of the Transactions of the Geographical Society of

Bombay, from the Secretary.

Three numbers of the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bombay,

from the Society |

The Calcutta Review for September.

Four numbers of the Journal of the Eastern Archipelago (June

to September), from the Editor.

A number of the Journal of the Statistical Society of London.

A number of the Journal of the Geographical Society of

London.

Contributions to Knowledge, vol. I., from the Smithsonian:

Institution of America,

Pilgrimage of Fa Hian.

Orientalists’ Guide, from Dr. Willisford.

Pamphlet on Artesian Wells, by Dr. Kelaart.

GENERAL MEETING.

February 23, 1550.

Rev. D. J. Gogerly in the chair.

The Minutes of the preceding Meeting were read and con--

firmed.

Three recommendations of the Committee were discussed, in

accordance with which it was resolved :—

1. That the Committee be authorised to expend in the pur-

chase of two cases the funds necessary for that purpose.

2. That the Society, fully concurring in the expediency of

taking steps towards securing to themselves the use of the entire

room which they occupy, do leave the Committee to choose a

fitting opportunity for moving in the matter.

No. 5.—1850.] PROCEEDINGS, 1850. 335

3. That the Society, deeply interested in all that relates to the

industry of the Island, undertakes to procure and forward to

England such objects 4s may appear suitable for the exhibition.

of the works of industry of all nations, to be held in 1851, and that

the Committee of Management do at once proceed to take steps

for this purpose.

The following gent]emen were then ballotted for, and elected

Members of the Society: —

The Hon. J. Cauldfield, Esq., proposed by A. O. Brodie, Esq.,

seconded by J. Capper, Esq.

F. Straube, Esq., proposed by J. Capper, Esq., seconded

by E. C. Caldwell, Esq.

—Flanderka, Ksq., proposed by J. N. Mooyaart, Esq. (proxy),

seconded by E. L. Layard, Esq. (proxy).

tev, J. Katts, proposed by Rev. Kk. Muttukistna, seconded by

J. Capper, Esq. |

G. H. K. ‘thwaites, Esq., proposed by R. E. Lewis, Esq.,

seconded by J. E. Middleton, Esq.

H. P. Muttukistna, Esq., proposed by Rev. E. Muttukistna,

seconded by Rev. J. Ondaatjie.

J. Dalziel, Esq. (re-admission), proposed by Dr. Misso,

seconded by J. Capper, Esq.

Museum.

The following donations to the Society’s Museum were then

laid on the table, and the thanks of the Society voted to the

donors :—

A wild cat, stuffed large horned owl, 33 specimens of wood,

presented by Mr. C. D. Alwis, a student of the Academy.

Specimens of Batticaloa cloth, four specimens of Bourbon and

native cotton grown at Batticaloa.

Four specimens of cocoanut sugar, specimens of cleaning

nuts, J. G. and W. S. Taylor, Esq.

Four specimens of coral, eight specimens of fossils, forty birds,

sixty land shells, specimens of dye stuff, two monkeys, bones of

the dorsal fin of a chetadon, E. L. Layard, Esq.

Skull of a boar, skull of a Sciurus Bordieu, J. Davidson, Esq.

Firty-seven specimens of wood, 8. C. Chitty, Esq.

Six coins, W. 8. Gunaratna, Esq.

Several specimens of natural history and geology, Dr. Kelaart.

Specimens of sponges, J. N. Mooyaart, Esq.

Specimens of sponges, J. E. Middleton, Ksq.

Seven flying lizards, J. de Alwis, Esq.

A box of shells, ‘. Morgan, Esq., Galle.

Case of butterflies, J. P. Green, Esq.

336 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Voz. II., Parr II...

Library.

The following additions to the Library were also laid on the-

table :—

Bennet’s Ceylon, presented by D. Smith, Esq.

A number of the Jonrnal of the Statistical Society of London.

A number of the Journal of the Geological Society of London..

A number of the Calcutta Review.

Meteorological Diary for Batticotta.

Meteorological Diary for Trincomalee.

Papers.

The following Papers were read :—

Notice of the Geological Formation of Nuwara Eliya, by

Dr. Kelaart.

Notice of the Manufacture of Sugar from the Sap of the Cocoa--

nut, by Messrs. J. G. and W.S. ‘laylor.

On’ the Klu Language, its Poets and its Poetry, by J. de

Alwis, Esq.

SPECIAL GENERAL MEETING.

March 23, 1850.

Rev. D. J. Gogerly in the chair.

The objects of the Meeting were explained by the Chairman,

viz., to receive a Paper by Lieut. Henderson on some supposed

footprints discerned in a rock near Kurunégala, and other

general business.

Lieut. Henderson’s Paper was then read by the Secretary, and

proposed for publication in the ensuing number of the Journal,

with another from A. O. Brodie, Esq., of Puttalam, on the same

subject, but written in contravention of the former gentleman’s

view. With regard to the Paper now before the Society, it was

objected that having been already submitted to the Geological

Society of London, it could not now be received into this Journal..

On the other hand, it appeared to all manifestly unfair towards

Lieut. Henderson to publish Mr. Brodie’s Paper without his, and

it was further suggested that it would be more advisable to wait

for a reply, which Mr. Henderson had promised to Mr. Brodie’s

strictures on his views, A long discussion ensued, during which,

in addition to the geological question at issue between the writers,

much of a very interesting nature was elicited from the native

gentlemen present, on the existence of similar rocks in other

parts of the Island, and the native legends regarding the nature

and origin of the marks on them. It was finally determined that.

the Society should not be hasty in giving their sanction to views

which were at least entirely new in the annals of geology, and

that the publication of both Papers be deferred for the present...

No. 5.—1850.] PROCEEDINGS, 1850. 337°

It appeared at the same time that other bodies at a distance had

a Tight to expect from them as a local Society to institute a full

and searching investigation into all the circumstances connected

with a question of so great scientific importance, and the Com-

mittee were accordingly requested to take the matter into their

special consideration, to invite communications from the native

gentlemen and others on the subject, and, if possible, to make a

local examination of the rock at Kurunégala, to procure speci-

mens from it for the Museum, and to report on their proceedings.

to the Society.

The Treasurer having reported a want of some instruments

required to complete the Meteorological Registers furnished te

them from outstations, it was resolved that a sum not exceeding

£5 be placed at the disposal of the Committee for the purchase

of them.

C. P. Layard, Fsq., was proposed by J. O’Halloran, Esq.,

seconded by Dr. Willisford, and unanimously elected a Member

of the Society. :

The Special General Meeting then resolved itself into the

ANNIVERSARY MEETING,

The Rev. D. J. Gogerly retaining the chair.

The Report of the Committee of Management for the past year

was then read by the Secretary.

Report.

In taking a retrospect of the labours of the Society during the

past year, your Committee regard with satisfaction the progress

which it has made within that period; and they look with the

strongest confidence to the future, when they reflect that the

same steady advances have attended it throughout the whole of

its career, unabated even during the season of unexampled.

depression and distress which not long since pervaded the whole.

of the civilised world.

Since the last Anniversary Meeting 20 new Members have-

been admitted, and one Member re-admitted on his return from

England, while the zeal and aetivity evinced by the Members at

outstations, who have poured in contributions so largely to the

Society's Museum that your Committee have been called on three

times to extend the accommodation at its disposal for their

reception.

Large contributions have also been made by persons wholly

unconnected with the Society ; ner can your Committee fail to.

recognise in this circumstance an earnest of the interest which a

portion at least of the public take in its proceedings. A list of

the contributions will be found appended.

338 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [VoL. IL., Parr II.

But your Committee desire not to take leave of this subject

without recording their sense of the inconvenience and disadvan-

tage under which the Society labours, especially in regard to its —

Museum, by having to share with the Loan Board the room

originally devoted to its use by the Government.

They have further to report the non-arrival of the Taxidermist

whom they expected from Calcutta; nor can they assign any

reason for his withdrawing from the engagement which the

Society was willing to make with him. Your Committee have

long since given up all expectation of him, and would probably

‘find no difficulty in getting his place supplied ; but as many of the

circumstances are now changed which would have rendered his

services desirable, your Committee reserve for future consideration

whether they shall recommend this course to be adopted.

As a token of the prosperity of the Society and of the position

‘which it begins to assume among its contemporaries, your Com-

mittee refer to the number and character of the learned bodies

with which it at present corresponds. Besides those with which

it was in communication at the beginning of the year, its co-opera-

tion has been sought by the Smithsonian Institution of America,

under the immediate direction of the United States Govern-

ment; the Geological Society of Bombay; the Antiquarian

Society ; and the Syro-Pheenician Society of London ; while from

itself has emanated a correspondence with the Asiatic Society of

Paris. It would not be fair to pass by the circumstance that an

assembly of the Members at and about Jaffna has recently been

brought about by the energetic perseverance of your late Secretary,

Mr. Edgar Layard, for the purpose of promoting the interests

and furthering the views of the Society.

The Treasurer’s accounts, too, show a larger balance than at

the close of any previous year; and thus, notwithstanding that

the whole expense of publication has for some time past devolved

on the Society, and that considerable expenses have been incurred

in the purchase of cases and almirahs to furnish the Society’s

Museum, your Treasurer reports a balance in hand :—

Se nS. xc

On account of the General Funds of the Society of... 20 14 OL

‘On account of the Museum Fund of ... -- 28 O 10

Total ... 48 14 102

To that, whether regard be had to the external relations of

the Society, its internal economy, or the number and activity of

its Members, your Committee deem that it has now reached a

position and a stability to which it never yet approached at any

previous period of its existence.

No. 5.—1850.] PROCEEDINGS, 1850. 339

Your Committee do not, however, recommend any relaxation of

the strict economy which has hitherto regulated their expenditure.

The time, in their opinion, has not yet come when the Society

can dispense with the smallest share of caution or prudence in the

disposal of its funds.

With regard to the business which has come before the Society

during the year, your Committee have to report the arrival of the

meteorological instruments which were ordered before the last

Anniversary Meeting ‘lhese have now been set up some time

in convenient places, and your Librarian lays before the Society

the result of observations made by himself in Colombo since August

last, with two meteorological registers for the year from Batticotta

and Trincomalee.

Your Committee desire further to direct attention to their

ineasures lately introduced for the better regulation of the

Society's Publications. It was found that much delay was the

inevitaole result of the old plan, and that many Members, especi-

ally those at outstations, had no means of arriving at a knowledge

of the subjects laid before the Society untilall interest in them

had ceased. It has been, in consequence, determined :—

1. That the Proceedings of each General Meeting be published

as soon as possible after such Meeting, and a copy of these

Proceedings be sent to each of the outstation Members.

2. That the selection of Papers for the Journal be entrusted

to a Council appointed by the Society for that purpose.

3. That instead of being confined toa yearly issue, a number of

the Journal be published whenever and as soon as sufficient

matter is collected.

Considerable advantages seem already to have accrued from the

first two regulations, which came into effect immediately, and your

Committee think they can trace to your operation a portion of the

increased energy on the part of the outstation Members alluded

to in a former part of the Report. Your Committee count on

similar results from the third, but as it will not begin to take

effect till after the publication of the ensuing number, they cannot

speak from experience.

The Papers which have come before the Society have been

of a very interesting nature. Mr. Layard’s Papers on Natural

History derive considerable value from the fact that specimens

of many of the animals described have been forwarded to Calcutta,

and there carefully compared with those in the extensive Museum

of the East India Company, by the learned Curator of that

Institution.

Lieutenant Henderson’s and Mr. Brodie’s Papers on the marks in.

a rock at Kurunégala are of great geological interest, and similar

marks are said to be found in other parts of the Island. Some notes

57—87 P

340 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vovw. II., Parr I]. |

on the Geology of Nuwara Eliya, by Dr. Kelaart, will perhaps

prove of higher interest, as they treat of a formation which now

engages the attention of Indian geologists.

Connected with ancient. Oriental literatureand history, a very

able sketch has been laid before the Society by Mr. Alwis, on the

Elu or ancient:Sinhalese poetry. A valuable catalogue of books

in the I'amil language, and a sketch of the Tamil systems

of the Natural History, have been presented by Mr. Casie Chitty,

and some interesting notes by Dr. Macvicar on the Gaysabhawa

or village councils of the Sinhalese. With regard to this last

Paper, your Committee regret that insuperable obstacles are raised

against its publication by the author; and your Committee

deem they would scarce do justice to it did they attempt to give

an outline of its contents. Your Committee have also to acknow-

ledge while on this subject the receipt of another rock inscription

taken by Mr. Brodie from the celebrated Viharé at Mihintale.

The other Papers presented to the Society concern the industrial

economy and the resources of the Island at the present day.

Under this head your Committee have to enumerate a Catalogue

of Woods, the growth of the Island, by John Capper, Esq. ;

on the Coffee Plant and its appropriate Manure, by Dr. Gygax ;

on the Manufacture of Sugar from the Sap of the Cocoanut Tree,

by the Messrs. Taylor of Batticaloa.

But the most important topic, and the last, which has engaged

the attention of the Society, is a project for forming and sending

to England a collection of objects calculated to represent the

industry of Ceylon in the great exposition of the works of

industry ofall nations, to be held in 1851.

In this your Committee can report but little progress, as the

project has engaged the attention of the Society for only a short

time. But their views have already been laid before the

Government, and they have to acknowledge the promptness and

liberality with which they have been met.

The circular now laid on the table details the objects your

Committee have in view. It is already printed at the expense of

Government in the Sinhalese, ‘Tamil, and English languages, and

circulated under their auspices to the Government Agents and

headmen of the Island. Your Committee have further to ack-

nowledge a promise of the most ample pecuniary and other

assistance from His Excellency the Governor in carrying out

the scheme. ‘They would, in conclusion, commend it to the best

consideration of the Society and its individual Members. They

trust that no efforts will be wanting on their part towards carry-

ing out to the fullest what is already so auspiciously begun, and

hope that the present opportunity may not be lost for extending

the influence of the Society, and making widely known the

interest which they take in all that concerns the public good.

Resolved, that the Report as now read be adopted.

No. 5.—1850.] PROCEEDINGS, 1850. 341

The Treasurer then laid on the table his accounts for the past

year, and it was resolved that they be received and passed.

A list of the books added to the Library was then laid on the

table.

The following Members were then proposed, and duly elected as

office-bearers of the Society for 1850 :—

Patron.

His Excellency the Right Honourable the Governor.

Vice- Patrons.

The Right Rev. the Bishop of Colombo; Sir A. Oliphant ;

and Mr. Justice Stark.

President.

The Honourable C. J. MacCarthy, Ksq.

Vice-President.

The Honourable J. Cauldfield, Hsq.

Librarian.

R. E. Lewis, Esq.

Treasurer.

J. O’ Halloran, Esq.

Secretary.

J. Capper, Esq.

Commuittee.

The Rev. J. G. Macvicar, p.p.; the Rev. D. J. Gogerly ;

the Rev. G. A. Muttukistna ; Major Lushington, c.z.; F. W.

Willisford, Esq., m.D.; J. B. Misso, Esq.; James de Alwis, Esq.;

dames Swan, Esq.; E. H. Burrows, Ksq.

Sub-Committee for Works of Industry.

F. W. Willisford, sq., m.p.; J. Capper, Ksq.; J. O'Halloran,

Esq.; A. de Alwis, Esq.

A vote of thanks was then passed to the Secretary of the past

year for the Report which he had drawn up, and to the Chairman

for his able and efficient discharge of the duties of Vice-President

of the Society, and for his conduct in the chair on the present

occasion, The Meeting then broke up.

GENERAL MEETING.

June 22, 1850.

Rev. Dr. Macvicar in the chair.

The Minutes of the last Meeting were read and confirmed.

The Secretary read a communication from Mr. J. Mooyaart of

Trincomalee, suggesting certain alterations in the Rules of the

pP2

342 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou IL, Parr he

Society, with a view of affording encouragement and co-operation

to native associations at outstations. After some discussion, im

which it was shown that new Rules could not be proposed except

at the Anniversary Meeting, it was resolved that the matter be

left for the cousideration of the Committee.

The following letter was then read from Mr. Thwaites of

Péradeniya, describing the nature of a vegetable substance received

by the Society from Mr. Edgar Layard of Point Pedro :—

Royal Botanical Gardens, Péradeniya,

June 138, 1850.

My Dear Sir,—Directly I took into my hands the cotton-like

substance contained in your letter, and before I put it under the

microscope, I suspected it to be a species of Conferva (or fresh-

water Alga), and such it proves unquestionably to be. It is a

species of Tiresias of Bory (Vesiculifera, Hassall).

In England it isno uncommon thing to find, after the subsidence

of floods, large quantities of what is called “ vegetable flannel’”

left upon fields which have been covered by the water ; and the

*‘ vegetable flannel” I have always found to consist of oze or more:

species of Conferva matted together. The origin of this substance

has been a puzzle to many a naturalist, but is nevertheless easily

explained, and thus :—

Previously to the fall of rain, every stagnant pool and ditch has.

contained an abundance of these minute plants, which grow

floating without any attachment to the bottom or sides; when

these pools, therefore, become overfilled, the Conferva are floated

out, carried away by the descending streams to the lower grounds,

and there left as the waters subside.

The structure of these plants, as shown by the microscope, is

very simple : the whole plant consisting frequently of a single row

of similar cylindrical cells placedend toend: IT I of oo

When in a growing state each cell has a small quantity of green

colouring matter, or ‘endochrome, ” within it, differently arranged

in the different genera, and which almost disappears when the

plant is dead and dry ; and I should have been unable to identify

the genus to which the plant you have sent belongs but for

certain ring-like markings (a) upon the end of some of the cells,

and which are characteristic of the genus Tvresias in one of its-

a a a

states of growth. | ] |

Iam, &c.,

G. H. K. Tuwairtes..

JOHN CaPPER, Esq.,

Secretary, Royal Asiatic Society.

No. 5.—1850. ] PROCEEDINGS, 1850. 343

A letter was next read from Mr. S. C. Chitty, accompanying

‘several inscriptions taken from stones near Puttalam, &c.

Chilaw, May 12, 1850.

S1rr,—I have the pleasure of transmitting to the Society a copy

of an inscription taken from a stone slab, which is placed upright

in the ground, at the head of the grave of a Muhammadan saint

at Piramanenkandel, a deserted village situated to the eastward

of the Mi-oya, about ten miles from Puttalam in a north-east

lirection. You will observe that the characters of this inscription

are not: Arabic, but an ancient and obsolete form of Pali, and I

am therefore inclined to believe that it records some event connected

with the history of Buddhism in Ceylon, and has no reference to

the Muhammadan saint.

The ruins of ‘Tammana-nuwara, of which I have published an

account in volume VI. of the Journal of the Royal Asiatic

Society, are not very far from Piramanenkandel, and it is likely

that the stone slab was removed by the Moors from those ruins

and placed in its present situation.

T avail myself of this opportunity to send to the Bocioty a Copy

of another inscription engraved on a flat stone (4 feet long, 1 foot

and 5 inches broad, and 5 inches thick), which the inhabitants

of Dummaladeniya have removed from a neighbouring jungle, and

fixed on the side of the high road leading from Chilaw to Kaimal

through their village, as a boundary stone. The inscription in

question is in ancient Grantha character, and it covers all the

four sides of the stone, but on one side alone it is legible.

I have the honour, &c.,

Simon CasiE CHITTY.

To the Secretary of the Ceylon Branch,

Royal Asiatic Society, Colombo.

The Secretary then read a Report from the ‘ Exhibition

Committee, ” dated the 20th instant :—

First Report of the Committee appointed at the Anniversary

Meeting of the Asiatic Society of Ceylon, on March 23, 1850,

to promote the objects of the Industriai Exhibition of 1851.

Your Committee, impressed with the great importance of the

ohject for which it was appointed, and fully sensible of the

necessity for obtaining the best information upon which to

proceed, lost no time in seeking the assistance of the various

Government Agents, which was done under the sanction of His

Excellency the Governor. The returns requested from these

sources have not as yet beenreceived. Your Committee, aware of

the obstacles invariably met with in collecting data in this country,

are still in hopes of obtaining the information sought at an early

period.

344 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. II., Parr IT.

By means of circulars freely distributed, in Sinhalese and

Tamil as well as in ‘English, the inhabitants of this Colony have,

it is believed, been fully apprised of the nature and objects of the

great Industrial Exhibition to assist in promoting which this

Committee was appointed; and though in some few cases

misapprehensions are said to have existed amongst the least

informed Sinhalese, who appear to have looked upon the

collection cf information regarding works of industry as a step

towards new Fiscal regulations, the proper intention of the

exhibition is believed to be entirely appreciated by the great bulk

of intelligent natives.

With a view of affording encouragement to native talent, and at

the same time to impart, as much as possible, a local character to

such objects of art as may be sent from the Island, premiums

have been offered for designs for carvings and ornamental works

of Ceylon artists, and embodying Ceylon objects. Although a

limited number only of these have been received, your Committee

trusts that by the selections which have been made from them the

intention will have been at least partially realised.

Communications have been received from Her Majesty’s

Commissioners of the Industrial Exhibition of 1851, through the

local Government, to which your Committee have replied. ‘The

principal points contained in the printed circulars of the Com-

missioners have been embodied in a paper circulated through the

Colony for general information, a copy of which accompanies this

Report, together with a classified, though imperfect, list of objects

to be forwarded from Ceylon to the Exhibition. Consequent

upon the distribution of the catalogue, much new and valuable

information has been received by your Committee, especially in

reference to the vegetable productions of this Island. Amongst

those who have voluntarily tendered their assistance may be

named Mr. J. B. Misso, Mr. W. Ondaatjie of Puttalam, and Mr.

T. A. Pieres of Kandy.

It would be premature at this moment to enter into details of

such works as are in course of execution upon orders, or of those

which have been presented by various contributors in their own

names. Your Committee, however, indulge in the hope that

within two months from this date there will be formed aconsiderable

collection of interesting articles ready for shipment by sea, which

it would be desirable to exhibit in Colombo previous to their

being despatched to Europe. 7

Not the least interesting portion of the collection will be the

medicinal substances, gums, resins, and oils, most of which are

as yet little if at all known to Europeans. In fibrous materials

experiments are being made, the results of which it is hoped

may prove of practical utility and value. In manufactured

articles Ceylon can scarcely hope to approach the many more

highly favoured countries of the Indian continent ; such, however,

ee Oy

No. 5.—1850.] PROCEEDINGS, 1850. 345

as exist in this Island will be sent, in the hope that they may

prove of interest, though not perhaps on account of their costly

fabric or rarity of design.

Your Committee cannot conclude this brief report without

noticing the ready liberality of His Excellency the Governor,

who has undertaken to defray out of the Colonial Treasury the

whole expense attending the collection of such objects as Ceylon

can produce adapted to the Kxhibition of 1851.

JOHN CAPPER,

Secretary of Committee.

Colombo, June 20, 1850.

The following gentlemen were then balloted for, and declared

duly elected Members of the Society :—

S. Amblawanan, Esq., of Kayts, proposed by E. L. Layard, Esq.,

seconded by H. Pole, Esq.

The Rey. J. Robinson, of Batticaloa, proposed by E. L.

Layard, Esq., seconded by W. Twynam, Esq. |

T. A. Pieres, Esq., of Kandy, proposed by Dr. Kelaart,

seconded by J. B. Misso, Esq.

C. P. Marcus, Esq., of Kurunégala, proposed by Dr. Kelaart,

seconded by Dr. Stuart.

The following donations, &c., were laid on the table :—

Museum.

Specimen of vegetable flannel from E. L. Layard, Esq.

Two earthen coins (?) from N. S. Guneratna, Esq., of Matalé.

A collection of specimens illustrative of the geology of

Nuwara Eliya, from EK. F. Kelaart, Esq., M.p.

Antiquities. |

A plan of the ruins of Pollanuwara from J. N. Mooyaart, Esq.

Two inscriptions from stone slabs in the neighbourhood of

Puttalam, and a stone inscription from a slab in the Island of Jaffna,

from 8. C. Chitty, Esq,

Library.

Royles’ Productive Resources of India.

The Calcutta Review for March.

Journal of Eastern Archipelago, December to February.

Journal of Bengal Royal Asiatic Society, August and

September.

Journal of Statistical Society of London, March.

Journal of Geological Society of London, May,

Meteorological Register of Colombo, March to May.

Meteorolcgical Registzr of Batticotta, March and April.

Meteorological Register of Trincomalee, March and April.

346 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vov. IL, Parr II.

Papers.

The following Papers were then laid on the table and read :—

Sketches on the Natural History of CSTE ® Part III., by

Edgar E. Layard, Esq.

A short account of the Veddas of Bintenie by the Rev.

J. Gillings.

The ‘-eology and Fauna of Nuwara Eliya and Horton Plains,

by E. F. Kelaart, Esq., M.D., F.L.S.

The Zoloogy of the Tamils: Part II., by S. C. Chitty, Esq.

Sermons by Buddha, by the Rev. D. J. Gogerly.

The Materia Medica of the Sinhalese, by T. A. Pieres, Esq.

‘The Mammals of Ceylon, by E. F. Kelaart, Esq., M.p., F.L.s.

GENERAL MEETING.

August 13, 1850.

Rev. D. J. Gogerly in the chair.

- The Minutes of the last Meeting were reai and confirmed.

The Secretary notified the arrival by overland of the meteoro-

logical instruments ordered from England. Sets of these were

agreed to be sent to Captain Higgs at lrincomalee and G. H. K.

Thwaites, Esq., at Péradeniya, which, with the observations at

Batticotta and Colombo, would make the registry of observations

complete.

The following gentlemen were unanimously elected Members

of the Society :—

W. Herft, Esq., proposed by J. N. Mooyaart, Esq., seconded by

J. Capper, Esq.

C. A. Lorensz, Esq., proposed by J. de Alwis, Esq., seconded

by R. HE. Lewis, ksq.

Mr. Capper having signified his intention to leave the Colony

at an early date, begged to be relieved of che duties of Secretary.

It was proposed by J. de Alwis, Esq, and agreed to, that

R. E, Lewis, Esq., be requested to assume the duties of the office,

temporarily.

The following books were laid on the table :—

Library.

Meteorological Register for Batticotta and Trincomalee for

June and July.

Translation of the Sidatsangarava, or Sinhalese Grammar, by

J. de Alwis, Esq., from the Author.

The Journal of the Statistical Society of London.

The Journal of the Geological Society of London.

British Moths and Butterflies, 2 vols.

No. 5.—1850, | PROCEEDINGS, 1850. 347

Papers.

The following Papers were then read :—

On the Sinhalese Language, by J. de Alwis, Esq.

The Statistics of the Puttalam and Chilaw Districts, by A. O.

Brodie, Esq.

The business of the Meeting having terminated, it was resolved

that this Meeting, having a due sense of the indefatigable zeal of

Mr. Capper as the Secretary of the Society, regret that his

departure from the Colony obliges them to accept his resignation.

The Meeting desire Mr. Capper to accept their best thanks for his

efforts in furthering the objects of the Society.

The Meeting then adjourned.

JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vou. IL, Parr II.

348

‘Surusom ul Asp : Aromoys sfvp u00}aN0,] ,, “Ut Z0.0 ‘oIWIP TANUUTUIM $ ‘UI OL'F ‘sanoY HZ UI UIBA

wunuIxeyy ‘uretjo sfepou0-Aquemy, j, ‘“sapung, quenbasy yam ‘shep Aures yqs1q o; “pura jo yyenbs ouo pu ss9MoYs Iq SI] Om

10 9UO YIM ‘AIeq 4 “UlBA GSI] pus Jepuny} jeuoiseooo ym ‘souy 4e AzeTT ¢ “UleA OTI9I] pUB opuNy) yITM ‘sowt} 98 Azeqy ,

‘ATjensn s1ey $ ozey [RUOISBOVG 4 ‘SLOMOTS 4ST] OM 40 DUO pue JapUNGy 9:91] 4IIM ‘q}UOM ey ynoysnoagy Azey , “sopunyy

puB UIVeI 9491] [BUCTsBO0 YIM ‘som 4v AzeAY , “Y}UOW 9g} YNOgsnosY} JopuNgi puv UlvA OUIOS + Map [eUOISBOD0 4PM “AZBTT ¢

‘sey Azoa $ Mop AGS], “ISLE pue ‘TFS ‘“MIOL ‘GIy ‘pug uo 4YsIU ye s1oMoYs : mop ATje19UEH ;—'SHAVNAY IVAANGAY

a I ET CT SS I TS TOS 2S SI SI PT SC IE LS RES EEL EE LE LIL LLL LLL DDE EID

gspnojo surky Ayjersuey | ¢.Z "MN BAN | LL-O1 LE8-6% |L26-62| &-E | ZE | FS | G-O8| 1-92] Tequieseq

Ays Apnopo ‘Aavoyy | €-1 | “AN YM NN “S| 2-96 (668-62 |Z6-62| FE F-E | 8-B | P78) F-8L| 1oQuesoNy

oAzeg pue Apnoig| F-3 | “M ‘S44°M BM S| L9-€ [882-62 968-62] 7-¢ | O-G | O-F | F-8) 8-08] 1040300

gspuoyjo

qysy yim Ays away Aqpens—) | F.Z ‘M ‘S| 89-0 [902-62 |918-62| ¢.9 | £2 | &¢ | £98] 8-08) tequierdeg

sop “op 9.8 "MS BM 'S°M | SP-0 |6%2-62 [018-62] 1-9 €.9 | ¢-F | 7-98) 9.08 | Isnony

Apnoyo ATpesouex) | g.1 "MS BM ‘S'M | G0-0 [202-62 |t62-62| 9-¢ | 0-9 | 9-b | &98) Zos}* 4Tur

pSpnopo SutATT | 9.3 "M ‘S'S PMS] 99-0 |802-62|662-62/ 2:9 | €-2 | 1-9 | &28] 618} eune

sApnojo Atjrrauey | 9-8 "MSM OOM ‘S| L9-0 [89-62 |€24-62| 8-¢ | 9-9 | oe | 8-88) Zc8) ABTA

Spnojo sursyT | 6% |"M'N %°M ‘SB A'S | 9L-0 [£92.62 088-67] ¢-9 | &-9 | 1-9 | 9-88) @zs|"* Tady

eSpnojo ourky Aypeaouery | ¢.% aTqP1ABA | 00-0 |FE8-6%/656-66| 6-9 | 1-9 | eg | B98) L-6L)° yore

ghys avolo Apso | 7-2 ‘A ‘S PHN | 00-0 |€16-62 186 6Z| 7-8 | 0- | 8-¢ | 9-8) L-22 | Atensgeg

iSpnojo surdy qa ‘AVI | H.Z ‘ANN BAN | 6E-0 [688-62 |286-62| 6-9 | 0-2 | 9-9 | 0-8) ¢.92|"* 4eenaee

= > | TINUE | “UINU au : a ce TUN | Cn UL

BS | TU |TXCW | et | ge tay |e oe (EO OH

‘oy ‘SMNOTO ae ‘dNIM 40 ASUN00 a ee ey ‘6Pr8I1

OF A4 | -quLogu09 ‘TA LCILOW ‘TA LAW

S S | wtianwouvg |-saHy, aiag LaM| -oWuaH,

"6781 NI ‘MONIAOUG NYMHLYON ‘VLLOOLLLIVG LY Laay GaLSIVeeY TVOINOTOUOE LET, V AO LOVULSEVY

349

“IOINSvody,

‘ud@dd vO NHOE

9 OLS <2 [ely

Z'O 8 TO 106 ° dduRlEg

f9 91 9

OS8T ‘83 Arengqa,y ‘oquiojop oo

0S TI “= syOOg SUIpUIg 10j 0d

S Se 611 s[ecqeg jo eseiaaey 0g ‘0g

a ISS 9 b> I 00 ooo edoany

ay 9 OL 1eF pus eipuy ‘sedezsog 10; 0g

uw 5 eee OL 1 0 *°°0991p U0 “029 ‘Agng tof = *0q

2 O SI 8I‘“OS8I 40} suotjdisosqng jo ‘og 0 FI 0 ces **- s7UOWNIYSUT [BOISO]

a 9 IIT °*6P8T ‘op 0d -O100}0J JOF pues, 1OJ ‘0d

S O I I ~ SPST ‘800q eouRTUq JO suvalay 0 8s 2Z st 19A0Q

ES ‘Dp °S 'F OTABL pus aseo-yoog 103-0

S) G 6 0 see 929 ‘ATOMOIYBIG IO} 0d

fa 9 OL 78 * [RIO7 Il 8I I “ SJUSMIOSIVIOAPY AO0J 0d

| 9 GILe "029 ‘SOOTJON, SUIGUII 10J ‘od

0.29 tS sjeumnor s,Ay0100g yo ates Ag 0. 0.76. °° *** saidoo 0S] ‘eurno r

Or ne soo,q oounyuy Aq sAyoto0g sunud a0j ‘og

ar OF OR Coe Ss suorjdisosqne [enuuy kg £=-L>06 eee eee e1}Nd[VO

OS 9 OF oie = qeak sey wor oouvreq Ag pus uopuoTy cer oy pied gunewe oy,

S UE G3 ‘OS8T es 3 ‘OS8t

I ‘ao | "LOINSVOLT, OY} YIM yUNCOD’ UI “UO[ASH Jo AJoID0g OeISW [eAoy oy, ud

(Vou. IL, Parr I.

JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON).

390

"19INSLOAT, 0 8 Of ‘* — [eI0],

‘adddv) NHOf

“7 °O S§ T O10 &Z@ vee QOUB[C

6 kL G6

“Oost ‘gz ArenagaT ‘oquojog —

008 Sosvd MOUAOJ poouBApe JUNOBO, ‘qeaq

‘OSs

= 8 OL T ‘029 ‘sosvo ‘sjoqR] Surjutid ‘sioMvip

8 OF °° [810], JOOSUT SUT} A0J "0d «

= 9 oy asUy [LUI], LOT ‘0g oune

002 puny je1ousy wo query Mg 0 ¢ & te "* SIOMBIG YIM [er

Oe. <6 “ guomdiosqng Aapuns 4g -IW[Y SuIyy 10} 0d

Oo 8s: suonvuog Aapuns fq 0 0 8 -** 9SBO pdIg BAO pred yunowe OF, Yoreypy

Seas ‘6F8I DiS “6081

5 1@) “IOINSCALT, OY} FAIA yUNOdDe UT UOTLeD Jo Ayeto0g oNvIsy [eAOY OU, "ad

‘aNO 7 WAso]T

No. 5.—1850.] - PROCEEDINGS, 1850.

LIST OF MEMBERS

301

OF THE CrYLON BRANCH OF THE Roya Asiatic Society.

Alwis, Rev. C.

Alwis, J. de

Armitage, John... 506

Bessell, H.

Birch, Woodford

Bishop of cone | The Right Rev.

Boake, Rev. B

Bowker, John rr)

Brodie, "A. O.

Burrows, E. H.

Caldwell, k. C.

Capper, John A

Cauldfield, Hon. J. ...

Chitty, John C.

Chitty, Simon C.

Crawford, Hugh

Dalziel, J.

Davidson, R. et

Dawson, Rev. C. C....

Dawson, Robert ae

Dickson, Rev. W.

Flanderka, — a

Gogerly, Rev. D.J....

Grace, A ee

Gunawardena, G.

Gygas, Dr. u.

Herft, W.

Katts, Rev. J.

Kelaart, EK. F., :

Kessen, The Bees Dr.

‘Layard, Oh 1B s

Layard, E. L.

Layard, F.

Lewis, R. E.

Livera, F. de

Lorensz, C. A. ae

_Lushington, Major ...

- Colombo

do.

. Kurunégala

. Colombo

do.

.., Pattalam

- Colombo

do.

... Weweldeniya

. Chilaw

... Lravancore

--- Colombo

... Jafina

... MAtara

.--. Colombo

... MA&tara

.. Mullaittivu

.-- Colombo

. Galle

do.

Maducrelte:

tenne

. Colombo

... Trincomalee

.. Galle

.-. Colombo

... Point Pedro

... Kandy

... Colombo

... Matara

.- Colombo

. Matara

302 JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON).

MacCarthy, Hon. C. J.

Macvicar, The Rev. Dr.

Marcus, C. A. ia

Margesson, H. D.,, B.A.

Middleton, J. EE. ...

Misso, Dr. J. B.

Mooyaart, J. N.

Murdoch, John :

Muttukistna, Rev. G. R.

Muttukistna, J. N. ...

Nelson, J. B.

O’Halloran, J.

Oliphant, Sir A.

Ondaatjie, J. M.

Palm, Rev. J. D.

Percival, Rev. P.

Perera, H.

Pole, H. ai

Selby, Hon. H.C. ...

Sellery, H., c.R.R.

Shand, C.

Smith, D.

Smith, James

Soysa, L. de

Straube, F.

Staples, H. J.

Stark, The Hon. J nevies

Steuart, Dr., .R.R.

Steuart, George

Steuart, James

Swamanaden, Edriemanesinga

Swan, J. bag

Tennent, Sir James Emerson

Thwaites, G.H.K..

Twynam, W.

Whitehouse, E. 8S. ...

Williams, J. E., R.A.

Willisford, F., m.p. .

Worms, G. a

‘Worms, M.

..- Galle

.. Kandy

.-- Colombo

.. Jafina

- Colombo

[ Vox. IL, Parr IT.

. Colombo

do.

a Kurunégala

. Colombo

do.

.-» Colombo

... Jatina

... Matara

..- Jafina

- Colombo

do.

.. Kaderana

--- Colombo

do.

'. Pérddeniya

. Jafina

do.

-. Puszellawa

do.

No. 5.—1850.] PROCEEDINGS, 1850. 393

OFFICERS OF THE SOCIETY.

Patron:

His Excellency Sir George Anderson, c.B.

Vice-Patrons :

The Hon. Sir A. Oliphant, c.s., Chief Justice; the Right

Rev. James Chapman, p.p., Bishop of Colombo.

President:

The Hon. ©. J. MacCarthy, Esq.

Vice-President :

The Hon. J. Caulfield, Esq.

General Committee :

The Rev. J. G. Maevicar, p.p. ; the Rev. D. J. SON ;

the Rev. G. R. Muttukistna ; Major Lushington, c.B.; F. W.

Willisford, Esq., m.p.; J. B. Misso, Isq.; James de Alwis, Esq. ;

James Swan, Hsq.; EH. H. Burrows, Esq.

Treasurer:

J. O’Halloran, Esq.

Secretary and Librarian:

R. E. Lewis, Esq.

304

JOURNAL, R.A.S. (CEYLON). [Vot. IL., Parr II.

LIST OF BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, &c.,

PRESENTED TO AND PURCHASED BY THE SOCIETY DURING

THE YEAR 1849.

Transactions of the Batavian Society.

Travels of Fa Hi Han.

Narrative of a Mission to Ceylon and India.

Hssay on the Human Mind.

Natural History of Fishes.

Pamphlet on Russian Coins.

Blue Book of Ceylon.

Swainson’s Birds and Taxidermy.

Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge.

Orientalist’s Guide.

Pamphlet on Artesian Wells.

Annals of India.

Bennett’s Ceylon.

Royles’ Productive Resources of India.

British Moths and Butterflies.

The Calcutta Review.

Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society.

Journal of the Eastern Archipelago.

Journal of the Statistical Society of London...

Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of London.

Journal of the Geological Sociéty of London.

Transactions of the Statistical Society.

Transactions of The Geographical Society of Bombay.

Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bombay.

H. C. COTTLE, ACTING GOVERNMENT PRINTER, COLOMBO. CEYLON.

JOURNAL

OF THE |

CEYLON BRANCH

Pe OF THE

m@: ROYAL ASTATIC SOCIETY: |

: | EDITED BY

13 :

es THE SECRETARY. 5

ie ; . ;

He i 2 DDD LPLDPUIPDPA Te ae ES ye

oy _ A

I 1853, Ne &

be 3 CONTENTS:

oe Page.

-{ ¢ SBudhism:—Chariya Pitaka. By the Rev. D. J. See a6 in 1

I a ¢ The Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. By the Rev. D. J. Gogerly (to ie

a 12

continued.) ..

Statistical Account Of the Bishicts of ‘Chilaw ad Putlam, N spas Western

Province. By A. O. Brodie, Esq. ...

> Rock Inscription at Gooroo Godde Wihare, it in the Magoo! Korle, ‘Seven

Korles. By A. O. Brodie, Esq. ... 51

Catalogue of Ceylon Birds. By E. F. Kelaart, “Esq, M. D., and Edgar. i.

ere SOs (LODE CONLIN UCT.) ccc.” ees cee see cos cas. ase ase sas - D4

NI NI NIN INI LIN IOII SI OL OL II OIOIOS

* * Tt is requested that communications may be sent to the Secretary, under cover

to the Hon’ble the Colonial Secretary.

44+ Parties desirous of having the Journal transmitted to them by Tappal, bearing

Postage, or otherwise, will have the goodness to intimate their wishes to the

HS ne

pe ae eR

ONO OD nn rw

IIT OID RIVE DARARIS LNININ OI,

Secretary.

COLOMBO:

W. SKEEN, GOVERNMENT PRINTER, CEYLON.

MDCCCLII.,

LQ IOI LOLI OIL ION LV IF II SI VOLOI LLL IL ODIO LOL OLN IL LOT II OOS

SSyeo

20 URN A de

9H CEYLON BRANCH

or THE

ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY,

Budhism:— Chariya Pitaha. By the Rev. D. J. GOGERLY.

_ [THE discourses of Budha are contained in five large divi-

sions called in Pali Nikayo, and in Singhalese Sangi: the

fifth of these, called Kudagot Sangi, comprises 15 books, one

of which is the Chariya Pitaka, or a collection of preceding

states of existence. The book is composed in Pali verse,

and the legends it contains are brief accounts of events more

largely developed in the book called Jataka, which latter

book is also contained in the Kudagot Sangi. The tales in

this small volume have all a reference to the desire supposed

to have been felt by Gautama, in previous states of existence,

to become a Budha, and some of the means he used to ac-

complish hisobject. ‘These means are divided into ten sections

called Parimitta, and each of these, being subdivided into

three other sections, makes the whole number thirty. Only

a part of these means are contained in this work. The portion

now presented to the Society contains the Parimitta of Alms-

giving; the remainder will be given on a future occasion, with

such observations as may be necessary for its elucidation.

The Book is also called Budhapadana, or ‘sections of Budha’s

previous existences. |

The whole of my proceedings during four atsankya and

bs one hundred thousand calpas, has been for the purpose of

becoming a Budha.

VOL, I. =

Z Budhism:— Chariya Pitaka.

Omitting my conduct in various births during past calpas,

IT will declare my proceedings during the present calpa:

listen to me!

At one time I was a hermit named Akitte, and having

entered a large forest, a wilderness without inhabitants, I

dwelt there.

The king of the Gods (Sakra) being moved by the efful-

gence of my austerities, assuming the form of a mendicant

Brahmin, approached me to obtain food.

Seeing him standing at the door of my residence, I put

into his dish the greens I had brought from the forest, which

were unmixed with oil or salt. — :

Giving him these I entered my Pansel, and without seek-

ing for other food I placed my bowl in an inverted position.

A second and a third time he came, and I thrice gave him

(what I had collected) with an unshaken and imperturbed

mind. |

My body was not emaciated in consequence of that (absti-

nence from food,) but I spent the time, in mental enjoyment.

Had I met with one worthy of receiving alms throughout

a whole month, or two months, I would have given these

eminent alms with an unshaken and imperturbed mind.

I did not give these alms hoping to receive thereby honor

or profit, but I performed the actions hoping to become

thereby a Budha.

End of Ahitte Tapasa.

Afterwards I wasa Brahmin named Sanka, and intending

to pass over the ocean I went to the port. |

I there saw one who had subjected his passions coming on

the high road from the desert, walking on the hard and

parched ground. : |

Seeing him coming on the road I thus thought, Here is a

field for obtaining merit by any person desirous of virtue.

The husbandman at a suitable season perceives a field, but

if he neglect to sow it with seed, he obtains no profit from it.

Budhism:— Chariya Pitaka. 3

So I, being desirous of merit, perceive a field for its

attainment, of pre-eminent excellence: if I do not perform an

act of kindness I shall derive no merit therefrom.

As the Minister desirous of being steward of the royal

household will lose his office if he neglect to supply the ne-

cessary provisions and wealth :

So I, desirous of being eminently meritorious, shall be

deprived of merit, if, seeing this holy man, I do not present

him with offerings.

- Thus thinking I took off my sandals, and worshipping his

feet, I presented him with my sandals and umbrella.

Thus I gave him alms, received thereby happiness a hun-

dred fold, and continued to fill up the measure of my liberality.

kind of the Brahmin Sankha.

- Afterwards I was Dananjaya, king of the great city of

Indapat, exercising the ten regal virtues.

Some Brahmins came to me from Kalinga, and requested

me to give them my noble, valuable, state elephant.

They said, We have no rain in our country and there is a

great famine; give us your noble elephant, which 1s as a dark

mountain of antimony.

_ When supplicants approached me it was not becoming that

I should reject their request, and break my rule of liberality,

I therefore gave them my large elephant. |

Taking the elephant by the trunk and from a golden

vessel pouring water on the hands of the Brahmins, I gave

the elephant.

When I thus gave the elephant, my councillors enquired,

Why do you give your noble elephant to beggars?

If you give your valuable state elephant, able to ensure

victory in war, what will you do with your kingdom ?

(I replied) I would even give my kingdom: I would give

my own body: my desire is to become Budha, and on that

account I give the elephant.

End of Dananjaya.

4 Budhism:— Chariya Pitaha.

At one time I was the powerful universal emperor, lord

of the earth, named Sudassano, residing in the city named

Kusawatti.

I caused proclamation to be made there thrice a day in

various places, Who wishes for any thing ? Who desires any

thing? That property shall be given him.

Who is hungry? Who is thirsty? Who requires garlands,

cosmetics, or various coloured garments to cover his naked-~-

ness ? |

Who requires bowls or umbrellas, or beautiful soft slip-

pers? I will give them. Thus evening and morning I caused

proclamation to be made in various places.

I had storehouses in many hundred places, and gave to

applicants whether they came by day or by night.

Whatever they wished for they obtained, and went away

with their hands full. Thus during the whole of my life I

continued to give eminent alms.

I did not give things to which I had an aversion, or things

which I had not stored up, but I gave as a sick man to

obtain a cure. I did not for base purposes give alms to sup-

plicants, but with a pure and sincere desire to become

Budha.

End of Sudassano.

At another time I was the Brahmin Govinda, the spiritual

guide of seven monarchs, honored by sovereigns.

Whatever I received from those seven monarchs I gave

in alms, as from an inexhaustible ocean.

I did not give things to which I had an aversion, or things

which I lightly prized; but I gave valuable gifts with a

desire to become Budha.

End of Govinda.

Afterwards I was Nimi, the learned and virtuous king of

the famed city Mitila.

Budhism:— Chartya Pitaka. o

There I caused storehouses to be erected at the four car-

dinal points, and continued to give alms to beasts, birds, men

and women.

i continued without intermission to give valuable alms, as

garments, couches, meat, drink, and condiments.

As the servant who attends on his master for gain, endea-

vours by thought, word, and deed, to gain the good will of his

employer:

So in every birth I endeavoured to supply food and alms

to persons, being desirous of becoming a Budha.

: End of Nimi.

Afterwards I was prince Chanda, son of the king of

Puppiwatti.

Being delivered from death, and with fear escaping from

the sacrificial enclosure, I gave alms largely.

I ate not, I drank not, I took no refreshment, even if it were

for five or six days, unless I had given alms to some holy man.

Like as a merchant who, having collected his goods, takes

them to the place where he can obtain large profits:

Thus the giving to others of your meal is highly advanta~

geous: to give to others therefore is proper: it will produce

a hundred fold.

Knowing this, I gave alms from birth to birth. I continued

without intermission to give alms, that I might become a

Budha.

End of Chanda Kumara.

I was Sivi, king of the city of Aritha; and sitting in my

macnificent palace I thus thought:

There is no kind of alms among men which I have not

given, if any one should even beg from me my eyes, I would

give them without hesitation.

Sakra, the sovereign of the Gods, knew my thoughts, anc

sitting amidst his attendant gods, he thus spoke:

6 Budhism :—Chariya Pitaka.

The King Sivi, possessing super-human power, sitting in

his magnificent palace, and meditating on the various kinds

of alms, does not perceive one that he has not given.

I will ascertain what his thoughts are; wait here a moment

until I know his mind.

Having assumed the form of a trembling, hoary-headed,

wrinkled, decayed, and emaciated blind man, he approached —

the king. |

He having assumed this form, elevating his left and his right

arms, with clasped hands raised to his head, he spake these

words : |

Great and just sovereign, the author of your kingdom’s

prosperity, the fame of your almsgiving has ascended up to

Gods and men; I have a petition.

I am become blind of both eyes: give me one of your eyes,

and retain the other for your own use.

When I had heard these words, with a mind excited by

joyful emotions, I thus addressed the trembling supplicant :

Thou who hast come soliciting the gift of an eye hast come

knowing my thoughts while I was in the palace.

My desires are accomplished, my wish is fulfilled, I shall

this day give a supplant such alms as I never gave before.

Come here Siwaka: arise, be not unskilful, be not negligent:

pluck out both my eyes and give to the beggar.

My obedient slave Siwaka being thus addressed, plucked

out my eyes like the kernels of a palm tree, and gave them

to the beggar.

In purposing to give, in giving, and after having given

the alms, I had no other design than that of becoming a Budha.

Not that I had an aversion to my two eyes: my body was

not disagreeable to me: but my desire was to become a Budha,

and therefore I gave my eyes.

End of the story of King Stvi.

My mother Pusati, the daughter of a king, was in a pre-

vious birth the queen of Sakra.

Budhism :— Chariya Pitaka. ii

He, the king of the Gods, seeing that the term of her life

had ended, said, I will give you ten gifts. What ten gifts,

my friend, do you desire?

The Goddess hearing these words, replied to Sakra, What

fault have I been guilty of ? Have I become displeasing to

you? Why do you drive me from my lovely residence, as

with an earth-shaking wind? +

When she had thus spoken, Sakra replied, You have been

guilty of no crime, neither are you displeasing to me.

It is only this, the term of your existence here draws to

a close. Accept therefore the ten excellent gifts I offer you.

Pusati then accepted with joyfulness the ten gifts, includ-

ing me, presented by Sakra.

Pusati, ceasing to exist there, was born of a regal family,

and became united to king Sanjaya, of the city of Jetuttaram.

When I was conceived in the womb of my beloved mother,

by my glory she became constantly attached to almsgiving.

Freely she gave to the poor, to the sick, to the old, to men-

dicants, to travellers, to men and women, to Samanas, to

Brahmins, to those of subdued passions. |

Pusati, having carried me in her womb ten months, pass-

ing through the city, brought me forth in the midst of the

Wessa street.

I did not receive the name either of my father or my mother,

but having been born in the Wessa street, I was called Wes-

santara.

When I was a child eight years of age, I sat in my palace

and thought of giving alms.

I thought, should any one request from me my heart, my

eyes, my flesh, my blood, or my body, I will give them to him.

When I had formed this firm resolution, the solid earth,

mount Meru, and the trees of the forest were shaken.

In half a month, on the Uposatu of the full 15th day of

the moon, I mounted my elephant Pandara, and went forth

— to give alms.

Budhism :— Chariya Pitaka.

Brahmins from Kalinga came to me and requested me to

give them Pandara, my valuable state elephant.

They said, From want of rain there is a great famine in

our land: Give us your large elephant: your excellent ele-

phant altogether white.

I thought, My mind delights in almsgiving, with an un-

shaken determination I will give what these Brahmins ask, I

will hide nothing.

When these supplicants approached me, it not being proper

that I should repulse them, or break my determination to

bestow alms, I gave them my large elephant.

Taking the elephant by the trunk, I poured water from a

golden chalice upon the hands of the Brahmins, and gave them

the elephant.

When I had thus given the excellent and perfectly white

elephant, the earth, mount Meru, and the trees of the forest

shook.

The inhabitants of Siwi being displeased at my giving the

elephant, assembled together and banished me from their land,

saying, Go to the Wanka mountain.

Being thus driven away by them, I still remained firm and

unshaken, and begged permission to be allowed once more to

give alms.

The inhabitants of Siwi granted my one request, and I

accordingly published my intention by beat of drum, and gave

excellent alms.

Although the fear-inspiring sound ascended that I was

banished on account of excessive almsgiving, still I gave alms.

Having bestowed the chief gifts, as elephants, horses, cha-

riots, male and female slaves, oxen and wealth, I cee

from the city.

Having departed from the city, when I turned round to look

at it, the earth, mount Meru, and the trees of the forest shook.

Arriving at the junction of the four great roads, I gave

away the carriage in which we four persons came, and taking

Maddidewi aside, I privately said to her:

Budhism:—Chariya Pitaka. . 9

Maddi, do you take Kanha, she is the younger and light,

I will carry Jali her brother, who is older and heavy.

Then Maddi took Kanhajina who was like the flower of the

lotus, and I took the royal child Jali who was like a heap of

gold.

Thus we four high born and delicate princes, travelling

through difficult paths proceeded towardsthe mountain Wanka.

When we met any person, or any one overtook us, we en-

quired, Which is the road to the mountain Wanka ?

They beholding us with compassion said, You have much

suffering to endure: distant is the mountain Wanka.

When in the forest the children saw a tree laden with fruits,

they cried to obtain some.

The lofty and wide spreading tree, perceiving the weeping

children, of itself bowed down its branches for the children

to approach.

- The exquisitely beautiful Maddi, seeing this wonderful and

miraculous event, thus joyfully expressed her admiration :

Assuredly this is the most wonderful event ever seen in the

world: by the splendid virtue of Wessantara the tree of itself

bows down.

The Yakha, out of compassion to the children, shortened

the path, so that the day after our departure we arrived at

the country called Chéta.

Here 60,000 princes resided, our maternal uncles, who with

clasped hands cn their foreheads met us weeping.

Here remaining we conversed with the inhabitants of Chéta

and with their families, and departing thence we arrived at

the mountain Wanka.

The king of the gods (Sakra) called the powerful Wissa-

kama (the architect of the gods ) and said, Erect a well-

bailt dwelling, a commodious and pleasant. pansala.

The powerful Wissakamma, obeyingthecommandsof Sakra,

erected a well built dwelling, a commodious and pleasant

pansala.

‘We four persons having arrived-at the quiet and peaceful

forest, dwelt there by the mountain.

VOL. It. ~

10 Budhism :—Chariya Pitaka.

I, Maddi Dewi, and the two children Jali and Kanhajina,

consoling each other lived in that residence.

As the children did not go out, I was not alone in the

dwelling; Maddi brought herbs from the forest andsupported us.

While I resided in the forest a beggar came to me and re-

quested me to give him my two children Jali and Kanhajina.

When I saw the beggar approach my heart rejoiced, and

taking my two children I gave them to the Brahmin.

When I gave my own children to the Brahmin J ujuka, then

the earth, mount Meru, and the trecs of the forest, shook.

Again the god Sakra descended, and assuming the form of

a Brahmin requested from me my chaste and virtuous wife

Maddi Dewi.

Taking Maddi by the hand and filling the Brahmin’s hand

with water, with a cheerful mind I gave Maddi to him.

When I gave Maddi, the gods of the sky rejoiced, the earth

also, mount Meru, and the trees of the forest, shook.

When I gave my children Jali and Kanhajina, and also my

chaste wife Maddi, I thought of nothing else but of becoming

a Budha.

Not that my two children, or Maddi Dewi were disagree-

able to me, but desiring to become a Budha I gave that

which was dear to me.

Afterwards, when my father and mother came to the great

forest sorrowfully and with tears enquiring after my will.

With modesty and reverence I approached them: then also

the earth, mount Meru, and the trees of the forest, shook.

Then departing with my relations from the great forest I

entered the delightful city of Jetuttara, that chief of cities.

Then the seven kind of jewels were rained from heaven

and the clouds poured down water: the earth also, Maha

Meru, and the trees of the forest, shook.

The insensible earth, unconscious of joy or sorrow, was thus

seven times shaken by the power of my almsgiving.

End of Wessantara.

At another time I was a hare, a walker in the forest, eat- —

ing grass, leaves, branches and fruits, injurious to none.

Budhism:—Chariya Pitaka. 11

A monkey, a jackal, a water hen and I were associates,

meeting together morning and evening.

I instructed them in good works, saying, Depart from de-

grading vice, and perform that which is good.

On the Uposata day, seeing the full moon I said, To-day is

the Uposata day.

Prepare alms and give to worthy persons: having given

alms, spend the day in tranquillity.

They approving my advice, prepared alms according to

their ability, and sought a person worthy of receiving them.

Sitting down I thought, It is proper to give alms to holy

men, should I meet such an one what have I to give him?

I have no sesamum, grain, maize, rice, nor ghee. I live

on grass, and grass I cannot give.

Should any holy man come to me seeking food, he shall not

go away empty: I will give him my own body.

‘Sakra, knowing my thoughts, assumed the form of a Brah-

min seeking alms, and came to the place where I was sitting.

When I saw him, I rejoiced and said, It is a happy circum-

stance that you have come to me for food.

I shall to day give that in alms to you which I never gave

before, you are a holy man and therefore should not injure

others.

Come, collect some sticks and kindle a fire, I will cook my-

self, and thou shalt eat that which is cooked.

He replied, It is good! and cheerfully collecting wood he

raised a great heap, and reduced it to a bed of burning charcoal.

When the great heap was shining with heat, I leaped up

and fell into the midst of the flame.

Thus as any one entering into cold water rejoices when

the burning heat of his body is assuaged:

So I, entering into the blazing fire, felt my whole body

at ease as though I had leaped into cold water.

I thus gave my whole body to the Brahmin; my skin, my

flesh, my tendons, my bones, my heart to the Brahmin.

End of the tale of the Hare.

frou

La)

Budhism:-—Laws of the Priesthood.

THE LAWS OF THE BUDHIST PRIESTHOOD.

By the Rev. D. J. GOGERLY.

[In the first paper concerning Budhism, which [ had the

honor of reading before this Society, in May 1845, it is

stated that the sacred writings of the Budhists are divided

ito three great sections, called the Winiya, the Sutra, and

the Abhidarma Pitakas. The two latter elucidating the

doctrines of Goutama, and the first one containing the laws

and regulations for the government of the Priests, together

with occasional doctrinal discourses. The books on discipline,

forming the Winiya Pitaka, are five; the first and second

containing the criminal code, the third and fourth the eecle-

siastical and civil code, and the fifth is a recapitulation of

the whole in a kind of catechetical form.

My present object is to give a translation of the precepts

contained in the ecclesiastical code, im the order in which

they are recorded, together with so much of the text as may

be necessary to explain the connection between the precepts.

The two books containing the ecclesiastical code, are

named Maha Wageo, and Chula Waggo; the former one

will occupy our attention first.

In the paper read in May 1845, the beginning of the

Maha Waggo is translated, and the account is brought up to

the time when Goutama converted the five associated ascetics

who had been his companions during the six years he spent

in austere penances, hoping thereby to attain to the dignity

of a supreme Budha. We resume the subject at this period. |

The five ascetics having received Goutama as their

teacher, and perceiving the correctness of his doctrine, re-

quested to be admitted priests under his government, both

as respected doctrine and discipline. He acceded to their

request, saying “ Approach, Bikhus!. Clearly is the doctrine

declared! Walk in the path of purity by which all sorrow

may be terminated.”

In his first discourse, Budha had taught his disciples, that

existence and suffering are inseparably connected:—that the

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 15

perpetuation of existence results from, either a continued

desire to live after death, or from a desire to terminate upon

death the existence of a living entity or soul:—that the only

means by which a termination both of sorrow and existence

may be secured, is to be entirely free from all desire to

existing objects, and to existence itself: and that this freedom

from desire can only be attained oo a life of unspotted purity.

But now that they have received him as their teacher, he

further instructs them, that there is no existing thing with

which they can identify themselves, or say ‘“ This is I,” this

constitutes my soul. He speaks of the body, of the percep-

tions, sensations, and reasoning, and alse of the consciousness;

and of each severally he says, the wise and learned disciple

will by his wisdom perceive, these are not mine; they do not

constitute me; these are not to me asoul. This doctrine is

fully develeped in other discourses, in which he denies the

existence of a living entity calleda soul: life, with all its emo-

‘tions, are merely sequences; they have thus continued by an

uninterrupted series, the commencement of which cannot be

traced up to the present moment; they are never for two con-

secutive moments the same, but form one perpetual system

of mutation. He concludes his discourse by. saying, that the

wise and learned disciple, by perceiving these truths, ceases

to have satisfaction either in things corporeal or mental: being

no longer satisfied with them, he ceases to be attached to them;

ceasing to be attached to them, he becomes free; being free,

he obtains the knowledge that he is freed ( from al! attach-

ments ); his births become terminated; his path of purity is

perfected; his necessary work is completed; and he knows,

that for the accomplishment of that object (freedom from

future existence ), nothing more remains to be done. Upon

hearing this discourse, the five priests were greatly edified,

and their minds became so liberated from desire, that 1t never

again was experienced by them.

14 Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.

This freedom from desire (and the perfect purity necessarily

connected with it) constitutes the state of a Rahat. Super-

natural wisdom and super-human power result from these:

but he who receives the doctrine of Budha, and is thus free,

is a Rahat. There were now, says the author, six Rahats in

the world.

The next accession to the priesthood, was from the family

of a wealthy nobleman of Benares. His son Yaso became

disgusted with the sensualities with which he was surrounded,

and filled with uneasy emotions, he left his house at night

and repaired to Budha at Isipatana, a retreat near the city.

Budha calmed his mind with his conversation, and the young

nobleman was convinced of the truth of his doctrine. The

mother of Yaso, missing her son, alarmed her husband, who

sending out mounted servants to seek him in every direction,

repaired himself to Isipatana, where he also became con-

verted to the faith of Goutama, and consented to the desire

of his son to become a priest. The whole family followed

the example of the nobleman, and embraced the new religion.

There were four young men of noble birth, the friends of

Yaso, living in Benares. They, hearing that Yaso had

forsaken secular life, shaved his head and beard, put on the

yellow robe, and become a priest of Budha, were induced to

follow his example. Fifty young men also, who were the

friends of Yaso in the provinces, were persuaded by him to

become his companions ; and as they all became Rahats, the

Budhist community consisted of 61 priests, all of whom

had attained the perfection of virtue.

Budha then called his priests together and directed them

to travel into the provinces, to disseminate his doctrines,

that from a feeling of compassion, they might promote the

profit and happiness of gods and men. He added, Go singly,

priests, not two to one place, and preach this doctrine which

is excellent in its commencement, excellent in its continu-

ance, and excellent in its termination; which is replete with

instruction and clearly expressed: thus make known the

Budhism:—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 15

perfect and pure path of the priesthood. He at the same

time expressed his own intention of going toa village near

Uruwella, to preach his doctrines.

The priests, in obedience to the directions they had received,

travelled into the provinces, and made many converts.

Of these, several desired admission into the priesthood,

and as Goutama had hitherto reserved to himself the right

of admitting candidates, they brought the applicants to Budha

that they might be admitted to the priesthood, and obtain

Upasampada.

The first of these, “ Pabbhaja,” is the retiring from secu-

lar life for religious purposes, and applies to the whole body,

whether novices or ordained priests. The latter, Upasam-

pada, is the state of full admission to the priesthood, being

derived from the verb, Upasampajjati, to attain.

Budha, perceiving that this mode of proceeding was

fatiguing both to the priests and to the candidates, deter-

mined to confer upon the priests the right of admitting

candidates into the priesthood. For this purpose, he called

them together, and delivered the first of his precepts re-

specting Ordination. These are in the form of permission,

commencing with Anujanami, I permit.

Having assembled the priests, he said,

1. I now allow you, priests, to ordain to the priesthood

and admit to Upasampada, in any part of the provinces in

which you may be. And in this manner, priests, shall ye

make priests, and admit to Upasampada. First, having

caused the head and beard to be shaven anda yellow gar-

ment to be put on, make ( the candidate ) remove his upper

garment from one shoulder, worship the feet of the priests,

and [Lit: sit on his heels] kneel down. Let him then

lift up his joined hands, and say, I take refuge ) in

Budha, I take refuge in Damma (his doctrine ); I take

refuge in the Sangha (the priesthood). A second time I

take refuge in Budha, I take refuge in Damma, I take

(1) Or I go for aid; BO MomOesad.

16 Budhism:—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.

refuge in the Sangha. A third time I take refuge ip Budha,

I take refuge in Damma, I take refuge in the Sangha. I

permit priests, admission to the priesthood and to Upasampada,

by this thrice taking refuge.

Budha, having exhorted the new priests to seek by medi-

tation and effort the deliverance he had himself obtained,

left Benares and went to Uruwela. During his journey, he

converted 50 young men who were friends, and admitted

them to the priesthood; and some time after his arrival in

Uruwela, he succeeded, after performing many miracles, in

converting 1000 Jatilas, or ascetics with clotted hair, who

were worshippers of Agni, the god of fire. These bemg men

of renown, their conversion produced a great impression.

He left Uruwela, accompanied by the 1000 Jatilas whom

he had ordained priests, and going first to Gayasisan, at

length arrived at Kajagaha, the metropolis of Magadha, and

resided in a Chétiya (or sacred grove) near the city.

The king of Magadha, Seniyo Bimbasaro, having heard of

his eminence asa teacher, went to the place where Budha

was; his (the king’s) retinue consisting of 120,000 Brahmins

and householders. Budka preached to this multitude, who

were all, together with the Sovereign, converted to the.

new religion, and entered the first of the paths leading to

Nirwana,

After the discourse was ended, the king observed, that

when he was a youth, he had desired five things, and they

were then accomplished. The first, said he, was, that I might

be an anointed king: this has been accomplished. The

second was, May a Rahat, a supreme Budha, appear in

my dominions: this also has been accomplished. The other

wishes were, May I visit that Budha! May I hear. him

preach! May I understand his doctrine! The whole of

these are now fulfilled. Will Bagawa with the priests take

their meal to-morrow at my residence. Budha haying by his

silence intimated his acceptance of the invitation, the king

departed and had the necessary preparations made: and on the

Budhism:—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 17

morrow Budha went tothe palace accompanied by the priests.

The King, having with his own hand supplied him with

food, continued standing until the meal was ended, when he

sat down a short distance from Budha. While thus seated,

he thought, Where can a residence be provided for Bagawa,

out of the city, but at such a distance as will be conyenient

for those who desire to resort to him for instruction: a

retired place, free from noise, and removed from the commo-

tions and unpleasantness of the population at night? He

then selected the royal garden at Weluwana, and determined

to present it to Budha and his priests. He accordingly took

a golden vessel, and pouring water on the hands of Budha,

said, Lord, I present the garden of Weluwana to Budha and

the priests; accept, Lord, the garden.

Upon returning from the city, Budha convened the priests

and enacted the following:

2. I permit priests (the acceptance of ) a garden.

The aramo or garden, is an enclosure of indefinite size,

with the buildings erected within it. This at Weluwana

must have been a park of considerable extent, as it was to

accommodate several thousand priests. But, although by this

precept permission is given to the priesthood to possess

residences and the ground or (compound ) in which they are

situated, yet it cannot justify the holding of fields and other

grounds for cultivation.

Following the relation of these circumstances, the con-

version of Sariputto and Moggalano, who were afterwards

the chief priests of Budha, is recorded.

At that time, a Paribajiko, named Sanjayo, resided in

Rajagaha attended by 250 eminent disciples, among whom

were Sariputto and Moggalano. They were intimate friends,

and had engaged that whatever excellence in doctrine the

one should ascertain, he should communicate it to the other.

The priest Assaji in the morning entered Rajagaha with his

bowl to collect alms. Sariputto saw him and was struck

with the sanctity of his appearance, and concluded that he

must be a man of eminent piety. Determining to ascertain

VOL. Il, D .

18 Budhism:—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.

to what sect he belonged, who was his preceptor, and what

doctrines he held, he followed him when he left the city, and

entering into conversation, said, Friend, your appearance is

pleasing, your aspect placid, and your complexion clear:

Under whose direction are you a priest? Who is your pre-

ceptor? And what doctrines do you hold? The priest re-

plied, The Maha Samana of the Sakya race has become a

priest, and I am under his direction. Bagawa is my pre-

ceptor; and I hold the doctrines taught by him. Sariputto

further enquired, What doctrines does that preceptor teach?

What does he declare? Assaji replied, Friend, I have only

recently become a priest, and am not able fully to declare his

doctrine: but I will give you a brief account of it. Friend,

said Sariputto, be it little or be it much, declare it. Speak

that which is important, and I shall understand it; speak

explicitly. Assaji then spake the following stanza:

AND FCI ANDSSMOHI AMBOOH HoSOIMOHHI

Ee) Qyxee® 2 SBOHE Hd 20 02 Omron

Whatever things result from causation, those things and

their causes are declared by the Tatagato; and whatever of

them may become extinct, that also the Maha Samana makes

known.

Sariputto at once saw that this was the doctrine he had

been endeavouring to ascertain. His mind became illumi-_

nated, and perceiving that whatever is produced must also

cease to be, he entered the first of the paths leading to Nir-

wana. Meeting Moggalano, he related the circumstance,

who proposed to join Budha at once. They however de-

termined first to converse with their associates; and these

agreed to accompany them. ‘They advised their chief, San-

jayo, to take the same step; but he declined, and afterwards

died of vexation. When Budha saw them and their asso-

ciates approaching, he said, The two friends Kolita,( Mogga-

lano ) and Upatissa(Sariputto ), are coming. These will be

my two chief disciples. (Both of them were Brahmins of

eminence, and were natives of Rajagaha. ) ;

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 19

Sariputto and Moggalano then approached Bagawa, and

bowing their heads down to his feet, they said, Receive us,

Lord, as priests under the direction of Bagawa, and allow

us to obtain Upasampada. Budha replied, Approach, priests,

clearly declared is the doctrine; walk in the pure path for the

entire extinction of sorrow. By these words they received

Upasampada.

At that time spiritual superiors (eee) upajjha ) and

preceptors (e»®Sco achariya ) had not been appointed ; in

consequence of which, many of the priests being uninstructed,

were slovenly in their dress, solicited alms in an improper

manner, and were noisy and loud in theirconversation. The

populace were displeased at this, and loudly expressed their

disapprobation. The modest and grave priests expressed

their disapprobation of such conduct, and reported the cir-

cumstances to Budha, who convened an assembly of the

priests, censured the offenders, and gave the following

precept ;

3. Priests, I permit (or direct ) that there shall be spi-

ritual superiors.

Fle then details the relative duties of the superior,

( upajjhayo ¢8& %@ 20 ) and his co-resident priest ( saddhi-

wihariko #@Sea25Oe9). The superior is to regard his co-

resident as his son, and the co-resident shall regard his

superior as a father, and they are mutually to respect and

honor each other. No priest can intrude himself upon

another as his spiritual father or superior, but must be so-

licited to undertake the office by the priest wishing to

become his co-resident. The applicant must come to the

priest, remove his robe from one shoulder, worship the feet

of the priest (1. e. bow down to the ground before him ),

and then kneeling down, shall say, with joined and uplifted

hands, Lord, become my spiritual father ( or my upajjhayo ).

If the priest applied to in any way indicates his assent, the

connection is formed. The co-resident is carefully to per-

form his duty to his superior, which comprises all the duties

20 Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.

of a personal attendant. He is to rise early in the morning,

and respectfully to approach his superior, bringing water for

him to wash, and supplying him with refreshment, if he re-

quire it: he is to arrange his couch, sweep out his apartment,

assist him to dress, and if required accompany him when he

goes out, walking respectfully behind him. ‘The superior is

to advise and instruct his co-resident, and perform to him all

the duties of a parent, both in sickness and in health. The

relative duties are laid down in detail by Budha.

Some of the co-resident priests refused to perform their duty

to their upajjhayo. This being reported to Budha, he de-

creed :—

4, It is not proper, priests, that a co-resident should not

perform his duty to his upajjhayo. He who does not per-

form his duty, is guilty of Dukkata (1. e. an offence requiring

confession, and absolution. ) 7

They still remained disobedient, which being related to °

Budha, he decreed :-— |

5. I permit, priests, that the disobedient shall be sus-

pended ( from his position as co-resident. )

And thus shall he be placed under discipline:—The su-

perior may declare by words or intimate by signs, “ I suspend

you:” or he may say, “ Return not to this place:” or “ Take

away your bowl and robes:” or, “I have no need of your

services.” Should any of these forms be used, the co-resi-

dent is suspended, but not otherwise.

A co-resident priest thus suspended did not seek recon-

ciliation. But Budha decreed :—

6. I direct, priests, that those who are suspended shall

not be without seeking forgiveness. He who does not seek

forgiveness is guilty of Dukkata.

Some upajjhayo, upon forgiveness being solicited, refused

to be reconciled. This was reported to Budha, who decreed :—

7. I direct, priests, that forgiveness be granted: (!)

(1) Or, “Priests, { command to forgive,” for the permission or direction is

always regarded as a command, when spoken by Budha.

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 21

Notwithstanding this direction, some of the upajjhayo

would not forgive; and the co-resident priests being dis-

couraged, left the priesthood, or joined themselves to other

religious communities. Upon this, Budha decreed :—

8. It is not proper, priests, to refuse forgiveness when it

is solicited. He who refuses to forgive is guilty of Dukkata.

Some superiors suspended the obedient, and permitted the

disobedient to remain free. This being reported to Budha,

he decreed :-—

9. It is not proper, priests, to suspend those who perform

their duty. He who does so is guilty of Dukkata.

10. It is improper, priests, not to suspend those who

neglect their duty. He who does not place such under

suspension is guilty of Dukkata.

On one occasion a Brahmin requested pina en, but the

priests (to whom he applied) were not willing to grant his

request; upon which he pined away with grief, lost his

colour, and became very unhappy. Budha noticed the

change in his appearance, and enquired respecting the cause.

They informed him; upon which he asked, Does any priest

remember any good deed performed by this Brahmin? Sari-

putto said, that he remembered a good act; for that on one

occasion, the Brahmin directed food to be put into his bowl.

Budha praised Sariputto for remembering a kind act, and

directed him to make the Brahmin a priest. Sdariputto en-

quired what formula he should use in ordaining him. Upon

this, Budha called a meeting of the priests, and said,—

11. Priests, I formerly permitted Upasampada to be

given upon the three-fold repetition of the Sarana: from this

time I revoke this permission: I now direct Upasampada to be

given by, including the announcement («es38), a four-fold

act. (1) And thus shall Upasampada be given. A fluent and

learned priest shall present the proposition to the Sangho @)

(1) That is, an announcement of the intention, and the question being put

thrice to the assembly.

(2) A chapter of the order. —

22 Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.

and say, Hear me, my Lord the Sangho; such a person()

seeks Upasampada under such a venerable person.(2) Ifit be

a convenient time for the Sangho, the Sangho will give M

Upasampada under N as his superior, (or upajjhayo). ‘This

is the proposition :—

Hear me, my Lord the Sangho, this M seeks Upasampada

under the venerable N. The Sangho gives Upasampada to

M, under N as his superior. If any venerable one consent

to M receiving Upasampada under N as his superior, let him

remain silent: if he do not consent, let him speak. A second

time I repeat the same thing :—

Hear me, my Lord the Sangho, this M seeks Upasampada,

under the venerable N. The Sangho gives Upasampada to

M, under N as his superior. If any venerable one consents

to M receiving Upasampada under N as his superior, let him

remain silent. If he do not consent, let him speak. A third

time I repeat the same :—

Hear me, my Lord the Sangho, this M seeks Upasampada

under the venerable N. The Sangho gives Upasampada to

M, under N as his superior. If any venerable one consent

to M receiving Upasampada under N as his superior, let him

remain silent ; if he do not consent let him speak. Upasam-

pada is given to M under N as his superior. The Sangho

consents, and therefore is silent: and thus I receive it.

A priest after having received ordination acted improperly.

The priests remonstrated with him, saying, Friend, act not

thus: such conduct is not lawful. He replied, I did not re~

quest you, venerable men, to give me Upasampada. Why

did you give it to me unsolicited? They reported the case.

to Budha, who decreed :

12. It is not proper, priests, to give Upasampada to those

who do not solicit it. He who thus gives Upasampada, is

guilty of Dukkata. I direct, priests, that Upasampada be

(1) For this I shall substitute AZ.

(2) For this I shall substitute NV.

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. a

given upon a request (of the candidate). It must, priests,

be requested as follows ;—

The person seeking Upasampada must come to the Sangho,

and removing his robe from one shoulder, worship the feet of

the priests; he must then kneel down, and raising his clasped

hands, say, My Lord the Sangho, I request Upasampada.

My Lord, the Sangho, compassionate me, and raise me up.()

A fluent and learned priest shall then lay the proposal

before the Sangho, and say, Hear me, my Lord the Sangho,

&c., using the formula prescribed in the foregoing precept.

At that time, many persons in Rajagaha supplied the priests

with abundance of the most excellent food. A Brahmin

noticing this, thought, These sons of Sakya act in a becoming

and virtuous manner: they eat good food, and sleep in places

defended from the wind. It will be advantageous, if ] become

one of that priesthood. He accordingly requested, and ob-

tained ordination. At length, the supply of food brought

to the monastery was diminished, and he was directed to take

his bowl and collect alms: this he declined, saying, that if

they gave him food, he would remain; but if not, he would

leave the priesthood. What, friend, said they; did you be-

come a priest for the sake of your belly? Truly I did, he

replied. The virtuous priests, being much dissatisfied,

related the circumstance to Budha, who reproved the offender,

and decreed ;—

13. I direct, priests, that those who give Upasampada

shall declare the four Nissaya (or things incumbent on a

priest). Ist, The priesthood is for the purpose of living upon

food collected as alms. This is that to which you are to

attend as long as you live. 2nd, The priesthood is for the

purpose of wearing garments made of cast away cloth. This

is that to which you are to attend so long as you live. 3rd,

The priesthood is for the purpose.of residing at the foot of

atree. Tothis you are to attend so long as you live. 4th,

(1) The comment says, either from a state of vice, or from the lower order of

a novice.

24 Budhism:— Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.

The priesthood is for the purpose of using as medicine the

urine of horned cattle. To this you are to attend so long as

you live.

This appears to have been the original rule for the priest-

hood, but it was soon modified; and now under each head,

articles are arranged, called ‘ Extras allowed” @Sa6 2 @a

oe. The four Nissaya or necessaries, are food, raiment,

dwelling, and medicine. Under the first, in addition to food

collected in the-alms-bowl, the extras allowed are, food

brought to the temples for the priests generally ; daily food

furnished by individual benefactors; food of which they are

invited to partake at the houses of their disciples and others ;

food given on certain days; on the Poya days (the days of

the changes of the moon ); and on occasional days. These

extras in a great measure nullify the original rule.

Under the second, or raiment, in addition to garments

made of cast away cloth or refuse, they are permitted to wear

robes made of linen, cotton, silk, woollen cloth, hempen cloth,

or apparently any thing which will take a yellow colour.

Under the head of a dwelling, in addition to living at the

foot of a tree, they are allowed to dwell in temples, halls,

square houses, terraced buildings, and caves.

Under the head of medicine, they are allowed, in addition

to cows’ urine, ghee, butter, oil, honey and sugar. By these, .

Atireka labho, the ascetic principle, is destroyed. From the

next precept, it would appear that these extras were only

occasional at the commencement of the system.

A young man solicited admission to the priesthood, and

they immediately informed him of the four Nissaya. He

replied, If as a priest I am to be subject to these rules, I am

unwilling to enter the priesthood, and went away disgusted.

They informed Budha, who ordained—

14. Priests, the Nissaya shall not be previously declared

to the (applicant for ordination). He who declares them is

guilty of Dukkata. I direct, priests, that they ‘be declared

at the time of giving Upasampada.

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 29

At one time, Upasampada was given in assemblies where

only two or three priests were present. This being reported

to Budha, he decreed :—

15. Priests, it is not proper that Upasampada should be

given in an assembly of less than ten priests. Whoever gives

Upasampada in a smaller assembly, is guilty of Dukkata. I

direct, priests, that Upasampada be given in an assembly of

ten priests, or of more than ten.

At that time, some priests who had only received Upa-

sampada one or two years, assumed the office of superior

(upajjhaya), and received co-resident priests. This being

perceived by Budha, he decreed :-—

16. It is not proper, priests, that any one of less than ten

years’ standing shall give Upasampada. He who does so, is

guilty of Dukkata. I direct, priests, Upasampada to be given

by those who are of ten years’ standing, or of more than ten

years. lee

There were priests of more than ten years’ standing, who

were neither eloquent nor learned; and when they became

superiors, it sometimes happened that the subordinate was

more learned than his spiritual father; and from this many

evils arose. ‘This being represented to Budha, he decreed:—

(17. Priests, it is not proper that one who is incompetent

and unlearned, should give Upasampada: he who does so, is

_ guilty of Dukkata; I direct that Upasampada shall be given

by priests competent and learned, who are of ten or more

years’ standing.

Afterwards, as many of the superiors had removed to other

places, or had left the priesthood, or had died, great disorders

prevailed among the priests, some of whom became slovenly

and irregular in their habits: to remedy this, Budha decreed: —

18. I direct, priests, that there be preceptors. :

The achariyo or teacher stood in the same relationship to

the antéwasiko or pupil, that the superior stood in to his co-

resident priest: the rules belonging to preceptor and pupil

VOL. IL. E

26 Statistical Account of the

are precisely the same as those respecting superior and co-

resident; and it is not necessary here to repeat them: the

receiving a pupil is called “to give ( Nissaya or) proximity,”

as the pupil was to reside with his teacher, unless his presence

was required by his upajjhayo or superior.

( To be continued. )

TLV IVI NIL I NI DNL DIDNT OI NOSIS LOI VI NININ

Statistical Account of the District of Chilaw and Putlam, North-

Western Province. By A. O. Bropisz, Esa.

Tue District of Chilaw and Putlam forms the Maritime

portion of the North-Western Province, and is bounded by

the Northern Province, Seven Korles, Western Province,

and the Sea. Its length from North to South is about eighty

miles, and its breadth is irregular, but ay crepes probably six-

teen or somewhat less.

The general appearance is flat, especially along the coasts:

towards the interior, low undulating ridges and a few isolated

granite groups are observed. The whole surface, except

where salt water marshes occur, or cultivation has been estab-

lished, is covered with dense jungles containing valuable

timber trees.

The District is not physically divided in any way, with

this exception, that from Kalpentyn to Mahdampe (about

fifty miles) there runs a narrow low sandy peninsula, the

northern portion of which is termed Akkereipattoo, and

which is separated from the main-land by the Gulf of Kal-

pentyn, Quiparawa Canal, and Kaddoopittee Oya, succes-

sively. From its northern extremity, a narrow chain of Islands

runs towards Manaar, and has doubtless, in a previous age,

formed a continuation of the peninsula. For finanical purposes,

however, the District is divided into the following sections.

Putlam District.

Northern and Southern Divisions of Chilaw District.

District of Chilaw and Putlam. 27

The first of these is subdivided into six Pattoos (Putlam,

Kalpentyn, Akkerei, Pomparippoo, Koomarewanny, and Ra-

jawanny Pattoos).

The second into twelve (Ahnewoolenden and Moonisseram

Pattoos of Demelé Pattoo, Chilaw, Demelé, Moonisseram and

Ahnawoolenden Pattoos of Chilaw Pattoo; Koomarawanay,

P&ndithe, Periawille, Karembe, Raj4wanny, and Kirimittiya

Pattoos).

The last into four; namely, Yagam, Meddhe Pelléte, Othere

Pelléte, and Kaimel Pattoo.

The entire population, as obtained from the official returns

of last year, is thirty-eight thousand three hundred and

seventy.

Tt would appear from statements now before me, that the

number of males exceeds that of females by about eight per

cent.; that this difference really exists is improbable; the

mistake is caused in part by those feelings which have hitherto

made it all but impossible to obtain correct statistical returns

in Ceylon, (namely, a dread that every census is the prelude to

increased taxation, and a superstitious dislike to any num-

bering of the people); and in part, because females are re-

garded in so degraded a light, that if care be not taken, they

are on such occasions altogether omitted. The excellent

Ordinance concerning statute labour, which is soon to come

into force, will, among other advantages, also have this,—

that it will much facilitate the drawing up of correct popu-

lation returns. |

2 Rivers.

There are no navigable rivers in the District. The most

important are the Kala Oya, Dedroo Oya, and Kaddoopittee

Oya. Of these, the two latter are the only ones which are not

entirely dry during several months of each year; but even

this pre-eminence is, I think, due to their channels being so

horizontal and so low for some miles above their embouchures,

that the water of the sea penetrates far inland. During the

dry season there is consequently little or no current.

28 Statistical Account of the

The Kadoopittee Oya, from Mahdampe to about two miles

north of Chilaw, at all times contains sea-water, and forms

a portion of the Colombo-Putlam Canal. Immediately at

Mahdampe an embankment is thrown across the stream for

the purpose of filling a large tank belonging to the village.

All the above rivers, taking their rise among the Korne-

galle hills far to the east, are liable to sudden floods, even at

times when the country through which a great portion of

their course runs, is parched by lengthened droughts. On

such occasions, the channels fill up with almost inconceivable

rapidity, and the stream which might be crossed almost dry,

becomes, in the course of an hour or two, a wide, deep, swift

torrent. It is from this circumstance, that the Dedroo Oya

is termed by the Tamuls, the Mayawan Aar, “Sudden river.”

Lakes. |

There is no natural fresh-water lake; but owing to the

extensive cultivation of Paddy, numberless tanks or reservoirs,

some of them several miles in circumference, are scattered

over the country.

The only salt-water lakes are those at which are situated

the salt pans of Putlam, Natchically, Kahrative, Tilliaddy,

Oodappankarie, &c.; and those which form part of the Canal

from Chilaw to Putlam. The Gulf of Kalpentyn, which is

about eighteen miles long, and from two to six broad, may

from its land-locked position, and its shallowness, be regarded

-asalake. In fact, such is its usual designation among the

European descendants.

fiarbours.

There is only one Harbour in the District, namely, Kalpen-

tyn. It is situated near the opening of the Gulf to which it

gives its name. The channel to sea-ward is unfortunately

tortuous and shallow; small native craft can therefore alone

avail themselves of it. About four or five miles to the north

of the town, there is, however, a spacious bay, which can be

entered by vessels of considerable burden, andin which I under-

District of Chilaw and Putlam. 29

stand, they can always ride with tolerable safety. It is locally

known under the name of Dutch Bay. Were a good road

formed from it to Kalpentyn, it would, I have no doubt, give

a considerable impulse to trade, by relieving merchants from

the risk and expense of removing their cargoes to the main-

Jand in small boats or canoes.

The whole of the remaining portion of the sea-coast, either

in consequence of shoals, or from the violence of the constant

surf, is inaccessible; and owing to the existence of bars which

run across the mouths of the Dedroo Oya and Chilaw rivers,

coasting vessels are prevented from making an entrance there.

Water Communication. a

There is only one Canal in the District, that which connects

Kalpentyn with Colombo. It was originally projected and

partially opened by the Dutch, but was only brought into an

efficient state about twenty years ago. By means of it, a great

portion of the trade of the District is carried on; boats from

the Southern Province coming up either empty or with small

cargoes of furniture, betel leaves, jack fruits, &c., and taking

away salt, copperah, paddy, &c., to Negombo and Colombo.

It is very much to be regretted, that of late this Canal has

again fallen into bad order, and during several months of each

year is laid quite dry at various points.

That such should, at any future period, be the case, is, how-

ever, not at all probable; and it may therefore be confidently

expected that the trade of the District will rapidly and

steadily increase. |

Land Communication.

There are only three high roads in the District, all of which

centre at Putlam; they lead respectively to Colombo, Kurne-

galle, and Anooradhapoora. |

The first is at present in a state of tolerable repair, and is

every where passable for vehicles, the requisite bridges having

been constructed. It is not a road of much importance, as

all heavy and bulky goods to be conveyed in its direction are

of course taken by water.

30 Statistical Account of the

The second has of late years received considerable attention ;

bridges have been made, embankments thrown up, &c. There

is a great and rapidly increasing traffic along it; many thou-

sand pounds worth of salt being annually taken up it to the

interior.

The third has as yet been only partially opened, and is not

available for carts, Large quantities of cotton, paddy, &c.,

are however, brought down by it to the coasts, and the natives

living on the borders of this and the Northern Province

inform me, that they derive much advantage from it, even in

its present imperfect state.

Climate.

The climate of the District in its general features resem-

bles that of other parts of the Island similarly situated. For

further details, I am unable to refer to any paper except

that which I had lately the honor to submit to the Society,

and deem it unnecessary to state more than merely, that

from observations continued for one year, (from 1st August

1847 to 3lst July 1848) and registered at 9 A. M., at noon,

and at 3 P. M., 1t appears that

The highest temperature remarked was ... 91.25 Fahr.

The igrnast sia 72.00

The highest mean of any ee was i Naren 85.796

The lowest do. do. December 78.229

Average temperature at 9 A. M. aye Uo?

Do. do. noon Lee Oe OO

Do. - do. 3 P. M. derloiiare (CHM

General mean temperature at Putlam ... 79.718

Extreme range between 9 4. M. and 3 P.M. 19.25

That the south-west wind occurred on ... 205 Days.

Do. north-east Ms UE Ne

‘That the number of calm abe was Bate ayes

Do. do. rain days... de alike

Do. do. thunder avs ie.) ee

Thunder storms at Putlam ... Srey

All that part of the District which is bral exposed to

the influence of the sea-breeze, is on the whole healthy, but

District of Chilaw and Putlam. ot

towards the interior, where lofty forests check all circulation

of air, and where extensive swamps and neglected tanks give

rise to noxious miasma, the people are much subject to fever,

lingering ulcers, and various cutaneous diseases. During the

prevalence of the N. E. Monsoon, the wind traverses the

pestilential marshes just mentioned, before reaching the

maritime parts, and gives rise to sickness there.

Cholera occasionally visits the District, but seems to occur

only in September and October; that is, immediately pre-

ceding the commencement of the rain. It is at least possible,

that the drinking of water from the small pools loaded with

decaying vegetable and animal matter, may, in some way, be

connected with the occurrence of this disease. It 1s a common

and apparently correct remark, that any decided change of

weather causes a cessation of the disease.

In stating that the Maritime Pattoos are healthy, I ought

to have excepted the village of Kalpentyn, in which the

number of deaths, especially among the females, is truly

lamentable. This state of things has, so far as I can learn,

only existed since the town has been surrounded with nume-

rous cocoanut topes, which, in combination with narrow

winding lanes, effectually prevent ventilation, and would very

probably be in a great measure removed, if one or more

straight roads were cut running Kast and West from the Sea

to the Gulf.

Regarding the quantity of rain, moisture in the atmo-

sphere, &c., no observations have, so far as I am aware, been

made.

The natives unanimously concur in stating, that at one time

the Jungle Pattoos were much more healthy than at present,

and account for the change by the existence of numerous

tanks then used for irrigation, but now neglecteu.

Geology.

The Geology of the District presents little that is attrac-

tive, except indeed to those who turn their attention to the

minuter varications in the older rocks.

32 Statistical Account of the

All along the sea-coast there are a series of horizontal beds

of sandstone, belonging in all probability to the present

formation, and never elevated more than a very few feet

above the present water level. The rock itself varies in

structure, and contains numerous enclosed shells and coral-

lines, apparently identical with species existing in the neigh-

‘bouring Ocean. The shells in many cases retain the enamel,

and are in all respects as perfect as if they had just been

washed into the beach.

At Kahrative, fourteen miles to the North of Putlam, there

are various strata of calcareous rock, some friable as marl,

some highly indurated. These also undoubtedly belong to

the present formation.

The soil of the maritime parts is in general sandy, but

interspersed with rich alluvial earth, potters’ clay and fresh

water marl of recent origin. Towards the interior, where

the isolated granite rocks previously mentioned appear, large

deposits of cabook gravel are met with.

That changes in the relative positions of sea and land

have occurred here within the historic period, seems to be

proved by the existence of a tradition to the effect, that in

the time of the famed Queen Alliar Sahni, the Gulf of Kal-

pentyn had no opening to the Northward, but communicated

with the sea by a channel running in the line of the present

Chilaw Canal, and that the Queen above named used to

proceed from Koodirei mallie to the Akkereipatto by land;

that a great flood came, buried her palace under the waves,

and bursting through a neck of land, converted the lake into

a gulf, which form it still retains.

Mineralogy. |

No gems have been found in this District ; and the only ore

which I have heard of is the bog iron ore, procured in

considerable quantities a few miles to the south of Chilaw,

and smelted by the natives, who have, it appears, observed its

reproduction.

Sa Set re ee ee a

District of Chilaw and Putlam. 33

Nitre used at one time to be procured from various caves.

One of these I visited, and have reason to believe that the

salt was not formed naturally, but was obtained artificially

from the dung of countless bats which have their abode in

the grotto.

Salt is procured in large quantities by evaporation of sea-

water, and indeed forms the chief source of public revenue.

The greater portion of it is obtained by means of artificial

pans; a few hundred bushels are, however, occasionally spon-

taneously formed near Kalpentyn, during the dry season.

At QOopookoolum, fifieen miles N. W. of Putlam, the

natives affirm that a very bitter kind of salt (Epsom?) is to

be procured. I have not, however, had any opportunity of

verifying the statement.

Springs.

No medical or thermal springs are known.

Soil, Agriculture, &¢.

As previously mentioned, a great portion of the soil in the

Maritime Districts is a silicious sand, more or less mixed

with comminated shells. Where granite rocks exist, a reddish

loam takes the place of the sand; and on the margin of rivers

and lakes a rich black mould, well adapted for the cultivation —

of paddy, is to be met with. In some places a retentive clay

exists and is used in the manufacture of bricks, &c.

The two staple vegetable products of the District are

Cocoanuts and Paddy.

All the country lying along the sea-coast is occupied by

topes of cocoanut trees, which flourish in a soil consisting

apparently of pure sand. ‘The finest plantations which i

have seen are at Mahdampe, on the site of the former Pepper

gardens; but the whole eastern side of the Akkerei Pattoo

yields good crops, which the natives attribute in part to the

existence of thin sandstone beds a few feet under the surface

of the ground. Below these strata there is water, and it ap-

pears that this, by capillary attraction, rises through the stone,

VOL. II, E

34 Statistical Account of the

thus keeping the roots damp, and at the same time preventing

them from being constantly immersed in stagnant water.

The tree seems to flourish best in the immediate vicinity

of the sea, and I have frequently seen it growing well with

its roots partially immersed in salt water. Owing apparently

to the porousness of the soil, an elevation of a few feet is

found to act nearly as prejudicially as a removal to a distance

of several miles from the coast. The benefits which the cocoa-

nut tree bestows on the natives are so well known that it is

unnecessary to particularize them. The oil which is in such

general use is usually obtained by expression, one end of a

bent lever being inserted into a large mortar-shaped vessel

so as to rub against the inner surface, while the other is

attached to the draught cattle. The cake which is left is called

poonack; it contains a large quantity of oil, and is used for

fattening poultry, cattle, &c.

There are about 950,000 cocoanut trees in the District; and

as about eighty are generally placed on an acre, it would

appear that about 12,000 acres are devoted to this plant, each

acre being worth a rent of from twenty to sixty shillings.

Each tree yields from twenty-five to seventy nuts, though some

occasionally are found to give a crop six or eight times greater

than this; but in those cases the nuts are generally small.

From one thousand to one thousand five hundred nuts

yield on an average a bar of copperah (the dried kernel), and

this yields about one hundred and forty seers or 320 lbs. of oil.

The average price of copperah is from 22s. to 30s. and above,

per bar; that of oil 24d. to 33d. per bottle; and that of

poonack about three-fifths of a penny per lb., and from 8s. 9d.

to lls. 8d. per bar. One bar of copperah yields about 210 Ibs.

of poonack.

There are, besides those already enumerated, certain other

products of the cocoanut tree, which add to the profits of the

planter. Thus, the leaves split lengthways and then woven

together by means of the leaflets, form what are called cadjans,

District of Chilaw and Putlam. 35

of which a hundred sell for 1s. 6d. or 2s., or if the cadjans be

woven into a sort of continuous sheet or mat, called a carrisango

(twelve cadjans making from four to six carrisangoes ), a hun-

dred of these are worth 4s. or 4s. 6d. Again, 250 to 300 nuts

give 1000 fathoms of coir rope, worth about 2s. 6d. In fact,

the uses of this tree are endless.

As might be expected, the prices of the various products

obtained from the cocoanut tree, vary extremely in different

parts of the District. To prevent misunderstanding, I give se-

parately the usual prices at Kalpentyn in the north, and

Mahdampe inthe south. Atboth places the tree flourishes and

is cultivated to a great extent.

At Kalpentyn the cocoanuts are worth about £1 10s. per

1,000. Poonack from 8s. 9d. to 11s. 8d. per bar, (one quarter

ofa ton). Copperah £1. Is. to £2. 3s. per bar. Oil dd. to -

5id. per seer.

About 300,000 cocoanuts are annually exported from

Kalpentyn, almost the whole quantity going to the Continent

of India; a few thousands besides are sent over in the husk

for planting. From the same Port 1000 bars of copperah go to

Colombo, 100 to the Northern Province, and 2000 to the

Coast. The last mentioned paying an export duty of 24 "per

cent. <A small quantity of oil is sent to Jaffna, and occasion-

ally a little to the Coast. Return Dhonies take about 50,000

cadjans to India annually ; these pay a duty of 24 per cent., and

are worth at Kalpentyn from Is. 6d. to 2s. per 100; but at the

places where they are made not more than from 73d. to

9d. per 100.

At Mahdampe, on the other hand, copperah is worth from

£1. 2s. 6d. to £2. 5s. per bar; poonack 2d. per lb., and oil from

2id. to 33d. per bottle. About 10,000 or 12,000 bars of

copperah are annually taken to Colombo for sale.

I cught perhaps to add, that the tree is generally at first

grown in nurseries, and that it will bear transplanting at a

considerable age.

It is greatly to be regretted that the upset Government

36 Statistical Account of the

price for land is as high here asin districts of which the

capabilities have already been ascertamed. Capitalists are

unwilling to give the price demanded, knowing, as they do, that

natives are in the habit of selling equally good land at rates a

half or a third lower; and on the other hand, they are deterred

from buying the ground from natives, partly on account of

the difficulty which they would experience in purchasing large

continuous tracts, and partly from a dread least their title to

the land might at a future period be disputed by Govern-

ment, which would most probably occur in numerous cases.

The native mill, being a very imperfect apparatus, large

quantities of copperah are annually sent out of the District,

chiefly to Colombo. It is much to be desired that the oil

itself should alone be transported; and this cannot be expected

until some better kind of mill has been introduced. Many

years ago an Englishman began to construct such an appa-

ratusat Kalpentyn; it was made onthe planadopted in Europe,

where a heavy vertical wheel is forced to move in a circular

path over the substance to be crushed.

The cultivation of the cocoanut is extending very rapidly;

and as the District affords every facility for water traffic, it

may be presumed that the number of topes will be increased

year after year.

The farming system adopted with regard to this plant is

that customary in many parts of the East. The land-owner

places on the grounds one or more peasant families who take

charge of the plants until they are in full bearing (that is, for

from four to eight years), at the end of which time the tenant

receives one half of the trees as his hire (this gives him, how-

ever, noclaim tothe landitself). Occasionally, instead ofmaking

this division, the proprietor dismisses the cultivator after pay-

ing him at the rate of a shilling or a dollar for each tree. Itis

almost unnecessary to add, that during the first three or four

years the plants must be watered daily in dry weather.

I know of no more legitimate source of public revenue, than

a small tax on fruit-bearing cocoanut trees. Whenever this

District of Chilaw and Putlam. 37.

has been proposed, the natives have made a great outcry; but

it is quite notorious, and is indeed freely acknowledged by

themselves, that no sooner is a man in possession of a small

cocoanut tope, than he is independent for the rest of of his life;

he has absolutely nothing to do but to pluck the fruit, eat one

portion, and sell the remainder. The paddy cultivator has to

labour during several months to obtain one crop, and even

this he may lose from unfavourable weather;—he is taxed: on

the contrary, the cocoanut cultivator has merely to water his

trees for two or three years, and then he may safely reckon on

a, continuous crop for forty or fifty years; and this without any

further labour on his part;—he is not taxed.

In the interior, where the cocoanut does not thrive so well

as along the coasts, the natives turn their attention to the culti-

vation of various grains, in an especial manner to that of Paddy.

Of this plant, a great many varieties are known, which, how-

ever, so far as this District is concerned, may be divided into

two great classes, according as to whether they ripen in four

or in three months. The former being sown from July to

December yields the Maha harvest in January, February and

March. ‘The latter placed in the ground between April and

July, ripens in August or September, giving the Yala harvest.

Those kinds of Paddy known as Mahawee, Elankaly, Honor-

aweele, are only sown for the Maha harvest. Most, if not all

of the rest, may be used for either crop.

The natives here as elsewhere, make their tanks too shallow,

the embankments unequal in height throughout, and the par-

tition mounds too numerous. To shew the evil effects of these

mistakes and the best means by which they are to be obviated,

would require more room than can be allowed in this sketch.

The farm system is that which has been the curse of India

from time immemorial; and it prevails, I believe, in every part

of the Island. It is liable to shght modifications, but its

_ general features may be thus described.

No landed proprietor farms his own ground. Twice annually

he comes to an agreement with a number of peasants, each of

38 Statistical Account of the

whom takes charge of the field allotted to him for that one

crop, (of course it frequently does happen that a peasant

cultivates the same field during several successive years.)

When the grain has been threshed and the Government share

deducted, the remainder is divided into four equal shares;—

thus:

Proprietor; Cattle; Seed-corn; Cultivator.

In general, the landlord provides the cattle and seed-corn;

the peasant feeding the former as long as they are employed

on the ground.

In most cases no particular arrangement is made regarding

the straw. Any one who pleases may take it. In fact, owing

to the bad system pursued in reaping, one half or more of it is

left in the field as stubble.

Unless either the large proprietors can be induced to farm

their own lands, or the natives can be induced to combine to

some extent in all objects for the mutual benefit of the

inhabitants of each village; and until leases for lengthened

periods are adopted, the peasant has no encouragement in

endeavouring to improve his farm, and it is utterly hopeless to

expect any great improvement in this branch of agriculture.

Such then are some of those circumstances which tend to

act injuriously on agriculture. There still remains to be

noticed the train of evils arising from the manner in which

the grain tax is levied; a system which, however defective it

may be, cannot be easily dispensed with. This subject is,

however, one of too great importance to be treated of in this

abstract.

Much land being so situated that it cannot be irrigated, is

reserved for the cultivation of what are called fine grains,

such as Kooraken, Minaeree, Sesame, &c.

The system pursued is most destructive. The same piece

of ground being sown only once in five, ten, or fifteen

years, and the land allowed to become covered with wood in

the intervals. The ashes of this brushwood form the only

. manure employed. The natural effects of a plan by which

District of Chilaw and Putlam. 39

each peasant must possess a number of separate patches of

land, each large enough to give him a sufficient crop for one

year, are abundantly evident. I have often travelled for

days together through nothing but chena land (so the clear-

ings are termed), without seeing more than a very few trees

of any value as timber.

Nothing but the introduction of the use of manures can

check the inherent evils of the system.

These plants then, the cocoanut, paddy, and fine grains,

employ the greater portion of the agricultural population;

others are, however, cultivated; and of the more important I

shall give short notices.

Tobacco is to be met with all over the District; but more

attention is paid to it at and to the south of Chilaw than

elsewhere.

The system of cultivation is as follows. The ground

during from six to twelve months, is manured by railing off

successively small portions of the field and using those as

cattle folds. There are two seasons for sowing tobacco; that

for the Maha harvest is sown in December and January, and

cut in March and April; that for the Yala harvest is sown in

June and July, and cut in September. Throughout the

ereater portion of the District, the maha harvest alone is

looked to. In the extreme south the yalais that to which sole

attention is directed. ‘Two months after sowing, the young

plants, which have then four or five leaves each, are removed

from the nursery and planted in rows three feet apart. At inter-

vals during three or four months, the leaves are successively

stripped off, dried partly in the sun and partly in sheds, and

ultimately piled up in a small close room where they heat

considerably. About ten leaves are obtained from each

plant; these are worth from 24d. to 4d.; the cost of culti-

vation being about one and a half pence. The large profit

thus shewn is, however, rather nominal than real, as

lengthened droughts frequently ruin the crops; heavy rain

occurring before the leaves are ripe proves equally injurious.

40 Statistical Account of the

The price of the leaves varies extremely; the worst are not

worth more than a few shillings per thousand, the very: best

not less than £6., and sometimes even £7 10s. for the same

quantity. Those which bring this latter price, are large,

thick, viscous, and both taste and smell very strong. The

method adopted in drying thé produce and in manufacturing

it, is extremely defgctive.

If the land he rented out, the crop is divided thus;— Land

owner; Peasant; Cattle; equal shares.

The Palmyra palm is found in all the Maritime portions

of the District, but is not much prized. It is chiefly used

for the purpose of obtaining from it Toddy and Jagghery.

The wood of old trees answers admirably for rafters; the

kernals are cool and pleasant ; and from the expressed juice of

the husk surrounding the nut, a kind of paste called Penattoo

is made. In the Northern parts of the Island this substance

forms an important article of food.

The Kittool grows freely towards the interior, but is not

much cultivated; the jagghery obtained from it is considered

superior to all others.

The Talipot is all but unknown.

The Areeka palm is very extensively cultivated in the

southern part of the District. It begins to bear about six years

aiter being planted, and produces, on an average, one thousand

nuts annually; these are worth on the spot from 2id. to

434d. per hundred. The tree is short-lived; generally shewing

signs of decay after twenty years or so. During the

supremacy of the Portuguese and Dutch, the natives at

Putlam were in the habit of paying their taxes in betel

nuts; these must, however, have been procured from other

Districts, as itis found that the tree does not thrive any

where near the village. The plants shoot up rapidly

during the first few years but then die away suddenly. The

present produce is unequal to the demand; large quantities

are consequently brought from the southern parts of the

Island, where the soil is better adapted to the plant.

District of Chilaw and Putiam. 41

Plantains grow abundantly every where, but little atten-

tion is paid to the selection of good varieties. |

The Betel creeper is found in every village, but only

towards the south are large gardens given up to this plant.

Pepper was at one time cultivated to a great extent near

Mahdampe, but is now totally neglected, the natives believ-

ing that if ground be devoted to it alone,,the expenses of the

cultivation would not be covered, and that if allowed to

clamber round cocoanut trees, these would be destroyed.

Coffee grows freely and the fruit is collected by the natives,

but it is of course of little or no value.

Cinnamon is found abundantly about eight miles to the

south of Putlam, andalsoin other parts of the District; the bark

used to be collected during the existence of the Government

monopoly, and the villagers still gather small quantities of it.

The Bread fruit and Jack are much cultivated towards the

south; the former grows well at Kalpentyn.

- The Sappan wood grows in the District, but I am not

aware that it is collected for sale.

In some parts of the District, Hemp (hanze) 1s raised in

considerable quantities; but the absence of pure running

siveanis is a great obstacle in the way of the cultivator ; it

is chiefly employed by fishermen.

Formerly, when the collection of whieva ( Hedyotis ( Olden-

landia) umbellata ) wasa Government monopoly, large quanti-

ties used to be obtained from the sandy downs which gird the

coast; that growing in the neighbourhood of Kalpentyn was

considered to be of the best quality. A peculiar caste of

people employ themselves to a considerable extent in digging

up and drying the root, which yields a very brilliant, and I

believe, permanent reddye. About ten or fifteen tons of this

article are exported annually to the Continent of India.

It may be proper to mention that at Kalpentyn consider-

able quantities of a kind of seaweed are dried and sent to

different parts of the Island, where it is usually termed Jaffna

mss.

VOL. JI. G

42 Statistical Account of the

The process of preparation consists simply in washing it im

fresh water and drying it several times in succession; when

- boiled and allowed to cool it forms a transparent, nearly

tasteless, but, Iam told, nourishing jelly. The preparation

‘of the plant was first commenced in 1806, at which time the

usual price was 9d. per lb., it has now, however, fallen

to 13d., but the process is less carefully conducted than

formerly.

The fruits and vegetables are the same as in other parts of

the low country; but no attention whatever being paid to their

cultivation, the produce of the majority is poor and insipid.

English vegetables have at various times been planted; but

lettuces, radishes, and some kinds of bean, are the only

ones which appear capable of accommodating themselves to

the climate.

Cotton grows wild over the whole District, and the product

used to be collected in large quantities. Cloth from English

looms has, however, to a great extent, driven the native

manufacturer out of the market. |

Timber.

The whole face of the District, with the exception of a

narrow strip along the sea-coast, being covered with wood, a

considerable variety of timber trees is to be met with.

The commonest of these are the following.

Ebony. Diospyrus Ebenses.

Nattin wood. Chloroxylon Swietenia.

Meele.

Halmillil.

Paloo, commonly called Iron wood.

Godaparre. Dillenia dentata.

Hora gaha. Dipterocarpus turbinatus.

Jack. Artocarpus integrifolia.

Teak. Tectonia grandis.

Of these, Jack is never found growing spontaneously, and of

the Teak there are unfortunately but few specimens left, all

- the plantations of this tree formed in the southern part of the

District of Chilaw and Putlam. | 43.

District having been cut down, without any provision being

made fora future supply. Some young plants were, however,

brought up-to Putlam about a year ago, and have hitherto

crown well. |

From some of the indigenous trees various gums and resins,

valuable in the arts and in medicine, are obtained.

Fisheries. ;

As might be presumed, a large number of persons are engaged

in catching and in curing fish. For the former purpose

various plans are adopted. The passing cooly or lazy villager

obtains a savoury addition to his evening meal by cutting off

and gradually emptying small portions of half dried up tanks ;

while others attain the same end by pursuing shoals of fish

along shallow channels and suddenly dropping over them

conical shaped baskets. ‘The quantity of fish caught in this

way would appear extraordinary to those who have not had

opportunities of observing that every collection of water, how-

ever small, swarms with life. Those whose means are greater,

make use of drag nets managed by two persons, which are

used either in still water or else in the surf which beats

against, and at short intervals surmounts, the shelves of rocks

which line the coast.

To catch large fish, hooks and lines, deep sea nets, and stake

nets are employed. The latter are ingeniously constructed of

saplings tied side by side, leaving interstices of half an inch

or more. <A fence of these is run out from the shore, and

terminates in a series of arrow-headed chambers. It is in

these kraals that the majority of the turtle obtained here are

caught. Another. plan, in constant use among the natives,

is to run a fence of saplings or nets from each side of a river,

leaving only a small channel in the centre ; in this channel

they place either a long bag net, or else a series of baskets

formed on the principle of a mouse trap; the fish entering

with ease but being unable to effect their escape. Shrimp

fishers make use of a fine net worked in such a manner as to

form a lengthened funnel-shaped figure, to the large circle

44 Statistical Account of the

forming the aperture of which small lead weights are

attached. The net is carried folded over the left arm; a ro-

tatory motion is given to the weighted end which is ultimately

propelled to a considerable distance, and in such a manner as

to fall on the water expanded and with the opening down-

wards ; the lead weights immediately sink to the bottom and

enclose within the circle the fish which happen to be on the

spot. :

Large quantities of fish are dried, salted, and despatched to

the interior; the process is, however, carried out in the most

imperfect manner, and the product, consequently, in many

cases utterly unfit for consumption, is without doubt a fre-

quent cause of illness among those who partake of it.

Since the tax upon fish was removed, the trade in this

article has very much diminished, and the boatmen are

most anxious that the duty should again be levied. This may

appear paradoxical, but I speak positively. All the chief fishers

here having on one occasion expressed their opinions in my

presence ; and this under circumstances which makes me feel

confident that such is the real state of feeling among them.

The anomaly is easy of explanation. When the fish tax

was farmed out, it was of course the interest of the renters

that as much activity as possible should be displayed.

They accordingly made advances to the poorer boatmen ;

caused their canoes and nets to be repaired, and in return

constantly urged them toassiduity. The renter thus secured

himself from loss, and the fisher, besides receiving an advance

when in distress, found that he had by his industry secured for

himself a larger sum than hitherto. In fact, the wish for the

tax is merely a modified acknowledgement of the advantages

of capital. The people are too wanting in enterprise and too

divided among themselves to unite for any useful purpose,

and although aware of the advantages of industry, have not

energy enough to act upon this conviction without the

constant admonitions of headmen. Like all Asiatics, they

become utterly helpless if unprovided with chiefs. ie

District of Chilaw and Putlam. 45

Domestic Animals.

Of the domestic animals, no breed is, so far as I am aware,

peculiar to the District. Large quantities of cattle are

annually brought over from the coast, and are bought up to

be employed for the ploughing of paddy fields, as draught or

as pack cattle. There appear to be several breeds, but no

trouble is taken in preserving or improving any. ‘The largest

and handsomest are not considered so profitable as those of

moderate size, but on this subject the natives appear to be

eradually altering their opinion. Buffaloes in large numbers

stray over the plains and through the jungles of the District ;

they are sluggish animals, are possessed of more physical

strength than the common cattle, but are slow-paced and

soon sicken and die if they have not frequent opportunities

: of immersing themselves in water. They are used in farming,

and are also commonly employed in carts, a practice which, I

believe, is not general throughout the Island. Sheep and goats

of several breeds are found in considerable numbers all along

the coast. Towards the interior the natives entertain some

prejudice against the rearing of them; and indeed owing to the

habits of these animals, it would be troublesome keeping them

in a district covered with forest and abounding in leopards.

Of the larger cattle, itmay, I think, with safety be said, that

like guns, one half at least are purchased, not from an

expectation that they will yield any direct profit to the

owner, but simply as a means of investing money ; thus they

frequently form portions of the marriage eifts among the

natives ; and till the present high rate of interest ceases, and

the people understand to some extent the principles of

banking, and feel confidence in these establishments, the

system will doubtless continue. It is only on very rare

occasions that cattle are killed for food ; the hides are invaria-

bly thrown away ; and in short, ina district abounding in

pasture land, dairies are unknown, milk and butter are rarities,

-and scarcely any benefit is derived from the existence of cows,

buffaloes, orsheep. Alarge proportion of the natives along the

46 Statistical Account of the

coast being Mahommedans, pigs are only to be met with

in two or three of the larger villages; an English breed has

lately been introduced, thrives well, and is being gradually

disseminated.

During the last few years the amount of stock has been

very greatly diminished by murrain; in many places three-

fourths of the animals have died. It is highly desirable that

the natives should receive some simple instructions as to the

method of treatment in such cases; hitherto charms alone have

been applied, and the consequent loss to the country has been

very great indeed.

Wild Animals.

It is only within a recent period that attention has, so far

as [ am aware, been paid to the zoology of the District. I am

therefore not prepared to enter into any details at present. So

far as the better known and larger animals are concerned, this

‘may be mentioned.

Elephants are abundant everywhere, and cause considerable

injury to the cultivated lands. Accidents to human beings are

however extremely rare. The jungle Bear and the two species

of Leopard (commonly but falsely termed by Europeans, cheta

or tiger) are common, the black variety is occasionally met

with. Wild hogs are abundant and frequently commit great

ravages in young cocoanut and plantain gardens, as do the

Porcupines. Herds of Deer are to be seen grazing in the

plains or trooping through the forest glades; there are four

species, if the Musk deer be included. Jackals abound every-

where; the natives say that there are two distinct species, one

large and red, the other smaller and dark; but I have not

been able to verify this. Two varieties of the Mungoose are to

be seen in every piece of open jungle; they prove destructive

to poultry, as do Wild-cats and Civets. The Manis, or scaly

ant-eater, I have met with on several occasions. It is used as

food. The rivers and tanks abound with Crocodiles, of which

there appear to be two species, one attaining a length of

District of Chilaw and Putlam. 47

eighteen or twenty feet, and formidable to men and cattle, the

other seldom exceeding eight or ten feet,and perfectly harmless

when uninjured. Both are naturally timid and fear the face of

man. Numerous species of smaller Lizards are found: that

commonly known under the name of Iguana is used as food,

_ and its skin is converted into shoes. It is hunted with dogs

trained for that purpose.

The forests contain numerous and beautiful Birds and

Insects, many yet undescribed; but of these for reasons

already given, it would be premature to say any thing at

present.

It may be mentioned here that at Kalputty (or Calpentyn

as it is often written) a considerable quantity of biche da mare

is annually prepared and sent to Jaffna for exportation to the

Malay Peninsula and China. |

It consists simply of the dried bodies of a species of

Holothuria (sea cucumber), which is found in large quantities

along the oozy shores of the Gulf. They are picked up at ebb

tide; when taken into the hand the muscular contraction of

the thick leathery integument is so strong, that a great portion

of the viscera is frequently forcibly protruded; if this does

not occur, the animals are opened, and after embowelling

boiled for a couple of hours till quite soft, and then dried on

the beach if the weather is favourable; under other circum-

stances in close huts by means of fires. The price on the spot

is about 3s. 9d. per 1000, and this quantity can easily Be

collected by two men during one ebb tide.

Pearl and Chank Fisheries.

Pearl banks exist along the coast from Chilaw to Kahradive

Island, but many years have elapsed since they were fished.

Chanks are still in considerable demand; they are exported

to the Continent, where they are sawn up and converted into

beads, bracelets, and other ornaments. Asa branch of revenue

this has, however, almost entirely ceased to exist.

48 Sfatistical Account of the

Eistory and Inhabitants.

An attempt to write a connected history of any small por-

tion of a country is almost absurd ; its own peculiar politics

are trivial, and matters of greater interest at once merge into

the general history of the land.

The only historical circumstance attaching much interest

to the District, is the erection within it of the first Capital

of Ceylon. :

From the Maha Wanse (Turnour’s translation, p. 47, et

seg.) and Upham’s Sacred and Historical Books of Ceylon (p.

27, et seq. ), we learn, that on the very day that the last Budha

expired, Prince Wijeya, grandson of the Lion, having by

his dissolute conduct been driven from his home on the Con-

tinent, landed at some part of the ‘coast near Putlam ; that

after proceeding a few miles towards the interior and over-

Coming a female Demon, named Kuweni, who had enchanted

and thrown into a dark cavern his seven hundred followers,

he built a palace to ratify a covenant which he had made

with the sorceress. Around this palace the first Capital of

Ceylon was built, and received the name of Tambapanni or

Tamana Adaweea or Tamena Noowera, from the red earth

found there having stained the hands of Wijeya’s followers,

who overcome by sea-sickness and faintness, had thrown them-

selves on the ground to recruit their strength. The place

is well known here under the name of Tammena Adaweea; it

lies about:six or eight miles to the east of Putlam, and was

described by Mr. Casie Chitty in the Transactions of the Royal

Asiatic Society. A few rough pillars and slabs scattered

at random in a thick jungle are the only remains now visible.

Wijeya’s companions and successors soon established them-

selves in different parts of the country, and in the fifth reign,

that of Pandukabhaya, the seat of Government was finally

removed about forty miles north-west to Anooradhapoora. A

king of Mahdampe( Tanne Wella Bahu,) and the queen

Alliar Sahni, who has been referred to in a previous section,

are the only other Royal personages having their residence

District of Chilaw and Putlam. 49

within the District, of whom, as far as I am aware, history

contains any record.

In Upham’s Collections (Vol. III. p. 324 et seg.) there is an

account of the removal of the branch of the Bogaha tree from

Tambidwipa to Bodimandela at Anooradhapoora, &c. In

this tract particular mention is made of a Malabar nation

having been called to assist in a local war which occurred in

the time of Tissa who followed Dootoogamini. The foreigners

landed at Karative, fourteen miles north of Putlam, and appear

to have proceeded towards the interior nearly by the line of

the present Kurnegalle road. What weare to understand by

the nine hundred cannons which the Malabars brought with

them, it is difficult to surmise; probably the confusion arises

from mis-translation.

The inhabitants, as in other maritime districts, are composed

of people of many nations. The Mahomedans or Moormen are

said by Sir A. Johnston to have first settled in the Island in

the early part of the Eighth century; they formed portion of

those Arabs of the house of Haslum who were driven from

Arabia by the tyranny of the Caliph Abdul Melek Ben

Merwen, and who, proceeding southwards, made various settle-

ments in the south of India and Malacca. In Ceylon they

carried on a very extensive trade in rice, indigo, chanks, cheya,

&c.; and by making advances to the natives for the purpose

of repairing the tanks, were the means of keeping the northern

part of the Island in a very prosperous condition. These

are the most industrious and mercantile class; they are the

traders, boutique keepers, master fishers, &c., they also deal

largely in cattle and are frequent purchasers of Government

taxes. They are for the most part confined to the immediate

vicinity of the sea; there are, however, Moor villages scattered

about the interior, the inhabitants of which are much disliked

and feared by the natives. ‘The Moors have mixed up with

their own faith many superstitions borrowed from Hindooism.

Of Malays but few reside in the District, and these are

VOL. II. H

50 Statistical Account of the

soldiers, pensioners, or descendants of such, and in general

hold small Government employments, such as peons, &c.

The Dutch descendants generally find employment as

Clerks, Post-holders, &c. It is greatly to be regretted that

this class relies so much on the support of Government; they

possess qualities which one would expect to adapt them for

the life of tradesmen; and ifso employed they would be better

off and much more independent; some foolish prejudice is the

only obstacle to this desirable change. The majority, I believe,

adhere to the Dutch and Protestant Church.

The Portuguese descendants now form on the whole a very

degraded class, and seem to be looked down upon by all; they

profess Roman Catholicism.

The low country Singhalese employ themselves in keeping

boutiques or taverns, trading in salt, cultivating cocoanut

gardens, &c. They have to a great extent forgotten Boodhism,

and for the most part seem to have no fixed opinion on re-

ligious matters, changing their faith with astonishing non-

chalance at the call of interest or whim.

The Singhalese who live in the jungle pattoos treat those

of the coast with much scorn; they adhere with tolerable

firmness to Boodhism, but have not failed to conjoin with this

comparatively pure faith, countless superstitions borrowed

from other nations. Latterly, owing to the sloth and ignorance

of the priests, many of the people are becoming indifferent to

Boodhism, and while one constantly finds Vihares going to

ruin, few if any are rising to supply their places.

A large number of Tamul coolies annually pass through

the District on their way to and from the Coffee estates in the

interior; of these not a few take up their residence about

Putlam or other villages, being employed as carters, ees in

charge of young cocoanut plantations, &c.

There is still one race to be mentioned, many of the customs

prevalent among which are singular and worthy of attention;

I refer to the Mookwas. These people are Christian Tamuls,

and arefound, I believe, solely along the coast and to the north

a a

District of Chilaw and Putlam. 51

of Chilaw. They intermarry with each other and with

Tamul Christians, but keep a good deal apart from the other

inhabitants. In general appearance they somewhat resemble

Moormen. At one time they formed a very influential body

and possessed large tracts of land; but being almost without

exception addicted to drinking, they have now sunk very

muchin thesocialscale. The Mookwa headmenare termed Ra-

jawannia, and Koomahrewanniarespectively, and by anancient

custom these titles ought to be descend, not from father to son,

but from uncle to nephew. To describe the origin of this

strange practice would occupy more time then can at present

be afforded, I therefore omit it.

I have thus endeavoured to give a description of this Dis-

trict. There is nothing of particular interest, but the recording

of such statistics is often useful at a future period, which

must plead my apology for laying so dry a paper before the

Society. :

Rock Inscription at Gooroo Godde Wihare in the Magool Korle,

Seven Korles. By A. O. Bropig, Esa.

On a late official tour through my District and through a

part of Seven Korles, in company with the Government Agent

of this Province, we visited the Vihare of Gooroo Godde

at Giri Bawe in Magool Korle, about twenty-five miles

south of Anooradhapoora. This is one of the so-called rock

temples, which are abundantly scattered over the country.

The dwelling for the priests is as usual considerably elevated,

being built ona projecting knoll, and is inthe form of a

square enclosing a small open and sunken court, in which

on each successive morning the village women stand, while

one of the priests, concealed behind a curtain, reads aloud

portions of the sacred books. The temple itself is on a

higher platform, and is formed by running up a wall at the

front part of a wide shallow cave formed by a huge over-

52 Rock Inscription.

hanging ledge of rock. The internal walls are ornamented

in the customary manner with crude vividly coloured paint-

ings, which pourtray the tortures to be endured in a future

state of existence by the wicked. A few mutilated but very

neatly carved Budhoos lying near the door way, and a half

ruined Dahgoba, completely the resemblance between this

and the hundred structures of a similar character to be met

with here.

A flight of stairs rudely cut out of the solid rock leads to

the summit of the peak, from whence one obtains an exten-

sive view over a country flat and fertile in its general cha-

racter, but diversified by numerous isolated granitic groups.

On a precipitous face of rock opposite the banna maddooa,

I found that a space about four feet square had been brought

to a smooth surface and then covered with a long inscription,

partly in Singhalese and partly in Pali. Not having time to

copy the whole of this, the head priest obligingly caused it

to be transcribed on an ola which he presented to me on

the spot. This ola I placed at different times in the hands

of two well informed natives, and having compared the trans-

lations made by them, beg to lay the perfected English

version before the Society.

It will be observed that the inscription is simply a grant

to the priests of this Vihare of certain villages and lands (so

far as their produce is concerned ) for the purpose of defraying

the ordinary expenses of the establishment.

It is dated in the year Saka, 1701, which I believe corres -

pondsto1779 A.D., and is stated to have been issued inaccord-

ance with the wishes of the King, Kirti Sri Rajah Singha,

who, according to the Maha Wanse, reigned from 1747 to

1781, a statement in so far according with the inscription.

It is only necessary to add, that the arrangement of words

and clauses has been only so far altered as to make the

translation tolerably intelligible.

—

fiock Inscription. 53

Translation of a Grant, engraven on a rock at Gooroogodde

Wihare, in Magool Korle, Seven Korles.

“On this Thursday the 13th day after the full moon of the

month Wehsak in the year of the glorious king Saka 1701.

“For the purpose of performing the rites and offerings in

the Wihare Galle Wihare of Giribawe beyond Mee Oya

in the Maha Meddhe Pattoo of Magool Korle.

“This being suggested by the Wanny Modliar of Giri-

bawe and by Pilimatalawe Wejeyasoondere Rajakaroona

Sehnahdipatti Raja Mantsee who performs the offices of

Maha Dissawe of Putlam Mooneesseram Ahnewoolenden

including the Seven Korles, and Maha Adigar, and by the

Minister’s son who performs the duties of Halloowewaddene

Nileme (1!) the son of the said Sehnahdipatti.

“This being suggested, the Supreme Lord of Lanka, Kirti

Sri Raja Singha, who is endowed with every regal power and

adorned with gems of virtue, celebrated for might in his own

and foreign dominions, presiding like the God Sakra and

conducting like Budha himself, having ascended the throne

of the wealthy city Sukandanum hereby sacrifices to the

Weiragalle Dagobah (Dagobawahanse) the pyramid at

Weiragalle, on the east of this side of Gooroogodde Bawe,

on the south from this side of Yantan Pallewallewatia

Weigaragalle and Pempooroogalle, on the west from this

side of the village LBelliagame Weiregalle Lookahatti-

gamme Bahwome, on the north from this side of the tank

af Wadooresse and the stone post of the water reservoir of

Giribawe, all the houses, trees, gardens high lands and low

lands (2) situated within these four limits, to be possessed,

as to all the produce thereof, by Dharma Raheeti Oonanse

of Giribawe, his disciples and their successors from genera-

(1) The officer having charge of the King’s wardrobe.

(2) “High lands and low lands,” i. e., paddy fields and chena land.

54 Catalogue of Ceylon Birds.

tion to generation on condition of performing the Budhist

sacrifices. |

‘May the kings, ministers, and other persons who come

into this world hereafter, without disturbing or encroaching

endeavour to obtain glory and nirwane by increasing the

offerings more and more. .

«Should any one dispossess ( the priests ) of grass, timber.

flowers or fruit, he will be born a great Preta.” (3)

BEND LORIN IOI LIONEL IYI NOTTS

Catalogue of Ceylon Birds.—By i. F. Kevaart, M.D. Edin.,

F.L.S., F.G.S., &c.; and Encar L. Layarp, Esq.,

C.MLE.S., &c.

ORDER. ACCIPITRES.

SUB-ORDER. ACCIPITRES DIURNTI.

FAM: FALCONIDZ.

a. AQUILINZ.

Aquila Bonelli, Zemm. The Genoese Eagle.

Aquila pennata, G'mel. The Pennated Eagle.

Spizaetus Nipalensis, Blyth. The Beautiful Crested Eagle.

Spizaetus limnaetus, Horsf. The Crested Eagle.

Ictinaetus Malaiensis, Temm. The Black Eagle. 3

Heematornis Cheela, Latham. The Cheela Eagle.

Heematornis spilogaster, Blyth. The Ceylon Eagle.

Pontoaetus leucogaster, Gimel. White-bellied Sea Eagle.

Pontoaetus Icthyaetus.

Haliastur Indus, Bodd. Shiva’s Kite.

b. FALCONINE.

Falco Peregrinus, Linn. The Peregrine Falcon.

Tinnunculus alaudarius, Briss. The Kestrel Falcon.

Hypotriorchis chicquera, Shaw. The rufous-headed Falcon.

C. MILVINZE.

Baza lophotes, Temm. The Cohy Falcon.

Milvus Govinda, Sykes. The Cheela or Govinda Kite.

Elanus melanopterus, Daud. The Black Winged Falcon.

(3) A wandering mischievous demon,

Catalogue of Ceylon Birds. 55

d. ACCIPITRINA.

Astur trivirgatus, Temm. The three-streaked Kestrel.

Accipiter badius, Gmel. - Brown’s Sparrow Hawk.

Accipiter nisus, Linn. : The Sparrow Hawk.

e. CIRCINE.

Circus Swainsonii, A. Smith. The pale Harrier.

Circus cinerascens, Montague. The ashy Falcon.

Circus melanoleucos, Penn. The black and white Falcon.

SUB-ORDER. ACCIPITRES NOCTURNI.

FAM: STRIGIDZ.

a. SURNINE.

Athene castanotus, Blyth. The Ceylon chesnut-winged Owl.

Athene scutellata, Gray. The hairy Owl.

b. BUBONINZ.

Ephialtes Scops, Linn. The scops-eared. Owl.

Ephialtes sunia, Hodgson. The reddish Owl.

Ephialtes lempigii, Horsf. The lempigi Owl.

Ketupa Ceylonensis, Gimel. _ The Ceylon eared Owl.

C. SYRNINZE.

Syrnium Indrani, Gray. The Oulama Owl.

d. STRIGINZ:.

Strix Javanica, G'mel. The Indian Barn Owl.

OrpbDER PASSERES.

SUB-ORDER I. FISSIROSTRES.

A. F. NOCTURNI.

FAM: CAPRIMULGIDZ.

a STEATORNINA.

Batrachostomus moniliger, Layard. Ceylon Oil Bird.

b. CAPRIMULGINZE.

Caprimulgus Maharattensis, Sykes. The Maharatta Goatsucker.

Caprimulgus Kelaarti, Blyth. The Newera-Ellia Goatsucker.

Caprimuleus Asiaticus, Latham. The Indian Goatsucker.

56 Catalogue of Ceylon Birds.

B. F. DIURNI.

FAM: HIRUNDINID &.

a. CYPSELIN.

Cypselus Balasiensis, G'ray. The common Palm Swift.

Cypselus melba, Linn. The common large Swift.

Cypselus affinis, Gray. The blackish Swift. se

Macropteryx coronatus, Tickell. _ The crested Swift.

Collocalia brevirostris, McClelland. The edible-nest Swallow.

Acanthylis caudacuta, Lath. The spiny-tailed Swallow.

b. HIRUNDININZE.

Hirundo gutturalis, Scop. The common Indian Swallow.

Hirundo hyperythra, Layard. The red-bellied Swallow.

Hirundo domicola, Jerdon. The Bungalow Swallow.

Hirundo daurica, Linn.

FAM: CORACIADZ.

a. CORACIANZS.

Coracias Indica, Linn. The Indian Roller.

Eurystomus orientalis, Linn.

FAM: TROGONIDZ.

Harpactes fasciatus, Lath.? The fasciated Trogon.

FAM: ALCEDONID.

a. HALCYONINZA.

Halcyon Capensis, Linn. The Cape King-fisher.

Halcyon Smyrnensis, Linn. The Smyrna King-fisher.

Halcyon atricapillus, Lath.

Ceyx tridactyla, Linn. The pretty dwarf King-fisher.

b. ALCEDONINE.

Alcedo Bengalensis, G'mel. The Indian King-fisher.

Ceryle rudis, Zinn. - | The black and white King-fisher.

FAM: MEROPIDZ.

a MEROPINZE.

Merops Philippinus, Zinn. The Philippine Bee Eater.

Merops viridis, Linn. The Indian Bee Eater.

Merops quinticolor, Kell. The five-coloured Bee Eater.

nd MUSE

Si:

Wesker

acrd

FS it

Now Publications. ) —

SIDATH SANGARAWA, a Grammar of the Singhalese Language, 4

translated into English, with Introduction, Notes, and Appendsces By |

James De Atavis, Member of the Ceylon Branch of the — ante Polen oo

Colombo, 1852. Price 12s. 4

‘PRODROMUS FAUNZ ZEYLANICA, being contributions to

the Zoology of Ceylon. By E. F. Kenaart, M.D. Edin., » F. 2 Oagcrne OF G Ss.

Staif Surgeon to the Forces. Ceylon, 1852, 8Y0» cloth j price 10s, Gd,

JOURNAL

OF THE

CHYLON BRANCH

ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY.

1853.

VOL. II. PART TX

No. 6. ee

EDITED BY THE HONORARY SECRETARY.

The design of the Society is to institute and promote enquiries into the History,

Religion, Literature, Arts, and Social Condition of the present and former

Inhabitants of the Island, with its Geology, Mineralogy, its Climate

and Meteorology, its Botany and Zoology.’

| COLOMBO:

FRANK LUKER, ACTING GOVERNMENT PRINTER, CEYLON,

18.82:

JOURNAL

OF THE

CEYLON BRANCH

OF THE

ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY.

1853.

VOL. I1.—PART II.

“The design of the Society is to institute ‘and promote enquiries into the History,

Religion, Literature, Arts, and Social Condition of the present and former

Inhabitants of the Island, with its Geology, Mineralogy, its Climate

and Meteorology, its Botany and Zoology.”

COLOMBO:

GEORGE J. A. SKEEN, GOVERNMENT PRINTER, CEYLON.

1882.

CONTENTS.

PAGE.

Buddhism: Chariya Pitaka.—By the Rev. D. J. Gocrerry... 5

The Laws of the Buddhist Priesthood. net the Rev. D. J.

GOGERLY 17

Statistical Account of the District of Chilaw and Puttalam,

North-Western Province.—By A. O. Bropig, Esq.

Rock Inscription at Gurugoda Vihare, in the Magul- ee

Seven Koralés.—By A. O. Bropin, Esq. ... 59

Catalogue of Ceylon Birds.—By E. F. KeLaart, M.D., Edin.,

F.L.S., F.G.S., &c., and Epear L. LAYARD, E'sq.,

C.M.E. S., &e. ar oe cor 65

ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY.

CEYLON BRANCH.

BUDDHISM :— CHARIYA PITAKA.

By Tue Rev D. J. Goacerty.

[Tue discourses of Buddha are contained in five large

divisions called in Pali “‘ Nikdyo,” and in Sinhalese “Sangi :”

the fifth of these, called “ Kudugot Sangi,” comprises 15 books,

one of which is the Chariya Pitaka, or a collection of preceding

states of existence. The book is composed in Pali verse, and

the legends it contains are brief accounts of events more largely

developed in the book called Jatuka, which latter book ts also

contained in the Kudugot Sangi. The tales in this small

volume have all a reference to the desire supposed to have

been felt by Gautama, in previous states of existence, to

become a Buddha, and some of the means he used to accomplish

his object. These means are divided into ten sections called

Paramita, and each of these, being subdivided into three other

sections, makes the whole number thirty. Only a part of

these means are contained in this work. The pecrtion now

presented to the Society contains the Péramitd of Almsgiving;

the remainder will be given on a future occasion, with such

observations as may be necessary for its elucidation. The

book is also called Buddhapadana, or sections of Buddha’s

previous existences. |

Tue whole of my proceedings during four asankhya and one

hundred thousand kalpas has been for the purpose of becoming

a Buddha.

Omitting my conduct in various births during past kalpas,

I will declare my proceedings during the present kalpa: listen

i to me!

At one time I was a hermit named Akitti, and having entered

a large forest, a wilderness without inhabitants, I dwelt there.

: A

6 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (cEYLON). [Vot. IL, Pant IL

The king of the gods (Sakra) being moved by the effulgence

of my austerities, assuming the form of a mendicant Brahmin,

approached me to obtain food.

Seeing him standing at the door of my residence, I put into

his dish the greens I had brought from the forest, which were

unmixed with oil or salt.

Giving him these, I entered my pansala, and without seeking

for other food I placed my bowl in an inverted position.

A second and a third time he came, and I thrice gave him

(what I had collected) with an unshaken and imperturbed mind.

My body was not emaciated in consequence of that (abstinence

from food), but I spent the time in mental enjoyment.

Had I met with one worthy of receiving alms throughout a

whole month, or two months, I would have given these eminent

alms with an unshaken and imperturbed mind.

I did not give these alms hoping to receive thereby honor or

profit, but I performed the actions hoping to become thereby a

Buddha. |

Lind of Akitti Tapasa.

Afterwards I was a Brahmin named Sankha, and, intending

to pass over the ocean, I went to the port.

I there saw one who had subjected his passions coming on the

high road from the desert, walking on the hard and parched

ground.

Seeing him coming on the road I thus thought :

‘Here is a field for obtaining merit by any person desirous of

virtue.

‘The husbandman at a suitable season perceives a field, but

if he neglect to sow it with seed, he obtains. no profit from it.

‘So I, being desirous of merit, perceive a field for its attainment,

of pre-eminent excellence: if I do not perform an act of

kindness I shall derive no merit therefrom.

- No. 6.—1853.] sBuppuism.—cuariyd PITAKA, z

‘As the Minister, desirous of being steward of the royal

household, will lose his office if he neglect to supply the necessary

_ provisions and wealth :

‘So I, desirous of being eminently meritorious, shall be

deprived of merit, if, seeing this holy man, I do not present him

with offerings.’

Thus thinking, I took off my sandals, and worshipping his

feet, I presented him with my sandals and umbrella.

Thus I gave him alms, received thereby happiness a hundred-

fold, and continued to fill up the measure of my liberality.

End of the Brahmin Sankha.

perwords I was Dananjaya, king of the great Pa of Inda-

patta, exercising the ten regal virtues.

Some Brahmins came to me from Kalinga, and requested me

to give them my noble, valuable, state elephant.

They said, “ We have no rain in our country and there is a

great famine ; give us your noble elephant, which is as a dark

mountain of antimony.”

When supplicants approached me it was not becoming that

- I should reject their request, and break my rule of ot ay:

I therefore gave them my large elephant.

Taking the elephant by the trunk, and from a golden vessel

pouring water on the hands of the Brahmins, I gave the

elephant.

a When I thus gave the elephant my councillors enquired,

_ “Why do you give your noble elephant to beggars ?

“Tf you give your valuable state elephant, able to ensure

_ victory in war, what will you do with your kingdom?”

_ (i replied) “I would even give my kingdom: I would give

"my own body: my desire is to become Buddha, and on that

account I give the elephant alms.”

End of Dananjaya,

8 JOURNAL R. A. S. (cuYLoN). [ Vou. I1., Parr II.

At one time I was the powerful universal emperor, lord of the

earth, named Sudassano, residing in the city named Kusawatti.

I caused proclamation to be made there thrice a day in various

places: ‘Who wishes for any thing? Who desires any thing ?

That property shall be given him.’ |

‘Who is hungry? Who is thirsty ? Who requires garlands,

cosmetics, or various coloured garments to cover his nakedness?’

‘ Who requires bowls or umbrellas, or beautiful soft slippers ?

I will give them.’ Thus, evening and morning, I caused

proclamation to be made in various places.

I had storehouses in many hundred places, and gave to

applicants whether they came by day or by night.

Whatever they wished for they obtained, and went away with

their hands full. Thus, during the whole of my life, I continued

to give eminent alms.

I did not give things to which I had an aversion, or things

which I had not stored up, but I gave as a sick man to obtain

acure. Idid not for base purposes give alms to supplicants,

but with a pure and sincere desire to become Buddha.

End of Sudassano,

At another time I was the Brahmin Gdvinda, the spiritual

guide of seven monarchs, honored by sovereigns.

Whatever I received from those seven monarchs I gave in

alms, as from an inexhaustible ocean.

I did not give things to which I had an aversion, or things

which I lightly prized; but I gave valuable gifts with a desire

to become Buddha.

Lind of Govinda,

Afterwards I was Nimi, the learned and virtuous king of the

famed city Mithila.

There I caused storehouses to be erected at the four cuca

No. 6.—1853.] BUDDHISM.—CHARIYA PITAKA. )

| points, and continued to give alms to beasts, birds, men and

women.

I continued without intermission to give valuable alms, as

garments, couches, meat, drink, and condiments.

As the servant who attends on his master for gain endeavours

by thought, word, and deed, to gain the good will of his

employer:

So in every birth I endeavoured to supply food and alms to

persons, being desirous of becoming a Buddha.

End of Nimi.

| Afterwards I was prince Chanda, son of the king of

_ Puppiwatti.

1 Being delivered from death, and with fear escaping from the

sacrificial enclosure, I gave alms largely. |

I ate not, I drank not, I took no refreshment, even if it were

for five or six days, unless I had given alms to some holy man.

Like as a merchant who, having collected his goods, takes

them to the place where he can obtain large profits:

Thus the giving to others of your meal is highly advantageous.

To give to others therefore is proper : it will produce a hundred

fold.

| Knowing this, I gave alms from birth to birth. I continued

' without intermission to give alms, that I might become a

Buddha.

End of Chanda Kumara.

: I was Sivi, king of the city of Arittha; and sitting in my

_ magnificent palace I thus thought:

There is no kind of alms among men which I have not given ;

_ if any oneshould even beg from me my eyes, I would give them

_ without hesitation.

Sakra, the sovereign of the gods, knew my thoughts, and

sitting amidst his attendant gods, he thus spoke;

10 JOURNAL R. A. S. (CEYLON). [ Vou. II., Parr. II.

“The King Sivi, possessing super-human power, sitting in his

- magnificent palace,and meditating onthe various kinds of alms,

does not perceive one that he has not given.

“YT will ascertain what his thoughts are ; wait here a moment

until I know his mind.”

Having assumed the form of a trembling, hoary-headed,

wrinkled, decayed, and emaciated blind man, he approached

the king.

He having assumed this form, elevating his left and his right

arms, with clasped hands raised to his head, he spake these

words :

“ Great and just sovereign, the author of your kingdom’s

prosperity, the fame of your almsgiving has ascended up to

gods and men; I have a petition. )

“Tam become blind of both eyes: give me one of your eyes,

and retain the other for your own use.”

When I had heard these words, with a mind excited by joyful

emotions, I thus addressed the trembling supplicant :

“ Thou who hast come soliciting the gift of an eye hast come

knowing my thoughts while I was in the palace.

“‘ My desires are accomplished, my wish is fulfilled, I shall

this day give a supplicant such alms as I never gave before.

“Come here, Siwaka: arise, be not unskilful, be not negligent:

pluck out both my eyes and give to the beggar.”

My obedient slave Siwaka being thus addressed, plucked out

my eyes like the Bemnels of a palm tree, and gave them to the

beggar.

In purposing to give,in giving, and after having given the

alms, I had no other design than that of becoming a Buddha.

Not that I had an aversion to my two eyes: my body was

not disagreeable to me: but my desire was to become a Buddha,

and therefore I gave my eyes.

End of the story of King Sivi,

No. 6.—1853.] BUDDHISM.— CHARIYA PITAKA,. Jf

My mother Pusati, the daughter of a king, was in a previous

birth the queen of Sakra.

He, the king of the gods, seeing that the term of her life had

ended, said: “I will give you ten gifts. What ten gifts, my

friend, do you desire? ”’ |

The goddess hearing these words, replied to Sakra: “ What

fault have I been guilty of ? Have I become displeasing to

you? Why do you drive me from my lovely residence, as with

an earth-shaking wind ?”

When she had thus spoken, Sakra replied: “ You have been

guilty of no crime, neither are you displeasing to me.

“‘ It is only this, the term of your existence here draws to a

close. Accept therefore the ten excellent gifts I offer you.”

Pusati then accepted with joyfulness the ten gifts, including

me, presented by Sakra.

Pusati, ceasing to exist there, was born of a regal family,

and became united to king Sanjaya, of the city of Jétuttaram.

When I was conceived in the womb of my beloved mother,

by my glory she became constantly attached to almsgiving.

Freely she gave to the poor, to the sick, to the old, to

- mendicants, to travellers, to men and women, to Samanas, to

Brahmins, to those of subdued passions.

Pusati, having carried me in her womb ten months, passing

through the city, brought me forth in the midst of the Wessa

street. |

I did not receive the name either of my father or my mother,

but having been born in the Wessa street, I was calied

Wessantara.

When I was achild eight years of age, I sat in my palace and

thought of giving alms.

I thought, ‘Should any one request from me my heart, my

eyes, my flesh, my blood, or my body, I will give them to him.’

When I had formed this firm resolution, the solid earth, mount

Méru, and the trees of the forest were shaken.

AZ JOURNAL R. A. §. (CkYLON). [| Vou, I., Parr If,

In half a month, on the Updsatha of the full 15th day of the

moon, I mounted my elephant Pandara, and went forth to give

alms.

Brahmins from KAélinga came to me and requested me to give

them Pandara, my valuable state elephant.

They said: ‘ From want of rain there is a great famine in

our land; give us your large cleplent your excellent elephant

altogether white.”

I thought, ‘My mind delights in almsgiving ; with an unshaken

determination I will give what these Brahmins ask, I will hide

nothing.’

When these supplicants approached me, it not being proper

that I should repulse them, or break my determination to

bestow alms, I gave them my large elephant.

Taking the elephant by the trunk, I poured water from a

golden chalice upon the hands of the Brahmins, and gave them

the elephant.

When I had thus given the excellent and perfectly white

elephant, the earth, mount Méru, and the trees of the forest

shook.

The inhabitants of Siwi being displeased at my giving the

elephant, assembled together and banished me from their land,

saying, “‘ Go to the Wanka mountain.”

Being thus driven away by them, I still remained firm and

unshaken, and begged permission to be allowed once more to

give alms.

The inhabitants of Siwi granted my one request, and I

accordingly published my intention by beat of drum, and gave

excellent alms.

Although the fear-inspiring sound ascended that I was

banished on account of excessive almsgiving, still I gave alms.

Having bestowed the chief gifts, as elephants, horses, chariots,

male and female slaves, oxen and wealth, I departed from the

city.

No. 6.—1853.] BUDDHISM.—CHARIYA PITAKA. 13

Having departed from the city, when I turned round to look

at it, the earth, mount Méru, and the trees of the forest shook.

Arriving at the junction of the four great roads, I gave

away the carriage in which we four persons came, and taking

Maddidéwi aside, I privately said to her :

“Maddi, do you take Kanhajind, she is the younger and

light; I will carry Jali, her brother, who is older and heavy.”

Then Maddi took Kanhajina, who was like the flower of the

lotus, and I took the royal child Jali, who was like a heap of

gold.

Thus we four high-born and delicate princes, travelling through

difficult paths, proceeded towards the mountain Wanka.

When we met any person, or any one overtook us, we en-

quired, ‘“ Which is the road to the mountain Wanka?”’

They, beholding us with compassion, said ‘“ You have much

suffering to endure : distant is the mountain Wanka.”

When in the forest the children saw a tree laden with fruits,

they cried to obtain some. |

The lofty and wide-spreading tree, perceiving the weeping

children, of itself bowed down its branches for the children to

approach.

The exquisitely beautiful Maddi, seeing this wonderful and

miraculous event, thus joyfully expressea her admiration :

“ Assuredly this is the most wonderful event ever seen in the

_ world : by the splendid virtue of Wessantara the tree of itself

bows down.”

The Yakkha, out of compassion to the children, shortened the

path, so that the day after our departure we arrived at the

country cailed Chétiya.

Here 60,000 princes resided, our maternal uncles, who with

clasped hands on their foreheads met us weeping.

_ Here remaining, we conversed with the inhabitants of Chétiya

and with their families, and departing thence we arrived at the

mountain Wanka.

14 = JOURNAL B. A. §. (ceyLon). [Vou IL, Parr IL. |

The king of the gods (Sakra) called the powerful Wissa- |

kamma (the architect of the gods) and said, “ Erect a well-built |

dwelling, a commodious and pleasant pansala.”’ |

The powerful Wissakamma, obeying the commands of Sakra, —

erected a well-built dwelling, a commodious and pleasant |

pansala.

We four persons having arrived at the quiet and peaceful |

forest, dwelt there by the mountain. at

I, Maddi Déwi, and the two children Jali and Kanhajina, |

consoling each other, lived in that residence. |

As the children did not go out, I was not alone in the dwelling. |

Maddi brought herbs from the forest and supported us.

While I resided in the forest a beggar came to me and

requested me to give him my two children Jali and Kanhajind.

When I saw the beggar approach my heart rejoiced, and taking

my two children I gave them to the Brahmin.

When I gave my own children to the Brahmin Jitaka, then

the earth, mount Méru, and the trees of the forest shook.

Again, the god Sakra descended and, assuming the form of

a Brahmin, requested from me my chaste and virtuous wife, |

Maddi Dewi. |

Taking Maddi by the hand and filling the Brahman’s hand |

with water, with a cheerful mind I gave Maddi to him.

When I gave Maddi, the gods of the sky rejoiced, the earth |

- also, mount Méru, and the trees of the forest shook. |

_ When I gave my children Jali and Kanhajind, and also my |

chaste wife Maddi, I thought of nothing else but of becoming |

a Buddha. i

Not that my two children or Maddi Déwi were disagreeable |

to me, but, desiring to become Buddha, I gave that which was |

dear to me, . |

Afterwards, when my father and mother came to the great |

forest sorrowfully and with tears enquiring after my will, with |

: No. 6.—1853.] . BUDDHISM.—CHARIYA PITAKA. 15

: modesty and reverence Lapproached them : then also the earth,

: mount Méru, and the trees of the forest shook.

_ Then departing with my relations from the great forest, I

; entered the delightful city of Jetuttara, that chief of cities.

Then the seven kinds of jewels were rained from heaven and

the clouds poured down water : the earth also, Maha Méru, and

_ the trees of the forest shook.

The insensible earth, unconscious of joy or sorrow, was thus

" seven times shaken by the power of my almsgiving.

Lind of Wessantara.

_ At another time I was a hare, a walker in the forest, eating

grass, leaves, branches and fruits, injurious to none. —

: A monkey, a jackal, a water hen, and I wereassociates, meeting

4 together morning and evening.

I instructed them in good works, saying ‘‘ Depart from de-

" grading vice, and perform that which is good.”

4 On the Upésatha day, seeing the full moon, I said:

.. “To-day is the Upésatha day. Prepare alms and give to

: worthy persons: having given alms, spend the day in tran-

" quillity. ”

_ They, approving my advice, prepared alms according to their

_ ability, and sought a person worthy of oe them.

ae Sitting down I thought :

‘It is proper to give almsto holy men. Should I meet such

an one, what have I to give him? :

: _“Thave no sesamum, grain, maize, rice, nor ghee. I live on

grass, and grass I cannot give. |

} ‘Should any holy man come to me seeking food, he shall not

3 g0 away empty : I will give him my own body.’

a Sakra, knowing my thoug ghts, assumed the form of a

& ‘Brahmin seeking alms, and came to the place where I was

“sitting. When I saw him, I rejoiced and said:

16 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON). | Von. IL, Parr II. |

‘““Tt is a happy circumstance that you have come to me for |

food.” |

‘“‘T shall to-day give that in alms to you which I never gave |

before.

‘You are a holy man and therefore should not injure others. |

Come, collect some sticks and kindle a fire; I will cook myself, |

and thou shalt eat that which is cooked.”

He replied, “It is good!” and cheerfully collecting wood, he |

raised a great heap, and reduced it toa bed of burning charcoal. |

When the great heap was shining with heat, I leaped up and |

fell into the midst of the flame. |

Thus, as any one entering into cold water rejoices when the |

burning heat of his body is assuaged : |

So I, entering into the blazing fire, felt my whole body at |

ease, as though I had leaped into cold water. :

I thus gave my whole body to the Brahmin; my skin, my |

flesh, my tendons, my bones, my heart, to the Brahmin. |

End of the tale of the Hare.

( 4%

No. 6.—1853.| LAWS OF THE BUDDHIST PRIESTHOOD. 17

THE LAWS OF THE BUDDHIST PRIESTHOOD.

By Tue Rev D. J. GoGErty.

[ Ix the first paper concerning Buddhism, which I had the honor

of reading before this Society, in May, 1845, it is stated that

the sacred writings of the Buddhists are divided into three great

sections, called the Winaya, the Sttra, and the Abhidharma

Pitakas ; the two latter elucidating the doctrines of Gautama,

and the first one containing the laws and regulations for the

government of the Priests, together with occasional doctrinal

discourses. The booksondiscipline, forming the Winaya Pitaka,

are five : the first and second containing the criminal code, the

third and fourth the ecclesiastical and civil code, and the fifth

is a recapitulation of the whole in a kind of catechetical form.

My present object is to give a translation of the precepts

contained jn the ecclesiastical code, in the order in which they

are recorded, together with so much of the text as may be

necessary to explain the connection between the precepts.

The two books containing the ecclesiastical code are named

Maha Wageo and Chala Waggo:; the former one will occupy

our attention first.

In the paper read in May, 1845, the beginning of the Maha ~

Waggo is translated, and the account is brought up to the time

when Gautama converted the five associated ascetics who had

- been his companions during the six years he spent in austere

penances, hoping thereby to attain to the dignity of a supreme

Buddha. We resume the subject at this period. |

The five ascetics having received Gautama as their teacher,

and perceiving the correctness of his doctrine, requested to be

admitted priests under his government, both as respected

_ doctrine and discipline. He acceded to their request, saying :

_ “Approach, Bhikkhus! Clearlyis the doctrine declared! Walk

in the path of purity, by which all sorrow may be terminated.”

Tn his first discourse, Buddha had taught his disciples that

- existence and suffering are inseparably connected :—that the

18 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON). [Vou IL, Pare 1. :

perpetuation of existence results from either a continued desire

to live after death, or from a desire to terminate upon death the

existence of a living entity or soul:—that the only means by

which a termination both of sorrow and existence may be secured

is to be entirely free from all desire to existing objects, and to

existence itself: and that this freedom from desire can only be

attained by a life of unspotted purity.

But now that they have received him as their teacher, he

further instructs them that there is no existing thing with

_ which they can identify themselves, or say ‘“‘ This is I: this

constitutes my soul.” He speaks of the body, of the perceptions,

_ sensations, and reasonings, and also of the consciousness ; and

of each severally he says: “ The wise and learned disciple will by

his wisdom perceive these are not mine ; they do not constitute

me ; these are not to mea soul.” This doctrineis fully developed

in other discourses, in which he denies the existence of a living

entity called a soul: life, with all its emotions, are merely

sequences ; they have thus continued by an uninterrupted series,

- the commencement of which cannot be traced up to the present

moment ; they are never for two consecutive moments the same,

but form one perpetual system of mutation. He concludes his

discourse by saying, that the wise and learned disciple, by

perceiving these truths, ceases to have satisfaction either in

things corporeal or mental : being no longer satisfied with them,

he ceases to be attached to them ; ceasing to be attached to

them, he becomes free ; being free, he obtains the knowledge

that he is freed (from all attachments); his births become

terminated ; his path of purity is perfected ; his necessary work

is completed ; and he knows, that for the accomplishment of

that object (freedom from future existence ) nothing more

remains to be done. Upon hearing this discourse, the five

priests were greatly edified, and their minds became so liberated

from desire, that it never again was experienced by them,

This freedom from desire ( and the perfect purity necessarily

- No. 6.—1853.] LAws OF THE BUDDHIST PRIESTHOOD. 19

connected with it) constitutes the state of a Rahat. Super-

natural wisdom and super-human power result from these:

but he who receives the doctrine of Buddha, and is thus free,

is a Rahat. ‘‘There-were now,” says the author, “six Rahats

_ in the world.”

The next accession to the priesthood was from the family of

a wealthy nobleman of Benares. His son Yaso became disgusted

with the sensualities with which he was surrounded, and, filled

with uneasy emotions, he left his house at night and repaired |

to Buddha at Isipatana, a retreat near the city. Buddha

calmed his mind with his conversation, and the young noble-

man was convinced of the truth of his doctrine. The mother '

of Yaso, missing her son, alarmed her husband, who, sending out

mounted servants to seek him in every direction, repaired

himself to Isipatana, where he aiso became converted to the ©

faith of Gautama, and consented to the desire of his son to

become a priest. The whole family followed the example of

the nobleman, and embraced the new religion.

There were four young men of noble birth, the friends of Yaso,

living in Benares. They, hearing that Yaso had forsaken secular

life, shaved his head and beard, put on the yellow robe, and

+ become a priest of Buddha, were induced to follow his example. -

Fifty young men also,,who were the friends of Yaso in the

provinces, were persuaded by him to become his companions;

andas they all became Rahats, the Buddhist community consisted

of 61 priests, all of whom had attained the perfection of virtue.

Buddha then called his priests together and directed them

to travel into the provinces, to disseminate his doctrines, that

from a feeling of compassion they might promote the profit

_ and happiness of gods and men. He added “ Go singly, priests,

not two to one place, and preach this doctrine which is excellent

in its commencement, excellent in its continuance, and excellent

in its termination; which is replete with instruction and clearly

_ expressed : thus make known the perfect and pure path of the

20 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON). [Vou, IL, Parr IL. |

priesthood.”’ He at the same time expressed his own intention | ;

of going to a village near Uruwéla, to preach his doctrines. |

The priests, in obedience to the directions they had received, |

travelled into the provinces, and made many converts.

Of these, several desired admission into the priesthood, and |

as Gautama had hitherto reserved to himself the right of

admitting candidates, they brought the applicants to Buddha

that they might be admitted to the priesthood, and obtain

Upasampada. |

The first of these, “ Pabbajjd,” is the retiring from secular

life for religious purposes, and applies tothe whole body, whether

novices or ordained priests. The latter, “ Upasampada,” isthe |

state of full admission to the priesthood, being derived from |

the verb “upasampajjati,” to attain. |

Buddha, perceiving that this mode of proceeding was fatiguing |

both to the priests and to the candidates, determined to confer ©

upon the priests the right of admitting candidates into the |

priesthood. For this purpose he called them together, and

delivered the first of his precepts respecting Ordination. These

_ are in the form of permission, commencing with “Anujanimi ” |

—“T permit.”

Having assembled the priests, he said : —- |

“J. Inowallow you, priests, to ordain to the priesthood and —

admit to Upasampada, in any part of the provinces in which —

you may be. And in this manner, priests, shall ye make priests, ,

and admit to Upasampada. First, having caused the head and |

beard to be shaven and a yellow garment to be put on, make |

(the candidate) remove his upper garment from one shoulder,

worship the feet of priests, and [/i¢., sit on his heels] kneel |

down. Let him then lift up his joined hands, and say. I take

refuge” in Buddha, I take refuge in Dhamma Chis doctrine), I |

take refuge in the Sangha (the priesthood). A second. time I |

* Or, “I go for ald: 6956.

TAR

No. 6.—1853. | LAWS OF THE BUDDHIST PRIESTUUOD. o]

take refuge in Buddha, I take refuge in Dhamma, I take refuge

in the Sangha. A third time I take refuge in Buddha, I take

refuge in Dhamma, I take refuge in the Sangha. I permit,

priests, admission to the priesthood and to Upasampada by

this thrice taking refuge.”

Buddha, having exhorted the new priests to seek by medi-

tation and effort the deliverance he had himself obtained, left

Benares and went to Uruwéli, During his journey he con-

verted 50 young men who were friends, and admitted them to

the priesthood; and some time after his arrival in Uruwéla,

he succeeded, after performing many miracles, in converting

1000 Jatilas, or ascetics with clotted hair, who were worshippers

of Agni, the god of fire. These being men of renown, their

conversion produced a great impression.

He left Uruwéla accompanied by the 1000 Jatilas whom he

_had ordained priests, and, going first to Gdyasisan, at length

arrived at Rajagaha, the metropolis of Magadha, and resided

in a Chétiya (or sacred rove) near the city

The king of Magadha, Séniyo Bimbisaéro, having heard of

his eminence as a teacher, went to the place where Buddha

was; his (the king’s) retinue consisting of 120,000 Brahmins

and householders. Buddha preached to this multitude, who

were all, together with the Sovereign, converted to the new

religion, and entered the first of the paths leading to Nirwéna.

After the discourse was ended the king observed, that when

he was a youth he had desired five things, and they were then

accomplished. ‘The first,” said he, ‘‘was that I might be an

anointed king: this has been accomplished. The second was,

May a Rahat, a supreme Buddha, appear in my dominions :

this also has been accomplished. The other wishes were, May

I visit that Buddha! May I hear him preach! May I under-

stand his doctrine! The whole of these are now fulfilled.

_ Will Bhagaw4, with the priests, take their meal to-morrow at

my residence.’ Buddha having by his silence intimated

22 JOURNAL R. A. S. (CEYLON). [V0 i Pare Ie

his acceptance of the invitation, the king departed and had the

necessary preparations made ; and on the morrow Buddha went

to the palace accompanied by the priests. The king, having

with his own hand supplied him with food, continued standing

until the meal was ended, when he sat down a short distance

from Buddha. While thus seated, he thought: ‘ Where can a

residence be provided for Bhagawa out of the city, but at such

a distance as will be convenient for those who desire to resort

to him for instruction: a retired place, free from noise and

removed from the commotions and unpleasantness of the popula-

tionat night?’ He then selected the royal gardenat Wéluwana,

and determined to present it to Buddha and his priests. He

accordingly took a golden vessel, and pouring water on the

hands of Buddha said: “ Lord, I present the garden of Wéluwana

to Buddha and the priests; accept, Lord, the garden.”

Upon returning from the city, Buddha convened the priests

and enacted the following :

Q, «YT permit, priests, (the acceptance of) a garden.”

The 4ramo or garden is an enclosure of indefinite size, with

the buildings erected within it. This at Wéluwana must have

been a park of considerable extent, as it was to accommodate

several thousand priests. But, although by this precept per-

mission is given to the priesthood to possess residences and

the ground or (compound) in which they are situated, yet it

cannot justify the ee of fields and other grounds for

cultivation.

Following the relation of these circumstances, the conversion

of Sdriputto and Moggallano, who were afterwards the chief

priests of Buddha, is recorded.

At that time, a Paribbajako, named Safijayo, resided in

Rajagaha attended by 250 eminent disciples, among whom were |

Sariputto and- Moggallano. They were intimate friends, and

had engaged that whatever excellence in doctrine the one should

No. 6.—1858.] LAWS OF THE BUDDHIST PRIESTHOOD. 23

ascertain, he should communicate it to the other. The priest

Assaji in the morning entered Rajagaha with his bow] to collect

alms. Sdriputto saw him and was struck with the sanctity of

his appearance, and concluded that he must be a man of eminent

piety. Determining to ascertain to what sect he belonged, who

was his preceptor, and what doctrines he held, he followed him

when he left the city, and entering into conversation said :

“Friend, your appearance is pleasing, your aspect placid, and ~

your complexion clear. Under whose direction are youa priest?

Who is your preceptor? And what doctrines do you hold?

The priest replied: ‘The Maha Samana of the Sakya race has

- become a priest, and I am under his direction. Bhagawé is

_ my preceptor; and I hold the doctrinestaught by him.” Sariputto

further enquired: “ What dectrines does that preceptor teach ?

What does he declare?” Assajireplied: “ Friend, I have only

recently become a priest, and am not able fully to declare his

doctrine, but I will give youa brief account of it.” ‘‘ Friend,”

said Sdriputto, “be it little or be it much, declareit. Speak

that which is important, and I shall understand it; speak

explicitly.” Assaji then spake the following stanza:—

GHADLE) GHHEHMOI GHB GHMo HINO H)

PN GHH®D OH HOAGA) Gow GenwOG on.

‘Whatever things result from causation, those things and

their causes are declared by the Tatagato; and whatever of

them may become extinct, that also the Maha Samana makes

_ known.’

Sdriputto at once saw that this was the doctrine he had been

endeavouring to ascertain. His mind became illuminated, and

perceiving that whatever is produced must also cease to be, he

entered the first of the paths leading to Nirwana. Meeting

Moggallano, he related the circumstance, who proposed to join

Buddha at once. They however determined first to converse

_ with their associates; and these agreed tc accompany them.

24 JOURNAL R. A.°S. (CEYLON), | VOL, I]., Part If.

They advised their chief, Saftjayo, to take the same step; but

he declined, and afterwards died of vexation. When Buddha

saw them and their associates approaching, he said: .‘‘ The two

friends Kolita (Moggall4no) and Upatissa (Sariputto) are

coming. These will be my two chief disciples.” (Both of them

were Brahmins of eminence and were natives of Rajagaha. )

Sariputto and Mogeallano then approached Bhagawa, and

bowing their heads down to his feet, they said: “Receive us,

Lord, as priests under the direction of Bhagawa, and allow us to

obtain Upasampada.” Buddha replied: “ Approach, priests :

clearly declared is the doctrine; walkin the pure path for the

entire extinction of sorrow.’ By these words they received

Upasampada.

At that time spiritual superiors (@8¢)0 upajjha) and

preceptors (OCs achariyé) had not been appointed ; in

consequence of which many of the priests, being uninstructed,

were slovenly in their dress, solicited alms in an improper

manner, and were noisy and loud in their conversation. The

populace were displeased at this, and loudly expressed their —

disapprobation, The modest and grave priests expressed their

disapprobation of such conduct, and reported the circumstances

to Buddha, who convened an assembly of the priests, censured

the offenders, and gave the following precept :—

3. ‘ Priests, I permit (or direct) that there shall be spiritual

superiors.” :

He then details the relative duties of the superior (upajjhayo

G&C20600) and his co-resident priest (saddhiwihariko

wedieoSGe). The superior is to regard his co-resident as

his son, and the co-resident shall regard his superior as a father,

and they are mutually to respect and honor each other. No

priest can intrude himself upon another as his spiritual father

or superior, but must be solicited to undertake the office by the

priest wishing to become his co-resident. The applicant. must —

No. 6.--1853.| LAWs OF THE BUDDHIST PRIESTHOOD. 25

come to the priest, remove his robe from one shoulder, worship

the feet of the priest (7. ¢., bow down tothe ground before him),

and then, kneeling down, shall say, with joined and upline

hands, “ Lord, become my spiritual father” (or “my upajjhayo.”

If the priest applied to in any way indicates his assent, the

connection is formed. The co-resident is carefully to perform

his duty to his superior, which comprises all the duties of a

personal attendant. He is to rise early in the morning, and

respectfully to approach his superior, bringing water for him

to wash, and supplying him with refreshment, if he requireit ; he

is to arrange his couch, sweep out his apartment, assist him to

dress, and, if required, accompany him when he goes out, walking

respectfully behind him. The superior is to advise and instruct

his co-resident, and perform to him all the duties of a parent,

both in sickness and in health. The relative duties are laid

down in detail by Buddha.

Some of the co-resident priests refused to perform their

duty to their upajjhayo. This being reported to Buddha, he

_ decreed :—

4. “Tt is not proper, priests, that a co-resident should not

perform his duty to his upajjhdyo. He who does not perform

his duty is guilty of Dukkata’ (. e., an offence requiring

confession and absolution. )

They still remained disobedient, which ae related to

Buddha, he decreed : —

5. ‘I permit, priests, that the disobedient shall be sus-

pended (from his position as co-resident). And thus shall he

be placed under discipline :--The superior may declare by words

or intimate by signs, ‘I suspend you:’ or he may say, ‘ Return

not to this place:’ or ‘Take away your bowl and robes:’ or,

‘I have no need of your services.’ Should any of these forms

be used, the co-resident is suspended, but not otherwise.”

A co-resident priest thus suspended did not seek recon-

26 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON). [Vou IL, Parr II.

ciliation. But Buddha decreed :—

6. “TI direct, priests, that those who are suspended shall not

be without seeking forgiveness. He who does not seek forgive-

ness is guilty of Dukkata.”

Some upajjhayo, upon forgiveness being solicited, refused to

be reconciled. This was reported to Buddha, who decreed :—

7. “I direct, priests, that forgiveness be granted,*

Notwithstanding this direction, some of the upajjhayo would

not forgive; and the co-resident priests being discouraged, left

the priesthood, or joined themselves to other religious communi-

ties. Upon this Buddha decreed: --

8. “It is not proper, priests, to refuse forgiveness when it is

solicited. He who refuses to forgive is guilty of Dukkata.”

Some superiors suspended the obedient, and permitted the

disobedient toremain free. This being reported to Buddha, he

decreed :—

9. “Tt is not proper, priests, to suspend those who perform

their duty. He who does so is guilty of Dukkata.”

10. ‘It is improper, priests, not to suspend those who

neglect their duty. He who does not place such under suspen-

sion, is guilty of Dukkata.”

On one occasion a Brahmin requested ordination, but the

priests (to whom he applied) were not willing to grant. his

request ; upon which he pined away with grief, lost his colour

and became very unhappy. Buddha noticed the change in his

appearance, and enquired respecting the cause. They informed

him; upon which he asked, “Does any priest remember any

good deed performed by this Brahmin?” Sariputto said that

he remembered a gocd act; for that on one occasion the

* Or: * Priests, I command to forgive,” for the permission or direction is —

always regarded as a command when spoken by Buddha.

_ No. 6.—1853.| LAWS OF THE BUDDHIST PRIESTHOOD. 20

Brahmin directed food to be put into his bowl. Buddha

_ praised Sdériputto for remembering a kind act, and directed

him to make the Brahmin a priest. Sdériputto enquired what

formula he should use in ordaining him. Upon this Buddha

called a meeting of the priests, and said :—

11. ‘Priests, I formerly permitted Upasampada to be given

upon the three-fold repetition of the Sarana. From this time I

revoke this permission. I now direct Upasampada to be given

by, including the announcement (2e5)5), a four-fold act.*

And thus shali Upasampada be given. A fluent and learned

priest shall present the proposition to the Sangho,f and say:

‘““¢ Hear me, my Lord the Sangho; such a person{ seeks

Upasampadé ander such a venerable person.§ If it be a

convenient time for the Sangho, the Sangho will give M.

Upasampada under N. as his superior (or upajjhayo). This is

the proposition :— : |

“‘¢Hearme, my Lord the Sangho. This M.seeks Upasampada

under the venerable N. The Sanghogives Upasampadé to M.

under N. as his superior. If any venerable one consent to M.

receiving Upasampada under N. as his superior, let him remain

silent. !f he do not consent, let him speak. A second time I

repeat the same thing :—

«¢¢ Hearme, my Lordthe Sangho. This M. seeks Upasampada

under the venerable N. The Sangho gives Upasampada to M.

under N. as his superior. If any venerable one consents to M.

receiving Upasampada under N. as his superior, let him remain

silent. If he do not consent, let him speak. A third time I

repeat the same :—

es ere

* That is, an announcement of the intention, and the question being put

thrice to the assembly.

+ A chapter of the order,

t For this I shall substitute “ M.”

§ For this I shall substitute “N.”’

28 JOURNAL RB. A. 8, (ChYLON.) | VOLUN Pane de

““¢ Here me, my Lord the Sangho. This M. seeks Upasam-

pada under the venerable N. The Sangho gives Upasampada

to M. under N. ashissuperior. If any venerable one consent to

M, receiving Upasampada under N. as his superior, let him remain

silent. If he do not consent, let him speak.

““Upasampada is given to M. under N. as hissuperior. The

Sangho consents, and therefore is silent: and thus I receive it.’ ”’

A priest after having received ordination acted improperly.

The priest remonstrated with him, saying “Friend, act not thus ;

such conduct is not lawful. Hereplied: ‘ [did not request you,

venerable men, to give me Upasampada. Why did you give it

to me unsolicited?”’ They reported the case to Buddha, who

decreed :

12. “It is not proper, priests, to give Upasampada to those

who do not solicit it. He whothus gives Upasampada is guilty

of Dukkata. I direct, priests, that Upasampada be given upon

a request (of the candidate). It must, priests, be requested as

follows :— ae

“The person seeking Upasampada must come to the Sangho,

and, removing his robe from one shoulder, worship the feet of

the priests; he must then kneel down, and raising his clasped

hands, say: ‘ My Lord the Sangho, I request Upasampadé. My

Lord the Sangho, compassionate me, and raise me up.’ *

“A fluent and learned priest shall then lay the proposal

before the Sangho, and say: ‘ Hear me, my Lord the Sangho,’

&¢., using the formula prescribed in the foregoing precept.”

At that time many persons in Réjagaha supplied the priests

with abundance of the most excellent food. A Brahmin noticing

this, thought: ‘These sons of Sikyaact ina becoming and virtuous

manner : they eat good food, and sleep in places defended from

* The comment says, either from a state of vice, or from the lower order

of a novice.

No. 6.—1853.]. LAws OF THE BUDDHIST PRIESTHOOD. 29

the wind. It will be advantageous, if I become one of that

priesthood. He accordingly requested, and obtained ordination.

At length, the supply of food brought to the monastery was

diminished, and he was directed to take his bowl and collect

alms: this he declined, saying, that if they gave him food, he

would remain; but if not, he would leave the priesthood.

“What ! friend,” said they ; “did you become a priest for the sake

of your belly?” “Truly I did,” he replied. The virtuous priests,

being much dissatisfied, related the circumstance to Buddha,

who reproved the offender, and decreed :—-

13. “TI direct, priests, that those who give Upasampada

shall declare the four Nissaya (or things incumbent on a priest).

ist, The priesthood is for the purpose of living upon food

collected as alms. This 1s that to which you are to attend as

long as you live. 2nd, The priesthood is for the purpose of

wearing garments made of cast-away cloth. This is that to

which you are to attend so long as you live. 3rd, The priest-

hood is for the purpose of residing at the foot of atree. To

this you are to attend so long as you live. 4th, The priesthood

is for the pnrpose of using as medicine the urine of horned

cattle. To this you are to attend so long as you live. ”

This appears to have been the original rule for the priest-

hood, but it was soon modified ; and now under each head articles

are arranged, called “ Extras allowed” (Atirékalabhé*). The

four Nissaya, or necessaries, are food, raiment, dwelling, and

medicine. Under the first, in addition to food collected in

the alms-bowl, the extras allowed are, food brought to the

temples for the priests generally ; daily food furnished by

individual benefactors ; food of which they are invited to partake

at the houses of their disciples and others ; food given on certain

days, on the Péya days (the days of the changes of the moon);

* BEBacM@Oaws.

30 JOURNAL R. A. S. (CEYLON). | Vou. II., Part II.

and on occasional days. These extras in a great measure

nullify the original rule.

Under the second, or raiment, in addition to garments made

of cast-away cloth, or refuse, they are permitted to wear robes

made of linen, cotton, silk, woollen cloth, hempen cloth, or

apparently anything which will take a yellow colour.

Under the head of a dwelling, in addition to living at the

foot of a tree, they are allowed to dwell in temples, halls

square houses, terraced buildings, and caves.

Under the head of medicine, they are allowed, in addition to

cows’ urine, ghee, butter, oil, honey, and sugar. By these

“atiréka labho”’ the ascetic principle is destroyed.

From the next precept it would appear that these extras were

only occasional at the commencement of the system.

A young man solicited admission to the priesthood, and they

immediately informed him of the four Nissaya. He replied,

“Tf asa priest Iam to be subject to these rules, lam unwilling

to enter the priesthood,” and went away disgusted. They

informed Buddha, who ordained—

14. “ Priests, the Nissaya shall not be previously deciared

to the (applicant for ordination). He who declares them is

guilty of Dukkata. I direct, priests, that they be declared at

the time of giving Upasampada. ”

At one time Upasampada was given in assemblies where

only two or three priests were present. This being reported to

Buddha, he decreed :—

15. ‘Priests, it is not proper that Upasampada should be

given in an assembly of less than ten priests. Whoever gives

Upasampada ina smaller assembly is guilty of Dukkata. I

direct, priests, that Upasampada be given in an assembly of

ten priests, or of more than ten. ”

At that time, some priests who had only received Upasampada

one or two years assumed the office of superior (upajjhaya), and

No. 6.—1853.] LAws OF THE BUDDHIST PRIESTHOOD. 31

received co-resident priests. This being perceived by Buddha,

he decreed :—

16. ‘It is not proper, priests, that any one of less than ten

years’ standing shall give Upasampadé. He who does go is

guilty of Dukkata. TI direct, priests, Upasampada to be given

by those who are of ten years’ standing, or of more than ten

years. ”

There were priests of more than ten years’ standing, who

where neither eloquent nor learned; and when they became

superiors, it sometimes happened that the subordinate was more

learned than his spiritual father; and from this many evils arose.

This being represented to Buddha, he decreed :—

17. “ Priests, it is not proper that one who is incompetent

and unlearned should give Upasampada: he who does s0 is

guilty of Dukkata; I direct that Upasampadaé shall be given

by priests competent and learned, who are of ten or more

years’ standing.”

Afterwards, as many of the superiors had removed to other —

places, or had left the priesthood, or had died, great disorders

prevailed among the priests, some of whom became slovenly

- and irregular in their habits. To remedy this Buddha decreed: —

18. “T direct, priests, that there be preceptors.”

The achariyo or teacher stood in the same relationship to the

_ antéwasiko or pupil, that the superior stood in to his co-resident :

priest. The rules belonging to preceptor and pupil are precisely

the same as those respecting superior and co-resident ; and itis

not necessary here to repeat them. The receiving a pupil is

called “to give (Nissaya or) proximity,” as the pupil was to

reside with his teacher, unless his presence was required by his

upajjhayo or superior. ,

( To be continued.)

82 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON), [VoL. II., Parr IT.

STATISTICAL ACCOUNT OF THE DISTRICT OF

CHILAW AND PUTTALAM, NORTH-

WESTERN PROVINCE.

By A. O. Bropig, Esq.

Tue District of Chilaw and Puttalam forms the maritime

portion of the North-Western Province, and is bounded by the

Northern Province, Seven Kéralés, Western Province, and the

sea, Its length from North to South is about eighty miles,

and its breadth is irregular, but averages probably sixteen or

somewhat less.

The general appearance is flat, especially along the coasts :

towards the interior, low undulating ridges and a few isolated

granite groups are observed. The whole surface, except where

salt-water marshes occur, or cultivation has been established,

is covered with dense jungles containing valuable timber trees.

Diwisions.

The District is not physically divided in any way, with this

exception, that from Kalpitiyato Madampé (about fifty miles)

there runs a narrow, low, sandy peninsula, the northern portion

of which is termed Akkaraippattu, and which is separated from

the mainland by the gulf of Kalpitiya, Quiparawa canal, and

Kadupiti-oya, successively. From its northern extremity, a

narrow chain of islands runs towards Mannar and has doubtless,

in a previous age, formed a continuation of the peninsula. For

financial purposes, however, the District is divided into the

following sections :—

(1.) Puttalam district.

(2.) Chilaw District, Northern division.

(3.) Chilaw District, Southern Division.

(1.) The first of these is sub-divided into six pattus

(Puttalam, Kalpitiya, Akkarai, Pomparippu, Kumérawanni, ~

and Rajawanni pattus), .

No. 6.—1853.] DisTRIcT oF CHILAW AND PUTTALAM. 33

(2.) The’second into twelve (A’nawulundawa and Munnas-

sarama pattus of Demala-pattu, Chilaw, Demala, Munnas-

sarama, and A’nawulunddwa Pattus of Chilaw-pattu; Kumdra-

wanni, Pandita, Pérawili, Karambé, Réjawanni, and Kirimetiy4

Pattts).

(3.) The last into four: namely, Y4agam, Meda Palata,

- O'tara Paldta, and Kamala Pattu.

Popul ition.

The entire population, as obtained from the official returns

of last year, is 38,370.

It would appear from statements now before me, that the

number of males exceeds that of females by about eight per

cent. That this difference really exists is improbable; the

mistake is caused in part by those feelings, which have hitherto

made it all but impossible to obtain correct statistical returns

in Ceylon, (namely, a dread that every census is the prelude to

increased taxation, and a superstitious dislike to any numbering

of the people); and in part, because females are regarded in so

degraded a light, that if care be not taken, they are on such

occasions altogether omitted. The excellent Ordinance con-

cerning statute labour, which is soon to come into force, will,

among other advantages, also have this—that it will much

facilitate the drawing up of correct population returns.

Rivers.

There are no navigable rivers in the District. The most

important are the Kald-oya, Deduru-oya, and Kadupiti-

oya. Of these, the two latter are the only ones which are not

entirely dry during several months of each year ; but even this

pre-eminence is, I think, due totheir channels being so horizontal

and so low for some miles above their embouchures, that the

water of the sea penetrates far inland. During the ay season

there is consequently little or no current.

The Kadipiti-oya, from Madampé to about two miles

34 JOURNAL BR. A. 8. (ceyLton). | Vou. IT., Parr If.

north of Chilaw, at all times contains sea-water, and forms

a portion of the Colombo-Puttalam canal. Immediately at

Madampé an embankment is thrown across the stream for

the purpose of filling a large tank belonging to the village.

All the above rivers, taking their rise among the Kurunégala

hills far to the east, are liable to sudden floods, even at times

when the country through which a great portion of their course

runs, is parched by lengthened droughts. On such occasions,

the channels fill up with almost inconceivable rapidity, and the

stream which might be crossed almost dry, becomes, in the

course of an hour or two, a wide, deep, swift torrent. Itis from

_ this circumstance, that the Deduru-oya is termed by the Tamils.

the Mayawan-dru, “sudden river.”

Lakes,

There is no natural fresh-water lake; but owing to the —

extensive cultivation of paddy, numberless tanks or reservoirs,

some of them several miles in circumference, are scattered over

the country.

The only salt-water lakes are those at which are situated

the salt-pans of Puttalam, Natchchikalli, Karativa, Tilléadi,

Udaippankarai, &c.; and those which form part of the canal

from Chilaw to Puttalam. The Gulf of Kalpitiya, which is

- about eighteen miles long, and from two to six broad, may, from

its land-locked position and its shallowness, be regarded as a

lake; in fact, such is its usual designation among the Huropean —

descendants.

Harbours.

There is only one harbour in the District, namely, Kal-

pitiya, It is situated near the opening of the gulf to which it

gives the name. The channel to sea-ward is unfortunately

tortuous and shallow; small native craft can therefore alone

avail themselves of it. About four or five miles to the north

of the town there is, however, a spacious bay, which can be

No. 6.—1853.] DISTRICT OF CHILAW AND PUTTALAM. 35

entered by vessels of considerable burden, and in which, I under-

stand, they can always ride with tolerable safety. Itis locally

known under the name of Dutch Bay. Were a good road

formed from it to Kalpitiya, it would, I have no doubt, give a

considerable impulse to trade, by relieving merchants from the

risk and expense of removing their cargoes to the mainland in

small boats or canoes.

The whole of the remaining portion of the sea-coast, either

in consequence of shoals or from the violence of the constant

surf, is inaccessible ; and owing to the existence of bars, which

trun across the mouths of the Deduru-oya and Chilaw rivers,

coasting vessels are prevented from making an entrance there.

Water Communication,

There is only one canal in the District, that which connects

Kalpitiya with Colombo. It was originally projected and _

partially opened by the Dutch, but was only brought into an

efficient state about twenty yearsago. By means of it a great

portion of the trade of the District is carried on ; boats from

the Southern Province coming up either empty, or with small

- cargoes of furniture, betel leaves, jack fruits, &., and taking

away salt, copperah, paddy, &., to Negombo and Colombo.

It is very much to be regretted that of late this canal hag

again fallen into bad order, and during several months of each

year is laid quite dry at various points.

That such should at any future period be the case, is, how-

ever, not at all probable ; and it may therefore be confidently

expected that the trade of the District will rapidly and steadily

| increase.

} Land Communication.

There are only three high roads in the District, all of which

| centre at Puttalam ; they lead respectively to Colombo, Kuruné-

gala, and Anurddhapura. |

The first is at present in a state of tolerable repair, and is

36 - JOURNAL R. A. 8. (cHYLON). [VoL IT, Parr IT.

everywhere passable for vehicles, the requisite bridges having

been constructed. It is not a road of much importance, as all

heavy and bulky goods to be conveyed in its direction are, of

course, taken by water.

The second has of late years received considerable attention;

bridges have been made, embankments thrown up, &. There

isa great and rapidly increasing traffic along it ; many thousand

pounds’ worth of salt being annually taken up it to the interior.

The third has as yet been only partially opened, and is not

available for carts. Large quantities of cotton, paddy, &c.,

are, however, brought down by it to the coasts, and the natives

living on the borders of thisand the Northern Province inform

me that they derive much advantage from it, even in its present

imperfect state.

Climate.

The climate of the District in its general features resembles

that of other parts of the Island similarly situated. For further

details Iam unable to refer to any paper except that which I

had lately the honor to submit to the Society, and deem it

unnecessary to state more than merely that, from observations

continued for one year (from Ist August, 1847, to 31st July,

1848) and registered at 9a.M., at noon, and at 3 P.m., it

appears that :—

The highest temperature remarked was ... 91:25 Fahr,

The lowest se se coe Te O0

_ The highest mean of any month wasin March 85-796

The lowest do. do. © in December 78-229

Average temperature at 9 A.M. »- 80°142

Do. do. noon Bho 8 0)

Do. do. 3 P.M. vee §=82°675

General mean temperature at Puttalam ... 79°718

Extreme range between 9 a.m. and 3 P.M. 19:25

That the South-West wind occurred on ... 205 days.

--Do. North-Hast | ‘ane oeaue ito

hee

| No. 6.—1853.] District oF CHILAW AND PUTTALAM. 37

_ That the number of calm days was wel

Do. do. rainy days... oor AT

Do. do. days with thunder .., 98

Thunderstorms at Puttalam ... ape ee

flealth.

All that part of the District which is freely exposed to the

_ influence of the sea-breeze is on the whole healthy, but towards

the interior, where lofty forests check all circulation of air, and

‘where extensive swamps and neglected tanks give rise to

_ 2oxi0us miasma, the people are much subject to fever, lingering

| ulcers, and various cutaneous diseases. During the prevalence

of the N.E. Monsoon, the wind traverses the pestilential

‘marshes just mentioned before reaching the maritime parts,

_ and gives rise to sickness there.

Cholera occasionally visits the District, but seems to occur

only in September and October—that is, immediately preceding

the commencement of the rain. It is at least possible, that

_ the drinking of water from the small pools loaded with decay-

ing vegetable and animal matter may, in some way, be con-

“nected with the occurrence of this disease. It is a common

—and apparently correct—remark, that any decided change of

: er causes a cessation of the disease.

In stating that the maritime pattus are healthy, I a

to have excepted the village of Kalpitiya, in which the num-

~ ber of deaths, especially among the females, is truly lamentable.

This state of things has, so far as I can learn, only existed

' since the town has been surrounded with numerous cocoanut

topes, which, in combination with narrow winding lanes,

effectually prevent ventilation, and would very probably be in

@ great measure removed, if one or more straight roads were

Cut running Hast and West from the sea to the gulf.

- Regarding the quantity of rain, moisture in the atmosphere,

- &e., no observations have, so far as I am aware, been made.

oy) ewe ‘JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON). [ Vou. I, Parr IL.

The natives unanimously concur in stating, that at one time

the jungle pattus were much more healthy than at present,

and account for the change by the existence of numerous tanks,

then used for irrigation, but now neglected.

Geology.

The geology of the District presents little that is attractive,

except indeed to those who turn their attention to the minuter

varications in the older rocks.

All along the sea-coast there are a series of horizontal beds

of sandstone, belonging in-all probability to the present forma-

tion, and never elevated more than a very few feet above the

present water level. The rock itself varies in structure, and

contains numerous enclosed shells and coral lines, apparently

identical with species existing in the neighbouring ocean.

The shells in many cases retain the enamel, and are in all

respects as perfect as if they had just been washed into the beach.

At Karativu, fourteen miles to the North of Puttalam, there

are various strata of calcareous rock, some friable as mari,

some highly indurated. These also undoubtedly belong to the

present formation.

The soil of the maritime parts is in general sandy, but

interspersed with rich alluvial earth, potters’ clay, and fresh

water marl of recent origin. Towards the interior, where the

isolated granite rocks previously mentioned appear, large

deposits of cabook gravel are met with.

That changes in the relative positions of sea and land have

occurred here within the historic period, seems to be proved by

the existence of a tradition to the effect, that in the time of the

famed Queen Alliarasani, the Gulf of Kalpitiya had no opening ~

to the Northward, but communicated with the sea by a channel —

running in the line of the present Chilaw Canal; that the

Queen abovenamed used to proceed from Kudiremalai to the

Akkaraip-pattu by land; and that a great flood came, buried

No. 6.—1853.] DIsTRICT OF CHILAW AND PUTTALAM. 39

her palace under the waves, and, bursting through a neck of

land, converted the lake into a gulf, which form: it still retains.

Mineralogy:

No. gems have been found in this District ; and the only ore

which I have heard of is the bog iron ore, procured in. consider-

able quantities,.a. few miles. to the south of Chilaw, and smelted

by the natives, who have, it appears, observed its reproduction.

Nitre used at one time to be procured from various caves.

One of these I visited, and have reason to believe that the salt

was not formed naturally, but was obtained artificially from.

the dung of countless: bats which have their abode in the grotto:.

Salt is procured in large- quantities by evaporation of sea-

water, and indeed: forms the chief source of public revenue.

The greater portion of it is obtained by means of artificial pans ;

a few hundred bushels. are, however, occasionally spontaneously

formed near Kalpitiya, during the dry season.

At Uppukulam, fifteen miles N. W. of Puttalam, the natives

affirm that a: very bitter kind of salt (Epsom?) is to be:

procured. I have not, however, had any opportunity of verify-

ing the statement..

Springs:

No medical or thermal springs are known.

Soil, Agriculture, &c..

As previously mentioned, a great portion of the soil in the

maritime districts is a silicious.sand, more or less mixed with

comminated shells. Where granite rocks exist, a reddish loam

takes the place of the sand ; and on the margin of rivers and

_ jakes a rich black mould, well adapted for the cultivation of

paddy, is to be met with. In some: places a retentive clay

exists and is used in the manufacture of bricks, &c.

The two staple vegetable products of the District are cocoa-

‘nuts and paddy.

40 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (cEYLON). [Vot. IL, Parr II. )

All the country lying along the sea-coast is occupied by topes

of cocoanut trees, which flourish in a soil consisting apparently

of pure sand. The finest plantations which I have seen are at

Madampe, on the site of the former pepper gardens; but the

whole eastern side of the Akkaraip-pattu yields good erops,

which the natives attribute in part to the existence of thin

sandstone beds a few feet under the surface of the ground.

Below these strata there is water, and it appears that this, by

capillary attraction, rises through the stone, thus keeping the

roots damp, and at the same time preventing them from being

constantly immersed in stagnant water.

The tree seems to flourish best in the immediate vicinity of

the sea, and I have frequently seen it growing well with its

roots partially immersed in salt water. Owing apparently to

the porousness of the soil, an elevation of a few feet is found.

to act nearly as prejudicially as a removal to a distance of

several miles from the coast. The benefits which the cocoanut

tree bestows on the natives are so well known that it is un-

necessary to particularize them. The oid which is in such

general use is usually obtained by expression, one end of a bent

lever being inserted into a large mortar-shaped vessel so as to

rub against the inner surface, while the other is attached to the

draught cattle. The cake which is left is called poonac; it

contains a large quantity of oil, and is used for fattening

poultry, cattle, &c.

- There are about 950,000 cocoanut trees in the District; and

as about 80 are generally placed on an acre, it would appear

that about 12,000 acres are devoted to this plant, each acre

being worth a rent of from 20s. to 60s. Hach tree yields from

25 to 70 nuts, though some occasionally are found to give @

crop six or eight times greater than this; but in those cases

the nuts are generally small.

From 1,000 to 1,500 nuts yield on an average a bar of

copperah (the dried kernel), and this yields about 140 seers

No. 6.—1853.| DISTRICT OF CHILAW AND PUTFALAM. 41

or 320 lbs. of oil. Theaverage price of copperah is from 22s.

to 30s. and above, per bar; that of oid 24d. to 33d. per bottle ;

and that of poonac about =d. per lb., and from 8s. 9d. to 11s.

8d. per bar. One bar of copperah yields about 210 lbs. of

poonac. .

There are, besides those already enumerated, certain other

products of the cocoanut tree, which add to the profits of the

planter. Thus, the leaves split lengthways and then woven

together by means of the leaflets, form what are called cadjans,

of which 100 sell for 1s. 6d. or 2s.; or if the cadjans be woven

-into a sort of continuous sheet or mat, called a karisanku

(twelve cadjans making from four to six karisankus), a hun-

dred of these are worth 4s. or 4s. 6d. Again, 250 to 300 nats

give 1,000 fathoms of coir rope, worth about 2s. 6d. In fact,

the uses of this tree are endless.

As might be expected, the prices of the various products ob-

tained from the cocoanut tree vary extremely in different parts,

of the District. To prevent misunderstanding, I give separately

the usual prices at Kalpitiya in the north, and Madampe in

the south. At both places the tree flourishes and is cultivated

to a great extent.

At Kalpitiya the cocoanuts are worth about £1. 10s. per

1,000. Poonac from 8s. 9d. to 11s. 8d. per bar (onequarter

ofa ton). Copperah, £1. 1s. to £2. 3s. per bar. Oil dd. to

Sid. per seer.

About 300,000 cocoanuts are annually exported from mee

pitiya, almost the whole quantity going to the Continent of

| India; a few thousands besides are sent over in the husk for

planting. From the same port 1,000 bars of copperah go to

_ Colombo, 100 to the Northern Province, and 2,000 to the Coast;

the last-mentioned paying an export duty of 24 percent. A

small quantity of oil is sent to Jaffna, and occasionally a little

| tothe Coast. Return dhonies take about 50,000 cadjans to

India annually ; these pay a duty of 24 per cent., and are worth

42 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON). [ Voz. If., Part II.

at’ Kalpitiya from 1s. 6d. to 2s. per 100, but at the places

where they are made not more than from 73d. to 9d. per 100.

At Madampe, on the other hand, copperah is worth from

£1. 2s. 6d. to £2. 5s. per bar; poonac, 3d. per lb., and oil

from 21d. to 33d. per bottle. About 10,000 or 12,000 bars of

copperah are annually taken to Colombo for sale.

I ought perhaps to add, that the tree is generally at first

grown in nurseries, and that it will bear transplanting at a

considerable age.

It is greatly to be regretted that the upset Government price

for land is as high here as in districts of which the capabilities

have already been ascertained. Capitalists are unwilling to

give the price demanded, knowing, as they do, that natives are

in the habit of selling equally good land at rates a half or a

third lower: and, on the other hand, they are deterred from

buying the ground from natives, partly on account of the diffi-

culty which they would experience in purchasing large con-

tinuous tracts, and partly from a dread lest their title to the

land might at a future period be disputed by Government,

which would most probably occur in numerous cases.

The native mill, being avery imperfect apparatus, large

quantities of copperah are annually sent out of the District,

chiefly to Colombo. It is much to be desired that the oil

itself should alone be transported ; and this cannot be expected

until some better kind of mill has been introduced. Many

years ago an Hnglishman began to construct such an apparatus

at Kalpitiya; it was made on the plan adopted in Europe,

where a heavy vertical wheel is forced to move in a circular

path over the substance to be crushed. 7

The cultivation of the cocoanut is extending very rapidly,

and, as the District affords every facility for water traffic, it

may be presumed that the number of topes will be increased.

year after year.

The farming system adopted ae regard to this plant is

No. 6.—1853.| DISTRICT OF CHILAW AND PUTTALAM. 43

that customary in many parts of the East. The land-owner

places on the grounds one or more peasant families, who take

charge of the plants until they are in full bearing—that is, for

from four to eight years—at the end of which time the tenant

receives one-half of the trees as his hire, This gives him, how-

ever, no claim to the land itself. Occasionally, instead of

making this division, the proprietor dismisses the cultivator,

after paying him at the rate of a shilling, or a dollar, for each

tree. It is almost unnecessary to add, that during the first

three or four years the plants must be watered daily in dry

weather.

I know of no more legitimate source of public revenue than

a small tax on fruit-bearing cocoanut trees. Whenever this

has been proposed, the natives have made a great outcry; but

it is quite notorious, and is indeed freely acknowledged by

themselves, that no sooner is a@ man in possession of a small

cocoanut tope, than he is independent for the rest of his life ;

he has absolutely nothing to do but to pluck the fruit, eat one

portion, and sell the remainder. The paddy cultivator has to

labour during several months to obtain one crop, and even this

he may lose from unfavourable weather ;—he is taxed. On the

contrary, the cocoanut cultivator has merely to water his trees

for two or three years,and then he may safely reckon on a

continuous crop for forty or fifty years, and this without any

further labour on his part ;—he is not taxed.

In the interior, where the cocoanut does not thrive so well

as along the coast, the natives turn their attention to the culti-

vation of various grains—in an especial manner to that of paddy.

Of this plant, a great many varieties are known, which how-

ever, so far as this District is concerned, may be divided into

two great classes, according to whether they ripen in four

or in three months. The former being sown from July to

December, yields the Maha harvest (@s#@@Je®) in January,

February, and March. The latter, placed in the ground between

44 ‘JOURNAL BR. A. 8. (CEYLON). [VoL H., Part Ti. =

April and July, ripens in August or September, giving the

Yala harvest (®©@ ©@Jx®). Those kinds of paddy known

as Ma-vi (©93), Llankalaiyan (Gorter wes), Hunarawdla

(#2958 )@) are only sown forthe Mahaharvest. Most, if not

all of the rest, may be used for either crop.

The natives here, as elsewhere, make their tanks too shallow,

the embankments unequal in height throughout, and the par-

tition mounds too numerous. To shew the evil effects of these

mistakes, and the best means by which they are to be obviated,

would require more room than can be allowed in this sketch.

The farm system is that which has been the curse of India

from time immemorial; and it prevails, I believe, in every part

of the Island. It is lable to slight modifications, but its

general features may be thus described.

No landed proprietor farms his own ground. Twice annually —

he comes to an agreement with a number of peasants, each of

whom takes charge of the field allotted to him for that one

crop. When the grain has been threshed and the Government

share deducted, the remainder is divided into four equal

shares, thus :—

Proprietor ; Cattle; Seed-corn ; Cultivator.

In general, the landlord provides the cattle and seed-corn, —

the peasant feeding the former as long as they are employed

on the ground, |

_ In most cases no particular arrangement is made regarding

the straw. Any one who pleases may take it. In fact, owing

to the bad system pursued in reaping, one-half or more of it is

left in the field as stubbie.

Unless either the large proprietors can be induced to farm their

own lands, or the natives can be induced to combine to some ~

extent in all objects for the mutual benefit of the inhabitants

_*Of course it frequently happens that a peasant cultivates the same field.

during several successive years. |

No. 6.—1853.] DISTRICT OF CHILAW AND PUTTALAM. 45

of each village, and until leases for lengthened periods are

adopted, the peasant has no encouragement in endeavour-

ing to improve his farm, and it is utterly hopeless to expect

any great improvement in this branch of agriculture.

Such then are some of those circumstances which tend to act

injuriously on agriculture. There still remains to be noticed

the train of evils arising from the manner in which the grain

tax is levied, a system which, however defective it may be, can-

not be easily dispensed with. This subject is, however, one of

too great importance to be treated of in this abstract.

Much land being so situated that it cannot be irrigated, is

reserved for the cultivation of what are called “ fine grains,”

such as kurakhan, menéri, sesamum, Se. !

The system pursued is most destructive ; the same piece of

ground being sown only once in five, ten, or fifteen years, and

the land allowed to become covered with wood in the intervals.

The ashes of this brushwood form the only manure employed.

The natural effects of a plan by which each peasant must

possess a number of separate patches of land, each large

enough to give him a sufficient crop for one year, are abundantly

evident. I have often travelled for days together through

nothing but chena land—so the clearings are termed—with-

out seeing more than a very few trees of any value as timber.

- Nothing but the introduction of the use of manures can

check the inherent evils of the system.

_ these plants then—the cocoanut, paddy, and fine grains—

| employ the greater portion of the agricultural population;

others are however cultivated, and of the more important I

| shall give short notices.

| Tobacco Is to be met with all over the District; but more atten-

tion is paid to it at and to the south of Chilaw than elsewhere.

_ The system of cultivation is as follows. The ground during

‘from six to twelve months is manured by railing off suc-

/cessively small portions of the field and using those as cattle

46 JOURNAL R. A. §. (CEYLON). | Vou. IL, Parr II.

folds. There are two seasons for sowing tobacco: that for the

Maha harvest is sown in December and January, and cut in

March and April; that for the Yala harvest is sown in June

and July, and cut in September. Throughout the greater

portion of the District the Maha harvest alone is looked to.

In the extreme south the Yala is that to which sole attention

is directed. Two months after sowing, the young plants, which

have then four or five leaves each, are removed from the

nursery and planted in rows three feet apart. At intervals

during three or four months the leaves are successively stripped

off, dried partly in the sun and partly in sheds, and ultimately

piled up in a smail close room where they heat considerably.

About ten leaves are cbtained from each plant; these are worth

from 24d. to 4d., the cost of cultivation being about 14d.

The large profit thus shown is, however, rather nominal

than real, as lengthened droughts frequently ruin the crops;

heavy rain occurring before the leaves are ripe proves equally

injurious. The price of the leaves varies extremely ; the worst

are not worth more thana few shillings per thousand, the very

best -not less than £6, and sometimes even £7 10s., for the

same quantity. Those which bring this latter price are

large, thick, viscous, and both taste and smell very strong.

The method adopted in drying the produce and in manufactur-

ing it is extremely defective.

If the land be rented out, the crop is divided thus pp kon

owner, Peasant, Cattle—equal shares.

The Palmyra palm (Borassus flabelliformis, Linn.) 1s found in

all the maritime portions of the District, but is not much prized.

It is chiefly used for the purpose of obtaining from it toddy and

jaggery. The wood of old trees answers admirably for rafters ;

the kernels are cool and pleasant; and from the expressed

juice of the husk surrounding the nut a kind of paste called

Punattoo is made. In the Northern parts of the Island this

substance forms an important article of food.

No. 6.—1853.] DISTRICT OF CHILAW AND PUTTALAM. 47

The Kitul (Caryota urens, Linn.) grows freely towards the

interior, but is not much cultivated; the jaggery obtained from

it is considered superior to all others.

The Talipot (Corypha umbraculifera, Linn.) is all but un-

known.

The Areka palm (Areca catechu, Linn.) is very extensively

cultivated in the southern part of the District. It begins to

bear about six years after being planted, and produces, on

an average, 100 nuts annually; these are worth on the spot

from 23d. to 44d. per hundred. The tree is short-lived,

generally shewing signs of decay after twenty years or so.

During the supremacy of the Portuguese and Dutch the

natives at Puttalam were in the habit of paying their taxes

in “ betel nuts’; these must, however, have been procured

from other Districts, as it is found that the tree does not

thrive anywhere near the village. The plants shoot up

rapidly during the first few years, but then die away suddenly.

The present produce is unequal to the demand; large quantities

are consequently brought from the southern parts of the

Island, where the soilis better adapted to the plant.

Plantains (Musa sapientum, Linn.) grow abundantly every-

where, but little attention is paid to the selection of good

varieties.

The Betel creeper (Sin. bulatvela, A@M321e) is found in

every village, but only towards the south are large gardens

given up to this plant. |

Pepper was at one time cultivated to a great extent near

Madampe, but is now totally neglected, the natives believing

that if ground be devoted to it alone, the expenses of the culti-

vation would not be covered, and that, if allowed to clamber

round cocoanut trees, these would be destroyed.

Coffee grows freely and the fruit is collected by the natives,

but it is of course of little or no value.

Cinnamon is found abundantly about eight miles to the

48 JOURNAL R. A. S. (CEYLON). [ Vor. II., Parr IT.

south of Puttalam, and also in other parts of the District ; the

bark used to be collected during the existence of the Govern-

ment monopoly, and the villagers still gather small quantities

of it.

The Bread fruit (Artocarpus incisa, Linn.) and Jack (Arto-

carpus integrifolia, Linn.) are much cultivated towards the

south; the former grows well at Kalpitiya.

The Sapan wood (Cesalpina Sappan, Linn.—Sin. patang,

oe) grows in the District, but Iam not aware that it is

collected for sale.

In some parts of the District Hemp (Ceylon—Sin. hana,

men, Crotalaria juncea, Linn.) is raised in considerable

quantities ; but the absence of pure running streams is a great

obstacle in the way of the oe it is chiefly employed

by fishermen.

Formerly, when the collection of cheya (Oldenlandia

aumbellata, Linn.,—Sin. sayan mula) was a Government mono-

poly, large quantities used to be obtained from the sandy

downs which gird the coast; that growing in the neigh-

bourhood of Kalpitiya was considered to be of the best

quality. A peculiar caste of people employ themselves to a

considerable extent in digging up and drying the root, which

yields a very brilliant, and I believe permanent red dye.

About ten or fifteen tons of this article are exported ae

to the Continent of India.

It may be proper to mention that at Kalpitiya considerable

quantities of a kind of seaweed are dried and sent to different

parts of the Island, where it is usually termed Jaj/na moss.

Gracillaria lichenoides, Grev.

The process of preparation consists simply in washing it in

fresh water and drying it several times in succession ; when

boiled and allowed to cool, it forms a transparent, nearly taste-

less, but, I am told, nourishing jelly. The preparation of the

plant was first commenced in 1806, at which time the usual

No. 6.—1853.] DISTRICT OF CHILAW AND PUTTALAM. 49

price was 9d. per lb.; it has now however fallen to 13d., but

the process is less carefully conducted than formerly.

The fruits and vegetables are the same as in other parts of

the low-country ; but no attention whatever being paid to their

cultivation, the produce of the majority is poor and insipid.

Hnglish vegetables have at various times been planted; but

lettuces, radishes, and some kinds of dean are the only ones

which appear capable of accommodating themselves to the

climate.

Cotton grows wild over the whole District, and the product

used to be collected in large quantities. Cloth from English

looms has, however, to a great extent, driven the native manu-

facturer out of the market.

Timber.

The whole face of the District, with the exception of a narrow

strip along the sea-coast, being covered with wood, a consider-

able variety of timber trees is to ke met with.

~ The commonest of these are the following :—

English. Sinhalese. Classical.

Ebony ... Kaluwara, 9896... Diospyros Ebenum, Retz.

Satinwood ... Buruta, 26:0 ... Chloroxylon Swietenia, D.C.

fall, Milla, Sée ... Vitex altissima, Linn.

— Halmilla, o@Séeq ... Berrya Ammonilla, Rox.

Tronwood* ... Palu, 30 .-. Mimusops Indica, D.C.

pal Godapara, 999836 ... Dillenia retusa, Than.

— Hora, o96 --- Diptercarpus Zeylanicus, Thw.

Jack .-- Kos, oanwd ..- Artocarpus integrifolia, Linn.

Teak .. Lékka, olla --- Tectona grandis, Linn.

Of these, Jack is never found growing spontaneously, and of

the Teak there are unfortunately but few specimens left, all

the plantations of this tree formed in the southern part of the

* The true tronwood treeis Messua ferrea, L. (Sin. négaha, Me.)

50 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON). [ Vou. II., Parr II.

District having been cut down without any provision being

made for a future supply. Some young plants were, however,

brought up to Puttalam about a year ago, and have hitherto

grown well.

From some of the indigenous trees various gums and resins,

valuable in the Arts and in Medicine, are obtained.

Fisheries.

As might be presumed, a large number of persons are en-

gaged in catching and in curing fish. For the former purpose

various plans are adopted. The passing cooly or lazy villager

obtains a savoury addition to his evening meal by cutting off

and gradually emptying small portions of half-dried-up tanks ;

while others attain the same end by pursuing shoals of fish

along shallow channels, and suddenly dropping over them

conical-shaped baskets. The quantity of fish caught in this

way would appear extraordinary to those who have not had

opportunities of observing that every collection of water, how-

ever small, swarms with life. Those whose means are greater,

make use of drag nets managed by two persons, which are used

either in still water or else in the surf which beats against,

and at short intervals surmounts, the shelves of rocks which

line the coast.

To catch large fish, hooks and lines, deep sea nets, and

stake nets are employed. The latter are ingeniously con-

structed of saplings tied side by side, leaving interstices of

half an inch or more. A fence of these is run out from the

shore, and terminates in a series of arrow-headed chambers,

It is in these kraals that the majority of the turtle obtained here

are caught. Another plan, in constant use among the natives,

is to run a fence of saplings or nets from each side of a river,

leaving only a small channel in the centre; in this channel

they place either a long bag net, or else a series of baskets

formed on the principle of a mouse trap, the fish entering

with ease but being unable to effect their escape. Shrimp

No. 6.—1853.] DISTRICT OF CHILAW AND PUTTALAM. 51

fishers make use of a fine net worked in such a manner as to

form a lengthened funnel-shaped figure, to the large circle

forming the aperture of which small lead weights are attached.

The net is carried folded over the left arm; a rotatory motion

is given to the weighted end, which is ultimately propelled to

a considerable distance, and in such a manner as to fall on the

water expanded and with the opening downwards; the lead

weights immediately sink to the bottom and enclose within the

circle the fish which happen to be on the spot.

Large quantities of fish are dried, salted, and despatched to

the interior; the process is, however, carried out in the most

imperfect manner, and the product, consequently, in many

cases utterly unfit for consumption, is without doubt a fre-

quent cause of illness among those who partake of it.

Since the tax upon fish was removed, the trade in this article

has very much diminished, and the boatmen are most anxious

that the duty should again be levied. This may appear para-

doxical, but I speak positively; all the chief fishers here

having on one occasion expressed their opinions in my pre-

sence, and this under circumstances which makes me feel

confident that such is the real state of feeling among them.

The anomaly is easy of explanation. When the fish tax

was farmed out, it was of course the interest of the renters

that as much activity as possible should be displayed. They

accordingly made advances to the poorer boatmen, caused

their canoes and nets to be repaired, and in return constantly

urged them to assiduity. The renter thus secured himself

from loss, and the fisher, besides receiving an advance when

in distress, found that he had by his industry secured for him-

self a larger sum than hitherto. In fact, the wish for the tax

is merely a modified acknowledgment of the advantages of

capital. The people are too wanting in enterprise and too

divided among themselves to unite for any useful purpose, and

although aware of the advantages of industry, have not energy

52 JOURNAL R.A. S. (CEYLON). [Vor Te Pann. ie

enough to act upon this conviction without the constant

admonitions of headmen. Like all Asiatics, they become

utterly helpless if unprovided with chiefs.

Domestic Animals.

Of the domestic animals, no breed is, so far as lam aware,

peculiar to the District. Large quantities of cattle are annu-

ally brought over from the Coast, and are bought up to be

employed for the ploughing of paddy fields as draught or as

pack cattle. There appear to be several breeds, but no trouble

is taken in preserving or improving any. The largest and

handsomest are not considered so profitable as those of moderate

size, but on this subject the natives appear to be gradually

altering their opinion. Buffaloes in large numbers stray over

the plains and through the jungles of the District; they are

sluggish animals, are possessed of more physical strength

than the common cattle, but are slow-paced and soon sicken

and die if they have not frequent opportunities of immersing

themselves in water. They are used in farming, and are also

commonly employed in carts, a practice which, I believe, is

not general throughout the Island. Sheep and goats of several

breeds are found in considerable numbers all along the coast.

Towards the interior the natives entertain some prejudice

against the rearing of them; and indeed, owing to the habits of

these animals, it would be troublesome keeping them in a

District covered with forest and abounding in leopards.

Of the larger cattle, it may, I think, with safety be said that,

like guns, one-half at least are purchased, not from an expec-

tation that they will yield any direct profit to the owner, but

simply as a means of investing money ; thus they frequently

form portions of the marriage gifts among the natives; and

till the present high rate of interest ceases, and the people

understand to some extent the principles of banking, and feel

confidence in these establishments, the system will doubtless

No. 6.—1853.| DISTRICT OF CHILAW AND PUTTALAM. d3

continue. It is only on very rare occasions that cattle are

killed for food ; the hides are invariably thrown away ; and, in

short, in a District abounding in pasture land, dairies, are

unknown, milk and butter are rarities, and scarcely any

benefit is derived from the existence of cows, buffaloes, or

sheep. A large proportion of the natives along the coast

being Muhammadans, pigs are only to be met with in two

or three of the larger villages. An English breed has

lately been introduced, thrives well, and is being gradually

disseminated. |

During the last few years the amount of stock has been very

greatly diminished by murrain; in many places three-fourths

of the animals have died. Jt is highly desirable that the

natives should receive some simple instructions as to the

method of treatment in such cases; hitherto charms alone

have been applied, and the consequent loss to the country

has been very great indeed.

Wild Animals.

It is only within a recent period that attention has, so far

as I am aware, been paid to the zoology of the District. I am

therefore not prepared to enter into any details at present. So

far as the better known and large animals are concerned, this

may be mentioned :—

Hilephants are abundant everywhere, and cause considerable

injury to the cultivated lands. Accidents to human beings are

however extremely rare. The jungle dcar and the two species

of leopard (commonly but falsely termed by Europeans, chetah

or tiger) are common; the black variety is occasionally met

with. Wold hogs are abundant, and frequently commit great

ravages in young cocoanut and plantain gardens, as do the

porcupines. Herds of deer are to be seen grazing in the plains

or trooping through the forest glades; there are four species,

if the musk deer be included. Jackals abound everywhere ; the

54 JOURNAL R. A. S. (CEYLON). [ Vou. IT, Parr YI.

natives say that there are two distinct species, one large and

red, the other smaller and dark, but I have not been able to

verify this. Two varieties of the mungoose are to be seen in

every piece of open jungle; they prove destructive to poultry,

as do wild-cats and civets. The manis, or scaly ant-eater, 1

have met with on several occasions. It is used as food. The

rivers and tanks abound with crocodiles, of which there appear

to be two species, one attaining a length of eighteen or twenty

feet, and formidable to men and cattle, the other seldom exceed-

ing eight or ten feet, and perfectly harmless when uninjured.

Both are naturally timid and fear the face of man. Numerous

species of smaller hzards are found. That commonly known

under the name of iquana is used as food, and its skin is

converted into shoes. It is hunted with dogs trained for that

purpose. |

The forests contain numerous and beautiful birds and insects,

many yet undescribed; but of these, for reasons already given,

it would be premature to say anything at present. :

It may be mentioned here that at Kalpitiya (or Calpentyn

as it is often written) a considerable quantity of béche-de-mer

is annually prepared and sent to Jaffna for exportation to the

Malay Peninsula and China. It consists simply of the dried

bodies of a species of SHolothuria (sea cucumber), which is

found in large quantities along the oozy shores of the Gulf.

They are picked up at ebb tide. When taken into the hand the

muscular contraction of the thick leathery integument is so

strong, that a great portion of the viscera is frequently

forcibly protruded. If this does not occur, the animals are

opened, and, after embowelling, boiled for a couple of hours till

quite soft, and then dried on the beach if the weather is favour-

able; under other circumstances, in close huts by means of

fires. The price on the spot is about 3s. 9d. per 1000, and this

quantity can easily be collected by two men during one ebb

tide.

No. 6.—1853.] DISTRICT OF CHILAW AND PUTTALAM. d0

Pearl and Chank Fisheries.

Pearl banks exist along the coast from Chilaw to Kérativu

Island, but many years have elapsed since they were fished.

Chanks are still in considerable deminand ; they are exported

to the continent, where they are sawn up and converted into

beads, bracelets, and other ornaments. As a branch of revenue

this has, however, almost entirely ceased to exist.

Iistory and Inhabitants.

An attempt to write a connected history of any small por-

tion of a country is almost absurd; its own peculiar politics

are trivial, and matters of greater interest af once merge into

the general history of the land.

The only historical circumstance attaching much interest to

the District is the erection within it of the first Capital of

Ceylon.

From the Mahawanso (Turnour’s translation, p. 47 e¢ seq.)

and Upham’s Sacred and Historical Books of Ceylon (p. 27 e¢

seq.) we learn, that on the very day that the last Buddha ex-

pired, Prince Wijaya, grandson of the lion, having by his dis-

solute conduct been driven from his home on the continent,

landed at some part of the coast near Puttalam ; that after pro-

eeeding a few miles towards the interior and overcoming a

female demon, named Kuwéni, who had enchanted and thrown

ito a dark cavern his seven hundred followers, he built a

palace to ratify a covenant which he had made with the sor-

eeress. Around this palace the first Capital of Ceylon was

built, and received the name of Tambapanni, or Tammannd

Adawiya, or Tammanna Nuwara, from the red earth found there

having stained the hands of Wijaya’s followers, who, overcome

by sea-sickness and faintness, had thrown themselves on the

ground to recruit their strength. The place is well-known

here under the name of Tammannéa Adawiya; it lies about six

or eight miles to the east of Puttalam, and was described by

56 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (cEYLON), [ Vou. IT., Parr IT.

Mr. Casie Chitty in the Transactions of the Royal Asiatic

Society. A few rough pillars and slabs scattered at random in

a thick jungle are the only remains now visible.

Wijaya’s companions and successors soon established them-

selves in different parts of the country, and in the fifth reien,

that of Pandukabhaya, the seat of Government was finally

removed about forty miles north-west to Anurddhapura. A

king of Madampe (Tanne Wella Bahu), and the queen Alliyara

Sani, who has been referred to in a previous section, are the

only other Royal personages having their residence within the

District, of whom, as far as I am aware, history contains any

record. |

In Upham's Colleztions (Vol. II1., p. 324 et seg.) there is an

account of the removal of the branch of the Bé tree from

Jambudwipa to Bédhimandala at Anurddhapura, &c. In this

tract particular mention is made of a Malabar nation having

been called to assist in a local war which occurred in the time

of Tissa who followed Dutthagémini. The foreigners landed

at Karativu, fourteen miles north of Puttalam, and appear to

have proceeded towards the interior nearly by the hne of the

present Kurunégala road. What we are to understand by the

nine hundred cannons which the Malabars brought with them,

it is difficult to surmise; probably the confusion arises from

mistranslation,

The inhabitants, as in other maritime Districts, are composed

of people of many nations. The Muhammadans or MJoormen are

said by Sir A. Johnston to have first settled in the Island in

the early part of the Highth century ; they formed portion of

those Arabs of the house of Haslum who were driven from

Arabia by the tyranny of the Caliph Abdul Melek Ben

_ Merwen, and who, proceeding southwards, made various settle-

ments in the South of India and Malacca, In Ceylon they

carried on a very extensive trade in rice, indigo, chanks, cheya,

&c.; and by making advances to the natives for the purpose of

No. 6,—1853.] DISTRICT OF CHILAW AND PUTTALAM. 57

repairing the tanks, were the means of keeping the northern

part of the Island in a very prosperous condition. These are

the most industrious and mercantile class ; they are the traders,

boutique keepers, master fishers, &c.; they also deal largely in

cattle, and are frequent purchasers of Government taxes.

They are for the most part confined to the immediate vicinity of

the sea; there are, however, Moor villages scattered about the

interior, the inhabitants of which are much disliked and feared

by the natives. The Moors have mixed up with their own

faith many superstitions borrowed from Hinduism.

Of Malays but few reside in the District, and these are

soldiers, pensioners, or descendants of such, and in general

hold small Government employments, such as peons, &c.

The Dutch descendants generally find employment as clerks,

post-holders, &c. It is greatly to be regretted that this class

relies so much on the support of Government; they possess

qualities which one would expect to adapt them for the life of

tradesmen; and if so employed they would be better off and

much more independent, Some foolish prejudice is the only —

obstacle to this desirable change. The majority, I believe,

adhere to the Dutch and Protestant Church.

The Portuguese descendants now form, on the whole, a very

deeraded class, and seein to be looked down upon by all. They

profess Roman Catholicism.

The low-country Sinhalese employ themselves in keeping

boutiques or taverns, trading in salt, cultivating cocoanut gar-

dens, &c. They have to a great extent forgotten Buddhism,

and for the most part seem to have no fixed opinion on re-

ligious matters, changing their faith with astonishing non-

chalance at the call of interest or whim.

The Sinhalese who live in the jungle pattus treat those of

the coast with much scorn ; they adhere withatolerable firmness

to Buddhism, but have not failed to conjoin with this com-

paratively pure faith countless superstitions borrowed from

08 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON). [Vot. II., Parr IT.

other nations. Latterly, owing to the sloth and ignorance of

the priests, many of the people are becoming indifferent to

Buddhism, and while one constantly finds vihdres going to ruin,

few if any are rising to supply their places.

A large number of Tamil coolies annually pass through the

District on their way to and from the coffee estates in the

interior; of these not a few take up their residence about

-Puttalam or other villages, being employed as carters, placed

in charge of young cocoanut plantations, &c..

There is still one race to be mentioned, many of the customs

prevalent among which are singular and worthy of attention ;

I refer to the Muhkhkuvar. These people are Christian Tamils,

and are found, I believe, solely along the coast and to the north

of Chilaw. They intermarry with each other and with Tamil

Christians, but keep a good deal apart from the other inhabi-

tants, In general appearance they somewhat resemble Moor-

men. At one time they formed a very influential body and

possessed large tracts of land; but being almost without

exception addicted to drinking, they have now sunk very much

in the social scale. The Mukkuvar headmen are termed

Réjavanniya, and Kumdravanniya respectively, and by an

ancient custom these titles ought to descend, not from father

to son, but from uncle to nephew. To describe the origin of

this strange practice would occupy more time than can at

present be afforded ; I therefore omit it.

I have thus endeavoured to give a description of this Dis-

trict. There is nothing of particular interest, but the recording

of such statistics is often useful at a future period, which must

plead my apology for laying so dry a paper before the Society.

No. 6.—1853.] ROCK INSCRIPTION AT GURUGODA. 59

ROCK INSCRIPTION AT GURUGODA VIHARE

IN THE MAGUL-KO’RALE, SEVEN-KORALES.

By A. O. Bropir, Esa.

On a late official tour through my District and through a

part of Seven-kéralés,in company with the Government Agent

of this Province, we visited the vihare of Gurugoda at Giri-

bawa in Magul-kéralé, about twenty-five miles south of

Anurddhapura. This is one of the so-called rock temples,

which are abundantly scattered over the country. The dwell-

ing for the priests is as usual considerably elevated, being

built on a projecting knoll, andis in the form of a square

enclosing asmall open and sunken court, in which on each suc-

cessive morning the village women stand, while one of the

priests, concealed behind a curtain, reads aloud portions of the

sacred books. The temple itself is on a higher platform, and

is formed by running up a wall at the front part of a wide

shallow cave formed by a huge over-hanging ledge of rock.

The internal walls are ornamented in the customary manner

with crude, vividly coloured paintings, which pourtray the

tortures to be endured in a future state of existence by the

wicked. A few mutilated but very neatly carved Buddhas lying

near the doorway, and a half-ruined Dagoba, complete the

resemblance between this and the hundred structures of a

similar character to be met with here.

A flight of stairs rudely cut out of the solid rock leads to

the summit of the peak, from whence one obtains an extensive

view over a country flat and fertile in its general character, but

diversified by numerous isolated granitic groups. On a pre-

cipitous face of rock opposite the bana-maduwa, I found that a

space about four feet square had been brought to a smooth sur-

face and then covered with a long inscription, partly in Sin-

halese and partly in Pali. Not having time tocopy the whole

60 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON). [ Vou. II:, Parr IL.

of this, the head priest obligingly caused it to be transcribed

on an ola, which he presented to me on the spot. This ola I

placed at different times in the hands of two well-informed

natives, and having compared the translations made by them,

beg to lay the perfected English version before the Society.

It will be observed that the inscription is simply a grant to

the priests of this vihare of certain villages and lands (so far

as their produce is concerned) for the purpose of defraying the

ordinary expenses of the establishment.

It is dated in the year Saka 1701, which I believe corres-

ponds to 1779, A. D., and is stated to have been issued in ac-

cordance with the wishes of the King, Kirti Sri Raja Sinha,

who, according to the Mahawanso, reigned from A.D. 1747, to

A.D. 1781, a statement in so far according withthe inscription.

It is only necessary to add, that the arrangement of words and

clauses has been only so far altered as to make _ translation

tolerably intelligible.

TRANSLATION.

‘¢ On this Thursday the 13th day after the full moon of the

month Wesak in the year of the glorious king Saka, 1701.

“ For the purpose of performing the rites and offerings i in

the Vihdre Galé Vihdre of Giribéwa beyond Mi-oya in the

Maha-meda-pattu of Maeul-kérale.

“This being suggested by the Wanni Mudaliyar of Giribawa,

and by Pilimatalawwé Wijayasundara Rajakaruna Sénddhipati |

Raja Mantri who performs the offices of Maha Diséwa of

Puttalam Munnésaram A’naiviluntén including the Seven-

kéralés, and Mahé Adigar, and by the Minister’s son who

performs the duties of Haluwadana Nilame,* the son of the

said Sénddhipati.

“ This being suggested, the Supreme Lord of Lafka, Kirti

Sri Réja Sinha, who is endowed with every regal power and

adorned with gems of virtue, celebrated for might i in his own

and foreign dominions, presiding like the God Sakra and

conducting like Buddha himself, having ascended the throne

* The officer having charge of the King’s wardrobe,

No. 6.—1853.] ROCK INSCRIPTION AT GURUGODA. 61

of the wealthy city Sayikandanum, hereby sacrifices to the

Wéragala Dagaba (Dagabwahansé) the pyramid at Wéragala,

on the east of this side of Gurugoda Béwuma, on the south

from this side of Yantan Pallewallewatia Wéragala and Pem-

purugalla, on the west from this side of the village Belliagama

Weragala Lokdhettigama Béwuma, on the north from this side

of the tank of Waduressa and the stone post of the water

reservoir of Giribawe, all the houses, trees, gardens, high lands,

and low lands* situated within these four limits, to be

possessed, as to all the produce thereof, by Dhammarakkhita

Unnansé of Giribawe, his disciples and their successors from

generation to generation on condition of performing the

Buddhist sacrifices.

“ May the kings, ministers, and other persons who come into

this world hereafter, without disturbing or encroaching, endea-

vour to obtain glory and xirwana by increasing the offerings

more and more.

“ Should any one dispossess (the priests) of grass, timber,

flowers or fruit, he will be born a great préta.”’t

Note by Honorary Secretary, 1882,

{ Appended is a line for live transcript in Sinhalese (A) and Roman

characters (B) of this inscription as recently (December, 1881) copied,

by request, under the direction of C. E. Jayatilaka Hulugala, Raté-

mahatmaya of the Vanni Hatpattu in the Kurunégala District, who

writes :—‘‘The Kérala whom I got to take the copy from the rock

tells me the characters are very illegible, and that it was with diffi-

culty he deciphered them.” The amended translation (C) from the

Korala’s MS. copy is by B. Gunasékara, Translator to Government. |

* « Highlands and low lands,” i.e., paddy fields and chéna land.

7 A wandering mischievous demon.

faa

all

foot

‘~)

—&

(=)

bar}

= sane (TONER (VOLO CM@ HODO CaP Porwo EB ceOe ceo cacegaB cow

cep COLAO CY eeccsce Oe boo ec caapseoceD & preccows erag2

CEeED Ifo@R e@o Pe peew~er 3 cee Ce sra@nucmo semceoed

062 ce EMBEIS@COwo @eOENCmO Pemerane@ po Ecosse Dar

edo ©@ geo geame Ode OwRS ED KHuege @eewo ef Ce camorcdD

e 22 ZOO POLMOCEH MARE PROD P@ BO PR PO HF Cee Our pewo imon o@

® SRD Peel eee H Ec ermeene EMD cee wRmoS wea Ee eeDeEesR xe

@ cng Popsorem) GEWOGSeD GOSH CAwSEee ERE CB E@o @EMDmg Beh Onwo

CHCPEMO CEE OO CaO 2@OEc@ Owaes Hey? @O [POR OM VIIED® GOD OH? Qorug@NDoe see0Ie wm

OPSE SMOOraime 19D LER OO (SSII2E ErMORQMorw}DO DOOR cemowrn> @F2R [OG EO Ke

S’EHEO SOfOole semoace DEVE wpe f2mo@rcacese [ed (ER @O LF @9D2Y CMO! cowmow@

rams GF CRORaEROd MEO com DOOE POG CROWDS EMossaeacceto3arae Eho c@teD

Roepe GS ope whrecoGeR aecad cow GOING Cee CS CURE e@ossize Dcemo eselege

ISPOGHEL® RD GR Crepo upow po obeHepe eokOe eeRg wow mond w@ ca

tag @@ Hoopeo cow egtelh edbecOo@crd @ommoes @DacB prlepemke@ cwemoge

GO [MOOS EOC MWAdIE@ dE POCO a@ Pa0E> @O Deerrane®& iO ORY @ce WeRDowo

Gh BE OREO rome @o BE O8 ~als CWE OBWa padiaze jemoge POWN CR GF

¥:

ROCK INSCRIPTION AT GURUGODA.

No, 6.—1853.]

‘Iyesslavyq o1ed vyvul eAvAop ulyeu 900q vyuppng uryeqd varped vaueqddnd uvyiiey

warped gausuury, ‘tAejeued vjepea rped wnyn eavasayuey 1G oseuviey Byes} h

ejuequl iedues vysyou voivms ulmeageard vpnd epea epea ulmeavyou yedeuvreyppn

YvNas BIW BvAUIsIAUNyouSY weseqdoy ipeAyeuvyem vex naguuea veyed

CAO] NYVU Iyou UIpes Bpepea veye(nd vavpny nuvpaeyo vayesIypo vjisepoa UoABsE]

IA BIPUDADP JsuUByesAUIvUY AVIV {Ofer

oles eyem taep eqirg efey 11g 9a1y vpeyed seloy osed v4

6 NUBSOP VsopVANS WINN NALPAyUL[eUVeI VvuNSeyivu vuuedues vjeq ofo7 eydyaddeped

1s ufler roXkvavavad vuvypavalig wieu epueyqydeg ejeovavuipia vuvfockead eXesed nats vjeavaeduered vis

Is nuvdsis acogysuvuuy VIIqyyereMUVvyd sAvqiiyg ulmvayeaed vavfnd vyppng you vueyedis 1pe vjoyx

BYVUBANS VpeUIVpOS NAtpou uowlyu vreqes udydty ow yejid om ueqejes ouISedTp aavqiay oped uaAdA oss

dinpeA uekvovyq esIp ninjn yeiid om uoMINdg VMOoT}joYyvyOT vjpvovszoA uoXvovyqesip vuryyouord yejid om u

dao A VUBSOSdTT uoskiMVPT BjOAvpO vy uodvovyqysip nunyep yejid om uowndg vposnany uodvds

vyqusip vaind vjosuvyeadvovg tyou vuvk vpwovloA Ip9Uudy I}Is Brvyeles VjosuvyVAUIvUBAnApIWVAS BAOp BUININ

navuvfeyq ug vdelta qnuistauekeaygnd vAqeue vuereyouryey vuspeanjepy navjefiu uosunedinpeusg 9 ynUIsIA

ubkvavastajuepy eley yedrypeugg euvaryeley vavpunsedeltA ganavyey, vuniig vierey uvivyIpy vyeyy ey

CASI, VYVIN S[TRIOY IG Vanpujd vaypuopovu,y ewUVaesseUNTY wvUeTe}INg YnUIsIAUNYSHIy vpyyxereuMe

yd osuvdtpnyy iuvA oavquary vstuid vueayeard weyxyejoepnd ryom evuek vXeavyrA vests A QABqIALH epos

our uofory, oanqyedepdyy epeq o[esdoy [usuvy_Y woeseaep om vpuryodseyeag yeyediqyy waeu ByBAse[Oy

BAG Vsvu Vovse A 1gekesnaea ou nawvu vend iurmdd vjvyo vArsyeYy sepepEaye uokeysava lea BYVY VYPpNS 11g

64 JOURNAL R. A. s. (CEYLON). [ Vou. II., Parr Il.

“ On this Thursday, the 13th day after the full moon of the month

Vesak in the year 1701 of the correct Saka era.

“ For the purpose of performing the religious rites and ceremonies in

the Véragala Viharé of Girib4va on this side of Mi-oya in the Meda-

pattu of Magul Koralé.

“This being suggested to the victorious, prosperous, and paramount

Sovereign Lord by the Vanni Mudaliyar of Giribava, by the Priest

~Dhammarakkhita, and by Pilimatalavvé Vijayasundara Rajakirana

Sénadhipati Raja Mantri who performs the offices of Maha Adigar

and Maha Disava of the Seven Kéralés including Puttalam, Mun-

néssaram, and A‘naiviluntan, and by the minister’s son who performs

the duties of Haluwadana Nilamé, the son of the said Sénadhipati.

‘‘ This being suggested, the Supreme Lord of Laika Kirti Sri Raja

Sinha, who ascended the throne of the illustrious city Srivardhana

called Sayikhanda, who is endowed with glory and power, is

adorned with gems of virtue, and who has extended his fame and

glory throughout his own great kingdom and (foreign) countries,

seated himself like the god Sakra, and, in conformity with the life

of Bdédhisatva, offered all the houses, trees, high lands and low lands,

situated within these four limits, viz., this side of Gurugoda Béwuma

on the East of the Véragala Dagoba (relic-repository), this side of

of Yakta Melavela Mamiya and Hegégama Velvetiya, this side of

Véragala on the South, Lékahettigama Bévuma on the West, and

this side of the tank of Vaduressa and the stone post of the water

reservoir of Giribaéva on the North, to be possessed for the sake of

the four priestly requisites by the disciples of Dhamma-rakkhita

Unnansé of Giribava, and their successors, on condition of performing

the Buddhist ceremonies.

“May the Kings, Ministers, and other persons who come into this

world hereafter, without disturbing or encroaching, endeavour to

obtain the bliss of heaven and release, by increasing the offerings

more and more.

‘“‘ Should any one dispossess (the Priests) of grass, timber, flowers

or fruit which belong to the Buddha* he will be born a great prétd.”t |

* Reading amnad Ae) Gawmaas for QBAOXIAGD HBSIOEax.

} A disembodied spirit suffering misery.

No. 6,--1853.] CATALOGUE OF CEYLON BIRDS.

CATALOGUE OF CEYLON BIRDS,

By E. F. Ketaart, M.D. Edin., F.L.8., F.G.8., &., anp

Epear L. Layarp, C.M.E.S., &e.

ORDER: ACCIPITRES.

SuB-ORDER: Accrpitres DiurnI.

Fam.: Falconide.

a.—AQUILINA.

‘ Aquila Bonelli, Temm. The Genoese Eagle.

Aquila pennata, Gmel. The Pennated Eagle.

Spizaetus Nipalensis, Blyth. The Beautiful Crested Eagle.

’ Spizaetus limnaetus, Horsf. The Crested Eagle. —

* Ictinaetus Malayensis, Temm. The Black Eagle.

. Hematornis Cheela, Latham. The Cheela Eagle.

Hematornis spilogaster, Blyth. The Ceylon Eagle.

* Pontoaetus leucogaster, Gmel, White-bellied Sea Eagle.

Pontoaetus icthyaetus.

Haliastur Indus, Bodd, Siva’s Kite.

6.—FALCONINA.

Falco peregrinus, Linn. The Peregrine Falcon.

Tinnunculus alaudarius, Briss. The Kestrel Falcon.

Hypotriorchis chicquera, Shaw. The Rufus-headed Falcon.

c.— MILVINE.

Baza lophotes, Temm. The Cohy Falcon.

Milvus Govinda, Sykes. The Cheela or Govinda Kite.

Elanus melanopterus, Daud. The Black-winged Falcon.

d.—ACCIPITRINA.

Astur trivirgatus, Z’emm. The Three-streaked Kestrel,

Accipiter badius, Gmel. Brown’s Sparrow Hawk.

Accipiter nisus, Linn. The Sparrow Hawk,

66 JOURNAL R. A. 8. (CEYLON). [| Vou. II., Parr IL.

e.—CIRCINA.

Circus Swainsonii, A. Smith. The Pale Harrier.

Circus cinerascens, Montague. ‘The Ashy Falcon.

Circus melanoleucos, Penn. The Black and White Falcon.

SuB-ORDER: Accripitres Nocturnl.

Fam.: Strigide.

a.—SURNINE.

Athene castanotus, Biyth. The Ceylon Chesnut-winged Owl,

Athene scutellata, Gray. The Hairy Owl.

b.—BUBONINE.

Ephialtes scops, Linn. The Scops-eared Owl.

Ephialtes sunia, Hodgson. The Reddish Owl.

Ephialtes lempigii, Horsf. The Lempigi Owl.

Ketupa Ceylonensis, Gmel. _ The Ceylon Eared Owl.

c.—SYRNINE.

Syrnium Indrani, Gray. The Ulama Owl.

d.—STRIGIN&E.

Strix Javanica, Gmel. The Indian Barn Owl.

ORDER: PASSERES.

SUB-ORDER I.: FISSIROSTRES.

A. F. NocTurnl.

Lam.: Caprimulgide.

a.—STEATORNINA.

Batrachostomus moniliger, Layard. The Ceylon Oil Bird.

b,—CAPRIMULGINA.

Caprimulgus Maharattensis, Sykes The Maharatta Goatsucker.

Caprimulgus Kelaarti, Blyth, ©The Nuwara Eliya Goatsucker.

Caprimulgus Asiaticus, Latham. The Indian Goatsucker,

B. F. DIURNI.

Fam.: Mirundinide.

a@.—CYPSELINA.

Cypselus Balasiensis, Gray. The common Palm Swift.

Cypselus melba, Linn. The common Large Swift.

No, 6.—1853.] CATALOGUE OF CEYLON BIRDS. 67

Cypselus affinis, Gray. The Blackish Swift.

Macropteryx coronatus, Tickell. The Crested Swift.

Collocalia brevirostris, Mc Clellan. The Edible-nest Swallow.

Acanthylis caudacuta, Lath. The Spiny-tailed Swallow,

6.—HIRUNDININA,

Hirundo gutturalis, Scop. The common Indian Swallow.

Hirundo hyperythra, Layard. The Red-bellied Swallow.

Hirundo domicola, Jerdon. The Bungalow Swallow,

Hirundo daurica, Linn.

Fam.: Coraciade.

a.—CORACIANE.

Coracias Indica, Linn. The Indian Roller.

Kurystomus Orientalis, Linn.

Fam. : Trogonde.

Harpactes fasciatus, Lath, ? The Fasciated Trogon.

Fam: Alcedonide.

a.—HALCYONINZ.

Halcyon Capensis, Linn. The Cape King-fisher.

Halcyon Smyrnensis, Linn. The Smyrna King-fisher

Haleyon atricapillus, Lath.

Ceyx tridactyla Linn. The pretty Dwarf King-fisher

b6,— ALCEDONINA.

Alcedo Bengalensis, Gmel. The IndianKing-fisher, —

Ceryle rudis, Linn. The Black and White King-fisher

Fam.: Meropide.

a.— MEROPINA.

Merops Philippinus, Linn. The Philippine Bee Eater

Merops viridis, Linn. The Indian Bee Eater.

Merops quinticolor, Kell. The Five-coloured Bee Eater

Sus-OrDER 11. TENUIROSTRES.

Fam.: Upipide.

a.—UPuPIN«.,

Upupa Senegalensis, Swain. The Hoopoo.

68 JOURNAL R, A. 8. (CEYLON).

Fam.: Promeropide.

a.—PROMEROPINA.

Nectarina Zeylanica, Linn, The Ceylon Sunbird.

Nectarina minima, Sykes. The smaller Sunbird.

Nectarina Maharattensis, Lath, The short-billed purple Honeybird.

Nectarina Lotenia, Linn. The long-billed Honeybird.

Diceum Tickelli, Blyth. Tickell’s Honeybird.

Fam.: Meliphagide.

a.—MELIPHAGINA.

Phyllornis Malabarica, Lath. Malabar Honey Eater.

Phyllornis aurifrons, Temm ? Green Honey Eater.

Phyllornis Jerdoni, Blyth. Jerdon’s Honey Eater,

Fam.: Certhiade.

a.— SITTINA,

Dendrophila frontalis, Horsf. | Blue Nuthatch or Creeper,

SusB-Orper 1. DENTIROSTRES.

Fam.: Luscnde.

a.—MALURINA.

Orthotomus longicauda, Gmel. The rufous-headed Tailorbird.

Cisticola cursitans, Blyth. The Grass Warbler.

Cisticola omalura, Blyth. The mountain Grass Warbler.

Drymoica valida, Blyth. Layard’s Grass Warbler.

Drymoica inornata, Sykes.

Prinia socials, Sykes,

6.—Luscininz.

Acrocephalus dumetorum, Blyth. The mountain Marsh Warbler.

‘Phyllopneuste nitidus, Blyth.

Phyllopneuste montanus, Blyth.

Phyllopneuste viridanus, Blyth.

[ List continued in next Number. |

NOTICE.

emer

Tue price of the Journals of the Royal Asiatic Society (Ceylon

Branch) is, in Ceylon—to Members, Rs. 1 each ; to Non-Members, —

Rs. 2 each.

Journals are obtainable from :— : !

(1) The Honorary Secretary, R.A.S. (C.B.), Colombo.

(2) Messrs. Triibner & Co., 57 & 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E.C. —

*,* Communications intended for publication in the Journal must —

be forwarded to the Secretary at least a fortnight before the assembly ~

of the General Meeting at which they are to be submitted, |

i? US

= JOURNAL S

CEYLON BRANCH ~

| ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY: —

THE SECRETARY. 5

DLAI LYWIO IOI Ot

wv PARAL OO \é =e , :

CONTENTS: SAAAL HS

Page.

Catalogue of Ceylon Birds. By E. F. Kelaart, Esq. m. p.. and Edgar L.

Layard, Esq. (concluded.) ... .. 57

_ Notes on some of the Forms of Salutation and "Address known among the Sin-

pnalece-) bythe ton. Mr. Justice Starke “ssc s00 eee oes sae vee GF

Rock Inscriptions. By A. O. Brodie, Esq.. ... Sera eek ener), Oe

On the Veddahs of Bintenne. By the Rev. J. Gillings oe opt a Obes aoa WMBO Saks)

Rock Inscription at Piramanenkandel. By 8. C. Chitty, Esq. .. 90

Analysis of the great Historical Poem of the Moors entitled Seerah. By 8. or

Chitty, Esq.—(‘to be continued. ) cae esstae aeotat es «Meh ace Miers ib,

APPENDIX:

Peet eeOEPNUCCEAI OS “Gop wees nce wie ace) ees | cane! Saws’ sure ase) IomLRLL

MANNII NP LLIN ODN LILO DI LI IOIOOL OL NIOL LOENOL LOLI

LLL LOLA VLLOLDLOLILOVIOQOPOI™OL OOOO Yh

F 4

ea Communications may be sent to the Secretary, under cover to the Hon’ble the

Colonial Secretary.

tit Parties desirous of having the Journal transmitted to them by Tappal, bearing

Postage, or otherwise, will have the goodness to intimate their wishes to the

Secretary.

COLOMBO:

Ww. _ SKEBN, a PRINTER, CEYLON.

MDCCCLII. .

KC ibe 4 .

: comin

< S)

Catalogue of Ceylon Birds,

SUB-ORDER II. TENUIROSTRES.

FAM: UPUPID.

a. UPUPINA.

Upupa Senegalensis, Swain. The Hoopoo.

FAM: PROMEROPID.XY.

a. PROMEROPINA.

Nectarma Zeylonica, Linn. The Ceylon Sunbird.

Nectarina minima, Sykes. The smaller Sunbird. —

Nectarina Maharattensis, Lath. ‘The short-billed purple Honeybird.

Nectarina Lotenia, Linn. The long-billed Honeybird.

Diceum Tickelli, Blyth. Tickel’s Honeybird.

7 FAM: MELIPHAGID&.

a. MELIPHAGINA.

Phyllornis Malabarica, Lath. Malabar Honey Eater.

Phyllornis aurifrons, Temm ? Green Honey Eater.

Phyllornis Jerdoni, Blyth. Jerdon’s Honey Eater.

FAM: CERTHIAD.

a. SITTIN.

_ Dendrophila frontalis, Horsf. Blue Nuthatch or Creeper.

SUB-ORDER III. DENTIROSTRES.

FAM: LUSCINID 2.

a. MALURINA.

Orthotomus longicauda, Gmel. © The rufous-headed Tailorbird.

Cisticola cursitans, Blyth. The Grass Warbler.

The mountain Grass Warbler.

Layard’s Grass Warbler.

Cisticola omalura, Blyth.

Drymoica valida, Blyth.

Drymoica inornata, Sykes.

Prinia socialis, Sykes.

b. LUSCININA.

Acrocephalus dumetorum, Blyth. The mountain marsh Warbler.

Phyliopneuste nitidus, Blyth.

Phyllopneuste montanus, Blyth.

Phyllopneuste viridanus, Blyth.

Cc. ERYTHACINA,

Copsychus saularis, Linn. The Dialbird.

Copsychus, fy

Copsychus macrourus, G'mel. The long-tailed Thrush.

Pratincola caprata, Blyth. The Meadowchat.

VOL. IT. ag

58 Catalogue of Ceylon Birds.

Pratincola atrata, Kelaart. The black do. or Newera Ellia Robin.

Calliope cyana, Hodgs. ,

Thamnobia fulicata, Linn. The sooty Warbler.

Cyanecula suecica, Linn.

Sylvia affinis, Blyth.

d. PARINA.

Parus cinereus, Vieill. The ashy Tomtit, or Titmouse.

€. MNIOTILTINZAE.

Zosterops palpebrosus, Temm. The white-eyed Bushcreeper.

Zosterops annulosus, Swain. The mountain Bushcreeper.

Tora Zeylanica, Gmel. Ceylon Bushereeper.

Tora typhia, Linn. The green Bushcreeper.

f. MOTACILLINZE.

Motacilla boarula, Linn. The grey Wagtail.

Motacilla Indica. The Indian Wagtail.

Budytes (Enicurus ) viridis, Blyth. The green Wagtail.

Corydalla (Anthus) Richardi, Blyth. Richard’s Pipit.

Corydalla rufula, Vieill. The rufous Pipit.

Corydalla striolata, Blyth. The mountain Pipit.

FAM: TURDIDZ.

a. FORMACARINE.

Brachypteryx Palliseri, Kelaart. _ Palliser’s Ant-thrush.

Drymocataphus fuscocapillus, Blyth.

Alcippe nigrifrons, Blyth. The mountain Thrush.

Pitta brachyura, Jerdon. The short-tailed Pitta.

b. TURDINA.

Oreocincla spiloptera, Blyth. Thrush.

Merula Wardu, Jerdon. Ward’s Thrush.

Merula Kinnisii, Kelaart. The Newera Ellia Blackbird.

Cc. TIMALINA.

Garrulax cinereifrons, Blyth. Ashy-headed Garrulax.

Pomatorhinus melanurus, Blyth. |The Ceylon Pomatorrhinus.

Malacocercus griseus, G'mel. The “Seven Brothers” or dungthrusk.

Malacocercus rufescens, Blyth. The reddish—do.

Malacocercus striatus, Swains. The mountain—do.

Duwmetia albogularis, Blyth.

Chrysomma sinense, Lath.

d. ORIOLINZ.

Oriolus melanocephalus, Zin. The black-headed Oriole.

Oriolus Kundoo? Sykes. _ The golden Oriole.

Oriolus Indicus, Bris.

Catalogue of Ceylon Birds.

) e. PYCNONOTINA.

Criniger Ictericus, Strickland. The ashy Bulbul.

Pycnonotus penicillatus, Kelaaré. Yellow-eared Bulbul.

Pycnonotus flavirictus, Strickland. Bulbul.

Pycnonotus hemorrhous, Gimel? The Condatchee Bulbul.

Pycnonotus atricapillus, Viedll. The black-headed Bulbul.

Niltava rubeculoides, Hodgs.

Hemipus picatus, Horsf. The black and white Hemipus.

Rubigula gularis, Gould ?

Hypsipetes Nilgherriensis, Jerdon. Nielgherry Hypsipetes.

FAM: MUSCICAPID.E.

f. MUSCICAPINE.

Cryptolopha cinereo-capilla, Blyth. The grey-headed Flycatcher.

Leucocerca compressirostris, Blyth.

Myiagra cerulea, Vierll.

Tchitrea paradisi, Linn. The paradise Flycatcher.

Butalis latirostris, Brie. The Flycatcher.

-Butalis ie

Stoporala melanops, Blyth. The blueish Flycatcher.

FAM: AMPELIDE.

a, CAMPEPHAGINE.

Pericrocotus flammeus, Forster. | The elegant red Flycatcher.

Pericrocotus peregrinus, Linn. The smaller Do.

Campéphaga Macei, Linn. Mace’s Caterpillar Ca‘cher.

Campephaga Sykesi, Strick.

b. DICRURINA.

Artamus leucorhynchos? G'mel. The Shrike.

Artamus fuscus, Viedll. Rufous-bellied Shrike.

Edolius Malabaricus, Scop. King Crow.

Edolius retifer, Temm. The crested King-crow.

Dicrurus cerulescens, Zinn.

Dicrurus edoliformis, Blyth.

Dicrurus longicaudatus, A. Hay.

Dicrurus leucopygialis, Blyth.

Dicrurus macrocercus, Vieill.

Irena puella, Horsf. The blue Shrike.

60 Catalogue of Ceylon Birds.

FAM: LANITD/E.

a LANIINE.

Lanius superciliosus, Linn.

Lanius erythronotus, Vigors.

Tephrodornis affinis, Blyth.

SUB-ORDER

Grey-backed Shrike

Butcher-bird.

IV. CONIROSTRES.

FAM: CORVID.

a GARRULINE.

Cissa puella, Blyth & Layard.

The mountain Jay.

b. CORVINE.

Corvus splendens, Vieill.

Corvus culminatus, Sykes.

The Indian hooded Crow

The common carrion Crow.

FAM: STURNIDZ.

a. GRACULINE.

Gracula religiosa, Linn.

Gracula ptilogenys, Blyth.

Pastor roseus, Linn.

Heterornis pagodarum, G'mel.?

Hetzrornis Malabarica, G'mel.?

Hetzerornis cristatella, Linn.

Acridotheres tristis, Zinn.

The Brahmin Maynah.

Dr. Templeton’s Maynah.

STURNINE.

The rose-coloured Starling.

The pagoda Starling.

The Malabar Starling.

The sub-crested Maynah.

Paradise Grakle, Maynah.

FAM: FRINGILLIDZ.

a. PLOCEINZ.

Ploceus Bengalensis, Linn.

Ploceus Philippensis, Zinn.

Ploceus Manyar, Horsf.

The Indian Weaverbird.

The Phillippine Weaverbird.

b. FRINGILLINZE.

Amadina undulata, Lath.

Amadina Malabarica, Zinn.

. Amadina Malacca, Linn.

Amadina rubronigra, Hodgs.

Amadina striatus? Zinn.

Amadina pectoralis? Jerdon.

Passer Indicus, Jard. & Selby.

The reddish Indian Finch.

The Malabar Finch.

The Malacca Finch.

The striated Finch.

The Newera-Ellia Finch.

The Indian Sparrow.

Cc. EMBERIZINZ.

Emberiza? Scop.

Bunting.

Catalogue of Ceylon Birds. 61

d. ALAUDINZE.

Alauda Malabarica, Scop. The Indian Lark.

Alauda gulgula? Scop. The crested Lark.

Pyrrhulauda grisea, Scop. The Indian Pyrrhulauda.

Mirafra affinis, Jerdon.

€. LOXINE.

Loxia, Sp. Crossbill.

FAM: BUCEROTID.

a. BUCEROTIN.

Buceros gingalensis, Shaw. The small Hornbill.

Buceros violaceus, Wagler. apud ;

Blyth. | ¢ The large Hornbill.

Buceros pica, Scop.? The black and white Hornbill.

ORDER SCANSORES.

FAM: PSITTACIDZ.

a. PSITTACINE.

Loriculus Asiaticus, Edwards. The small Ceylon Parakeet.

b. PEZOPORINE. 3

Paleornis Alexandri, Zinn. The Alexandrine Parakeet.

Palzornis torquatus, Briss. The rose collared Parakeet.

Paleornis cyanocephalus, Gel. The ashy-headed Parakeet.

Paleornis Calthrope, Layard. Layard’s purple-headed Parakeet.

FAM: PICIDZ.

a. CAPITONINE.

Megalaima Philippensis, Briss. The large red-headed Barbet.

Megalaima Zeylanica, apud Blyth. The large Barbet.

Megalaima flavifrons, Cuv. The yellow-headed Barbet.

Megalaima rubricapilla, Gime. The small red-headed Barbet.

b. PICINE[.

Picus gymnopthalmos, Blyth. Layard’s Wood-pecker.

Picus Macei, Vieill. — Small spotted Wood-pecker.

Picus Maharattensis, Lath.

: C. GECININE.

Gecinus chlorophanes, Blyth. The green red-headed Wood-pecker.

Brachypternus aurantius, Blyth. |The orange-coloured Wood-pecker.

Brachypternus Ceylonus, Forster. Ceylon Wood-pecker.

Brachypternus rubescens, Viel. |The reddish Wood-pecker.

62 Catalogue of Ceylon Birds.

d. COLAPTINZE.

Micropternus gularis, Blyth.

Ground Wood-pecker.

FAM: CUCULIDZ.

a. COCCYZINA.

Centropus Philippensis, Cuv.

The Philippine Ground Cuckoo.

Centropus chlororhynchos, Blyth. The yellow-billed Cuckow.

b. CUCULINZE.

Oxylophus melanoleucos, G'mel.

Oxylophus Coromandus, Linn.

Endynamys Orientalis, Linn.

Cuculus micropterus, Gould.

Cuculus tenuirostris, Blyth.

Cuculus Sonnerattii, Zath.

Cuculus varius, Vahl.

Cuculus canorus, Linn.

C. (surniculus) dicruoides, Hodgss.

The crested black Cuckow.

The collared crested Cuckow.

The Eastern black Cuckow.

The ashy mountain Cuckow.

The narrow-billed Cuckow.

Sonnerat’s Cuckow.

C. (chrysococcyx) xanthorhynchos Horsf.

C. CROTOPHAGINE.

Phenicophaus pyrrhocephalus, Forster. The Malkoha.

Zanclostomus viridirostris, Jerd.

The green-billed Malkoha.

OrDER COLUMBZ.

FAM: COLUMBIDZ.

a. TRERONINZ.

Treron bicincta, Blyth.

Treron Malabarica, Jerdon.

Treron chlorigaster, Blyth.

The Parrot Pigeon.

The common green Pigeon.

The large green Pigeon.

b. COLUMBINZ.

Alsocomus Puniceus, Tick.

Carpophaga sylvatica, Tickel.

Carpophaga (Palumbus ) Torringtonii, Kelaart. Lady Torrington’s Pigeon.

The Wood Pigeon.

C. ELPHINSTONEI, var, apud Blyth.

Columba intermedia, Strickland.

Turtur risorius, Selby.

Turtur suratensis, Gel.

Turtur humilis, Temm.

Turtur orientalis, Lath.

The Indian Rock Pigeon.

The collared Turtle Dove.

The speckled Turtle Dove.

The dwarf Turtle Dove.

C. GOURINE.

Chalcophaps Indica, Linn.

The Ground Pigeon.

Catalogue of Ceylon Birds. 63

OrpER GALLINZ.

FAM: PHASIANID&.

a. PAVONINZE.

Pavo cristatus, Linn. The Peacock.

b. GALLINE.

Gallus Lafeyettei, Lesson.

G. Stanleyi, Gray, female, apud Blyth.

FAM: TETRAONIDE.

\ The Ceylon Jungle Fowl.

a. PERDICINE. [of Ceylon.

Gallo-perdix bicalcaratus, Zinn, apud Blyth.'The double-spurred Partridge

Francolinus Ponticerrianus, Gmel. The Pondicherry Partridge.

Perdicula argoondah, Sykes. The Indian Quail.

Coturnix Coromandelica, G‘mel.

Coturnix Chinensis, Zinn.

Turnix ocellatus, Scops.

Turnix ocellatus, var Taigoor, Sykes.

OrvpER GRALLZA.

FAM: CHARADRIDZ.

a. DICNERINZ.

Esacus recurvirostris, Cuv. The curved-bill Bustard.

(Xidicnemus crepitans, Linn.

b. CURSORINZE.

Cursorius Coromandelicus, Gmel. The Coromandel Courser.

C. GLAREOLINE[.

Glareola Orientalis, Leach. The Indian Pratincole.

d. CHARADRINE.

Charadrius virginicus, Bech. The Marbled Plover.

Lobivanellus Goensis, Strickland. The Goa Sand Piper.

L. (sarciophorus) bilobus, G'mel.

Hiaticula Philippensis, Latham. Small Plover.

Hiaticula Leschenaultei, Lesson. Do.

Hiaticula Cantiana, Lath.

e. CINCLINA.

Cinclus interpres, Linn. The Turnstone.

FAM: ARDEIDZ.

a. ARDEINZ.

Ardea cinerea, Linn. The common Heron.

Ardea purpurea, Linn. The purple Heron,

64 Catalogue of Ceylon Birds.

Ardea asha, Sykes.

Ardea intermedia, Wagler.

Ardea garzetta, Linn.

Ardeola leucoptera, Bodd. The paddy-field Heron.

Ardeola bubulcus, Savig. The Caboga Heron.

Herodias alba, Linn. The great white Heron.

Ardetta cinnamomea, Gimel. The cinnamon Heron.

Ardetta flavicolis, Lath.

Ardetta thalassina? Swains.

Ardetta sinensis, G‘mel.

Platalea leucorodia, Linn. Lhe white Spoonbill.

Nycticorax griseus, Linn.

Tigrisoma melanolopha, Raffles.

Butorides Javanica, Horsf. -

b. CICONINZE.

Mycteria australis, Lath.

Leptoptilus Javanica, Lath. The Adjutant.

Ciconia leucocephala, Temm. The large Stork.

Dromas ardeola, Payk. The smaller Stork.

Anastomus oscitans. The Anastomus.

C. TANTALINE.

Tantalus leucocephalus, Forster. The white-headed Ibis.

Geronticus melanocephalus, Lath. The black-headed Ibis.

Ibis Falcinellus, Zinn. The glossy Ibis.

FAM: SCOLOPACID.

a. LIMOSINZ.

Numenius pheopus, Lath. The Whimbrel.

Numenius arquatus, Lath. The Curlew.

b. TOTANINZE.

Totanus fuscus, Linn.

Totanus ochropus, Linn. The green Shank.’

Totanus calidris, Linn.

Totanus hypoleucos, Linn. The common long Shank.

Totanus glottoides, Vigors. The Indian green Shank.

Actitis glareola, G'mel.

Limosa egocephala, Linn.

C. TRINGINZE.

Tringa minuta? Temm. The dwarf Sand-piper.

Tringa subarquata, G'mel.

Limicola platyrhyncha, Temm. The broad-billed Limicola.

d. RECURVIROSTRINZE.

Himantopus candidus, Bonn. The long-legged Avocet.

Recurvirostris avocetta, Linn.

Hematopus ostvalegus, Linn.

Catalogue of Ceylon Birds. 965

€. SCOLOPACINE.

Rhynchea Bengalensis, Gmel. The painted Snipe.

* Scolopax rusticola, Linn. The Wood-cock.

Gallinago stenura, Temm. Horsfield’s Indian Snipe.

* Gallinago scolopacinus, Bonaparte. The common Snipe.

* Gallinago gallinula, Linn. The Jack Snipe.

N.B.—We have only sportsmen’s authority for the species of Snipes marked with

an asterisk.

FAM: PALMEDEID2.

PARRINE.

Hydrophasianus Sinensis, Wagler. The Screamer, or Jacana.

FAM: RALLIDE.

a. RALLINZG.

Ortygomeira rubiginosa, Zemm. The red or brown Rail.

Corethrura Zeylanica, Brown. The Ceylon Rail.

Rallus striatus, Linn.

Rallus indicus, Blyth.

Porzana pygmza, Nan.

b. GALLINULINE.

Gallinula phenicura, Pennant. The red-tailed Gallinule.

Gallinula cristata, Lath. The crested Gallinule.

Gallinula chloropus, Linn.

Porphyrio poliocephalus, Lath.

OrpER ANSERES.

FAM: ANATIDZ.

a. PHCENICOPTERINE.

Phenicopterus ruber? Linn. The Flamingo.

b. PLECTROPTERINE:.

Sarkidiornis Regia, Myton. The Royal Duck.

C. ANSERINE.

Nettapus Coromandelianus, Gmel? The Coromandel Teal.

d. ANATINZS.

Mareca Penelope, Linn,? The Widgeon.

Anas peciloryncha, Lath. The spotted Duck.

Dendrocygna arcuta, Swains. The whistling Duck.

Dafila acuta? Bonap. The pin-tailed Duck.

Querquedula crecca, Steph. The common Teal.

Querquedula circia, Linn.

Fuligula rufina, Pallas.

Spatula clypeata, Linz.

VOL. Il. a Er

66 Catalogue of Ceylon Birds.

FAM: COLYMBID.

PODICEPINZE.

Podiceps minor, Latham. The little Grebe.

FAM: LARIDZ.

a. LARINZE.

Xema bruneicephalus, Jerdon. The Indian hooded Gull.

Larus icthydetus, Pallas.

; b. STERNINZE.

Sylochelidon Caspia, Pall. The Caspian Tern.

Sylochelidon seena, Sykes. The orange-billed Tern.

Hydrochelidon Indica, Steph.

Gelochelidon Anglica, Brown. The gull-billed Tern.

Onychoprion anasthetus, Scop.

Sterna melanogaster, Zemm. The black-bellied Tern.

Sterna Javanica, Horsf.

Sterna minuta, Linn.

Sterna ?

Thalasseus cristatus, Steph.

Thalasseus Bengalensis, Lesson.

Tachepetes aquila?

FAM: PELICANID.

a. PLOTINZE.

Plotus melanogaster, Gmel. The black-bellied Darter.

b. PELICANINAE,

Pelicanus Philippensis, Gmel. The Indian Pelivan.

Graculus Sinensis, Shaw.

Graculus pygmeus, Pallas.

Native Forms of Salutation. 67

Notes on some of the Forms of Salutation and Address known

among the Singhalese. By the Hon. Mr. JUSTICE STARKE.

THE Singhalese have a great variety of forms of expression

in address, to indicate the respect or otherwise, which they

wish to shew to the individual; as, in their language itself,

there are words and phrases appropriated to particular classes

of the people.

For a considerable proportion of those various forms of

expression, the fundamental terms of address are,

@o3 (to) and 29 (tama) (from the old root & ta, thou,*)

terms, however, which by themselves, without any honorific

as it is called, or affix of respect, are considered properly

given to inferiors only; and the term 23 (to) is now so

associated with such inferiority, that if addressed to others it

expresses the greatest contempt. Chater says that “in books

it conveys no idea of disrespect,” Gram. p. 39; and in the

Sidath Sangarawa it is given with the examples of verbs in

the second person: but so early as Ruell’s time, the term was

not used except to slaves and low caste people.

299 (tama) is thou! or you! but S23 (to) is you fellow!

sirrah! you creature! or something lower and meaner, for

which we have not in English a proper equivalent. Its force

on the native mind probably depends on their tenaciousness

of birth and condition, as connected with their peculiar notions

of merit and demerit in a previous state of existence: sin or

demerit, according to Budha, determining the course of a

person’s existence, as a bullock draws along the carriage to

which it is yoked.

We have something of an illustration of this in the anecdote

of the countryman and the king in disguise, when they met

together in the jungle, how the countryman resented the

king’s refusal to take food with him, thinking the king

supposed he was a low caste man 3f and the same sentiment

See the Sidath Sangarawa by Mr. Alwis, p. 22, and his observations at pages

xiii, xlvii., 100, 154.

+ See the Attanagaiu wanse, Sidath Sangarawa, p. clxxxv.

68 forms of Salutation and Address

is expressed in a more shocking form, when a native in his

asseverations wishes he may be a low caste man or a demon

in the next birth, if he is not to be believed.

_ Where a higher feeling is to be conveyed, some honorific

or other is used, which honorifics are variously formed, and

unite with each other and with the noun or pronoun in

Various Ways.

HANS (tamusé) pers. pron. You, may be addressed to an

equal—it is a term of civility, Chater, p. 40, and is even re-

garded as “ rather respectful,” Bridgnell’s Dictionary. It is

used, according to Mr. Alwis, (Sidath Sangarawa, p. 158,)

“by husbands towards their wives and vice versa ; and also

by some low caste people to the inferior classes of the Vel-

lales; by Upasampada priests towards their pupils or Sama-

naras; and even by servants of a higher grade towards the

young members of their master’s fanailies.”

OP etna (tamunnehe) is addressed to an equal or to a

superior, but it is “the least of all the acknowledgments of

superiority.” Lambrick, Gram. p. 25, note.

9) hast a0) (tamunnansé), pers. pron. You, is higher ;

it is addressed to one perfectly equal and for whom we would

| express some respect. Bridgnell, after Clough, says it is

* very respectful.” Mr. Alwis says, “ it is used towards each

other by persons of an equal station m life amongst the

highest class of the Singhalese, and amongst the priesthood.”

It may be like our “ Learned Sir.”

oeQsometac? (iamun wahanse) is still higher; it is ad-

dressed to a superior, and is expressive of tue highest respect.

It may be like our “ Worthy Sir.”

Similar to this last is QH@w slae? (oba wahanse) which

was the term used in the Lord’s prayer; as O@2* watad=c

HeIsadsAo oba wahansege rajyaya éwa, (Thy Kingdom come.)

But now the term employed is 3 Owes ae} (nubawahanse ),

a supposed derivative of the former.

And here it may be observed, that generally, in all com-

inunications from an inferior, as in communications to one

known among the Singhalese. 69

through a third person, leave to speak qgOud Ere Das

(awasara labenawa ) to receive permission, must be expressed,

Chater, p. 134. And so, in like manner, in approaching and

withdrawing, there must be leave to come and leave to go.

Dasioe (wahanse) is added as an afhx to the term for

God, and to all the names of God; as also in some relative

expressions, as to Mather in the Lord’s prayer, -9oG309 133

Swoies apage piyanan wahanse. ;

But under the word deSasidOmnsiond ( Dewiyan wahansé )

Clough points out the difference in its use. Innumerable

mstances, he says, occur of the honorific being used in the

vocative, In which case it may be addressed not only to one

of these beings (the gods of Swarga), but also to a king, or

any person of rank; but when used in the nominative, it

marks at once the difierence between a heathen god and the

Supreme being.

Whatever may be in this, it is certain that the continual

recurrence of the honorifics in the Singhalese translation of

Holy Scripture, soon offends us; and in some cases, as Je-

hovah wahanse, the affix almost shocks, coming upon the ear

like some discordance in an otherwise heavenly melody.

It were to be wished, therefore, that Christianity could be

here attired in a garb more accordant with the simplicity and

sincerity of its spirit.

The flatterers of king Dutugemini called him a god.—

eS8dS83 ESA adISBasinns €Om.8R SYmOaOad

Tkbeeti pin kiriya wat kiyanno Dutugemini rajahatamese

Ada —oedastiionsiea ese wa@ddoeiad5Gai

kivya — Dewiyanwahansa adadakwa, nubawahanse wisin

eamea Sud Boas adQasm Yad IanrddExt

ekak adu owihara siyayak karawuseka ekarawu wiharawalin

85 eerusSmI609

Mirisawetiwiharayata, &c.

Tupawanse, ap. Sidath Sangarawa, p. clxxv.

Then those whose duty if was to declare the meritorious acts

(of Budhism) done by King Dutugemini, sard, Dewiyan

70 Forms of Salutation and Address

wahansa,* many temples to Budha have been erected by thee, and

the cost of them exceeds computation, &c.

And the name of another king is placed in the centre of

grandiloquence—

§ Os 8 dos Bon Bom SoOMITROmMes Soslad

Sree mat sree raja singha maha rajotta mayanan wahanse

His prosperous highness the prosperous king Singha, worthy,

great, right regal!

We find also in the extract from an old inscription, ap.

Sidath Sangarawa, p. cxcix., the affix wahanse is given

to a deceased lady, the queen-mother as she is called.—

DS wlQ 09 DaQai Imsiado

Swarga stawu mawu-bisawun wahanseta

and Clough gives DeQersratad (bisawunnanse), as one of

the renderings for Queen. The same affix is given to His

Excellency the Governor, who is styled 66 Oarmsidme)}

Oe (uttamaydnan wahanse) or EDOWMmDos Ded (utumdnan

wahanse), which latter is the title given by the translators on

one occasion to the governor of Judea. The terms are

derived from words signifying chief, excellent, or high ; and

Clough supposes thatthe term ©msi@eas (mahatmaya ) which

is now in its customary use equivalent only to our Mr., had

the same common origin, being composed of the words ®a

(maha) great and eae® (uttama) excellence: so that the

same term is in fact applied to the two extremes of the social

scale; they are both excellent in their place.

As a formal title of office, Mahatmeya denotes a principal

Headman; and a Ratte mahatmeya, from ratte 69 (rata)

country, in the sense of a large district of country, is the

principal headman of the district. The only higher territo-

rial officer was the Dissave, whose dissayony, from @es (disa)

or ®e92) (disaawa) a part or portion, was in the nature of a

* The same term &¢ Sasllnse (Dewiyan wahansa) is employed by

Mr. Alwis in his Singhalese version of the Hitopadesa as the corresponding phrase

for Please your Majesty! Sidath’ Sangarawa, p. 206.

+ Matth, xxvii. 2. He is afterwards called PU 9Sic30 (adhipatiya).

known among the Singhalese. veal

province or Satrapy; and the two or three principal Satraps

or Dissaves were Adigars, a term which signifies placed over.

They were the king’s highest officers, like the prefects of

Darius, Dan. vi. 1, 2; and the first Adigar was, as it were,

his Prime Minister.

In the books we find frequent mention made of the King’s

council, and of his counsellors—the €v53 m9 (metituma), the

ea O80 (agra metiya), and the Gedeag0. Geo (dewanu

metiya), all, no doubt, from the same common origin with the

Greek METIS, wisdom or ability in council. But what this

high council was, and who was the arch-counsellor or the

second counsellor, does not clearly appear.*

Nor, except in the low country, is there now any officer in

waiting as we say, or Modliar of the Gate, viz. of the Go€o9

(Maligawe) or royal palace, where the king’s court or au-

dience chamber commonly was. But Mudianse and wasale or

wihale Mudianse(the Singhalese synonyme), isnot unfrequent

as an agnomen, among the Kandyan Basnaike Nillemes and

Rattemahatmeyas.t Such may constitute what Mr. Armour

(Kandy Law) calls “ the Mudeli peroowa or titled class.”

For I find nothing in the nature of our nobility among the

Singhalese, either of the higher or lower ranks: only when a

person got office under the Government and more especially

Bq Herd (situ tanatara) an eminent place, from meng

(tanatura) “ office, service, appointment, employment,”

(Clough), his descendants commonly assumed the title as an

agnomen or pattabendigey name, the patta tahadoo or office

frontlets becoming likewise heir looms in the family, and

* The royal poet Rajadhi Raja Singha speaks of the priest Moratotte in this

way—

BOS DS DOAN oS Danda}

pawarana meti Moratotte yati manawan

but perhaps this only means, Moratotte, no less excellent as a friend, than dis-

tinguished as a priest.

+ Among the former there is at present Errawwawele Senanayeke

Bowaneke bahoo Narayene Raje goroo wahale Mudianse, Basnaike Nilleme of

Lanka tilleke and Gadala denia dewales,

(2 Forms of Salutation and Address

according to Mr. Armour, in his hoy Law, descending sie

the parveny lands.

Mr. Alwis however, says,“ Situ, equivalent to an English

Baronet, was a rank which was conferred by the Sovereign

on account of the great wealth ofa person. It may be consi-

dered as a grade of the peerage of our forefathers. A person

who had this rank conferred on him had access to the royal

household, and was altogether one (as we gather from books)

who controlled the councils of the State.” Sidath Sangarawa,

by Mr. Alwis, p. clvin. But there is some misconception

here,as to the grounds on which the comparison is made ;

and it is not unlikely that office and wealth, the latter the

foundation of the former, were the great elements of consi-

deration among the Singhalese. To this day they are tena-

cious to a degree of their parveny or hereditary land.

The Government Agent is sometimes styled Dissave. But

there can be no analogy among officers in systems of govern-

ment so very different as respects the distribution of official

power and duty as the English and Singhalese ; and it only

tends to perpetuate misapprehension to use the names in-

discriminately.

The above, namely, the Adigars, Dissaves, and Ratte-

mahatmeyas, were the principal officers under the Singhalese

government; and in the Convention of 1815, entered into

after the conquest of Kandy by the English, for the cessation

of hostilities and the settlement of the country by a formal

declaration of the power and principles of the new Govern-

ment, they are mentioned or alluded toas the principal chiefs

of the Kandyan provinces, and the Mohottales, Coralles,

Vidahns, and others, the subordinate headmen from the

provinces.

Budha is wahansé of course; and the stories of his births

or previous states of existence, Jdtaka pot wahansé, the worthy

books Jataka, a composition so highly regarded by Bud-

hists, that, says Clough, “they will offer to it and worship

it.” The term is also applied to the Budhist priesthood in

known among the Singhalese. 72

an associated or collective capacity, as in the Introduction to

the above book, where it is said, Budha preached the sutra

Damsak to many; and among others, and especially, to the

five worthy sorts of priests—

3d Om Enegad Suatac

pas waga mahanun wahansé

The Maha tera of whom we sometimes read, is also called

wahanse ; and Upali maha situ an important person, but whe-

ther the same with the Upaliby whom the Winiya pitaka was

arranged, does not clearly appear.

The same affix is given to Seriyut maha himiya, the great

proprietor, so called apparently from his being a great and

distinguished author of his time. And to Swaminy Nagase-

naye, in his colloquy with the king,* wherein he shewed the

king, with great adroitness and felicity, the rapidity of a

defunct’s passage throughout the universe to another birth,

by comparing it to the quickness of thought in the mind, |

the celerity with which our thoughts pass from one object to

another.

In these personages, and Upali maha situ, we may see

the respect and honours anciently in use to be given to

literature and philosophy; using these high terms of course,

in the very limited and peculiar sense in which they must

here be taken.

We have a further illustration of the extent of literary

fame in the wonderful Rahula of Tottegamuwe, another dis-

tinguished literary character to whom the affix is given.—

§ amoais § Sea dy sSadenSs§ Eda

Sree sanghabodhi sree wijaya bahu pariwenadhipati tripitaka

G08 eAdx»s# FB GAue wO8S sreass Ounedad

wagee swarachayarya sree Rahula stawira padayan wahanse

He seems, like another Rahu, to have eclipsed all others ;

and his birthplace passed into a proverb, but a proverb

* Milindapprasne, ap. Sidath’ Sangara, p. ccxxvil.

‘VOL. II. ; L

74 Forms of Salutation and Address

highly characteristic of a Budhist people, with whom litera-

ture is good, but Budhism is better :—

OMOMOHDVSD Esensnd ODmMe Ar AvEmat

Tottegamuwe upannata mokada bana _berinan.

What signifies being born at Tottegamuwe if you don’t know bana?

We find the affix also with modgovumd3 (hamudurewo ),

a compound term, and applied as a domestic appellation to

the head of a house or family, in a combined sense of master

and instructor.

And in a deed written by Karangodde unnanse of Potgul

wihare in Saffragam, a. D. 1835, that priest describes himself

thus : :

QMmsace Snr07S9d moon +0 CSB EsOnaioed

Potgul wiharayiwas Karangodde sanga rakkhita unwahanse.

The description here given signifies preserved or defended

by the priesthood ; and the Rev. Mr. Gogerly, who gives me

this explanation, adds, that priests when ordained take

names of that kind.

In regard to Unnansé, that word is employed not only as

an affix of respect, but also substantively or as a pronoun of

the third person. In this way, it is given to every Budhist

priest ; and the ©26 (tera) or old priest of a wihare, who has

attained his degree, isa Terunnanse.

The word is not used, however, to any other than such

priest :—it is not given to the kapuwa or god’s priest, nor to

the yakadura or devil’s priest, nor to the balikariya or planet

priest. For the poor Singhalese are by their fears, fostered

by their very creed, beset on every side with malignant in-

fluences, which like the red untwinkling eyes of their witches

never rest in their baneful operation. And it is observable,

that even Budha, when he found a demon prowling about

for an opportunity to catch hold of an infant child in order to

eat it, (so says the Jataka) did not attempt to do more than

chide her, and repeat to her the commandments as a help to

her. His reproof was in these words :—

known among the Singhalese. 75

wd exus&ic audsions gas O00 aHisis3i d

Nuwana neettiya peratto akusal kota yakinni wa

Sxwinm&B Seat On sndosd gawd aosian &

upanne hi weedan wanahee newatat akusal karanne - hee

Se eagq0sr oransidis Acs

weeda anuwana tenettiya kiya

O woman of unreflecting mind! It is because of demerit in a

former life you were born a yakinni, and do you still go on mertt-

less! Unwise person that you are! Then repeating to her the

commandments as a help to her, he let her away, and she

vanished in the air.

A generic name for a Budhist priest is said by Bridgnell

to he mHansosiaed (ganinnanse), probably from some root

signifying learning or wisdom, whence we have Ganesa the

Hindoo god of wisdom, ganayaa poetical measure, and ganita-

ya the science of arithmetic. But Clough derives the word

differently, and thinks it is an inferior term applicable to the

lowest order of priests.

The same affix is given to the @év (guru) or preceptor,

who is accordingly termed a gurunnanse.f

The secretary of the District Court subscribes himself

secretary swamiha, which is a derivative from swamy or

swamaya, a lord or master. This appears singularly inap-

propriate : his proper appellation as clerk of court is certainly

unnanse.

Among the different members of a family or household, there

are several words and phrases in common use, and applied in

what is called a familiar way ; but they appear generally to

be of a common character, and not words of affection or

endearment.

+ For “ a religious teacher who is nota Budhist,” the term is SH AO x89

(teertthakaya) which imports in Budhist estimation, and also it seems etymologi-

cally, an unbeliever. See Sidath Sangarawa by Mr. Alwis, p. 38. Qy. whether

this term is connected with the appellation given to the prophet under the name

Tirshatha? See Ezra ii. 63; Neh. vii. 65, viii. 9.

76 Forms of Salutation and Address

And what we call an infant in arms, they more loosely call

e@ees (ata-lamaya), a child in the hand. So, what we call

the family, or inmates of the house, they appear to call ew

Qed ear (anto-jana), the people inside.

As respects an inferior servant, a cooly, aslave, or a person

of low caste, he is Mae@ (bola), dross and rubbish—one whose

demerit has sunk him low.

For the weaker sex in general, and @ov (bheere) or the

timid one, seems a favourite epithet, the Singhalese havemany

names expressive of desirable female qualities. But these

are mostly of a sensible kind; and when a word of affection

is used, it seems to have more of passion than an English

phrase in the like case. Their sorrows seem to partake of

the same character. For when they are bereaved of a beloved

object, or suffer any ill, they but say, @t3a0 (iniya) Hech

me !4t is my misfortune—the consequence of some demerit

of mine in a former life! unless it be the death of a person,

for then it will probably be imputed to his own sin! *

In the Kandyan Districts, or among the Singhalese strictly

so calledt there are terms by which they designate their

children as to size. Whata big heavy boy! Thisis nea

(lohu); What a little tiny thing! This is OAS (tikiriya).

Similar to this, and no less descriptive, is the appellation

given to the attending servant ofa Budhist priest, ydolancso

(aebittaya), a bit boy! which indeed, in point of fact, he

commonly is. The term may be connected with the ebétér and

éebetikos of the Greek, youthful, a stripling.

And here it may be observed, that the distinguishing terms

characteristic of the priest and the layman are qa (gra-

* See the poetess Gajamonn’s elegy on the death of her father, ap. Sidath

Sangarawa, p. CCXvi.

_ + The Kandyan or hill country is distinguished from the lower or maritime

districts by the name Singhalese; and the town of Kandy is Maha nuwera, the

Megalo-polis, or great city, the metropolis. These names are easily accounted for,

but they are accorded as given.

known among the Singhalese. 17

hasta) and © & (prawrajita),* householder and wanderer,—

the one living ina #~@ (graha) house and family, the other

dwelling ina eowe (pansale) a leaf-hut or bower.

The Wihare need not however, I presume, be of this tem-

porary description; and the image room is even termed 5899

ew (pratima graha) in the Cotta inscription ap. Sidath San-

garawa, Pp. CXCIX.

The priesthood, or ministers as they appear more properly

to be, are a distinct order, of different degrees: namely, the

€9OH 236 f (srdmanera), the devotee or pupil priest, somewhat

possibly, like the sons of the prophets: and the eua®ue,

(upasampada), one graduated or advanced: the senior or old

man of the wihare being the e&8o (stawira) or @nd (tera)

terunnanse.

There was also the speescso (tapasayd), from ae (tapa)

mortification or religious austerity; but as respects “ persons

of the Stlwat class,” as Mr. Armour has it, or voluntary as-

cetics of their own act, they are not priests but laymen.

The dwellings of the priests are, as we have seen, regulated

and characteristic of them. So is their dress, the 296 (si-

woora), a term connected perhaps with the sistirna or sistira of

‘the Greeks, and the method of their obtaining it ;—the manner

in which they are to get their livelihood or subsistence, even

to their alms cup or begging bowl;—their meal time ;—and

the season when they may discontinue travelling, and remain

within doors.

It is from the manner of life thus prescribed, the priest is

termed iz (bhikshu), one living on alms, an almsman ; and

_ the assemblage of priests Om Qaiese HSa (maha bik-sangha

himiya). They do not constitute a fraternity, nor are the

priests friars, as has been represented. ‘They are not so ore

* See Armour’s Kandy Law.

+ This word, like that from which it is derived, and many others in the

language, occurs in different forms; and a good Dictionary of Synonymes is a great

desideratum in Singhalese literature.

78 Forms of Salutation and Address

ganized: they belong to an earlier time, and a less political

system.

Connected with the period when the priests discontinue

travelling, and are to remain within doors, is the festival time ;

and particularly the {great Gedo (perahara), or previous

procession, from the new to the full moon of July, the sight

seeing month, after which Wassdna, or the rainy season, of

four months, begins.* These processions occur in history

so early as Ia Hian’s time.

As respects colour, the great colour was %@ (nila) the

colour of the sky and ocean, and like these, indeed, susceptible

of many shades from green to dark blue; but commonly de-

noting this last, the colour of Vishnu’s garment. It is to

this colour allusion is so often made in the descriptive writ-

ings of the Singhalese poets; as when they sing the praises

of feet, soft and beautiful “ as the full blown lotus”—

OaOe gS e306 acao se OO

komala supipi sara sadisa pada &c.

So also, when they speak of “ lotus hair ;” and the Go

296 (nilangkara), or blue ornament of dark eyes.

In like manner, perhaps, we may read concerning Budha,

that he “ opened his lotus mouth” and spoke—

Qo Ea®d owas

muwa piyuma pobaya

his mouth, lotus-like, he opened, his lips opening like the

opening lotus! But by the phrase “lotus mouth” gene-

rally, 99 n@o (muwa tambara), as an expression of beauty,

may be intended the red lotus, and lips red with the betel

leaf, which is so commonly used and so coveted by the natives

of all classes, that it might well give occasion to the name, as

a designation of the island m2€@ ef 4 (Tambra parnni),

red leaf, whence the classic appellation for Ceylon, Taprobane.

* Note The Warsana or rainy season of the civil or agricultural year is different.

It isa portion of Wassana, and consists of but two months, the time of the early

rains, previous to the sowing for the Maha harvest, so called, there being at the

other equinox Que sean (medindina), another, the SG (yala) or farther

harvest.

known among the Singhalese. 79

Nila was thus perhaps what may be called the royal or

government colour,-and words of that formation may be so

derived. There was a “3@@® (nilame) or Nilleme at the

head of several of the departments. It was the title usually

given to any high official, and it is still the title of the ereat

Oificer of government in the Temples.

The term in question may, I conceive, be so rendered ac-

cordingly. Thus, when the valiant Gaja bahu rajah, whose

city (unlike the banquet house of a great king, as his minis-

ters ignorantly represented) had been entered by an enemy,

and many captives taken, at length resolved on an expedition

for their recovery, he went out from the council with Re

@cssecs9 (neela yodayd), the great officer of war. These

words, however, have been rendered Weela the giant, and “the

ereat giant Neela”—* as if “3@ were a proper name, and

not like Ree (nilaya) and Ene (nilatala), an office, place,

or situation.

Among other terms of high import, & (srze) ee pros-

perous, was a distinguished one, and supposed eminently due

to Lakshmi, wife of Vishnu, the goddess of the affections and

happiness; commonly known here by the name of Sree

or Sriya K4ntiwa (Clough, voce Lakshmi) or, as we sometimes

find it, Sir Kata, the lucky lass! The virtuous queen

Lelavaty, who is feigned by the poet as possessed of the

situminat or wishing-gem, a fabulous symbol of grace and

beauty known in the East from the earliest times, “ whi-

thersoever it turneth, it prospereth,” Prov. xvi. 8—is repre-

sented as the very impress and realization of this goddess,

winning at once the hearts and minds of all.

seat 85 em SeE8s3 QO OE) O— eQ5sIns)

pasak siri kata wilasin mulu lo mana nuwangat ,

She is also called Wijeya sree (Clough, sub voce) from the

conqueror of that name, the leader of the great Budhist

See the: Friend for Sept. 1839, and the Sidath Sangarawa by Mr. Alwis, p. lxvii.

+ Otherwise written as. I GI SIADNB03 Cchinta manikyaya.).

80 Forms of Salutation and Address

settlement which had the effect of driving into the jungle, the

snake and demon tribes inhabiting the island, and proved the

foundation of a new and powerful dynasty, the Singhalese,

so called from the singha or lion-like character of the con-

queror, or his mythological origin. :

The same term became also the designation of the lan-

guage: what the name was previously does not appear, any

more than the national name of the subdued tribes. They

were the Yakhos of Lanka, and their language was the

language of the Yakhos. In point of fact, however, it cer-

tainly forms a constituent part of the Singhalese ;‘and, judging

from analogy, the continued existence of such is probably due

to some aboriginal element in the population, which it would

be interesting statistically to investigate.

Sri was the affix of royalty, and € (Sree) the signature or

sion manual to royal grants and sannases. See Armour’s

Kandy Law. Ceylon was Bcoen Sees (Sri Lanka Dwipa),

and Adam’s Peak 8 so¢= ( Sri padaya) the prosperous footstep,

the prosperous Lanka ; and sometimes also the epithet was be-

stowed both on temples and individuals, the prosperity

intended in all these and the lke cases being Budhist pros-

perity, that is to say, the result of what they call merit; as

in Budha’s epithet @5e.<— (Strigane), jilled with prosperity !

which is the salutation in the Rajawaliya, ms@asncs

(nama sri ghandya), and the Scelalihini Sandese, s1¢ GS es

(nama sree ghanaya), or as it is expressed in the Guttile

Jataka, in that extatic way in which Budha appears always

to be spoken of,

Ba Sa} SSat adv

Siya pin sirin sarae

prosperous in prosperity from his own merit !

merit and prosperity standing with the Budhist, in the rela-

tion of cause and effect.

There are several modes of reverence or obeisance among

the Singhalese, the shoes also off:—placing the right hand on

known among the Singhalese. 81

the breast, and bowing; joining the hands, raising them

thus to the forehead and bowing; falling on the knees, and

so doing ; and prostration on the face upon the ground.

In this last, the great prostration, when made to Budha,

the whole body must in a manner touch the ground. This ex-

treme measure of subjection may have been effected by the

priesthood. But perhaps it was not difficult to accomplish.

among a predisposed people; other circumstances besides their

books, all tending to an adoration of Budha, and his three

helps to Budhic merit :—his relics, his doctrines, and his priests.

fiock Inscriptions. By A. O. Bropin, Esa.

I have the pleasure to transmit copies of two Rock In-

scriptions from this District.

The first of these is at Koodawewe of Palligame in Paria-

wille Pattoo. It is engraved on a rock about fourteen miles

south-east of Putlam, and a few hundred yards north of the

Kurnegalle road at Tohneegalle.

KAC SAL ABEL AAS KS REAR BLO

mp ds PUL IPA War yad PLA YI

+d GppEL+ itd bby yo GPU

KRELAENEU YAKALM dk BREA F

Koodawewe is about a mile to the west of Parmakande

(whence I procured various inscriptions which, on a former

occasion, [had the honour to bring tothe notice of the Society),

and five orsix milestothe south of Ahtheekoolum, where there

VOL. II M

82 Fiock Inscriptions.

are remains of various Wihares, the stones composing which

are of great size, and in many instances neatly worked. The

inscription is cut on a shelving face of rock, sixteen or twenty

feet above the water level of the tank. It forms one large

curving line, about thirty-five pacesin extent. The letters

are from eight to twelve inches in height, boldly cut, forming

triangular grooves (and net outlined by isolated dots, as is

sometimes the case). Owing to the roughness of the granite,

the letters are somewhat irregular in size and position: but

there is only one blank, and in that instance, I am inclined

to think that the spot never was occupied by letters.

On the whole, this is much the most perfect inscription in

this character which I have yet met with. Regarding its

origin, the natives appear to have no tradition whatever.

The second inscription I have not had an opportunity of

visiting in person. The intelligent Modliar of the Northern

District of Chilaw discovered it when travelling through the

jungle on duty, and obligingly forwarded a copy of it to me

immediately. It is engraved on the Moolegame Kande at

Moolegame in Kirimittia Pattoo of Demele Pattoo, two miles

west of Kongkaddewille, and I should suppose about two

and twenty miles west of Putlam.

OIG ARAL SHAH LAOH

J SU UL

Most of the characters in this inscription, will be found in

the other ; and of the remainder, the majority, if not all, will

be found in those of which, on previous occasions, I have had

the pleasure of transmitting copies.

The Veddahs of Bintenne. 83

On the Veddahs of Bintenne. By the Rv. J. GILLINGs.

Tue District of Bintenne is divided into four Palarthies,

resembling the Pattoos among the Tamuls. These are pre-

sided over by a Headman or Vannian in the employ of the

Government. They include several smaller divisions and

villages, in some of which a subordinate Headman or Udeyar

is stationed. The four principal districts or divisions are the

following. Rugampalartthy, Ratthuvapalartthy, Pallappa-

lartthy and Udappalartthy.

Rugampalartthy contains the villages of Carinjuvapetty,

Urugarmum, Kithul, Kottarncathy, Tambili, Yarvutthu and

Larvarney.

Ratthuvapalartthy includes, Unarpparny, Pallagamma,

Kitthulappar, Padavaly, Alaruly, Ummeny and Ikkargalla.

Pallappalartthy includes Magamuney, Mahally, Cudarvely

and Kaluthalarevvey. |

Udappalartthy contains Allagodde, Thikkuvally, Karlaviny

Larvagoddy, Marangaly, Thivukkumbury, Marrarken, Co-

marne, Mevisuvettey, Koolikky, Pathitthalarky, Keruivarne,

Kaluly and Velekumburey.

These are inhabited by a mixed population of Singhalese

and Veddahs. The proportion of each will be about equal.

According to the census taken in October 1849 the amount

of each district is as follows.

Males. Females. Total.

Rugampalartthy : Sl Ok 152 313

Udappalartthy : » Poe 326 655

Ratthuvapalartthy . : 243 211 454

Pallappalartthy . é : 55 61 116

making a total of seven hundred and eighty males, and seven

hundred and fifty females; or in all, including men, women,

and children, fifteen hundred and thirty eight. This shews

a very small population considering the extent of the country;

but it exceeds, as I am informed, the census taken in 1841.

84 The Veddahs of Bintenne.

The population has increased gradually of late years, but it

is not easy to say what relation it bears to former times, as no

records appear to have been kept, and very little interest to

have been taken about the people by the Dutch or the Kan-

‘dyan Government. Our attention at present will be directed

almost exclusively to the Veddah population of this region,

forming, as is supposed, about one half of the number here

given. Several intermarriages having taken place between the

two peoples, it is not easy to make an accurate estimate of

each.— Various are the conjectures entertained as to the origin

of the Veddahs. That which obtains most credit is the fol-

lowing: that the Veddahs originally formed a part of a Sin-

ghalese community resident on the coast of India, and were

from thence transported to this Island at a very early date

for certain offences, before the Singhalese as a people came

to these shores. It is certainly probable that they were

among the first, if not the first, inhabitants of the Island.

Their language is a corrupt dialect of the Singhalese;

being mixed up toa large extent with Singhalese people, they

understand the common language and can speak it, but among

themselves they generally prefer their own inferior dialect.

As they have little to do with the Tamuls, the majority of them,

unlike the coast Veddahs, are quite unacquainted with the

Tamul language. Their present habits, as contrasted with

their former, in many instances present the aspect of civiliza-

tion and improvement. Formerly they lived entirely in holes

in the rocks, and wandered about the jungle, living on nothing

but yams, honey, and flesh, procured in hunting. They were

very wild in their character and shunned human society as

much as possible. They clothed themselves with the bark of

trees and leaves, and had no fixed habitation. Since the

English Government, about six or seven years ago, took an

interest in these unhappy outcasts, and calling them together

built them houses, planted trees for them, and supplied them

with food, they were brought to abandon, to some extent,

The Veddahs of Bintenne. 85

their old habits, and to take an interest in agricultural pur-

suits. They began to cultivate chenas, sow natchery, plant

Indian corn, and attend a little to their cocoanut and plantain

trees, some of which are now in bearing. A very few, how-

ever, attend to paddy cultivation. All of them now have small

huts, built of sticks and straw, besides their rock houses, which

belong to different families, and are divided into several com-

partments. To these latter they have still recourse, when

out in the jungle during the inclement season.

Whilst ona visit to them in October last (1849) Isaw two or

three families living on large rocks: here they cooked, ate,

and slept, while others of their companions were away in the

jungle, seeking roots for food or attending to agricultural

operations: they will frequently exchange the few commo-

dities they possess or grow, for cloths or ornaments of va-

rious kinds. ‘The women are exceedingly fond of a profusion

of beads, necklaces, earrings and ornaments for the hair; and

they load their children with rings round their waists, arms,

and fingers, bellson the toes, and necklaces in abundance. Their

food consists of natcherry, rice, pumpkins, brinjall, and other

vegetables of native growth, as well as the flesh of the mon-

key, guana, and wild hog; they chew the bark of trees as a

substitute for the betel and arecanuts, of which they are very

fond when they can obtain them. A bow and arrow were

‘their only weapons in former times. Now some of them pos-

‘sess Quns. )

Murder was formerly exceedingly common among them,

now it is less so; they were accustomed to cut their victims

to pieces with axes, or to shoot them with bows, and if found

out in thecrime, they were required by their headman to

make compensation to the surviving relatives by the pay-.

ment of about five and twenty shillings, or something equi-

valent, this being the price of a slave. The uncle of the

party aggrieved usually enquired into the matter in dispute,

and the elders settled the case. An uncle had power to sell

86 The Veddahs of Bintenne.

his nephew ; the price of a female slave was double that of a

male. Adultery and polygamy are still common among

them. Ifa man does not like a woman whom he has married,

he will, after a year, take her back to her father’s house and

give her into his charge. Theft and lying too are still preva-

lent. At the latter they are particularly expert, and seem

to evince nothing like shame when discovered. I met with

several instances of this amongst them. In the time of their

headmen, those who committed theft were beaten or kept to

hard work in the headmen’s houses. In particular cases, they

were carried before the Kandyan kings. Their headmen

were called Thissarvu. They received no salary from the

Government, but practised extortion on the people. The

only headman of themselves unconnected with the Govern-

ment, is called Rollah. He has no power over them and can

only give them advice. The Udeyar receives from Govern-

ment five dollars per month, and the Vidahn is paid for petty

cases.

Of agriculture they know but little, some of them cultivate

a chena for a year, and after reaping a crop, wander to some

other place. Where they plant trees they will generally

stay longer: they turn up the ground with mammotties, but

know nothing of ploughing and manuring, and attend little

to either fencing or watering ; consequently, they frequently

lose all the fruit of their trees, and labour from the attacks of

wild beasts that infest the jungle around them. Some of

them keep a few buffaloes. For paddy they pay tithe to

Government, but not for Indian corn or natcherry. They

trade principally with Moormen with whom they barter their

honey, fowls, &c., for rice, cloths or ornament. They pur-

chase bows from Vellase, and exchange various commodities

among themselves. Many of them are beginning, however,

to learn the value of money. }

They are fond of shooting and hunting, and will go out to

the jungle for weeks and even months together; when out

The Veddahs of Bintenne. 87

they procure honey from the rocks by attaching themselves to

long sticks fastened to bushes and trees on the sides of the

mountain, and then, crawling down to the sheltered place in

the rock where the honey is deposited, and having smoked

out the bees and taken the honey, they pull themselves up

again in the same way, and then descend the mountain with

the spoil, which they divide equally among their companions.

Many of them seem to prefer these pursuits to the steady

and monotonous occupations of husbandry. Their love ofa

wandering life is not extinguished, and they court indepen-

dence and freedom from labour. If introduced to the bustle

of towns and the restraints of society, they break away as

soon as possible to their beloved solitudes and their old com-

panions, preferring a life of hardship in the jungle to pam-

pered indulgence out of it. I tried hard to induce an orphan

lad, of apparently bright parts, to forsake his forest home and

come with me to the Mission station, that he might be boarded,

fed and educated, so as to be fit for some useful employment,

but he was deaf to my entreaties. ‘“ When I am hungry, ”

said he, “I chew the bark of trees and pluck roots; when I

am cold, I light a fire and warm myself; I want no books, nor

learning, nor money; only give mean axe and I am content.”

Their medicines are made from the bark of trees, roots,

and leaves. Some are said to be very efficient in curing diseases,

and especiaily hurts from wounds and snake bites. For fever

they take pills prepared by Singhalese doctors. Like most

natives, they use charms, and tie strings round their waists,

which they believe will remove the disease under which they

labour. Of late the Government has done little for them;

and as they have taken few precautions to provide for their

own necessities, it is not easy to say how long they will

continue in fixed habitations, should their crops fail. Doubt-

less the aid formerly afforded them was designed not to su-

persede, but to stimulate their own exertions; but the philo-

sophy of this they are scarcely at present able to understand.

88 The Veddahs of Bintenne.

Theyassist the Singhalese among whom they live in various

matters by working for them, and thus a few of them learn

to cultivate chenas and to take care of their crops in houses.

Of education they are totally destitute. Formerly schools

were established and supported among them, but the labour

and money spent thereon were in vain. The people had no

taste for learning, and wanted their children to accompany

them to the jungle in quest of food. They have no written

lancuage and can only count to a very limited extent. Their

habits at present are certainly too migratory to present any

encouragement to systematic efforts for their instruction.

Their religion is devil-worship. They will acknowledge

that there is one God, whom they believe to be greater than

the devil, but him they neither fear nor worship. One of

them said to me, “ When God gives us food, we are glad, and

wish him to sit on our mat; when he does not, we curse him

and will not allow him todo so.” They appear to know little

or nothing of a future life, of heaven or hell, where the soul

goes to when it leaves the body, or whether it will be happy

orwretched. A number of them were formerly baptized *on

a profession of faith in Christ and willingness to abandon

their superstitions ; but almost all of these have gone back

again to their former habits and follies. What they formerly

heard they haveforgotten. They declareitimpossible forthem

tolive withoutdevil-worship. “ Whenthey didso, their children

were sick, their cattle died, their trees would not bear fruit,

and their crops were cut off.” It was vain to expostulate and

argue. They believe the souls of their departed relations to

be devils who have power to hurt them, and therefore they

perform ceremonies to them at regular seasons, and espe-

cially when they are sick. The Singhalese who live among

them exert a bad influence over them in these respects. It is

very difficult indeed to get fit persons, who know their lan-

* Up to 1844 there had been baptized in Bintenne 163 men, 48 women,

and 85 children; since that time very few have received this rite.

The Veddahs of Bintenne. 89

guage, tolabour among them. Without these, desultory efforts

will be of little service. The Veddahs are mostly low in

stature, but some of them are strong, active men, and most of

them appear to be healthy and little subject to disease. They

differ considerably from the coast Veddahs in their habits and

dispositions. The latter appear to me far more tractable and

hopeful. They have improved much by the instructions they

have received, and are tolerably well acquainted with the

leading truths of Christianity.

The country of Bintenne is extremely rocky. The roads

through it are in a very bad state; in many places full of

stumps of trees and very irregular and uneven. ‘The country

suffers much from drought; in the summer months only a

few springs are found here and there, and the people have in

some places to go several miles for water. Hbony, Sattin, and

Halmaniel wood abounds in the forests; and Bamboo and

Tamarind trees are plentiful. In many places the land is

exceedingly fertile,and the surrounding prospect is full of

grandeur and beauty.

Note by the Secretary—Some rather exaggerated notions have

been recently entertained concerning this race of people, and it has

been stated before the Ethnological Society of London, that they

subsist upon decayed wood, for which there is in reality no foundation.

It has also been stated, that they do not bury their dead; this is

also an error, as I am assured by a Gentleman who has studied their

habits closely, that they inter them wrapped in mats. The Veddahs

do not appear to use Tobacco, though Knox, in his account of Ceylon,

has a portrait of one of them smoking his pipe. The Veddahs, both of

Bintenne and of the Sea-coast, consider themselves a very high caste,

calling themselves Veddah Vellales. Some Vellale families in Batticaloa

’ are said to have sent out to invite the young Veddah women to come

and cook for them, as the Vellales may not eat food cooked by persons

of inferior caste,

DLPFLW LL DPI FOI DIDNT OI IOI YF ON

VOL. II, N a

90 Analysis of the Moorish

Rock Inscription at Piramanenkandel. Communicated by 8. C.

Currty, Esq.

CL ICD

fEleQZo

esl SC a nae 5

Ce sy aes

2 flo: tude) Loh

- itn Ta ad

— AS 7S). geen

The above inscription was taken from a stone slab at the

head of the grave of a Mohammedan Saint at Piramanen-

kandel, a deserted village to the east of the Mee Oya, about

10 miles from Putlam in a North-Easterly direction. The

characters are in an ancient and obsolete form of Pali, and Mr.

Chitty inclines to believe the Inscription has no reference to

the Mohammedan Saint, but records some event connected

with the history of Budhism.*

/ NDP NIRS TIS SOS OT RAR SR ININ IDS RIO

An Analysis of the great Historical Poem of the Moors,

entitled SEERAH. By SIMON Casie CuitTry, Esq.

I have the honour to present to the Society a copy of the

great Historical Poem of the Moors, entitled Seerah, which

{ have procured from Madras, where an edition has lately

been published at the Vidhyavilasa Press by Sheik Abdul

Khader Nina Lebbe Alim of Kailpatnam and two other

individuals.

*Vide Letter, in Appendix to Journal No. V., p. xx.

Historical Poem ‘ Seerah. 91

Among the numerous compositions which the Moors in

Ceylon and the South of India possess in the Tamil language,

none perhaps holds a much higher rank in their estimation

than the Seerah, and it is not undeserving the distinction. Its

subject is the history of Mohammed, and its author is alleged

to have been the celebrated Moorish Poet Omar, who lived

at the Court of the Raja of Etteapuram in the early part of

last century, and wrote it under the patronageof Abu Kassim,

a wealthy merchant of Porto Novo. In style it is a clever

attempt at imitation of the Naishadam and other popular epic

poemsof the Tamils; but unfortunately it is interlarded with so

many Arabic words, that it is scarcely intelligible to a Tamil

scholar without the assistance of a Mohammedan expounder.

In the Ceylon Gazetieer mention was made by me of this poem,

in treating of the literature of the Moors; but the limits which

I had prescribed to myself in that work did not permit me to

enter into any details; and these have, I believe, remained

hitherto unknown to all but the Moors: I have therefore

thought it desirable to draw up the present analysis for in-

sertion in the Journal of the Society.

_ The Seerah comprises three books, of which the first is

called Biladat Kanda; the second Nubuvat Kanda; and the

third Hijarat Kanda.

I.—The Biladat Kanda is divided into the following twenty-

four chapters.

The first chapter, consisting of twenty stanzas, opens with

an invocation ofthe Deity, eulogizes Mohammed and the other

prophets and saints, and concludes with an apology for at-

tempting to write the poem itself.

The second chapter, consisting of fifty-six stanzas, gives a

fanciful description of Arabia, especially of the rains which

descend upon its mountains, and the streams which flow from

them, diffusing fertility and riches through the land.

The third chapter, consisting of twenty-two stanzas, con-

tains an encomium on Mecca, which is said to occupy as

important a position in the universe as the pupil does in the

eye, and to surpass every other city both in riches and omRe

nificence.

92 Analysis of the Moorish

The fourth chapter, consisting of sixty-seven stanzas, treats

of the creation of Adam and Eve; their expulsion from Para-

dise, and their subsequent settlement at Jiddah in Arabia.

It also traces the line of the patriarchs from Adamto Abraham,

andthence through Ishmael to Abdulla, the father of Moham-

med: these being the personages on whom the noor, or ray

of divine intelligence descended successively, at last resting

on Mohammed, and forming a glory around his head.

The fifth chapter, consisting of one hundred and twenty-

five stanzas, narrates the particulars of the conception of

Mohammed in the womb of Amina, wife of Abdulla; the an-

nouncement of that event to herin a dream by Adam, Edris,

Noah, Abraham, Ishmael, Moses, David, Solomon and Jesus;

A}bdulla’s journey to Medina, on traffic,and his death at Abwa;

and the birth of Mohammed, which is said to have been marked

by the cessation of the oracles in Arabia, the overthrow of

the idols in the Kaba, and the extinction of the fire of the

Magi in Persia.

The sixth chapter, consisting of one hundred stanzas, relates

to Mohammed being suckled by Alima, wife of Harid of Hone,

who had one of her breasts withered, but as soon as the prophet

began to suck, it was made whole and yielded milk.

The seventh chapter, consisting of ninety-one stanzas, refers

to the story of the angel Gabriel impressing the seal of pro-

phecy upon the back of Mohammed, between his shoulders, as

he went out along with Alima’s sons to tend her sheep.

The eighth chapter, consisting of fifty-seven stanzas, treats

of Mohammed’s going to Medina with his mother, on a visit to

her kinsfolk; her death and burial at Abwa,and his return to

Mecca, where he lived under the protection of his grandfather

Abdulmuttalib, and afterwards under that of his uncle Abu

Talib.

The ninthchapter, consisting of fifty-eight stanzas, contains

an account of Mohammed’s journey to Syria with Abu Talib

when only nine yearsofage,and his conference with Boheira, a

Christian monk at Bosra, who having discovered on his per-

son the marks by which the last of the prophets, foretold in

EMistorical Poem * Seerah.’ 93

the scriptures, was to be distinguished, protected him from

the plots laid against him by the Christians and Jews in the

place, and sent him back to Mecca in safety.

The tenth chapter, consisting of eighty-three stanzas, relates

to Mohammed’s obtaining money and goods on loan from Kha-

dija (a lady of great opulence in Mecca), and proceeding to

Syria, in his twenty-fifth year, on a commercial speculation.

The eleventhchapter, consisting of twenty stanzas, treats of

amiracle wrought by Mohammed, by causing aspring of water

to gush forth in the desert.

The twelfth chapter, consisting of twenty-three stanzas, gives

an account of a prodigious serpent which lay on the route to

Syria, and went to devour travellers, and which Mohammed

slew by merely throwing a straw at itasit hissed and sprang

up to swallow him.

The thirteenth chapter, consisting of thirty-one stanzas, de-

scribes how Mohammed and his caravan, by the interposition

of the angel Gabriel, passed overa river which had overflown

its banks and threatened to arrest their progress.

The fourteenth chapter, consisting of fourteen stanzas, re-

lates to a tiger speaking to Mohammed, allowing him to stroke

its head, and retiring from the road which it had heretofore

infested to the great dread of the travellers.

The fifteenth chapter, consisting of eighteen stanzas, treats

ofaserpent, which had long lain on the road to Syria waiting

to meet Mohammed; and having at last met him did him homage,

and retired into the deep recess of the forest at his desire.

The sixteenth chapter, consisting of fifty-five stanzas, is oc-

cupied with the particularsofan interview between Mohammed

and Kzura, a Christian monk, whom Jesus had assured that he

should not die before he had seen the prophet of the last times,

and had given hima sign, namely, that when he (Mohammed )

should arrive at the grove of palm trees in which the monk

dwelt, one of the dead palms should instantly blossom and

bear fruit, which occurred.

_ The seventeenth chapter, consisting of sixteen stanzas, states

that when Mohammed and his caravan were attacked bya party

94 Analysis of the Moorish

of robbers, a river miraculously sprang up between him and

them, and enabled him to escape from their hands.

The eighteenth chapter, consisting of forty-four stanzas,

describes the magnificence of the capital of Syria, and gives

an account of Mohammed’s entry into it; his reception by the

chief of the Christians there, and his mercantile transactions.

The nineteenth chapter, consisting of sixty-six stanzas,

treatsofa plot formed by certain Christians and Jews in Syria

against Mohammed, by inviting him to their quarters and

rolling over a millstone upon his head from a height, but from

which he miraculously escaped; the hand of the person who

rolled the millstone having become attached to it.

The twentieth chapter, consisting of thirty stanzas, relates

toanoutcry raisedagainst Mohammed bya blacksmithin Syria;

his escape from an attempt made by the infidels to assassinate

him, and retreat into the house of Uzza, a Christian priest,

who recognised him as the prophet foretold in the scriptures,

and recommended him as such to the notice of his relation

Khadija.

The twenty-first chapter, consisting of thirty-seven stanzas,

is occupied with the dreams which Khadija had; wherein

she dreamed, amongst other things, that the moon having de-

scended from the heavens settled upon her bosom.

The twenty-second chapter, consisting of sixty-three

stanzas, treats of the espousal of Mohammed and Kadija.

The twenty-third chapter, consisting of one hundred and

nineteen stanzas, narrates the celebration of his nuptials with

Khadija, which was attended with great pompand magnificence.

Thetwenty-fourth chapter, consisting of twenty-five stanzas,

notices the birth of Fatima, and afterwards enters into the origin

and history of the Kaba and the black stone called Hajar al —

Aswad.

II1.—The Nubuvat Kanda is divided into the Siar:

twenty-one chapters.

The first chapter, consisting of fifty-five stanzas, treats of

Mohammed’s retirement from home and going to the mount

Hara, inthe fortiethyear of hisage; his interview with the angel

Gabriel, who having opened his chest and wrung out the gall

Fiistorical Poem ‘ Seerah.’ 95

and filled it with wisdom and faith, revealed to him a passage

of the Koran, and told him that he was appointed the prophet

of God; his communication of this news to his wife Khadija

and to her cousin Worakket, a Christian priest, who thereupon

declared him to be the prophet whose advent was predicted

in the scriptures.

The second chapter, consisting of forty-four stanzas, notices

the conversion of Khadija and Abu Bekr, and enters into the

particulars of the new creed, and the directions which Moham-

med received from the angel Gabriel concerning the form of

prayer.

The third chapter, consisting of one hundred and sixty-three

stanzas, gives an account of Mohammed’s preaching his

doctrine publicly in Mecca; the violent opposition of the

Koreish against him, and Abu Talib’s ineffectual attempt to

persuade him to abandon his enterprise.

The fourth chapter, consisting of ninety-five stanzas, relates

to the conversion of Omar Ibn Khattab, which was occasioned

by an angel, disguised as an ox, wrestling with him and

prevailing against him as he was going to trace out Mohammed

in his retreat and put him to death.

The fifth chapter, consisting of forty stanzas, relates to an

Arab of the desert, who being invited by Mohammed to embrace

his religion, told him that he would do it if the latter would

make a guana testify that he was the apostle of God, which

it did accordingly.

The sixth chapter, consisting of twenty-one stanzas, refers

to Utba, who was sent by the Koreish to expostulate with

Mohammed and offer him the sceptre, if he would retract his pre-

tensions and conform to the ancient institutions of the country.

The seventh chapter, consisting of ninety-two stanzas, gives

an account of the arrival of Habib, king of Thimes, to

Mecca, uponarepresentationof Abujahil and the other Koreish

chieftains against Mohammed.

The eighth chapter, consisting of one hundred and eighty-

eight stanzas, treats of the miracle performed by Mohammed

before the king of Thimes, by causing the moon to appear

on the horizon in her full orb at the time of occultation.

96 Analysis of the Moorish

The ninth chapter, consisting of thirty-five stanzas, relates

to another miracle of Mohammed, namely, his converting a

foetus into a beautiful damsel, and Habib and his attendants

embracing his faith after it.

The tenth chapter, consisting of forty-one stanzas, notices

_the return of Habib to his country, and his sending a present to

Mohammed of some camels, which, on being produced before

_ him, speak to him, addressing him as the messenger of God.

The eleventh chapter, consisting of thirty-seven stanzas,

relates to the retirement of Othman ibn Affan, his wife

Rakiah, and several other members of Mohammed’s family,

into Abyssinia, to avoid the persecution of Abujahil; and the

ineffectual attempt of the latter to prevail on Najashi, the

king of that country, to deliver them up to his envoys.

The twelfth chapter, consisting of seventy-two stanzas,

relates to the confession of the faith by a deer which

Mohammed had released from the snares of a hunter.

The thirteenth chapter, consisting of seventeen stanzas,

relates to Mohammed having caused a date tree to blossom

and bring forth fruits in an instant, in order to convince an

Arab of the truth of his mission.

The fourteenth chapter, consisting of thirty-nine stanzas,

relates to the solemn league made by the Koreish against the

Hashemites and the family of Abdul Mutalib, engaging them-

selves to have no communication whatever with them. Italso —

notices the defeat of the Persians by the Romans (Room),

which is said to have occurred in the eighth year of

Mohammed’s mission, and verified a prophecy he had made.

The fifteenth chapter, consisting of twelve stanzas, relates to

the conversion of an Arab named Husein, in consequence of

the idol in the Kaba having saluted Mohammed as the prophet

of God in his hearing, as he had demanded by way of proof.

The sixteenth chapter, consisting of sixteen stanzas, notices

the death of Abu Talib and Khadija; the former is said to have

allowed Mohammed to whisper the creed in his ear as he was

drawing his last breath.

The seventeenth chapter, consisting of thirty-five stanzas,

treatsof Mohammed’s retreat to Tayifafter the death of his uncle

PROCEEDINGS OF MEETINGS

OF THE

Pero N ASITATIC. SOCIETY.

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING,

HELD 7TH FEBRUARY 1852.

Present: —Rev. Dr. MacVicar in the Chair. __

The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Starke, Hon’ble Mr. Selby,

Mr. J. De Alwis, Mr. Dawson, Mr. Dalziel, Mr. L. De

Soyza, Mr. R. E. Lewis, Rev. Mr. Kats, Rev. Dr. Kessen,

Mr. E. L. Layard, Mr. J . O'Halloran, Capt. Jas. Steuart,

Rey. D. J. Gogerly, Mr. C. P. Layard.

The Minutes of the last Meeting having been read and

confirmed, the Secretary proceeded to read the following

Reports of the respective Committees. |

Report of the Committee of Management.

In presenting to the Society an account of their labours

since the last General Meeting, your Committee are una-

voidably reminded of the loss which the Society has sustained

in their late Secretary Mr. John Capper. The diticulty

in finding a gentleman with sufficient leisure, with inclination

for literary and scientific pursuits, has been much felt in

carrying on the business of the Society, since the late Secre-

tary’s departure, and the Committee take this opportunity

of recording their high sense of his usefulness, and their re-

egret in losing him.

VOL. II. a

il. Appendix :— Proceedings of

Your Committee have also felt the absence at distant out-

stations, of some of those Members of the Society, who by_

their individual exertions materially assisted the Society in its

progress.

Since the last Anniversary Meeting four new Members

have joined the Society, and three others have to be proposed

at the present Meeting.

Several interesting papers have been contributed to the

Society’s Transactions, and some of these, it isa pleasure to

observe, are the productions of Native gentlemen, and treat

of the Antiquities of the country, or its Ancient Literature.

Two gentlemen, well qualified for the undertaking, have con-

tributed papers on the Natural History and Geological Struc-

ture of Ceylon, and others, with great success, have devoted

themselves to Statistical information, bearing upon the social

condition of particular Districts of the Island.

The Committee deem it one of the most important features

of the Society, thus to bring out native talent. Your Com-

mittee are persuaded, not only from recent experience, but

from observing the literary contributions made to the Society

from its commencement, that much talent among the Native

community requires, in order to bring it out, only opportunity

and encouragement, such as the Society is eminently calcu-

lated to afford, and they would earnestly solicit the united

exertions of the Members for its maintenance and success.

During the past year the Secretary has been in correspon-

dence with Government, with a view to obtain the use of its

room without interruption from the Loan Board; an incon-

venience which has long interfered with the Society’s useful-

ness, the intercourse of its Members with each other, and the

fulladvantage ofits Library and Museum; but your Com-

mittee have still to express their regret in not accomplishing

the object they have long had so much at heart. :

Conformably with a motion at a General Meeting, His

Excellency the Governor was requested to become Patron

General Meeting, Feb. 7th, 1852. lil.

of the Society, and His Excellency has expressed his pleasure

in accepting the office.

The contributions to the Society’s Library and Museum,

since the last Meeting, the Committee regret to say, have

not been so large as they would have had pleasure in announc-

ing, though all the corresponding Societies in India and

England have forwarded copies of their Transactions. The

Meeting is aware that the attention of Members was directed

to the collection of objects to represent the productions and

industry of the country atthe Great Exhibition of 1851. To

promote this undertaking a Sub-Committee was appointed,

whose Report will now be presented to the Society.

The Society has been duly supplied with the Meteorologi-

cal Registers kept at Trincomalie and Batticaloa, to the end

of 1850, and very full tables are taken at the Master Attend-

ant’s Office, Colombo. Owing to circumstances mentioned

before, the supply of instruments to out-stations, by which

it had been intended to complete the series of observations

in the Island, has not received the attention the Committee

could wish.

The Transactions of the Society have been published since

your Committee presented their last Report. They have now

reached their fifth number, which contains no less than fifteen

papers, and on a great variety, of subjects entered upon by

the Society.

The Treasurer’s accounts, which will be found on the table,

shew a balance in favour of the Society of £38 10s. 9d.; but as

your Committee have not had a sufficient opportunity of

looking into them, they defer the farther consideration of

them till next Quarterly Meeting; and in the mean time,

adverting to the great amount of arrears standing, your

Committee recommend that instructions be given to the

Committee to use their best exertions to prevent the accu-

mulation of such in future.

Your Committee recommend that the Meteorological and

IV. Appendix :—Proceedings of

other scientific instruments belonging to the Society should.

be collected together or otherwise distinctly ascertained by

the Committee, and delivered over in charge to some office-

bearer of the Society (as the Committee may determine), who

shall make immediate report to the Committee of their pre-

sent condition, and from time to time thereafter, a report of

the results derivable from them, and the best means of ren-

dering them available to the Society.

tn conclusion, your Committee trust that the individual

efforts of Members will be exerted to extend the usefulness

of the Society, and though there is of course much yet to be

done, and the Society cannot but suffer by the absence of

some of its energetic Members, your Committee believe that

success in the pursuit of the objects of the Society may be

confidently anticipated.

Report of the Sub-Committee for the Great Exhibition at London.

The Sub-Committee appointed to carry out the Resolutions of the

Society with regard to the collection and transmission to England of

objects suitable for display at the Great Exhibition of the Works of

Industry of all nations, lately held in London, have the honour to report

that on the receipt of definite information for their guidance from the

Royal Commissioners, the Sub-Committee took steps to invite the co-

operation of all the residents of Ceylon, by means of public advertise-

ments, and by circular letters addressed, under the sanction of the local

Government, to several gentlemen in their service residing at out-stations,

with a view of furthering the objects of the Society. The authorities

most liberally placed at the command of the Sub-Committee a sum of

money to meet all necessary expenses, disbursement of which will be seen

in the subjoined accounts, and otherwise encouraged and assisted them

in their undertaking. The Committee feel, however, that some gentle-

men at out-stations from whom they had calculated on receiving consi-

derable assistance, have failed to second their efforts, whilst others appear

to have mistaken the objects of the Commissioners, and have regarded

the Exhibition, rather as a Museum of curiosities and antiquities, than

as a grand attempt to develope the productions of science and of art.

The Sub-Committee have always deeply regretted, that the period

available to them was, in consequence of the length of time required for

communication with the Commissioners, far too short to admit of their

General Meeting, Feb. 7th, 1852. Vv.

doing justice to the work in hand, as they were thus prevented from

procuring, specimens of carving in wood and ivory, and other industrial

objects, the special produce of the colony, which they had hoped would

have been among their contributions to that magnificent display of indus-

try and skill, which so justly formed the admiration of the world.

The Sub-Committee is obliged to confess, that with some few excep-

tions, the collection from Ceylon was by no means such as they had

anticipated ; but to all who are aware of the degree of jealousy with which

the Asiatic mind regards whatever isin advance of the present hour,

it will not appear strange that the suggestions put forth by the Commit-

tee were looked on by many, even of the influential and educated Natives,

with apathy and distrust. This fact was the more deplored by the

Committee, as it was their especial hope to have exhibited the result of

native ingenuity as a prominent feature.

With the view of obtaining articles of superior workmanship and design,

the Sub-Committee offered prizes for specimens of cabinet work, jewellery,

&c., but the result did not answer their expectations, as the designs

shewed no originality, nor were they objects of superior quality or skill.

The Committee have much pleasure in acknowledging several contri-

butions of raw and wrought materials, some of which were of fair

average quality, and if they could be obtained at a remunerating price,

promised to be of commercial value; they had also the benefit of for-

warding models of agricultural buildings and implements as well as

articles of furniture, which were intended for private distribution, on

the closing of the Exhibition.

Although the Committee are persuaded, that the collection, as a whole,

did not fairly represent the capabilities of Ceylon, and must have been

completely overshadowed by the brilliant productions of the Continent of

India and the refinements of manufacture from various parts of Europe,

it is still a source of satisfaction to observe, that the Royal Commissioners

have awarded Prize Medals for a very fine collection of Cinnamon in all

its stages of growth and manufacture, forwarded by Messrs. Parlett O’Hal-

loran and Co., Colombo; for a collection of the produce of the Cocoa-

nut tree, transmitted by thesame firm; and for an interesting collection

of medical and commercial Plants,Gums and Oils, the contribution of

Mr. Pieris of the Medical establishment at Kandy, to whom the best

thanks of the Society are due for the trouble and expense attending the

procuring and preparing thereof. _

Immediately before packing the various contributions for shipment to

London, the Sub-Committee deemed it right to exhibit them to the Public,

and were under obligation to the local Officer of the Board of Ordnance,

Vie Appendix :—Proceedings of

for convenient space in the Fort of Colombo, where they were displayed —

for several days, after which the Sub-Committee felt it necessary to

examine them seriatim, and keep back those which were either imperfect,

or in the opinion of the Committee were considered not to be within the

intentions of the Royal Commissioners, which are accordingly retained

in the possession of the Society.

The specimens of Cinnamon and Cocoanut Oil, for which prize medals

_ have been awarded, were received by the Committee at too late a period

to admit of their being displayed in Colombo, but were duly forwarded

with the other contributions.

The valuable services of J. Capper, Esq., as Secretary of the Society,

are too generally appreciated to admit of remark from the Sub-Comit-

tee ; they have, however, the pleasure of reporting that on his return to his

native country, Mr. Capper was appointed by the Royal Commissioners

to act as Honorary Agent for Ceylon, in arranging the articles for

Exhibition in the Crystal Palace, in which capacity he rendered essen-

tial service to the Exhibitors, and deserves an special record of the

Society’s obligations.

On behalf of the Sub-Committee.

F. W. WIL.Isrorp, M.D.

Colombo, January 20th, 1852. Hony. Secy.

The Hon’ble H. C. Selby moved, that the Reports now

read be receivedand adopted, and the motion being seconded by

the Hon’ble Mr. Justice Starke, was carried unanimously.

The following Gentlemen were then proposed as Members

of the Society and unanimously elected.

Lieut. Col. Wilson, r.a. . J Proposed by J. O'Halloran, Esq.

Seconded by E. L. Layard, Esq.

Proposed by Lieut. Margesson.

Seconded by J. erat a4

Capt. J. Sim, R.z. r af Seconded by E. L. Doe a

Proposed by R. Dawson, Esq.

Seconded by R. E. Lewis, Esq.

M. Coomorasamy, me t Proposed by Rev. Dr. Mac Vicar.

Captain W.S. F. Neill, p.a.

Durand Kershaw, Esq., c.c.s.

Seconded by J. De Alwis, E'sq.

Proposed by R. E. Lewis, Esq.

J. Lamprey, Esq., mv. Seconded by the Hon, Mr. Starke.

General Meeting, Feb. 7th, 1852. Vil.

The Meeting then proceeded to the election of Office bear- ,

ers for the ensuing year.

The following Members were then proposed and duly elected

as Office bearers of the Society for 1852.

Patron.

His Excellency the Governor.

President.

The Hon’ble C. J. MacCarthy, Esq.

Vice-President.

The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Starke.

Treasurer,

R. Dawson, Esq.

Secretary.

Capt. W. S. F. Neill, rp. a.

COMMITTEE,

The Hon’ble H. C. Selby, Esq. J. B. Misso, Esq.

Lieut. Colonel Wilson, R. A. J. De Alwis, Esq.

Rev. Dr. Mac Vicar. J. O'Halloran, Esq.

Rey. D. J. Gogerly. R. E. Lewis, Esq.

Rev. Dr. Kessen.

Mr. Dawson laid before the Meeting a specimen of a

mineral, supposed to be gold, which had been assayed by the

Madras Mint, and found to be composed of other than the

precious metals. Also several specimens of Rock from Alipie,

viz. Graphite Granite, and highly crystalized Dolomite, and

a large series of the various woods from the Malabar Coast ;

these were the contributions of Mr. Hugh Crawford. Mr.

LL. De Soyza presented the facsimile of an inscription in a cave

Temple at Koratotte in the Hewegam Korle, also some coins

and signet balls or lumps of clay, on which an inscription in

an unknown character is impressed.

These donations were accompanied with the following letter.

vill. Appendix :—Proceedings of

To the Honorary Secretary, Ceylon Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society.

S1r,—I have the honour to present to the Society eight pieces of clay

on which some ancient characters are impressed. They are found in

great abundance in a cave in Sina Corle in the neighbourhood of the

ruins of an ancient Budhist Temple. ‘Two similar lumps of clay were

presented to the Society in June 1850, by the Interpreter Mohandiram

of Matelle, who supposed them to be earthen coins (?), and a few more by

Mr. Power from Badulla.

The character stamped on them appears to be an old type of the

Nagari alphabet, although it is difficult to make out anything of the

inscriptions, but it is not improbable that something of their puport

might be ascertained by poring over them with attention and perseverance.

I also take the liberty to send you six ancient Singhalese coins dug

near a Budhist Temple at Cotta. These coins appear to be identical

with those presented to the Society by Mr. Casie Chitty, of which he

published an account in the first No. of the Society’s Journal. He sup-

posed, on hypothetical evidence, that these coins belonged to some of the

ancient Tamil sovereigns of Ceylon, who from time to time usurped the

Government of this Island; butit would appear that he is mistaken in

this position. For I have really discovered that the coins in question

had been deciphered so far back as 1837, by the celebrated Mr. Jas.

Prinsep, assisted by the late Mr. Tournour of our own island. <A most

interesting account of this discovery is contained in Vol. VI. of the

Bengal Asiatic Society’s Journal, pp. 298-99. :

Through the help of Mr. Prinsep’s plates I have easily identified all

the coins of this description in my possession, which belong to the follow-

ing sovereigns of Ceylon.

1.—Sri Wijaya Baha.* (There are seven kings of this name in the

list, the first of them reigned at Pollonnaruwa A. D. 1071—1126, and

the last at Jayawardanatowa (Cotta) A. D. 1527—1534.)

2.—Sri Parakrama Baha. (There were nine kings of this name, the

first of them reigned at Pollonnaruwa A. D. 1153—1186, the last at

Cotta A. D. 1505—1527.)

3.—Sri Raja Lilawatte ( Queen). A. D. 1202—1205.

4.—Srimat Sahassa Malla. A. D. 1205—1207.

5.—Sri Dharmasokadewa. A. D.1213—1214.

6.—Sri Bhunareka Baha. (There were seven kings of this name, the

first reigned at Zapahoo in the Seven Corles, A. D. 1303—1314, and the

last at Cotta, A. D. 1534—1542.)

I have not met with any other specimens of these coins; Mr. Prinsep

mentions two more, namely those of the king Kerte Nessanga A. D. 1192,

* Vide Turnour’s Epitome of the History of Ceylon.

General Meeting, Feb. 7th, 1852. 1X.

whose exploits are related in the Dambool inscription deciphered by Mr.

Armour, and published with introductory remarks by Mr. Turnour in

the Ceylon Almanac of 1834 ; and of Queen Kaiyanawati, A. D. 1207—

1216. aes

I have also the pleasure to send you a facsimile of an inscription on

muslin in the ancient characters deciphered by Mr. Prinsep, engraved on

a cave temple at Koratotte in the Hewagam Corle. I have had no time

to make an attempt at deciphering the inscription, but have at once read

the words Sugata Anagata in the opening sentence, and [hope to be able

to communicate something more of its contents to the Society on a future

occasion.

Whilst on the subject of inscriptions, I may mention that I have suc-

ceeded. in reading the Mihintalle inscription sent by Mr. Brodie. It turns

out to be the same as the inscription from the same place published by

Mr. Turnour in the Ceylon Almanac of 1834. It is not in the ancient

character of Mr. Prinsep’s Alphabet, but in a very old type of the Singha-

lese character.

I remain,

Dear Sir,

Your obedient servant,

Colombo, 7th February, 1852. L. D. Zoysa.

The Hon’ble Mr. Selby presented some copies of modifica~

tions of the Sanscrit by Captain Chapman; also the impression

of aseal supposed to belong to the highest order of priesthood.

Letters were also laid on the table announcing His Excel-

lency’s willingness to become Patron of the Society; also a

correspondence with the Colonial Secretary concerning the

Room now occupied by the Society in common with the Loan

Board.

The books laid upon the Table consisted of.—

21 Nos. of the Journal of the Indian Archipelago.

16 Nos. of Journals of Bengal Asiatic Society.

_ No. of the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of London.

Nos. of the Journal of the Statistical Society.

Quarterly Journals of the Geological Society, Calcutta Review.

No. Bombay Asiatic Society’s Journal.

2 Nos. Bombay Geographical Society's Journal.

The only paper contributed, was Mr. Pieris’s continuation

of his paper on the Materia Medica of Ceylon.

VOL, i. ; B

~~ wo f

X. Appendix :— Proceedings of

Before dispersing, much discussion ensued as to providing

a suitable room for the Society’s Meetings, and for their Col-

lections, when it was resolved to empower the Committee to

-take such steps to remedy the inconvenience as may seem

best to them to obtain, if possible, a suitable room or building.

The Meeting adjourned.

W.cde Ee Narn,

Hony. Secy.

GENERAL MEETING, HELD. 15TH MAY 1852.

Present :—The Hon’ble H. C. Stay, Esq., in the Chair.

The Rt. Rev. J. Chapman, D.D., Lord Bishop of Colombo,

the Hon’ble Sir Anthony Oliphant, C.B., Lieut.-Colonel

Wilson, R.A., Major Lushington, C.B., the Rev. D. J.

Gogerly, John Dalziel, Esq., E. L. Layard, Esq., J. De

Alwis, Esq., J. O'Halloran, Esq., J. Lamprey, Esq., M. B.,

L. De Zoysa, Esq., J. L. Flanderka, Esq., Dr. J. B. Masso,

R. E. Lewis, Esq., F. Straube, Esq., R. Dawson, Esq.,

M. Coomarasamy, Esq., Captain Neill, Secretary.

The Secretary informed the Meeting that he had had a

communication from the Hon’ble C. J. MacCarthy, who was

unable to attend on account of business, which disabled him

also from appearing on previous occasions ; this he much re-

eretted, as he took a sincere interest in the welfare of the

Society.

The Minutes of the last Meeting were then read and con-

firmed, and the Secretary forthwith proceeded to read the

following Report of the Committee.

Report.

Your Committee, in submitting to the Society their Report

upon the quarter which has elapsed since the assumption of

their duties, have to regret that even in that short interval,

General Meeting, May 15th, 1852. Xl.

some of the most important objects to which their attention

has been assiduously directed, have not yet been brought to

a successful termination.

This has partly been the result of circumstances, such as

the absence of influential Members entailing for a time the

suspension of the Society’s proceedings; and it is partly due

to the difficulty your Committee have experienced in the re-

construction of a system for a long time held in abeyance, and

in the recommencement of correspondence for a long time

interrupted. Your Committee are happy, however, to be able

to speak in favourable terms of the present position and pros-

pects of the Society.

Your Committee prefer to call the attention of the Society

first of all to the statement of the Treasurer, marked A., and

attached to this Report. From this it appears that there is a

clear balance in favour of the Society of £13 18s. 2d.; nor

is this to be considered the whole revenue for the year, for of

the 62 Members which compose the Society, not more than 11

have as yet been called upon, through an unavoidable delay,

to pay their annual subscription for 1852. It may therefore

reasonably be presumed, that the balance in favour of the

Society will not be less than £100.

But, while your Committee cannot view such prosperous

circumstances but with the most sanguine satisfaction, they

still believe that the best interests, if not the very existence

of the Society, depend upon the prompt but judicious appli-

cation of its finances to the furtherance of those principles and

undertakings which suggested its institution.

Your Committee are of opinion, that the expenditure of the

Society should be divided into three classes. In the first, your

Committee would include that necessary for the publication

of the Society’s Journal. To the out-station Members, who

form a great proportion of our numbers, and by whose support

and ability the Society has hitherto so largely benefited, the

publication and distribution of our Journals is the only com-

Xu. Appendix :—Proceedings of

pensation we can render for their subscriptions as well as for

their unwearied and disinterested co-operation. By our Jour-

nals also, we maintain, better than by other means, our con-

nection with the Parent and all other kindred Societies. Nor

is the country whose peculiarities it is our duty to describe

and investigate, at all deficient in interest; indeed there is,

on the contrary, scarcely a region of the earth where sucha

rich harvest is ripe and ready for the most various-enquiry, or

from which such a Society as our own could draw so large a

crop of useful facts. Besides having been the great head

quarters of Budhism, and long the seat of anactive and splen-

did monarchy, Ceylon is the theatre were nature has displayed

as many and as curious attractions as any portion of the

Globe. But though compact and full of interest, the Island

has been but indifferently examined ; the world knows almost

as little of Ceylon as it does of Java, and certainly, as far as

History is concerned, far less than it does of China. We

have been so partial and fragmentary in our Geological in-

vestigations, that we possess no summary of those probable

contingencies which gave to it an existence. Botany has been

almost as much overlooked. Long before this time, had his

valuable life been spared, we should have derived from the

great talents and the large experience of Dr. Gardner,a know-

ledge of that wonderful vegetable wealth wherewith we are

so profusely surrounded; but even if he had been spared to

us, it is more than probable that he would have left the wide

field of the alge almost untouched. As itis, your Committee

cannot congratulate the Society on the amount of its botanical

facts; the admission is made with regret, the more so as it ap-

plies to Conchology, Meteorology, Natural History, Archaeo-

logy, and ina great degree to other sciences and subdivisions

of sciences. Your Committee, among other deficiencies which

they would wish to see supplied, remark the general absence

of Historical contributions. This is the more tobe regretted,

as it is generally felt that the history of Ceylon abounds im all

General Meeting, May 15th, 1852. Xiil.

those incidents which give a charm and an interest to the

records ofa nation’s career, and also because those gentlemen

who have treated the subject hitherto, have substituted com-

pilation and narrative for history, and have failed to advance

those philosophical views, without which, it will not satisfy

the requirements of the present age. Your Committee would

also be happy to see more papers on Statistics ; on the adapta-

tion of the Island for Railroads; onthe best mode of arranging

Electric Telegraphs ; on the advantages of introducing malle-

able iron in the construction of Bridges, as has recently been

done in England with so great economy and success; these,

and many other subjects of great practical importance might,

it is believed by your Committee, be most appropriately

received into such a Journal as the Society wish to establish.

Again, inreference to the treatment of purely Oriental subjects,

your Committee, seeing the attention of the Parent Society

so much and so successfully devoted to the subject of Bud-

hism (vide Major Cunningham and Captain Chapman’s papers

in the last number of the Journal), cannot overlook how much

that subject might be elucidated by systematic and active

enquiries cn thespot; nor can your Committee deem it pro-

bable that such enquiries, when superintended by the great

erudition of the Rev. Mr. Gogerly, the Rev. Mr. Palm, Mr.

De Zoysa, and other Oriental scholars, would fail of attaining

the most complete success. This view of the case has been

confirmed by the receipt by last mail of a letter from Captain

Chapman, marked B., and attached to this Report, in which

that indefatigable Orientalist invites the attention of the So-

ciety to specific points of importance, and requests answers

to various questions. Your Committee are of opinion, that a

correspondence suchas that commenced by Captain Chapman,

could only be continued through the instrumentality of small

Committees of two, three, or four members each, and speci-

ally charged with the duties peculiar to the department of

knowledge or enquiry over which they respectively preside,

RIV. Appendix :— Proceedings of

and on which they should be required to make reports at

stated intervals to the General Committee. By this means

a great proportion of the sciences would be represented by the

various Committees, and a character of systematic and con-

_ tinuous research impressed upon the proceedings of the So-

ciety. A resolution to this effect will be made, and if acceded

to, the various Sub-Committees forthwith formed. The above

recapitulation, and it could be extended, is not one calculated

to give your Committee much pleasure, but still less does it

provoke any feeling like despondency, for your Committee

are not more assured that there are in the Island the materials

for the most various and important investigations, than that

there are men able and willing to bring them to light. Your

Committee will therefore submit to the Society, that a certain

sum begiven to the reading Committee, the Report of which,

marked C., is laid upon your table, to enable them to publish

as soon as they shall deem fit. In the second class of ex-

penses, your Committee would include those for the purchase

of books and the furnishing of the Museum. The only out-

lay incurred by the Society at present for the first, is for the

Calcutta Review, the Geological Journal, and the Statistical

Journal, so that it would be easy to afford a little sum of

money for the purchase of valuable standard works this year.

Your Committee would not presume to specify any books,

but it is their opinion that none but standard works should

be purchased at present, and that a good and cheap Book-

seller be employed. On this subject your Committee have

to remark, with extreme regret, that many valuable volumes,

some of them belonging to series, are not now to be found in

the Library. Your Committee subjoin a list, marked D., of

those that are deficient, and they confidently hope that any

Gentleman who happens to have any book belonging to the

Society in his possession, will apprise the Secretary without

delay, as that officer is now completing his Library list; and

it would be most desirable to recover as many hooks as pos-

General Meeting, May 15th, 1852. — XV

-sible. Your Committee may state, that they now employ the

services of a Librarian at a slight remuneration, he is always

in the office, and has the keys im his possession, so that any

Member can at any time receive any work which is in the .

Library, the Librarian taking note of his name and the date _

of issue. In reference to the Museum, your Committee have

not presumed to decide how it should be supported, whether

from the general funds of the Society, or from a fund to be |

continued in aid of itself and styled the Museum Fund. The

question will be submitted to your determination, as will also

some supplementary ones in reference to its maintenance and

improvement; at present your Committee are happy to be

able to state that its condition is by no means a bad one.

The careful investigations of Mr. Layard assure us, that there

are of birds the specimens of 260 species, of which 175 are

fit for mounting; and it is possible that within a very short

time the efforts of Dr. Kelaart, Mr. Layard, and others, could

render great and complete accessions to this and most other

provinces of Natural History. Of shells, there are about 300

species, and Mr. Layard has promised the addition of no less

than 200 more. The department of Mineralogy is also satis-

factorily represented; and indeed your Committee are assured

that the Museum at present is in so satisfactory a condition,

that nothing but a just amount of the Society’s patronage is

sufficient to elevate it to utility and excellence. On this

subject, your Committee have much pleasure in inviting the

attention of the Society to aletter from E. L. Layard, Ksq., to

the Secretary, displaying his usual sound sense and zeal for

the Society’s welfare: it is marked E., and is attached to this

Report.

The last and third class of expenses is that connected with

the Instruments of the Institution. It would appear, from the

accounts of the Treasurer’s department, as also from the pro-

ceedings of the Society, that many instruments have been

bought, of which no record now remains. The instruments

ei. A ppendix :—Proceedings of

at present in use, consist of a Barometer, three Hygrometers,

a Standard Thermometer, a Rain Guage, and a Scale Ruler;

but others have been bought previous to these, and nothing

_is now known of them. It is impossible to conduct a wide and

important Meteorological Survey with such assistance only

as these instruments could render; and your Committee Teel

assured that the scientific department of the Society’s opera-

tions is entitled to its share of support. Your Committee are

of opinion, that for a very slight outlay a series of instruments

could be purchased, which would illustrate and assist scientific

investigation of a very extended character. They judge, how-

ever, that as far as Meteorology is concerned, not much

expense should be incurred in the purchase of Thermometers.

Some of those instruments can be bought in Colombo, of a

good construction and ata low price, which can be rigidly

compared with the excellent standard instrument of the So-

ciety, their error, if any, detected, and themselves adapted at

once to the purposes of Hygrometers. It is not saying too

much, that the outlay of £3 would enable the Society to

transport at once to Trincomalie, Newera Ellia, and Galle,

instruments which would yield the most useful and important

results. Of course, this is not meant to apply to the self-

registering thermometers, some of which it would be advisable

at once to procure from the best maker in London. Your

Committee deem, however, that the greatest benefits would

accrue from the possession of such instruments as the Electro-

meter, Actinometer, the Polariscope, and those others which

indicate the phenomena of light, radiation, and atmospheric

electricity. A Photographic apparatus, by which temples,

statues, and inscriptions and tracery, however elaborate and

minute, could be faithfully delineated, is however the instru-

ment of which your Committee would wish to see the Society

possessed as soon as possible. The records which it would

give of the architecture and antiquities of Ceylon, would as-

sist research, and would probably discover many coincidences

General Meeting, May 15th, 1852. XVil.

now unobserved or unknown. <An Electro-plating machine,

which could be purchased for very little here, would enable

the Committee to multiply casts of coins, &c., specimens of

which might be submitted to Numismatic and other Societies.

Your Committee cannot close their remarks in connection

with the expenditure of the Society, without expressing the

hope, that as Ceylon so plentifully abounds in materials from

which an institution like the present could select so much

that is important and curious, that so now will all its Mem-

_ bers unite vigorously in the effort to advance its objects and

its importance; to bring to light the wonders of this unex-

plored and interesting Island; and to shew ourselves worthy

of our connection with the Parent Society, in our indefatigable

investigation of what was so grand in the past, and is so at-

tractive in the present. To realise completely some of the

advantages which may surely be anticipated, it is the opinion

of some Members of your Committee, that as much as possible

should be encouraged, the formation of Provincial Committees,

affiliated with and subordinate to the Committee at Colombo,

with which they would be brought into systematic and con-

tinued correspondence. Upon the expediency of this measure,

the Committee refrain from giving any opinion, deeming that

it had far better be decided by the vote of the Society itself.

In connection with their own immediate transactions, the

Committee have to refer to the Report of two Sub-Commit-

tees, marked F. and G., and attached to the proceeding which

they directed, so far back as 16th February 1852, to confer

with the members of the Athenzum, to see if the two Socie-

ties might not unite, to a certain extent, in the furtherance of

views and objects common to both; and also whether a more

commodious room might not be procured for the Society.

On the first of these points, your Committee are aware of a

great diversity of opinion among their own Members; and

therefore they gladly avail themselves of the occasion of a

General Meeting to bring the question before it. On the

VOL. II. C

XViil. Appendix :— Proceedings of

second of these questions, your Committee are of opinion,

that the expense constitutes a very great objection to any

change of residence for the present. Your Committee cannot

close their Report without referring to the loss which they

have sustained from the absence of Dr. MacVicar. They feel

assured that he would have been a most willing and able co-

adjutor in our present efforts to renew the profitable and

important enterprises appropriate to our Society, and that his

endeavours would have elicited the same appreciation which

the Parent Society once so markedly expressed. Other with-

drawals from the ranks of the Society, and not so temporary

as itis hoped will be that of Dr. MacVicar, your Committee

have great regret in remarking, even though the loss is more

than made up by therecent additions to ournumbers.

Your Committee append a list of books they have received

since last meeting, marked H. and attached tothe Report, which,

as well as the correspondence of the Society, the Report of

the Sub-Committees, the Meteorological observations of Cap-

tain Higgs, Trincomalie, and Captain Neill, R. A., Colombo,

they now submit for your inspection; and they close their

Report with the confident hope, that before the next General

Meeting their efforts to increase the utility and activity of

the Society will be attended with success.

W. F. Smitu NIL,

Secretary.

List of Papers, §c., put upon the Table.

The Treasurer’s Report.

Two letters from Captain Chapman, with a seal, and two copies of

Prinsep’s Alphabet.

Report of the Committee on papers.

List of missing books.

Letter from Mr. E. L. Layard to the Secretary.

Report of Committee appointed to confer with the Committee of

the Atheneum.

G. Report of the Committee appointed to seek for better accommoda-

tion, &c.

H. List of books received since the last Meeting.

AO ©

General Meeting, May 15th, 1852. XX,

K. Letter from the Numismatic Society, 10th Dec. 1850.

L. Letter from the Royal Asiatic Society, 16th Nov. 1850.

M. Letter from the Royal Asiatic Society, 15th Nov. 1851.

N. Specimens of Dr. Kelaart’s Prodromus.

O. Catalogue of Books in Library.

Tt is not deemed necessary that all the foregoing papers be printed,

but only

The Treasurer’s Report.

Captain Chapman’s correspondence.

Report on Committee of papers.

List of books received since last Meeting.

W. F. Smitu Neit1,

Secrelary.

mon >

Resolutions.

1. xtc Lushington, C. B., then moved, that the Report

which had just been read be adopted: and the motion being

seconded by M. Coomarasamy, Esq., was carried unanimously.

2.— It was moved by J. L. Flanderka, Esq., that a sum

not exceeding £20 be given to the Reading Committee, with

which to effect the publication of the Society’s Journal as

soon as they shall deem fit; and this motion being seconded

by E. L. Layard, Esq., was carried unanimously.

3.—Moved by Dr. J. B. Misso, that a sum not exceeding

£12 be set apart for the purchase of books, which the Com-

mittee shall afterwards select; and this motion being seconded

by Captain Neill, was carried unanimously.

4,—Moved by the Hon’ble H. C. Selby, that small Com-

mittees be formed, to which different enquiries be entrusted ;

that there be first an Oriental Committee, composed of the

Rev. D. J. Gogerly, President; Members, the Rev. J. D.

Palm, J. Alwis, Esq., L. De Zoysa, Esq., and M. Coomara-

samy, Esa. ,who willcharge themselves with the elucidation and

superintendence of all subjects connected with the Religion,

‘History and Antiquities of the Island. Secondly, that there

be a Committee on Statistics, composed of J. Dalziel, Esq.,:

President; Members, Dr. Kessen, Dr. Misso, R. Dawson,

Esq., R. E. Lewis, Esq., to superintend that department of

enquiry; that there belastly,a Comuinittee on Science, composed

of Lieut.-Colonel Wilson, R. A., President; and Members,

x. Appendix :—Proceedings of

Major Lushington, C.B.,E. L. Layard, Esq.,and Dr. Lamprey,

who will not only conduct the business of the Museum, but

charge themselves with all the Scientific duties which may

devolve upon the Society ; and this motion being seconded

by J. L. Flanderka, Esq., was carried unanimously.

5.—Moved by Lt.-Col. Wilson, R. A., that a sum not ex-

ceeding £12 be set apart for the purchase of instruments

which the Committee on Science shall afterwards select, and

this motion being seconded by J. De Alwis, Esq., was carried

unanimously. |

6.—Proposedby E.L. Layard, Esq., that the Museum funds,

at present amounting to £6 12s., be handed over to the

Committee on Science for the service of the Museum, and that

the Treasurer be entitled to receive for the Museum donations

only from new Members, and donations or subscriptions from

Members of the Society, and this motion being seconded by

Dr. Misso, was carried unanimously. :

7.—Moved by R. Dawson, Esq., that the Secretary be

instructed to recommend, in his correspondence, the institution

of Provincial Committees at Jaffna, Trincomalie, and else-

where, for the purpose of more efficiently conducting extensive

and important enquiries, and for advancing the general in-

terests of the Society; and this motion being seconded by Mr.

Flanderka, was carried unanimously.

8.—Moved by J. Dalziel, Eisq., that this Society consent to

unite with the Atheneum in making a joint application to

Government, with a view of obtaining apartments for their

common use; and this motion, beg seconded by L. De Zoysa,

Eisq., was carried unanimously.

9.—Moved by the Rev. D. J. Gogerly, that three gentle-

men, viz., The Hon’ble H. C. Selby, Major Lushington, C.B.,

and the Secretary, be requested to wait upon His Excellency,

when they shall have opportunity, to confer with His Excel-

lency on the behalf of this Society; and this motion being

seconded by Lt.-Col. Wilson, Rh, A., was carried unanimously.

General Meeting, May 15th, 1852. RX.

Mr, L. De Zoysa then submitted to the Society for their

inspection a Burmese letter.

The following gentlemen were then proposed for election

as Members of the Society and unanimously elected.

Proposed by R. Dawson, Esq.

4 Seconded by J. de Alwis, Esq.

Proposed by Capt. Neill, R. A.

" \ Seconded by E. L. Layard, Esq.

Proposed by Lieut.-Col. Wilson, R. A.

| iaaecaematad . Ginees ake Coomarasamy, Esq.

Proposed by Capt. Neill.

Seconded by J. Dalziel, Esq.

Proposed by Lieut.-Col. Wilson, R. A.

“ Seconded by Mr. Flanderka.

G. S. Duff, Esq.

Lt. Schaw, 8. 5.

$. Worms, Esq.

T. Berwick, Esq.

TREASURER’s ACCOUNT.

Total Ar-

rears col-

lected.

Subscriptions, Arrears col-

lected: for 1849 | £. oo. ccc f ckeeee ees

do. do. 1850! 4 4 0

do. do. 1851} 23 2 0

do. Forcurrent year 1852 | ....... WL PU Oe.

BRACE ICE SIEOMECECH) Soccncsccicces | 1 tenseoe ll Pa efiewee [0 eden

Museum Fund, Arrearscltd. 1850| 3 0 O

do. do. 1851 3..0401.56%.6..0)..6 0:0

do. For Current year 1852 | ...... 012 0; 33 6 O

digtalamount.collected: |) cccc.5 S| sc fecweee, [yo chowes

Cash received from the Hon’ble

Ene Colomak’ Seenetary bi! o.oo seck8 OB sacs

Balance received from Ex Treasurer Se mea A anaetncts shal Mal clas a

Payments: old accounts, Mr. Lewis | 30 5 91

do. Thacker & Spink WAS Cilia FS es Cae

Smallitems, currentexpenses} ...... 0 | ceeees | O 12 10] 32 {4 I

Balance—deposited with Oriental

Banke (Corporations ..ccc<.' | 02 veeess 1. serene 53 O 6/

In hands of Treasurer ... | ...... Rib iatines 017 8; 53 18 2

Colombo, 14th May, 1852. Rosert Dawson,

HE. .& C. KE. Treasurer.

XX11. Appendix :— Proceedings of

To the Secretary, Ceylon Branch, Royal Asiatic Society, Colombo.

Siz,—I venture to beg the acceptance, by the Society, of a second

copy of a joint communication which the Royal Asiatic Society has done

me the honour to insert in its Journal for the present season, because a

copy of “ Prinsep’s Modifications of the Sanscrit Alphabet” is inserted

in it to facilitate comparison.

I also beg the acceptance by the Society of two additional copies of

that alphabet.

With my best wishes for the prosperity of the Branch in Ceylon,

I have &c.,

S. J. CHapMan.

Atheneum Club, Pall Mall, London, 18th Feb., 1852.

London :—Atheneum Club, 20th Feb., 1852.

Sir,—May I also take the liberty of begging your kind assistance in

the following points :—

First,—Sir Woodbine Parish has in his possession an onyx engraved

nearly as follows :—

3 3} a which, according to Prinsep, means

The r

nae

The first character is supposed to be a Monograph, in which > are

supposed to be Sri. The character comes nearest to Sri of the Third

and Fourth Centuries.*

The other letters form Thero, “ the highest of the high priests among

Budhists.” But although the substitute for Sri is placed before titles

amongst other Budhists, and even before Dharma, as Sri Dharma, Pro-

fessor Wilson is not willing to take this my interpretation “ Sri Thero.”

I therefore shall be much obliged to you, if you can obtain any informa-

tion on the subject. The Singhalese kings made use of Monographs on

their coins; the priests were allowed to have seals, and according to. the

Bible the names of the Ten Tribes were engraved on an onyx. I am

* Jn orig: du. PRINTER.

General Meeting, May 15th, 1852. XXill.

therefore inclined to believe it to have been the seal of office borne by

Theros.

Secondly,—To ascertain whether any score or tally is kept by the

Kandyans or Singhalese, or by the troops,—Malays, Africans, or Arabs,

&c., or in the Shipping which frequent the Ports of Colombo, Galle and

Trincomalie, of this kind NN or “4 perpendicular right lines cut by

an oblique diagonal, the 4 right lines being each one, and the diagonal

also one.” I have traced, with the assistance of numerous correspondents,

modifications of this principle, viz:

NT TRAN TP TTT i

Na ae Boies ie Pai le

als. butchers. per 100.

) Navies on Railroad.

My {| 10 10

5=10 20. &c.—k&c.

I have found it among thé most illiterate of Irish, from thence across

England to Norway, and thence to Scandinavia, to M.N.* Tothe East

Ihave found it to exist in France, Central Germany, Italy, and Genoa.

And I am particularly anxious that this enquiry shall be carried on

in the East, particularly in the neighbourhood of the hills in Kandy, of

the Nilgherries, and the country about the Himalayahs. I make this

enquiry, because I hope to shew that the Cadmean Alphabet was de-

rived from these numerals—the scale of Nature herself—the hands

4 Fingers

1 Thumb

* The nearest approach to MS., Printsr.

XX1V. Appendix :—Proceedings of

It is probable that some of the visitors to Newera Ella, may have it

in their power to follow up my enquiry, not only there, but on the

Himalayah.

By making this as public as you can, you will much oblige,

Yours faithfully,

S. J. CHapmay.

emmnaaamnameameemend

Atheneum Club, London, 17th March, 1852.

Sir,—Last month I endeavoured to avail myself of the kindness of

the Colonial Department, to send, addressed to you, a copy of an article

in the last number of the Royal Asiatic Society’s Journal, entitled “Some

additional remarks upon the city of Anuradhapoora, and the Hill Tem-

ple of Mehentela in the Island of Ceylon,” which the Society did me

the honour to insert. As I have reason to believe that the parcel will

not have been sent, but will be forwarded by this Mail, I venture to

address you further.

It will be seen that the paper is wholly historical, and that it rests as

authority upon Turnour’s Mahawanso, even for the date assigned to

Chandra Gupta, viz., 381 years before the Christian era. This date is

disputed, as being at variance with that of the Greek Sandracottus ; but

as this fact was not only known but fully discussed in the Introduction

and Appendix to the Mahawanso by Mr. Turnour, I did not feel justified

in departing from his authority. Therefore, I contented myself with

saying, that this important but disputed date is fixed ; but when I take

the elaborate examination of this difficult point by Professor Wilson,

into consideration, I feel that it would have been much more satisfactory,

if the words, “but disputed” were inserted. You will, therefore, very

much oblige meif you will have the kindness to make this correction at my

request.

The communication from Major Cunningham of the contents of the

Topes around “ Surihi,” page 108, naturally turns our attention to every

thing connected with Budhism. I shall, therefore, mention some points

which appear to me of interest. In page 221 of Davy, is an account of

the contents of a Dagoba at Cotta, which was opened by Mr. Layard in

1819 or 1820. In one corner of the floor is gam which is not de-

scribed, but which JI have mentioned as like a hing of Chessmen. On

General Meeting, May 15th, 1852. XXKY.

referring to page 114 of the Journal we find another figure.

May not this have been the object? and may not the Monogram there

given lead to the explanation of (Fig: 1) the engraved seal; of which I

have enclosed an impression. The reading which I have ventured to

give is this, viz. : SriThero or Holy Hierarch, (as Maha Kassapa, &c.), is

not considered admissible, first, because the term Sri is not thus used,

and in the second place, because vowels after consonants are expressed

by a line, initial vowels alone have a character assigned.

- It would be highly desirable, if both these objections

ae SF could be either confirmed or disproved, not on account

of the seal only, but because there is a Rock Inscription

ri On) near Pomparipo, in which can be made out “the name of

- aking of Ceylon,” provided a vowel letter may be used

1 wa : He

when intermixed with consonants, and not an initial.

<I 4] Possibly some of the priests can decide both of these

Ma points. In the same Dagobah were found numerous

ce minute Dagobahs about 14 inch by 14. They had an

1 CL inscription either on the inside of the flat base or on the

M opposite surface; they were comparatively abundant

J ~ AG vhen I was in Ceylon (1828, 1829 ), and possibly are to

Sewa be got at present. It will be interesting to ascertain

whether these Dagobahs are substitutes for the square

stone boxes, on the lids of which were inscribed the

names of those persons whose relics were buried in the large Dagobahs,

page 100 of Journal. Very recently three Prayers on vellum about

14, 15, and 12 inches in length, and rolled tightly so as to form a cylin-

der 14 inches in length and 3 inch in diameter, were found within a group

(1 must call it), consisting of a man or some animal surrounded by gro-

tesque heads and human figures, placed on a pedestal about the size of a

common plate. The base was covered with some kind of paper; and

when this was cut, the three rolls made their appearance. They were

taken to the Nepanl Prince, who said and wrote that they were Budticka

or prayers of Budha, either from Hindostan, Thibet or China. May not

this be one of the many representations of the acts of Gautama which

were buried in Ruanwella, “ the sight of which gave King Bhategoso

much pleasure,” page 175, Journal; and may not this serve as a clue to

other eroupes equally grotesque? Only a small part of the group re-

mains, which Ihave seen. ‘There is one head painted blue and sure

VOL. Il. d

XXV1L Appendix :—Proceedings of

mounted by a conical mound, on which are three rows of projecting |

prominences; these three lines appear to refer to Siva. The forehead

is strongly gilt. The prayers have not been deciphered, but [have taken

steps to procure them, and shall submit them to Professor Wilson. On

turning to the plate, p. 80, Journal, the Sumbunath has seven stories or

circles, in what I shall call its steeple. At page 72, these are described

as meaning “ the seven heavens.” On referring to my drawing of Lanka

Rama, and of Mehentelle, as well as of my friend, Captain Weller, (See

Vol. III. Trans: Plates), the same number of circles will be found, al-

though the Lithographer, in the case of Lanka, has made only four. It

now only remains for me to beg, that attention may be paid to the im-

portance of the equilateral triangle in Budhistical buildings. According

to my rough memoranda, every religious building is, as regards the frame

work, made up of these triangles, as well as the tae-kieh,* in the con-

struction of Tanks. My attention to it was first attracted by Tissa

Wewa at Anuradhapoora.

Let A. B. represent the lake; 0, p, will be the embankment. This is

carried far above the highest ground so that when suflicient water is en-

closed, it may fall into the lower levels A—o. A—p. The crest of the

embankment is thus guarded against accident; and the supply of water

beyond the embankment being issued by means of syphons passing from

the bottom of the water below, or beneath the embankment, it is guarded

from this danger. Judging that “everything Budhistical,’ is done by

rule, I cannot but think that the peculiar construction of the tae-kieh is

devoted to some peculiar purpose.

In the hope that the particulars detailed in this letter, may induce

others to take up the investigation, whilst in the head quarters of

Budhism, I remain, yours faithfully,

S. J. CHAPMAN.

* As near as can be made out from M.S,

General Meeting, May 15th, 1852. XXVl.

Report of the Committee on Papers, Colombo, 10th May, 1852.

Present :—Dr. Lamprey, 15th Regt.; Captain Neill, R.A.

Tue Committee upon papers having met, pursuant to the Resolution

‘No. 1 of the Committee Meeting, bearing date 19th April, 1852, proceed

to the examination of the various papers centributed by several gentle-

men, and leng in the possession of the Society. The Committee com-

mence their observations by remarking the absence of the paper from

Mr. Herft, in which he gives a most able summary of the statistics of an

important district. It was compiled some time ago, and displayed great

ability, care, and labour. The Committee would recommend, that Mr.

Herft be consulted as to whether, in the interval which has elapsed since

the transmission of his paper to the Society, he may have any old facts

to amend, or new facts to record, and whether he will supply the Society

again with a copy of his excellent paper.

The Committee directed their attention to the several manuscripts in

succession. ‘The first, entitled “ Remarks on Singhalese Medicine,” is a

paper in which considerable research is evinced, and upon which some

labour has beenexpended. ‘The Committee think, however, that it could

be advantageously condensed; and besides, they deem that the subject of

which it treats is one which ought to be submitted to professional judg-

ment, before it could be inserted in the Journal. ‘The next paper is an

outline of the Tamil system of Natural History, by Simon Casie Chitty,

Esq., and is a paper of considerable value. The next is the Statistical

Account of the Districts of Chilaw and Putlam, North Western Province,

by Mr. Brodie. This is an excellent paper, though the Committee would

advise, that before it were published, Mr. Brodie should be consulted

as to any amendments or additions he might be now inclined to make.

The last MS. which the Committee have examined, is from the Rev. Mr.

Gogerly, entitled “The Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.” ‘This is, like

every other of the productions of that gentleman, full of interest and

instruction.

The above enumerated manuscripts are those only which the Society

has at present in its possession; but the Committee would observe, that

circumstances only have delayed the appearance of others of great

interest. Dr. Lamprey is at present employed on a very interesting sub-

ject; Captain Neill is preparing a large paper; and the Committee are

informed by the Secretary of the Society, that he has received from

several correspondents, the declaration, that they are ready to contribute

XVII. Appendix :—Proceedings of

to the Journal of the Society, whenever they are assured that the So-

ciety is earnest in its intentions of publishing.

The Committee, in conclusion, are of opinion, that there already exist

manuscripts, which united with those which may confidently be expected,

would compose a very interesting Journal; and it is their recommenda-

tion, that the Society do recommence its publications.

W. F. Smita Nett,

Secretary.

List of Books received since last Meeting.

1.—Some additional remarks upon the ancient city of Anoorajapoora,

by Captain Chapman.—Donation from the author.

2.—The Numismatic Chronicle, Nos. 47, 48, 49, 50, 51.—Donation

From the Numismatic Society.

3.—Proceedings of the Numismatic Society, Session 1849, 1850.—

Donation from the Numismatic Soctety.

4.—The Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, Part I., Vol. 8,

No. 29. )

5.—Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, Vol. 13, Part I, Vol. 14,

Part I.

6.—Journal of the Statistical Society of London, Vol. 14, Part IV.

7.—Rudimenta Mythologie Semitice Supplementa Lexici Aramaici,

by Paulus Boetticher.

8.—Journal of the Indian Archipelago, Vol. 6, No. 1.

9.—Calcutta Review, No. 32.

10.—Transactions of the Bombay Geographical Society, April to Sep-

tember, 1848.

11.—Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, No. 7.

W. F. Smitu Net,

Secretary.

SLID LINP LOI IDI II Ow

SPECIAL MEETING, HELD 24TH JULY, 1852.

Present :—Rev. D. J. Gogerly in the Chair.

Rey. J. Kats, Messrs. M. Coomarasamy, Dr. Misso, L. De

Quarterly Meeting, Aug. 21st, 1852. ROCK

Soyza, F. Straube, Dr. Lamprey, Lieut. Schaw, E. L. Lay-

ard (pro Secretary ).

Minutes of last Meeting not read, because not given over

to Mr. Layard by the Secretary, who had gone to Kandy.

- Read letter from Capt. Neill, tendering his resignation as

Secretary to the Society, he having been removed to Kandy.

Resolved, that Capt. Neill be requested to continue his func-

tionsas Secretary to the Committees at out-stations, and

that Mr. E. L. Layard be requested to accept the office of

Secretary to co-operate with Capt. Neill.

Mr. Layard accepted the office.

Read a letter from J. N. Mooyaart, Esq., relative to the

resuscitation of the Local Committee in Jafina. The subject

therein alluded to was, after much discussion, laid over till

the next General Meeting, which was fixed for the 21st of

August.

Read a letter from A. O. Brodie, Esq., Anoorajapoora, for-

warding a diagram of the Singhalese numerals. Mr. L. De

Soyza was requested to examine them and afford the Society

some information concerning them.

E. L. Layarp,

Secretary.

RAL ARALISF AAAI IPOADID IOI IOI

THIRD QUARTERLY MEETING, HELD 218T AuGuST, 1852.

Present :—The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Starkz in the Chair.

The Rev. D. J. Gogerly, Rev. J. D. Palm, Rev. C. Alwis,

Rev. J. Kats, Messrs. L. De Soyza, M. Coomarasamy, and:

the Secretary. |

Read a letter from the Treasurer expressing his regret that

business caused him to be absent, and informing the Society

of the state of its funds. The Minutes of the last Meeting

having been read and signed, the Chairman stated that with

XXX. A ppendix:—Proceedings of

reference to the 7th Resolution passed on the 15th May last,

he had, when lately in Jaffna, conversed with Mr. Mooyaart

the Chairman of the local Committee there, on the establish-

ment of Local Auxiliary Societies throughout the Island, to-

co-operate with the Society in Colombo. After much con-

versation it was agreed to refer the matter to the Committee,

with instructions to bring the subject betore a Special Meeting

to be called for the purpose.

The Secretary brought to the notice of the Meeting the

necessity of employing a peon to distribute its notices and

attend to the cleaning of the room. On the motion of the

Chairman it was left to the Secretary to engage a person, and

to report the matter to the Committee for its approval.

Read a letter from Captain Neill, dated August 9th, 1852.

It wasthereupon resolved, that the Vice-President, the Rev.

D. J. Gogerly, and the Secretary, do wait upon His Excel-

lency the Governor, to request the assistance of the Govern-

ment in printing the Society’s Journal.

Read a letter from the Rev. D. J. Gogerly to the See,

stating that some books belonging to the Society had been

brought to his house for sale, and that hehad forwarded them

to be detained until enquiries could be made into the circum-

stances.

The Secretary stated that he had traced the books into the

possession of a latemember of the Society, who having quitted

the Island unexpectedly, had left a number of books for sale;

and these had been included among them by mistake by the

party managing the transaction. He(the Secretary) regretted

to observe thattwo vols. of the sameseries were still wanting,

and he would move that Colombo subscribers should return

books borrowed by them from the Society’s Library, at every

quarterly meeting, Out-station subscribers half yearly. The

Chairman moved, as an amendment, that in the first instance

books should be returned every three weeks, in the second

every six weeks; the Rev. D. J. Gogerly seconded the

amendment.

Quarterly Meeting, Aug. 2\st, 1852. XXX1o

The Rev. J. Kats begged to move, as an amendment, that

the first period should amount to one month, the second to one

months and fifteen days. Mr. Coomarasamy seconded the

motion, which being put to the Meeting was lost. Mr. Layard

withdrawing hismotion in favour of the Chairman, the follow-

ing amended motion was put, andcarried by a majority of the

Members voting.—“ That all books berrowed by Members re-

sident in Colombo should be returned to the Library every

three weeks: that all books borrowed by Members residing at

out-stations should be returned every six weeks; that peri-

odicals should not be retained, either in Colombo or at out-

stations, for a longer period than 14 days; and that all books

or pamphlets should be returned to the Library, at least one

week before the Anniversary Meeting, to be inspected and

reported on by the Librarian.” _

The Secretary brought to the notice of the Meeting, the

expediency of keeping Catalogues ofthe Donations presented

to the Museum, and books for the registration of the names

of Subscribers borrowing books. He was authorized to pro-

cure the necessary blank books for the purpose.

The Secretary then begged to propose the following gentle-

men for admission as Members of the Society, Messrs. H.

Mooyaart, F. Flanderka, F. Gisborne, and F. Campbell, all of

Jafina. He proposed them in virtue of his office as proxy

for the Chairman of the Local Committee in Jaffna; and being

personally acquainted with them, he begged to second them

in his own name. :

The Chairman and Vice-President objected to this course

of procedure ; the Rules of the Society did not provide for the

proposal of Members by proxy.

The Secretary stated that nothing was laid down in the

Rules on the subject; they simply required candidates to be

proposed by one Member and seconded by another.

Mr. Gogerly objected to the procedure, agreeing with the

Chairman. The Secretary contended that he had precedent for

the course he had adopted, but bowed to the decision of the

XXXL. Appendix :—Proceedings of

Chairman; and to avoid disappointment to the gentlemen before

named, he would take upon himself the gratification of pro-

posing them, trusting to their being seconded by some gentlemen

present. Hebegged, however, to give notice of his intention

to submit the matter to the consideration of thenext General

Meeting, in the shape of a special motion, as he considered the

restriction calculated to act prejudicially on the interests of

the Society; and to take fromthe out-station Members one of

the few privileges they enjoyed. Another candidate to-day

stood in the same position.

The following gentlemen were then elected Members of

the Society.

Proposed by Mr. E. L. Layard.

Seconded by Rev. D. J. Gogerly.

{ Proposed by Mr. E. L. Layard.

' U Seconded by Rev. J. D. Palm.

Hi. Mooyaart, Esq. .

H. Byrne, -Esq.

F. Flanderka, Esq. . Proposed by Mr. BL. Layard.

Seconded by Mr. Coomarasamy.

Proposed by Mr. E. L. Layard.

Seconded by Rev. J. Kats.

{ Proposed by Mr. E. L. Layard.

F. W. Gisborne, Esq.

F.H. il, Esq.

H. Campbell, Esq Seconded by Mr. Coomarasamy.

Proposed by Mr. E. L. Layard.

Seconded by Mr. Justice Starke.

Proposed by Rev. D. J. Gogerly.

Seconded by Mr. E. L. Layard.

Don Domingo Wijaya- { Proposed by Mr. L. De Soyza.

sinhe, Mohandiram Kandy ) Seconded by Rev. Mr. Alwis.

Read a letterfrom the Colonial Secretary, transmitting by

order of His Excellency the Governor, a copy of Magnetical

and Meteorological observations, made at the Cape of Good

Hope Observatory, printed by order of Her Majesty’s Go-

vernment.

It appeared, on reference to the title page, that the work

had been forwarded from England by order of the Govern-

ment to the Governor of Ceylon, to be presented to such

Literary or Scientific Institution in the Island as to His

Excellency should seem fit, and that His Excellency had

himself addressed it to this Society.

H. Dudley, Esq., c.R.R.

R. Gerhard, Esq. Kandy |

Quarterly Meeting, Aug. 21st, 1852. XXXili-

It was unanimously resolved, that the Society do, through

their Secretary, convey to His Excellency Sir G. W. Ander-

son, their best thanks for the donation thus handsomely made

to their Library.

Presented by the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution.

Vol. II. Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge.

Fourth Annual Report of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian

Institution, for the year 1849.

Report of the Smithsonian Institution, on the discovery of the Planet

Neptune, by Benjamin Apthorp Gould, jun.

Notices of Public Libraries in the United States of America, by Charles

C. Jewett, Librarian of the Smithsonian Institution.

Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of

Science—Fourth meeting, August 1850.

With reference to the Singhalese numerals, sent to the

Society by Mr. A. O. Brodie from Anoorajapoora, laid before

the last Meeting, and entrustedto Mr. L. De Soyza for exam-

ination and report; Mr. De Soyza stated, that having in the

course of his inquiries into the subject met with some inter-

esting facts, he proposed embodying them in a short paper,

which he trusted would be ready by the next Meeting.

Mr. Gogerly then read a paper on Budhism.

The Rey. C. Alwis movedthat the paper then read be sent

_ tothe Reading Committee forreport; the Rev. J. Kats second-

ing the motion, it was carried.

The Secretary representing that a vacancy existed in that

Committee, occasioned by the removal of Captain Neill to

Kandy, it was resolved that the Rev. C. Alwis be requested

to fill the said vacancy. Mr. Alwis accepted the proposal.

Mr. Layard exhibited the Society’s shells,and the additions

he had made to them, arranged in some slight order; but stated

he had not consulted the members of the Committee on Science -

on the final arrangement or disposition of them, therefore

made no report. The Meeting then adjourned.

E. L. Layarp,

Hony. Secy,

VOL, II, é

XXXIV. Appendix :—Proceedings of

GENERAL MEETING, HELD 2ND OCTOBER, 1852.

Present :—Lieut.-Colonel WiLson in the Chair.

Rev. J. Kats, D. J. Gogerly, C. Alwis, Messrs. J. Dalziel,

M. Coomarasamy, J. De Alwis, L. De Soyza, H. Dudley,

C.R.R., C. Lorensz ; Lieut. Schaw, Dr. Lamprey, Dr. Misso,

R. Dawson, Esq., Treasurer, and E. L. Layard, Esq., Secretary.

Read letters from Mr. Justice Starke and Dr. Hoffmann,

expressive of regret at not being able to attend the Meeting.

Read and confirmed the Minutes of last Meeting.

Read letter from J. N. Mooyaart, Esq., signed Chairman

of the Jaffna District Comniittee, enclosing Minutes of Meet-

ing held in Jaffna on the 18th September, 1852.

The recommendation of the Managing Committee on the

subject being put to the vote and lost:—

It was moved by the Rev. D. J. Gogerly, seconded by Mr.

HK. L. Layard, and carried unanimously — :

*¢ That no Members be allowed to expend any part of the

Society’s funds, except on the special grant of a General

Meeting, and that all contributions and subscriptions paid at

out-stations, be asspeedily as possible remitted to the Treasurer.

Moved by Mr. E. L. Layard, “ That the Vice-President,

the Rev. D. J. Gogerly, and H. Dudley, Esq., be requested

to act as a Sub-Committee for the purpose of drawing up

Rules for the guidance of the District Committees.” Lost.

Moved by the Rev. D. J. Gogerly, and seconded by Dr.

Misso, “ That the Managing Committee do report in detail

to the next General Meeting, on the formation of the District

Committees.” — Carried.

With reference to the recommendation of the Managing

Committee, “ That the engagement of a Peon to distribute the

Society’s Notices, &c., upon a salary of 5s. per mensem” be

adopted,—lIt wasresolved that the recommendation be adopted.

The Managing Committee report the death of Capt. W.

F. Smith Neill, the Society’s late Secretary, and recommend

that the following expression of regret be entered upon the

General Meeting, Oct. and, 1852, XXXV-

Minutes of the Society, and conveyed by the Secretary to his

family. _

“ That this Meeting do record their sense of the loss this Society has

sustained by the premature and lamented death of their late Secretary,

Capt. W. F. Smith Neill, R. A. On his removal from Colombo by Mili-

tary arrangements, he ceased to act as the Secretary of the Society; but

wherever he was stationed, his youthful aspirations, the literary and scien-

tific turn of his mind, and his anticipations of future fame, were calculated

to be of benefit. Stirring up the indolent, shaming the negligent, and

infusing into Society an impulse which, with a growing maturity of ex-

perience, might have led to valuable results; this Society, and the

limited community of a literary character of this place, can ill afford the

loss of such Members as Capt. Neill.”

Proposed by Mr. Alwis, seconded by Mr. Coomarasamy,

“That this recommendation of the Managing Committee be

agreed to and entered on the Society’s Minutes.”—Carried

unanimously.

Moved by Mr. E. L. Layard, “ That the sum of £5 be

granted for the purchase of instrumentsand materials for the use

of the Museum, and that the Managing Committee be autho-

rised to employ a person as Taxidermist and Librarian, at the

rate of £3 per mensem, until the next Anniversary Meeting.”

Seconded by Rev. D. J. Gogerly, supported by Mr. J. De

Alwis.—Carried.

Moved by Mr. Dalziel, seconded by Mr. E. L. Layard,

** That a copy of the Rules of the Society, signed by the Pre-

sident and the Secretary, be suspended in some conspicuous

place in the Society’s Rooms, and that any alterations or ad-

ditions be from time to time inserted as they occur, and signed

as before.”—Carried.

Moved by the Rev. D. J. Gogerly, and seconded by Lieut.-

Colonel Wilson,“ That the Secretary do convey to His Excel-

lency Sir G. W. Anderson the thanks of this Society for the

kind and timely assistance afforded to it, by permitting the

publication of its Journals at the Government Press.”—Car-

ried by acclamation.

XXXVI. Appendix :—Proceedings of

The Secretary reported the resignation of R. E. Lewis,

Esq., which causing a vacancy in the Managing Committee,

Mr. E. L, Layard moved, and Lieut.-Col. Wilson seconded

the motion, that H. Dudley Esq., C.R.R., be requested to fill

the vacancy.—Carried.

Mr. Dudley acceding to the request, his name was entered

on the Managing Committee. |

With reference to an extract of a letter from Lieut. Hen-

derson, C.R.R., read by the Secretary, it was moved by

Lieut.-Col. Wilson, and seconded by Mr. H. Dudley, “ That

the Secretary be directed to return to Lieut. Henderson his

communication on the foot prints in the rock at Kurnegalle,

with a request that that Gentleman would beso goodas to draw

up a new paper, embodying any fresh matter he may be able

to communicate on a subject so deeply interesting to the

Society.” —Carried.

Moved by Dr. Lamprey, and seconded by Mr. E. L. Layard,

‘¢ That with reference to the Circulars from the Society of

Arts on the new Industrial Exhibition, laid on the table at a

former Meeting, the Ceylon Branch of the Royal Asiatic So-

cicty take the matter into its consideration, in order to carry

out the objects of the Society of Arts, so far as Ceylon is

concerned; and that a Committee be named to carry out these

views.” —Carried. :

Pursuant to notice, Mr. E. L. Layard brought forward

his motion on the propriety of out-station Members voting

on questions before General or Special Meetings.

After much conversation and discussion, the sense of the

Meeting being decided on a restricted view of the case, Mr.

Layard withdrew his motion, and the Secretary was desired

to record on the Minutes, that the sense of this Meeting is

decided on the point, that out-station Members have the pri-

vilege of proposing and seconding gentlemen for admission as

Members, provided they communicate their wishes in writing.

General Meeting, Oct. 2nd, 1852. XXXVI.

Moved by Dr. Lamprey,and seconded by Mr. E. L. Layard,

* That the Photographic apparatus now on sale at Messrs.

Middleton and Co’s establishment, be purchased for a sum not

exceeding £5,”—Carried.

Moved by Dr. Lamprey, and seconded by Lieut. Schaw,

* That an Electro-typing apparatus be purchased for a sum

not exceeding £5.”—Carried.

The Chairman stated, he regretted that his speedy de-

parture to England would compel him to resign his connection

with the Society; but added, that if he could advance the in-

terests of the Society in any way in England, he should be

most happy to do so.

- Moved by Mr. Dudley, and seconded by Lieut. Schaw,

«That this Meeting do record the expression of their regret

at the departure of Col. Wilson from the Island, and that he

be elected an Honorary Member of the Society.”—Carried by

acclamation. )

Colonel Wilson returned thanks.

G. F. Arndt, Esq., proposed by J. N. Mooyaart, Esq., and

seconded by J. De Alwis, Esq., was then elected a Member

of the Society.

The following Donations were then laid on the table:

1. Journal of the Statistical Society of London.

2. ‘The Sidath Sangarawa, by Mr. Alwis the author.

3. The Lanka Nidhana, from the Editor.

4. The Lankabhiwardia, from the Editor.

The thanks of the Society were voted to the donors.

The thanks of the Meeting being then voted to the Chair-

man, the Meeting adjourned.

E. L. LAayarp,

Secretary.

PPD DDI SOP LD ILOILO LID LILI II OO

XXXVI. Appendix :— Proceedings of

GENERAL MEETING, HELD 27TH NOVEMBER, 1852.

Present:—-The Hon’ble Mr. Justice STARKE, Vice-Presi-

dent, in the Chair.

The Rev. J. D. Palm, Rev. J. Kats, Rev. G. R. Muttu-

kistna, Rev. C. Alwis, Dr. Misso, Messrs. Simon Casie

Chitty, Muttu Coomarasamy, L. De Soyza, J. Dalziel, J.

Casie Chitty, R. Dawson, Treasurer, E. L. Layard, Secretary.

Read and confirmed Minutes of last Meeting.

The Secretary reporting that the Minute and Correspond-

ence books, and all the Meteorological Instruments belonging

to the Society, had been sent to England with the late Secre-

tary’s (Captain Neill’s) effects; it was resolved, that the Secre-

tary do communicate with Captain Neill’s friends, and endea-

vour to recover them.

The Secretary read the following recommendation from the

Committee of Management.

“That the Committee do recommend that the year be

divided into two parts, ending 30th June and 31st December

respectively—that all persons elected Members of the Society

before the 30th June, should pay their year’s subscription and

entrance fee; and that ‘persons elected after that date should

not be called upon for their subscription for the current year,

but only for their entrance fee.”

This recommendation being put from the Chair was ap-

proved of :—ordered accordingly. |

Read a letter from Dr. Kelaart (marked A.)

Read a letter from Mr. De Soyza, and its enclosure,

(marked B.)

Read an extract from a letter from Mr. Skeen relative to

printing matters, (marked C). With reference thereto the

Secretary was requested to proceed with the publication of

the Society’s Journal.

Moved by Mr, E. L. Layard, sect by Mr. Simon Casie

Chitty, “ That the Committee of Management be requested

to prepare a Schedule of expenditure of the funds of the So-

General Meeting, Nov. 27th, 1852. XEXIX,

ciety in the hands of the Treasurer at the end of the year,

for the more advantageous expenditure of the same :—this

Schedule not to be departed from except in cases of urgent

necessity.”

After much discussion, the Vice-President, seconded by

the Rey. J. D. Palm, moved as an amendment, that the pro-

position be referred to the Managing Committee for Report.

The original motion and amendment being put from the

Chair, the amendment was carried by a majority of one.

Moved by Mr. E. L. Layard, and seconded by the Vice-

President, that the “Annalsand Magazine of Natural History,”

be added to the list of Periodicals taken by the Society:—

carrried.

Moved by Mr. M. Coomarasamy, that the following

works be purchased by the Society.

Historical sketch of Sanscrit literature, with copious Pep uperaphical

notes from the German of Adelung, 3s.

Bija Ganitar, or the Algebra of the Hindus, translated by Edward

Strachey, 10s. 6d.

Fragmens du Mahabharatta traduits en Francais, sur la texte Sanscrit

de Calcutta, par M. Paver, 6s.

The Ramayana in the original Sanscrit, with an English prose transla-

tion, and notes by W. Carey and J. Marshman.

Essai sur le Pali, par E. Burnouf et Ch. Laessen, 14s.

Madras Scientific Journal.

Ordered, that the list be sound to the Oriental Com-

mittee for report. :

The following gentlemen were then ballotted for and

elected Members of the Society.

Proposed by Mr. M. Coomarasamy.

Seconded by Mr. Simon C. Chitty.

Proposed by Mr. E. LE L yard.

Seconded by Dr. Misso.

Proposed by Rev. G. R. Muttukisina.

Seconded by Mr. Coomarasamy.

Proposed by Rev. G. R. Muttukistna.

Seconded by Mr. E. L. Layard.

Hew Stewart, Esq. . 4

W. Skeen, Esq.

J. Casie Chetty, Esq.

Roy. S. Nicholas.

xl. Appendix :—Proceedings of

Library.— The following donations were then laid on the table.

Nos. 2, 3, 4,5, 6, of Journal of the Eastern Archipelago—Presented by

the Editor.

Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, of the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal for the

current year—Ff’rom the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Meteorological Observations made at Hobart Town—Presented by His

Excellency Sir George W. Anderson.

The Secretary was ordered to convey the thanks of this

Society to the several donors.

Purchased.—No. 31, Vol. 8, of the Journal of the Geological Society of _

London.

Museum.—The Secretary reported the following donations :—

2 Varieties of fresh water Fishes.

18 Do. Marine.

2 Do. Snakes.

2 Centipedes.

1 Scorpion.

4 Varieties of Lizards.

1 Crustacean—Presented by Mr. E. L. Layard.

2 Varieties of Snakes.

1 Tree Frog.

2 Varieties of Lizards.

4 Do. Coleoptera—Procured by the Taxidermist.

A quantity of Bottles presented by Dr. Misso.

The Secretary reported the purchase of anew stand for the

reception of specimens in bottles.

Mr. Ei. L. Layard exhibited a specimen of Sea Island Cot-

ton, grown in the Colonna Corle, Western Province. It was

announced to be of pretty good fibre and of middling strength,

but its colour had been entirely spoilt.

The Secretary announced that the following papers were

ready for perusal.

On some of the Ancient Capitals of Ceylon—By Woodford Birch, Esq.,

Kornegalle.

On Native Ranks and Titles—By the Hon. Mr. Justice Starke, V. P.

Ornithology of Ceylon, Part I—Accipetres. Diurnal and Nocturnal

Birds of Prey—By Dr. Kelaart and Edgar L. Layard, Esq.

General Meeting, Nov. 27th, 1852. xii.

The President moved, that as it was growing late, this Meet-

ing do adjourn till Saturday next at 1 o’clock, p. m., for the

purpose of reading the papers now before it.

Mr. Simon C. Chetty seconded the motion.

Mr. E. Li. Layard opposed the motion, on the ground that

Meetings in the day-time interfered with official duties, and

if they were frequent he should feel it incumbent upon him

to resign the honour of being the Society’s Secretary. He

moved, as an amendment, that the reading of papers be

postponed till the Evening Meetings.

Mr. Dawson seconded the amendment.

A considerable discussion now ensued, and the original

motion and the amendment being put from the Chair, the

latter was carried by a majority of one.

Mr. Dawson kindly placing his house at the disposal of the

Membérs for the next Evening Meeting, it was resolved to

adjourn this meeting till Wednesday next at 8 o’clock, p.m.,

at Mr. Dawson’s residence ; and the thanks of the Meeting

having been voted to the Chair, it adjourned accordingly.

EE, L. Layarp,

Flony. Secy.

Kaduganava, 22d November, 1852.

- To the Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Ceylon.

My DEAR SiR,

It gives me great pleasure to find you the successor of so worthy aman

as the late Secretary, whose untimely death no one could deplore more

sincerely than I do ; and it is to be hoped that your period of office will

be a longer one, and that before it is terminated you will have established

for the Society what is now wanted, viz. a Museum of all the Zoological

productions of the Island. Calcutta, Madras, and Bombay, have each a

Museum, Ceylon none, or only apologies for one. The Society alone could

not support an institution of the kind ; the aid of Government is required ;

and surely the Legislative Council will not hesitate to vote £100 a year

for so laudable a purpose.

VOL. It. : J,

xiii. Appendix :—Proceedings of

I regret that my health has not permitted me to complete the first part

of our conjoint paper on the Ornithology of Ceylon, Butif the Society

will receive a small portion of it as an instalment of what is to come, I

promise to have the rest done in time to appear in the next Number of

the Journal. My work is nearly ready for delivery. Since it was com-

pleted, I have come up here for the benefit of my health. Although the

Estate is not very prolific of Coffee, its soil has yielded not less than four

species of Uropeltide, or rough tails (Dapat Nayas), one the very remark-

able species with keeled scales to the shield of the tail, Siluboura Zeylon-

icus, Cuv. R. A. ii. 76. The three others are not described in Grey’s Ca-

talogue, nor do they belong to any of the three divisions of Uropeliide

given by Mr. Gray. I have proposed new genera for them. One of the

three is already described in my work, from specimens collected at Trin-

comalie. The two others are new to me; one, a very elegant species, I

propose calling after an old friend, Uropeltis Trevelyani, it is about 14

inches long, and 1 inch in circumference. Black above, margin of scales

pale. White beneath, with longitudinal series of black spots, formed of

central spots on each scale. A line of triangular white spots, with their

apices pointed upwards along each side; vent and lower part of tail white,

which is carried on to the upper part. Tail short, obliquely truncated,

and nearly covered with a conical granular shield. Vent shields 1—2.

The young is of a bluish or bluish black. Found about three feet under

sround in ant-holes.

The other species, which I propose naming after our distinguished friend

Mz. Blyth, is 16 inches long; circumference 1 3-10th inch. Head 4-10th

inch. Dark yellowish brown above, with darker brown spots on the an-

terior third of scales. Paler beneath. Sides of nape and neck waved with

angular spots of yellowish hue, yellow spots on each side of vent. Ros-

trum yellow. Tail thick, slightly truncated, conical, upper part of ter-

mination covered with a small subtriangular granular shield, lower sur-

face smooth, covered with broad scales. Vent shields 1—2. ‘This species

too is found in the same locality, but on softer ground, near rivulets.

Singular that I have not been able to get any specimens of Yyphlops,

the Argyrophis Bramicus must be found in the paddy fields at Colombo.

This is the only species of this genus hitherto seen in the Island. India

produces many, and as many no doubt exist in Ceylon, if people will only

bring all they meet with in the marshes. I am not collecting any birds,

and I have not seen any which I have not previously got. The most

numerous species here at present are two kinds of finches, Amadina

undulata and A. Malabarica, Zosterops palpebrosus, Pycnonotus He-

morrhinus, and P. nigricapilla; Paleornis cyanocephalus, and your beau-

General Meeting, Nov. 27th, 1852. xiii.

tiful new species, P. Calthrope. Psittacus Asiaticus is also abundant.

Copsychus saularis and Matacocercus griseus are also plentiful.

I have described a new species of house lizard found here, Gymnodace

éylus Kandianus, much smailer than the common house lizard of Colombo,

Hemidaciylus frenatus, of which we have here a very large variety, I pre-

sume, unless it turns out to be the much coveted H. Leschenaultii. The

new Gecko, above alluded to, is a diurnal species, with round pupils. The

pupils of every other species known in the Island are vertical (like cat’s

eyes.) Here we seea very curious adaptation of the visual organs to the

habits of the animal. 1 have also added lately Piripia Peronii to my list

of Geckotide; it is easily known by its clawless thumbs. They are very

abundant on every house in the town of Kandy and Kaduganava. I hope

you will induce other Members of the Society to communicate in a familiar

manner any Zoological or Botanical notes they may make, so that every

circumstance, however trivial and unimportant it may seem, may prove

interesting to the future if not to the present Members of this Society.

“ Nihil est aliud magnum quam multa minuta.”

Believe me,

Very sincerely your’s,

KE. F. KEeLaart.

P.S.—Since writing the above, I have spent a few days at Dr. Mar-

shall’s, Allagalla, where I have obtained a species of Nessia, probably

identical with NV. Burtonit of Gray, of which there appears to be only one

specimen in the European cabinets, and that, too, at Fort Pitt Museum,

doubtless sent there many years ago, by some Army Medical Officer

serving in Ceylon, if it proves now that my specimen is of the same spe-

cies; of this, however, I have some doubts. You will observe that Gray

founded the genus Nxssia from this solitary specimen in Fort Pitt, and

named it after Staff Surgeon Burton, who was then in charge of the

Museum.

The specimen from Allagalla (38000 ft.) is vermiform in appearance,

about 5 inches long, with 4 small legs, having 3 sub-equal small toes on

each. Dark rufous brown above and spotted with darker brown on the

anterior part of each scale. Dark grey beneath, clouded and spotted.

Found in vegetable mould on a Coffee plantation. From the same inter-

esting locality, Ihave a specimen of Argyrophis Bramicus, (young,) brown

above with a broad pale whitish line beneath. The crenulated subter-

minal edge of the rostral and nasal shields, became very perceptible after

the specimen was immersed in spirits for some days. In the collection

you have sent me for examination, I find a Typhlops, in which the head is

xliy. Appendix :—Proceedings of

partly destroyed. The other little spotted creature, of an olive brown |

colour, is evidently the young of a species of Aconitas, which is not

described in Gray’s Catalogue; if new, I shall have much pleasure in

naming it Aconitas Layardi. ‘The only other species of the same genus in

the British Museum is A. meleagris from the Cape of Good Hope. In

form the genus Aconiias is very like Nessia, without the limbs, or exter-

nal opening to the ear.

To the Secretary of the Ceylon Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society.

SIR,

I have deferred returning Mr. Brodie’s letter on the subject of Sin-

ghalese Numerals, in the expectation of procuring a copy of an ancient

Singhalese work, which I had been given to understand exists on the

subject, and of submitting a translation of it to the Society; but being

disappointed in this expectation, I hasten to return the letter, with many

apologies for detaining it so long with me.

I have, however, little or nothing of importance to add to 5 Mr. Brodie’s

explanation of the system of Singhalese Numerals, which appears to be

correct. These numerals may be found in Chater’s Singhalese Grammar,

Prinsep’s Comparative table of Alphabets, and in a recent work on Sin-

ghalese Grammar published by a learned Member of our Society.

In reference, however, to that part of Mr. Brodie’s letter, in which he

speaks of the difficulty of carrying on any arithmetical operation by means

of these numerals, and inquires how the “ Native Astrologers make their

calculations,” and whether “ they do calculate at all?” I venture to submit

a few remarks, which I hope may not altogether prove devoid of interest.

Mr. Brodie is quite correct in saying, that ‘the commonest arithmetical

processes become almost impossible under this system;” but it must not

hence be inferred that the native astrologers make no calculations. I

believe it is well known that the natives do make calculations, not only in

Astrology, but in Astronomy, which cannot be done without a consider-

able knowledge of the science of numbers, as is evident from the fact of —

their being able to predict the eclipses of the sun and moon, and

determine the positions of the planets ; though of course on principles

less accurate and less perfect than those of Modern Europe.

For the purpose of these calculations, however, they do not employ the

numerals in question, but either use some small shells or grains of paddy

(by means of which an arithmetical operation is easily carried on), or

another series of numerals called “ Katapayadi ganana,” in which numbers

are expressed much in the same way as in European systems of notation,

General Meeting, Nov. 27th, 1852. lv

The latter system serves the double purpose of a system of numerals

and of artificial memory, closely resembling Dr. Grey’s Memoria Technica.

It is called anOes02 wa7en, from the first series of letters repre-

senting the numeral one. The following letters represent the following

numbers.

WOW OD eccevveeed

C)SOOCD soeeee Dy

DOS 2660s. OS

es Oes Seles

EKO Goo oooaKe

BQO) E veers aay!)

ROO SD reccece «Os

By means of these letters an artificial word may be formed precisely in

the same manner as is done in Dr. Grey’s system of Mnemonics. Thus

the present year of the Buddhist era 2395, may be expressed OO71@

Gens), The Saka era 1774 SSeson, the only difference between this

system and that of Dr. Grey being, that in the one figures are read from

right to left, and in the other from left to right.

There is another highly curious way of denoting numbers by means of

different objects of nature. This is called epee308289®, and from its

apparently primitive and hieroglyphical character, I fancy may be traced

idea of the principles upon which this system is founded, may be formed

from the following examples, which occur inancient Sanscrit and Singha-

lese works; thus

: f xepresents 1 (there is but one Meru

oa AUS oe ) mountain in the world.)

Geis (eyes)... .... . —represents 2.

SeG@olayay ss-1 0%... — ‘, 3. (Shiva has 3 eyes.)

ode (Veda) Gee CR ae 3 4, (There are 4 Vedas.)

* 5. (there are 5 darts of

ad (Cana) Galts . (6... Cupid.)

Oe (rasa) tastes ..... . —represents 6. (there are 6 tastes.)

+ 7. (there are 7 principal

oowe (sella) rocks. .... eee in the native systems of Cos-

mogony.

Sela : Appenti Proceedings of:

SIIG (naga) oe ga) represents this No. is not ap-

{ represents 8. (the reason i (Na-

{ parent.)

cnc) (graha) «+ + «+o + » « —represents 9. (there are9 planets.)

12. (he passes through -

ag me fee

eg re) (marthanda) Su the 12 signs of the Zodiac.)

epenoes (Akasa) space . . . . —represents 0.

There is another series of numerals in use among the Singhalese, called

“Lit-illakkan” “Almanac Numerals ;’—they are as follows:

\ G) et a ee. ee) lie

PHI AA HR wh

Om |

32 98,0 2n a2 dS

These numerals do not extend beyond the number 60, the number of

payas in a day according to the Singhalese division of time.

I remain, Sir,

Your most obedient servant,

L. Dz Zoysa.

Anooradhapoora, 15th July, 1852.

SIR,

I have the pleasure to enclose a list ofthe Singhalese Numerals up to

ten thousand. It may be that these are known to many Members of the

Society, but they are certainly almost obsolete at the present day, and I

had so much difficulty in obtaining them, that I think it possible that

some one may be saved trouble by having this table before him.

A og *

at i isi liao : SAreentame: glans 5 fp Fang Ae Seonereelge any ine

; é g ¢ i Fries ahs is od

Weenie ort ped ae atime aig ep vine ge ap eon Raines remcererer uh La

aS ,

Trea Rarrinier ett ois SCRE aaa aapd uel prticine lee ipha tiene aia

aoe

tits! “ Sat

RS A oie AE on eal aR RE

an Se er ne,

este ARO RY LN EOI as ph mnie as Ria

‘ 5)

Nee Cap apictmz mee tg

rpaapnies

pasiniabchayah Md gyae gO Hed

RRR Se) BEAEA REIN

General Meeting, March 5th, 1853. xlyu.

As will be observed, the numerals follow a decimal notation; they do

not however take value according to position, nor yet are there any co-

efficients to answer the same end, there is simple juxtaposition of the

isolated numbers and nothing more. Thus 1852 would be written thus:

a) es Cc

Te Sa eee lacs HO

one thousand eight | hundred | fifty two

a separate sign for each word.

that is

Of course the commonest arithmetical processes become almost impos-

sible under such a system, and mental calculation must be resorted to.

It would be interesting to know how the native astrologers make their

calculations, that is, if they do calculate at all: and also, the affinity which

may exist between the numerals of the Singhalese and other allied tribes,

such as some of the hill people on the Continent of India; and lastly, whe-

ther these signs are, in fact, the letters of any language.

I am not aware that there is any sign equivalent to our 0, nor does it

appear distinctly that the signs for the multiples of ten are compounded

of the sign for ten and that for its multiplicator.

| I have the honor to be,

Sir,

Your most obedient servant,

; A. Oswatp Bropiz.

The Secretary of the

Royal Asiatic Society,

Colombo.

ANNUAL GENERAL MEBTING, HELD 5TH MARCH, 1853.

Present:—Rev. D. J. Goemriy in the Chair.

R. Dawson, Esq., Rev. C. Alwis, Mr. L. De Zoysa, Mr.

J. Alwis, Dr. J. B. Misso, Mr. M. Coomarasamy, Captain

Dudley, C. R. R., and Dr. Lamprey, 15th Regiment.

Tue following Report of the Committee by the Hon’ble

Justice Starke, acting Secretary, was read and adopted.

feport.

*“ Your Committee, in making their Report at this time,

have to renew their expressions of regret at the early and

lamented decease of the former Secretary of your Society,

zyart | Appendix :—Proceedings of —

and the retirement of another, since the last Annual Meeting.

Such events necessarily affect the, movements of a Society

like this ; and they, with other circumstances, have concurred

to give an appearance of less efficiency to the proceedings of

the Society during the past year than we had any reason to

expect. On the contrary, our anticipations were of the most

favourable kind.

But notwithstanding all this, your Committee cannot

doubt either the importance or the progress of the seanee

both absolutely and relatively.

The funds of the Society have been accumulating, and are

at present larger in amount than at any former period ; and :

in the course of the past year, a very considerable addition

has been made to the list of Members, while the donations to

the Library and Museum tend at once to enrich our stores

with objects of permanent value, and to evince a continued

confidence in your Society, as the proper depository of all

that may conduce to illustrate the condition or develope the

resources of the Island. And your Committee, observing

the contributions in Science made by Members of your So-

ciety elsewhere, cannot doubt that with better means for the

reception, examination, and arrangement of donations, such

‘would be very largely increased.

And here your Committee would express a hope, that His

Excellency the Governor, who by his donations to the Library,

and the leave so readily granted by him to have the Journal

again printed at the Government Press, has manifested his

patronage, will favour the Society by directing arrangements

which will ensure to us a freer use of the room than we lat-

terly have had. This would allow an extended accommodation

for the Library and Museum, as well as for the Meetings of

Members; and they confidently anticipate, that on a repre-

sentation of the matter, such an arrangement would be made.

Your Committee therefore consider, that their attention

should be continued to this subject, with a view to such ex-

General Meeting, March 5th, 1853. | xlix.

tended accommodation, and they would at the same time sug-

gest, that a Curator of the Museum should now be appointed,

whose duty it shall be to superintend the reception of all

articles in that department transmitted to the Society, and to

have the same speedily submitted to examination, and re-

ported on, and suitably arranged; the Librarian continuing

his attention to the Books, Manuscripts, Coins,and Antiquities

of the Society.

The increasing number and value of the articles in the

Library and Museum, as well as the different character of

study and skill required in the several departments of Science

and Literature, render such separation of duties desirable, and

now requisite, for the proper care and advancement of the

departments.

The Curator of the Museum will thus be a permanent

office-bearer of the Society, distinct from the Librarian, and

elected annually with the other office-bearers.

The present Taxidermist was appointed at the Meeting of

20th October last, on trial for three months, at £3 per men-

sem, and he still continues. Your Committee think his fitness

should now be settled, and they recommend that the matter

be referred to the Committee, with powers for appointment,

or for further trial, or for the trial of any other, as they in

conjunction with the Curator of the Museum, shall see fit.

Advyerting also to the state of the Library, your Committee

consider authority should be given to procure additional cases

for the increasing number of the books; and as some inconve-

nience has been felt in regard to ship and other charges for

letters and packages, and for the calling in of books from -

out-stations, your Committee are of opinion that the Treasurer

should be authorized to defray all necessary charges in this

respect, under the sanction and direction of the Committee;

it being always distinctly understood that the carriage of books

to Members, and the due return of borrowed books, is at the

expense of the parties.

VOL. Il. g

1, Appendix :— Proceedings of

Moreover, as nothing definite has yet been done in regard

to the five issued Vols. of Reeve’s Iconica Conchologica, men-

tioned at a late meeting of the Committee as for sale and in

good order, your Committee are of opinion that the subject

should be again referred to them for consideration: so as in

this as in other cases, a favourable opportunity of adding to

the Library books of acknowledged value should not be lost.

Your Committee would further propose that the General

Rules and Regulations of the Society, and the Rules of the

Library, should, together with a Catalogue of the books and

various articles contained in the Library and Museum, be

printed in a concise form and separately from the Journal,

for the information of Members and others, and that the stores

of the Society may be made as available as possible, as well

as deficiencies seen and supplied.

And here your Committee are led to observe, with refer-

ence to another Society in Colombo, that they are not in the

least conflicting Societies; they differ altogether in their

constitution, in their purposes, and in their mode of operation.

The design of this Society is to institute and promote in-

quiries into the History, Religion, Literature, Arts and Social

Condition of the present and former inhabitants of this Island,

with its Geology and Mineralogy, its Climate and Meteorology,

its Botany and Zoology. The object of the Colombo Atheneum

is wholly different; and they pursue their respective objects

in quite a different way. The Athenxum is not limited as

to place, nor restrained as to its subjects; and in its endea-

vours to unite in the Lectures given, the interest which may

arise from oral delivery, from the play of fancy, or the

resources of intellect, in illustration, and the more substantial

course of views, diagrams, and experiments, it seeks to convey

information with amusement, to take us up the hill of know-

ledge and to the heights of science, otherwise than by the

old way of a laborious and difficult ascent, and make learning

pleasant to the soul not merely when attained but in the very

process of acquiring it.

;

General Meeting, March 5th, 1853. hi.

The two Societies may therefore go on, not only with-

out rivalry but without jealousy; and all may contribute to

literary and social progress.

Since the last Quarterly Meeting the following additional

numbers of the Journal of the Indian Archipelago have been

received, vizt. for July and August (one No.) in December

last, and fer September and October recently.

The Rev. B. Boake has also favoured the Society by

presenting to the Library Vol. 3 of the Transactions of the

Royal Asiatic Society, and a volume of Specimens of the

Popular Poetry of Persia, collected and translated by A.

Chodzko, Esq.

A communication was also received in December last from

W. C. Ondaatje, Esq., Badulla, with the Articles mentioned

ina Memorandum of Vegetable products of Ceylon, presented

by him to the Society, as follows, viz.

“1. Cinnamon suet. Oil from the seeds of the Cinnamon, collected at

Badulla.

2. Oil from what I think the Daphnidium, Cubeba, Nees., Laurus Cu-

beba, Laur.

3. Ceylon Gamboge Oil.

4. Qil from Ceylon Oak, Schleicheia trijuga.

5. Fibrous Sack, prepared from the Liber or endotheleum of a tree

described in my “Observations,” (on the Vegetable Products of Ceylon.)

6. Specimen of Tinnevelly Senna, cultivated at Putlam by me.

7. Wood Oil or Wood Tar extracted from the Sethia Indica, collected

at Putlam, together with a dried specimen of the tree.

8. Root of the Rubia cordifolia which was discovered by me on the

8th December, 1852, at Badulla.”—Badulla, 15th December, 1852.

In reference to No. 5 of the preceding list, your Com-

mittee would draw the attention of the Curator of the

Museum, by whom the articles will be carefully examined,

to a “specimen of the wood of the Riti Gaha, anda bag

made of the bark as used by the natives, from E. R.

Power, Esq.,” and laid before the Society 1st December, 1849.

Your Committee recommend that a Local Committee

be now appointed for Jaffna, the more effectually to carry

hii. Appendix :—Proceedings of

out the objects and advance the interests of the Society

at that important station, by collecting information on the

spot, on the several subjects within the sphere of the Society’s

sperations, and forwarding the same with suggestions, to the

Secretary of the Society at Colombo,—such Committee hav-

ing, however, no power or authority to collect or receive money

otherwise than in conformity with the Rules and Regulations

of the Society, nor to incur any expense without the previous

sanction of the General Committee of the Society. Other

Local Committees will also fall to be appointed at subsequent

meetings of the Society, as circumstances appear to require.

Your Committee further recommend, that Capt. Chapman’s

letters, of date February and March 1852, be referred to the

Oriental Committee for their consideration and report, so

that an answer to those interesting and valuable letters may

be despatched at the earliest opportunity. The same Com-

mittee should also be instructed to collect together the figures,

sculptured slabs, and inscriptions or copies of such, belonging

to the Society, as also the plan of the ruins of Pollaneuera

near Trincomalie, presented by J. N. Mooyaart, Esq., and

make a Report thereon.

And as several valuable specimens of the woods of Ceylon

have at different times been presented to the Society, your

Committee recommend that a Committee should be appointed

to collect these together and report on their number, de-

scription, character and economical uses, with suggestions in

regard to their future custody and inspection.

From the Treasurer’s statement which is annexed, of date

5th February, there is a balance in favour of the Society of

£88 12s. 3d., independent of the arrears yet to be collected

and the subseriptions for 1853 now due.

Your Committee have at length the satisfaction of laying

upon the Table a portion of the second Volume of the So-

ciety’s Journal. There was reason to suppose it would have

been out before the close of last year; but in this your Com-

General Meeting, March 5th, 1853. hii.

mittee were disappointed, and even now there are several

pages in print, which, as they require revision, have been

postponed. As however, it has been considered desirable to

have some part at least in the hands of the Members, your

Committee have required its appearance in its present limited

form, rather than consent to the publication being longer de-

layed. Your Committee are happy tosay no inconvenience in

binding upthe Volumewill thence arise; asby thearrangement

now adopted the paging will becontinuous from the commence-

ment of the volume to its termination, whatever may be the

number of parts of which it is composed, or the times of their

publication.”

The Treasurer read the following statement :—

TREASURER’S STATEMENT.

The accounts for the last year are closed, and shew the receipts to the

3lst December, to be

From the ex-Treasurer ............ co27 3 1

From Government on account of

the Great Exhibition ............... 6 7 8

Collections during the year ......... 108 16 0

£147 6 9

Expenditure during the year ...... 58 14 6

Balance on 31st December 1852...£88 12 3

The funds in hand at the end of the year exceed the expenditure during

the period the present Treasurer has been in office by £29. 17s. 9d.

The number of Members on the list on Ist January 1853 is seventy-nine,

whose subscriptions are now due; and in addition arrears to the amount

of upwards of £50 are yet expected to be collected. Should these arrears

be all got in, and no loss experienced in the current year’s collections, the

amount available for expenditure during the year will be £221. 11s. 3d.

Rosrert Dawson,

Colombo, 6th March, 1853. Treasurer, R. A. S. C. B.

Two receipts enclosed, Nos. 100 and 182, being for the subscriptions of

H. Mooyaart, Esq., and J. N. Mooyaart, Esq., are stated to have ben paid

to the Provincial Committee at Jaffna, amount £2. 12s. 6d.

R.D.

liv. Appendix :—Proceedings of

The Office-bearers and Committee, with the Patron and

Vice Patron of the Society for the year, were then nominated

and appointed as follows :—

Patron.

His Excellency the Governor of Ceylon.

Vice-Patrons.

The Hon. Sir Anthony Oliphant, C. B., Chief Justice,

The Right Rev. the Bishop of Colombo.

President.

The Hon. C. J. MacCarthy, Esq.

Vice-President.

The Rev. D. J. Gogerly.

Secretary.

J. Lamprey, M. B., 15th Regiment.

Treasurer.

Robert Dawson, Esq.

Librarian.

The Hon. Mr. Justice Starke.

Joint Curators of the Museum, and of the Scientific Instruments

belonging to the Society.

Major Lushington, C. B., 37th Regiment.

J. C. Hoffman, M. D., Staff Assistant Surgeon.

COMMITTEE.

The Hon. H. C. Selby, Esq. The Rev. Dr. Kessen.

The Hon. J. Caulfeild, Esq. Lieut. Schaw, R. E.

Captain Steuart. Dr, J. B. Misso.

The following special Committees were then appointed.

ORIENTAL COMMITTEE.

James De Alwis, Esq., Convener.

M. Coomarasamy, Esq.; Revd. J. G. Kats; Rev. G. R.

Muttukistna; and L. De Zoysa, Esq. ; with power to add te

their number.

Para ee Ry RK oe FS

General Meeting, March 5th, 1853. lv.

JAFFNA COMMITTEE.

J. N. Mooyaart, Esq. Chairman.

E. 5S. Whitehouse, Esq., and H. F. Muttukistna, Esq., with

power to add to their number; being always ordinary Mem-

bers of the Society.

THE Woops CoMMITTEE.

The Rev. C. Alwis, and Dr. Misso ; with power to add to

their number.

The following Gentlemen were then proposed and elected

members of the Society :—

Major Cole, 15th Regiment. \ Proposed by R. Dawson, E's.

Percy Alvin, Esq. Seconded by Dr. Lamprey.

Lieut. Philpotts. . ; Proposed by Dr. Lamprey.

Seconded by R. Dawson, Esq.

Mr. Dawson drew the attention of the Meeting to the

Society’s Journal for the past year, which was laid on the

Table, and stated that its curtailed form was owing to the

proofs of some of the papers which were intended for publi-

cation not being as yet sufficiently corrected for the Press,

and that consequently, a considerable portion remained in

the hands of the Printer. Under existing circumstances, it

was deemed better to issue the Journal in its present incom-

plete condition rather than entail further delay. The remain-

der, as soon as it will be printed off, may either be issued

immediately or kept back and bound up in the forthcoming

number ; in either case the numbering of the pages will be

continuous with the portionnowlaid onthe table. This delay

wasmore to be regretted, as it prevents the immediate appear-

ance of several interesting papers, which, together with those

of Mr. Gogerly and Mr. Brodie, would have made the vo-

lume of 1853, a very interesting and valuable number. Mr.

Dawson concluded by stating that in conformity with the

Ivi. Appendix :— Proceedings of

Rules of the Society, which entitled ordinary members to

two copies of the Society’s Journal, the Members present

would receive each two copies of the part now published and

laid on the Table.

It was then proposed by Dr. Lamprey and seconded by Mr.

Comarasamy, That a vote of special thanks be given to Mr.

Ondaatje for his extremely interesting contributions to the

Society, and that he be requested to give an account of the

mode of preparing the several products he has contributed,

and also what medical or other properties those products are

commonly supposed to be possessed of, by the Singhalese ;

and further, that he be requested to continue to devote him-

self to researches in the Vegetable Products of Ceylon.

It was also proposed by Dr. Lamprey and seconded by

Mr. Dawson, That examples of as many of the Vegetable

products of Ceylon as can be procurable, and which are not

generally known, be sent to some eminent Professors of

Materia Medica and Chemistry in Europe, for their analysis

and examination, as the best means of ascertaining and

making known their utility.

. Dr. Lamprey then stated, that before separating he wished

to say a few words to the Meeting about a move that has

already been in contemplation, and which has been alluded

to in the able Report just read, namely, the establishing the

Society in some building more appropriate to their Meetings,

Museum and Library, than the limited space they now oc-

cupy ; but being unprepared with a specific plan and estimate

of a building, which he, Dr. Lamprey, was inhopesto have laid

before the present Meeting, he must only defer it to another

occasion ; in the mean time, the matter would receive every

assistance from Lieut. Schaw of the Royal Engineers, and

he doubted not but that for a few hundred pounds very con-

venient and suitable rooms could be erected. It was consi-

dered that this sum could be raised by uniting the funds of

Committee Meeting, April 4th, 1853. Ivii.

the Athenzum with those of the Asiatic Society, and

completing the amount by a public subscription. The advan-

tages of the project would be highly beneficial to both So-

cieties, and the public would benefit largely likewise; it

being also in contemplation to erect a Chemical laboratory, to

be attached to the building, the utility of which would soon

be made manifest either in furnishing a means for carefully

analysing such valuable products as those contributed by Mr.

Ondaatje to the Society, or as forming a basis for establishing

a School of Chemistry and Natural Philosophy for general

istruction. In conclusion, he thought the better plan of

bringing the subject before the Society would be, a reading

a paper on it atsome Evening meeting.

The business of the Meeting having ended, a vote of thanks

was given to the Chairman, and the Meeting separated.

J. LAMPREY, M.B.

Hony. Secy.

AID IDINI TLIO OLS OO

COMMITTEE MEETING, HELD 4TH APRIL, 1853.

_ Present :—-The Hon'ble Justice STARKE, in the Chair; Dr.

_ Misso, Dr. Lamprey.

q _ The first subject taken into consideration was the propriety

_ of purchasing a Waterlow’s Lithographic Press, now in the

_ possession of Messrs. Wilson Ritchie and Co., and offered for

_ sale at its original cost, £14. 16s., to be used in Lithographing .

4 the numerous Rock inscriptions and drawings which have

- accumulated among the Society’s papers; also for describing:

4 the Inscriptions ona collection of interesting Coins in the So-

' ciety’s Museum, and for illustrating the Journal generally,

‘ for which it appears to be admirably adapted.

4 The Committee having duly considered the subject, daoued

it desirable, on account of the great expense attending the

| printing of illustrations in England, and the want of such a

VOL, II. h

Iyui, Appendix :—Proceedings of

press in the Government or any other Printing establishment |

in Ceylon, that the Society should be in possession of a means |

of publishing in their Journal the illustrations already in their

possession, as well as those that may be contributed hereafter, |

agree in the recommendation, and instruct the Secretary to |

purchase the Lithographic Press on the most advantageous !

terms, and authorize the Treasurer to discharge the amount |

accordingly.

It being stated that some of the proceedings of the past |

Meetings of the Society, now in the course of publication, were |

illustrated with wood-cuts when published in a Newspaper |

of the Colony, it was desirable to know whether it would be |}

better to procure the wood-cuts from the Editor on terms, or |

to engrave them anew, the expense of which might be greater |

than the sum asked for. |

It was agreed to leave the matter in the hands of Mr. Skeen, |

and authorize the Treasurer to pay the amount specified. |

The Secretary having informed the Meeting of the recent |

receipt of a letter marked A. of the proceedings, together with |

some books from the Smithsonian Institution of America, it

was agreed to send a complete series of the Society’s Journal |

in return, to be accompanied with a letter of thanks expressing |

the deep interest thatthe Society entertains for the Institution, |

and the anxious wish it has to keep up a correspondence by

an interchange of publications. |

_ It was agreed to send a series of the Journal to the Editor |

of the Journal of the Eastern Archipelago, together with a |

letter of thanks for his donations of the Numbers to the |

BER.

Committee Meeting, April 4th, 1853, ix:

Report of the Annual Meeting. And as regards the other

matters contained in the letter, they were to be reserved for

consideration at another Meeting.

Mr. Ondaatje’s letter, marked C. of the proceedings, having

been read and laid on the table, the Secretary was requested

to acknowledge the same in a letter of thanks.

The proceedings of the Meeting here terminated.

J. LAMPREY,

Hony. Secy.

Smithsonian Institution, Washington, United Siates of America,

June 21st, 1852.

SIR,

On behalf of the Smithsonian Institution, we this day forward, through

the agent specified, one package, containing the works mentioned in the

accompanying list, intended as presents from the Smithsonian Institution,

and the other parties indicated, to the Asiatic Society of Ceylon.

It is earnestly requested that an acknowledgment be made through our

agent, immediately on the arrival of these works, as no further transmis-

sion will be made on the part of the Institution until this is received. A

special acknowledgment is also desired for each of the other parties.

The Institution, when desired, will act as the medium of communication

between the Learned Bodies of Europe and America, as heretofore, and

supply such especial desiderata as may be at its disposal.

In return, the Smithsonian Institution desires to receive as full series

as possible of all publications of Learned Societies, of Universities, Li-

braries, and Foreign Governments, Periodicals, and indeed, anything

else of a Scientific or Literary nature.

Very respectfully, your obedient servant,

JosepH Henry,

Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.

List of Books.

_ Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, Vol. IIL, 4to., (1852,) pp.

_ 564, and 35 plates.

Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, Vol. IV., 4to., 1852, pp. 416.

Fifth Annual Report of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian In-

stitution, 8vo., pp. (1851.)

Ix. Appendix :— Proceedings of

Smithsonian Report on Recent Improvements in the Chemical Arts.

By Booth and Morfit, 8vo., pp. 216.

Directions for Collecting Specimens of Natural History, 8vo., pp. 24.

Registry of Periodical Phenomena.

List of Works published by the Smithsonian Institution.

List of Foreign Institutions with which the Smithsonian Institution is

in Correspondence.

Abstract of the 7th Census of the United States.

Kaigalle, March 26th, 1853.

Dear Sir,

I regret having been prevented from attending the General Meeting

of the Asiatic Society on the 5th instant, as I might have{ been able to

communicate more satisfactory information respecting the Provincial

Committee at Jaffna, than seems to have been afforded to the Meeting.

if my correspondence, as Chairman of that Committee, with the lamented

Captain Neill, and subsequently with his successor, be forthcoming, you

will be acquainted with all the proceedings of that Committee. Since

Captain Neill’s demise, the Jaffna Committee was kept perfectly in the dark

respecting the views of the Auxiliary Society at Colombo. Had it been

made acquainted with the sentiments of the latter Institution, the Jaffna

Committee might have chalked out for itself an eligible sphere of useful-

ness. On reference to the last communication I addressed to Mr. Layard

in the month of June, you will perceive, that on my quitting that station,

Mr. Byrne undertook the charge of President, to which nomination I

could not obtain the concurrence of the Committee, as no Meeting took

place, consequent on the non-attendance of the requisite number of

Members to form a quorum. These circumstances, I notice, are omitted

in the proceedings published in the Observer of the 24th.

With a degree of encouragement and co-operation on the part of the

Colombo Committee, I am disposed to think that of Jaffna would prove

a useful Auxiliary, in exploring valuable materials of information relative

to the Northern part of the Island. The disposal by the Local Commit-

tee of the funds raised on the spot, seems desirable, as certain disburse-

ments are unavoidable, where a working body is trying to be useful. It

is upon this principle, that the Parent Society in London recognizes |

the exercise of this privilege by its Auxiliaries. In the anticipation that |

the Colombo Committee would concur in a similar arrangement, that of

Jafina has incurred some expense in the preparation for forming a |

Museum. This proceeding seems not to meet the approval of the Co- |

lombo Institution, inasmuch as it is not disposed to sanction the expen-

diture at the out-station of the subscriptions obtained on the spot. To

restrict & working Committee in the disposal of the funds at its disposal

Committee Meeting, April 4th, 1853. lai.

from locai contributions, without the previous sanction of the General

Committee, seems calculated to cramp the operations of both Institutions.

In what light this restriction may be viewed at Jaffna remains to be seen.

A more liberal course is likely to promote far better the objects of the

Asiatic Society, as joint action in any locality is obviously preferable to

individual exertions.

I shall feel obliged by your favouring me at your convenience with a

copy of the Parts of the Number of the Journal already published. Were

a suitable number of copies of the Proceedings, and of other papers which

are intended for publication, to be at once struck off and circulated

amongst the Members, they would be more interested in the General

Proceedings of the Society. Were these publications to be conducted on

an uniform plan and the pages numbered, the sheets might easily be

bound at the expense of each subscriber, when the volume is completed.

By this expedient, the Members generally would be en courant with the

proceedings of the Colombo Committee.

The late Capt. Neill favoured me with a printed copy containing 90

very interesting and important queries. Such papers, circulated both m

English and the Native languages amongst persons who might be disposed

to furnish information on such topics, would elicit communications

which might prove valuable.

I remain, &c.

J. N. Mooyaarr.

C. Badulla, 3\st March, 1853.

SIR,

I beg to forward herewith, (under cover to the Hon’ble the Colo-

nial Secretary), a few specimens of Vegetable products enumerated in

the annexed Memorandum, and to acquaint you that I will have much

pleasure in sending you a copy of my pamphlet, wherein the mode of

preparation and uses of the various articles already presented to your

Society are fully described.

Allow me to draw your attention tothe “ Kino,” which is the produce

of the Pterocarpus Marsupium, Roxb., and indigenous to the Patnas

around Badulla. It grows luxuriantly on the Lemon grass hills, and

yields the gum in great abundance. It is now believed to be the species

which produces the genuine Gum Kino of commerce.

I hope shortly to be able to submit to you a full account of this tree,

and the mode of extracting the gum, (gum-resin).

TI remain, &c.

W. C. Onpaartsez.

Ixii. Appendix :— Proceedings of

Memorandum referred to.

1. Seeds of the Ceylon Sack tree.

2. Ceylon Madder Lake.—Specimens dyed with the Ceylon Madder.

3. Gum Kino, extracted from the Pterocarpus Marsupium, Roxb.,

growing on the hills (Patnas) around Badulla.

4. Ceylon Gamboge, extracted from the Hebradendum gambogioides,

at Badulla.

5. Resin from the Vateria indica, from Bintenne.

Fibre from the Hibiscus Cannabinus, collected at Putlam.

7. Fibre from the Abelmoschus Moschatus, collected at Badulla.

Badulla, 4th April, 1853.

SIR,

With reference to a quantity of Gum Kino forwarded to you on the

31st March last, I beg leave to state that the tree which produces it is

the Pterocarpus Marsupium, Roxb., figured in his Coromandel Plants, I.

t. 116, Fl. Ind. TIL. p. 234. It is indigenous to Ceylon also, being found

on the Patnas around Badulla and the neighbouring country. By mak-

ing longitudinal incisions in the bark, I have succeeded in collecting a

large quantity of the gum-resin from several trees here. The substance

thus obtained, as you will observe, is of a dark ruby colour, brittle, and

highly astringent. From the trials of it in the way of clinical application,

I consider the Ceylon Kino to be equal to that of the shops in its thera-

peutic effects; but the Singhalese neither extract nor use this valuable

substance. The tree grows on the most sterile hills, covered with Lemon

grass, and may be propagated by “ cuttings” without much difficulty.

I need not tell you that it is now believed by the most eminent Phar-

macologists, that this species produces the genuine Gum Kino of

commerce.

I must not omit to add, that this tree was not known to Moon under

its correct name of Pterocarpus Marsupium, Roxb., as he has inserted it in

his Catalogue under a wrong species (P. bilobus) without any reference,

although this Botanist was possessed of Roxburgh’s splendid drawings of

the Coromandel Plants. It also appears, from the absence of those marks

which serve to indicate the economic properties of plants, that Moon was

not aware that the tree was capable of yielding so valuable a product.

T remain, &c.,

Dr. Lamprey, W. C. ONDAATIE.

Hon. Secy., Ceylon Asiatic Society.

PARIII IID OD ALN aes Nt PES AL eer

New Publications.

SIDATH SANGARAWA, a Grammar of the Singhalese Language,

translated into English, witb Introduction, Notes, and Appendices. By

James Dr Atwis, Member of the Ceylon Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society.

Colombo, 1852.

PRODROMUS FAUNAS ZEYLANIC, being contributions to

the Zoology of Ceylon. By E. F. Ketaanz, M. D., Edin., F. L. S., F. GS.

Staff Surgeon to the Forces. Ceylon, 1852. 8vyo., cloth; price 10s, 6d, :

q CEYLON | BRAN CH i

THE SECRETARY.

. ee CONTENTS: - ;

4 Page.

4 Daal of the great. Historical Poem of the Moors, entitled Seerah. By S. «

: C. Chitty, Esq. (concluded. ) nie 97

_ escription of New or little known species of Reptiles found | in n Ceylon. By |

. KE. F. Kelaart, M.D., F.L.S., &e. ... 102

he Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. By the Rev. D. J. “Gogely (to ee

continued. ) . seeps,

eylon Ornithology. By E. F. Kelaart, M. D., EL. S., ee : 143

ome account of the Rodiyas, with a specimen of their Language. By Simon

Casie Chitty, Esq. . se llralle

ock Inscriptions in the N orth- Western ‘Province. By A. 0. ‘Brodie, Esq. « . 181

APPENDIX:

Proceedings af Meetings:.. es ; .-. Lxiii.—cv.

Plan of the Temple of Chittreweylader C. Cowille. . ByC. C.8. Vanderstraaten Esq. cvi.

Rules and Regulations ... Yo olefe CV 05

ules of the Library and Museum She 4a Hag Sie son CELE ya

alogue of the Books ... as BY nee eo oO Eng sae cxi. ?

nographical Collections. “itis ace fis ste a jae cCXvil.

eum | @ee

;* It is requested that communications may be sent to the Secretary, under cover

to the Hon’ble the Colonial Secretary.

Ht Parties desirous of having the Journal transmitted to them by Tappal, bearing

_ Postage, or otherwise, will have the goodness to intimate their wishes to the

' Recretary.

LOLI LOLOL LOI OID GS I LF SII OSLO LI III I YI IO

COLOMBO:

Ww. SKEEN, GOVERNMENT PRINTER, CEYLON.

MDCCCLY.

NP @ PIPED IE IDOL FL LLP PP IDLO PII NID ELLIO LORIN INI LOLOL NIN LE DIL I OL

sg}

ENistorical Poem * Seerah.’ O7

and wife; his reception there at the house of Abdul Alib, a

Koreish, who afterwards raised an outcry against him, and

caused him to be pelted with stones; and his flight to the

mountains, where he was ministered to by angels.

The eighteenth chapter, consisting of twelve stanzas,

relates to Attas ibn Kabia, a Christian of Nineveh, who having

gone to Mohammed’s place of retreat, and heard him dis-

course about the prophet Jonas, believed on him.

The nineteenth chapter, consisting of forty-three stanzas,

relates to the profession of Islam by certain of the Genii, who

heard Mohammed read the Koran, after the evening prayer,

in the valley ofal Nakkla, during the time of hisretreat to Tayif.

The twentieth chapter, consisting of thirty stanzas, treats of

Kama, grandson of Iblis, who had his toes shackled together

by Ah, and was afterwards released at the intercession of

Mohammed.

The twenty-first chapter, consisting of meng ee stanzas,

gives an account of an entertainment given by Mohammed, at

which he wrought a miracle by multiplying the loaves.

Hi. —The Hyarat Kanda is divided into the following

forty-seven chapters :

The first chapter, consisting of sixty-five stanzas, relates

to the propagation of Islamism in Medina, through the instru-

mentality of certain inhabitants of that city, who having been

on a pilgrimage to Mecca, had had an interview with Moham-

med, and had sworn fidelity to him.

The second chapter, consisting of fifty-five stanzas, treats

of the oath which the Medinese took to be faithful to Moham-

med, and defend him from all attempts of Abu jahil and_ his

partisans.

The third chapter, consisting of one handred and fourteen

_ stanzas, relates to the proceedings of a council held by the

Koreish, whereat it was determined to kill Mohammed, and

the flight of Mohammed from Mecca to Medina, eluding the

close and vigorous pursuit of his adversaries.

VOL, If. ie)

98 Analysis of the Moorish

The fourth chapter, consisting of forty-six stanzas, states -

that Abu Bekr being bitten by a snake as he was watching

by the side of Mohammed in his retreat, the latter cured him

by applying his spittle to the bite.

The fifth chapter, consisting of fifty stanzas, treats of Surak-

kat, who pursued Mohammed at his flight, by desire of Abu

jahil, but was obliged to give up his undertaking, in conse-

quence of the feet of the horse on which he rode having stuck

fast to the ground and so prevented him from proceeding.

The sixth chapter, consisting of twenty-six stanzas, relates

to the conversion of a shepherdess, named Ummi Mahubat,

at whose cottage Mohanmedhad put up im his flight, and

wrought a miracle by causing a barren ewe to yield milk.

The seventh chapter, consisting of sixty-six stanzas, con-

tains an account of Mohammed’s entry into Medina, and his

magnificent reception by the people of that city.

The eighth chapter, consisting of eighty-four stanzas, relates

to a Jew, named Kabukha, who became a convert to Moham-

med’s doctrines by accidentally discovering inthe scriptures

the passage which predicted his mission. .

The ninth chapter, consisting of fifteen stanzas, relates to a

miracle wrought by Mohammed, by feeding thirty guests

with the food prepared only for two, and thereby converting

them to his faith.

The tenth chapter, consisting of twenty-five stanzas, gives

an account of the conversion of Uhuban, ashepherd, which was

occasioned by a tiger telling him, on his expressing his

surprise at hearing it speak, that this was less a cause for

just surprise than the unbelief of the people.

The eleventh chapter, consisting of sixty-one stanzas,

contains an account of Salman the Persian, whoin his younger

years embraced Christianity ; but during his travels in Syria,

having been informed by the learned men there, that a prophet

was expected to arise in Arabia, who should establish the

religion of al Forkhan, repaired thither, and meeting with

EMistorical Poem * Seerah.’ 99

Mohammed, soon discovered him to be the person he sought,

and believed on him.

The twelfth chapter, consisting of twelve stanzas, relates to

the circumstance of Mohammed and his followers turning their

faces towards the Kaba of Mecca when they prayed, instead

of the temple of Jerusalem as they hitherto did.

The thirteenth chapter, consisting of twenty-nine stanzas,

relates to the story of a wolf, which came to the Kaba, and in

the hearing of the Koreish who were assembled there, declared

that Mohammed was an incarnation of the divine ray (Noor)

and that he was sent by God into the world to establish the

true faith. ,

The fourteenth chapter, consisting of forty-seven stanzas,

treats of the expedition of Baddhan against the tribe of Kana

and the Koreish, who submitted.

The fifteenth chapter, consisting of two hundred and twenty

stanzas, is occupied withan extravagant account of the nuptials

of Fatima, daughter of Mohammed, with her cousin Ali.

The sixteenth chapter, consisting of fifteen stanzas, relates

to the expedition of Zeebul-bahar.

The seventeenth chapter, consisting of hare stanzas,

treats of the battle of Boath.

The eighteenth chapter, consisting of forty-one stanzas,

states that Mohammed, hearing that a rich caravan belonging

to the Koreish was on its way to Syria, marched with his troops

to intercept and plunder it, but it passed the place before his

_ arrival, and he returned to Medina, leaving only a part of

his troops to wait its return from Syria.

; The nineteenth chapter, consisting of fifteen stanzas, de.

_ scribes the attack and plunder of the caravan by Mohammed’s

4 troops in the valley of Nakhula, half way between Meccaand

Pp Tayi.

_ . The twentieth chapter, consisting of two hundred and fifty-

_ six stanzas, contains an account of the victory gained by

' Mohammed over the Meccans headed by Abu Safian, in the

' valley of Badr.

100 Analysis of the Moorish

The twenty-first chapter, consisting of fifty-seven stanzas,

notices the hostility of the Jews of the tribe of Kainoka to the

propagation of Islam, and their reduction and expulsion from

the country by Mohammed.

The twenty-second chapter, consisting of twelve stanzas,

relates to the reduction of the tribe of Bani Solemu, which

resided at Hudri and the plunder of theirgoods by Mohammed.

The twenty-third chapter, consisting of twelve stanzas, con-

tains an account of Mohammed’s expedition to Nasud; the

reduction and conversion of the tribe of Ghatfan, which lived

there ; and theplunder of a caravan of Meccans trading at Irak.

The twenty-fourth chapter, consisting of forty stanzas,

relates to the expedition of Khaibar, and the destruction of

Abirabik.

The twenty-fifth chapter, consisting of twenty stanzas,

notices the birth of Hassein.

The twenty-sixth chapter, consisting of elevenstanzas, treats

of an entertainment given to Mohammed at the house of Abu

Talha, where he performed a miracle by feeding eighty

fellow guests with three loaves.

The twenty-seventh chapter, consisting of two hundred and

sixty-eight stanzas, contains an account of the battle of Ohud,

wherein Mohammed was very near losing his life, and his

uncle Hamsa was slain.

The twenty-eighth chapter, consisting of twenty-four stan-

zas, relates to the interview between Mohammed and Mahbat

at Amru ; the latter’s advice to Abu Sofian to desist hostilities

against Mohammed, which he disdainfully rejected, and the

capture and execution of Asa, a spy.

The twenty -ninth chapter, consisting of seventy-one stanzas,

gives an account of Kaabibn al Ashraf, a Jew, who was a most

bitter enemy to Mohammed, and opposed the establishment

of his new religion to the utmost of his power.

The thirtieth chapter, consisting of seventeen stanzas,

relates to the siege and capture of the fortress of the Jews of

(

Estorical Poem * Seerah.’ iol

the tribe of al Nadr, by Mohammed, who allowed them to

depart to Syria and Khaibar, leaving all their goods and arms.

The thirty-first chapter, consisting of eighteen stanzas,

treats of Mohammed’s expedition to Bedr to meet the hostile

Koreish,.according to their challenge.

The thirty-second chapter, consisting of twenty stanzas,

notices the birth of Hussein.

The thirty-third chapter, consisting of one hundred and

seven stanzas, relates to the expedition of Mohammed against

the tribe of Ghatfan.

The thirty-fourth chapter, consisting of ten stanzas, relates

that Mohammed caused the date trees of Saibr to yield an

abundant crop, in order to enable him to satisfy some Jewish

creditor.

The thirty-fifth chapter, consisting of sixty-one stanzas,

relates to the expedition of Mohammed against the tribe of

Mustalie and his conquest over them.

The thirty-sixth chapter, consisting of eighty-three stanzas,

relates to the expedition of Mohammed against the tribe of

Kendah.

The thirty-seventh chapter, consisting of one hundred and

eighty-three stanzas, relates that the forces of the Koreish and

the tribe of Ghaftan, confederated with the Jews of al Nadhir

and Koreidha, besieged Medina, but were driven away by a

piercing cold east wind.

The thirty-eighth chapter, consisting of fifty-six stanzas,

relates to the destruction of the tribe of Bani Koreila.

The thirty-ninth chapter, consisting of nine stanzas, notices

the institution of Haji, and the profession of Islamism by

Loomr and the rest of the tribe of Sahud at Honein.

The fortieth chapter, consisting of twenty-nine stanzas, de-

scribes the marriage of Mohammed with Zeinab.

‘The forty-first chapter, consisting of twenty-five stanzas,

_ relates to the miraculous speaking of a camel.

The forty-second chapter, consisting of twenty-one stanzas,

102 Description of New or litile known

relates to Mohammed’s causing it to rain at the entreaty of

Salykkhn.

The forty-third chapter, consisting of nineteen stanzas, states

the restoration of the sight of a blind man by Mohammed.

The forty-fourth chapter, consisting of eighteen stanzas,

relates to the revealing of the 58th chapter of the Koran, at the

instance of Khawla, wife of Aws ibm Al Samat, who being

divorced by her husband by saying “Thou art to me as my

mother,” came toask Mohammed’s opinion whether they were

necessarily obliged to a separation.

The forty-fifth chapter, consisting of one hundred and

thirteen stanzas, relates to Mohammed’s expedition to Umra..

The forty-sixth chapter, consisting of one hundred stanzas,

treats of the hostilties of Salma.

The forty-seventh chapter, consisting of seventeen stanzas,

gives an account of the tribe of Urani.

NIN DID IRN OXIA NIDINN

Description of New or little known species of Reptiles found im

Ceylon, by EH. F. Ketaart, M.D., F.L.S.

ORDER. SAURA.

TRIBE. GEISSOSAUBA.

FAM. ACONTIAS, (ACONTIADZ,)

Head small, shielded. Muzzle conical. Rostral rather

large, cup-shaped, internasal short, frontal large, frontopa-

rietal none, interparietal triangular, moderate. Eyes distinct.

Eyelids, lower well developed, upper small or wanting.

Nostrils in the middle of the side of the rostral shield, with

a slit to its hinder edge. Tongue scaly, imbricate, nicked at

Reptiles found in Ceylon. 103

the point. Ears very small or hidden. Femoral pores none.

Body cylindrical. Limbs 4, very short, or none. Scales

smooth.— Gray.

Genus. Nessia. Gray.

Muzzle conical. Ears very small, dotlike. Body cylin-

drical, elongate, sides rounded. Scales smooth. Legs 4,

very short, far apart. Toes 3-3, subequal, clawed.

Nessta Burtoni? Gray.

Dark rufous-brown above, and spotted longitudinally with

darker brown spots. Dark grey beneath, clouded and indis-

tinctly spotted. Tail cylindrical, rounded at the end, and

coloured and spotted like the body. Limbs 4, very small,

each with 3 subequal toes.

Length 54 inches.

Habitat. Allagalla (3000 feet.)

The only specimen which we have examined is one obtained

from vegetable soil in a Coffee Estate under the superintend-

ence of Dr. Marshall.*. We are informed that this reptile is

common at Ambegammoa.

If our identification is correct, it would appear probable

that the only specimen in Europe, found in the Army Medi-

eal Officers’ Museum at Fort Pitt, was sent from Ceylon.

The specimen was named after Staff Surgeon Burton, who

was the Curator of the Museum when Dr: Gray visited that

establishment.

GENUS. ACONTIAS. Cuvier.

Head conical. Nostrilslateral. Internasal broad, 6 sides,

frontal large, 6 sided, frontonasals and frontoparietals none ;

interparietals small, triangular, parietal moderate. Tongue

flat, scaly, nicked at the tip. Teeth conical, blunt. Palate

not toothed, with a longitudinal groove. Eyes very small.

Upper eyelid wanting, lower short, scaly, opaque. Lars

hidden under the skin. ody cylindrical, elongate. Scales

* We haye since received several smaller specimens from Kaduganova.

104. Description of New or litile known

smooth. Limbs none, exserted. Tail cylindrical, short

rounded at the end.— Gray.

Acontias LAYARDI. n. s., nobis.

Light olive, and spotted longitudinally with brown spots,

paler beneath.

Length of young 4 inches.

Habitat. Soil of the Cinnamon Gardens of Colombo.

The form of this reptile is distinguished from that of Nessia,

above described, by the absence of limbs; in other respects

it is very like the outline characters of Nessia. Mr. Layard

procured us the specimens (apparently young) of this curious

lizard.

The only other species described in Gray’s Catalogue, is

one from the Cape of Good Hope.

Mr. Blyth writes that he has described an allied Genus,

from Rangoon, by the name of OPHISEPS.

FAM. UROPELTIDZ.

ROUGH TAILS, DAPAT-NAYA, S7nqg.

Head conical, compressed, shelving and acute in front, flat

above, behind. Crown covered with regular shields. Rostral

produced, moderate, convex, horny, subtriangular, erect,

produced, and acute behind. Nostrils roundish, lateral,

simple, in the middle of the front of an erect subtriangular

band-like nasal. Internasal none, frontonasal subtriangular,

truncated below, contiguous above, frontal and frontoparietal

distinct. Napescaly. Labial shields 7 distinct. Eyes dis-

tinct, lateral, inthe middle of the front of an erect eye-shield,

and covered by the shield without any eyelids. Eyebrow

shield none. Tongue elongate, flat, forked at the tip. Body

cylindrical. Scales 6 sided, smooth, those of the hinder part

and above the tail sometimes 2-keeled. Vent with three

scalesinfront. ‘Tail cylindrical, obliquely truncated above.

This family is intermediate between the Lizards and the

Snakes ; following Cuvier and others, I was induced to referit

to the latter order, and therefore did not insert itin the Synopsis

ee ee ee SG ee ly

RS GN ee Pe IL ote GO eo Se Ne oO

ee oe ee rene a ae ed

ers eat Roars 5

eke et

acta

Reptiles found in Ceylon. — 105

ef the Families: but on re-examination and comparison with

the various modifications presented by the genera of Typhlop-

side, [have been induced to place it inthe order of Lizards. -

Cuvier scems to have been in doubt, for though he placed the

genus with the Snakes, he also regarded the species as a

section of the Typhlopses. Schlegel names the group

Pseudo Typhlops.—( Gray’s Synopsis. )

This curiously formed family of Reptiles is known in the

{sland as Dapat Nayas, or double headed snakes. ‘The natives

consider them poisonous, but our experience of their habits

makes us believe that they are perfectly harmless, and

that they are timid creatures, seldom making their appearance

above ground; living chieflyan ant-hills ordunghills, sometimes

also several feet decp in rich loamy soil. They feed on ants,

_ small earth-worms and larve of insects.

It appears from Dr. Gray’s Catalogue, that in the Museums

of Europe there are only three species, and of these three

only one is from Ceylon, viz., Siluboura Ceylonicus,* many

specimens of whichwe have found in the Kandyan Hills since

eur work on the Fauna of Ceylon was published. We have

also, since the publication of that work, collected four other

species, making in all six distinct undescribed or new species

of Rough Tails (Uropeltide) in the Island of Ceylon, which

we shall now describe in a connected form.

Dr. Gray subdivides the family into three groups, and we

have added a fourth, to admit of two species, only one of which

we have described in the Prodromus. |

Genus. Rurtnopuis. Hempr.

Tail obliquely truncated, upper part rather convex, covered

with a small oblong shield, lower edge rounded, simple, rather

produced. Head acute, tapering im front. Vent shields in

one marginal row. |

* Vide Prodromus Faune Zeylanice.

VOL. Il, F ;

106 Description of New or little known

Rurornis Bryrur. n. s., nobis.

_ Dark yellowish brown above, with darker brown spots on

the anterior third of scales. Paler beneath. Rostrum

yellow. Sides of nape and neck waved with angular marks

of a yellowish hue; yellow spots on each side of vent. Tail

thick, slightly truncated, conical, upper part near termination

has a small subtriangular nearly smooth shield, lower surface

covered with broad scales. Went shields 1-2. _

Length 16 inches, circumference of the middle of body

1. 3-10 inches. Tail and neck rather thicker.

Habitat. Mountains of Ceylon.—Three specimens found

3 or 4 feet below the surface soil of Coffee plantations.

Grnus. URoPELTIS, (part). Cuvier.

Tail obliquely truncated, flattish, and covered with a flat

roundish radiating granular shield, lower edge rounded, the

under side of tail with 6 series of small scales.

UROPELTIS SAFFRAGAMUS. 12. S., nobis.

Head dark olive brown, the rest of the upper surface of a

blackish brown colour, with bluish bronze reflections. Beneath

white. A pale white spot on each side of neck near the head.

Tail deeply truncated and nearly covered with a large flat

circular blackish granular shield, white and rounded beneath,

and lower part covered with five series of small scales, the

central series broader than the lateral ones. Vent shields

1-2, The neck and forepart of the body much thicker.

Length 9 inches.

Habitat. District of Saffragam, near Adam’s Peak.

The only specimen of this species, which we have as yetseen,

is one sent to us by Mr. Barnes De Zilva from Ratnapoora.

URopPELTIs GRANDIS. 7. S., nobis.

Above dark brown with a bluish metallic lustre, anterior

part of each scale with a, blackish spot. Beneath of a pale

yellow colour, spotted brown on the anterior part of scale.

Head of a light olive brown colour. Tail short, abruptly

— SE Nn a ee Ee Pe ae ee

Cea Oe ee : a les see engin a -

Reptiles found in Ceylon. 107

truncated ; the truncated surface entirely covered with a large

circular, granular shield. Vent scales 1-2.

Total length superiorly, 1 foot 7 inches. Inferiorly, 1 foot

8 inches. Tail shield nearly the size of a shilling piece.

Head 8-10 inch in lenoeth.— Greatest circumference 23 inches,

near the neck. Habitat. Southern Province.

The only specimen we have seen of this very large Rough

Tail, is one procured by Mr. Balkhuysen of the Colonial Medi-

cal Service, from Kerinday near Matura.

Uroprstris Parpatis. n. s., nobis.

Head small, dark olive. Upper parts black with beautiful

bluish bronze reflections, irregularly spotted white. Beneath

yellowish white, marked with large and small black spots,

variously shaped; some pale eyed. Tail very short, obliquely

truncated and with a large flat orbicular granular shield.

Length, 64 inches; circumference 2 inch.

flabitat. Matura. We are indebted to the Rev. Mr.

Ondaatje for the only specimen we have examined of this

species. ‘The black spots on the lower parts occupy more

than one scale, generally two or three contiguous scales;

and they are placed without any order in various directions.

The chin and throat immaculate.

GENUS. DAPATNAYA. n. 9.

Tail obliquely truncated, upper part and tip covered with

a large semiconical granular shield. Vent shields 1-2.

DapaTNAyA LANKADIVANA. 7. S., nobis.

Above dark brown, beneath paler. Scales with pale

margins. Head yellowishinsome. Rostrum yellow. Shield

of tail sloping down to the lower surface. Vent scales yellow;

in some the spot extends beyond the vent. :

_ Length, from 1 to 2 feet.

Thickness nearly the same throughout, about 1 inch.

Habitat. Common at Trincomalie, and in the Kandyan

Province. Found 2 or3 feet under ground, and in ant-hills.

The young is of a dark olive brown colour. , |

108 Description of New or little knowye

DapaTNAYA TREVELYANII. 7. S., nobis.

Black above, margin of scales pale. White beneath, witin

longitudinal series ef black spots, formed of central spots om

each scale. A line of triangular white spots, with their

apices directed upwards, along each side. Vent white. A

white line rising from this spot runs over the tail, and another

whitish line extends forwards from the vent for about 2 inch.

Tail short, and nearly covered with a white semi-conical

granular shield, tip ridged, a little produced.

Length from 12 to 18 inches; nearly of the same thickness

throughout, about 1 inch.

Habitat. WKandyan Hills, 3 or 4 feet under ground, onda Ik

the soil near the roots of Coffee trees and Cane.

Some of the young are ofa bluish colour, others are spotted

on the back.

TRIBE. NYCTISAURA.,

FAM. GECKOTIDA.

BOLTALIA.

Toes free, ovate and dilated towards the end, with twa

series of straight narrow nearly transverse closely adpressed

plates beneath, divided by a deep narrow groove, last joint

compressed, free, rather exserted, clawed. ‘Thumb dilated,

and with a compressed last joint, like the toes, but clawless.

Back with granular scales and a few scattered larger granules.

Sides simple. Tail rather depressed, tapering, ringed, with

a central series of broad scales beneath.

Boiraia suBLzvis. Gray.

Above dark rufous brown; beneath sulphureous yellow,

sometimes clouded with black. Back granular, with two or

more longitudinal lines of larger granules on each side.

Scales of chin large. Tail armed with adpressed spines in

rings. Femoral pores in male only, from 16 to 20.

Length 54 inches. |

flabitat. ‘The Central and Southern Provinces.

This Gecko we obtained in great abundance in Galle; we

Reptiles found in Ceylon. 109

have also seen afew at Kaduganava, after the publication

of the Prodromus. It is rarely seen on the walls of houses,

generally on trees, and on the roofs of houses. - The rufous

brown colour changes at times into a dark grey, mottled with

black. When immersed in spirits the rufous brown colour is

entirely lost.

This Gecko has been mistaken for Hemidactylus Lesche-

naultn, and also, for a large variety of Hf. frenatus, but the

clawless compressed last joint of the thumb will distinguish

this Lizard from others. From Pertpia Peronii it 1s suffi-

ciently removed by its granular back and armed tail. This

Lizard cannot be confounded with Hemidactylus Cocteer. It

has very little resemblance to it, and the thumb of H. Coctaz

is Glawed. (Vide Prodromus Faune Zeylanice.)

OrpeErR. BATRACHIA.

SUB-ORDER I. SALIENTIA.

FAM. RANIDZ. Frogs. Arry Kirra: Sing.

GENUS. Rana. Linn.

Skin smooth, hinder extremities very long, formed for

leaping ; toes palmated, teeth in the upper jaw, and in the

palate.

Rana KANDIANA. 2. 58., nobis.

Beautiful grass green above, beneath orange red; inside

of limbs slightly vermiculated with yellow. Skin of upper parts

rather rough, coriaceous; a white granular ridge on each side

Length 34 inches.

Habitat. Kaduganava, Kandyan Province.

We have only seen two specimens of this rare frog.

FAM. HYLIDZE. Tree Frégs. Guas Atty Kirra. Sing.

Genus. LimnopytTges. Dum. eé Bib.

Tongue long, narrowed in front, widened, forked, free

behind; the tecth on the vomer forming two groups, between

‘110 Description of New or little known

the internal openings of the nostrils; tympanum distinct ;

Eustachian tubes middling, fore fingers free; toes completely

or partly webbed; subdigital disks slightly dilated; process of

the first os cuneiforme blunt, very minute ; males with vocal

sacs; sacral transversal processes not dilated.

Limnopytes Murasinis. n. s., nobis.

Upper parts very changeable ; generally, of a bright green

above and yellow beneath; a red line on the outer edge of

limbs; sometimes of a dark chesnut on the upper parts, and

variegated with yellow and green on the sides and limbs.—

Ofa more slender form than the common tree Frogs Poly-

pedates cruciger, and P. Leucomystax. About 2 inches long.

Habitat. Cinnamon gardens; Cotta near Colombo. Ifnot

mistaken, we have also seen this elegant frog at Nuwera Ellia.

In spirits the colours fade into a pale leaden hue; the red

streak on the limbs disappears last.

Limnopytzs Macunata. n. s., nobis.

Brown, spotted and streaked with black or dark brown ;

beneath pale, seldom spotted. About 1} inch long.

Habitat. Galle, Southern Province.

We believe this species to be generally distributed, but have

before mistaken it for the young of Polypedates Leucomystaz.

FAM. BUFONIDZ. Toads. Gamepra, Sing.

GENUS. ENGYSTOMA. Gray.

No tympanum nor parotid visible externally ; an oval body;

the head and mouth very small, and feet but slightly

palmated.

Eneystoma Rusrum. 2. s., Jerdon.

Synon. Engystoma cinnamomesa:. M. s.

Cinnamon red, spotted black; limbs also spotted ; belly

whitish. Length (young) 14 inch.

Habitat. Southern India (?) Ceylon.—

Galle, ith May, 1853.

Reptiles found in Ceylon. 108

Synopsis of Ceylon Reptiles, by KE. F. Keuaart, M.D.

In presenting to the Asiatic Society a more complete |

Synopsis of Ceylon Reptiles, which the continued kindness

of friends in various parts of the Island has enabled me to

form, I have much pleasure in expressing my best thanks to

the Members of the Asiatic Society of Ceylon, and to Sir

George Anderson, Dr. Fergusson, P.M.O. and the Hon'ble

Mr. MacCarthy, Colonial Secretary, for the facilities they

have afforded me in my further researches in the Natural

productions of the Island.

The joint labours of Mr. Edgar Layard and myself have

nearly completed the examination of the Mammals, Birds,

Shells, Reptiles and Insects of this Island. The fresh water

Fishes are now engaging my attention, and any specimens of

this Class will be thankfully received. Dr. Schmarda, Pro-

_ fessor of Zoology of the University of Prague, is now ona

visit to the Island for the chief purpose of examining the

Infusorie, and Professor Harvey of Trinity College, Dublin,

is also, we believe, at present engaged in examining into the

Echinodermata and Crustacea of the Island, so that it may be

hoped, it will not be very long before the neglected Fauna of

Ceylon is completely worked out.

Synopsis: of Ceylon Reptiles.

OrpveER. Saura. Lizards.

SUB-ORDER. I. LEPTOGLOSS &.

Slender-tongued Lizards.

FAM: MONITORID. Monitors.

1 Monitor Dracena, Gray. Guana. TallaGoya, Sing.

2 Hydrosaurus Salvator, Wagler. Water Guana. Cabara Goya, Sing.

FAM: SCINCIDA. The Scines.

3 Riopa punctata, Gray. Puchee Bramin, Port.

112 Ceylon Reptiles.

4 Riopa Hardwick, Gray. Puchee Bramin, Poré.

5 Mabouia elegans. (?) Gray. do.

6 Taliqua rufescens, Gray. Large do.

FAM: ACONTIADZ.

7 Nessia Burtoni. (?) Gray. Ground Bramin.

8 Acontias (?) Layardi, n.s., nobis. Layard’s do.

FAM: TYPHLOPSIDZ. Typhiops.

9 Argyrophis Bramicus, Daud. Slow worm.

2 varieties.

FAM: UROPELTIDZ. Rough tails, or False snakes.

Dapatnaya, Sing.

10 Uropeltis grandis, Soy nobis.

11 Uropeltis Pardalis, n. s., nobis.

12 Uropeltis Saffragamus, n.s., nobis.

13 Rhinophis Blythu, n. s., nobis.

14 Dapatnaya Lankadivana, N. S., nobis.

15 Dapatnaya Trevelyanii, n. S., nobis.

16 Siluboura Ceylonicus, Gray.

SUB-ORDER II. PACHYGLOSSA.

Thick-tongued Lizards.

FAM: GECKOTID 2. The Gechoes.

Cheechas, Port. Hoona, Sing.

17 Hemidactylus trihedrus, Lesson. The triangular tubercled Gecko.

18 Hemidactylus maculatus, Dum. The spotted do.

et Bib.

19 Hemidactylus Pieresii, . s.,nobis. Pieres’ Gecko.

20 Hemidactylus Coctce1,Dum. et Bib. Cocto’s do.

21 Hemidactylus frenatus, Schlegel. ‘The streaked Gecko.

22 Hemidactylus Leschenaultii, (?) Leschenault’s do.

Dum. et Bib.

23 Boltalia sublevis, Gray. The Boltalia. |

87 Calamaria Scytale ?

Ceylon Reptiles. 113

24 Peripia Peronii, Dum. et Bib. Peron’s Gecko.

25 Gymnodactylus (?) Kandianus, The diurnal Gecko.

nN. S., nobis.

FAM: AGAMIDA. The Agamas.

Blood-suckers, Vulg. KattooSah, Sing.

26 Sitana Ponticereana, Cuvier. The Sitana.

27 Lyriocephalus scutatus, Wagler. Lyre-headed Lizard.

28 Ceratophora Stoddartii, Gray. The needle-nosed Lizard.

29 Salea Jerdonii, Gray. Dr. Jerdon’s Salea.

30 Calotes Ophiomachus, Gray. Red headed Green Lizard.

31 Calotes Rouxi, Gray. Blyth. lea Lea

vel C. Viridis, Gray.apud nos. 5

32 Calotes mystaceus, Dum.et Bib. Red spotted Green Lizard.

33 Calotes versicolor, Dum.et Bib. The common Blood-sucker.

FAM: CHAMELEONIDA. Chameleons.

34 Chameleo vulgaris, Daud. The true Chameleon.

OrDER. OPHIDIA. Serpents.

Cebras, Port. Saroopeya, Satta, Sing.

Innocuous Serpents. :

FAM: BOIDZ.

Pr howne.

35 Cylindrophis maculata, Wagler. The red and black netted Snake.

TERRESTRIAL.

36 Python molurus, Gray. Lhe Rock Snake.

FAM: COLUBERIDZ. Bonaparte.

TERRESTRIAL.

_ 38 Lycodon, 2 or more species.

_ 39 Xenodon purpurascens, Schlegel. var.

a 40 Coluber Korros, Reinwardt,

VOL. Ii. Q

il4 Ceylon Reptiles.

ARBORIAL.

41 Dipsas multimaculata (?) Schlegel.

42 Dryinus Prasinus, Reinwardt. The Whip Snake.

D. nasutus 2 or more varieties.

43 Leptopthis pictus, Gmelin.

44 Leptopthis ornatus, Shaw.

45 Leptopthis sp.

aquatic. Deye Naya, Sig.

46 Tropidonotus umbratus, Daudin. (var.) Large blackish water Snake.

47 Tropidonotus stollatus, Zinn. The speckled do.

48 Tropidonotus schistosus, Daud. The olive brown do.

49 Cerberus cinereus, Cuvier. The black do.

Venomous Serpents.

FAM: VIPERIDZ. Vipers.

TERRESTRIAL.

50 Bungarus candidus, Linn.

51 Naya lutescens, Daudin. var. Cobra de Capello.

var. Nigra.

ARBORIAL.

52 Trigonocephalus Hypnale, Wagler. Caravilla.

53 Trimesurus gramineus, Shaw. The green Caravilla.

54 Trimesurus Ceylonensis (?) Gray. apud Gray.

55 Megaera trigonecephala, Wagler. Palagolla.

56 Daboia elegans, Gray.

57 Daboia Russell, Gray. fPotangs

N.B.—There are about six or eight more Ceylon Snakes, which have

not yet been identified. “hes

OrvDER. CHELONIA. Tortoises.

Cowdoo, Port. Ibba, Sing.

FAM: TESTUDINIDZ.

58 Testuda Indica, Gmelin. The large land Tortoise.

59 Testuda stellata, Schweig. The yellow starred do.

Ceylon Reptiles. 115

FAM: EMYDIDZ.

60 Emys trijuga, var. Schweig. Marsh Tortoise.

61 Emys Seba, Gray, apud Blyth. do.

62 Emyda punctata. Gray. River Tortoise. Keeree Ibba. Sing.

FAM: CHELONIDZ.

63 Caretta imbricata, Gray. Sea Turtle. Kokoeloo koosoomba, Sing.

64 Chelonia virgata, Schweig. Edible do. Gal koosoomba, Sing.

~Orper. Emyposaurt. Crocodiles.

Lagartoo, Port. Kimboola, Sing.

The Indian river Crocodile.

65 Crocodilus porosus, Schweig.

Allie Kimboola, Sing.

Marsh Crocodile.

66 Crocodilus palustris, Lesson, male. :

Halle Kimboola. Sing.

Crocodilus Bombifrons, female. apud Blyth.

AMPHIBIA.

Orver. Batracuia, Frogs.

Madookoo, Port. Attykitta, Sing.

FAM: RANIDZ, Water Frogs.

Bi 67 Rana cutipora, Dum. et Bib. Large green bull Frog.

68 Rana Malabarica, Dum. et Bib. The green spotted bull Frog.

q 69 Rana Bengalensis, Gray. The small green _ do.

' 70 Rana Tigrina, Daudin. The golden Frog.

3 71 Rana Newera Elliana, nobis. The blackish Frog.

72 Rana Kandiana, nobis. The red bellied Frog.

a 3 Rana Leschenaultii(?) Dum. et Leschenault’s Frog.

a Bib. apud Blyth.

116 Ceylon Reptiles.

FAM: HYLIDZ. Tree Frogs.

Ghas Gemba. Attykitta, Sing.

74 Polypedates leucomystax,

The common tree Frog.

Gravenhorst. §

75 Polypedates cruciger, Blyth. The cross-backed do.

76 Polypedates stellata, nobis. The white spotted green tree Frog..

77 Limnodytes mutabilis, nobis. | The changeable tree Frog.

78 Limnodytes maculata, nobis. | The brown spotted do.

FAM: BUFONIDZ. Toads.

Gemmadea, Sing.

79 Bufo melanostictus, Schneider. The common house Toad.

80 Engystoma marmorata, Gray. The green spotted do.

81 Engystoma cinnamomea, nobis. The red do.

OrpDER. PSEUDOPHIDIA.

FAM: CACILITD Zi.

82 Ichthyophis glutinosus, Gray. The glutinous Slow worm.

N.B.—Mr. Blyth in his last Report, J.A.S.B. No. 4 of 1853, enumerates:

among the Reptiles we sent him, the following new species, Limnodytes.

hvidus, L. macularis, Engystoma rubrum,, Jerdon. Pyxicephalus Fodiens,,

Jerdon, and Rana robusta.

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 117

THE LAWS OF THE BUDHIST PRIESTHOOD.

( Continued from p. 26.)

Some of the pupils neglected to perform their duty to their

preceptors. ‘This being reported to Budha, he decreed :

19. It is not proper, priests, that the pupil should not

perform his duty to his preceptor. He who does not perform

his duty is guilty of Dukkata.

They still remained disobedient, upon which Budha decreed:

20. I permit, priests, that the disobedient shall be sus-

pended (from his position as pupil residing with his preceptor.)

And thus shall he be suspended : the preceptor may declare

by words, or intimate by signs, “ I suspend you,” or he may

say “ Return not to this place :” or “ Take away your robes

and bowl :” or “I have no need of your services.” Should

he declare this by words or intimate it by signs, the pupil is

suspended, but not otherwise.

A pupil thus suspended did not seek reconciliation. Budha

decreed : ;

21. I direct, priests, that forgiveness be solicited.

The pupil still declined to seek reconciliation. This was

! q reported to Budha, who decreed :

22. Priests, he who is suspended shall not be without

seeking forgiveness. He who does not seek forgiveness is

guilty of Dukkata. |

Some preceptors, upon forgiveness being solicited, refused

to be reconciled. This was reported to Budha, who decreed:

23. Priests, I direct that forgiveness be granted.

Notwithstanding this direction, some of the preceptors

would not forgive ; and the pupils left the priesthood, or joined

themselves to other religious communities. Upon this Budha

decreed:

& 24, Priests, it is not proper to refuse forgiveness when it

i is solicited. He who refuses to forgive is guilty of Dukkata.

| Nome preceptors suspended the obedient, and permitted

| the disobedient to remain without suspension. This being

| reported to Budha, he decreed:

118 Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.

25. Priests, it 1s improper to suspend those who perform —

their duty. He who does so is guilty of Dukkata. It is

improper, priests, not to suspend those who neglect their duty.

He who does not place such under suspension is guilty of

Dukkata.

Five reasons are assigned why a pupil may be placed under

suspension: If he does not manifest proper affection, attach-

ment, and respect to his preceptor; or if he be without modesty

of deportment, or neglect his studies. Under these circum-

stances if the preceptor suspends him he acts correctly, but if

he neglect to suspend him he is culpable.

There were at that time priests of more than ten years

standing who were unwise and unlearned, and who yet

received other priests as pupils. In consequence of this, in

some instances, the preceptor was ignorant and the pupil

learned, and much discontent arose: both people and priests

complaining of its impropriety. This being brought to the

notice of Budha, he investigated the circumstances, reproved

the offenders, and decreed ;

26. Priests, a person who is unwise and incompetent

shall not receivea resident pupil. I permit wise and com-

petent priests, of ten or more years standing, to receive

resident pupils.

Some of the superiors (upajjhayo) and preceptors (achariyo)

of the priests having left their former place of residence, and

others having left the priesthood or joined other fraternities,

and some having died, the priests did not know how far they

were released from the duty of attending uponthem. The

subject was brought to the notice of Budha, who decreed:

27. Priests, for these five reasons a priest is released from

the duty of living with his upajjhayo (superior). If the

superior remove to another place ; if he leave the priesthood ;

if he die; if he join some other fraternity ; or if he give leave

of absence. For any of these reasons a priest is released

from the duty of living with his superior.

Priests, for these six reasons a priest is released from the

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 119

duty of living with his preceptors (achariyo). If the pre-

ceptor remove to another place: if he leave the priesthood ;

if he die; ifhe join some other fraternity ; if he give leave of

absence ; or if the pupil return to the residence of his superior.

For any of these reasons a priest is relieved from the duty of

living with his preceptor.

Budha then defined the qualifications necessary to be pos-

sessed by those who became superiors, preceptors, or who

have samaneros (novices) under them.

1. He should be perfect in moral virtue (i. e. without

need of further instruction or advice respecting virtue), in

meditation, in wisdom, in deliverance from desire, and in the

knowledge resulting from that deliverance: he must also

be able to establish others in the same virtues and excellen-

cies. :

As there are qualities possessed only by the Rahats, or

4 _ those delivered from the bonds of existence, and as for many

centuries no priest has attained to this perfection, the above

rule is not binding at the present time, but the following

qualifications are still required: He must be orthodox,

modest and grave in his deportment, diligent, wise, able to

instruct his pupils and resolve their doubts, well acquainted

with the rules of ecclesiastical discipline, free from ecclesias-

tical censure, and of ten or more years standing in the priest-

hood. as

~ One who had been a member of another body of teachers,

became a Budhist priest : but disputing the doctrines taught

by his superior, he left the priesthood and returned to the

society to which he formerly belonged. Afterwards he came

back and requested ordination again as a Budhist priest.

The case being brought before Budha, he decreed:

28. Priests, if any one who has been a member of another

body of teachers, shall become a priest, and disputing the

doctrines taught by his superior, unite himself again to the

body to which he formerly belonged: should he return ‘he —

must not be re-admitted to Upasampada.

]

120 Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.

Should any one, formerly a member of another body of

teachers, have a desire to embrace this doctrine and discipline,

to become a priest and receive Upasampada, he shali be

received on probation for four months. The permission shall

be granted as follows:

First, having caused the head and beard to be shaven and

a yellow garment to be put on, the candidate shall remove

his garment from one shoulder, worship the feet of the priests,

and kneeling down say, with uplifted hands, I take refuge in

Budha, I take refuge in Damma (his doctrine), I take refuge

in the Sangho (the priesthood). <A second time I take refuge

in Budha, I take refuge in Damma, I take refuge in the

Sangho. A third time I take refuge in Budha, I take refuge

in Damma, I take refuge in the Sangho.

Then, priests, the candidate shall come to the Sangho,

remove his garment from one shoulder, worship the feet of

the priests, and kneeling down say with uplifted hands, Lords!

I, N., have been a member of such a body of teachers. I ~

desire to receive this doctrine and discipline, and to obtain

Upasampada. Lords! I request four months’ probation: a

second and a third time he is to make this request.

A fiuent and learned priest shall then make this known

to the Sangho, saying, Hear me, my Lord the Sangho, such

a person, formerly a member of another body of teachers,

desires to receive this doctrine and discipline, and to obtain

Upasampada. He requests to be admitted to a probation of

four months. Ifitbe a convenient time for the Sangho, the

Sangho will admit this person, formerly a member of another

body of teachers, to a probation of four months. This is the

proposition.

. Hear me, my Lord the Sangho, this person, formerly a

member of another body of teachers, desires to receive this

doctrine and discipline and to obtain Upasampada: he requests

to be admitted to a probation of four months. The Sangho

grants a probation of four months to this person, formerly a

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 121

member of another body of teachers. If any venerable one

censents to grant four months probation to this person, formerly

a member of another body of teachers, let him remain silent.

Jf he do not consent let him speak. Probation for four months

is given by the Sangho to this person, formerly a member of

another body of teachers. The Sangho consents and there-

fere is silent, and thus I receive it.

Budha, then explains the reason of this proceeding, arising

from the habits of these teachers of other bodies; namely, that

they visit the houses for alms at unseasonable hours, (when

the women may be sleeping with their persons exposed :) that

they resort for alms to places where there are prostitutes,

widows and grown up girls, or where there are catamites, or

female ascetics; that they are loud and obstreperous in con-

versation ; not careful in the things they ought to be engaged

in, are indolent, inquisitive, not under controul, dull in under-

standing, lose their temper when their doctrines are contyro-

verted, and speak against Budha, his doctrines and the priests.

He then states that if they continue thus, they ought not to

receive Upasampada at the end of their probation.

He also directs, that if the person who seeks to be admitted

on probation be a naked ascetic, the Upajjayo shall supply

him with garments and see te his being shaved. That if an

ascetic with clotted hair, a worshipper of fire, seek admission

to the priesthood, he may be admitted without probation, as

their doctrines are correct respecting the results of moral

conduct. And that any one who is of the Sakya race is to

have the same privilege, although he may have been a member

of any other body of teachers; and that he concedes this to

them as being of the same race with himself.

At one period great sickness prevailed in Magadha, espe-

cially leprosy (29@o kutt’han), ulcers (ws@» gando, eruptions

_ of various kinds), dry itch (g@o@es2), consumption {Ge o@e9),

and epilepsy (¢0®9qH); these were named the five diseases.

A number of persons sought the aid of the king’s physician,

offering him the whole of their property, and even to become

VOL. I. R :

122 Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.

his slaves, if he would undertake their cure. The physician

replied, that he could not possibly attend to them, his duty to

the king, to the royal household, to Budha and his priests,

who were placed under his care by the king, occupying the

whole of his time. Upon this some of the men determined to

join the priesthood that they might obtain the aid of the royal

physician. They accordingly went to the priests, were admit-

ted, and received ordination. Being priests the physician

prescribed for them, and they were restored to health, After

this they left the priesthood. The physician meeting one of

them recognized him and said, Were you not a priest? He

acknowledged it, and stated that he had been a priest solely

to obtain his aid as a physician, and that upon being cured

he had left the priesthood. The physician was much dis-

pleased, and complained to Budha, requesting him to prohibit

persons having these diseases being admitted into the priest-

hood. Budha soothed his mind with religious discourse, and

upon his departure decreed:

29. Priests, it is not proper to admit into the priesthood

any person who is affected with the five diseases. He who

admits such a person into the priesthood is guilty of Dukkata.

Disturbances having occurred in the provinces, the king of

Magadha ordered his troops to quell them. Some of the

celebrated warriors thought, If we go delighting in war, we

shall commit sin and bring much demerit upon ourselves; by

what means shall we escape so as to avoid committing sin and

be able to perform good works. The priests are good and

virtuous men: if we join the priesthood our object will be

accomplished. They accordingly went to the priests, were

admitted into the priesthood and received Upasampada.

When the commander of the forces enquired where such and

such soldiers were, he was informed that they had become

priests. Upon learning this he was much displeased, and

reported the case to the king Bimbisaro, stating that such

persons ought to be capitally punished, together with those

who had admitted them into the priesthood.

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 123

King Bimbisaro upon this waited on Budha and said, There

are in my kingdom persons destitute of faith and strongly

disposed to injure the priests, 1t will be well for them not to

admit into the priesthood any person belonging to the king’s

forces. When the king was gone, Budha called the priests

together, stated the case, and decreed :

30. Priests, no person in the king’s pay shall be made a

priest. He who admits such a person into the priesthood is

guilty of Dukkata. |

The noted thief Anguli Malo was admitted into the adesk:

hood. The people seeing him were alarmed and terrified, and

fled away to other places. The people generally gave utter-

ance to their extreme dissatisfaction, and the priests reported

it to Budha, who decreed :

31. Priests, no outlawed felon shall be admitted into the

priesthood : he who admits him is guilty of Dukkata.

The king of Magadha had commanded that no violence

should be offered to any of the priests of Budha, as they were

holy and virtuous men. On one occasion a thief had been

east into prison: but he breaking out of prison escaped and

obtained admission into the priesthood. He was afterwards

recognized, but when some persons went to apprehend him

they were reminded of the king’s command. The people

murmured and said, These sons of Sakya are privileged to do

what they will with impunity. Why do they admit to the

priesthood thieves who have broken out of prison. Upon

_ being informed of this, Budha decreed :

32. Priests, no thief who has broken out of prison shall be

_ admitted into the priesthood ; he who admits him is guilty of

Dukkata.

- Under similar circumstances the following laws were made

by Budha.

33. No proclaimed thief shall be admitted into the priest-

hood : he who admits him is guilty of Dukkata. |

34. No person who has been flogged by a judicial sentence

"shall be admitted into the priesthood: he who admits him is

penilty of Dukkata. , |

124 Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.

35- No person who has been branded by a judicial sentence

shall be admitted into the priesthood: he who admits him is

suilty of Dukkata. :

36. No person who is in debt shali be admitted into the

priesthood : he who admits him is guilty of Dukkata.

37. No slave shall be admitted into the priesthood : he

who admits hin is guilty of Dukkata. ;

A. lad of the goldsmith trade quarrelled with his parents,

and going to the Monastery was made a Samanero priest.

His parents came to the Monastery and enquired of the

priests if they had seen such a lad there. They, not being

zware of the circumstance, stated that they had not seen him.

After further search the boy was found, havmg been admit-

ted as a novice. The parents loudly complained, affirming

that the priests were shameless liars. From this it appears

that priests were accustomed to ordain novices on their indi-

vidual responsibility, without any reference to a Chapter of

the Order regularly assembled. The case was reported to

Budha, who, to prevent such irregularities, decreed :

38. I direct, priests, that the shaving of the head shall be

notified to the Sangho.

(In consequence of this law, whenever a lad is to be received

imto the priesthood asa novice, the Sangho is to be assembled

and the circumstances stated to the meeting, prior to the head

of the candidate being shaved.)

There were in Rajagaha 17 children who were friends,

Upali being the principal one. His parents thought much

of a profession for him by which he might obtain a livelihood

after their death. They thought of his bemg a scribe, but

remembered that writing tires the fingers: then they thought

of his being an accountant, but that would be injurious to his

chest : were he to become a painter that would try his eyes.

They then reflected, that the sons of Sakya were virtuous

men ; that they were well fed and comfortably lodged, and

that it would be desirable to make him a priest. Upali heard

his parents speaking on the subject, and being pleased with

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 125

the plan went to his young friends and proposed that they

all should become priests. The children replied, If you,

Upali, become a priest we also will become priests; and each

child requested his parents’ permission to join the priesthood.

The whole of the parents were pleased with the proposal of

the children, and took:them to the priests who ordained them

as novices and gave them Upasampada. In the night the .

children became restless and cried for gruel, and for some-

thing to eat, and the priests endeavoured to quiet them without

success. Bagawa heard the noise, and enquired the reason of

it. Ananda informed him of the circumstances; upon which

he assembled the priests, and enquired if they had admitted

persons to Upasampada whom they knew to be under twenty

years of age. ‘They acknowledged that they had done so:

upon which he reproved them, stating that lads under twenty

years of age were not able to endure the hardships connected

with being priests, and decreed :

39. Priests, it is not proper to admit to Upasampada a

man whois known to be less than twenty years of age.

Whoever admits such a person to Upasampada is guilty of

Dukkata.

A whole family died of an epidemic disease, excepting the

father and a male child. They both became priests (the

father Upasampada, the child Samanero) and went out

together to collect food. When any thing was given to the

priest, the child being near him said, Father, give me some!

Father, give me some! The people observing this, mur-

mured andsaid, These sons of Sakya are incontinent. This

child has been begotten on a priestess. The other priests,

hearing this, reported the case to Budha, who decreed :

40. Priests, it is not proper that a child under five years

of age should be admitted into the priesthood : he who admits

him is guilty of Dukkata.

A pious and faithful family who ministered to Ananda

was cut off by the pestilence, only two male children, under

five years of age, being left. These children haying been

126 Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.

accustomed to see the priests and minister to them, wept

because they did not seethem as usual. Ananda was desirous

of preserving the children and admitting them into the priest-

hood, but they were under the prescribed age. He mentioned

the case to Budha, who enquired if the children were able to

drive away the crows. He replied that they were able.

Upon this, Budha assembled the priests, and said :

41. Priests, I permit children under five years of age to

be admitted into the priesthood, if they be able to drive

away the crows.

The priest Upanando had two Samaneros, who living

together polluted each other. The circumstance becoming

known, Budha decreed :

42. Priests, two Samaneros shall not be under one person.

He who receives two Samaneros is guilty of Dukkata.

Bagawa spent the entire year in Rajagaha, and the inhabi-

tants complained that the place was darkened with the number

of priests. Upon this being reported to Budha, he determined

to visit Dakkhinigiri, and sent Ananda to inform the priests

that as many of them as were inclined might accompany him.

They replied, Bagawa has commanded us to remain near our

superiors and preceptors ten years. If they go, we will

accompany them, otherwise we cannot go. In consequence

of this Bagawa had few attendants, and upon his return he

decreed:

43. Priests, [direct that fluent speaking and well informed

priests shall remain as pupils five years. ‘They who are not

fluent speaking shall remain as pupils so long as they live.

The qualifications requisite to free a priest of five years’

standing from remaining a pupil are; that he be modest and

reverent in his deportment; diligent, intelligent, free from

ecclesiastical censure, orthodox, learned, wise, well acquaint-

ed with ecclesiastical laws, and able distinctly, clearly; and

in proper order, to recite the two Pratimokshas.

Bagawa having resided in Rajagaha as long as he thought |

it advisable, left that place to visit his native city Kapila

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 127

Watt’hun, and arriving there abode in a Nigrodha grove.

The mother of Rahula (Goutama’s wife prior to his becoming

a priest,) said to Rahula, Your father is come, go and ask for

your inheritance. Then Prince Rahula went to Budha, and

standing before him said, Pleasant is your shadow, Samana.

Budha then rose from his seat and departed; but Rahula fol-

lowed him saying, Samana, give me my inheritance! Samana,

give me my inheritance! Then Budha called Sariputta and

said, Sariputta, admit Prince Rahula into the priesthood.

Sariputta enquired in what manner he should ordain him:

upon which Budha assembled the priests, and said:

44. Priests, I direct that a Samanero shall be ordained

by thrice repeating the Saranas. And thus shall he be

ordained. First, let the head and beard be shaved, yellow

robes put on, and one shoulder being bared, let (the candidate)

worship the feet of the priests, kneel down and with joined

hands say, I take refuge in Budha, I take refuge in the doc-

trine, I take refuge in the priesthood. A second time I take

refuge in Budha, a second time I take refuge in the doctrine,

a second time I take refuge in the priesthood. A third time

I take refuge in Budha, a third time I take refuge in the

doctrine, a third time I take refuge in the priesthood. I direct

priests, that by this thrice repeating the Saranas, a Samanero

shall be ordained.

Sariputta accordingly ordained Prince Rahula a priest.

The king Suddhodano, Budha’s father, came to him and

having worshipped him sat down and said, I have to solicit a

boon. He then stated that he experienced much sorrow

when Goutama became a priest: that this was much increased

when Ananda joined the priesthood, and that the ordination

of Rahula, whom he loved with the most tender affection, was

like tearing off the skin and crushing the bones and marrow ;

and requested that in future no person should be admitted

into the priesthood, unless he had first obtained the consent of

his parents. Budha consoled his father by explaining his

_ doctrines to him, and when the king retired, he assembled his

_ priests, and said; ‘

128 Budhism:—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood:

45. Priests, no person should be received into the priest~

hood who has not previously received the consent of his parents.

He who receives him is guilty of Dukkata.

Afterwards Budha left Kapila Watt’hu and going to Sawatti

resided at Jetawany. At that time a family who ministered

to Sariputta brought one of their sons to him and requested

that he wouldreceivehimas a Samanero. Sariputta, although

desirous to meet their wishes, remembered that Budha had

prohibited any priest having more than one Samanero under

his charge, and he already had Rahula. He stated the cir-

cumstance to Budha, who decreed :

46. I permit, priests, that an eloquent and well informed

priest may have two Samaneros under his care, or as many

as he is able to advise and instruct.

The Samaneros then desired to know what precepts they —

were to observe, and upon its being reported to Budha, he

decreed : |

47, direct, priests, that Samaneros shall be taught these

ten precepts, and obey them: To abstain from destroying

life: to abstain from theft: to abstain from incontinence: to

abstain from lying: to abstain from intoxicating liquors:

to abstain from taking food after mid-day: to abstain from

dancing, singing, playing on musical instruments and thea-

trical representations: to abstain from the. use of flowers,

garlands, perfumes and cosmetics: to abstain from the use of

high or large couches ; and to abstain from receiving gold or

silver. I direct priests, that Samaneros shall be taught these

ten precepts, and be subject to them. )

Some Samaneros became careless, and disrespectful and

disobedient to the priests. This being reported to Budha, he

decreed :

48. Priests, I direct that Samaneros cuilty of the five acts

following, shall be subject to Penal Discipline (eA2rO@o

danda kamman) namely, if they strive to diminish the pros-

perity of the priests ; to render them uncomfortable ; to remove

them from their dyyellings; if they speak insolently and

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 129

abusively to the priests; or if they excite dissensions between

priests; I direct, priests, that for any of these five offences a

Samanero shall be placed under penal discipline.

The priests were doubtful how this discipline should be

exercised: upon which Budha decreed :

49. I direct, priests, that they shall be plied under an

interdict, (Oc -o a restraint or prohibition respecting the

performance of certain actions or being in certain places.)

Some priests prohibited Samaneros from being in any part

of the grounds belonging to the Monastery. In consequence

of which some of them ceased to be priests, while others joined

other religious bodies. This was reported to Budha, who

decreed : ,

50. Itis not proper, priests, to prohibit an entrance into

the entire grounds connected with the priest’s residence: who-

ever does so is guilty of Dukkata. “I permit priests, that

entrance into the place where the Upadya lives, or to which he

returns, may be interdicted.

Some priests placed an interdicton the door of the mouth

(i. e. prohibited the Samanero from eating or drinking), and

when persons brought conjee and rice for the use of the priests,

they invited the Samaneros to partake thereof. They replied,

We cannot, friends: we are prohibited by the priests. The

people were much dissatisfied with this conduct. The circum-

stance was brought to the notice of Budha, who decreed :

51. Itis not proper, priests, to prohibit (the Samaneros)

from eating. He who does so is guilty of Dukkata.

Some of the six class priests, (that is, a fraternity of six

principal priests, who had many disciples and adherents among:

the junior priests) placed Samaneros under an interdict with-

out the authority or privity of the Samaneros’ Upadya: and

when the Upadya sought for them, saying, Where are our Sa-

_ maneros, we do not see them; they were informed that the six

_ class priests had put them under an inderdict. They com-

_ plained to Budha, who decreed:

52. It is not proper, priests, to put (a Samanero) under an

YOL. II. iS

130 Budhism :—-Laws of the Budhist Priesthood,

interdict without the concurrence of the Upadyo: whoever does

so is guilty of Dukkata.

Some of the six class priests enticed the Samaneros to leave

their own Upadyas and wait upon them, so that those Upadyas

had to bring water, &c., and wait on themselves. This was

reported to Budha, who decreed :

53. It is not proper, priests, to entice the attendants of

other priests; whoever does so is guilty of Dukkata.

A Samanero seduced a priestess. The priests complained

to Budha, who decreed :

54. I direct, priests, that a Samanero who is guilty of the

ten following crimes shall be expelled the priesthood. If

he destroy life; if he take that which is not given to him; if

he be incontinent ; if he speak lies; if he drink intoxicating

liquors ; if he speak evil of Budha ; if he speak evil of the doc-

trine; if hespeak evil of the priests ; if he be heterodox ; if he

debauch a priestess. I direct, priests, to expel from the priest-

hood (a2@eep0 nésetun to kill, destroy) a Samanero guilty of

any of these ten crimes.

A eunuch was admitted into the priesthood, but continued

to actasa catamite. Budha decreed:

55. Priests, if a eunuch have not received Upasampada it

should not be given to him: or if he have received Upasampada

he shall be expelled.

Apperson of an ancient family who had been educated in

luxury became exceedingly poor, and did not know how to

obtain a subsistence: being quite unfit for business ef any

kind, seeing that the priestsfared well, he determined to shave

his head and assume the priestly garb. He accordingly put

on the yellow robes, took a begging bowl in his hand and

going to a Monastery represented himself to be a priest of

Budha, but he was soon detected, being unacquainted with

_ the rules of the priesthood. The case being investigated by |

Upali was reported to Budha, who decreed: :

56. Ifa person fraudulently dwell with the priests (he not —

having been admitted as a Samanero ) if he haye not received

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 131

Upasampada he shall not receive it: or if he have received

Upasampada he shall be expelled.

57. Aperson who has left the priesthood and joined another

religious fraternity, if he have not received Upasampada shall

not receive it: or if he have received Upasampada he shall

be expelled.

[The next law is introduced by a tale respecting a Nago.

These are represented as immense snakes of the Cobra

Capella tribe, but of miraculous power, and altogether

distinct from the common snake species: they havea peculiar

residence of their own where they possess immense riches.

Lhey can assume the human form, intermarry with the human

race and have children by them: yet their natural form is

serpentine. Budhist legends abound with tales respecting

them. |

A Nago was entirely disgusted with being of a serpentine

race, and thought, How can I speedily escape from this state,

and became a human being. He reflected on the purity and

holiness of the Budhist priests, and concluded that if he could

be received into the priesthood and receive Upasampada_ his

object would be accomplished, He therefore assumed the

form of a young man, and going to a Monastery requested

_ admission into the priesthood. He was admitted and after-

wards received Upasampada, and lived with another priest

ina room at the extremity of the Monastery. [i is said,

that the Nagas can only retain the human form while they

exercise consciousness, but if they fall so soundly asleep as to

be unconscious, the serpentine form isdeveloped. The priest

who lived in the room withthe Nago rose very early and went

into the open air; upon his departure the Nago fell into a

sound sleep, and his natural form being developed, his body

filled the entire room and part of it extended beyond the

window. ‘The priest who had gone out being desirous of

_ returning to his room, opening the door saw this immense

: snake and shrieked withterror. The whole Monastery was

alarmed, and the Nago awaking assumed the human form.

132 Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.

Upon being questioned he stated who he was, and his reason

for wishing to become a priest. The priests informed Budha

of the circumstance, who convened an assembly of the priests,

and told the Nago that his desire to become a priest could not

be accomplished; but that if he religiously observed the Upos-

atha (Poya) days he would escape from the serpentine race

and soon be born asa human being. Budha then decreed:

58. Ananimal, priests, who has not obtained Upasampada

shall not receive it: or if he have obtained Upasampada he

shall be expelled.

A young man had killed his mother, and being tortured

with remorse, hoped by becoming a priest to escape from the

consequences of his crime. He accordingly applied for ad-

mission, but the case of the Nago having taught the priests

caution, he was examined by Upaliand the case was reported

to Budha, who decreed : ?

59. Priests, a matricide who has not obtained Upasam-

pada shall not receive it: or if he have received ee

he shall be expelled:

| The following laws are introduced by a slight notice of

the reason of their being enacted, in a manner similar to the

preceding: these introductions are omitted, as they contain

nothing of interest. |

60. A parricide, priests, who has not obtained Upasam-

pada shall not receive it : or if he have obtained Upasampada

he shall be expelled.

61. Priests, he who has killed a Rahat, if he have not

obtained Upasampada, he shall not receive it: if he have

obtained Upasampada he shall be expelled.

62. Priests, he who has violated a priestess, if he have not

obtained Upasampada he shall not receive it: if he have

obtained Upasampada he shall be expelled.

63. Priests, he who promotes schism among the priests,

if he have not obtained Upasampada he shall not receive it:

if he have obtained Upasampada he shall be expelled.

64, Priests, he who draws blood from theperson of Budha,

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 133

if he have not obtained Upasampada shall not receive it: or

if he have obtained Upasampada he shall be expelled.

Some persons who were without an Upadya received Upa-

sampada. Upon this being reported to Budha, he decreed:

65. Priests, Upasampada shall not be given to one who

has not an Upadya: he who gives Upasampada to such is

guilty of Dukkata.

Some gave Upasampada to persons who took the whole

Sangho as Upadya: upon which Budha decreed.

66. Priests, Upasampada shall not be given to any one

who has the Sangho as an Upadya: he who gives the Upa-

sampada is guilty of Dukkata.

Some gave Upasampada to persons who took a number of

priests, less than a Sangho,as Upadya. This being reported

to Budha, he decreed:

67. Priests, Upasampada shall not be given to any one

having a number of priests less than a Sangho as Upadya;

he who gives the Upasampada is guilty of Dukkata.

Some persons received Upasampada having improper per-

sons as Upadya. ‘This being reported to Budha, he degreed:

68. Priests, Upasampada shall not be given to any persons

having for Upadya a eunuch; one furtively living with the

priests (an imposter); one who has united himself to another

fraternity ; one who is an animal; a matricide; a parricide; a

murderer of a Rahat; a violater of a priestess ; a schismatic ;

one who has drawn blood from the person of Budha; or one

who is an hermaphrodite. He who gives the Upasampada

is guilty of Dukkata.

Some persons were admitted to Upasampada who had not

| been furnished with the bowl, robes, and other articles which

a priest should possess, in consequence of which Budha

decreed : |

69. Priests, Upasampada shall not be given to a person

who is without a bowl: he who gives the Upasampada is

guilty of Dukkata.

70. Priests, Upasampada shall not be given to a person

134 Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.

who is not provided with the robes: he who gives the Upa-

sampada is guilty of Dukkata.

71. Priests, Upasampada shall not be given to a person

who is not provided both with a bowl and the robes : he who

gives the Upasampada is guilty of Dukkata.

72. Priests, Upasampada shall not be given to a person

who has a borrowed bowl: he who gives the Upasampada is

guilty of Dukkata:

73. Priests, Upasampada shall not be given to a person

who has borrowed robes: he who gives the Upasampada is

euilty of Dukkata.

74. Priests, Upasampada shall not be given toa person

whose bowl and robes are borrowed, he who gives the Upa-

sampada is guilty of Dukkata.

The priests admitted to Upasampada persons who were

mained, deformed, diseased, or of known bad character: these

circumstances having been reported to Budha, he decreed :

75. Priests, no person shall be admitted to Upasampada,

whose feet or hands, or feet and hands, have been amputated ;

whosegnose or ears, or nose and ears have been cut off;

whose finger or thumb has been amputated; whose tendons

have been cut (so as to produce lameness); whose fingers are

joined together (so that they cannot be separated from each

other); who is hump-backed ; who is a dwarf, or who has a

swelling in the neck; who has been branded, flogged, or out-

lawed ; who has a swollen leg; an evil disease; an offensive

personal odour; who is blind with one eye; deformed ; lame ;

who is a paralytic ; maimed; decrepid; blind with both eyes;

dumb;deaf; blind and dumb; blind and deaf; deaf and dumb;

or blind, deaf and dumb: he who gives the Upasampada is

guilty of Dukkata.

The six class priests received as resident pupils priests who

were of irregular conduct (“‘shameless” priests) Budha ordained:

76. Priests, Nissayo (the privilege of residence asa pupil)

shall not be given to shameless persons: he who gives it is

euilty of Dukkata.

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 135

Some priests went to reside as pupils with priests of irre-

gular life and these soon became shameless and wicked priests :

Budha decreed :

77. Priests, no one shall reside as a pupil with a shame-

less priest: he who does so is guilty of Dukkata.

The priests then enquired, how they could ascertain that

the priests, whether preceptors or pupils, were irregular in

their conduct. Budha decreed : "

78. Priests, I permit a residence of four or five days

until the character of the priest is ascertained.

A junior priest travelling through Kosul thought, Bagawa

has decreed that junior priests shall live with their preceptors.

Iam a junior priest, and am alone on my journcy, what

ought I todo? The case was reported to Budha, who decreed:

79. Priests, I permit that when a priest on a journey

cannot be with a preceptor, he may reside apart from him.

Two priests were travelling through Kosul, and one was

detained on the road by sickness. He, being-a junior, ought

to reside under the inspection of a preceptor, and he was

doubtful what he cought to do: Budha decreed :

80. Priests, I permit a sick priest, who cannot be under

the imspection of a preceptor, to remain alone ( without

inspection. )

A junior priest who attended on the above mentioned sick

priest, also reflected that he himself was a priest, who, accord-

ing to the precepts of Budha, ought to live under the in-.

spection of a preceptor. He enquired what he ought to do:

Budha decreed :

81. Priests, I permit that a priest, ministering to a sick

priest, may remain without being under inspection, if he

cannot be with a preceptor.

A priest residing in a wilderness found it conducive to his

spiritual welfare to remain there : but he was one who ought

to live under the direction of a preceptor. He remembered

the precept, and was doubtful respecting the course he ought

to adopt. The case being reported to Budha, he decreed :

136 Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.

82. Priests, if a residence in a wilderness appears to be

for the welfare of a priest, and if he have no preceptor there

with whom he may live, he may continue without being under

inspection, saying within himself, Whenever a suitable person

arrives I will dwell with him. |

Maha Kassapa was Upadya to a person who sought to

obtain Upasampada, and he sent a messenger to Ananda re-

questing him to come and recite the formulary. Ananda

thought, I cannot presume to pronounce the name (his

proper name when he wasa layman) of the Tero: I reverence

the Tero. The case was submitted to Budha, who decreed:

83. Priests, I permit the Gotra (of the Upadya) to be

used in reciting the formulary.

[ That is, instead of saying N desires to receive Upasam-

pada under Pipili as his Upadya, he may use the name given

when he became priest, and say, N desires to receive Upa-

sampada under Maha Kassapa as Upadya. The object was to

avoid pronouncing the proper name of the Upadya, which

would be regarded as claiming an equality with him. | —

There were two candidates for Upasampada having Maha

Kassapa as their Upadya: a contest arose respecting the one

to be first ordained, as he would be the senior, the privileges

of seniority being considerable. Budha decreed:

84. Priests, I permit two persons to be named in the

same formulary.

That is, both names to be joined: as M and N desire to

receive Upasampada, &c., by which means they would stand

on an equality.

There were several candidates for Upasampada under

different Upadyas: they contended who should be ordained

first, and the Upadyas thought they might all be included in

the same formulary. The case was reported to Budha, who |

decreed: Ge :

85. Priests, I permit two or three to be included in one

formulary, if they have the same Upadya, but not if the

Upadyas be different.

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 13%

When Kumara Kassapa received Upasampada, his age was

computed from his conception in the womb of his mother, so

that he had not lived twenty years from the time of his having

been brought forth from the womb. As Budha had decreed

that no person should receive Upasampada who was not twenty

years of age, he became doubtful respecting the vadility of

his ordination. The case was submitted to Budha, who said:

Priests, whenever the first thought or first perception is

produced in the womb of the mother, then there is Jati (birth,

or commencement of life. )

86. Priests, I permit Upasampada to be given twenty

years after conception in the womb.

~ Some priests were seen afflicted with ulcers, and other

diseases. The case was reported to Budha, who decreed :

87. Idirect, priests, that when Upasampada is to be given,

enquiry shall be made respecting the 13 disqualifications for

ordination: and theenquiry shall be in this manner : Have you

any of these diseases, leprosy, ulcers, dry itch, consumption,

epilepsy ? Are you a human being? Are youa male? A free-

man? Out of debt? Are you not in the king’s service (a soldier,

&c.)? Have you the permission of your parents? Are you full

twenty years ofage ? Have you the bowl and robes complete ?

What is your name ? What is the name of your Upadya?

The candidates for Upasampada were questioned at the

time of ordination respecting the disqualifications before re-

cited, but they were timid and abashed, and unable to give

suitable answers. Budha decreed : |

88. Priests, I direct that the candidates shall first be

instructed, and afterwards questioned respecting the dis-

qualifications. :

The candidates were instructed on these points in the

midst of the Sangho, but from timidity and bashfulness they

could not give suitable answers, Budha decreed : ;

89. Priests, I direct that the instruction shall be given

apart, but that they be questioned respecting the disquali-

YOL. II, ,

138 . Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.

fications in the midst of the Sangho: and in this form they

shall be instructed. First, the candidate is to obtain an Upa-

dya : after an Upadya has been obtained he must be informed

respecting the bowl and robes: This is thy bowl; this is thy

Sanghati, this thy Uttarasangho: this thy Antarawasako

(names of the three robes). Go, and stand in that place.

Unlearned and unskilful priests gave the preparatory

instructions, in consequence of which the candidates were

timid and bashful, and could not answer correctly. Budha

decreed :

90. Priests, an unlearned and unskilful person shall not

give the preparatory instructions: if he do so, he is guilty of

Dukkata. I direct, priests, that a person learned and skilful

shall give the instructions.

Persons who had not been appointed by the Sangho gave

the preparatory instructions. Budha decreed :

91. Priests, a person who has not been appointed (by the

Sangho) shall not give the instructions: if he instruct he is

euilty of Dukkata. I direct, priests, that instruction shall

be given by a person appointed for that purpose. And thus,

priests, shall he be appointed: the appointment may*be by a

self-nomination, or by the nomination of another person.

How is the appointment to be by a self-nomination? A learned

and skilful priest shall thus address the Sangho, Hear me,

Lord Sangho! M seeks Upasampada under N as his superior.

If it be a convenient time for the Sangho, I will instruct

M. Thus he nominates himself. How should one person nomi-

nate another? A learned and skilful priest shall thus address

the Sangho: Hear me, Lord Sangho! M seeks Upasampada

under N as his superior. If it be a convenient time for the San-

oho, A will instruct M. Thus one person nominates another.

Then the priest thus nominated is to go to the candidate and

say, M, attend. This is a season for you to speak the truth

and state things as they are. When you are questioned in

the Sangho, if you know the thing to be so, say It is. If

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 139

you know it is not so, say Itis not. Do not be timid or

bashful. They will thus question you, Have you any of these

diseases: leprosy, ulcers, dry itch, consumption, epilepsy?

Are youa human being? Are youa male? Are you a free

man? Are you outof debt? Are you in the king’s service? Have

you the permission of your parents? Are you fully twenty

years of age? Have you the bowl and robes complete? What

is your name? What is the name of your Upadya? Then

separating, the person who has given the instruction shall come

first, and addressing the Sangho, say, Hear me, Lord Sangho!

this M seeks Upasampada under N as his superior: he has been

instructed by me: if it bea convenient time for the Sangho, M

will approach. He will then say, Come! and the candidate

having removed his robe from one shoulder, and worshipped

the feet of the priests, shall kneel down, and with uplifted

hands he shall request Upasampada, saying, Lord Sangho, I

request Upasampada. Compassionate me, Lord Sangho, and

raise me up. A second time, Lord Sangho, I request Upa-

sampada. Compassionate me, Lord Sangho, and raise me up.

A third time, Lord Sangho, I request Upasampada. Com-

passionate me, Lord Sangho, and raise me up. A learned

and skilful priest shall then announce it to the Sangho, saying,

Hear me, Lord Sangho! this M requests Upasampada, hav-

ing N as his Upadya: if it be a convenient time for the

Sangho, I will question M respecting the disqualifications.

M, attend! this is a season for you to speak the truth, and

state things as they are. I question you respecting that

which you know: if it be so, say Itis. If it be notso, say

It is not. Have you any of these diseases: leprosy, ulcers,

dry itch, consumption, epilepsy? Are you a human being?

Are youa male? Are you a free man? Are you out of debt?

Ave you in the king’s service? Have you the permission of

your parents? Are you fully twenty years of age? Have you

the bowl and robes complete? What is your name? What is

the name of your Upadya? A learned and skilful priest will

140 Budhism:—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.

then address the Sangho, saying, Hear me, Lord Sangho! M

seeks Upasampada, having N for his Upadya: he is free from

the disqualifications, and has the bowl and robes complete.

M seeks Upasampada from the Sangho, having N for his

Upadya. Ifit be a convenient time the Sangho will grant

Upasampada to M, having N for his Upadya: this is an-

nounced. Hear me, Lord Sangho! this M seeks Upasam-

pada, having N for his Upadya: he is free from the disqualifi-

eations, and has the bowl and robes complete. This M

requests the Sangho to grant him Upasampada, having N for

Upadya. The Sangho grants Upasampada to M, having N

for his Upadya. Any venerable one who consents to the

giving Upasampada to M, having N for his Upadya, will

remain silent: he who dissents will speak. I state the same

a second time: Hear me, Lord Sangho! &c. Istate the same

a third time, Hear me, Lord Sangho! &c. M_ receives

Upasampada from the Sangho, having N. for his Upadya.

The Sangho assents, and therefore is silent; and thus I

receive it. Instruction shall then be given respecting the

measuring the shadow (of the sun); the several seasons, the

divisions of the day, and concerning the uses of the whole of

these. Also information must be given respecting the four

principles on which the priesthood is founded: viz, 1: The

priesthood is for the purpose of living upon food collected as

alms. This is that to which you are to attend as long as you

live. 2: The priesthood is for the purpose of wearing gar-

ments made of cast away cloth. This is that to which you

are to attend so long as you live, 3: The priesthood is

for the purpose of residing at the foot of a tree. To this you

are to attend so long as you live. 4: The priesthood is for

the purpose of using as medicine the urine of horned cattle.

To this you are to attend so long as you live. [To each of

these the extras (eSadgeaaqoqe) are added, for which see

p- 24. | ; ;

Thenew priests, after receiving Upasampada, were dismissed

Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood. 141

separately, without being instructed in the four obligations

incumbent on them. One of them was met by the woman

who had been his wife, and yielded to her solicitations. The

case was reported to Budha, who decreed:

92. Priests, I direct that when Upasampada has been

given, the four acts improper to be done by a priest shall be

explained to him. 1: The ordained priest shall not have

sexual intercourse even with an animal: he who has sexual

intercourse ceases to be a priest, a son of Sakya. As when

a man is decapitated the body is no longer capable of life, so

the priest having this intercourse is no longer a priest, a son

of Sakya. Thisact is unlawful so long as youlive. 2: The

ordained priest shall not take, witha dishonest intention, any

thing which is not given to him, not even a blade of grass.

If any priest with a dishonest intention shall take a pada, or

the value ofa pada, or more than a pada, which is not given

to him, he ceases to be a priest, a son of Sakya. As aseared

leaf separated from its stalk is no longer capable of vegetating,

even so a priest who, with a dishonest intention takes a pada,

or the value of a pada, or more than a pada, which is not given

to him, ceases to be a priest, a son of Sakya. This act is

unlawful so long as you live. 3: The ordained priest shall

not willingly take away the life of any being, not even of an

insect. Any priest who shall wilfully destroy human life,

even by causing abortion, ceases to bea priest, a son of Sakya.

As a large rock split into two cannot again be united, even

so a priest who wilfully destroys the life of a human being,

ceases to be a priest, a son of Sakya. This act is unlawful

so long as you live. 4: An ordained priest shall not boast

of high spiritual attainments, even if it be by saying, I delight

in solitude. Any priest who with an evil design and boasting,

shall untruly and falsely profess to have high spiritual attain-

ments, whether abstract meditation(@@2eno jhanan), freedom

from the passions (882329 wimokkhan), unbroken tranquil-

lity (e@280 samadhin), attainment either of the paths to

142 Budhism :—Laws of the Budhist Priesthood.

Nirwana or to the results of those paths, ceases to bea priest.

a sonof Sakya. Even as the palm tree when its top is cut

off cannot flourish again, so the priest who with an evil design

and boasting, shall untruly and falsely profess to have high

spiritual attainments, ceases to be a priest, a son of Sakya.

This act is unlawful so long as you live.

A priest who had been guilty of a fault and placed under

discipline, would not acknowledge himself guilty, but left the

priesthood. Afterwards he repented and sought to be re-ad-

mitted. The case was reported to Budha, who decreed:

93. If any priest, guilty of a fault, has been placed under

discipline, does not acknowledge his fault but leaves the

priesthood: if he afterwards seeks re-admission he must be

thus addressed: Do you acknowledge your fault? If he say,

I do, he may be made a priest (Samanero), but if he do not

acknowledge his fault, he shall not be made priest. After he

has been made a priest, he must be asked again if he will

acknowledge his fault and submit to discipline. If he promise

this, he may receive Upasampada. After receiving Upasam-

pada he is to submit to the discipline required for his former

offence. If he do this, it is well: if not he shall again be

placed under the discipline of non-intercourse.

End of the Maha Khandako, or Chapter respecting Ordination.

( To be continued. )

NIN LOI NA NL NOI DLN AN IN LF

Ceylon Ornithology. 143

CEYLON ORNITHOLOGY,

By i. F. Keiaart, Esq., M.D., Staff Surgeon.

In order to place before the Ceylon student of Natural

History a systematic account of the Genera of Birds, I have

extracted for their use descriptions of the Genera of Ceylon

Birds from the celebrated work of Gray and MITCHELL,

which from its costly character is beyond the reach of many.

My descriptions of Ceylon Birds formed originally part of

a work contemplated by Mr. Layard and myself: the former

undertaking to write an account of the habits of the birds.

But owing to Mr. Layard’s unexpected departure from Cey-

lon in search of health, we are not able to work together.

Therefore, I can only promise to bring before the public,

descriptions of birds which I have either seen or examined.

But with a view of making the paper more complete, I shall

add from authentic sources descriptions of other birds, of

which I have not at present any specimens to describe

from.

It will also be my endeavour to describe the habits of some

of the birds which have come within the limited field of my

own observation, trusting that at no distant time some Field

- Naturalist will finish the work now begun.

Gray's Genera of Birds adapted to Ceylon Ornithology.

Orper. I. AcCIPETREs.

This order embraces the Birds of Prey; they have the bill

of various length and form, more or less compressed, with the

culmen suddenly hooked at the tip, and acute: the base more

or less covered with a cere, in which are pierced the variously

formed nostrils; the wings lengthened and pointed; the feet

144 Ceylon Ornithology.

strong, with farsi moderate, generally rounded and covered

with scales of different shapes; the toes three before and one

behind, all armed with strong claws, and their soles invariably

rough.

The first Sub-Order

Accipetres Diurnt, or Diurnal Birds of Prey,

are distinguished from those that pursue ther food in the

twilight or at night, by the lateral position of their eyes: the

base of the upper mandible covered for nearly half its length

with a prominent cere, in which the nostrils are placed: the

tarst moderate, scaled, and rarely covered with plumes.

FAM: FALCONIDZ.

SUB-FAM: AQUILINZ, or EAGLES.

GEnNus. AquiLa. Mehr.

Bill strong at the base, and with the apical portion of the

culmen much curved to the tip, which is greatly hooked and

acute: the sides much compressed, and the lateral margins

festooned; the nostrils placed at the cere, large, and rather

oblique. Wings lengthened and acute, with the fourth and

fifth quills equal and longest. Tazl long and wedge-shaped, or

rounded at the end. Yarsi rather longer than the middle toe,

robust, and entirely clothed to the base of the toes with

feathers. Toes moderate, strong, lateral ones unequal, and all

armed with strong, curved, acute claws: the inner the strongest.

GENUS. SPIZAETUS. Vieill.

Bill moderate, the culmen straight at the base, and much

arched to the tip, which is acute and compressed, and the

lateral margins festooned ; the nostrils large and rather rounded.

Wings moderate, reaching to half the length of the tail, with

the fourth and fifth quills equal and longest. Tal long and

slightly rounded at the end. Tarsi slender, much longer than

the middle toe, and plumed to the base of the toes. Toes long,

strong, the inner one much longer than the outer, which is

;

pay

Ceylon Ornithology. 145

united to the middle one by a membrane: all covered above

with small scales except at the apex, where there are a few

transverse ones, and each toe armed with a long, strong,

curved and acute claw.

Genus. Crrcaretus. Vrerll.

Bill moderate, culmen at the base straight, and much curved

to the tip, which is hooked and acute, the lateral margins

festooned; the nostrils large, oblique, and suboval. Wings

lengthened and acute, with the third and fourth quills equal

and longest. Tail long and even. Jarsi much longer than

the middle toe, feathered below the knee, and entireiy re-

ticulated. Joes short, strong, and covered with small scales,

except at the tips; the outer united to the middle by a mem-

brane; the claws long, curved, and acute.

Genus. Hattiartus. Sav.

- Bill large, culmen straight at the base, and curved to the

tip, which is hooked and acute, the sides compressed, the

lateral margins slightly festooned, and the lores naked; the

nostrils moderate, linear, and oblique. Wings lengthened and

acute, with the third, fourth, and fifth quills nearly equal and

longest. Tail moderate and rounded, Tarsi short, strong,

covered in front with transverse narrow scales, and with small

irregular ones posteriorly, and on the sides. Toes long,

mostly covered above with transverse scales; the claws long,

curved, and acute.

Genus. PonrToaretus. Kaup.

The characters of Haliaétus, except that the tarsz are covered

in front with transverse scales, posteriorly with large irregularly

placed scales, and on the inner side with small ones. Tves

almost entirely covered above with transverse scales.

mvOL. U1. U

146 Ceylon Ornithology.

Genus. Hauiastur. Selby.

Most of the characters are similar to those of Haliaétus:

but the ¢ars? are covered in front with large obliquely placed

scales, posteriorly with large irregular scales, and the sides

with small ones.

SUB-FAM: FALCONINA, TRUE FALCONS.

GENUS. Fatco. Linn.

Bill short, strong, with the cudmen much arched from the

base to the tip, which is acute: the sides compressed, the la-

teral margins strongly toothed near the tip; the nostriis placed

in a short cere, naked and rounded, with a central tubercle.

Wings lengthened and acute, with the second and third quills

the longest, and the first and second notched near the tip.

Tail long androunded. Jars: short and strong, covered with

small irregular scales, and the tibial feathers covering the

knee. oes lengthened and strong, the lateral ones unequal;

the hind toe long, armed as well as the inner with a strong,

hooked, acute claw.

GENUS. HyPpoTRIORCHIS. Bote.

The characters in common with Falco; but the tars: more

or less lengthened, somewhat slender, and covered in front

with large hexagonal scales. Toes very long and slender.

Genus. Tinnunouuus. Vieill.

The forms agree with those of Falco. But the tarsi are

more or less lengthened, strong, and covered in front with

large transverse hexagonal scales. Toes moderate and

strong. :

SUB-FAM: MILVINZ, or KITES.

Genus. Baza. Hodgson.

Bill moderate, elevated at the base, which is broad, the

sides compressed, the cudmen much arched, and the lateral

Ceylon Ornithology. 147

margins furnished with two small teeth near the tip, the

lower mandible also furnished with small teeth near the tip;

lores clothed with small feathers; the nostrils placed in the

cere, in the form of an oblique slit. Wings lengthened, nearly

reaching to the end of the tail, with the third and fourth quills

the longest. Tazl long and broad. Tarsi thick and very

short, longer than the middle toe; basal half plumed, and the

other part covered with small scales. Toes thick, free at their

base, the inner longer than the outer; the claws small and

acute.

GENUS. Mitvus. Cru.

Bill laterally compressed, the culmen straight at the base,

and then much curved to the tip, which is acute, the lateral

. margins somewhat straight; the nostrils oval, and placed rather

obliquely in the cere. Wings very long, with the third and

fourth quills the longest. Tail very long, broad, rounded,

or more or less forked at the end. Zars: very short, partly

plumed from the base, and the rest covered with scales. Toes

rather short, with the outer united at its base to the middle

one, the claws long and curved.

GENUS. Enanus. Sav.

Bill short, very broad at the base, and compressed towards

the tip, which is hooked and acute; the nostrils large and

§ 4 uboval. Wings very long, pointed, and reaching beyond the

tail, with the second quill the longest. Tazl long, and slightly

emarginated. TJarsi short, nearly the length of the middle

toe, with the basal part plumed, and the other covered with

reticulated scales. ves moderate, broad, and free at the base,

“ with the outer much shorter than the inner toe; the claws

ft strong and curved.

SUB FAM: ACCIPITRINZA, or SPARROW HAWKS.

Genus. AstuR. Lacep.

Bill short, broad at the base, and with the sides gradually

146 Ceylon Ornithology.

compressed to the tip; the culmen elevated, and much arched

to the tip, which is acute, and the lateral margins festooned

in the middle; the nostrils large and suboval, and placed in

the basal cere. Wings long, reaching to the middle of the

tail, with the third, fourth, and fifth quills nearly equal, and

longest. Yaillong and broad. Tarsi rather longer than the

roiddle toe; the anterior and posterior sides covered with broad

transverse scales. Toes more or less lengthened, strong, and

padded beneath each jomt; the lateral toes unequal; the

imner and hinder ones equally long and strong, and armed

with long, strong, and curved claws.

Ses

GENUS. ACCIPITER. Ariss.

Bill very short with the culmen much arched to the tip,

which is acute; the sides much compressed, and the lateral

margins festooned; the nostri/s placed anteriorly in the cere,

large and suboval, partly concealed by the projecting hairs of

the lores. Wings moderate, with the fourth and fifth quills

nearly equal, and longest. Taz long, ample, and nearly

square at the end. TZarsi longer than the middle toe, covered

in front with nearly obsolete scales. Toes more or less

lengthened, and padded beneath the joints; the lateral ones

unequal, and the inner and hind toes equal in length, and

both with a strong curved claw.

SUB-FAM: CIRCINZ, or HARRIERS.

GENUS. Circus. Lacep.

Bill moderate, elevated at the base of the culmen and

arched to the tip, which is hooked; the sides compressed, and

the lateral margins festooned; the nostrils large, oval, and

partly concealed by the curved hairs of the bases. Wings

long, with the third and fourth quills nearly equal and longest.

Tail long and rounded onthe sides. Tursilong, slender, and

compressed, the outer side covered with transverse scales,

and the inner with small scales. oes moderate, with the

Ceylon Ornithology. : 149

outer one longer than the inner; the claws long, slender and

acute.

Susp-Orper. AccipitrRes Nocrurnt.

Nocturnal Birds of Prey.

FAM: STRIGIDZ, or OWLS.

SUB-FAM: SURNIN, or HAWK OWLS.

Genus. ATHENE. Bove.

Bill short, partly concealed by the projecting plumes,

the sides compressed, the culmen much arched to the tip,

which is hooked and acute; the nostrils basal, lateral and

hidden by the frontal plumes. Wings rather long and rounded,

and nearly even. Tarsi longer than the middle toe, and

| with the third and fourth quills the longest. Tazl moderate

: covered with plumes. Toes short, and covered with scattered

hairs; the claws long, arched and acute.

_ SUB-FAM: BUBONIN, or HORNED OWLS.

Genus. Epurautus, Keys, and Bl

Bill moderate, the base concealed and broad, the sides

compressed, with the cudmen flattened at the base, and curved

to the tip, which is hooked ; the lateral margins curved; the

nostrils rounded, placed in the forepart of the cere, and covered

by the basal plumes. Wings long, with the second, third and

fourth quills nearly equal and longest. Tail short, and more

or less even. Yarsi rather long, and covered with short

_ plumesto the base of the toes. Joes long, covered with

q small seales at the base, and with three or four transverse

scales at the tip; the claws moderate, strong and curved.

GENUS. Ketupa. Less.

Bill large, broad at the base, compressed towards the tip,

| which is hooked, the lateral margins slightly arched: the

150 Ceylon Ornithology.

nostrils lateral, placed in the anterior part of the cere, and

hidden by the projecting plumes. Wings moderate, with the

third and fourth quills equal and longest. Tazl short, and

nearly even at the end. Tarsi rather long, covered at the

base with down, and towards the tips with minute scales.

Toes moderate, strong, covered with small scales, except at

the tips which are furnished with three or four transverse

scales, the lateral toes unequal, the claws long, strong and

curved.

SUB-FAM: SYRNIINE, or OWLETS.

GENUS. SYRNIUM. Sav.

Bill moderate, strong, with the base broad, and concealed

by the frontal plumes ; the sides compressed, and the culmen

arched to the tip, which is hooked; the nostrils basal, lateral,

and medial, with the opening large and oval. Wings long

and rounded, with the fourth and fifth quills equal and longest.

Fail long, broad, and more or less rounded. Tarsz short,

strong, thick, and densely clothed with plumes. oes mode-

rate, densely plumed to the end of each toe, the claws long,

acute, and slightly curved.

SUB FAM: STRIGINZ, or OWLS.

GENUS. Srrix. Linn.

Billlong, mostly concealed at the base by the projecting

plumes; the sides much compressed, and the culmen arched

to the tip, which is acute and hooked; the nostrils large,

party covered hy a membrane, with the opening oval, and

slightly hidden by the hairs. Wings very long, with the

second quill the longest, Zazl short and generally even.

Tarsi much longer than the middle toe, slender and covered

with short soft plumes. Toes long, and covered with scattered

hairs; the lateral ones unequal, the outer much shorter than

the inner; the hind toe short and thick; the claws long,

curved and acute,

Ceylon Ornithology. 151

DESCRIPTION OF BIRDS OF CEYLON,

By if. KF, Kerasarr, M. D.

Orver. ACCIPITRES.

SUB-ORDER. ACCIPITRES DIURNI.

Diurnal Birds of Prey.

FAM: FALCONIDZ.

: a. AQUILINA

Aquita Bonevui, Zemm. The Genoese Eagle.

q Syn. Aquila intermedia, Bonelli.

' Aquila fasciata, Vierll.

4 Nisaétus grandis, Hodgson,

Uniform dark brown above, white beneath with ee brown

4 longitudinal streaks on the chin, throat and breast; upper

| part of inner web of primaries streaked and spotted with

_ white. Tail slaty blue with darker transversal bands, tip

: palish; under tail coverts white, irregularly barred with

— rufous brown. Thighs barred withrufous brown. Bull horn

' colour, cere yellow, tarsi yellow, claws black.

| The only specimen of this Eagle examined is one found by

B Dr. Templeton, it measured 2 feet 3 inches; closed winged,

‘I foot 6 inches. Habitat not known.

Aquita Pennara, Gmel. The Pennated Eagle.

Syn. Aquila minuta, Brehm.

Spizactus milvoides, Jerdon.

’ | Head and neck light rufous brown with dark medial streaks.

Back, wings, and upper surface of tail dark brown. Under

parts white, breast and lower part of neck streaked with

ufous brown; shafts of feathers of a darker shade. Under

wing coverts white, shafts brown, a few brown spots on the

152 Ceylon Ornithology.

outer ones. Upper tail coverts rufous with whitish tips and

margins. Extreme tip of tail pale. “Thighs and legs white,

indistinctly spotted light rufous. Bullslaty blue; toes yellow;

claws black. Length 1 foot 6 inches. Wing 1 foot 3 inches.

Shot at Point Pedro by Mr. Edgar Layard. This is one

of our rarest indigenous birds of prey. _

AQuiLta MALAYEnsIs, Reinw. The Black Eagle.

Syn. Aquila pernigra, Hodgson.

Neopus perniger, Hodgson.

Nisaétus? ovivorous, Jerdon.

Ictinaétus Malaiensis, Blyth. -

Uniform black above, rather dusky below (a few white

spots scattered on the body and tail of the specimen examined).

Tail barred with broad brownish bands. Bull blue with black

tip, cere yellow. Toes yellow, claws black. Irides brown.

Occipital crest black. About 2 feet 6 inches long.

This is also a rare bird of prey in the Island. One or two

only are occasionally seen onthe Kandyan Hills. The speci-

men we have examined was procured by Mr. Charles Kelaari,

at Kaduganava.

Spizantus NIPALENSIS, Hodgson, Gray. The Beautiful

Crested Eagle.

Syn. Nisaétus Nipalensis, crested var. young. fod.

Nis. pulcher, adult, Hodg.

Falco orientalis? .

Falco lanceolatus? \ Lemm. et Schlegel.

Head and neck brown; the cheeks and chin have a triple

longitudinal marking of brown. Thighs, tarsi and inferior

tails coverts transversely barred with dark fawn. A grace-

ful pendant crest, composed of plumes of a brown colour.

Bill blue at the base, black at the tip ; the cere greenish yellow,

Ceylon Ornithology. 153

the iris golden; the toes yellow, and the nails black.

Hodgson.*

_ The above description is evidently of a young bird. An

adult specimen which I sent to Mr. Blyth has been identified

by that Naturalist with Sp. Npalensis. ‘This beautiful Eagle

is rarely seen, and that, too, only on the Alpine parts of the

Island. The only specimen I was so fortunate as to secure is

now in the Museum of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. Itis

30 inches long.

Spizartus Lymnantus, var. Horsf. The Common Crested

Eagle.

Syn. Falco cirrhatus, Gel.

Falco cristatellus, Temm.

Falco caligatus, var. Raffles.

Falco niveus, var. Temm.

Nizaétus Nepalensis, crestless var. Hogdson,

This Eagle is seen of several shades of colour and markings:

Two most distinct varieties are seen in Ceylon, one much

darker than the other and with a more developed crest. The

darker variety may be thus described.

Hair brown above, white beneath. Head and neck of a

rufous brown with narrow blackish mesial streaks. Chin,

- throat, and under part of body marked with broad dark rufous

brown longitudinal streaks. ‘Tail barred broadly. Under

surface of alar and tail quills white and barred with dark

brown. Under tail coverts rufous. Under wing coverts

white and spotted dark brown. ‘Thighs rufous and barred

with pale white. Tarsi white and freckled with brown.

Occipital crest black with white tips, 4 inches long. Length

1 foot 10 inches. Wing 13 inches. |

* ‘The whole of the under parts from the head downwards were beau-

_ tifally barred rufous in the Ceylon specimen.

VOL. II. x ,

154 Ceylon Ornithology.

The above characters correspond closely with Mr. Blyth’s

description of a specimen of this Hagle received from Midna-

pore. (J.A.S. B, vol. 1845, page 175).

The paler and more numerous variety, is not unlike Falco

niveus, Temm.

White predominating. Head and neck pale white or rufous

with narrow mesial streaks of a more or less dark rufous colour.

Base of dorsal feathers white and the tips of some of the

longer ones also white. The cheeks, chin and throat imma-

culate. Breast and abdomen with a few rufous spots and

mesial streaks. Thighs indistinctly spotted with hight rufous.

Tarsi white, immaculate. Occipital crest composed of white

and black plumes, some of the latter also white tipped.

Rather smaller than the dark variety.

There is also a crestless variety of this species, m colour

resembling the last described bird. 3

The crested variety is rather abundant at certain seasons

of the year in all the Maritime provinces and lower Kandyan

Hills. Itis a bold and powerful bird, attacking full crown

fowls in the native villages. In the Northern provinces they

are frequently seen on the topmost branches of the Banyan

tree, where the nests of crows furnish them with dainty food.

At Kaduganava this Eagle is often seen soaring above Daw-

son’s monument, sometimes alighting on its summit to devour

its prey; it is not however a very common bird on the

Kandyan Hills. I procured only a few specimens from

Kandy and Trincomalie, whereas, as many as seven were

shot by Mr. Layard on one tree in the Court yard at Point

Pedro,

PontoaETus LeucoGaster, Gmel. The White Bellied

Sea Hagle. |

Syn. Falco leucogaster, Gmel.

Falco Blagrus, Daudin.

Ceylon Ornithology. 155

Falco dimidiatus, Raffles.

Falco albicilla, var. Latham.

Ichthyaétus cultrungis, Blyth.

Haliaétus sphenurus, Gould.

Head, neck, and abdomen white. Back and wings ashy

brown, primaries nearly black; most part of the inner web of

secondaries white. Anterior two-thirds of tail dark brown,

the rest white. Upper tail coverts brown, slightly tipped

with white; lower white throughout; shorter lower wing

coverts white, with a few ashy splashes; longer ones ashy

brown. Thighs white. ‘Tarsi and two toes yellow, claws

black. Bill bluish. Length 3 feet 5 inches. Wing 1 foot

9 inches.

This is the largest of our Ceylon Birds of prey, common on

the Northern Coasts, rarely seen on the South-Western parts

of the Island; very abundant at the Salt lakes of Hambantotte,

and the Bay of Calpentyn. Mr Layard writes, “In fact,

wherever there is much shallow salt water, particularly if the

receding tide leaves bare a large extent of mud, there will this

Sea Eagle be found fishing in company with Haliastur Indicus

and Milvus Govinda. Unlike them, however, the Fish Eagle

prefers living prey to garbage, and is particularly destructive

among the sea snakes, which are very abundant in the sea

between Point Pedro and Point Calamanar on the opposite

coast. We have frequently seen this bird capturing its prey.

It keeps soaring very high, and then descends very rapidly,

with its wings half closed and upraised, its legs pendant, and

its body swaying to and fro, like the weight attached to a

parachute. When close to the object of its pursuit, the legs

are suddenly darted out, the prey seized near the head, the

fall arrested, and without touching the mud or water, the

noble bird soars upwards with its victim writhing in its claws.

If it fails to kill the eel or snake when on high, the booty 1s

dropped, and we have often secured a good specimen of marine

snake from this mishap of the bird.”

156 Ceylon Ornithology.

“ The Sea Eagle constructs a large nest (to which it adds

yearly) among the branches of some large tree, generally an

aged Bo-tree (Ficus religiosa ) is selected, and owes its security

to the superstitious fears of the ignorant natives, who, in spite

of all our promised reward, have invariably refused to ascend

the trees, alleging that the guardian demons of the sacred tree

would hurl them headlong down if they attempted to climb

the tree for such profane purpose as robbing a bird’s nest.

We have, therefore, as our own climbing days are over, never

been able to procure the eggs of this species.” | Mr. Layard

in MS. |

Pontoartus Icutuyarrus, Horsf. Brown Tank Eagle.

Syn. Falco Ichthyaétus, Horsf.

Plumage in general brownish; quills deep brown; head

erey ; chin whitish; neck brownish grey; breast and belly

pale ferruginous brown; lower part of the latter, the vent and

thighs white; tail dusky at the tip. Length 2 feet 4 inches.

Latham,

The only specimen secured by Mr. Layard is now with

Mr. Blyth.

Found in the large tanks in the Northern parts of the Island.

CircartTus CHEELA, Latham. The Undulated Bacha.

Syn. Falco cheela, Latham and Gmelin.

Hematornis undulatus, Vig.

Circaétus Nepalensis, Hodg.

Falco albidus, Zemm.

Falco Bacha, Daudin. (African Race.) .

Falco Bido, Horsf. (Malabar Race).

Head black, occipital crest tipped white or fulvous. Back

fuscus brown. Small wing coverts spotted white. Upper

{

Ceylon Ornithology. 157

tail coverts tipped white. Neck and breast dark rufous brown

with palish tips. Abdomen, lower wing and tail coverts

rufescent and spotted with small round white spots, (a blackish

ring round some of the white spots). Wings and tail barred

broadly with black and cream colour. Tip of tail feathers

whitish. Thighs rufescent and spotted with white ocelli.

Length 1 foot, 10 inches. Wing 1 foot, 2 inches.

Very common in the Northern parts of the Island. Rarely

seen on the Kandyan Hills. ‘There is a lighter coloured

allied speciesfoundat ‘Trincomalie which Mr. Blyth has named

H@MATORNIS SPILOGASTER, Blyth,

In this species the tips of all the feathers of the head and

neck are more broadly tipped with fulvescent white. The

breast and abdomen of a lighter rufous colour, and more

thickly spotted with white. Mr. Blyth in describing this

new species, which I considered only a local variety of C.

Cheela, observes, that ‘it is rather smaller than H. Cheela,

(Latham, vel undulatus, Vigors) and remarkable for having the

under parts as in the adult of that species, while the upper

parts, throat and tail retain in the adult the same colouring

as that of the young of Hl. Cheela, a phase of plumage which

we have never seen among the multitude of Bengal specimens

of H. Cheela examined, but which is exhibited in the two now

received from different parts of Ceylon.” Irides yellow.

There is another specimen in my possession which cannot

be referred to either H. Cheela or H, Spilogaster, and which

I shall now describe.

CIRCAETUS, (?) Sp.; probably new.

Upper parts ike H. Spilogaster. Breast with broad dark

rufous brown drops, and rufous mesial lines‘on the outer ab-

dominal feathers. Ventral, lower tail coverts and thigh fea-

thers barred with rufous. Lower wing coverts brown, and

ocellated with white, Tail and wing quills as in H. Cheela.

158 — Ceylon Ornithology.

Bill yellow, with blackish tip. Feet yellow. Irides golden.

Length 2 feet l inch. Wing 1 foot. Found at Trincomalie

in company with H. Spilogaster.

Hatrastur Inpus. Bodd. Shiva’s Fishing Eagle.

Syn. Falco Indus, Boddaert.

Falco Ponticerianus, Gmelin.

Haliaétus girrenara, Vellot.

Halhaétus garruda, Lesson.

Milvus rotundicaudatus, Hodg. (young.)

Head, neck, and breast white with narrow brown mesial —

streaks. Back, tail, legs, and under tail and wing coverts

bright rufous chesnut. Shafts of dorsal feathers, and upper

wing coverts black. Wing rufous, with the exception of the

outer quills, which are blackish. Bull pale yellow at the tip.

Irides pale yellow. ‘Tarsi and toes pale yellow. Claws black.

Length 1 foet 5 inches. Wing 1 foot. 2

This handsome Eagle is found with the common Fishing

Kite (Milvus Govinda) in all the Maritime provinces, and

very abundant at Trincomalie and Jaffna; as many as twenty

or thirty are sometimes seen together. Although fish is their

favourite food, they are not unfrequently seen to eat carrion,

or even carry away poultry.

SUB-FAM: FALCONIDZ..

Fatco Prreerinus, Linn. The Peregrine Falcon.

Syn. Falco barbarus, Linn.

Falco communis, Brisson.

Falco calidus, Latham.

Falco lunulatus, Daudin.

Upper parts ashy. Head and neck shaded with white ; a

black patch under the eye. Beneath white with brown or

blackish streaks. "Wings ashy; inner web of quills barred

Ceylon Ornithology. 159

with white, or rufescent white, upper wing coverts and scapu-

laries, white or rufescent. Under wing coverts white, and

barred with brown. ‘Tail and upper tail coverts, ashy brown

with white transverse bars; tip white. Bill blueish. Tarsi

and toes yellow; claws*black. Female. :

Males are darker throughout and blackish on the head.

Dorsal feathers spotted and barred with black.

Length 1 foot 44 inches. Wing 1 foot.

This widely distributed Falcon is found in the Northern

and North-Eastern Provinces. Seldom more than a pair

seen at atime. They are generally found on open plains in

search of birds and small reptiles.

FALCO PEREGRINATOR, Sundeval. The Shaheen Falcon.

Syn. Falco shaheen, Jerdon.

Falco sultaneus, Hodgson.

My indefatigable friend Mr. Edgar Layard obtained a

specimen of this elegant Falcon in Saffragam near the foot of

Adam’s Peak, but which I have not had the pleasure of

inspecting.

The young male of this bird is thus described by Dr. Jerdon.

Young male. Plumage above generally ofa dark cinereous

or dusky blackish hue, darkest on the head, hind neck and

cheek striped ; most of the feathers are narrowly edged with

rufous, those on the lower part of the back and rump more

broadly so. There is some rufous on the forehead, and on

the back of the head where it forms a sort of crucial mark.

Tail paler than the rest of the body, faintly barred with

rufous, and tipped the same. Chin and throat pale rufous

yellow, unspotted ; cheeks of the same tint, with narrow dark

stripes. The rest of the plumage beneath bright rufous or

chestnut, with longitudinal dark brown markings on the

centre of the body, oblong spots on the sides, and arrow-

shaped markings on the lower part of the abdomen. Under

160 Ceylon Ornithology.

wing coverts, rufous, barred with brown ; quills barred with

rufous on their inner webs. Bill bluish, darker on the tip;

cere and orbitar skin pale yellow; irides dark brown; legs

and feet yellow. Length 15 inches. Wing 11 inches. Tail

54 inches. Tarsus nearly 2 inches.» Centre toe and claw _

24 inches. Weight 1b.

The young female “differed from the male in having the

chin, throat and cheeks white, in the rufous edgings to the

feathers being very indistinct, and the plumage generally

being of a darker hue.”

“ After the first moult, the markings of the lower surface

disappear, except afew on the lower part of the abdomen and

lee feathers, the plumage above becomes more of a bluish

tinge, and the edgings and barrings disappear ; with further

moultings, the shade cf the plumage above becomes still

lighter, and of a slaty blue, the markings beneath vanish

entirely, and the rufous tint of the breast becomes paler.”

This handsome Falcon “is found throughout the whole of

India, from the Himalayas to the extreme south of the Penin-

sula. It is well known to native Falconers.” In Ceylon

we presume it is a rare bird,as Mr. Layard only met with

one specimen during his eight years’ residence in the Island.

TinnuncuLus ALAuDARIUS, Brisson. The Kestrel Falcon.

Syn. Falco alaudarius, Brisson.

~ Falco Tinnunculus, Linn.

Falco fasciatus, Reszius.

Falco bruneus, Bechotim.

Falco rufescens, Swainson.

Falco interstinctus, Mc Clelland.

Head and neck pale ash with blackish shafts. Check paler,

a darker streak from the mouth downwards. Back and upper

wing coverts cinnamon brown with triangular black spots at

Ceylon Ornithology. 161

the terminal edge of feathers. Wing quills brown, inner

web dentilated with white. Under parts of body pale rufous,

with black streaks and spots. Under wing coverts white

with brown spots. Tailashy grey with black subterminal

band and white tip. Bull bluish, tip black. Inrides yellow.

Tarsi and toes yellow. Clawsblack. Length 1 foot 2 inches.

Wing 94 inches. The female is a more elegant bird and

differently maculated.

Upper parts rufescent with dark brown streaks on the

head, and blackish bars on dorsal feathers and upper wing

coverts. Breast and abdomen rufescent white with brown

mesial streaks. Wings dark brown or blackish above and

whitish beneath; inner web of quills barred, zigzag white or

rufous; lower wing coverts white with small brown spots.

Tail rufous, with blackish bars, and a broad black subterminal

band; tip whitish. Rather smaller than the male.

The Kestrel, a well known bird of Europe and America,

is also very common in India and Ceylon. I have found it

in all the Maritime provinces, and also at Kandy and Newera

Ellia. They are frequently seen in pairs on open plains in

search of field rats, toads, and the young of Monitor Dracena.

I have found the Kestrel’s nest on the rocks of Trincomalie,

and also on the sea-girt batteries of that old Fort,

HyproTriorcuis CHICQUERA, Shaw. The Small Red-

Headed Falcon.

Syn. Falco ruficollis, et

Falco macrodactylus.

Falco cirrhatus, var.

Fasciated Falcon.

\ Swainson.

\ Latham.

Head and upper parts of neck dark rufous, under parts of

neck white. Back ashy grey. Breast, abdomen, lower tail

coverts and thighs white, with dark ashy bars. Wing dark

ashy brown; inner web of quills white withashy bars. Upper

VOL. II. Y

162 Ceylon Ornithology.

wing coverts ashy and minutely barred brown ; lower wing

coverts white and barred with brown. ‘Tail ashy above with

narrow transverse streaks, paler beneath. Tip whitish and a

broad subterminal band. Bill yellow, with black tip. Tarsi —

and toes yellow; claws black. |

Length 114 inches. Wing 734 inches. <A pair of this

beautiful Falcon were seen by Mr. Layard at Point Pedro,

where even it is a very rare bird.

SUB-FAM: MILVINE.

Evanus Mgeuanorprervs, Daudin. Black-Winged White

Kite.

Syn. Falco clamorus, Shaw.

Falco melanopterus, Daudin.

Falco vociferus, Latham.

Elanus cerius, Savigny.

Above ashy white. Beneath white. Upper wing coverts

and ridge black. ‘Tail white, middle feathers greyish. Bill

black. ‘Tarsiandtoes yellow. Claws black. Inrides orange,

a black superciliary streak.

Length 1 foot. Wing 10 inches.

This dove-like Falcon is very rare in the Island. I have

only one specimen of it from Kandy, and Mr. Layard shot

only one near Jaffna. —

Mitvus Govinpa, Sykes. The Cheela or Govinda Kite.

Syn. Milvus cheele, Jerdon.

Milvus melanotus. Zemm.

Hailiaétus lineatus, Gray.

Falco ater? Gmelin.

Falco niger? Brisson.

Ceylon Ornithology. 163

Dark brown, with a rufescent shade, edge of feathers pale.

Beneath with darker mesial streaks. Tail slightly forked,

indistinctly barred blackish. Bull black. Tarsi and toes

yellow. Claws black.

. Length 1 foot 10 inches. Wing 1 foot 4 inches.

This Kite is very common in all the Maritime provinces.

I have not seen it on the hills. It feeds chiefly on fish, and

the fishermen with difficulty keep these rapacious birds from

stealing fish from their nets. As the fishing boats draw near

the shore, hundreds of these Kites are sometimes seen to

hover around and manage to get a good feed, with very little

exertion on their part, in spite of all the resistance the indus-

trious fishermen can offer.

Baza Lopnuotss, Temm. The Cohy Falcon.

Syn. Baza syama, Hogdson.

Falco lophotes, Zemm.

Lophotes Indicus, Lesson.

Head black with a crest composed of a few long black

feathers. Chinand neck black. Breast rufous, white barred.

Abdomen and vent black. The whole of the upper parts

black. Wing black with a greenish shade; scapularies

rufous and partly white and black. Bull greenish yellow.

Tarsi and toes greenish.

Length 124 inches. Wing 9 inches.

The only specimen I have seen of this small black crested

Falcon was a preserved one in Mr. Layard’s collection, which

he shot, I believe, in the Wanny district.

SUB-FAM: ACCIPITRINZ.

Astur Trivireatus, Lemm. The Indian Goshawk.

Syn. Astur cristatus, G: R. Gray.

Astur Indicus, Hodgson.

Astur palumbarius, Jerdon.

Spizaétus rufistinctus, Mc Clell.

164 Ceylon Ornithology.

I do not remember seeing a specimen of this birdin Ceylon. |

Mr. Layard says he saw a live one at Anarajapoora, andI |

believe, Mr. Blyth received a preserved specimen of this |

Hawk from Ceylon. |

The following is the original description of McClelland’s

bird. (Spizaetus rufistinctus), which Mr. Gray makes a |

synonym of Astur trivirgatus of Temm. |

Upper part of the body dark brown, with slight undula- |

tions ofa deeper tint, breast and throat longitudinally striped — |

with brown; belly and under surface of the wings white, |

transversely barred with brown; tarsi feathered to the lower |

third, each feather marked with five transverse bars, the rest

shielded; the beak short, much hooked and sharp; claws and

toes strong and formidable.

AccrIPITER Bapius, Gmel. Brown’s Sparrow Hawk.

Syn. Falco badius, Gmelin.

Falco Brown, Shaw.

Falco Dussumieri, Temm.

Accipiter Dukkenensis, Sykes.

Dark rufous brown above, with pale edges to the feathers. —

Beneath white with brown drops. Wings darker brown on —

the upper surface; primaries white beneath and barred. —

Tail ashy and barred with black; lower tail coverts white. |

Thighs white and spotted slightly. (Young). In the adult,

the breast is rufous and barred with white. Bill blue, tip

black ; irides yellow. Legs yellow. Length 14 inches.

This hawk is known in Ceylon as the “ Sparrow Hawk.” —

It is not an uncommon bird in the Kandyan hills and in the —

Northern Provinces.

ACCIPITER Nisus, Linn.

I had once a small live hawk sent from the Kandyan |

country, but which flew away before [had positively deter- _

Ceylon Ornithology. 165

mined the species ; it had a close resemblance to the European

Sparrow Hawk. Mr. Layard says he has not seen this hawk

in the Island. To enable others to identify this bird in Ceylon

the following description from Stark’s Elements of Natural

History is here added :

«* Bluish, cinereous above; a white spot on the neck;

white beneath, with brown undulations; tail ashy grey, with

five bars of blackish cinereous; cere yellowish green; feet

and iris yellow. About 12 inches long.”

SUB-FAM: CIRCINE.

Circus Swainsonu, A. Smith. Swainson’s Hen-Harrier.

Syn. Circus pallidus, Sykes.

Circus albescens, Lesson.

Circus Dalmaticus, Ruppel.

Falco equipar, Cuv., M.S.

Falco cyaneus, var. A. Lesson.

Pale ashy above; white beneath. Inner web of some of

the primaries dark brown. Upper tail coverts white, with

transverse ashy bars. Tail ashy, indistinctly barred; outer

rectrices whitish speckled and barred withash. Bull blackish.

Tarsi and toes yellow; claws black. Length 1 foot 1 inch.

Wing 1 foot 2 inches.

Generally found on the plains of the low country, and

rarely inthe Kandyan provinces. It feeds on small birds,

frogs and lizards.

Circus CINERASCENS, Gould. The Ashy Brown Harrier.

Syn. Falco cinerascens, Mont.

Circus Montagui, Viel.

Ashy brown above. Under part of the neck and breast

ashy, with rufous mesial streaks to the feathers of the latter.

166 Ceylon Ornithology.

Abdomen, under surface of tail, lower wing and tail coverts

white. Upper surface of tail rufous brown and broadly

barred; tip white. Thighs white, streaked. Bull blackish ;

irides light yellow. ‘Tarsi and toes yellow, claws black.

Length 1 foot 6 inches. Wing 13 inches.

Females are more orless ofa rufous brown on the back;

they have also a nuchal ring and broader black bars on the tail,

and the whole of the abdomen of a light rufous colour. Head

rufescent. In young birds the upper tail coverts are white.

Probably the latter characters are also present when the bird

is moulting. This species in its ashy plumage is not unlike

the darker varieties of Circus Swainsonit.

The species is common in Kandy and Trincomalie.

Reptiles and birds are its chief food.

Crrcus MELANOLEUCOS, Pennant. The White and Black

Indian Harrier.

I obtained several specimens of this bird from the open

plains in Minery, none of which, however, I now have for

description, and therefore give its characters from Latham’s

work.

“Length 16 inches; bill black ; irides yellow; head, throat,

hind part of neck, and back black ; breast, belly, thighs, and

rump white; lesser wing coverts white, the middle ones black;

the greater and secondary quills silvery ash colour; prime

quills black. ‘Tail pale silvery grey ; legs rufous.

The female is somewhat bigger; general colour silvery

grey ; on the wing coverts three round black spots, and three

others on the outer webs of the second quills; primaries black ;

sides of the belly, thighs and vent white, transversely striated

with rufous red.” |

Like the other species of Ceylon Harriers, it is reported to

feed on hirds, reptiles, and small rats and squirrels.

Ceylon Ornithology. 167

OrpeR. ACCIPITRES.

Sus-Orper. Accipitres Nocturnt.

Nocturnal Birds of Prey.

FAM: STRIGIDZ.

SUB-FAM: SURNINZ.

ATHENE Castanotus, Blyth. Ceylon Chestnut-winged

Hawk Owl.

Syn. Athene Castanopterus, apud. Blyth.

Head, neck and breast barred with brown and rufescent

white. A white spot under the ears. Back and wings

bright chestnut and faintly barred with brown. Abdomen

white, maculated with brown spots and streaks. Under wing

coverts white, with a few brown spots. Vent and lower tail

coverts white. Tail and upper tail coverts dark brown and

streaked with narrow whitish bars. Thighs whitish and

freckled with brown. Bill yellow. Tarsi yellow. Length

74 inches. Wing 5 inches.

This Hawk-Owl was added to the Ceylon Fauna by Dr.

Templeton. It feeds on small lizards and insects. Not

uncommon at Colombo. I have also seen it at Newera Ellia,

Galle and Kandy.

ATHENE SCUTELLATA, Raffles. The Hairy-legged Owl.

Syn. Ninox Nepalensis, Hodgson.

Strix scutellata, Raffles.

Strix hirsuta, Zemm.

Strix lugubris, Z7ckell.

Athene Malayensis, Hyton.

Upper part of head and neck ashy brown; chin white.

Back, scapularies and upper tail coverts rufous brown; dorsal

168 Ceylon Ornithology.

feathers have palish edges and white spots. Primaries have —

brown above, with pale rufous bars, under surface white —

barred. Under wing coverts fulvescent and streaked with |

with fulvescent white edges to the feathers. Abdomen white

with large rufous brown spots. Tail dark ashy brown, with |

broad blackish bars; tip whitish. Upper tail coverts rufous |

brown and spotted white; under tail coverts white. ‘Thighs

rufous. Bill bluish black, with a yellowish culmen. Irides

greenish yellow. ‘Toes yellow, curved, with yellow bristly

hairs. Claws black. Length 11 inches. Wing 54 inches.

Not uncommon in the Cinnamon gardens at Colombo.

Feeds on insects and lizards.

SUB-FAM: BUBONINZ.

Epuiattes Lempiyi, Horsf. The Lempiji Owl.

Syn. Strix noctula, Reinw.

Scops Javanicus, Lesson.

Scops Lempiyi, Horsf.

Brown spotted with fulvous and black. Breast and abdo-

men fulvous with blackish mesial streaks and inconspicuous

bars and specks. Vent whitish. Outer web of primaries

barred with light fulvous, inner web clouded dusky. Tail

clouded with pale fulvous brown. Tarsi pale, freckled. Bill

brown; irides reddish brown. Toes brown, claws brown.

Length 74 inches. Wing 53 inches

Some of the specimens are less fulvescent than others, and

the blackish spots more numerous, and with a more distinct

black patch on the top of the head.

This is the most common of all Ceylon Owls; less common,

however, in the higher parts of the Island than in the Mari-

time provinces. It feeds chiefly on Coleopterous insects.

Ceylon Ornithology. 169

EPHIALTES Scors, Linn. The Scops Eared Owl.

Syn. Scops pennata, Hodgson.

Seops Aldrovandi, Ray.

Scops Europeus, Lesson.

Rufous brown, minutely speckled and streaked with dusky

brown and rufous. Lower parts paler; abdomen, vent and

lower tail coverts more white spotted; small white spots on

the outer web of primaries; inner web of secondaries white

barred. ‘Tail barred and speckled with white and rufous.

Bill brown. Irides yellow. Toes brown; claws dark brown.

Leneth 54 inches. Wing 4 inches.

This elegant little owl is rare in Ceylon. I met with only

one specimen (alive) at Trincomalie which Mr. Blyth has seen

and identified with Scops pennata, Hodg. Mr. Layard has

not been so fortunate as to meet with this species, nor has he

seen the next.

EpHIALTES SuntA, Hodgson. The Yellowish Red Eared

Owl.

Syn. Ephialtes scops, apud Blyth.

General colour, a bright ferruginous red, with black shafts

to most of the plumage. It is less speckled and barred than

Scops pennata. An albescent line on the scapularies, with

black tips. Abdomen whitish yellow. Rather smaller than

the last.

Ihave not seen this beautiful owl lower than Dimboola

(4000 feet). It is not common. Mr. Layard has not met

with it in Ceylon. The specimen I sent Mr. Blyth was

identified by him with Scops sunia of Hodgson, which he still

thinks is only a variety of Kphialtes scops, Linn.

VOL, II. Z,

170 Ceylon Ornithology.

Ketura CEYLONENSIS, Gmel. The Large Eared Owl

Syn. Strix Ceylonensis, Gmei.

Strix Leschenaultii, Temm.

Strix Hardwickii, Gray.

Strix dumeticola, Tickeil.

Cultrunguis nigripes, Hodgsox.

Above light ferruginous brown, with dark brown mesial

streaks and pale spots on the dorsal feathers. Under part of

neck whitish. Breast and abdomen light rufescent, minutely

barred; each feather with a blackish longitudinal streak.

Wing quills freckled and barred white and brown. Tail

brown, with narrow ferruginous bars; tip rufescent. Bill

blackish. Inides bright yellow. Length 1 foot 7 inches.

This large owl is very abundant in the Island, particularly

in the Maritime provinces. It feeds on fish, rats, mice, &e.

SUB-FAM: SYRNINZ.

SYRNIUM InpRANI, Sykes? The Devil Bird.

I have not seen this bird alive, though it is common enough

m the forests. A specimen of this was many years ago in the

Museum at Colombo. Above dark brown, barred. Abdo-

men whitish, barred. Toes densely covered with plumage.

Ivides yellow. Claws black. Length about 1 foot.

SUB-FAM: STRIGINZ.

STRIX JAVANICA. De Wormd.? The Yeltow Barn Owl.

Syn. Strix flammeus, var.

Strix candida, Tichell.

Upper parts ochry yellow, speckled with grey, white and

brown spots. Face white, margined with a rufous cirele.

ere ee ce.

Ceylox Ornithology. 171

‘Under parts yellowish white and spotted with brown. Inner

web of primaries indistinctly barred. Tail speckled with

dark grey, and slightly streaked. Thighs white. Bull horn

colour. Inridespale yellow. Tarsiand toes yellowish brown;

claws pale yellow. length 1 feot 24 inches. Wing

11 inches. :

Found by Mr. Layard in the cold Fort at Jaffna. The above

description is taken from the only specimen he procured.

WII WLIO NII DI LID IDI NONI OI

Some account of the Rediyas, with a specimen of their language.

By Siuon Caste Curry, Esq.

Tt is commonly believed that the Rodiyas were originally

one of the Singhalese castes, who, according to one tradition,

as noticed by Knox, were expelled from society for having

imposed on a certain King, by substituting human flesh for

venison, which it was their duty to provide for the royal

table; or who, according to another tradition, as noticed by

Davy, were made outcastes because they continued to indulge

in eating beef after its use was prohibited; or who, according

to another tradition, as noticed by Upham, were driven into

the jungle on account of their leprosy, engendered by bestial

practices; but the striking dissimilarity of their physical cha-

racteristics from the Singhalese, being much more robust and

vigorous, at once militates against the belief that they are of

the same nation, and marks them out as a distinct and pecu-

liar race of people. My opinion of the Rodiyas therefore is,

that they are either a colony of some of the wandering hordes

from India, or a fragment of the aborigines of Ceylon itself,

partially blended with the Singhalese females of high caste

whom the kings in former times had degraded to their rank

and community, not only for high treason, but also for sacrilege,

as was the case with seven members of the family of Nahalle

)

172 Account of the Rodiyas.

Mudianse of Madura Korle, who had melted certain golden

images of Buddha belonging to a temple.

The Rodiyas are found only in the Interior, scattered over

different parts of the country; their numbers, however, are

not very considerable ; for according to the information with-

in my reach, it would be too much to estimate them beyond

a thousand, and it is remarkable that they are gradually

decreasing, especially in the Seven Korles. They have two

subdivisions amongst them, one called Tirringa Rodi and the

other Halpagay Rodi, and though they both live as one people,

yet there are some, who claiming their descent from a certain

degraded princess, named Navaratna Valli, would not inter-

marry with the rest. :

Nothing could have been more wretched and debasing than

the condition of the Rodiyas under the Kandyan despotism,

which prohibited them, not only from possessing lands, or

carrying on any trade for their subsistence, lest they should

arise from the mendicant state to which they were condemned,

but also from dwelling in the same villages with the other

people; nay, even from drawing water out of their wells, as

if they were the vilest of human beings, whose very touch

would be pollution. Our government, however, does not

recognize these unjust and cruel prohibitions; but, neverthe-

less, they have still such a controlling influence over the minds

of the Rodiyas from long habit, that they are never infringed,

and if there be any instance to the contrary we must look for

it only amongst the few who are located in the neighbour-

hood of Europeans.

The Rodiya villages are always remote from those of the

Singhalese, who contemptuously call them Kuppayams, which

signifies, “the habitations of outcastes.” A Kuppayam

usually contains from ten to fifteen hovels, which, however,

exhibit a neat appearance, having often small plots of ground

planted with betel vines and plantain trees attached to them.

In their person, as already observed, the Rodiyas are more

robust ax.d athletic than the Singhalese, and remarkable for

Account of the Rodiyas. 173

their bold bearing and expressive countenances; but the

mendicant life which they lead has so completely cramped

their physical energies that they are exceedingly averse to

labour. Their women are generally handsome, which, with

their winning address, has often enticed many a Singhalese

youth to go and live with them in their Kuppayams, abandon-

ing his family and connexions, and enduring with stoical in-

difference the reproaches and disgrace consequent upon his

conduct. In their dress, the Rodiyas exibit nothing peculiar;

it is the same as that of the lower orders of the Singhalese,

with the exception, that the men have no covering for their

heads, and the women for the upper parts of their bodies.

Some of the young girls, however, in the Central Province,

do not at present allow their bosoms to be exposed, but have

a gaudy handkerchief gracefully tied round them, Both the

men and women let their hair grow to its full length, and tie

it up behind into a knot, and the women wear a brass or tin

trinket, called “Kooroo,” and a roll of dyed palm leaf, called

Kola,” on each ear, a string of chank or glass beads about

the neck, and a brass armlet above the right elbow.

With regard to their diet, my informant, who is himself a

Rodiya, from the Seven Korles, denies that they ever eat

carrion, or any animals but elk, deer, pig, hare, monkey,

squirrel, mongoose, civet, cat, guana, and tortoise. Mr.

Jayetilleke, the intelligent Modliar of the Kornegalle Cutcher-

ry, whom I have consulted on the subject, says, however, that

they eat every thing that comes in their way, and that they

relish nothing so much as dead cattle in a putrified state; and

it should be remembered, that Knox also mentions the fre-

quent contests they used to have with the weavers, in his

time, for this loathsome food. The wild animals they either

hunt with dogs, or shoot with bows and arrows, in the use of

which they are reputed to be as expert as the Veddahs.

Under the Kandyan Government they were, however, not

permitted to hunt or shoot any game, and it was no doubt

174 Account of the Rodiyas.

owing to this circumstance that they betock themselves to

feeding on animals which have died a natural death.

Marriages among the Rodiyas is not attended with many

ceremonies; the day fixed having arrived, the bridegroom

accompanied by his friends goes to the bride’s house in the

evening, taking with him a suit of apparel, and a pingo or two

of cakes and plantains, which he presents to the bride. Her

parents then entertain him and his friends with a repast, and

he, having stayed with her that night in her house, conducts

her the next day to his own. It, however, often happens

amongst them for two young people to meet together, and

agree between themselves to live as husband and wife with-

out consulting their parents or observing any ceremony at all.

The Rodiyas marry but one wife, though it is not uncommon

with them to have two at the same time, and also for several

brothers to cohabit with the same woman. Amongst a people

so debased as the Rodiyas, it is probable that incestuous in-

tercourse exists, but still, I do not think that it is practised

by them to the revolting extreme described by Knox, who,

perhaps, derived his information from prejudiced sources. It

must, however, be observed, that prostitution is openly carried

on by the Rodiya women, and their parents and husbands not

only wink at it, but encourage them in their lewd propensities.

The Rodiyas always bury their dead. They never wash

the corpse, but merely wrap it up in a mat, and carrying it on

a pole to the jungle next adjoining the kuppayams, inter it

there. On the seventh day after the burial, the friends of

the deceased assemble together in his late dwelling, and par-

take of a repast which is prepared for them by his nearest

surviving relatives.

The Rodiyas have generally the reputation of being skilled

in charms and philters, but they are lamentably ignorant of

medicine, and in case of illness, are therefore obliged to

consult the Singhalese medical men, of whom, however, none

above the Durea caste condescend to attend on the patient in

his Kuppayam, but merely furnish his friends with the neces=

Account of the Rodiyas. 175

sary medicines on their describing the symptoms of the

disease. Even the Durea medical men, I am informed, will

not go further than the entrance of the Kuppayam, where

the patient is brought up for them to look at him and pre-

scribe the remedies.

The Rodiyas follow no other pursuit than strolling about

the country, to beg, or tell fortunes, and manufacturing

rattan baskets, and winnows, and whips, and ropes of hides

and of various vegetable fibres, which they barter for grain.

When they go to beg, which they chiefly do at harvest time,

they may be seen in groups, both men and women, with their

children; the men carrying their chatties and pots, and what-

ever else they possess, in baskets hanging on a pingo at one —

end only; it being contrary to custom for them to load their pin-

goes at both ends, as the other people do. On these occasions,

the women sing and dance, as well as exhibit their jugeling ex-

ploits, by balancing and spinning a brass plate on one finger,

or. tossing up a number of balls in the air, and keeping them

in continual motion, without suffering them to fall on the

sround: whilst the men are beating the Bummedia, a kind of

drum made of an earthern vessel, covered with monkey skin.

since the British accession, however, some few of the Rodiyas

in the Central Province have turned their attention to agri-

culture, and are cultivating, near their Kuppayams, small

patches of paddy lands let to them by the Gameralles,* who,

however, instead of taking a share of the crop for the rent,

receive from them an annual supply of ropes of hides, as it

would be inconsistent with the notion of defilement which

they connect with the touch of a Rodiya, for them to make

use of the crop raised by him.

The Rodiyas rear pigs and poultry in almost all their

Kuppayams, and some of them also keep cattle; but in order

to distinguish their cattle from those belonging to the Sing-

halese, they are obliged to have a cocoanut shell perforated

and hung on their necks by a strap of hide.

* Proprietors.

176 _ Account of the Rodiyas.

The Rodiyas have their own headmen, called Hulawalias,

and under the Kandyan Government the appointment of these

headmen was in the patronage of the Koralle of the Pattoo ;

but it now rests with the Government Agent for the Province

or his Assistants. The Kandyan Government exempted the

Rodiyas from all services, except furnishing the royal stores

with ropes of hides for ensnaring elephants; but at present

they pay the Road Tax in common with the other classes of

Her Majesty’s subjects. :

Under the Kandyan Government, as the Rodiyas were not

permitted to enter the precincts of the Courts, they had their

disputes settled by the nearest Durea headman, and if they

ever ventured to resort to the Vellala chiefs for justice, they

were obliged to utter aloud their complaints, standing at a

distance, with uplifted hands, or remaining prostrate on the

ground. They have now, however, free access to our tribu-

nals, and no distinction is made between them and the Sing-

halese high caste men: they are placed at the same bar for

trial, and, when sentenced to imprisonment, confined in the

same gaol.

The Rodiyas profess the Buddhist religion, but they are

not allowed to enter a temple, and they therefore hear the

Bana standing outside the Bana Madduwa. They however,

offer up propitiatory sacrifices of fowls and salt fish to the

devils, called Garra Yakko and Weddi Yakko, who they

believe occasion diseases, and other mischiefs, and they also

have recourse to invocations by cutting limes, as practised by

the Singhalese, when any member of their families is taken ill.

Some years ago a few Rodiyas in the Matelle district were

converted by a Baptist Missionary; but I am informed that

they have since relapsed into their heathenish practices. _

Amongst the vices ascribed to the Rodiyas, theft is the

principal; hence the appearance of a Rodiya in the neighbour-

hoodof a village, alwaysinspiresdread. There is no doubt that

the Rodiyas are, generally speaking, thieves, for in their pre-

sent abject state, there is nothing to induce them to be honest,

Account of the Rodiyas. 177

and a Rodiya himself confessed to me that they do occasionaly

steal clothes from the bleaching grounds, and stacked corn

from the threshing flcors.

The ordinary language of the Rodiyas is Singhalese, which

they, however, speak with a quick accent, intermixed with a

number of words peculiar to themselves, in order to render

their speech unintelligible to strangers. Some suppose that

the words in question are mere slang; but I am rather inclined

to think that they are the relics of a language which was

spoken by the ancestors of the Rodiyas, and since merged

into the Singhalese.

The following is a list of words used by the Rodiyas.

God Bakkuru Dood

Heaven Teriangay ONS Basa

Earth Bintalauwe AwzsianEegd

Sun Eeldyatteriangay Seam ansasiacd

Moon Hapateriangay wmosancdastacs

Stars Hapangaval MIBsINOG

Light Gigéri RBS

Darkness Kaluwella ZO EtEE

Fire Dulumu e229

Water Nelattu Hep

Sea Terilattu ONS EID

River Nilattuwa HBemnd

Tank Niléttukattinna Ae»mmdS ann

Mountain Teriboruluangay ams ods @datocd

Village Dumuna EQS

Field Panguralla 3226 LES

Jungle Raluwa 6@8

Sand

Stone

Man Gava wv

VOL, It. ; 24

78 ‘ Account of the Rodiyas.

Woman Gavé ud

Boy Bélenda Qevste

Girl Bélendé Devsté

Body Murutté ¥ov83

Hair Kaluwelé ANOOvE

Head Kerédia Oand Bes

Hye Lawatté @22ad

Face Irravuwa 9699

Kars Irravuwaanguval @69a9 geimdG

Nose Trravuwa Q699

Mouth Galla NOS

Tongue Gallagewanna MEOND 29

Hand Dagula ae e@

Belly Pekeritta OLN Ho

Flesh Murutung Qovmo

Milk Hidduluangaval ®e@gomdG

Blood Lathu CD

Spittle Galle lathu ACHE ED

Husband Gadia 0599 59

Wife Gadikewenni CB OMHOs3 HB

Father Hiddulu Gava ®e®@ ofa

Mother Hiddulu Gavi BE® word

Grandfather Teyak Hiddulu

Grandmother Ileyak Hiddulu

Gavi Sesa B® or8

Brother Ekangay gadid = 8AD_Goaed ENH«d

Sister Ekangay gAdi 02 goad mH

Son Gadé bélenda os Vevsie,

Daughter Gadi bélendé oo DGvate

Priest Navatta wOs9

Elephant Palanuwa BGoenos

Cheetah Raluwa btissé OOD eS e99

Account of the Rodiyas.

Bear Murutiviganan-

gaya

Wild hog Gal Murutaya

Domestic pig Hapa Murutaya

ne } Raluwelddda

Dog Bussa

Bitch Bissi

Cat Buhakawanna

Jackal Pangurulla bussa

Wanduro Biléwa

Rilawo- Nattuwa

Bull Lidha

Cow Lidhi

Calf Lidhubilenda

Bull Buffaloe Pangurul lidha

Cow Buffaloe Pangurul lédhi

Guano

Alligator

Tortoise

Lizard

Snake

Cock

Hen

Chicken

Fish

Tree

Flower

Fruit

Cocoanut

Jack fruit

Plantain

Arreka nut

Bimpallo

Niléttuterihapp-

aya

Pélawa

Aharubuluwa

Llaya

Pattélia

Pattélikette

Pattilibélénda

Nilatttuwang

Uhella

Ulelangay

Lavuna

Mattulavuna

Vettiangaval

Pabbrukan

Pongaleng

9 S9aqsre099

ME Oencsa

5983.2) N59

COdOEa

Qleses9

aes

Q)wmnrend aang

VMOLCO Aojeso

Qero

B20 O9

a6,

eae

©¢ Dervsie,

OQ6v Ode,

6c @éa

VDOsEQes

HA@eD oasis moes00

Qader

emu Q\OOo

@Gcs9

SHES QMNs

ess deste

Si@sIMo

CBLECC

CHEETA

GIS 9

OQY@2 632

QO03 gomdG

VDQS vea ss

OwswacGo

179

180

Account of the Rodiyas.

Betel Tobala AMAD@

Tobacco Rebut OS Z33

Paddy Attumadhu mes

Rice Madhu @¢

Corakan Hunkeweena Rsiamger

Straw Pangarang OSIM

Temple Bakkuruwangay @adve@ssods

House Dumuna E9—o

Door Mattilla OSEC

Cloth Pottia E59 S33

Mat Pittawanna SOI S31)

Pot Wamé Bond

Water pot Nilattu Wimé S90 done

Rice pot Mighitti Wamé 888 Qos

Mortar and Lukkanawanga-

pestle val Oar Gsnde

Knife Naduwa 2928

Honey Uhella lathu EBvEOC ED

Jaggery Galmeri AEBS

Salt Hurubu %6 9)

Lime Aharubulu emo. Qe

Good Teri ONS

Bad Hapai moa

No Navati M8

a ee \ Dhisenewa FediqeeOo

To come Tevinava ANSsI29

To sit Yappiunawa Svserwos

To sleep Lawattinatewen- @20Osn si adert®s

ewa

To dance Kuttandupanawa _

To sing Kelleneighilen- emreeR eines

ewa

Rock Inscriptions. 181

To weep Irrawallukkan- @60@€@axws.8o

awa

To see Pekanawa OsBaearda

To open Hapakaranawé movado

To cook Navatkaranawa4 emdoedar®o

To eat Migannawa GNA

To kill Ralukaranawa COMORE9

To die Likkenaw4 8 SQMANDd

To bury Tavanawa mIDer8o -

To give Yappanawa, adgeento

LLL SOLO I IOI IY ODEO IF I OI

Notice of various Rock Inscriptions in the North-Western

| By A. O. Brovig, £sq.

HAVING at various times, when traversing the jungles of

this Province, met with inscriptions engraven on rocks, I

have made copies of several, and beg herewith to lay them

before the Society, in the hope that some member may be

able to decipher or translate them. Iam afraid that the ma-

jority will be found to possess no interest whatever, and that

some of them can scarcely be termed ancient. In most cases

these inscriptions are much defaced; and though I have

bestowed a considerable degree of trouble in tracing the

characters, [ should have felt averse to trouble the Society

with such mutilated copies, were it not for the simple fact

that 1am utterly ignorant of the languages in which they are

written, and may therefore hope that of each enough has

been preserved to make it intelligible. I now proceed to

Province.

182 fiock Inscriptions.

mention the place at which each inscription is to be found,

adding such information regarding the locality or traditions

current in the neighbourhood as may seem ee or

may give a Clew to the translator.

No. I. This long inscription is engraven on a stone block

about ten inches square in section, and standing five feet

above ground; in fact, just one of those short pillars of which

thousands are to be met with in the forests of the District, and

which from time immemorial have been used as supports for

Vihares, Dewales, Banna-Maddooas, and other religious edi-

fices. The letters are small and tolerably boldly cut; they

are however rudely formed and unequal in size. I think that

the want of skill in the workman must account for many of

those variations from the common Singhalese characters

which will be observed in the copy; thus in very many cases

where a 29 29 or other letter with an upward loop occurs,

a line is to be observed produced at a tangent to the curve.

I hardly think this stroke to be intentional, but to have

simply arisen from the chissel of the workmen slipping for-

ward instead of following the proper curve. Some other

unusual marks may be explained in the same manner.

A. few of the characters, however, if indeed they be letters,

are quite different from any to be found in the Singhalese

alphabet. The pillar on which this inscription is engraved is

at Pooliankoolum, a small village about ten miles N. N. E.

of Chilaw, and six miles east of the main road. It stands in

the jungle, close to the remains of an ancient Dehwale built

by Ganniwelle Bahu, who reigned at Anooradhapoora, and

of a more recent Dehwale. The native tradition is to the

effect that the pillar was erected to commemorate the seizure

of a local chieftain by Ganniwelle Bahu, king of Mahdampe.

Various places in the vicinity have names referring to the

same event: such are Mandelane Kumarenkatoowe, &c..

Nos. II. III. IV. are engraved on three rocks at Parmak-

kande Vihare, which lies about seventeen miles from Putlam

Rock Inscriptions. 183

and two to the north of the road leading from the latter village

to Kurnegalle. The Vihare is one of the so-called rock temples,

being built under a projecting ledge of granite which forms

part of the roof. The dwellings of the priests, the Banna-

maddooas, are at the foot of a natural talus or debris, the

former being built in the usual manner, forming a square

with a small open and sunk court in the centre. These in-

scriptions are in the character most commonly observed in

rock inscriptions in this District, and are unfortunately quite

unintelligible to the priests.

No. If. Iscarved high up the overhanging rock previously

mentioned; the letters are large and deeply cut. The granite

has however unfortunately scaled off in some places, and has

probably to some extent mutilated the inscription.

No. II. Isonasmall projecting knoll close to the entrance

of the priests’ dwellings, and seemed to be all but unknown

to the natives, till I caused it to be cleared from the earth in

which it was well nigh buried.

No. IV. Is ona smooth face of a rock above a deep natural

hollow, serving as a reservoir of water, about one hundred

yards west of the last.

With regard to the first mentioned of these inscriptions,

the natives believe it to have been cut either by the imme-

diate predecessor of the present head priest, who is himself

an aged man, or else at a time one generation more remote.

Of the other two they can say nothing.

No. V. This I copied from a small loose block lying in

the jungle, about fourteen miles south of Putlam, and two

from the main road. The block has unfortunately at one

time been used by the natives for sharpening cayties, &c., a

circumstance which explains its present condition.

A few scattered stone pillars in the vicinity prove that in

some former age there was a Vihare in the neighbourhood.

I am not aware, however, that the natives have any traditions

184 Rock Inscriptions.

regarding the edifice. Of this inscription an account was in

1832 transmitted by Simon Casie Chitty, Esquire, to the

Ceylon Literary Society. At that time the stone was probably

less dilapidated than at present, and it would be well to ob-

tain the copy then made. I have unfortunately not been able

to ascertain where it was deposited when the Society was

broken up.

No. VI. This inscription I lately found when visiting the

Rock temple of Ehelegame near Nahnerie near the boundary

between the Meddhe Pattoo of Rambemoole and Hattalis

Pahai Corles. It is engraved on a slab placed in the centre of

a platform, surrounded by dwellings for the priests, Vihares,

&c.; the surface of the stone has weathered considerably and

has, I am afraid, obliterated one line completely. In the jungle

around this temple there are very many pillars, ruined Da-

gobas, &c.; shéwing that at one time Ehelegame must have

been a place of considerable importance.

No. VII. This inscription was lately pointed out to me

when passing through the village of Palligame, about ten

miles from Kurnegalle, and close to the Kandy road. There

I found extensive remains of ecclesiastical buildings, some

being of much more ancient date than others. There are nu-

merous neatly carved stones strewn about, and several wells

cut to a considerable depth. The natives, as usual, believe

that large sums of treasure are concealed near these ruins,

and pointed out a rude figure of a man or demon which they

suppose to bear some reference to the hidden wealth.

A great portion of the rock appears to have been at some

time or other covered with inscriptions: of these a great

portion is now lost. I could only trace with tolerable cer-

tainty so much as is here given. The spot itself bears the

local name of Viharre Godde.

MWY PIX OI INI KIO D DINAN.

S a

Cin

’

sof

Pe ft Oe

ti oe

Bins)

hes

cae

ge o

—

Ged

2 wr,

ne,

f ff bs]

£4

io .

ode

Lee,

fe gu

Res

Ser

? ee

Sef RAMP HATTA TINT REL al

MEET EL NGA GS PE ERENT OETS ADIT ON

Tyr eh aes aie Pu ica SI rT A, SEES IGS EAL DE DEN I IRE USGS ER EO oe gE

parses ota eae aes FASC ENS NYSE ESD ERR NSS SEEN ATS 5S ROT PERE ES

Lay

ci eae Pre ae

ELS PRE HST RNS

QP *

»,

ALTO

~ Ra reg”

P weg 4 =

ie Fhe

5 oe

tial

i ‘

PALA MNF gM

RAR PEPSI ROM ose SFM Me 0c RUMEN RII

. 7 AE A DEERE RETA UR RISER As MAIN GES BRANES A Gt reid RNR BNE tec or

ha oy f

x ne ,

f &

DWE IP PRBS NTT Rae os Sate ENCES SEAT BUEN en MEO a AE TETIUSY RAT RE

TAA RA AIEMIN REY LAN

ST DURE KY een Tyke RS

a eth ATTN Se WMS eR 8

AR Mgr ERS ae

Se tes

’

SNE IIB 1 ROE RIP TINE IN TRALEE NOE ERNE,

SOREL TR SSP SEMI NEEL YA IIIS

FAYE BE

pede

SSAA MERE tar ES NEE EE ENP A

=hy

TAGE:

ahceraet ye

Hees,

Sie ents sae

i 4 ‘ od

/ NURS

i . ee ae

MASSA AMIS SADT NI IEEE RANTES YARN TORO:

Boson

AE en ens RTE Fe ge eat. caPvar ra

Sy iy scape ticy are

ARNT AISA SIS AM IES HMRI BIDE EMORY REY REY RARER ages

SO SAARI AR A RU ROA te 1) CeO Ie ie Care vate an et af

eee Ri

OBO BRE

Powe g ne

eae

i he

(Sata?

° toa

oS PASAT SARTO AWA ES MeL Ry UATE Me a aT mee OOo RN ed aa etn aa ern ges «ae ee 4 r

= SPOR RO ee MOLY ork aaa aig es aray

)

NES, tO einige vir,

’

He cnt

CN ee ee Drsrangpsnes ia

a ee al

SEP PAP SORA LO VS STIONEY OR

Re A TSCA SS

ATR SACT WN tt cee!

sels Sayers saz

REY ANN Cok TR ERE LE BIS STR EANE BER RE SLRS SANA EY

neo

Ride wae svat

fo RE Se Oe A a mtg, Ja et

Sete. SS pe we Vey Nyanke Migheayavesy e 2) aa Miu ioes ei oR a a A ae Pte .

tea! i WATTS rat © a 2 STV PRA E ae Ls ey Pri Se Ey SSAA DSR rR 12 Tne rN CARRIE RNA INIEG SURES STR AV NARS ANY Se” MARE SN! So RRS

Commitee Meeting, April 30th, 1853. Txt.

| a

COMMITTEE MEETING, HELD APRIL 30TH, 1853.

Present: —Hon’ble Justice Starke, the Rev. Dr. Kessen,

Dr. Lamprey.

The Secretary laid before the Meeting Mr. Ondaatje’s con-

tributions and letters, marked A. B. C. D. E.

Read answer to letter (marked F)., addressed to Messrs.

Thacker Spink & Co., Publishers of Calcutta, in reply to

the Secretary’s letter of the 12th March 1853.

The Committee recommend that some of the printed Cata-

logues of prices of Books be referred to before deciding on

purchasing the book.

A manuscript copy of the Woods of Ceylon, contributed

by Adrian Mendis, was referred to the Woods Committee for

their report.

The date of the Quarterly Meeting was fixed to be held on

the 20th May, 1853.

Badulla, 13th April, 1853.

Dear Sir,

By this day’s Tappal I send you another quantity of Vegetable fibre,

WIZ:

1. Fibre from the Crotalaria juncea, collected at Chilaw.

2. Do. Calotropis gigantea, collected at Putlam.

Se Do. Sanseivera Guineensis, collected at Putlam.

I have directed a copy of my Pamphlet to be sent to you, in which you

will find these fibres noticed.

Tam, &c.,

W. C. OnDAATSE,

eewrseres

List ao Vegetable Products presented to the Ceylon Asiatic Society, fron

31st March to 13th April, 1853.

GUM-RESIN.

i.—Kaino extracted from the Pterocarpus Marsupium, Roxb., at Badulla,

~ (Vide letter dated 31st March, 1853.)

VOL. IIs Gin ,;

Ixiv. Appendix :—Proceedings of

2.—Resin from the Vateria Indica (Indian Copal.)

3.—Ceylon Gamboge, extracted from the Hebradendron gambogioides,

Graham, at Badulla.

Dykss.

j.—Dyed specimens of Ceylon Madder (Rubia cordifolia.)

2.—Ceylon Madder Lake.

VEGETABLE FIBRE.

1.—From the Hibiscus cannabinus, collected at Putlam.

2.— 4 Abelmoschus moschatus, collected at Badulla.

3— 5, Calotropis gigantea, collected at Putlam.

4,— iH Crotalaria juncea, collected at Chilaw.

5.— e Sanseivera guineensis, colleted at Putlam.

Badulla 16th April, 1853. W. C. Onpnaatsz.

3 i)

Badulla, 16th April, 1853.

SiR,

It affords me great satisfaction indeed, to find from your letter of tke

12th March last, that my efforts to draw public attention to the Vegetable

products of my native country, have met with so much encouragement

at the hands of your Society. Allow me now to offer them my best

acknowledgments for the notice they have been pleased to take of my

labours in the field of Botany, and to assure them, that this will prove

no small stimulus to me to continue to devote myself to my favorite study-

As the mode of preparing the Vegetable Products which I have pre-

sented to the Society, and their uses are described in the accompanying

little pamphlet, I take this opportunity of requesting the Society’s kind

acceptance of the same.

I remain, &c.,

W. C. ONDAATIE.

xy.

. Commitice Meeting, April 30th, 1853.

"ALLVVGNO ‘*O ‘AA “EOQl [May pZs “MIINPOT

‘JOLISIC BTUpeq = " DeowQwcag |: zc “119, sooqmieLy uopAND

‘JOLIISICT BpNpPeq = “ DeocWEoee | ae BIOJIQOS COST

"OSSUTJO AA 29 OUTOJUIG(| “°C TTT ELO P| ___ __ Jeewopec@ |r: ao yvo uopson) venftay vireyore,yog

‘poUysig wWepyNg jr FF wnTMs~@ / DROOPME@ES |" . cue pee AA )—eorput sIyyoo

*pOLIsIq, ByjNpyeg — “2 ee ieooteks |: ae qong uoureuUry)

= ‘STIO

“POUISIC, VMPC fee eee ee ee ol oT POBS | (oe1y, YOvg uopéo0d) BAlOproows stuvIyU_

SOMISIG: WU | Ye ee ote sIsus0uInyk) pur voruvjAe7 BloAlosueg

ndoy, ‘avpryg “OTe ee eee CSPCQ [°° 200 (durozy) voounl viiepejo19

ENOL 989 \\ UDTOIND | 2 = ee BOG)IO |e oe oe gacaco |''° : “++ gojuvSis sidoroje)

‘POLsiq vypapeg = soe ea pate ace cer |: (ore YSsnpL) snyvyosou snyosouypoqy

"So[IO YW UoAIG ® MO |" 8% ° * non 28 yolr wee see coROB.2 OOD: °° SHUIQVUUBS SNOSIGITT

“aaaly GTAVLGOT A

“OSSUTTO AA. wie 8 es so pane) a a a : “ BpRTOquN VpuULIOyAy

“URE oo eT | peer seree | eS (oppey.) BIojtps0o viqney

ne ‘Sal

“eT Upeg ae ree eee occ (osoquivn uoysa)) Soprlorcoqures WoOIpUepeIqa

“BUIV.SEPO AL ie (0 se a "2 | : ee _ De WEHED) eee Loe

‘POLTsIC] Vypupeg 77 PTT POO DO) WHS |r*> 2 #3 c@@w |r “+ (ouryy) ‘wnidnsavpy sndavo0104g

"NISHU-WAD)

SF FD ER | eS QT SE (SRS (SS fee ype pS PRR RSS | geen SE SA EE A SS SS (SS,

“AP[BOOTT ‘sou NU [rurey, "SOUIBAT OSO[VY.SUIG "SOULBNT [BOTULIOG

‘hganoog ouwispr uophay ay op paquasard uophay fo SJONPoley aqujabay fo ISvT—'

y o f ° S8> ay

EXV1,. Appendix: — Proceedings of

Badulla, 23d April, 18538.

Duar Sir,

I beg to acknowledge the receipt of your favor of the 16th instant,

acquainting me with the safe arrival of all my contributions lately for-

warded through you to the Society, and which, I am glad to find, have

received so much attention from you and the other members.

With regard to the Kino, I request you will be good enough to inform

Mr. Dawson, that I have already taken steps to collect 1 ewt. of the Gum,

and as soon as I have collected it, I shall have much pleasure in sending

the same to that Gentleman for transmission to the English Market. 1

keep an accurate account of the expenses incurred in collecting it. Iam

now engaged in collecting full information to enable me to draw up an

account of this useful Tree, and which I shail submit for the consideration

of the Society.

The enclosed List will afford the information you desire respecting

fibres, &c.

Herewith I send you a piece of the Wood and Root of the Morinda

umbellata, which yields a red-dye; produced by adding lime-water, or

any other alkalies to an infusion of the root.

I beg your acceptance ef a copy of my Pamphlet on the Vegetable

Products of Ceylon.

I remain, &c.,

W. OnDAATSIE.

St. Andrew's Library,

Calcutta, 7th April, 1855.

SIR, ,

In reply to your favour of the 12th ultimo, we beg to say that we have

a copy of the first edition of Wilson’s Sanscrit Dictionary well bound in

half russia, at Rs50. This is, we believe, the only copy of the Dictionary

to be had in Calcutta. The work is very scarce. ;

We remain, &c.,

J. Lamprey, Esq., THACKER Spink & Co.

Hon. Secy, R. A. S., CB.

Colombo.

Quarterly Meeting, May 20th, 1853. Ixvil.

QUARTERLY MEETING, HELD 20TH MAY, 1853.

Present:—The Rev. D. J. GoGERLY, in the Chair.

The Hon’ble Justice Starke, Messrs. Skeen, De Zoysa,

Dr. Misso, and Dr. Lamprey.

The second part of the Journal for 1853 was laid on the

table, and the Meeting was informed by Mr. Skeen that in

a few days the binding would be completed, when it would

be ready for distribution.

Mr. Ondaatje’s contributions and letters marked A, B, C,

were laid on the table and read.

Dr. Kelaart’s communication on some new Reptiles was

read and ordered to be printed in this Journal.

Mr. Casie Chitty’s paper on the Rhodyas and vocabulary

of their dialect was read and ordered to be printed.

Mr. Gogerly read his paper on Budhism, in continuation

of a former paper; ordered to be printed. !

Mr. Justice Starke, reports that the book-cases are com-

pleted, and that the Catalogue of Books which were presented

and given to the Society, does not correspond with the books

actually in possession of the Society.

Samples of Lithography done by the Society’s Press were

next laid on the table.

A vote of thanks was given to the Chairman, and the

meeting separated.

Badulla, 10th May 18858.

Dear Sir,

Herewith I send you a coil of braid made with the black fibre from

the leaf-stalks of the Jaggery Palm (Caryota urens.)

The “ Rodyahs,” or outcastes, manufacture the fibre into rope which is

of great strength.

Is this article the same as the “Vegetable bristles” largly imported into

England for making brooms?

I also send you a small quantity of woolly material, found at the base

of the leaves, and which the Singhalese use as tinder. Professor Lindley

informs us, that a similar substance yielded by another species of Palm,

Ixviil. Appendix :—Proceedings of

(Saguerus saccharifer) is used for making brooms, cables, ropes, and

also as tinder, and much employed in caulking ships ( Vegetable Kingdom. )

I remain &c.,

W. C. ONDAATIE.

Badulla, 14th May, 1853.

Dear Sir,

I send you a small quantity of Madder Powder in the accompanying

parcel.

Professor Royle says, in his Materia Medica, that the Kino produced

from the Pierocarpus Marsupium is previously imported to Bombay from

the Malabar Coast and from thence exported to England. Perhaps by

writing to some Mercantile house at Bombay we may be informed at

what rate the article is sold in England.

If you require to send a sample of the Ceylon kino I shall be able to

give you about 2tbs. immediately.

I remain, &c.,

W.C. OnDAATSIE.

Badulla, \7th May 1853.

Dear Sir,

I send you herewith a piece of rope made with the black fibre from

the base of the Kittul leaf. I hope to be able to send you a large one,

about 10 fathoms long, in a couple of weeks.

The Singhalese use the rope for tying Elephants, &c.

Mr. Ward informs me that a substance, resembling the woolly material

of the Kittul already sent to you, is commonly used in China as tinder

under the name of * Punk.” I think it is the same material, but from a

different species of Palm.

T remain, &c.,

W. C. ONDAATIE.

Contributions to the Library since last General Meeting.

Directions for collecting Specimens of Natural History.

Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge; Vol. III. and IV.

Fifth Annual Report of the Smithsonian Institution.

Smithsonian Report on the Chemical Arts, from the Smithsonian

Institution.

Journal of the Indian Archipelago, for Nov. 1852, from the Editor.

Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Nos. 61, 62 and 63.

Observations on the Vegetable Products of Ceylon, from Mr. W. C.

Ondaatje.

Journal of the Asiatic Society : Vol. I. II.

Proceedings of the Numismatic Society of London for 1836, 1837, 1838.

Gullimore’s Oriental Cylinders, No. 2.

Catalogue of Oriental Manuscripts at Hartwell House, from Mr.

Justice Starke.

Evening Meeting, Dec. 3rd, 1853. xix,

EVENING MEETING, HELD 3RD DECEMBER, 1853.

An Evening Meeting of this Society took place at Mr.

Justice Starke’s house, on Saturday 3d December, 1853.

The following books, lately received, were laid on the Table.

Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, Vol. 15, part 1.

Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, No. 7 of 1852, and Nos. 1

and 2 of 1853.

Bibliotheca Indica, from No. 45 to No. 49, both inclusive.

Journal of the Indian Archipelago, No. 1 of vol. 7, from the Editor.

Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Nos. 67, 68, 69 and 70.

Typography, or Letter Press Printing in the 15th Century, by W.

Skeen, Esq., presented by the author.

Meteorological Observations, completing the series up to the

month of September, were received from D. Sanders, Esq., of

the Batticotta Missionary Institution, and from Commander

Higgs, Master Attendant of Trincomalie, also notices of the

Comet seen in August last.

Trincomalie, 25th August, 1853.

We saw a Comet here on the evening of the 23rd instant, a little

after 7. It was low down in the w. Nn. w. quarter. Through a glass of

small power the nucleus and tail were unusually bright; a line from alpha

Cygni through zeta Ursa Majoris led to it. It was very clearly seen last

night, I merely caught a glimpse of it, and it bids fair to be overcast to-

night. So soon as I am able to get a few angles to fix it approximately,

I will send you the declination and right ascension.

Yours, &c.,

J. Hiaes.

14th September, 1853.

The weather was so cloudy that I was unable to fix the Comet. The

last night it was seen was on the Ist September at 7-20 p.m., when it had

the appearance of a circular mist. I saw it twice for a few seconds with

my glass (about 80 power) on the nights of the 27thand 30th August; the

nucleus was astonishingly bright, as large as Jupiter. The outside lines

of the tail also were extremely bright. To the naked eye the tail had the

appearance of two bright lines with a dark interval. It had arapid motion

towards the sun; the angle between epsilon Ursa Majoris and the Comet

having increased between the 26th of August and Ist September, 19° 45”

Yours, &c.,

Josrrn Hiaes.

lex. Appendiz :—Proceedings of

This Comet appears to be the same as that observed in

Hurope in August last, and described in the Ulustrated News

by Mr. Hind and others.

Lhe following interesting contributions presented to the

Society by W. C. Ondaatje, Esq. of Badulla, were next laid

before the Meeting.

1. 2lbs. of Gum Kino, the produce of the Pterecarpus

Marsupium, Roxb., which grows abundantly at Badulla and its

neighbourhood.

With reference to this important substance, the Secretary

remarked, that in appearance and in properties it resembled

the Kino of commerce which is so largely used in Medicine

and the Arts, and would no doubt be as readily purchased in

the markets of Hurope as that exported from India, if it could

be produced in any quantity ; up to the present date only

9lbs. have been sent to the Society, all which has been for-

warded to Messrs. Dawson & Co. for transmission to England

to ascertain its market value. The reason why the quantity

is so small is explained in the following extract from Mr.

Ondaatje’s letter of the 25th November, 1853.

Regarding the Gum Kino, I regret to say that I have -hitherto been

baffied in my attempts to secure the services of a native Singhalese, who

would undertake to collect a cwt. of the Gum. ‘The people are very

averse to the performance of any work which is novel to them in character,

and which requires any degree of energetic perseverance, or the real

object of which they do not quite comprehend.

Under these circumstances, I would suggest to you to apply to Govern-

ment to instruct the Government Agent to direct each Headman to

collect quantities of the Gum fron the trees in the villages under his

charge. If the fluid gum is sent to me I will have it properly dried and

sent to the Society. The trees are just now in blossom; and as at this

time the gui flows in greater abundance, it would be a pity to let this

year pass over without making an effort to collect at least two cwts..

I will send all the Gum I have hitherto collected, which is only 9 tbs.

Yours, &c., :

W. C. OnDAATSE:;

Evening Meeting, Dec. 3rd, 1853. |xx1.

Mr. Buller considered the best means of forwarding Mr.

Ondaatje’s views, would be to communicate the wishes of the

Society, through him, to the Assistant Government Agent at —

Badulla; in which the Meeting gladly acquiesced, and re-

quested the Secretary to supply Mr. Buller with any informa-

tion on the subject he may require.

2. A sample of Gum produced by the Satinwood tree;

in appearance it resembles Gum Arabic.

3. A sample of Gum produced by the Ebony tree. It is in

small rounded nodules, partially transparent, when not coloured

black with the same colouring matter that gives the wood

its chief characteristic; its taste is insipid.

4. Asample of Gum from the Terminalia alata. In appear-

ance it resembles dark coloured Gum Arabic, but it appears

to be a harder and more tenacious Gum than the latter; its

taste is also insipid.

5. Black Resin, the produce of a tree growing in the

barren soil of Badulla, Semecarpus abovatum, Moon, the Kalu

Badulla gaha of the Singhalese. It is of a pure black colour

resembling black sealing wax, of very light specific gravity and

tasteless. It is soluble in turpentine.

6. <A black substance, which Mr. Ondaatje describes in

his letter of the 29th November, 1853.

Badulla, 29th November, 1853.

Herewith I enclose a few insects, anda black substance deposited by

them on the Gyrocarpus Jacquini,—and shall be glad of any further infor-

mation you can give me regarding them. The Singhalese call the sub-

stance “ Kadde pas,”’ and use it as an external application in cutaneous

affections of the legs.

Your’s, &c.,

W. C. ONDAATSE.

The Secretary regretted that he could give no further

information regarding this substance than that contained in

Mr. Ondaatje’s letter, not having had time to make a minute

examination of the insects, which do not appear to be Aphides,

but rather closely resemble the Ichneumonidae; at the next

Evening Meeting the results of a close examination will be

detailed. |

VO. Ll. k

Ixxil. Appendix :— Proceedings of

7. Lac. The Secretary stated, that the sample before the

meeting was the produce of the Chermes Lacea, an insect

which produces two very valuable articles of commerce,

namely, Shellac and Lac dye, both which substances are

largely consumed in the Arts and Manufactures in Europe;

it is extensively exported from India, but as it is described

as being abundant in Badulla, there is every prospect of its

becoming a valuable article of export from Ceylon also.

The Lac belongs to the same class and order of Insects

as the Cochineal, and whilst the latter only produces crimson

dye, the former produces the substance called Shellac as well.

On macerating a portion of the sample before the Society in

hot water, the crimson colour was seen to be imparted to

the water, whilst the shellac floated on the surface, and became

quite soft and pliant. The colouring matter is altogether

derived from the bodies of the insects which reside in the

cellular structure of the substance, as it 1s found on the tree;

it is this cellular substance, which appears to be useful in

protecting the insect from ants and other enemies, that yields

the Shellac.

It would be well worth while to draw attention to the

cultivation of the Lac, instead of the Cochineal insect; as the

plants productive of the former—(the Gyrocarpus Jacquin

is one)—as well as the insect itself, are already abundant in

the jungle, whilst the Cochineal plant and insect are still

strangers to the soil and climate of Ceylon.

8. Kittul fibres. A black horse hair like substance, produced

from the Jaggery Palm, used by the natives for making ropes,

of which specimens were laid on the table, also a brush made

with the fibre, for which purpose it appears to be as well

adapted as bristles, being quite as strong and almost as elastic.

If procurablein large quantities,it might prove a useful product.

2. Sulphur stone, described by Mr. Ondaatje as follows:

I have now the pleasure of submitting the accompanying specimen

of Sulphur stone, and shall be glad to be favoured with your opinion.

Sulphur exists in Bintenne incombination with iron pyrites in great

abundance.

Evening Meeting, Dec. 3rd, 1853. Ixxii.

The specimen, submitted to analysis, yielded but a smali

per centage of Sulphur ; it also contained Arsenic in greater

quantity than Sulphur; the other constituents being Graphite

in isolated granules imbedded in Quartz and Mica.

10, Steed. Thisspecimen appeared tolerably pure, of a fine

compact grain, but exceedingly brittle, probably owing to its

not being annealed properly. The mode of preparation is thus

described by Mr. Ondaatje.

In forwarding to you the accompanying specimen of Kandian Steel,

made at Kandapalle, in the District of Badulla, I shall briefly remark

on the mode of manufacturing it as adopted by the Singhalese.

It consists in introducing a small bar of good Iron into a clay mould

of a tubular form, which they call “ Covey,” with pieces of the dried

wood of the Cassia auriculata, the Ranawaraof the Singhalese. The open

end of the tube is afterwards closed with clay and it is placed in a char-

coal fire for two hours, by which process Carbon is supplied to the Iron

which is thus converted into Steel.

The proportions for making steel of the best quality are as follows ;—

7 parts of iron to 3 of the dried wood. They also use the wood of the

Toddelia aculeata, the Kudu meris of the Singhalese, in which case the

proportions are 3 of iron to 1 of wood. This wood however produces an

inferior Steel; but by increasing the iron to 5 parts, a better kind may

be obtained. This kind of Steel is not generally manufactured, as it is

brittle and not malleable.

The foregoing description of the Kandyan method of

making Steel, bears a very close analogy with that practised

by the natives of the South of India, as described in a paper

by Dr. Voysey, and published inthe Transactions of the Asiatic

Society of Bengal of 1832, page 245.

11. Kandyan paper, with the following account of its

manufacture.

J have much pleasure in addressing the Society again. It is on a

subject, which, I conceive, is fraught with much local interest, and to

which I am not aware that public attention has before been directed. J

refer to the manufacture of Paper by the Kandians, during the period

the country was under Native rule.

It seems probable, from the intercourse that once subsisted between

the ancient inhabitants of the Island and the Chinese, especially in con-

nection with the Cinnamon trade, that the Singhalese derived their know-

Ixxiv. Appendix :—Proceedings of

ledge of manufacturing Paper from the latter, who, it is well known, have

made it from the liber, or inner bark of a species of Morus, cotton and

bamboo, from time immemorial. Whilst botanizing in the jungles of

Badulla, a species of Fig was pointed out to me by an old Kandian doc-

tor, which he said, had been formerly used to make paper from. He

knew nothing himself, however, of the process by which this was effected.

On further inquiry I ascertained from another aged Kandian, that the

plant to which my notice had been first called, was of different species

from that which had been used by his countrymen for making paper.

This individual himself had never made any, but understood the me-

thod that had been resorted to for the purpose, as his ancestors had to

supply the Stores of the Kings of Kandy with Paper, being that branch

of the general service that had been imposed on them,—a service better

known by the name of “ Rajekarie, ” compulsory labour.

The Paper thus manufactured by them was used not for the purpose of

writing upon, but for making Cartridges for gunpowder. ‘The people on

whom this duty devolved were the natives of Beddegame in the District

of Badulla, who received grants of land in consideration of the service

they rendered to the State.

The tree from which the Kandians made their Paper is a species of the

Ficus, called in Singhalese Nanitol, which is found in great abundance

every where in this country.

The following is the Kandian mode of making Paper :—

From the tender branches the whole of the bark is stripped, and after-

wards the inner bark (liber) which is of great tenacity, 1s separated from

the outer skin with the hand, and is put into a large earthen pot, and

boiled with the ashes of the Hirythrina indica (Erabodee) until it becomes

soft, when it is removed and beaten with a wooden mallet on a stone,

till it assumes the consistency of dough. It is next put into water, and

churned with the hand, which process soon converts it to a fine homo-

geneous emulsion. This is poured into a frame having a cloth bottom

floating in water. It is again agitated with the hand until the whole

of it becomes uniformly spread over the cloth, on which it settles down

smoothly. :

The frame being then withdrawn from the water, which is allowed to

drain off gradually, is next put to dry in the sun. The Paper thus

formed is easily removed from the cloth bottom, and becomes soon fit

for use. It is very tough, and remarkable for its tenacity, and does not

appear to be liable to the ravages of insects, as may be seen from the

enclosed specimen of Kandian paper, marked No. 1, which was made

about 50 years ago, and which is still in excellent preservation, although

Evening Meeting, Dec. 3rd, 1853. Ixxy.

no very great care seems to have been taken of it. The specimens

marked No.2 are those of my making, which I need not say admit of

considerable improvement. It is only adapted for writing upon with

Indian Ink.

I also forward herewith paper made with fibres of the wild Marsh

mallow, Abelmoschus moschatus, marked No. 3; and with the inner bark

of the Ceylon Sack tree, marked No. 4.

Your's, &c.,

W. C. OnDAATSE.

Mr. Skeen stated that he thought No. 4 might make a

paper very similar to that used for the purpose of proof en-

gravings, its texture having a beautiful fine and glossy

appearance.

Mr. Justice Starke remarked, that it would be interesting

in an historical as wellas scientific point of view, to trace the

source from whence the Kandyans derived their knowledge of

the manufacture; and wished to know if any one present

could give some information on the subject. The Secretary

referred to a paper in the Transactions of the Asiatic Society

of Bengal of 1832, by B. H. Hodgson, Esq., Acting Resident

at Nepaul, describing the manufacture of the Nepaulese paper,

which appears to be also made from the liber of plants, by the

same process detailed by Mr. Ondaatje. The author of that

paper was inclined to think also that the Chinese supplied the

Nepaulese with their knowledge of the manufacture,asappears _

from the following extract. ‘I cannot learn by whom or when

the valuable properties of the paper plant were discovered;

but the Nepaulese say that any of their books now existent,

which is made of Palmira leaves, may be safely pronounced,

on that account, to be 500 years old: whence we may perhaps

infer that the paper manufacture was founded about that time.

I conjecture that the art of paper making was got by the Cis-

Himalayan Bhoteahs, vid Shassa from China. A paper of

the very same sort being manufactured at Shassa ; and most

of the useful arts of these regions having flowed upon them,

through Tibet, from China; and not from Hindistan.”

IXXV1. Appendix :—-Proceedings of

It iswell knownthat the Chinese manufacture paper largely

from plants up to the present day, and on comparing some of

it with that presented by Mr. Ondaatje, there is so close a

resemblance, that Mr. Ondaatje’s suggestion as regards the

sources of the Kandyan paper manufacture, seems to have

some foundation.

The Members expressed themselves as being much interested

in Mr. Ondaatje’s important contributions, which they hoped

would obtain that attention they appeared to deserve.

J. LAMPREY, M.B.,

Flon. Secretary:

COMMITTEE MEETING, HELD 21ST DECEMBER, 1853.

A letter from Mr. Ondaatje was read. It was moved and

agreed that the subject of his letter be referred to next

General Meeting, and considering the expense Mr. Ondaatje

must necessarily have incurred in collecting and preparing

the several contributions he has made to the Society, the

Committee recommend that the sum of £10 be voted to him

at the next General Meeting:

A letter from Dr. Kelaart was read and laid on the table,

stating, that he had been at great expense in publishing, and

requesting that the Society would accept copies of his work

in lieu of subscriptions due. It was then moved and agreed

to, that two copies of his publication be received, in lieu

.of all past arrears of subscription due by him to the Society,

and that a recommendation be made by the Committee at the

next General Meeting, that he be made a Corresponding

member of the Society.

Dr. Willisford’s correspondence with reference to the

Great Exhibition of 1851, read.

It appearing that the Reports were forwarded to him, the

Secretary was requested to confer with him on the subject.

General Meeting, Feb. 1st, 1854. [xxvii

Dr. Misso, asa member of the Woods’ Committee, reports

progress, and is authorized to take any specimens of woods

he may select for advantageous arrangement.

fesolved.—That with a view to promote a more general

interest in the objects of the Society, and encourage a taste

for the study of Natural History, the Society’s Museum be

open for public inspection during the Christmas holidays in

every year, and at such other times and under such rules and

regulations as the Committee shall from time to time deem fit.

J. LAMPREY, M.B.,

Flony. Secretary.

GENERAL MEETING, HELD IST FEBRUARY, 1854.

J. ARMITAGE, Esq., in the Chair.

The following books received since the last Meeting were

laid on the Table.

7 copies of Jury Reports of the Great Exhibition.

Journal of Natural History, Nos. 71 & 72.

The Secretary read the proceedings of the last General

Meeting, and afterwards the following

Report.

The present meeting of the Asiatic Society 1s convened

much earlier than was anticipated, i consequence of the un-

expected removal of your Secretary to Kandy, and the de-

parture of your Librarian on his return to England; thus

leaving two important Offices of the Society vacant. Jt will

therefore be a matter for this meeting to determine what

steps are to be taken to supply the place of these Office

bearers.

It will be satisfactory to know, that during the past year

much important business has been transacted at the General,

Committee, and Evening meetings of this Society, shewing a

very satisfactory state of progress,—the proceedings of each

meeting haye been published from time to time, so that out-

Ixxvill. Appendix :—-Proceedings of

station members and those not able to attend, have been made

aware of the Transactions of the Society, which now consti-

tute two very respectable volumes for the year 1853, besides

leaving much matter for publication in 1854.

The funds also of the Society are in a very satisfactory

state; at least when the out-standing subscriptions are col- —

letted there will be a large balance in favour of the Society,

which it is hoped wil! go far towards raising a building fund

to enable the Society to provide more ample accommodation

for its rapidly imereasing Library and Museum; also to

afford accommodation for the Society’s Meetings of much

more suitable character than that which they now possess.

In thus alluding to the Library, we cannot let pass the

opportunity for expressing the great obligations that are due

to the Hon’ble Mr. Justice Starke, for the interest he took in

the affairs of the Society generally, and particularly in this

department, which was an object of his special care and

attention. The arrangement and cataloguing of our books,

which hitherto were for the most part in a dilapidated con-

dition,and very much dispersed, had occupied him during the

last year that he held the office of Librarian; and the result

of his labours is, that a number of volumes have been collected

from out-station members; the serials have been bound to-

gether; and we now find that the Society is in possession of

a large number of wellarranged and catalogued valuable books,

Previous to his departure he furnished the following Report

as to the present state of the Library, which I shall now read.

Report on the state of the Library.

In pursuance of the recommendation submitted in the Re-

port of the General Meeting of the Society held on the 5th

March last, a Catalogue of the Books has been made out.

This was done from all available sources of information

respecting books presented to or purchased by the Society.

It may therefore be regarded as a Catalogue of the books

General Meeting, Feb. 1st, 1854. Ixxix.

which belong to the Society, and which should be in its

possession, rather than what actually is so; for, in consequence

of the books remaining long unbound, and other causes, some

of the volumes, or numbers of periodicals, are still missing.

The unbound volumes were accordingly placed in the hands

of the bookbinder to be bound up where complete, and where

periodicals were defective, to have them put in cloth or other-

wise, as circumstances appeared to require; and some estimate

may be made of the then condition of the Library, when it is

stated, that a dozen volumes or so required repair, by lettering

and otherwise, as many have been put up in cloth, and 45 or

more half-bound during the past year.

In this way it is probable that deficiencies will be more

readily ascertained, than if the list ef books had been made

up from the shelves,—where the number of volumes does not

yet perhaps much exceed 250, exclusive of Blue Books,

Gazettes, and unbound numbers of periodicals,—and the

wants found out only on inspection and inquiry. It may

also be hoped that the liberality of members and others will

not be wanting to place the Library of your Society on a

suitable and efficient footing.

In the formation of a Library Catalogue, there has been a

great diversity of opinion and of practice; and for some time,

a scientific arrangement of the books was considered the best.

It is so, m so far as it collects together works of the same

class, or which treat of the same subject; but, like scientific

instruments, all scientific arrangements require scientific skill

for their proper use. This obviously renders such unsuitable

for a public library; and accordingly, a common alphabetical

arrangement is now generally preferred.

In some libraries they have both sorts; as in the great

Harvard Library, where besides an alphabetical there is a

systematic catalogue, in which the books are distributed into

general classes, each of which again has its subdivisions.

In some other libraries.in America, the systematic catalogue

is in the nature of an index of the subjects; to effect which, the

VOL, II. q

Ixxx. Appendix :— Proceedings of

books are analyzed, and the several subjects treated of ar-

ranged under their respective heads. Such an analysis is to

a library what an index of contents is to a book: it is an

agoreoate index. i

This is an important step towards the better preservation

and diffusion of knowledge; and, if judiciously executed, it is

calculated materially to advance literature: it will lessen the

labour and anxiety at present unavoidable merely to find out

where a particular subject is treated of, and prevent much of

that waste of intellectual power now constantly going on

from ignorance of what has been thought or done in the

matter by others before us.

In one instance in America, the design of the analysis is

“to make the catalogue so full, that no one shall be obliged

to remove a book from the shelves in order to learn its con-

tents or subjects.” See Report on Public Libraries in America,

p- 64. It may bedoubted, however, whether such a catalogue

of a general library would not, by its bulk, lose its utility in

its accuracy. The true principle, perhaps, is to adapt the

index to the character and wants of the Society of whose

library it is the catalogue; and, no doubt, the aggregation of

all such would become a UNIVERSAL CATALOGUE, embracing

the whole body of extant literature. See an interesting

article on the formation of Library Catalogues by stereotype

and separable titles, in the Proceedings of the American

Association for the advancement of Science, held in August

1850, p. 166.

- The plan of a stereotype catalogue here suggested, and the

principle of analysis above indicated, might both be applied

to the Library of your Society with advantage.

‘- In the pursuit of knowledge in Ceylon, there are difficulties

not a few, particularly as regards native literature. For after

you have mastered the characters, and are able, as you think,

with your Clough to make your way through a native pas-

General Meeting, Feb. 1st, 1854. xxx.

sage, comes difficulty the first— Where are the books? There

is no Bibliopole! no ola store! And when you at length hear

of an ola, you must employ some one to make a copy for you,

and obtain the owner’s leave for its being transcribed. When

you have got all this, you open your copy and find yourself,

to your dismay, among unpunctuated lines, and words without

capitals, like an antiquated Greek inscription. And when

you have at length deciphered some passages, you cannot tell

what relationship they bear to the rest of the work, nor, per-

haps, what relationship the work itself bears to others, if any.

There is no index of contents; and, but for Mr. Alwis’s valu-

able labours, scarce any guide, no comprehensive Manual of

the literature.

Some of these difficulties will, of course, not be fully met

till there is a greater demand for native works. But even

now, if there is not employment or enterprize enough for a

bookseller and publisher here, nor for a professional book

agent, your Society might meantime be the medium, by its

Librarian, for ascertaining where olas for transcription are to

be found, and for employing trustworthy copyists to transcribe.

This would be a boon to many; and by the facilities thus

afforded, tend in its operation to promote the cultivation of

native literature.

It would greatly facilitate the perusal of native works, and

the study of the native literature, if, in transcribe, the

copyist would always separate words and sentences, as is now

done in the Tamil, and occasionally in the Singhalese. This,

however, requires cautionand literary knowledge, the lancuage

allowing a union of words by elision of vowels and otherwise.

But with all the members of your Society this should be kept

in view, and a uniformity in this respect preserved in the

Nociety’s Journal.

To a beginner, the characters in the Singhalese language

are sufficiently puzzling. Yet they are for the most part

remarkably simple and uniform in their structure. They may

to aconsiderable extent be reduced to two elementary particles

Ixxxil. Appendix :— Proceedings of

of form, v and w; and the changes on these forms to constitute

alphabetic characters, are also for the most part made or

uniform principles.

The following Table willshew the progressive developement

of the two elementary particles above described, to form

alphabetic characters.

Tasue I.

Brancu I. Branes I.

ta wa che mae dha da a AGG

S) 2 09 ® 2

ha’ phar ie tha dhe

wo ca) i)

ga ha bha

3 =} eg S ss) i) @

pa Ga “chha osha . ya sé gha

In the preceding Table we have 24 alphabetic characters,

namely.

2 vowels, é and o.

3 gutturals, ga, its aspirate gha and the nasal aga.

3 palatals, cha, and its aspirate ehha and ja.

4 linguals, taand da, and their respective aspirates the and dhe.

2 dentals, tha and dha.

4 labials, pa, and its aspirate pha, bha and ma.

2 semivowels, wa and ya.

3 sibilants, sha dental, or sa palatal, and sa dental, and the

aspirate ha.

What therefore we have yet wanting are the remaining

vowels a,7,e, and uw, the guttural fa, and its aspirative kha,

the nasals lingual xa and dental na, and the semivowels ra

and fa. ‘These will be found in Table II. which is separated

into divisions that might indeed have formed separate tables,

there being no common source from whence they may all be

derived.

General Meeting, Feb. 1st, 1854. xxx.

Taste II.

No. 1. No. 3.

a ® @ C eg & &

ba kha _ loo ra it t na

INO. 2: No. 4.

Gore Ff ¢ 60r¢6¢ D OD wo

la a da u ta na kha jha

It would be interesting to follow these forms into their

grammatical position and value in the language, and to ascer-

tain the explanation of their distribution. Such an inquiry

might open up to us the philosophy of the language, as well

as its historical origin and philological relationship, and lay a

foundation for rules for its proper cultivation.

J. STARKE,

Librarian.

In connexion with the Library it may be stated, that several

of the Reports of Juries of the Great Exhibition have been

handed over to this Society by Dr. Willisford, to whom they

were originally sent by Mr. Capper, the Agent for Ceylon at

the Exhibition, and formerly Secretary to this Society. It is

to be regretted that these books were not consigned to the

Society in the first instance, and it is also a matter of deep

regret, that no Books or Medals published by the Exhibition

Commissioners have been sent to the Society, through whose

instrumentality the products of Ceylon were mainly repre-

sented at the Great Industrial Exhibition.

The papers bearing upon this transfer will be laid on the

table.

Your Secretary has also to lay before the Society a letter

received from the Secretary of the Parent Asiatic Society, in

acknowledgment of a contribution of a series of Volumes of

the Transactions of the Ceylon Branch; as follows :—

| Royal Asiatic Society, 5, New Burlington Street,

London, 19th November, 1853.

Sir,

The undermentioned Donation having been laid before a General

(Journal of the Ceylon Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, Vol. 2.

Nos. 1 & 2. 1853.)

Ixxxiv. Appendix :—Proceedings of

Meeting of the Royal Asiatic Society, held this day, I have the honor to

convey through you, to the Ceylon Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society,

the best thanks of the Society for this addition to their Library.

I have, &c.,

D. CLARKE,

Hony. Secy.

The Secretary of the

Ceylon Branch Royal Asiatic Society.

At the last Committee Meeting, a recommendation was

also made that two copies of Dr. Kelaart’s work on the Fauna

of Ceylon be received in lieu of payment of past subscriptions

due to the Society; it now remains with you to confirm this

recommendation of the Committee with reference to Dr.

Kelaart. |

During the past year also many interesting contributions

have been forwarded to the Museum by Mr. Ondaatje, whose

labours in bringing to light many important natural products

of his neighbourhood, cannot fail to elicit your high commen-

dation ; it will also be a matter for your consideration at this

meeting, to acquiesce in a proposition made at the last Com-

mittee Meeting, to grant Mr. Ondaatje the sum of £10 to

defray any incidental expenses that may arise during his

researches ; several of these products are now laid on the table,

and those which have not been described at the last Evening

Meeting of the Society, will now be detailed.

It will be satisfactory to learn that the recommendation of

the Committee to open the rooms of the Society for public

inspection at stated periods, was first tried during the last

Christmas holidays, when many visitors availed themselves of

the privilege.

In conclusion, notwithstanding the great losses this Society

has sustained from time to time by the departure from the

Island of many of its most active members, a vicissitude to

which it must at all times be subject, it is hoped that many

will be found both able and willing to assist in forwarding

the great objects of the Society, whether, as regards research

into the ancient Literature, History, or Antiquities of Ceylon,

General Meeting, Feb. 1st, 1854. Ixxxv.

or with a more utilitarian and practical object in view,—the

investigation of its varied natural products,—for all of which

pursuits there is such ample room.

Moved by Mr. Alwis. ‘“ That the Report now read be

adopted.”

Seconded by the Rev. J. Kats, and carried unanimously.

Proposed by Mr. Alwis and seconded by Dr. Lamprey.

_ “That Government be applied to for information as to where

the Illustrated Catalogue and Medals of the Great Exhibition

of 1851, sent out to the Colony, are to be permanently

deposited.”

Mr. Alwis was of opinion, in moving his proposition, that

the Rooms of the Ceylon Asiatic Society would be the

fittest place for depositing them; for besides having the means

of preserving valuable books, the services the Society rendered

to the Great Exhibition ought alone to entitle it to some

consideration.

~The Rey. Mr. Kats thought that some official enquiry

should beinstituted to ascertain why the Society was neglected

in the general distribution of the Jury Reports, Illustrated

Catalogues, &c. of the Exhibition.

It was then resolved that the Jury Reports sent by Mr.

Capper to Dr. Willisford and transferred by the latter to the

Society, should be distributed by the Society, according to

the instructions contained in the correspondence laid on the

table.

_ The Reports to be distributed as under:

To Dr. Willisford, :

4 KR. E. Lewis, Esq.,

5 Clerihew, Esq.,

ok, R. Power, Esq.,

» J. D. Alwis, Esq.,

» IL. A. Pieris, Esq.,

» J. Armitage, Esq.,

» Messrs. Parlett O'Halloran & Co.

IXXXVI. Appendix :—Proceedings of

The Secretary then proceeded to detail the various interesting

contributions sent to the Society by Mr. Ondaatje of Badulla.

1. Specimens of the stem, liber, and a drawing of the

Fig tree from which the Kandyan paper was manufactured,

together with a specimen of the ashes of the Erythrina Indica,

with which the inner bark is boiled, and some of the prepared.

pulp made into the form of bricks, in which state it could be

conveniently exported.

2. A quantity of Black Resin, the produce of the Seme-

carpus abovatum; it belongs to the same family of plants as

the trees producing the Japan and Indian black varnish.

Also a specimen of varnish prepared with this resin and East

Indian copal. .

3. Inspissated red juice from the wild nutmeg, of a lami-

nated and resinous appearance, translucent at the edges of

fracture, of an astringent styptic taste. Forms a variety of the

substance known in Commerce under the name of Dragon’s

Blood.

Professor Lindley states, on the authority of Endlicher, that

a species of Mysistica ofthe Phillipines “yields a crimson juice,

which is collected from incisions in the trunk and used as a

substitute for Dragon’s Blood.”

4, <A very fine sample of meal sago extracted from the

Jaggery Palm.

5. Aquantity of the prepared bark of the Toddala aculata.

“Tt is used in Southern India as a remedy against remittent Fever.

In the 4th Vol. of the Journal de Pharmacie, p. 298, Dr. Virey gives an

account of it. My object in sending it to you is with a view to examine

its active principle after extracting it from the bark. The family to

which this plant belongs, as you know, is XANTHOXYLACE®, and yields

a crystalline principle, Xanthopicrite. By touching the inner bark with

Nitric acid, you will find it to give a red colour.

“Dr. O'Shaughnessy has given the following account, derived from

French chemists, for preparing Xanthopicrite.

“Xanthopicrite is prepared by digesting the bark in alcohol, evaporat-

ing the tincture to the consistence of an extract, acting on the extract

with water and ether in succession; the residue dissolved in boiling al-

cohol gives crystallized Xanthopicrite on cooling and evaporation. It is

General Meeting, Feb. 1st, 1854. Ixxxvil.

of a greenish yellow colour, very bitter taste, devoid of acid or alkaline

properties, little soluble in water, but freely in alcohol, especially when

heated. Nitric Acid gives it a red colour.”

6. A remarkably fine specimen of Sulphur ore, almost

equal to Sicilian, obtained from Terrepha in Walapany: it

is studded and permeated with crystals of pure Sulphur.

“The mode of extracting the sulphur is, I think, understood by the

Kandians, as I hear it was one of the Rajakarias or compulsory labours

performed by the Kandians. I will take another opportunity of describing

the Kandian process of obtaining Sulphur. I suppose it is by sublimation.”

¢. Iron Alum, in small lumps weighing about two drachms

and less, having the characteristic satin-like minute crystals,

and almost pure.

*‘] found the Alum ata place called Bolcadde near Badulla, on a lofty

Gneiss rock which is shooting up from the centre of an extensive valley,

the soil of which is clayey. The rock is about 300 feet above the level of

the ground, and in a state of disintegration. A large surface of the rock

presents a stratified appearance, and from the fissures I collected the Iron

Alum, which occurs as an efiloresence on it. The people living near

this rock say that it was struck by lightning, and since that time the

Alum has appeared on it.”

On dissolving the native crystal, in water, filtering and

recrystallizing it, a pure white Iron Alum was procured,

having the same character of crystallization as the former, but

very deliquiscent ; its constituents are Sulphate of Iron and

Sulphate of Alum.

ess

List of Minerals presented to the Asiatic Society.

a. The Malabars call this mineral Gerbasoodamane, and it is

rubbed with lime juice and applied to the umbilicus to act

as a parturifacient; it is also given internally. Found in

Mahatellilla oya near Dickkapitteagama.

This mineral resembles a gum resin more than amineral. It is of a

yellowish green colour, and not very brittle ; its edges are somewhat

translucent, and the surfaces of fracture are smooth and shining. It is

not soluble in water, and but slightly acted upon by sulphuric acid.

Calcimation reduces it to a reddish burnt clay like substance, and it appears

to be a composition of Alumina Silica and Oxyde of Iron.

VOL, IL. : m

Ixxxvuil. Appendix:—Proceedings of

b. 'The Singhalese call it Gandagangalle. (Sulphur stone.)

Found at Bogodde near Ampitte.

This substance has externally the colour of Sulphur, dispersed

through a deep and beautiful shade of green ; it is very soft and when

moistened is saponaceous to the feel, at the same time leaving a green

colour in solution on the finger. Strong sulphuric acid dissolved it, at the

same time making it a very light shade of yellow; before the blowpipe

it becamea black hard mass, and gave off no fumes of Sulphur whatever.

ce. Found at Hewalgolla near Gallaboddaallata Yhaliwa.

Resembles marble, and is almost of as fine a grain, but not so purely

white : it is Dolomite.

d. The Singhalese call this Yoda atte’ (Giant’s bones).

According to their tradition it is the bones of two giants who

fought and perished at the place where this mineral is found!

It is Limestone from deposition ; it does somewhat resemble a decayed

bone externally, but a slight examination determines its real origin.

e. Magnetic Iron ore.

Found at Yatte Kohila and Arrapasse on vate road to

Katragam.

A very fine sample of Magnetic a ore.

f. The Singhalese call it Nilgarrunda gal; rubbed with

turmeric a red colour is produced ; it is used as an antidote

against snake bite. Found at Garrandegalle near Walapane.

A variety of tourmaline, but not of a very compact structure.

g- Found at Dickkapitteagodde.

Are large crystals of black opaque tourmaline.

h. Found at Mahatellagodde near Dickkapittea.

Is a variety of mica slate.

i. & j. Found at Arrapasse, on the road to Katragam.

Varieties of Hornblendic rock, one is of a green shade, and when

treated with strong sulphuric acid, it gave off strong fumes of Chlorine.

The Secretary presented to the Society a specimen of

Pyrites which he procured at the last Horticultural Show,

from the Modliar of the Sina Korle, from whose district it was

brought ; on examination of the specimen it was found to be

auriferous, though in a very small degree.

General Meeting, Feb. 1st, 1854. Ixxxix.

The Secretary then read a paper on the Coffee Blight, the

Cotton Aphis, and some new varieties of Lac lately procured

in Ceylon. The paper was ordered to be printed.

—_

On the Coffee Blight, the Cotton Aphis, and some new species

of Lac. By J. Lamprey, M.B., Hony. Secretary to the

Ceylon Branch, R. A. S.

I had the greater portion of this paper prepared for publi-

cation some months past, but waited for the result of an

experiment I had entrusted to a friend to make on his estate

before committing it to type, as the most important portion

of the information I wished to convey would not have been

forthcoming till the result of that experiment was known.

In the meantime, however, another person has made the ex-

periment I suggested to my friend some months back, and,

according to the statement lately published in the local prints,

with the best possible result; I am now, therefore, on this testi-

mony,able to complete that portion of the paper I was formerly

in doubt about, and lose no further time in laying before the

Society the account of my examination into the structure and

habits of the insect causing the Coffee Blight, together with

the fortunate discovery of a remedy for it I accidentally made

in December 1852. I shall also take the opportunity of

making a few remarks upon some allied species of insects,

which are equally interesting to the Ceylon Planter; such

as the White Bug, the Aphis of the Cotton plant, and some

varieties of Lac lately procured in Ceylon, all which are insects

belonging to the same class of Animals, and are perhaps, with-

out exception, the most interesting of the whole Animal King-

dom, whether viewed in a purely scientific light, as beings

which reveal the phenomena of life and the mysteries of

instinct under the most singular aspects, or as exhibiting the

fecundity, power, and resources of nature ; or considered in a

practical and utilitarian point of view, as beings capable of

performing so much good or evil.

KC. Appendix :— Proceedings of

I shall first endeavour to describe the Scale insect or Coc-

cus of the Coffee tree, or as it is more commonly called, the

Coffee Bug, a creature so small and insignificant when ex-

amined individually as scarcely to deserve notice, but yet

capable of originating most disastrous consequences, when

once it has established itself on an Estate; and in short, there

is no visitation to which the Coffee Planter is exposed, more

dreaded, on account of the diminished crops which ensue, the

injury it does to the Plantation, and the uncertainty of its

disappearance ; hence the study of the structure and habits

of this insect, which is capable of causing so much disap-

pointment and even ruin, cannot fail to be a matter of the

deepest importance to the Coffee Planter.

If we take up the leaf of a plant thickly covered with the

Bug, we find in the first place that it is of a velvet like black

colour, instead of the healthy polished green; and if we thrust

_ our hand into the Coffee bush, we find it covered with a black

slimy substance; hence the dark appearance of a Coffee Estate

when suffering from the Blight, and the little difficulty there

ig In recognising it from a distance.

If we examine this leaf minutely, we find that its black

colour is due to a vegetable mould, and that the leaf-stalk

andthe stemare thickly studded with little lumps or eminences

of a brown colour, varying in size from that of a grain of

wheat to an almost microscopic object, quite hard to the feel

and strongly adherent; when we detach one of the largest

we find, that in doing so a quantity of impalpable dust appears

to be let loose, and nothing but a hollow shell remains, but

whena quantity of this dust is examined under the microscope,

each particle of it is found to be a little ovum or egg, as seen

in fig. 1. a., or an exceedingly small and undeveloped living

insect, as seen at 6, or some of the ruptured ege shells from

out of which the latter escaped. Again, if we examine one

of the smaller spots on the leaf, we find that externally it

bears some resemblance to the large one originally detached,

though longer and flatter in proportion, and haying its outer

General Meeting, Feb. 1st, 1854, XCl.

Fig: 1.

surface divided into partitional scales; there is no appearance

of legs, or feet, or antenne, or anything to denote a living

insect, but after closely watching the object a little, it is seen

to put out feet and change its position, and appear an active

living animal. }

Some are found to differ from others in external form, as

seen atc. d.; the former appears to be the male and the

latter the female.

The female after leading a locomotive existence for a short

time, at length, when she finds a suitable place, becomes

fixed and adheres to the leaf or stem from which it afterwards

derives its sustenance; being already pregnant, the countless

eggs within its body enlarge by deriving their sustenance

from their parent, and becoming hatched inside its body,

consume all its internal structure, till at length, the parent

becomes nothing but a hollow shield or house in which its

progeny reside till sufficiently mature to go forth on their

own account, which they do by merely walking out from

under the edge of the scale; it now happens that a sudden

change of temperature, or the accidental rubbing of one leaf

or stem against another during a strong breeze, detaches a

matured scale from the leaf, at the same time carrying the

Cit: Appendix :—Proceedings of

dust-like ova toa distant plant, upon which they propagate

their species, and are again destined to spread themselves in a

similar manner. But by far the most constant mode of dis-

persing themselves is afforded by the close proximity of one

Coffee plant to another; and although they may not be so

closely planted as to touch each other, the presence of weeds

upon the Estate must afford them an equally easy transit.

And when it is known from the calculations of Reaumer,

a Naturalist who devoted a good deal of time to such pur-

suits, that one Aphis, a creature about one-sixth of the size

of the Bug, may be the progenitor of several millions of

descendants in an incredibly short space of time, the rapid

propagation of this pest may be satisfactorily accounted for.

It is during the period that the insect is in a locomotive

state and for a short time after, whilst the ova are being

matured, that the injury is done to the tree. Being provided

with a sucking apparatus called hostellum by naturalists, and

probably furnished with a secretion from its body, it pierces

the cutis of the leaf, irritates the surface of the plant, and

causes it to furnish a juice upon which it feeds; it is this irri-

tation, coupled with the closing of the breathing pores of the

leaf, whereby respiration is prevented, that causes so much

injury to the plant, which literally becomes suffocated and

exhausted, and all its functions impaired.

To give an idea of the ravages of this pest were almost

needless; its mysterious commencement and disappearance,

its attacking a particular part of an Estate and leaving the

rest untouched, the various efforts that have been made to

destroy it, the pertinacity with which it withstands them all,

and the gradual manner in which it spontaneously disappears

when left alone, are all familiar to every one conversant with

Coffee planting; but with the knowledge of the structure and

habits of the insect just detailed, it need no longer be a matter

of wonder and surprise how an Estate becomes so rapidly or

so mysteriously attacked, or why the remedies hitherto pro-

posed should have proved inefficient; though it may still

General Meeting, Feb. \st, 1854. XCiil.

afford extremely interesting matter for research to determine

what natural agencies promote its disappearance and_ protect

those states upon which it has not as yet made its appearance.

The subject of a remedy capable of counteracting the rava-

ges of this pest of the Coffee Planters has already received

much of their attention, but the plans hitherto proposed have

either been impracticable, too expensive, too tedious, or alto-

gether futile when applied. In 1848, the subject appeared of

so much importance to Ceylon, that a correspondence with

reference to it was entered into between the Home and Co-

lonial Government, when Professor Lindley the eminent

Botanist was consulted, and gave as his opinion that hot

water, ifapplied directly to the Bug, would prove efficacious.

All the correspondence on the subject will be found in the

Government Gazette of the period alluded to. Since then,

though the remedy proposed by this eminent individual was

quite futile and impracticable, the subject does not appear to

have had any further consideration given to it, with the ex-

ception of some casual suggestions made in the local prints,

though the Blight has continued to make the same ravages

as before. :

My attention was accidentally drawn to this subject in

‘ December 1852. While examining the leaf of a jungle plant

growing within a few miles of Colombo, I was struck by

observing a large Red Ant on its under side putting himself

into an extraordinary position, evidently annoyed at the in-

trusion, and endeavouring to shew fight, and on looking closer

I saw the cause of his excitement to be a scale insect which

he guarded most resolutely, at the same time making a sharp

clicking noise by stricking the leaf with its tail, and putting

himself into most grotesque attitudes. ‘The thought immedi-

ately struck me that he had some very interested motives for

thus guarding the scale insect, and in all probability he either

fed upon it, and only wanted the opportunity of tearing it from

off the leaf, which his large expanded jaws appeared well

capable of doing, or perhaps he fed upon the young as they

XC1V. Appendix :— Proceedings of

escaped from beneath the scale, or perhaps it supplied him

with some nectar-like secretion.

To solve this question, I examined a Red Ant’s nest, but

found no satisfactory result, as the Microscope revealed no

dejecta membra of scale insects. I next caught a few Ants

on their way up and down the branches of the tree, but found

no scale insects in their mouths; in this I was disappointed,

but tried another means of solving the problem. I brought

home a quantity of the Ants and their nest, and placed them

on an Oleander tree in a compound in the Fort, but after a

time I found that the Ants had disappeared, and the Bug was

as numerous as ever; the reason of this I inferred from the

fact that the Oleander afforded bad leaves for their protection,

nor were there any more suitable trees in the same compound.

Since the period of this experiment, I had been so much

occupied with other pursuits and much engaged in active

Military duties, that I was not able to give the subject any

further attention, till about May last year, when I wrote to

Captain Wilkinson of New Market Estate, stating my opinion

of the efficiency of the Red Ant in removing Bug, and recom-

mending him to make the experiment, at the same time I

offered to send him a quantity of the Ants; unfortunately

other matters were occupying his attention at the time, so

that he was not able to attend to my note ; however he men-

tioned the subject of it to several Coffee Planters in his

neighbourhood, and others who were staying at his house at

the time, who freely discussed the feasibility of the expe-

riment.

Since then my attention has not been again drawn to the

subject, though I had looked forward to further investigations

at a future time, till a few days ago, when I read a statement

from Myr. Young, which was published in the local Prints,

setting forth that he had discovered an effectual remedy for

the Bug, which he proposed keeping secret till he should

receive sufficient compensation from the Coffee Planters ;

but in a few days after, I read the disclosure of the secret

General Meeting, Feb. \st, 1854. XCVe

which he published, and was very much astonished to find that

the remedy he set forth was the application of the Red

Ant in the manner I had suggested to Captain Wilkinson

some months previous.*

* Captain Wilkinson kindly afforded his testimony to this assertion by

publishing the following letter in a local Journal at the time so much

discussion was about.

“To the Editors of the Colombo Observer.

New-market Estate, Pusilawa, January 29th, 1854.

Sir,—With reference to a letter concerning “the Bug” which lately

appeared in your paper, I should feel obliged by your giving publicity

te the fact, that as far back as May or June last, Doctor Lamprey wrote

to me offering tc send some nests of Red Ants to my Estate, at the same

time expressing his firm conviction that he had made a discovery by

which he could effectually destroy the Bug upon Coffee Estates.

J have, &c.,

N. A. Wiixtnson,

Late Capt. 15th Regt.”

Since this paper was read before the Society, a letter has appeared in

the Ceylon Times of the 3d February, 1854, from Mr. Simon Keir;

' stating that so far back as 1851, the Red Ant was used to remove the

Bug from a Coffee Estate, so that the priority of discovery contended for

clearly belongs to another party. |

“In January 1851, I observed the Bug disappearing very rapidly from

an Hstate under my charge on the Hunasgiria range, which had been

overrun with it. On examining the bushes we discovered at once that

the Bug was being devoured by a large Red Ant, which cleared the

whole away in a very short time. I naturally thought that a cure for

the Bug had at last been discovered, and took great pains in removing

some of their nests to another Estate in the same district, a considerable

portion of which was also covered with Bug; this Estate is about 1,000

feet higher than the one on which I first found the Red Ants, with a

climate of course much damper and colder,—which no doubt accounts

for my inability to see anything of the Ants but their nests the second

or third day after removal to the higher Estate. But most planters of

experience, I think, will admit, that if these Ants could be regularly

established on our Coffee Estates, it would be a much greater calamity

than the Bug itself.

VOL. Il. n

xOvI Appendix :—Proceedings of

An objection to the use ofthe Red Ant, however effica-

cious, has been raised on account of the well known aversion

the Coolies have to go near where they are to be found in

abundance; but this might be obviated by clothing the Coolies

in a light cotton dress and providing them with common leather

gloves which would effectually keep the ants from biting their

skin, for it must be borne in mind that they do not sting but

bite. Atall events Red Ants ought tobe more welcome visitors

to an Estate than the Coffee Bug ; for however numerous the

former may be, they do not interfere with fruition or any other

function of the plant. Again,they might be destroyed in a

wholesale manner by taking their nests and burning them.

Again there are other ways of obviating this objection which

appear to be commonly practised by the Singhalese whenever

Red Ants become troublesome; the first method is as follows.

They collect a quantity of large Black Ants, called ambilere

in Singhalese, they are about the size of the Red Ants

called dimia in Singhalese, but are shorter and thicker, they

are perfectly harmless and build also in trees, and are different

from the large Black Ants which are to be found running in

lines across a road or pathway, whose bite is even more

painful than that of the Red Ant, and having placed a few

of their nests in a tree frequented by the Red Anh, the latter

are most expeditiously dispersed.

Another mode is commonly practised by which the Red Ants

From the Plantation first alluded to, they disappeared as soon as they

had finished the Bug, or to all appearance had done so; but we had

hardly lost sight of the Ants, when I regret to say the Bug came back

again ; it seems, however, now to be leaving the Coffee districts ofits own

accord, and I hope it will not be long before we can reckon it ‘ amongst

the things that were.’

Your’s truly,

Srmon Kerr.”

“P.S. I ought to have mentioned that the elevation of the Estate

where I found the large “Red Ants” is about 2000 feet, and that of the

Estate to which I removed them 3000, or 3,500 feet above the sea.”

General Meeting, Feb. 1st, 1854. XCVIL

are effectually destroyed en masse. If the carcase of a small

animal, such as a bird, a rat, or if their skin or entrails be laid

on a tree or underneath it where the Red Ant abounds, it will

soon be covered by them in considerable quantity, as they are

very partial to animal food, when they can be destroyed by

pouring hot water over them. |

There are also several other insects which appear to be

equally destructive to the Bug, though perhaps none of them

could be so easily applied as the Red Ant, viz. there is a

beautiful variety of the Coccinella, called the gold fly, to be

met with in great abundance on the low bushes about Co-

lombo, also a larger variety of the same insect, of a beautiful

green colour spotted with black, which is equally destructive

to Aphides; and I have the opportunity of laying before you

a Lady-bird I caught flying in my verandah yesterday morn-

ing, which appears to be identical in size, form, and colour

with the same insect which is so highly respected by the Hop

growers of England for the benefit it confers upon the me

gardens.

There is another variety of Coccinella more active and more

industrious in his habits than the others, which I have recently

observed to be very abundant in the Hill country. Itisa

very small insect, about one-third of the size of the common

Lady bird; its colour is black with a white margin extending

around the outer edges of the elytra.

The application of any solution to destroy the Coffee Bug,

must, I fear, judging from the structure of the insect, be al-

together futile, unless they be of such a strongly corrosive

nature as to prove destructive to the tree as well. _

There is one remedy, however, of this class which appears

to be less objectionable than the others, and that is the appli-

cation of some of the essential oils. I mention it on the

authority of Davis, who states that the Chinese use an essen-

tial oil to destroy a Bug which affects the Tea plant.

The best preventative to the occurrence of the Bug,

judging from the analogy which the Animal Kingdom affords,

XCVIL. Appendia:—Proceedings of »

is to keep the plants in a healthy vigorous condition by proper

manuring, proper tilling of the soil, and proper pruning. It

should be borne in mind also, that it is not the Coffee plant

which alone gives sustenance to the Bug; it will be found on

mostly all plants of the jungle, and especially those of a suc-

culent nature, which should be carefully removed from the

vicinity of a Plantation.

The White Bug.

There is a Coccus possessing similar characteristics with the

last described, but having gigantic proportions in comparison

with it; it may be named the White Bug from its colour.

I found the first example I have seen upon a Bullock’s

heart tree (Annona reticulata) growing in a garden not far

from the Fort, and though there were but few of them to be

found on the tree, they have had the effect of retarding its

erowth ina remarkable manner, and causing it to produce

very abortive fruit. Its outer surface is rather square shaped,

and instead of being smooth, like the last, it is ridged and

groved in a perpendicular direction :—on detaching one from

the branch, the same dust-like substance was scattered about,

which on examination proved to be the ova of the insect. It

is a fortunate circumstance that this insect 1s not so univer-

sally found as the former, as it appears to be much more in-

jurious to vegetation than the Coffee Bug.

Cotton Aphis.

The next insect I have to describe is the Cotton Aphis,

which appears to be altogether a different variety from the

other members of the same family, and not altogether confined

to the Cotton plant. |

I found an example on a Cotton plant growing in a very

confined locality and in an extremely rich soil; the accom-

panying engraving will explain the difference of appearance

between this and the last two insects. They are easily re-

cognised on the plant by the white wool like substance with

which they are covered, and on removing this, they are to

General Meeting, Feb. 1st, 1854. xc

Bigs) 72:

be seen moving about and in all sizes, from an almost invisible

object toa size about the one-sixteenth part of an inch in

length, this wool-like substance marked 6. fig. 2. seems to be

a vegetable mould, and is one of those wonderful provisions

of nature serving asa means of protecting the insect from

the various enemies to which it is exposed.

On opening an impregnated female and examining the

inside of its body, ova in large quantities are to be seen as at

a. fig. 2. The form of the male c. jig. 2 appears to differ ~

considerably from the female d. and seems to be deficient

in Wings. |

T found a number of small Black Ants on the tree on which

J procured the Aphis, but soon ascertained that they fed upon

a nectar produced by the Aphides. I have no doubt that

if this insect proves a serious obstacle to the Cotton Planter,

the large Red Ant would again prove a useful extermin-

ator.

Lac,

In the proceedings of the last Evening Meeting of the

Society, a sample of Lac from the Badulla District, contri-

buted by Mr. Ondaatje, was noticed; from that sample I have

succeeded in obtaining its two valuable products by a simple

c Appendix :—Proceedings of

chemical process, namely dissolving the crude Lac in an

alkaline solution, separating the impurities by filtration, and

afterwards precipitating the Shellac with an acid, and then

evaporating the solution so as to obtain the dye. I have thus

succeeded in obtaining Shellac and Lac dye; the former, a

sample of which I now lay before the Society, though of a

dark colour is not inferior to the Shellac of commerce; and

the latter, though inferior to carmine, the product of the

Cochineal insect, might be made a useful purple dye.

I have also received a sample of Lac from the Chilaw

district, differing from the former in many particulars, and I

conceive it to bea “ new species.” It is almost transparent, in

single rounded and isolated cells, and yields a light coloured

Shellac, but no dye; which, TONE CR) may be owing to the

escape of the ova.

I have also procured a specimen differing be the two

former ones, which I procured at the Horticultural Exhibition

held the other day at Colombo; it is not so rounded in out-

ward form, though existing in separate cells, and it contains

a yellowish mass of a rich orange colour, which is not affected

by Sulphuric acid, and which might be prepared in a manner

similar to the purple dye. On examining this yellowish mass

under the microscope, it appeared to consist exclusively of ova,

and we now have the opportunity of seeing “ the first appear-

ance of the young Lacs in public.” You observe a number

of very minute creeping insects which appear all over the

stick, bearing a close resemblance to the Cochineal insect in

their outward form: thus shewing that it would not be a

difficult matter to propagate the species; the tree upon which

they are found grows freely in the Sina Korle, it is called

Kapitia by the Singhalese.

I have observed on the same branch on which I found this

Lac, a number of minute spots of a stellate character, having

six rays; this appears to be the commencement of the cell of

the future insect.

I also observed a quantity of indurated black substance

General Meeting, Feb. 1st, 1854. Ch.

similar to the Kaddepas sent to me for examination by Mr.

Ondaatje, which appears to be the result of the destruction

of the Lac insect by some Ichneumon fly.

There are several other varieties of this class of insects to

be found in Ceylon, some of which are as conspicuous for

their extreme beauty, as others are for their strange forms;

but I shall now conclude, hoping that on another occasion I

may have the opportunity of describing a few more of this

very interesting class of animals.

After this paper was read, much discussion ensued, Mr.

De Alwis stated that it was well known to the Singhalese

generally that the Red Ant was a good destroyer of the Bug,

and was constantly employed by them for that purpose; he

also stated in corroboration, that as far back as 1848, he had

a delicate plant in his garden which was much injured by

Caterpillars, and tried various modes of getting rid of them

by ashes, washing, &c., but all to no purpose; at length a

Singhalese man counselled him to put afew nests of Red

Ants in the tree, which he did, and they soon destroyed the

Caterpillars. a

The Chairman (Mr. Armitage) mentioned that while

giving to Dr. Lamprey all credit due to the priority of dis-

covery as to the mode of destruction of the Bug by the Red

Ant, he thought that Mr. Young was also entitled to the

merit of originality. It often happened that when an import-

ant discovery was made, other minds were on the same track,

and were thus entitled to high credit, though the chief credit

devolved on the one who was first in the path.

Consequent on Mr. Young’s advertisement, he, Mr. A.

himself had been making some experiments with a view to

the destruction of the Bug, on an orange tree in his garden,

and was about to apply some Coal Tar to the stem of the tree,

when he was told by his Appoo that it was unnecessary, as

the Red Ants were already destroying the Bug; he was

accordingly watching the process when publicity was given

Cli. Appendix :—Proceedings of

to the plan of Dr. Lamprey and Mr. Young. Mr. Armitage

concluded by expressing a wish that Dr. Lamprey’s paper

would be published, as it might be the means of stimulating

further investigation into most important subjects.

Proposed by Mr. Dawson and seconded by Mr. Alwis, that

Mr. Justice Starke be made an Honorary Member of the

Society.

Resolution.—“ That asa mark of the high respect entertained

by the members of this Society towards the Hon’ble Mr.

Justice Starke, who has recently returned to England, he

be elected an Honorary Member of this Society ; that the

Journals of this Society be regularly sent to him gratis, and that

the Secretary be instructed to write to Mr. Starke expressing

the feeling of the Society, and forwarding to him a copy of

this resolution.” Carried unanimously.

Proposed by Mr. Dawson, and seconded by the Rev. Mr.

Kats. ,

“That during the absence of Dr. Lamprey in Kandy, Mr.

Alwis be requested to act as Assistant Secretary.”

J. LAMPREY, M. B.

Flony. Secretary.

COMMITTEE MEETING, HELD JUNE 3p, 1854.

Present.—J. B. Misso, Esq., in the chair; Messrs. R.

Dawson, W. Skeen, M. Coomarasamy, L. De Zoyza, and the

Assistant Secretary.

Mr. Dawson laid before the Meeting the accounts of the .

Society, and requested to be relieved of the trust reposed in

him as Treasurer, he being about to quit the Island.

Committee Meeting, June 3d, 1854. Cli,

Moved by Mr. De Zoyza, and seconded by the Assistant

Secretary.

«That the thanks of this Society be presented to Mr.

Dawson for his kind and valuable services as their Treasurer.”

Moved by Mr. Dawson, and seconded by Mr. Coomarasamy.

« That Mr. Skeen be requested to act as the Treasurer of

this Society.”

Mr. Skeen having intimated his willingness to undertake

the duties of Treasurer, the accounts, papers, &c., were

handed over to him by Mr. Dawson.

Read the following correspondence :

Colonial Secretary's Office,

Colombo, 13th February, 1854.

SIR,

I am directed by His Excellency the Governor to transmit to you

a copy of the Official Catalogue, the Jury Reports, the Reports of the

Commissioners, and a case containing the Prize Medals of the Exhibition

of 1851, the same having been presented to the Island- of Ceylon by Her

Majesty's Commissioners for the Exhibition of 1851.

His Excellency sends the work to the Asiatic Society as the most

public body connected with literature in the Colony.

ee I have &c.,

P. W. BRAYBROOKE.

Lhe Secretary of the

Ceylon Branch Royal Asiatic Society.

eee

Ceylon Branch Royal Asiatic Society,

Colombo, 14th February, 1854.

Sir, _

In acknowledging the receipt of your letter of the 18th instant,

communicating His Excellency the Governor’s decision to transmit to

the Ceylon Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society the Jury Reports, the

Prize Medals of the Exhibition of 1851, &c. I have the honor to request

you will direct that the same may be sent to me, and to state for the in-

formation of His Excellency the Governor that they will be open for

public inspection at the Society’s Rooms, from 11] a. m. till 3 P. M. on

VOL. i. 0

Civ. Appendix :— Proceedings of

week days.—I may perhaps also state here that it would be desirable that

a public notification to the effect that the above Reports &c., are open for

public inspection should be published in the Government Gazette.

I have, &c.

JAMES ALWIS,

Asst. Secy.

The How bie

The Coloniat Secretary.

eesolved.—That the Secretary be authorized to have covers

made for the Books forwarded by Government; and that

they be kept at the Society’s Rooms for public inspection

from 11 A. M. to 3 P. M. on week days.

Resolved.—That the proceedings of this Meeting be pub-

lished for genéral information.

The Secretary laid on the ue the following books received

since the last meeting.

5 Nos. of the Annals and Magazine of Natural Flay!

2 Nos. of the Journal of the Indian Archipelago.

Copy of the Report of the Government Central Museum.

JAMES ALWIS,

Asst. Secy.

MEETING HELD AUGUST 17TH, 1854.

Present.—Messrs. C. P. Layard, J. B. Misso, W. Skeen,

L. De Zoyza, and the Secretary.

The Secretary laid before the Meeting, as the principal -

object for which it had been convened, a letter from Govern-

ment dated the 7th August, 1854; enclosing copy ofa Des-

patch received from the Secretary of State with reference to

the Paris Universal Exhibition of 1855. Also, a portion of

the third part of the Society’s Journal for 1853-4 in course of

Meeting, August 17th, 1854. cy.

publication; and the following works received since the last

General Meeting, viz:—

Journal of the Bengal Asiatic Society, No. ccxix.

2 Nos. of the Journal of the Indian Archipelago.

2 Nos. of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

The Secretary also laid on the table for the use of the

members, a number of copies of the Despatch of the Secretary

of State with reference to the Exhibition of 1855.

Colonial Secretary's Office,

Colombo, 7th August, 1854.

SIR,

I am directed to transmit to you the enclosed copy of a Despatch

received from the Secretary of State, on the subject of the Universal

Exhibition of Agricultural and Manufacturing Products to be held at

Paris on the Ist of May 1855, and to request that you will be good enough

to take measures for the formation of a Committee for furthering the

objects therein contemplated, reporting to me, for the information of His

Excellency the Governor, the names of the Gentlemen who may be

selected as Members of the Committee, and any other steps which may

be taken by you in the matter.

I have, &c.,

P. W. BRAYBROOKE.

The Secretary of the

Asiatic Society.

Ceylon Branch Royal Asiatic Society,

Colombo, 23rd September, 1854.

Sr,

With reference to your letter of the 7th August last, requesting

that measures might be taken for the formation of a Committee for fur-

thering the objects of the Universal Exhibition to be held at Paris on the

Ist of May 1855, I have the honor to state, that in consequence of the

removal by death and other causes, of several members of this Society,

it has not been practicable to form a Committee such as you desire; but

I am directed to state that this Society will have much pleasure in afford-

ing all the assistance in its power towards the carrying out of the object

contemplated in the Despatch of the Secretary of State, of which you have

forwarded to me a copy. i

I have &c.,

JAMES ALWIS,

Asst. Secy.

The Hon ble

The Colonial Secretary.

evi. Temple of Chittreweylader Cowille.

Plan of the Temple of Chittreweylader Cowille, in the District

of Mulletivoe or the Wanny. Communicated by C. 8.

VANDERSTRAATEN, Esq.

1. Sandana Mandapam; the front room of the Temple

where the band and principal men assemble in times of

festival.

2. Mahamandapam; here the Brahmins and ordinary

priests remain during the ceremony.

3. Artha Mandapam; the place for performing oblations

before the Idol in room No. 4, by the High Priest and his

attendants.

4. Ketpakraham: the room where the Idol Chittrewey-

lader is placed: being considered most holy it is accessible

only to the High Priest.

5. Yagasaale; the place for burnt offerings.

6. Mandapam ; the hall where the Idol is placed, previous

to its being carried on in procession.

7. Kabeda; the store room.

8. Madapally; the kitchen.

9. Temple of Tanday Soorer. This deity is sentinel to

Chittreweylader.

10. Temple of Pulliar, the elder brother of Chittreweylader.

VRAARDDADADRRAAARALRLA ARAL L IOI ae

jemaeeenes!

SS LL Atom

; So es

RULES AND REGULATIONS.

[Mem.—The Asiatic Society of Ceylon was instituted 7th February

1845; and by the unanimous vote of a Special General Meeting of

the Royal Asiatic Society, held on the 7th February 1846, it was

declared a Branch of that Society, under the designation of the

Ceylon Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society. ]

1. The design of the Society is to institute and promote enquiries into

the History, Religion, Literature, Arts and Social Condition of the present

and former inhabitants of this Island, with its Geology and Mineralogy,

its Climate and Meteorology, its Botany and Zoology.

2. The Society shall consist of resident or ordinary, honorary and

corresponding Members; all elected by ballot at some General Meeting

of the Society. ;

3. Members residing in any part of Ceylon are considered resident.

4. Persons who contribute to the objects of the Society in an eminent

and distinguished manner, are eligible as honorary Members.

5. Persons residing at a distance from Colombo may, upon special

grounds, and with the recommendation of the Committee, be elected

corresponding members.

6. Honorary and corresponding members shall not be subject to any

fee on entrance, or any annual contribution, and are to be admitted to

the meetings of the Society and to the privilege of the Library, but are

not to vote at meetings, or be elected to any of its offices, or take any

part in its private business.

7. Every ordinary Member of the Society shall pay on admission a

fee of half a guinea, and an annual subscription of one guinea.

8. The Office-bearers of the Society shall be, a President, Vice-Presi-

dent, Treasurer and Secretary, with a Librarian, Curator of the Museum,

and Conservator of the Meteorological and other scientific instruments of

the Society :—all appointed from time to time by open vote at some

Generali Meeting of the Society; and their functions shall be as follows:—

{1.] The President, and in his absence the Vice-President, shall take

the Chair at all meetings of the Society and of the Committee,

maintain order, collect the votes, and cause the laws of the Society

to be observed and enforced.

VOL. Il. p

Vill. Rules and Regulations.

[2.] The Treasurer shall receive, collect, and pay out all monies on

behalf of the Society, keep an account thereof with the vouchers,

and submit a statement of the pecuniary affairs of the Society to

the Anniversary Meeting, and at other times as may be required.

[3.] The Secretary shall arrange, give notice of, and attend, all

meetings of the Society and of the Committee, and record their

proceedings; he shall also edit the Journal, and exercise a general

superintendence under the authority of the Committee.

[4.] The Librarian, Curator of the Museum, and Conservator of the

scientific instruments belonging to the Society, will take charge

of the books and other articles committed to them respectively,

keep a correct list thereof, and generally conform in their manage-

ment to the Rules of the Society in that behalf, or in the absence

of such, to the directions of the Committee; having respect at all

times to the safety and proper condition of the articles, and to the

interests of the Society in their increase and improvement: The

Curator of the Museum, in particular, taking care to. superintend

the reception of all articles in that Department, transmitted to the

Society, and have the same speedily submitted to examination and

reported on, and suitably arranged.

9. The affairs of the Society shall be managed by a Committee of

five Members in addition to Office-bearers, elected in like manner; but

subject always to the Rules and Regulations passed at General Meetings ;

three to be a quorum.

10. Any person desirous of becoming a Member of the Society, must

be proposed and seconded by Members personally, or by letter under

the hand of such Members, at some General Meeting of the Society, and

be elected by ballot at the next General Meeting; none to be considered

as elected, unless he has in his favour two-thirds of the votes given.

11. A General Meeting of the Society shall be held Quarterly, namely

on the 7th day of February or first lawful day thereafter, and in the first

week of the months of May, August and November, and at such other

times as may be determined by the Committee: due notice of the Meeting,

and of any intended motion which does not come through the Committee,

except the nomination of new members, being always first given by the

Secretary.

12. All papers and other communications to the Society shall be read

and submitted at a General Meeting by some Member of the Society,

except in the case of communications from individuals not Members; when,

if the meeting think fit, the same may be read by the author.

Rules and Regulations. C1X.

13. All Papers and other communications to the Society read or

submitted at any General Meeting, shall be open to free discussion; and

no paper read shall be printed in the Transactions of the Society ( unless

by a special vote it be otherwise determined), until the meeting next after

that on which it was read, when it shall be decided on the report of a

Committee or by distinct vote, whether it shall be printed in the Journal

of the Society, or be kept among its records, or returned to the author:

the vote to be by ballot.

14. ‘The course of business at General Meetings shall be as follows :—

(1.) The Minutes of the last Meeting shall be read by the Secretary,

and signed by the Chairman.

(2.) Reports of Committees shall be read, and communications made

of all articles received, and donations to the Society.

(8.) Any specific or particular business submitted by the Committee

or appointed or open for consideration, shall be proceeded with.

(4.) Candidates or new Members shall then be proposed, balloted

for, or admitted as the case may be.

(5.) Papers and Communications for the Society shall then be read.

15. Special Committees may be formed for the prosecution of any

specific object or matter of research, but these must be named at a Gene-

ral Meeting; and they will act as much as may be in co-operation with

the Secretary of the Society, who will also be a constituent Member of

all such Committees.

16. Every Member of the Society has the privilege of introducing

either personally or by a card, one or two visitors to the General Meetings.

17. Evening Meetings shall be held once a month, or at other times

as may be arranged, for discussion on papers read, or to be read at Ge-

neral Meetings, (such papers however not necessarily being before the

Meeting,) the mutual improvement of the Menbers, and the promotion of

the objects and advancement of the interests of the Society.

CX. Rules and Regulations.

RULES OF THE LIBRARY.

1. All books borrowed from the Library shall be duly entered in the

Receipt Book, with the date of giving out, and the date of the return.

2. No book to be written on, or injured in any respect whatsoever,

and every book borrowed shall be returned in proper condition, as re-

ceived.

3. The period for which books borrowed may be kept shall be as

follows :—

[1.] Periodicals, and numbers or volumes of a series, while they re-

main unbound for 14 days only, and no more.

[2.] Other books for 3 weeks, unless in the case of persons resident

out of the district of Colombo: in which case they may be re-

tained for 6 weeks, and no more. But

[3.] All books borrowed, of whatsoever description the same may be,

shall be returned to the Library one week at least before the 7th

February in every year,—that pamphlets and serials may be bound

up, and the Catalogues corrected; and that a proper Report on the

state of the Library may be prepared for the Anniversary Meeting.

4. Dictionaries, and works of reference, or of especial rarity or value,

do not go out: they remain in the Library for use or inspection; and

Periodicals lie on the table for one Week.

5. All works in the Library, or on the table of the Society, may be

seenand consulted by Members, and also by others properly recommended,

with the leave of the Librarian or of his assistant under his direction.

THE MUSEUM.

No article under the charge of the Curator of the Museum, or of the

Conservator of the scientific instruments belonging to the Society, shall

be moved or touched but by the Curator and Conservator respectively, or

their assistants under their express direction.

CATALOGUE OF THE BOOKS.

Asiatic Researches, Vols. 13 to 20, both inclusive. 8 Vols. 4to. with Index.

From the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Auber’s British Power in India, 2 Vols. 8vo.

Agriculture, Journal and Transactions.

Annals of India, By Dr. Buist.

Anurajapoora; some additional remarks on the ancient city of, By Capt.

Chapman. Donation from the author.

Arabic and Persian Poetry, specimens of, 1 Vol. 8vo.

Atmospheric Railway, pamphlet by James Pim, 1842.

Astronomy, Bentley’s Historical views of the Hindoo, 1 Vol.

Archipelago, Indian and Eastern-Asia Journal. ;

Africa, Park’s Travels in, 1 Vol. 8vo.

Artesian Wells, pamphlet on, By Dr. Kelaart. From the author.

Alwis’s Sidat’ Sangarawa, or Singhalese Grammar, with Introduction,

Notes and Appendices.

Asiatic (Royal) Society, Journal.

Asiatic (Royal) Society, Rules, &c.

America. See also Smithsonian Institution.

American Institution for the advancement of Science. Proceedings of

Fourth Meeting, August, 1850.

Asiatic (Royal) Society, ‘Cransactions.

Asiatic (Royal) Society. The Primary Discourse, by H. T. Colebrooke,

Esq., and Index to the three Vols. of Transactions and eight Vols.

of the Journal, bound in 1 Vol.

Bible, The Holy, in Singhalese.

British Empire, The, By MacCulloch, 2 Vols.

Birds. By W. Swainson, 2 Vols.

British Moths and Butterflies, 2 Vols.

Botany. By Moon, 1 Vol.

Bengal Asiatic Society, Journal.

Bengal Criminai Statistics. 1 Vol. 4to.

* Note. See previous uotice of Anurajapoora, Transactions of the Royal Asiatic Society,

Vol. 3, p. 463.

Vou. If. g

exail Catalogue of Books.

Bombay Branch of Royal Asiatic Society, Journal.

Bombay Geographical peeieyy, Transactions.

Bennett's Ceylon.

Buist’s Dr. Annals of India.

Batavian Society of Arts and Sciences, 12 Vols. of the Transactions in

Dutch, presented by the Society, with a translated Index of Contents,

by the Rev. J. D. Palm.

Boetticher, Paulus, Rudimenta Mythologie Semitice Supplementa Lexici

Aramaici.

Blue Books.

Bibliotheca Indica. By Dr. E. Roer. From the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Callaway’s Singhalese Poems.

Cashmir, History of.

Cabinet Cyclopzedia.

Criminal Statistics of Bengal.

Ceylon Magazine, 1 Vol.

Ceylon Gazetteer, By 8S. C. Chitty, 1 Vol. 8vo.

Christa Sanghita, The first five Chapters of, translated into Singhalese:

1 Vol. 8vo. From the Rev. J. F. Haslam.

Chinese Language, Dissertation on its characters and sounds, 1 Vol. 4to.

Ceylon, History of. By W. Knighton, Esq., 1 Vol. 8vo. From the author.

Calcutta Review, from commencement.

Ceylon, Account of, Percival’s, 1 Vol. 4to.

Ceylon Calendars, 11 Vols.

Ceylon, view of, Bertoiacci, 1 Vol. 8vo.

Ceylon, Description of, Cordiner’s, 2 Vols. 4to.

Ceylon, Account of, By Davy, 1 Vol. 4to.

Ceylon, Eleven years in, By Major Forbes, 2 Vols.

Colebrooke’s Essays, 2 Vols.

Ceylon Almanacs from 1818, 20 Vols.

Ceylon, Turnour’s Epitome of the History of, translated into Tamul. By

S. C. Chitty.

Ceylon, Ribeyro’s History of, translated by George Lee, Esq., 1 Vol..

Chinese Novels, By Davis, 1 Vol.

Ceylon, Campbell’s Field Sports of, 2 Vols. 8vo.

Ceylon, Reports on the Financial Condition of.

Ceylon Blue Books.

Ceylon, Bennett's.

Coin, Russian, pamphlet on, By Hawkins.

Chodzko, Specimens of the popular Poetry of Persia.

Ceylon Asiatic Society, Journal.

_ Cape of Good Hope, Magnetical and Meteor mee) Observations made

there. Presented by His Excellency Sir Geo. W. Anderson.

Cinnamon Trade of Ceylon, pamphlet by J. Capper, Esq. From the author.

Catalogue of Oriental Manuscripts at Hartwell house.

Catalogue of Books. CX.

Dictionary, Richardson’s Persian and Arabic, 1 Vol. 8vo.

Dictionary, Malabar and English, By Fabricius and others, 2 copies.

Dutch, vie des Gouverneurs des Establis. Hollandois aux Indes, 1 Vol. 4to.

Dictionary, Rottler’s Tamul and English, 1 Vol.

Diamonds, A Treatise on, 1 Vol.

Dakota Language, Dictionary of. See Smithsonian contributions, Vol. 4.

Essay on the Human Mind.

Electrical Magazine.

Eastern Traveller's Interpreter.

Eastern Nations, Dissertation on their language, literature, and manners,

By Richardson, 1 Vol.

¥.

Friend, The (of Ceylon), 5 Vols. 12mo.

Flora of Ceylon, By Dr. Gardner.

Flora Calpensis, By Dr. Kelaart.

Fa Hian, Pilgrimage of, 1 Vol. From the editor and ey Mr. Laidly.

Fishes, Frogs, and Reptiles, By Swainson.

Goolistan, or Rose garden of Sadi, 1 Vol. 8vo.

Greenwich Magnetical and Meteorological observations.

Geological Map of England.

Geological Society of London, Journal of.

Grammar, Persian and Arabic, From J. EH. Middleton, Esq.

Geographical Society of Bombay, Transactions.

Geographical Society of London, Journal.

Gullimore’s Oriental Cylinders, No. 2.

- Hi.

Hadley’s Grammar of the Moors.

History of Trade in the East and West Indies.

_ Hand Book for India and Egypt, 1 Vol.

History of the Naga Tribes.

Hindostanee Grammar, By G. Hadley, 1 Vol. 8vo.

Hindostan, Pennant’s, 2 Vols. in 1, 4to.

Hindustani Grammar, Shakespear’s, 1 Vol. 4to.

Hindostan, Maurice’s Ancient History of, 2 Vols.

Hindoo Literature, Kindersley’s, 1 Vol.

Hoffmeister’s Travels in Ceylon and India, 1 Vol.

CIV. Catalogue of Books.

Heber’s (Bishop) Indian Journal, 2 Vols.

Hobart Town, Meteorological Observations made there. Presented by

Mis Excellency Sir Geo. W. Anderson.

Harvard’s Missions in Ceylon and India.

India, Penal Code of, 1 Vol. folio.

Indies, History of Trade in East and West, 4 Vols.

Indes Vie des Gouverneurs des Establis. Hollandois aux. From Geo.

Lee, Esq.

Journal of Asiatic Society of Ceylon.

Journal of the Ceylon Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society.

Jamblichi, De vita Pythagorz, 1 Vol. 4to.

Japan, History of, By Kempfer, 2 Vols. folio.

Kindersley’s Hindoo Literature, 1 Vol.

Knighton’s History of Ceylon, 1 Vol. 8vo.

Kelly’s Oriental Metrology, or Weights and Measures of India, 1 Vol. 8vo.

Lanka Nidhana, 4 Vols. 12mo.

Lassen’s Bactrian Coins.

Logic, the utility of the Aristotelean, By W. Knighton, Esq., 1 Vol.

From the author.

Map, Geological of England.

Milburn’s Oriental Commerce, | Vol. 8vo.

Magnetical and Meteorological Observations at Greenwich, Cape of Good

Hope, Mobarton, Toronto.

Magazine, Electrical.

Mill’s British India, By Wilson, 8 Vols.

Madras and Bombay, Dissertation and Enquiries connected with, pamphlet.

Medical and Physical Science in India, Journal.

Meteorological Society, Transactions of.

Mahawanso, The, By Turnour.

Metrology, Oriental, Kelly’s, 1 Vol.

Moon’s Catalogue of Plants growing in Ceylon.

Malcolm’s (Sir John) History of Persia, 2 Vols. folio.

Moths and Butterflies, British, 2 Vols.

Missions to Ceylon and India, Narrative of.

Catalogue of Books. CX.

Mind, Human, Essay on, By the Rev. G. R. Muttukistna.

MacCulloch’s British Empire, 2 Vols.

Memoir of Dr. Quint Ondaatjie, (formerly of Ceylon) Councillor of the

Supreme Court of Justice of Netherlands India.

Malabar and English Dictionary, Vepery, 1786.

Naturalist’s Library.

Novels, Chinese, By Davis, 1 Vol. 8vo.

Naga Tribes, History of the, 1 Vol.

Numismatic Chronicle.

Neptune, Report on the discovery of the Planet, to the Smithsonian

Institution.

Numismatic Society, proceedings for 1836, 1837, 1838-39.

Natural History, Annals and Magazine of.

Natural History, Directions for preparing specimens of, pamphlet 1852.

Observations during Magnetic Disturbances.

Orientalist’s Guide.

Oriental Metrology, Kelly’s, 1 Vol.

Observatory at Toronto, Observations there.

Observatory at the Cape of Good Hope, Observations there.

Observatory at Hobartown, Observations made there.

Ondaatjie, (Dr. Quint) Memoir of.

Pp.

Pali Grammar, Clough’s, 1 Vol. 8vo.

Persian Language Vocabulary, 1 Vol. 8vo.

Pennant’s Hindostan, 2 Vols. bound in one, 4to.

Parbury’s Hand Book for India and Egypt.

Persian Poems, 1 Vol.

Park’s Travels in Africa, 1 Vol.

Persia, Sir John Malcolm’s History of, 2 Vols.

Pearl Fishery of Ceylon, By Captain Steuart, 1 Vol.

Pantheism, Dr. Budding’s Treatise on, (Dutch) 1 Vol.

Persia, Chodzko’s Specimens of the popular Poetry of, 1 Vol.

Report on Egypt, By J. Brownrigg, 1 Vol. folio.

Raja Tarangini, The, or Annals of Cashmere, 1 Vol.

Royle’s Productive Resources of India.

Russian Coin, pamphlet on.

CXVi. Catalogue of Books.

Ruell’s (Rev. J.) Singhalese Grammar, written in Dutch and published

in Holland in 1699, with the Singhalese characters in wood-cuts- |

From the Rev. S. D. J. Ondaaityie.

Rig Veda Sanhita, 1 Vol. 4to.

Ribeyro’s History of Ceylon, translated by Geo. Lee, Esq., 1 Vol.

Richardson’s Vocabulary of the Persian and Arabic, By Hopkins.

Richardson’s Dissertation on Eastern Languages.

Seeravankinde Puranam, (in Tamil) 1 Vol. From 8. C. Chitty.

Smithsonian Institution Contributions to Knowledge.

Simmond’s Colonial Magazine.

Singhalese Poems, 1 Vol.

Sankya Karika, 1 Vol.

Statistical Society of London, Journal of.

Smithsonian Institution, Annual Reports of the Board of Regents for

1849 and 1850.

Smithsonian Institution, Report on the Discovery of the Planet Neptune.

Smithsonian Institution, Directions for preparing specimens of Natural

History.

Skeen, Lecture on Typography.

Swainson’s Birds, 2 Vols.

Swainson’s Taxidermy and Biography, 1 Vol.

Swainson’s Fishes, Frogs, and Reptiles.

Smithsonian Institution, Notices of Public Libraries in America.

Sidat? Sangarawa, or Grammar of the Singhalese Language, with Intro-

duction, Notes, &c., By James De Alwis,1 Vol. 8vo. From the translator.

Abs

Tootee Namu, Persian Tales, translated into Hindoostanee.

Taxidermy, By Swainson, 1 Vol.

Tamil and English Dictionary, Rottler’s, 2 Vols. 4to.

Turnour’s Epitome of the History of Ceylon, translated into Tamil by

S. C. Chitty.

Tamul Flora, By 8. Chitty.

Thring’s Colonies of Great Britain, pamphlet.

Typography, Lecture on, By W. Skeen, Esq.

Vaccination, on the advantages of, By Dr. Kinnis.

Valentyn’s Voyages, 4 Vols. folio, from Dr. Gygaa.

Wilson’s (The Rev. Dr.) Doctrines of Jehovah, pamphlet.

Wallace’s Memoirs of India, 1 Vol.

CXVil.

ETHNOGRAPHICAL COLLECTIONS.

{a.) Models and Specimens illustrative of the Arts.

Seven Models of Native Boats, used in the trade and fisheries of the

Island. from J. Capper, E'sq., viz; |

A yatra dhoney, or sailing vessel.

A padé or flat-bottomed boat.

A fishing padé boat.

A fishing canoe.

Another canoe or balama.

A Maldive vessel.

A boat used by the Malabars.

An ulkatuwa panhinda, or iron style for writing on the ola leaf.

Various specimens of Cloth from different parts of the Island.

Specimens of Vegetable fibre for cloths and cordage.

Specimen of the Riti Gaha, the Halgas or pole tree, and of the Sack made

from the inner bark, as used by the natives.

Specimens of Dye Stuffs, and of the Madder plant, with specimens of

dyed Cloth.

Specimens of Oils, Gums, and Resins.

(b.) Models, Prints, and Drawings tilustrative of the scenery, places, buildings,

and local usages.

Various Views of Adam’s Peak, Ratnapoora, &c.

Plan of the Ruins of Pollanuwera.

Inscriptions.

There are several Inscriptions in the possession of the Society, taken

from Temples, stone slabs, &c. They are in course of arrangement.

CABINET OF COINS.

The Society had early in view the formation of a cabinet of coins,—

which are always interesting as specimens of art, and valuable as docu-

ments; and the collection is not undeserving of attention. It isin course

of arrangement.

GXVILL.

THE WOODS OF CEYLON.

A. case containing eight dozen specimens of the woods of Ceylon, was

_ presented to the Society by A. Mendis, Mohandiram, with a catalogue of

their names, specific gravity, uses, and durability; and various other

specimens of woods have been presented by John Capper, Esq., and others.

The whole of these have been referred to a special Committee to collect

them together, and make a Report on their number, description, character,

and economical uses, with suggestions in regard to their future custody

and inspection.

CX1X.

THE MUSEUM

\Contains a specimen of the Oona hapooloowa or loris.

Some specimens of Birds.

Specimens of Lizards, Serpents, and other Reptiles.

Some specimens of Fishes.

Specimens of Crustacea.

Specimens of Beetles; including the an¢u8 3099 or cocoanut beetle,

lescribed in Mr. Capper’s paper on the ravages of that insect. C. A. S. J.

There was also a case of Butterflies. From J. P. Green, Esq.

Specimens of the Pearl oyster. From James Steuart, Esq.

A box of Shells. From T. Morgan, E'sq., and various other specimens

pf Shells, not yet arranged. ;

| Various specimens of Corals and Sponges. From J. N. Mooyaart, Esq.,

The Minerals and Geological specimens collected by Dr. Gygax in the

‘Saffragam District, forming a large and valuable collection. Presented

rincipally by Government.

_ In this general collection, there are about 100 specimens of

Rock Crystal Rutil

Hyalithe Pyrochlor

“Amethyste Ilmenite

Quartz Titan ore

Zircon Arsenite of Nickel

Tourmaline Hematite

Disten Arsenite of Kobalt

Beryl Tin ore

Epidote Chromate of iron

Hornblende Chrom. ochre

Mica Molybdena

Garnet Iron pyrite

Spinel Tron glance

Corundum Magnetic iron ore

Chrysobery! Iron ochre

Topaz Bog iron ore

Apatita Anthracite ;—with about as

Feldspar many Geological or Rock spe-

Binnerite cimens from the same District.

Wolfran

A collection of specimens illustrative of the Geology of Newera Ellia.

‘From Dr. Kelaart.

| Other specimens of Rocks and Minerals from other parts of Ceylon;

‘including a specimen of Ceylonite, from Lieut. Henderson, C.R.R.

| Specimens of Iron-ore from the Matura District.

| VOL. II. r

Specimen of Iron found at Galle in digging a wi

Goonewardene. :

Some Iron pyrites. From C. Whitehouse, Esq.

Specimens of Fossilg. Dr. Kelaart says, “The Limestone in which

the Ceylon fossils are imbedded, is of a very compact and pure form. In|

one hand specimen we observed a fossil phalange about an inch in length, |

apparently of a large Saurian reptile. This unique specimen is now in|

the Museum of the Asiatic Society of Ceylon.” Dr. 1 eed | |

of Ceylon, p.x. ene

Besides specimens of Copper and Lead ores from New South Wales, |

of the Garnet from the Cape, and of Tin ore from Malacca, from Sir}

J. E. Tennent;—of Spinel and Corundum from Pegu, of Chalcedony |

from Aden, of Topaz from Brazil, and of Turquoise from Khorassan, all

from Dr. Gygax ;—of Stilbite from Poonah, from Dr. Buist,—&égas also }

a beautiful specimen of the Asbestos from the Pyrennees, fro 4 Sir |

J. Ei. Tennent.

6 FEB lee?